ascertainment of work uncertified m s kishore amp company commenced the work on a p 568858

(Ascertainment of work uncertified) M/s Kishore & Company commenced the work on a particular contract on 1st. April 1997. They close their books of accounts for the year on 31st December each year. The following information is available from their costing records on 31st December 1997:

Rs

Material sent to site

70,000

Wages paid

1,50,000

Foreman’s salary

20,000

A machine costing Rs 32,000 remained in use on site for 1/5th of the year. Its working life was estimated at 5 years and scrap value at Rs 2,000. A supervisor is paid Rs 5,000 per month and had devoted one half of his time on the contract.

All other expenses were Rs 25,000. The material on site was Rs 9,000. The contract price was Rs 5,00,000. On 31st December 1997, 2/3rd of the contract was completed; however, the architect gave certificate only for Rs 2,50,000 on which 75% was paid. Prepare the contract account.

the following particulars relate to a contract undertaken by ajit engineers 568859

The following particulars relate to a contract undertaken by Ajit Engineers:

Rs

Materials sent to site

85,349

Labour engaged on site

74,375

Plant installed at site

15,000

Direct expenditure

3,167

Establishment charges

4,126

Materials returned to stores

549

Work certified

1,95,000

Cost of work not certified

4,500

Materials in hand at the end of year

1,883

Wages accrued at the end of year

2,400

Direct expenses accrued at the end of year

240

Value of plant at the end of year

11,000

The contract price agreed

2,50,000

Cash received from contract

1,80,000

You are required to prepare the contract account showing profit, contractee’s account and show suitable entries in the balance sheet of the contractor.

deluxe limited undertook a contract for rs 5 00 000 on 1st july 1997 on 30th june 19 568860

Deluxe Limited undertook a contract for Rs 5,00,000 on 1st July 1997. On 30th June 1998 when the accounts were closed, the following details about the contract were gathered:

Rs

Rs

Materials purchased

1,00,000

Wages accrued 30 06 1998

5,000

Wages paid

45,000

Work certified

2,00,000

General expenses

10,000

Cash received

1,50,000

Plant purchased

50,000

Work uncertified

15,000

Materials on hand 30 06 1998

25,000

Depreciation of plant

5,000

The above contract contained an escalation clause, which read as follows:

“In the event of prices of materials and rates of wages increase by more than 5% the contract price would be increased accordingly by 25% of the raise in the cost of materials and wages beyond 5% in each case”.

It was found that since the date of signing the agreement the prices of materials and wages rates increased by 25%. The value of the work does not take into account the effect of the above clause.

Prepare the contract account working should form part of the answer.

from the following data relating to a contract extract from the books of a company a 568861

From the following data relating to a contract, extract from the books of a company as on 31 3 1994, prepare contract accounts also compute the profit and the value of preparing final accounts.

Rs

Materials issued for work

90,000

Wages paid to the worker at site

50,000

Plant issued to site

75,000

Salary of supervisory staff at site

5,500

Work certified for payment

1,76,000

Work not certified

9,000

Amount received on work certified

1,58,400

You are further informed that:

  1. The work on the contract commenced on 1 10 1993.
  2. The wages of the workers for a week and the salary of the supervisory staff for a month were due at the end of the period Rs 3,100.
  3. The company writes off depreciation at 10% p.a. on its plants; and
  4. The value of materials at site on 31 3 1994 was Rs 4,200.

m s kishore amp company commenced work on a particular contract on 1st april 1990 th 568862

M/s Kishore & Company commenced work on a particular contract on 1st April 1990. They close their books of accounts for the year on 31st December each year. The following information is available from their closing records on 31 12 1996:

Rs

Material sent to site

50,000

Foreman’s salary

12,000

Wages paid

1,00,000

A machine costing Rs 32,000 remained in use on site for 1/5th of the year. Its working life was estimated at 5 years and scrap value at Rs 2,000. A supervisor is paid Rs 2,000 per month and had devoted one half of his time on the contract.

All other expenses were Rs 15,000. The material on site was Rs 10,000. The contract price was Rs 4,50,000. On 31st December, 2/3rd of the contract was completed. However, the architect gave certificate only for Rs 2,20,000 on which 75% was paid.

Prepare the contract account in the company’s books.

m s arun and varun undertook a contract for rs 3 00 000 for constructing a college b 568863

M/s Arun and Varun undertook a contract for Rs 3,00,000 for constructing a college building. The following is the information concerning the contract during the year 1997:

Rs

Materials sent to site

85,349

Labour engaged on site

74,375

Plant installed at site at cost

15,000

Direct expenditure

3,167

Establishment charges

4,126

Materials returned to stores

549

Work certified

2,00,000

Value of plant as on 31st December 1997

11,000

Cost of work not yet certified

10,000

Materials at site 31st December 1997

1,883

Wages accrued 31st December 1997

2,400

Direct expenditure accrued 31st December 1997

240

Cash received from contractee

1,85,000

Prepare contract account, contractee’s account and show how the work in progress will appear in the balance sheet as on 31st December 1997.

a building contractor furnishes the following records about a contract commenced on 568866

A building contractor furnishes the following records about a contract commenced on 1 April 1985.

Expenses incurred on the contract up to 31st December 1985 were

Rs

Materials purchased

21,500

Wages paid

50,110

Foreman’s salary

6,310

Administrative expenses

12,610

Machinery purchased

15,000

A supervisor with a monthly salary of Rs 1,000 has spent about half of his time on this contract. Materials at site on 31 12 1985 were worth Rs 2,480. The machinery purchased was used for 73 days. The estimated life of the machine is 5 years and its scrap value is estimated at Rs 1,000.

The contract price is fixed at Rs 2,20,000. On 31st December 1985, two thirds of the contract was completed. Work certified was worth Rs 1,20,000 and Rs 90,000 have been paid on account. Prepare the contract account.

senthil construction company undertook a contract for constructing a building from 1 568879

Senthil Construction Company undertook a contract for constructing a building from 1st January 1998. The contract price was Rs 1,00,000. He incurred the following expenses.

Rs

Materials issued

6,000

Materials in hand, at the end

1,000

Wages

5,000

Direct expenses

20,000

Plant purchased

10,000

The contract was completed on 30th June 1998 and the contract price was duly received. Provide depreciation at 20% p.a. on plant and charge indirect expenses at 20% on wages. Prepare contract account in the books of the company.

the following is the summary of transactions as on 31st december 1991 relating to a 568880

The following is the summary of transactions as on 31st December 1991, relating to a special contract completed during the year.

Rs

Materials bought from the market

1,500

Materials issued from the stores

500

Wages

2,440

Direct expenses

294

Works on cost—25% of direct wages

Office on cost—10% of prime cost

Contract price—Rs 6,000You are required to prepare a contract account keeping in view that material returned amounted to Rs 240.

the following information relates to contract no 123 you are required to prepare the 568881

The following information relates to contract no.123. You are required to prepare the contract account and contractee’s account assuming that the amount due from the contract was fully received.

Rs

Direct material

20,250

Direct wages

15,500

Stores issued

10,500

Loose tools

2,400

Tractor expenses:

Running material

2,300

Wages of drivers

3,000

5,300

Other direct charges

2,650

The contract price was Rs 90,000 and the contract took 13 weeks in its completion. The value of loose tools and stores returned at the end of the period were Rs 200 and Rs 3,000, respectively. A plant was also used and returned at a value of Rs 16,000 after charging depreciation at 20%. The value of tractor was Rs 20,000 and depreciation was to be charged to the contract at 15% p.a. The administration and office expenses are to be provided at 10% on works cost.

a building contractor took a contract for the construction of a certain building on 568882

A building contractor took a contract for the construction of a certain building on 1st January 1994. The contract price was agreed at Rs 4,00,000. The contractor had made the following expenditure during the year. From the following further particulars, prepare a contract account for the year. Also show the amount of work in progress, which will be shown in the balance sheet of the contractor

Rs

Value of plant on 31st December 1994

30,000

Stock of materials at the place of work on 31st December 1994

5,000

Materials returned to stores

1,000

Work certified by the architect

75,000

Cash received

70,000

Cost of work not yet certified

4,000

a undertook several large contracts and his ledger contained therefore a separate ac 568883

A undertook several large contracts and his ledger contained therefore a separate account for each contract. On 31 12 1991, the account of contract number 22 showed the following amounts as expended thereon.

RS

Materials directly purchased

1,80,000

Materials issued from stores

50,000

Wages

2,44,000

Direct expenses

24,000

Plant purchased

1,60,000

Proportionate establishment charge

54,000

The contract was for Rs 15,00,000 and up to 31 12 1991 Rs 6,00,000 had been received in cash which represented 80% of work certified.

The materials at site unconsumed were valued at Rs 15,000. The contract plant was to be depreciated by Rs 16,000.Prepare the contract account showing that profits thereon have been earned to date.

a firm of builders carrying on large contracts kept in a contract ledger separate ac 568884

A firm of builders, carrying on large contracts, kept in a contract ledger separate accounts for each contract. On 30th June 1994, the following was shown as being the expenditure in connection with a contract:

Rs

Materials purchased

58,063

Material from stores

9,785

Plant which had been used on other contracts

12,523

Additional plant purchased

3,610

Wages

73,634

Direct expenses

2,036

Proportion of establishment charge

8,720

The contract which had commenced on 1st January 1994 was for Rs 3,00,000 and the amount certified by the architect, after a deduction of 20% retention money, was Rs 1,20,800, the work being certified up to 30th June 1994.

The materials on the site at the date were valued at Rs 9,858. A contract plant ledger was also kept in which depreciation was dealt with monthly, the amount debited in respect of the plant on the contract up to 30th June 1965 was Rs 1,130.

You are required to prepare an account showing the profit on the contract up to 30th June 1994.

m s pari amp company obtained a contract for building a factory for rs 10 00 000 568885

M/s Pari & Company obtained a contract for building a factory for Rs 10,00,000. Building operations started on 1st April 1984 and at the end of March 1985, they received from the contractee a sum of Rs 3,90,000 being 75% of the amount due on surveyor’s certificate. The following additional information is given from the books of Pari & Company Limited.

Rs

Stores issued to contract

2,00,000

Stores on hand on 31 3 1985

10,000

Wages paid

1,80,000

Plant purchased

2,00,000

Direct expenses

25,000

Overheads allocated to contract

12,000

Work finished but not yet certified

12,000

Plant to be depreciated at 10%. You are required to prepare an account showing profit and loss on contract as on 31 3 1985 and the amount of profit the company would be justified in taking to the credit of profit and loss account for the year.

ashok builders undertook several large contracts and their ledger therefore containe 568886

Ashok Builders undertook several large contracts and their ledger therefore, contained a separate account for each contract. On June 30th 1994, the account of contract number 75 showed the following amounts as expended thereon:

Rs

Materials directly purchased

90,000

Materials issued from stores

25,000

Plant purchased

80,000

Wages

1,22,000

Direct expenses

12,000

Proportionate establishment charges

27,000

3,56,000

The contract was for Rs 7,50,000 and up to 30th June 1994 Rs 2,90,000 had been received in cash which represented 80% of work certified by the architect. The materials on site unconsumed were valued at Rs 7,500. The depreciation on plant worked out to Rs 8,000.

Prepare the contract account showing what profit therein had been carried to date. Also state what amount should, in your opinion, be taken to profit and loss account of the period.

the contract ledger of a company showed the following expenditure on account of a co 568887

The contract ledger of a company showed the following expenditure on account of a contract on 31st December.

Rs

Materials

60,000

Plant

10,000

Wages

82,200

Establishment charges

4,300

1,56,500

The contract was commenced on 1st January and the contract price was Rs 3,00,000; cash received on account to date was Rs 1,20,000 representing 80% of the work certified the remaining 20% being retained until completion. The value of materials on hand was Rs 2,000 and the cost of work finished but not certified as at 31st December was Rs 3,000.

Prepare an account in respect of the contract, showing the price to date, assuming depreciation on plant at 10 per cent annum and state the proportion of profit the company would be justified in taking to the credit of profit and loss account.

a firm of large contractors kept separate accounts for each contract on 31 12 1992 t 568888

A firm of large contractors kept separate accounts for each contract. On 31.12.1992 the following were shown as being the expenditure in connection with contract number 101:

Rs

Materials issued from stores

48,925

Materials purchased

2,90,315

Wages

3,68,170

Direct expenses

10,130

Establishment charges

43,600

Plant which had been used on other contracts

62,615

Additional plant purchased

18,050

The contract which had commenced on 1 7 1992 was for Rs 15,00,000 and the amount certified by the architect, after deduction of 20% retention money was Rs 6,04,000, the work being certified till 31 12 1992. The materials on site on that date were valued at Rs 49,290. The depreciation on plant in respect of this contract till 31 12 1992 was Rs 5,650.

Prepare a contract account, showing the profit on the contract up to 31 12 1992.

a undertook several large contracts and his ledger therefore contained a separate ac 568889

A undertook several large contracts, and his ledger, therefore, contained a separate account for each contract on 30th June. The account of contract number 51 showed the following as expended thereon.

Rs

Materials directly purchased

90,000

Materials issued from stores

25,000

Plant purchased

80,000

Wages

1,22,000

Direct expenses

12,000

Portion of establishment charges

27,000

3,56,000

The contract was for Rs 7,50,000; and up to 30th June Rs 2,90,000 had been received in cash which represented the full amount certified less 20% retention money. The materials on site unconsumed were valued at Rs 7,500. The contracting plant was to be depreciated by Rs 8,000.

Prepare the contract account showing the profit that had been earned to date. Also state what amount should, in your opinion, be taken to the profit and loss account of the period.

m s anil amp company a firm of building contractors undertook a contract for constru 568890

M/s Anil & Company, a firm of building contractors undertook a contract for construction of a commercial complex on 1st January 1997. The following was the expenditure on the contract for Rs 9,00,000.

Rs

Materials issued to contract

76,500

Plant issued for contract

22,500

Wages

1,21,500

Other expenses

7,500

Cash received on contract to 31st December 1997 amounted to Rs 3,84,000 being 80% of work certified.

Of the plant and materials charged to the contract, plant which cost Rs 9,000 and materials costing Rs 7,500 were lost.

On 31st December 1997, plant costing Rs 6,000 was returned to stores. The cost of work done but uncertified was Rs 3,000 and materials costing Rs 6,900 were in hand. Charge 15% depreciation on plant. Reserve 1/3rd profits earned and prepare contract account from the above particulars.

from the following figures prepare a reconciliation statement 568836

From the following figures prepare a reconciliation statement:

Rs

Net loss as per costing records

1,72,400

Works overheads under recovered in costing

3,120

Administrative overheads recovered in excess

1,700

Depreciation charged in financial records

11,200

Depreciation recovered in costing

12,500

Interest received notincluded in costing

8,000

Obsolescence loss charged in financial records

5,700

Income tax provided in financial books

40,300

Bank interest credited in financial books

750

Stores adjustments (credit) in financial books

475

Value of opening stock in:

Cost accounts

52,600

Financial accounts

54,000

Value of closing stock in:

Cost accounts

52,000

Financial accounts

49,600

Interest charged in cost accounts but not in financial accounts

6,000

Preliminary expenses written off in financial accounts

800

Provision for doubtful debts in financial accounts

150

from the following details of small tools ltd compute the profit in financial accoun 568837

From the following details of Small Tools Ltd, compute the profit in financial accounts as well as in cost accounts and reconcile profit between cost and financial accounts showing clearly the reasons for the variation of the two profit figures:

Rs

Rs

Sales

20,000

Bad debts

100

Purchase of materials

3,000

Interest on overdraft

50

Closing stock of materials

500

Profit on sale of assets

1,000

Direct wages

1,000

Selling expenses

2,000

Indirect wages

500

Distribution expenses

1,000

Indirect expenses

2,000

In cost accounts:

Manufacturing overheads recovered at 300% on direct wages.

Selling overheads recovered Rs 1,500

Distribution overheads recovered Rs 700.

the following is the summarized version of trading and profit and loss account of co 568838

The following is the summarized version of trading and profit and loss account of Continental Enterprises Limited for the year ended 31 March 1998.

Rs

Rs

To materials

48,000

By sales

96,000

To wages

36,000

By closing stock of

finished goods

20,400

To works expenses

24,000

By work in progress:

To gross profit c/d

14,400

Material

3,000

Wages

1,800

Work expenses

1,200

6,000

1,22,400

1,22,400

To administration expenses

6,000

By gross profit b/d

14,400

To net profit

8,400

14,400

14,400

During the year, 6,000 units were manufactured and 4,800 of these were sold.

The costing records show that works overheads have been estimated at Rs 3 per unit produced and administration overheads at Rs 1.50 per unit produced. The costing books show a profit of Rs 11,040.

Prepare a statement a cost and profit and reconcile the profit as per cost accounts and financial books.

the cost sheet shows the cost of materials as rs 26 per unit and the labour cost as 568839

SV Ltd. has furnished you the following information from the financial books for the year ended 31 March 1998.

Profit and loss account for the year ended 31 March 1998

Opening stock

Rs

Sales

Rs

500 units at Rs 35 each

17,500

10,250 units

7,17,500

Materials consumed

2,60,00

Closing Stock

Wages

1,50,000

250 units at Rs 50 each

12,500

Gross profit c/d

3,02,500

7,30,000

7,30,000

Factory overheads

94,750

Gross profit b/d

3,02,500

Administration overheads

1,06,000

Interest

250

Selling expenses

55,000

Rent received

10,000

Bad debts

4,000

Preliminary expenses

5,000

Net profit

48,000

3,12,750

3,12,750

The cost sheet shows the cost of materials as Rs 26 per unit and the labour cost as Rs 15 per unit. The factory overheads are absorbed at 60% of labour cost and administration overheads at 20% of factory cost. Selling expenses are charged at Rs 6 per unit. The opening stock of finished goods is valued at Rs 45 per unit.

You are required to prepare:

  1. A statement showing profit as per cost accounts for the year ended 31 March 1998.
  2. Statement showing the reconciliation of profit disclosed in cost accounts with the profit shown in the financial accounts.

the contract ledger of a company showed the following expenditure on account of cont 568842

The contract ledger of a company showed the following expenditure on account of contract number 12345 on 31st March 1998.

Rs

Materials

1,88,000

Plant

24,000

Wages

2,06,000

Establishment charges

13,400

The contract commenced on 1st April 1997 and the contract price is Rs 8,00,000. The value of work certified by the architect is Rs 4,30,000 of which 80% has been received in cash to date. The value of material on hand is Rs 9,000 and the work certified is Rs 8,000.

Assuming depreciation on plant at 10% p.a., prepare the contract account showing the profit the firm would be justified in taking to the credit of profit and loss account of the year.

a contractor obtained a contract for rs 6 00 000 on 1st january 1988 the expenses in 568843

A contractor obtained a contract for Rs 6,00,000 on 1st January 1988. The expenses incurred during the year ended 31st December 1988 were as under.

Rs

Materials

1,80,000

Wages paid

1,60,000

Wages accrued

10,000

Other expenses

25,000

The plant, specially installed for the contract, worth Rs 45,000 was returned to the stores subject to a depreciation of 20%. Materials at site on 31 12 1988 were valued at Rs 24,000.

The contractor had received Rs 3,60,000 in cash up to 31 12 1988, representing 80% of the work certified. Work uncertified was estimated at Rs 4,000.

Prepare the contract account, showing the profit for the year. Also show how the value of work in progress would appear in the balance sheet as on 31st December 1988.

on 1st january a undertook a contract for rs 5 00 000 he incurred the following expe 568844

On 1st January, A undertook a contract for Rs 5,00,000. He incurred the following expenses during the year

Rs

Materials issued from stores

25,000

Material purchased for the contract

40,000

Plant installed at cost

20,000

Wages paid

50,000

Wages occurred due on 31st December

30,000

Direct expenses paid

5,000

Direct expenses accrued due on 31st December

1,500

Establishment

3,500

Of the plant and materials charged to the contract, the plant which cost Rs 1,500 and the materials costing Rs 1,000 were lost. Some of the materials costing Rs 1,500 were sold for Rs 2,000. On 31st December, the plant, which cost Rs 400, was returned to the stores, and a part of the plant, which cost Rs 150, was damaged, rendering itself useless.

The work certified was Rs 2,20,000 and 80% of the same was received in cash. The cost of work done, but uncertified was Rs 10,000. Charge 10% p.a. depreciation on plant and prepare the contract account for the year ended 31st December, by transferring to the profit and loss account the portion of the profit, if any, which you think is reasonable. Show also the particulars relating to the contract in the balance sheet of the contractor as on 31st December.

m s anand associates commenced the work on a particular contract on 1st april 1994 t 568845

M/s Anand Associates commenced the work on a particular contract on 1st April 1994. They close their books of accounts for the year on 31st December each year. The following information is available from their costing records on 31st December 1994.

Rs

Materials sent to site

40,000

Foreman’s salary

12,000

Wages paid

1,20,000

A machine costing Rs 40,000 remained in use on site for 1/5th of the year. Its working life was estimated at 5 years and scrap value at Rs 1,500. A supervisor is paid Rs 1,500 per month and he had devoted one half of his time on the contract.

All other expenses were Rs 8,000. The materials on site were Rs 1,500. The contract price was Rs 3,00,000. On 31st December 1994, 2/3rd of the contract was completed; however, the architect gave a certificate only for Rs 1,80,000 on which 80% was paid. Prepare the contract account.

a company of contractors began to trade on 1st january 1994 during 1994 the company 568846

The following balances were extracted from the books of a building contractor on 31st March 1976.

Rs

Materials issued to site

62,720

Wages paid

73,455

Wages outstanding as on 31 3 1976

720

Plant issued to site

6,000

Direct charges paid

2,515

Direct charges outstanding on 31 3 1976

210

Establishment charges

5,650

Stock of materials at site on 31 3 1976

1,200

Value of work certified on 31 3 1976

1,65,000

Cost of work not yet certified

3,500

Cash received on account of architect’s certificate

1,41,075

The work was commenced on 1st April 1975 and the contract price agreed at Rs 2,45,000. Prepare contract account for the year, providing for depreciation of plant at 25%. Calculate the profit or loss on the contract to date and make such provision in the contract account, as you consider desirable. Set out also the contractor’s balance sheet so far as it relates to the contract.

the following particulars relating to contract lsquo a rsquo are obtained at the yea 568847

The following particulars relating to contract ‘A’ are obtained at the year end. Date of commencement is April 1.

Rs

Contact price

6,00,000

Materials delivered direct to site

1,20,000

Materials issued from store

40,000

Materials returned to store

4,000

Materials at site on December 31

22,000

Direct labour

1,40,000

Direct expenses

60,000

Architect’s fees

2,000

Establishment charges

25,000

Plant installed at cost

80,000

Value of plant on December 31

65,000

Accrued wages on December 31

10,000

Accrued expenses on December 31

6,000

Cost of contract not yet certified

23,000

Value of contract certified

4,20,000

Cash received from contractee

3,78,000

Materials transferred to contract ‘B’

9,000

You are required to show:

  1. Contract account
  2. Contractee’s account
  3. Extracts from the balance sheet as on 31st December, clearly showing the calculation of work in progress.

cash received on account to 31st december 1997 amounted to rs 2 60 000 being 80 of w 568848

The following was the expenditure on a contract for Rs 6,00,000 commenced in January, 1997:

Rs

Material

1,20,000

Wages

1,64,400

Plant

20,000

Business charges

9,000

Cash received on account to 31st December 1997 amounted to Rs 2,60,000 being 80% of work certified; the value of materials in hand on 31 12 1997 was Rs 25,000. Prepare the contract account for 1997 showing the profit to be credited to the year’s profit and loss account. Plant is to be depreciated at 10%.

prepare the contract account for the year 1994 showing the amount of profit that may 568849

The following are the particulars relating to a contract, which was begun on 1st January 1994:

Rs

Rs

Contract price

5,00,000

Overheads

8,240

Machinery

30,000

Materials returned

16,000

Materials

1,70,600

Materials on hand 31 12 1994

3,700

Wages

1,48,750

Machinery on hand 31 12 1994

22,000

Direct expenses

6,330

Value of work certified

3,90,000

Outstanding wages

5,380

Cash received

3,51,000

Uncertified work

9,000

Prepare the contract account for the year 1994 showing the amount of profit that may be taken to the credit of the profit and loss account of the year. Also show the amount of the work in progress, as it appears in the balance sheet of the year.

a company undertook a contract for construction of a large building complex the cons 568850

A company undertook a contract for construction of a large building complex. The construction work commenced on 1st April 1997 and the following data are available for the year ended 31st March 1998.

Rs ‘000

Rs ‘000

Contract price

35,000

Plant hire charges

1,750

Work certified

20,000

Wages related costs

500

Progress payments received

15,000

Site office costs

678

Materials issued to site

7,650

Head office expenses apportioned

375

Planning and estimating costs

1,000

Direct expenses incurred

902

Direct wages paid

4,000

Work not certified

149

Materials returned from site

250

The contractors own a plant, which originally cost Rs 20,00,000, has been continuously in use in this contract throughout the year. The residual value of the plant after 5 years of life is expected to be Rs 5,00,000. Straight line method of depreciation is in use.

As on 31st March 1998, the direct wages due and payable amounted to Rs 3,00,000 and the materials at site were estimated at Rs 3,00,000.

Required:

  1. Prepare the contract account for the year ended 31st March 1998.
  2. Show the calculation of profit to be taken to the profit and loss account of the year.
  3. Show the relevant balance sheet entries.

the following is the summary of the entries in a contract ledger as on 31st december 568851

The following is the summary of the entries in a contract ledger as on 31st December 1994 in respect of contract no. 51:

Rs

Rs

Materials bought directly

35,000

Wages

18,000

Materials from stores

7,000

Direct expenses

7,000

Establishment charges

8,000

Scrap sold

1,820

Plant

34,200

Further information is as follows:

  1. The amount that accrued as on 31st December 1994 were wages: Rs 900 and direct expenses: Rs 1,200.
  2. The cost of the work uncertified included: materials: Rs 2,600, wages: Rs 1,000 and expenses: Rs 1,500.
  3. Rs 2,000 worth of plant was sold for Rs 3,000 and Rs 3,000 worth of materials were destroyed by the fire.
  4. Rs 5,000 worth of plant was sold for Rs 3,000 and materials costing Rs 5,000 were sold for Rs 6,000.
  5. Depreciation till 31st December 1994 on plant was Rs 10,000.
  6. Materials at site were valued at Rs 5,000.
  7. Cash received from the contractee was Rs 60,000 being 80% of the work certified.
  8. Contract price was Rs 1,00,000.

Show the contract account and work in progress account. Show the same in the balance sheet.

a firm of building contractors began to trade on 1st april 1997 the following was th 568852

A firm of building contractors began to trade on 1st April 1997. The following was the expenditure on the contract for Rs 3,00,000: Materials issued to contract: Rs 50,000; Plant used for contract: Rs 15,000; Wages incurred: Rs 75,000; Other expenses incurred: Rs 2,000.

Cash received on account to 31st March 1998 amounted to Rs 1,28,000 being 80% of the work certified. Of the plant and materials charged to the contract, plant which cost Rs 3,000 and materials which cost Rs 2,500 were lost. On 31st March 1998 plant which cost Rs 2,000 was returned to store, the cost of work done but uncertified was Rs 1,000 and materials costing Rs 2,300 were in hand on site. Charge 15% depreciation on plant, and take to the profit and loss account 2/3rd of the profit received. Prepare the contract account, contract’s account and balance sheet from the above particulars.

a firm of building contractors began to trade on 1st april 1996 the following was th 568853

A firm of building contractors began to trade on 1st April 1996. The following was the expenditure on the contract for Rs 3,00,000.

Rs

Materials issued to contract

51,000

Plant used for contract

15,000

Wages incurred

81,000

Other expenses incurred

5,000

Cash received on account to 31st March 1997 amounted to Rs 1,28,000 being 80% of the work certified. Of the plant and materials charged to the contract, plant which cost Rs 3,000 and materials which cost Rs 2,500 were lost. On 31st March 1997 plant which cost Rs 2,000 were returned to stores. The cost of work done but uncertified was Rs 1,000 and materials costing Rs 2,300 were in hand on site.

Charge 15% depreciation on plant, and take to the profit and loss account 2/3rd of the profit received. Prepare a contract account, contractee’s account and extracts from balance sheet from the above particulars.

Hint: As instructed, 2/3rd profit is taken to profit and loss account but it is restricted on cash received basis, i.e. 80%.

construction limited is engaged on two contracts a and b during the year the followi 568854

Construction Limited is engaged on two contracts A and B during the year. The following particulars are obtained at the year end (December 31):

Contract A

Contract B

April I

September I

Date of commencement

Rs

Rs

Contract price

6,00,000

5,00,000

Materials issued

1,60,000

60,000

Materials returned

4,000

2,000

Materials at site (December 31)

22,000

8,000

Direct labour

1,60,000

45,000

Direct expenses

70,000

40,000

Establishment expenses

25,000

7,000

Plant installed at site

80,000

70,000

Value of plant (December 31)

65,000

64,000

Cost of contract not yet certified

23,000

10,000

Value of contract certified

4,20,000

1,35,000

Cash received from contractures

3,78,000

1,25,000

Architect’s fees

2,000

1,000

During the period materials amounting to Rs 9,000 have been transferred from contract A to contract B. You are required to show: (a) contract accounts, (b) contractures’ accounts, and (c) extract from balance sheet as on December 31, clearly showing the calculation of work in progress.

two contracts that commenced on 1st january and 1st july 1994 respectively were unde 568855

Two contracts that commenced on 1st January and 1st July 1994, respectively, were undertaken by a contractor and his accounts on 31st December 1994 showed the following position

Contract I

Contract II

Rs

Rs

Contract price

4,00,000

2,70,000

Expenditure

Materials

72,000

58,000

Wages paid

1,10,000

1,12,400

General charges

4,000

2,800

Plant installed

20,000

16,000

Materials on hand

4,000

4,000

Wages accrued

4,000

4,000

Work certified

2,00,000

1,60,000

Work done but not certified (at cost)

6,000

8,000

Cash received in respect there of

1,50,000

1,20,000

The plants were installed on the date of commencement of each contract; depreciation thereon is to be taken at 10% p.a.

Prepare the contract’s account in the tabular form and ascertain the profit or loss to be taken to profit and loss account.

the following trial balance was extracted on 31st december 1997 from the books of sw 568856

The following trial balance was extracted on 31st December 1997 from the books of Swastik Company Limited contractors:

Rs

Rs

Share capital: shares of Rs 10 each

3,71,800

Profit and loss account on 1st January 1997

25,000

Provision for depreciation of machinery

63,000

Cash received on account: contract 7

12,80,000

Creditors

81,200

Land and buildings (cost)

74,000

Machinery (cost)

52,000

Bank

45,000

Contract 7:

Materials

6,00,000

Direct labour

8,30,000

Expenses

60,000

Machinery at site (cost)

1,60,000

______

18,21,000

18,21,000

Contract 7 was begun on 1st January 1997. The contract price is Rs 24,00,000 and the customer has so far paid Rs 12,80,000 being 80% of the work certified.

The cost of the work done since certification is estimated at Rs 25,000. On 31st December 1997, after the above trial balance was extracted, machinery costing Rs 32,000 was returned to stores, and materials when at site were valued at Rs 30,000.

Provision is to be made for direct labour due Rs 6,000 and for depreciation of all machinery at 12½% on cost.

You are required to prepare: (a) the contract account, (b) a statement of profit, if any, to be properly credited to profit and loss account for 1997, and (c) the balance sheet of Swastik Company Limited as on 31st December.

prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2012 using the in 568439

Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows (Indirect Method) Deep Waters Company was started several years ago by two diving instructors. The company’s comparative balance sheets and income statement are presented below, along with additional information.

2012

2011

Balance Sheet at December 31

Cash

$3,700

$4,000

Accounts receivable

900

800

Prepaid expenses

100

50

Equipment

400

0

$5,100

$4,850

Wages payable

$450

$1,100

Contributed capital

1,600

1,000

Retained earnings

3,050

2,750

$5,100

$4,850

Income Statement for 2012

Lessons revenue

$33,950

Wages expense

30,000

Other expenses

3,650

Net income

$300

Additional Data:

a. Prepaid expenses relate to rent paid in advance.

b. Other expenses were paid in cash.

c. Purchased equipment for $400 cash at the end of 2012 to be used starting in 2013.

d. An owner contributed capital by paying $600 cash in exchange for the company’s stock.

Required:

Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the indirect method.

what do you think was gibraltar management rsquo s plan for the use of the cash gene 568440

Reporting and Interpreting Cash Flows from Investing and Financing Activities with Discussion of Management Strategy Gibraltar Industries is a Buffalo, New York–based manufacturer of high value added steel products. In a recent year, it reported the following activities:

Acquisitions (investments in other companies)

($8,724)

Decrease in inventories

1,770

Depreciation and amortization

33,907

Long term debt reduction

185,567

Net cash provided by operating activities

107,874

Net income

24,068

Net proceeds from issuance of common stock

250

Net proceeds from sale of property and equipment

2,692

Payment of dividends

5,985

Proceeds from long term debt

53,439

Proceeds from sale of other equity investments

34,701

Purchases of property, plant, and equipment

21,595

Required:

1. Based on this information, present the cash flows from investing and financing activities sections of the cash flow statement.

2. Compute the capital acquisitions ratio. What does the ratio tell you about Gibraltar’s ability to finance purchases of property, plant, and equipment with cash provided by operating activities?

3. What do you think was Gibraltar management’s plan for the use of the cash generated by selling other equity investments?

what would be the effect of these transactions on the capital acquisitions ratio how 568441

Reporting Noncash Transactions on the Statement of Cash Flows; Interpreting the Effect on the Capital Acquisitions Ratio An analysis of Courtney Corporation’s operational asset accounts provided the following information:

a. Acquired a large machine that cost $36,000, paying for it by giving a $15,000, 12 percent interest bearing note due at the end of two years and 500 shares of its common stock, with a par value of $10 per share and a market value of $42 per share.

b. Acquired a small machine that cost $12,700. Full payment was made by transferring a tract of land that had a book value of $12,700.

Required:

1. Show how this information should be reported on the statement of cash flows.

2. What would be the effect of these transactions on the capital acquisitions ratio? How might these transactions distort one’s interpretation of the ratio?

what were the major reasons that huanca rsquo s was able to report a net loss but po 568443

Reporting and Interpreting Cash Flows from Operating Activities from an Analyst’s Perspective (Direct Method) Refer to the following summarized income statement and additional selected information for Huanca , Inc.:

Income Statement

Revenues

$146,500

Cost of sales

55,500

Gross margin

91,000

Salary expense

56,835

Depreciation and amortization

33,305

Other expense

7,781

Net loss before tax

6,921

Income tax expense

2,561

Net loss

($9,482)

Other information:

Decrease in receivables

$170

Decrease in inventories

643

Increase in prepaid expenses

664

Increase in accounts payable

2,282

Decrease in accrued liabilities

719

Increase in income taxes payable

1,861

Required:

1. Based on this information, compute cash flow from operating activities using the direct method. Assume that prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to other expense.

2. What were the major reasons that Huanca’s was able to report a net loss but positive cash flow from operations? Why are the reasons for the difference between cash flows from operations and net income important to financial analysts?

prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method for the year ended dec 568444

Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows (Indirect Method) – Hi Def Films , Inc., is developing its annual financial statements at December 31, 2012. The statements are complete except for the statement of cash flows. The completed comparative balance sheets and income statement are summarized as follows:

2012

2011

Balance sheet at December 31

Cash

$68,250

$63,500

Accounts receivable

15,250

22,250

Merchandise inventory

22,250

18,000

Property and equipment

209,250

150,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

59,000

45,750

$256,000

$208,000

Accounts payable

$9,000

$19,000

Wages payable

4,000

1,200

Note payable, long term

59,500

71,000

Contributed capital

98,500

65,900

Retained earnings

85,000

50,900

$256,000

$208,000

Income statement for 2012

Sales

$195,000

Cost of goods sold

92,000

Depreciation expense

13,250

Other expenses

43,000

Net income

$46,750

Additional Data:

a. Bought equipment for cash, $59,250.

b. Paid $11,500 on the long term note payable.

c. Issued new shares of stock for $32,600 cash.

d. Dividends of $12,650 were declared and paid.

e. Other expenses all relate to wages.

f. Accounts payable includes only inventory purchases made on credit.

Required:

1. Prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method for the year ended December 31, 2012.

2. Based on the cash flow statement, write a short paragraph explaining the major sources and uses of cash by Hi Def Films during 2012.

prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2013 using the in 568445

Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows (Indirect Method) BG Wholesalers is developing its annual financial statements at December 31, 2013. The statements are complete except for the statement of cash flows. The completed comparative balance sheets and income statement are summarized:

2013

2012

Balance sheet at December 31

Cash

$37,000

$29,000

Accounts receivable

32,000

28,000

Merchandise inventory

41,000

38,000

Property and equipment

132,000

111,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

41,000

36,000

$201,000

$170,000

Accounts payable

$36,000

$27,000

Accrued wage expense

1,200

1,400

Note payable, long term

38,000

44,000

Contributed capital

88,600

72,600

Retained earnings

37,200

25,000

$201,000

$170,000

Income statement for 2013

Sales

$120,000

Cost of goods sold

70,000

Other expenses

37,800

Net income

$12,200

Additional Data:

a. Bought equipment for cash, $21,000.

b. Paid $6,000 on the long term note payable.

c. Issued new shares of stock for $16,000 cash.

d. No dividends were declared or paid.

e. Other expenses included depreciation, $5,000; wages, $20,000; taxes, $6,000; other, $6,800.

f. Accounts payable includes only inventory purchases made on credit. Because there are no liability accounts relating to taxes or other expenses, assume that these expenses were fully paid in cash.

Required:

1. Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2013, using the indirect method.

2. Based on the cash flow statement, write a short paragraph explaining the major sources and uses of cash during 2013.

prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash fl 568447

Comparing Cash Flows from Operating Activities (Direct and Indirect Methods) Alpha Company’s accountants have just completed the income statement and balance sheet for the year and have provided the following information (dollars in thousands):

INCOME STATEMENT

Sales revenue

$20,800

Expenses

Cost of goods sold

$9,030

Depreciation expense

2,900

Salaries expense

4,070

Rent expense

2,800

Insurance expense

900

Utilities expense

720

Interest expense on bonds

600

Loss on sale of investments

650

21,670

Net loss

($870)

SELECTED BALANCE SHEET ACCOUNTS

2012

2013

Merchandise inventory

$65

$84

Accounts receivable

530

440

Accounts payable

212

245

Salaries payable

23

31

Rent payable

8

4

Prepaid rent

7

4

Prepaid insurance

7

17

Other Data:

The company issued $20,000, 8 percent bonds payable during the year.

Required:

1. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method.

2. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the indirect method.

prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2011 using the in 568448

Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows with Gain on Sale of Equipment ( Indirect Method) XS Supply Company is developing its annual financial statements at December 31, 2011. The statements are complete except for the statement of cash flows. The completed comparative balance sheets and income statement are summarized:

2011

2010

Balance sheet at December 31

Cash

$34,000

$29,000

Accounts receivable

35,000

28,000

Merchandise inventory

41,000

38,000

Property and equipment

121,000

100,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

30,000

25,000

$201,000

$170,000

Accounts payable

$36,000

$27,000

Wages payable

1,200

1,400

Note payable, long term

38,000

44,000

Contributed capital

88,600

72,600

Retained earnings

37,200

25,000

$201,000

$170,000

Income statement for 2011

Sales

$120,000

Gain on sale of equipment

1,000

Cost of goods sold

70,000

Other expenses

38,800

Net income

$12,200

Additional Data:

a. Bought equipment for cash, $31,000. Sold equipment with original cost of $10,000, accumulated depreciation of $7,000, for $4,000 cash .

b. Paid $6,000 on the long term note payable.

c. Issued new shares of stock for $16,000 cash.

d. No dividends were declared or paid.

e. Other expenses included depreciation, $12,000; wages, $13,000; taxes, $6,000; and other, $7,800.

f. Accounts payable includes only inventory purchases made on credit. Because there are no liability accounts relating to taxes or other expenses, assume that these expenses were fully paid in cash.

Required:

1. Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, using the indirect method.

2. Evaluate the statement of cash flows.

prepare a statement of cash flows spreadsheet using the indirect method to report ca 568449

Preparing Statement of Cash Flows Spreadsheet, Statement of Cash Flows, and Schedules Using Indirect Method Forrest Company is developing its annual financial statements at December 31, 2013. The statements are complete except for the statement of cash flows. The completed comparative balance sheets and income statement are summarized as follows:

2013

2012

Balance sheet at December 31

Cash

$44,000

$18,000

Accounts receivable

26,000

29,000

Merchandise inventory

30,000

36,000

Fixed assets (net)

76,000

72,000

$176,000

$155,000

Accounts payable

$25,000

$22,000

Wages payable

800

1,000

Note payable, long term

38,000

48,000

Common stock, no par

80,000

60,000

Retained earnings

32,200

24,000

$176,000

$155,000

Income statement for 2013

Sales

$100,000

Cost of goods sold

61,000

Expenses

27,000

Net income

$12,000

Additional Data:

a. Bought fixed assets for cash, $10,000.

b. Paid $10,000 on the long term note payable.

c. Sold unissued common stock for $20,000 cash.

d. Declared and paid a $3,800 cash dividend.

e. Incurred expenses that included depreciation, $6,000; wages, $10,000; taxes, $3,000; and other, $8,000.

Required:

1. Prepare a statement of cash flows spreadsheet using the indirect method to report cash flows from operating activities.

2. Prepare the statement of cash flows.

3. Prepare a schedule of noncash investing and financing activities if necessary.

prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method for the year ended dec 568450

Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows (Indirect Method) Ingersol Construction Supply Company is developing its annual financial statements at December 31, 2012. The statements are complete except for the statement of cash flows. The completed comparative balance sheets and income statement are summarized as follows:

2012

2011

Balance sheet at December 31

Cash

$34,000

$29,000

Accounts receivable

45,000

28,000

Merchandise inventory

32,000

38,000

Property and equipment

121,000

100,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

30,000

25,000

$202,000

$170,000

Accounts payable

$36,000

$27,000

Wages payable

2,200

1,400

Note payable, long term

40,000

46,000

Contributed capital

86,600

70,600

Retained earnings

37,200

25,000

$202,000

$170,000

Income statement for 2012

Sales

$135,000

Cost of goods sold

70,000

Other expenses

37,800

Net income

$27,200

Additional Data:

a. Bought equipment for cash, $21,000.

b. Paid $6,000 on the long term note payable.

c. Issued new shares of stock for $16,000 cash.

d. Dividends of $15,000 were declared and paid in cash.

e. Other expenses included depreciation, $5,000; wages, $20,000; taxes, $6,000; and other, $6,800.

f. Accounts payable includes only inventory purchases made on credit. Because there are no liability accounts relating to taxes or other expenses, assume that these expenses were fully paid in cash.

Required:

1. Prepare the statement of cash flows using the indirect method for the year ended December 31, 2012.

2. Evaluate the statement of cash flows.

prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended december 31 2013 using the in 568451

Preparing a Statement of Cash Flows (Indirect Method) Audio House , Inc., is developing its annual financial statements at December 31, 2013. The statements are complete except for the statement of cash flows. The completed comparative balance sheets and income statement are summarized as follows:

2013

2012

Balance sheet at December 31

Cash

$64,000

$65,000

Accounts receivable

15,000

20,000

Inventory

22,000

20,000

Property and equipment

210,000

150,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

60,000

45,000

$251,000

$210,000

Accounts payable

$8,000

$19,000

Taxes payable

2,000

1,000

Note payable, long term

86,000

75,000

Contributed capital

75,000

70,000

Retained earnings

80,000

45,000

$251,000

$210,000

Income statement for 2013

Sales

$190,000

Cost of goods sold

90,000

Other expenses

60,000

Net income

$40,000

Additional Data:

a. Bought equipment for cash, $60,000.

b. Borrowed an additional $11,000 and signed an additional long term note payable.

c. Issued new shares of stock for $5,000 cash.

d. Dividends of $5,000 were declared and paid in cash.

e. Other expenses included depreciation, $15,000; wages, $20,000; and taxes, $25,000.

f. Accounts payable includes only inventory purchases made on credit.

Required:

1. Prepare the statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2013, using the indirect method.

2. Based on the cash flow statement, write a short paragraph explaining the major sources and uses of cash during 2013.

has the company paid cash dividends during the last three years how do you know 568454

Finding Financial Information Refer to the financial statements of Urban Outfitters given in Appendix C at the end of this book.

Required:

1. Does Urban Outfitters use the direct or indirect method to report cash flows from operating activities?

2. What amount of tax payments did the company make during the most recent reporting year? ( Hint: The statement of cash flows may be helpful to answer this question.)

3. Explain why the “share based compensation” and “depreciation and amortization” items were added in the reconciliation of net income to net cash provided by operating activities.

4. Has the company paid cash dividends during the last three years? How do you know?

5. What was free cash flow for the year ended January 31, 2009?

compare the capital acquisitions ratio for both companies to the industry average ho 568455

Comparing Companies within an Industry Refer to the financial statements of American Eagle Outfitters (Appendix B) and Urban Outfitters (Appendix C) and the Industry Ratio Report (Appendix D) at the end of this book.

Required:

1. Compute the quality of income ratio for both companies for the most recent reporting year. Which company has a better quality of income ratio?

2. Compare the quality of income ratio for both companies to the industry average. Are these companies producing more or less cash from operating activities relative to net income than the average company in the industry?

3. Compute the capital acquisitions ratio for both companies for the most recent reporting year. Compare their abilities to finance purchases of property, plant, and equipment with cash provided by operating activities.

4. Compare the capital acquisitions ratio for both companies to the industry average. How does each company’s ability to finance the purchase of property, plant, and equipment with cash provided by operating activities compare with that of other companies in the industry?

as a financial analyst recently hired by a major investment bank you have been asked 568456

Making a Decision as a Financial Analyst: Analyzing Cash Flow for a New Company Carlyle Golf, Inc., was formed in September of last year. The company designs, contracts for the manufacture of, and markets a line of men’s golf apparel. A portion of the statement of cash flows for Carlyle follows:

CURRENT YEAR

Cash flows from operating activities

Net income

$460,089

Depreciation

3,554

Noncash compensation (stock)

254,464

Deposits with suppliers

404,934

Increase in prepaid assets

42,260

Increase in accounts payable

81,765

Increase in accrued liabilities

24,495

Net cash flows

($543,005)

Management expects a solid increase in sales in the near future. To support the increase in sales, it plans to add $2.2 million to inventory. The company did not disclose a sales forecast. At the end of the current year, Carlyle had less than $1,000 in cash. It is not unusual for a new company to experience a loss and negative cash flows during its start up phase.

Required:

As a financial analyst recently hired by a major investment bank, you have been asked to write a short memo to your supervisor evaluating the problems facing Carlyle. Emphasize typical sources of financing that may or may not be available to support the expansion.

native co ltd suffered a loss of rs 25 000 as per the financial accounts on comparis 568829

Native Co. Ltd suffered a loss of Rs 25,000 as per the financial accounts. On comparison with its costing records for the same year, the following differences were observed: Prepare a reconciliation statement, with the help of the differences.

Rs

Overvaluation of opening stock of materials in cost books

1,200

Under valuation of closing stock of finished goods in financial books

3,000

‘Dormant’ materials written off (in financial books)

1,000

Under absorption of overheads

4,000

Fines levied by Municipality

500

Debenture interest paid

2,000

the profit as per cost accounts in 1987 was rs 1 65 300 the following details are as 568830

The profit as per cost accounts in 1987 was Rs 1,65,300. The following details are ascertained on comparison of the cost and financial accounts:

Particulars

Cost books Rs

Financial books Rs

(a)

Opening stocks

Materials

32600

33,000

Work in progress

20,000

21,000

(b)

Closing stocks

Materials

36,000

34,400

Work in progress

16,000

15,200

Finished goods

8,000

9,000

(c)

Directorsifees

1,000

Interest paid

800

Reserve for bad debts

SOO

Transfer fees received

300

Dividends received

200

(d)

Rent charged on own premises

6,000

(e)

Preliminary expenses written off

13,000

(f)

Overheads

1,26,200

1,21,200

You are required to draw a reconciliation statement.

from the following profit and loss account and additional information given prepare 568831

From the following profit and loss account and additional information given, prepare: (a) a cost sheet and (b) reconciliation statement Profit and loss account

Particulars

Rs

Particulars

Rs

To opening stock

8,000

By sales

1,85,000

To purchases

52,000

By closing stock (materials)

15,000

To wages

28,000

To factory expenses

12,000

To administration expenses

10,000

To selling and distribution expenses

14,000

To patents (written off)

6,000

To net profit c/d

70,000

2,00,000

2,00,000

In costing, opening materials were shown at Rs 7,000. The factory overheads were absorbed at Rs 14,000. Administration overhead charges 10% of works cost and selling overheads was 10% of sales.

Hint: Closing materials are shown in costing at the same value as in financial accounts as it cannot be found separately.

the amounts charged in the cost accounts in respect of overhead charges are as follo 568832

Financial profit and loss account of a manufacturing Company for the year ended 31 March 1998 is as follows:

Rs

Rs

To material consumed
To carriage inwards
To works expenses
To direct wages
To administration expenses
To selling and distribution expenses To debenture interest
To net profit

50,000 34,000 12,000 1,000 4,500 6,500 1,000 15,000

By sales

1,24,000

1,24,000

1,24,000

To net profit shown by the cost accounts for the year is Rs 16,270. Upon detailed comparison of the two sets of accounts it is found that:

  1. The amounts charged in the cost accounts in respect of overhead charges are as follows: works overhead charges = Rs 11,500; office overhead charges = Rs 4,590; selling and distribution expenses = Rs 6,640.
  2. No charge has been made in the cost accounts in respect of debenture interest.

You are required to reconcile the profits shown by the two sets of accounts.

Hint: [Add: Over absorption of administration overheads Rs 90 and S and D overheads Rs 140. Less: Under recovery of works expenses Rs 500 and debenture interest Rs 1,000]

in the reconciliation between cost and financial accounts one of the areas of differ 568833

In the reconciliation between cost and financial accounts, one of the areas of differences is different methods of stock valuation used. State with reasons, in each of the following circumstances whether costing profit will be higher or lower than the financial profit:

Items of stock

Cost valuation Rs

Financial valuation Rs

(i)

Raw material (opening)

50,000

60000

(ii)

Work in progress (closing)

60,000

50,000

(iii)

Finished stock (closing)

50,000

60,000

(iv)

Finished stock (opening)

60,000

50,000

a company maintains separate cost and financial accounts and the costing profit for 568834

A company maintains separate cost and financial accounts, and the costing profit for the year 1998 differed to that revealed in the financial accounts, which was shown as Rs 50,000.

The following information is available:

Cost accounts
Rs

Financial account
Rs

Opening stock of raw material

5,000

5,500

Closing stock of raw material

4,000

5,300

Opening stock of finished goods

12,000

15,000

Closing stock of finished goods

14,000

16,000

  1. Dividend of Rs 1,000 was received by the company.
  2. A machine with net book value of Rs 10,000 was sold during the year for Rs 8,000.
  3. The company charged 10% interest on its opening capital employed of Rs 80,000 to its process costs.

You are required to determine the profit figure which was shown in the cost accounts.

determine the cash flow from the sale of property for each year that would be report 568435

Computing and Reporting Cash Flow Effects of Sale of Plant and Equipment During two recent years Perez Construction, Inc., disposed of the following plant and equipment:

Year 1

Year 2

Plant and equipment (at cost)

$75,000

$13,500

Accumulated depreciation on equipment disposed of

40,385

3,773

Cash received

17,864

12,163

Gain (loss) on sale

16,751

2,436

Required:

1. Determine the cash flow from the sale of property for each year that would be reported in the investing activities section of the cash flow statement.

2. Perez uses the indirect method for the operating activities section of the cash flow statement. What amounts related to the sales would be added or subtracted in the computation of Net Cash Flows from Operating Activities for each year?

what amount related to the sales would be added or subtracted in the computation of 568436

Computing and Reporting Cash Flow Effects of the Sale of Equipment During the period, Wong Company sold some excess equipment at a loss. The following information was collected from the company’s accounting records:

From the Income Statement

Depreciation expense

$820

Loss on sale of equipment

4,400

From the Balance Sheet

Beginning equipment

19,000

Ending equipment

12,100

Beginning accumulated depreciation

1,800

Ending accumulated depreciation

1,900

Required:

1. For the equipment that was sold, determine its original cost, its accumulated depreciation, and the cash received from the sale. (Use the equipment and accumulated depreciation T accounts to infer the book value of the equipment sold.)

2. Wong Company uses the indirect method for the Operating Activities section of the cash flow statement. What amount related to the sale would be added or subtracted in the computation of Net Cash Flows from Operating Activities?

3. What amount related to the sales would be added or subtracted in the computation of Net Cash Flows from Investing Activities?

what were the major reasons that pepsico rsquo s quality of income ratio did not equ 568437

Analyzing Cash Flows from Operating Activities; Interpreting the Quality of Income Ratio A recent annual report for PepsiCo contained the following information for the period (dollars in millions):

Net income

$5,142

Depreciation and amortization

1,543

Increase in accounts receivable

549

Increase in inventory

345

Increase in prepaid expense

68

Increase in accounts payable

718

Decrease in taxes payable

180

Increase in other current liabilities

738

Cash dividends paid

2,541

Treasury stock purchased

4,720

Required:

1. Compute cash flows from operating activities for PepsiCo using the indirect method.

2. Compute the quality of income ratio.

3. What were the major reasons that PepsiCo’s quality of income ratio did not equal 1.0?

based on this information present the cash flows from investing and financing activi 568438

Reporting Cash Flows from Investing and Financing Activities Oering’s Furniture Corporation is a Virginia based manufacturer of furniture. In a recent year, it reported the following activities:

Net income

$5,135

Purchase of property, plant, and equipment

1,071

Borrowings under line of credit (bank)

1,117

Proceeds from issuance of stock

11

Cash received from customers

37,164

Payments to reduce long term debt

46

Sale of marketable securities

219

Proceeds from sale of property and equipment

6,894

Dividends paid

277

Interest paid

90

Purchase of treasury stock (stock repurchase)

2,583

Required:

Based on this information, present the cash flows from investing and financing activities sections of the cash flow statement .

indicate whether each item listed below is a variable v fixed f or mixed m cost and 568010

Indicate whether each item listed below is a variable (V), fixed (F), or mixed (M) cost and whether it is a product or service (PT) cost or a period (PD) cost. If some items have alternative answers, indicate the alternatives and the reasons for them.

a. Wages of forklift operators who move finished goods from a central warehouse

to the loading dock.

b. Paper towels used in factory restrooms.

c. Insurance premiums paid on the headquarters of a manufacturing company.

d. Columnar paper used in an accounting firm.

e. Cost of labels attached to shirts made by a company.

f. Wages of factory maintenance workers.

g. Property taxes on a manufacturing plant.

h. Salaries of secretaries in a law firm.

i. Freight costs of acquiring raw materials from suppliers.

j. Cost of wax to make candles.

k. Cost of radioactive material used to generate power in a nuclear power plant.

the company incurredthe following costs to produce 2 000 caps last month 568013

Malley Company produces baseball caps. The company incurredthe following costs to produce 2,000 caps last month:

Cardboard for the bills

$1,200

Cloth materials

2,000

Plastic for headband straps

1,500

Straight line depreciation

1,800

Supervisors’ salaries

4,800

Utilities

900

Total

$12,200

a. What did each cap component cost on a per unit basis?

b. What is the probable type of behavior that each of the costs exhibits?

c. The company expects to produce 2,500 caps this month. Would you expect each type of cost to increase or decrease? Why? Why can’t the total cost of 2,500 caps be determined?

if the balance in prepaid expenses has increased during the year what action should 568409

If the balance in prepaid expenses has increased during the year, what action should be taken on the statement of cash flows when following the indirect method, and why?

a. The change in the account balance should be subtracted from net income because the net increase in prepaid expenses did not impact net income but did reduce the cash balance.

b. The change in the account balance should be added to net income because the net increase in prepaid expenses did not impact net income but did increase the cash balance.

c. The net change in prepaid expenses should be subtracted from net income to reverse the income statement effect that had no impact on cash.

d. The net change in prepaid expenses should be added to net income to reverse the income statement effect that had no impact on cash.

indicate whether each item is disclosed in the operating activities o investing acti 568417

Matching Items Reported to Cash Flow Statement Categories (Indirect Method) MillerCoors Brewing Company is the world’s fifth largest brewer. In the United States, its tie to the magical appeal of the Rocky Mountains is one of its most powerful trademarks. Some of the items included in its recent annual consolidated statement of cash flows presented using the indirect method are listed here. Indicate whether each item is disclosed in the Operating Activities (O), Investing Activities (I), or Financing Activities (F) section of the statement or use (NA) if the item does not appear on the statement. ( Note: This is the exact wording used on the actual statement.)

1. Purchase of stock. [This involves repurchase of the company’s own stock.]

2. Principal payment on long term debt.

3. Proceeds from sale of properties.

4. Inventories (decrease).

5. Accounts payable (decrease).

6. Depreciation, depletion, and amortization.

indicate whether each item is disclosed in the operating activities o investing acti 568419

Matching Items Reported to Cash Flow Statement Categories (Direct Method) Lion Nathan, brewer of XXXX, Toohey’s, and other well known Australian brands, has net revenue of more than $2 billion (Australian). Some of the items included in its recent annual consolidated statement of cash flows presented using the direct method are listed here. Indicate whether each item is disclosed in the Operating Activities (O), Investing Activities (I), or Financing Activities (F) section of the statement or use (NA) if the item does not appear on the statement. ( Note: This is the exact wording used on the actual statement.)

1. Receipts from customers.

2. Dividends paid.

3. Payment for share buy back.

4. Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment.

5. Repayments of borrowings (bank debt).

6. Net interest paid.

some of the items included in its recent annual consolidated statement of cash flows 568424

Matching Items Reported to Cash Flow Statement Categories (Indirect Method) Reebok International Ltd. is a global company that designs and markets sports and fitness products, including footwear, apparel, and accessories. Some of the items included in its recent annual consolidated statement of cash flows presented using the indirect method are listed here. Indicate whether each item is disclosed in the Operating Activities (O), Investing Activities (I), or Financing Activities (F) section of the statement or (NA) if the item does not appear on the statement. ( Note: This is the exact wording used on the actual statement.)

1. Dividends paid.

2. Repayments of long term debt.

3. Depreciation and amortization.

4. Proceeds from issuance of common stock to employees.

5. [Change in] Accounts payable and accrued expenses.

6. Cash collections from customers.

7. Net repayments of notes payable to banks.

8. Net income.

9. Payments to acquire property and equipment.

10. [Change in] Inventory.

some of the items included in its recent annual consolidated statement of cash flows 568425

Matching Items Reported to Cash Flow Statement Categories (Direct Method) The Australian company BHP Billiton is the world’s biggest mining company. Some of the items included in its recent annual consolidated statement of cash flows presented using the direct method are listed here. Indicate whether each item is disclosed in the Operating Activities (O), Investing Activities (I), or Financing Activities (F) section of the statement or (NA) if the item does not appear on the statement. ( Note: This is the exact wording used on the actual statement.)

1. Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment.

2. Interest received.

3. Repayments of loans.

4. Income taxes paid.

5. Proceeds from ordinary share [stock] issues.

6. Dividends paid.

7. Payments in the course of operations.

8. Receipts from customers.

9. Payments for property, plant, and equipment.

10. Net income.

for each of the following firstyear transactions indicate whether net cash inflows o 568426

Determining Cash Flow Statement Effects of Transactions Stanley Furniture Company is a Virginia based furniture manufacturer. For each of the following firstyear transactions, indicate whether net cash inflows (outflows) from operating activities (NCFO), investing activities (NCFI), or financing activities (NCFF) are affected and whether the effect is an inflow ( + ) or outflow ( ), or (NE) if the transaction has no effect on cash. (H int: Determine the journal entry recorded for the transaction. The transaction affects net cash flows if and only if the account Cash is affected.)

1. Recorded an adjusting entry to record accrued salaries expense.

2. Paid cash to purchase new equipment.

3. Collected payments on account from customers.

4. Recorded and paid interest on debt to creditors.

5. Declared and paid cash dividends to shareholders.

6. Sold used equipment for cash at book value.

7. Prepaid rent for the following period.

8. Repaid principal on revolving credit loan from bank.

9. Purchased raw materials inventory on account.

10. Made payment to suppliers on account.

for each of the following recent transactions indicate whether net cash inflows outf 568427

Determining Cash Flow Statement Effects of Transactions Hewlett Packard is a leading manufacturer of computer equipment for the business and home markets. For each of the following recent transactions, indicate whether net cash inflows (outflows) from operating activities (NCFO), investing activities (NCFI), or financing activities (NCFF) are affected and whether the effect is an inflow ( + ) or outflow ( ), or (NE) if the transaction has no effect on cash. ( Hint: Determine the journal entry recorded for the transaction. The transaction affects net cash flows if and only if the account Cash is affected.)

1. Purchased raw materials inventory on account.

2. Prepaid rent for the following period.

3. Purchased new equipment by signing a three year note.

4. Recorded an adjusting entry for expiration of a prepaid expense.

5. Recorded and paid income taxes to the federal government.

6. Purchased investment securities for cash.

7. Issued common stock for cash.

8. Collected payments on account from customers.

9. Sold equipment for cash equal to its net book value.

10. Issued long term debt for cash.

to compare statement of cash flows reporting under the direct and indirect methods e 568428

Comparing the Direct and Indirect Methods To compare statement of cash flows reporting under the direct and indirect methods, enter check marks to indicate which items are used with each method.

STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS METHOD

Direct

Indirect

Cash Flows (and Related Changes)

1. Accounts payable increase or decrease

2. Payments to employees

3. Cash collections from customers

4. Accounts receivable increase or decrease

5. Payments to suppliers

6. Inventory increase or decrease

7. Wages payable, increase or decrease

8. Depreciation expense

9. Net income

10. Cash flows from operating activities

11. Cash flows from investing activities

12. Cash flows from financing activities

13. Net increase or decrease in cash during the period

present the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for satellit 568429

Reporting Cash Flows from Operating Activities (Indirect Method) – The following information pertains to Satellite Company:

Income Statement for 2012

Sales

$85,000

Expenses

Cost of goods sold

$51,875

Depreciation expense

8,500

Salaries expense

12,000

72,375

Net income

$12,625

Partial Balance Sheet

2012

2011

Accounts receivable

$10,500

$12,000

Inventory

14,000

8,000

Salaries payable

1,750

800

Required:

Present the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for Satellite Company using the indirect method.

what were the major reasons that capaz was able to report a net loss but positive ca 568430

Reporting and Interpreting Cash Flows from Operating Activities from an Analyst’s Perspective (Indirect Method) Capaz Company completed its income statement and balance sheet for 2012 and provided the following information:

Income Statement for 2012

Service revenue

$53,000

Expenses

Salaries

$41,000

Depreciation

7,000

Amortization of copyrights

200

72,375

Other expenses

9,700

$57,900

Net loss

($4,900)

Partial Balance Sheet

2012

2011

Accounts receivable

$8,000

$15,000

Salaries payable

15,000

1,000

Other accrued liabilities

1,000

5,100

In addition, Capaz bought a small service machine for $5,000.

Required:

1. Present the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for Capaz Company using the indirect method.

2. What were the major reasons that Capaz was able to report a net loss but positive cash flow from operations? Why are the reasons for the difference between cash flow from operations and net income important to financial analysts?

present the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for new visi 568431

Reporting and Interpreting Cash Flows from Operating Activities with Loss on Sale of Equipment (Indirect Method) New Vision Company completed its income statement and balance sheet for 2011 and provided the following information:

Service revenue

$66,000

Expenses:

Salaries

$42,000

Depreciation

$7,300

Utilities

7,000

Loss on sale of equipment

1,700

58,000

Net income

$8,000

Partial Balance Sheet

2011

2010

Accounts receivable

$12,000

$24,000

Salaries payable

$19,000

$10,000

Other accrued liabilities

5,000

9,000

Land

52,000

57,000

Required:

Present the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for New Vision Company using the indirect method.

what were the major reasons that time warner was able to report a net loss but posit 568432

Reporting and Interpreting Cash Flows from Operating Activities from an Analyst’s Perspective (Indirect Method) Time Warner Inc. is a leading media and entertainment company with businesses in television networks, filmed entertainment, and publishing. The company’s 2008 annual report contained the following information (dollars in millions):

Net loss

$13,402

Depreciation, amortization, and impairments

34,790

Decrease in receivables

1,245

Increase in inventories

5,766

Decrease in accounts payable

445

Additions to equipment

4,377

Required:

1. Based on this information, compute cash flow from operating activities using the indirect method.

2. What were the major reasons that Time Warner was able to report a net loss but positive cash flow from operations? Why are the reasons for the difference between cash flow from operations and net income important to financial analysts?

a recent statement of cash flows for colgate palmolive reported the following inform 568433

Inferring Balance Sheet Changes from the Cash Flow Statement (Indirect Method) A recent statement of cash flows for Colgate Palmolive reported the following information (dollars in millions):

Operating Activities

Net income

$1,957.20

Depreciation

347.6

Cash effect of changes in

Receivables

69.8

Inventories

134.7

Other current assets

31

Payables

125.2

Other

43.8

Net cash provided by operations

$2,238.30

Required:

Based on the information reported on the statement of cash flows for Colgate Palmolive, determine whether the following accounts increased or decreased during the period: Receivables, Inventories, Other Current Assets, and Payables.

for each of the asset and liability accounts listed on the statement of cash flows d 568434

Inferring Balance Sheet Changes from the Cash Flow Statement (Indirect Method) A recent statement of cash flows for Apple contained the following information (dollars in millions):

Operations

Net income

$11,875

Depreciation

703

Changes in assets and liabilities

Accounts receivable

939

Inventories

54

Other current assets

1,050

Accounts payable

92

Deferred revenue

6,908

Other current liabilities

184

Other adjustments

7,300

Cash generated by operations

$10,159

Required:

For each of the asset and liability accounts listed on the statement of cash flows, determine whether the account balances increased or decreased during the period.

modern india citizens club was registered in a city and the accountant prepared the 567605

Correction of wrong statements

Modern (India) Citizens Club was registered in a city and the accountant prepared the following Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2008 and showed a deficit of Rs 14,520:

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Subscriptions

62,130

Premises

30,000

Fair Receipts

7,200

Honorarium to Secretary

12,000

Variety Show Receipts (net)

12,810

Rent

2,400

Interest

690

Rates and Taxes

3,780

Bar Collections

22,350

Printing and Stationery

1,410

Cash Spent more

1,000

Wages

2,520

Sundry Expenses

5,350

Fair Expenses

7,170

Bar Purchases Payments

17,310

Repaks

960

New Car

(Less• Proceeds of Old Car Rs 9,000)

37,800

Deficit

1,20,700

1,20,700

Information

Apr 1, 2007
Rs

Mar 31, 2008
Rs

Cash in Hand

450

Bank Balance as per Pass Book

24,690

10,440

Cheque issued not presented for Sundry Expenses

270

90

Subscriptions Due

3,600

2,940

Premises at Cost

87,000

1,17,000

Accumulated Depreciation on Premises

5,64,000

Car at Cost

36,570

46,800

Accumulated Depreciation – Car

30,870

Bar Stock

2,130

2,610

Creditors for Bar Purchases

1,770

1,290

  1. Cash overspent represents honorarium to secretary not withdrawn due to cash deficit and his annual honorarium is Rs 12,000.
  2. Depreciation on premises and car is to be provided at 5% and 20% on written down value.

Required: Prepare the correct Receipts and Payments Account, Income and Expenditure Account for the year 2007–2008 and Balance Sheet as Mar 31, 2008.

dr kashyap is a neuro surgeon the receipts and payments account for the year 2008 is 567606

Dr. Kashyap is a neuro surgeon. The Receipts and Payments Account for the year 2008 is as follows:

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance b/d

20,500

Salaries to Staff

30,000

Fees

3,70,000

Rent

24,000

Miscellaneous Receipts

10,000

Journals, etc.

6,000

Sale of Old Equipments

Books (Professional)

20,000

(Cost Rs 40,000)

32,000

Purchase of Equipments

40,000

Stationery

1,000

Conveyance

5,000

Purchase of Medicines

1,50,000

Furniture

24,000

Drawings

1,00,000

Cash in Hand

32,500

4,32,500

4,32,500

Information

His position stood at Jan 1, 2008 is as follows:

Equipment: Rs 2,00,000; Medicines: Rs 30,000

Fees outstanding Rs 5,000; Books: Rs 40,000

Provide 10% Depreciation on Equipments and 20% on Books.

Further Information

Fees still outstanding (at the end): Rs 10,000

Salaries Still Payable (at the end): Rs 6,000

Stock of Medicines:Rs 4,000

You are required to prepare

  1. Receipts and Expenditure Account
  2. Balance Sheet

dr v p b singh is a doctor by profession the receipts and payments for the year 2008 567607

Dr. V.P.B. Singh is a doctor by profession. The receipts and payments for the year 2008 is as follows:

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance b/d

25,000

Salaries

35,000

Fees including Surgery

3,00,000

Rent

20,000

Miscellaneous Receipts

10,000

Journals, etc.

10,000

Sale of Old Equipment

40,000

Books

25,000

(Cost Rs 50,000)

Stationery

4,000

Purchase of Medicines

60,000

Purchase of Equipments

95,000

Furniture

10,000

Drawings

85,000

Cash in Hand

31,000

3,75,003

3,75,000

Information as on Jan 1, 2008

Equipment :

Rs 2,00,000; Medicines

: Rs 30,000

Fees Outstanding :

Rs 5,000; Books

: Rs 20,000

Provide Depreciation @10% on Equipment and 20% on Books.

Further information at the end of the year

Salaries still payable

:

Rs 5,500 (to attendants)

Fees Outstanding

:

Rs 12,000

Stock of Medicines

:

Rs 5,000

Required: Receipts and Expenditure Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008 and Balance Sheet on that date.

x and y are in partnership practicing as chartered accountants under the name exy am 567608

X and Y are in partnership practicing as chartered accountants under the name EXY & Co. sharing profits and losses. They close their accounts on Mar 31 every year. The following was their Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2007.

Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2007

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Partner Capital

Furniture

25,000

X:

80,000

Office Machinery

20,000

Y:

60.000

1,40,000

Library Books

10,000

Audit Fees Collected in Advance

Car

80,000

(X’s Client)

15,000

Outstanding Audit fees

Liability for Salary

7,000

X’S Client

40,000

Provision against Outstanding

70,000

Y’S Client:

30.000

70,000

Audit Fees

Cash as Bank

25,000

Cash In Hand

2,000

2,32,000

2,32,000

The following is the summary of their cash bank transactions for the year ending Mar 31, 2008:

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Opening

Salary to Staff

2,60,000

Bank Balance

25,000

Car Expenses

30,000

Cash Balance

2,000

Traveling Expenses

20,000

Audit Fees

Printing and Stationery

21,000

X’s Client’s:

3,90,000

Postage Expenses

4,000

Y’s Client’s:

2,12,1200

6,55,000

Telephone

17,000

Fees for Other Services:

Subscription for Journals

10,000

X’s Client’s:

55,000

Library Books

15,000

Y’s Client’s:

35,900

90,000

Computer System

15,000

Miscellaneous Income

5,000

Membership Fees

4,000

Drawings

X:1,80,000

Y: 1,60,000

3,40,000

Cash at Bank

40,000

Cash in Hand

1,000

7,77,000

7,77,000

Further Information

Rs

1.

Audit fees Receivable

X’s Clients

35,000

Y’s Clients

45,000

2.

Audit fees collected in Advance

Y’s Clients

15,000

3.

Outstanding Liability for Salary on Mar 31, 2008

17,000

4.

Depreciation to be provided on

10%

Furniture

10%

Office Machinery

10%

Library Books

20%

Car

5.

It has been agreed that 60% of audit fees and 50% of fees for other services should be transferred to Income and Expenditure Account in respect of each partner’s account, the balance being credited directly to the capital accounts, you are required to prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2008.

prepare receipts and expenditure account of the firm for the year ended on mar 31 20 567609

M/s Sagar and Boond are a firm of solicitors whose partners Anand and Ashok share profits in equal shares after charging a management fee of 5% there of to Anand. For the year ended on Mar 31, 2008, the books maintained by the firm reveal the following particulars.

Capital

33,000

Office Rent

12,000

Drawings Anand

20,000

Office Expenses

3400

Ashok

18,000

Furniture and Life Books

24400

Life Insurance Premium

Clients Disbursements

2400

Paid: Anand

6,000

Amount owing by Clients for bills

17,200

Ashok

12,000

of cost rendered

Salaries to Staff and Juniors

46,000

Profit Costs

1,42,000

Amounts received from clients on Accounts

32,000

Fixed Deposits with Bank

15,000

of pending matter

Bank Amounts: Clients

31,800

Salary debts owing by firm

3,400

Office

6400

Reserve against bills of costs not collected with work in progress as on Apr 1,2007

5,000

Work in progress on Mar 31,2008

8,200

The following additional information is also available.

  1. Capital accounts of partners, at the beginning of the year, were of equal amounts.
  2. Included in the bills of costs sent to clients are sundry disbursements like postage, telephone charges, etc. debited in the books of office expenses account. At the end of the year, items on the debit side of clients Disbursements Account amounting to Rs 3,200 had not been charged to clients in bills of costs. If Rs 200 was received and credited to their accounts in the year.

Required: Prepare Receipts and Expenditure Account of the firm for the year ended on Mar 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet on that date.

multiple choice questions 567610

Multiple Choice Questions

  1. The Receipts and Payments Account generally shows:
    1. Surplus
    2. A Credit Balance
    3. A Debit Balance
    4. Deficit
  2. Treatment for Special Donations received:
    1. Should be treated as Revenue Receipt
    2. Should be treated based on its volume
    3. Should be credited as special account (head) and recorded in the Balance Sheet.
    4. None of the above
  3. Income and Expenditure Accounts show a balance of
    1. Surplus or Deficit
    2. Cash in hand at the end
    3. Net Profit/Loss
    4. Capital Fund
  4. Rent Paid in Advance during the accounting year is
    1. An Expense
    2. An Income
    3. An Asset
    4. A Liability
  5. Subscription received in advance during an accounting year is
    1. An Income
    2. An Asset
    3. A Liability
    4. An Expense
  6. Salaries outstanding at the end should be
    1. Shown on the assets side of the Balance Sheet
    2. Added to salaries and shown on expenditure side of the Income and Expenditure Account
    3. Shown only on Receipts and Payments Account
    4. None of the above
  7. Depreciation is to be computed in general
    1. Only on the assets purchased during the year
    2. On assets which were throughout the year
    3. On (a) and (b) above
    4. None of the above
  8. A second hand computer with system was purchased for Rs 5000. It was given for service and the amount charged for service was Rs 250. Installation charge Rs 100 was paid to the technician. Capitalised value to be recorded will be
    1. Rs 5,250
    2. Rs 5,100
    3. Rs 5,350
    4. Rs 5,000
  9. At the beginning of accounting year the following particulars are extracted value of Assets Rs 25,000, Liabilities Rs 5000, Debit Balance of Income and Expenditure Account Rs 2,500. Then Capital Fund will be
    1. Rs 32,500
    2. Rs 22,500
    3. Rs 27,500
    4. Rs 20,000
  10. Rent paid in the accounting year Rs 6,000. Rent paid in advance at the end of the year Rs 500. Rent outstanding but not yet paid for the year Rs 1,000. The amount to be debited to Income and Expenditure Account is
    1. Rs 6,500
    2. Rs 5,500
    3. Rs 6,000
    4. Rs 7,000

state whether the following statements are true or false 567611

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Receipts and Payments Account is a summary of cash transactions during an accounting period.
  2. Receipts and Payments Accounts only items relating to revenue in nature.
  3. Receipts and payments records items which relate to current accounting period only.
  4. Non cash items are shown in Receipts and Payments Account.
  5. Closing Balance in Receipts and Payments Account represents either Surplus or Deficit.
  6. Opening Balance is recorded in Income and Expenditure Account.
  7. Income and Expenditure Account is a Nominal Account.
  8. Income and Expenditure Account is a summarized cash book.
  9. Income and Expenditure Account records only items of revenue in nature.
  10. NPOs undertake trading activities also.
  11. Amount spent for the purchase of books by a public library is of revenue nature.
  12. Entrance fee is always to be capitalised.
  13. Donations received for specific purposes is of revenue nature.
  14. Outstanding incomes need not be adjusted, if accounts are kept on an accrual basis.
  15. All assets will be shown in Income and Expenditure Account as income.
  16. Donations will appear on the liabilities side of a Balance Sheet.
  17. Life membership fees have always to be treated as of revenue nature.
  18. Fixed Deposit has always to be capitalised.
  19. Balancing figure in the preparation of Balance Sheet at the beginning of the year represents surplus of deficit.
  20. Expenses paid for current year will appear in the Balance Sheet.
  21. Pre paid expenses is an asset.
  22. Outstanding income is a liability.
  23. While preparing final accounts of a professional firm, value of work in progress is not to be taken into account.
  24. Balance of surplus is allocated among the partners in an agreed ratio.

fill in the blanks with appropriate word s 567612

Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s)

  1. The primary motive of NPO is to _______.
  2. The net result of the activities of Not for profit is termed as or _______.
  3. The Receipt and Payment Account is _______ Account.
  4. The Receipt and Payment Account starts with the opening Balance of _______ and _______.
  5. The Receipt and Payment Account ending with the Closing Balance of _______ and _______.
  6. The Receipt and Payment Account does not record _______ items.
  7. The Receipt and Payment Account records both _______ and _______ nature items.
  8. An Income and Expenditure Account is _______ to Account like Profit and Loss Account.
  9. An Income and Expenditure Account records only those items which are of _______ nature.
  10. In an Income and Expenditure Accounts the balance at the end represents either _______ on _______.
  11. The Net Surplus or Net Deficit arrived at an Income and Expenditure Account is transferred to the capital fund in _______.
  12. Outstanding Expenses at the end of current year is treated as _______ end recorded in the balance sheet.
  13. Income Received in Advance during an accounting period is treated as _______ and recorded in the balance sheet.
  14. Likewise expenses spent in advance is _______.
  15. Outstanding Income is _______.
  16. Specific Donations are treated as _______ in preparation of Income and Expenditure Account.
  17. Receipts as per pass book should be _______ by cheque deposited but not collected at the end of the year.
  18. Life Membership Subscription is classified as _______ and so does not find place in Income and Expenditure Account.
  19. Expenses paid for current year and incomes received for current year shall not be recorded in the _______.
  20. Final accounts prepared for professionals is termed as _______ Account and not Income and Expenditure Account.
  21. Provision for outstanding fees and charges at the end of the year is _______ in Receipts and Expenditure Account.
  22. If income is Rs 25,700 and deficit debited to capital fund is Rs 9,300 expenditure is _______.
  23. Entrance fees received is Rs 9,000. 40% should be capitalised. Amount to be recorded in Income and Expenditure is Rs _______.
  24. Value of Books at the beginning of an accounting year is Rs 20,000. Books Purchased during the year is Rs 5,000. If its value is depreciated @ 10%, it is Rs _______.
  25. Sports materials at the beginning of an accounting year is Rs 9,000. Purchased during the year Rs 6,000. Stock of sports materials at the end of the year is Rs 2,500, value of sports materials to be entered in Income and Expenditure Account is Rs _______.

assume that you are a financial analyst and you have just been handed a 2000 financi 567968

Assume that you are a financial analyst and you have just been handed a 2000 financial report of Firm X, a large, global pharmaceutical firm. The company competes in both traditional pharmaceutical products and the evolving biotechnology products. Also assume that you have been given the following data on the pharmaceutical industry.

Firm X

Industry Average

Sales

$5.0 billion

$1.2 billion

Net income

$1.3 billion

$0.12 billion

Advertising

$0.1 billion

$0.2 billion

Research and development

$0.4 billion

$0.3 billion

New investment in facilities

$0.5 billion

$0.3 billion

Given the above data, evaluate the cost management performance of Firm X.

consider the following excerpt regarding advertising agencies the latest study on ad 567969

Consider the following excerpt regarding advertising agencies: The latest study on advertising agency performance from the Incorporated Society of British Advertisers found that agencies are failing to provide adequate service, to develop trusting relationships, be innovative, be efficient, control costs, and keep their promises. Agency staff are difficult to reach, planners are lack

ing when it comes to monitoring and evaluating advertising, creatives still do

not listen to advertisers’ concerns or understand their target markets, and production

departments fail to deliver value for money or meet budgets. On a

grander scale, the majority of advertisers do not feel that their agencies provide

co Given the problems plaguing advertising agencies, discuss how an integrated cost management system could help individual ad agencies become more competitive.

cost management and organizational culture use internet resources to compare and con 567971

Cost management and organizational culture) Use Internet resources to compare and contrast the organizational cultures and operating performance of any two firms in the same industry. Following are possible pairs to compare.

1. Delta Air Lines and Southwest Airlines (http://www.delta air.com and http://www.southwest.com)

2. Exxon and Royal Dutch Shell (http://www.exxon.com and http://www.shell .com)

3. Nordstrom’s and Wal Mart (http://www2.nordstrom.com and http://www .walmart.com)

4. Haggar and Levi Strauss (http://www.haggar.com and http://www.levi.com)

5. IBM and Dell Computer (http://www.ibm.com and http://www.dell.com) In your discussion, address the following questions:

a. Which of the pair is the better operating performer?

b. Do you believe that organizational culture has any relationship to the differences in operations?

the following excerpt illustrates a strategy change by corel the software company 567975

The following excerpt illustrates a strategy change by Corel, the software company. Corel’s problems originated four years ago when the company purchased the WordPerfect word processing software from Novell Inc. and started waging war with Microsoft for the top retail sales spot in packaged office suites. Within months of the $124 million acquisition, Corel transformed the moribund WordPerfect into the centerpiece of a rival to Microsoft’s Office package, which included a word processor, a spreadsheet, graphics software, and a personal organizer. For two months in 1995, Corel’s package edged out Microsoft’s in retail sales. But the early success was deceptive. Corel sacrificed profit for market share by marketing its office suite at about half the retail price of Microsoft’s Office. Meanwhile, Corel’s aggressive advertising campaign, including title sponsorship of the women’s professional tennis tour and national television commercials in the United States, drained the company’s meager resources. When Microsoft introduced its own upgraded Office 97 suite, the battle was over. To reverse its fortunes, Corel is slashing costs. . . . For instance, it is spending much less than before to attract new office software customers. Corel’s change in cost management has resulted in the company’s return to profitable operations. The change in cost management resulting in “slashing costs” implies that the company has changed its strategy. Discuss how the firm’s strategy might have changed such that the firm’s new strategy would b consistent with the change in cost management that is described in the article.

alternative cost management strategies robert l wehling procter amp gamble rsquo s s 567977

Alternative cost management strategies) Robert L. Wehling, Procter & Gamble’s senior vice president for advertising and market research, would like to wean Americans off coupons. His relentless cost control efforts, which P&G began in the manufacturing area in 1993, have led to moves to eliminate couponing, increase print advertising, and curb growth in P&G’s marketing spending. In fact, fewer than 2% of the 291.9 billion coupons that companies distributed in 1995 were redeemed. . . . P&G has been plowing back savings from cost cutting initiatives into lowering prices on most of its 300 brands. Since 1992–93, the list prices on P&G brands, excluding coffee, have declined by $1 billion. Prices on diapers and detergents have particularly declined. In February, P&G eliminated all promotional coupons in three New York state markets—in a test that many industry watchers doubted could be successfully expanded nationwide because coupons are such an integral part of American consumers’ psyche. Until P&G came along, no company had risked eliminating all coupons in a big geographical market, despite the growing consensus among major marketers that coupons are expensive and turn brand loyal customers into bargain hunters who select brands based on short term price promotions. P&G spent $3.3 billion in 1995 on advertising. Its popular brand names include Tide, Vicks, Cover Girl, and Pampers.

a. What costs and benefits did P&G likely consider in its decision to discontinue the use of coupons to promote its products?

b. What is P&G’s apparent market strategy in deciding to lower prices? Explain.

c. What risks should P&G take into account before discontinuing the use of coupons nationwide?

the following excerpt illustrates how one company experienced negative fallout due t 567978

The following excerpt illustrates how one company experienced negative fallout due to cost cutting measures. In Digital Equipment Corp.’s 1994 reorganization, its second in as many years, the company eliminated hundreds of sales and marketing jobs in its healthindustries group, which had been bringing in $800 million of annual revenue by selling computers to hospitals and other health care providers worldwide. Digital says it cut [costs and positions] because it had to act fast. It was losing about $3 million a day, and its cost of sales was much higher than that of its rivals. Robert B. Palmer, the chief executive officer of the Maynard, Massachusetts, company, saw across the board cuts in all units, regardless of profitability, as the way to go. . . . But in the health industries group, the cutbacks imposed unexpected costs. Digital disrupted longstanding ties between its veteran salespeople and major customers by transferring their accounts to new sales divisions. It also switched hundreds of smaller accounts to outside distributors without notifying the customers. At the industry’s annual conference, “I had customers coming up to me and saying, ‘I haven’t seen a Digital sales rep in nine months. Whom do I talk to now?’ ” recalls Joseph Lesica, a former marketing manager in the group who resigned last year. “That really hurt our credibility. I was embarrassed.” Resellers of Digital computers, who account for most of its health care sales, also complained about diminished technology and sales support. “There were months when you couldn’t find anybody with a Digital badge,” complains an official at one former reseller who had been accustomed to Digital sales reps

accompanying him on customer calls. “They walked away from large numbers of clients.” Adds Richard Tarrant, chief executive of IDX Systems Corp., a Burlington, Vermont, reseller that used to have an exclusive arrangement with Digital, “Now, they’re just one of several vendors we use.” Many Digital customers turned to International Business Machines Corp. [IBM] and Hewlett Packard Co., and so did some employees of Digital’s downsized health care group. Lesica says some laid off workers went to Hewlett Packard and quickly set about bringing Digital clients with them. “That’s another way [Digital] shot itself in the foot,” he says.

a.What is the implied mission (build, hold, or harvest) of the health industries group of Digital? Explain.

b.Describe the circumstances in which “across the board” cuts in spending represent a rational approach to cost management.

c.When Digital decided to cut costs, what were the apparent criteria used to determine which costs to cut?

d.How could a better, integrated cost management system have helped Digital avoid the adverse effects of its cost cutting efforts?

the following excerpt deals with nordstrom rsquo s cost cutting efforts nordstrom rs 567980

The following excerpt deals with Nordstrom’s cost cutting efforts. Nordstrom’s Inc., a retailing industry laggard in profits, has been undergoing an effort to cut costs. But can the department store chain do that while maintaining its famously obsessive level of customer service? “The biggest challenge is to keep the culture in the organization while making the necessary changes for the new millennium,” says Jennifer Black, president and analyst at Black & Co. in Portland, Oregon. The good news is that Nordstrom’s lags so far behind the industry’s most efficient and profitable department store operators that it can cut a lot of costs without gutting the sales staff. “There is so much at this company that hasn’t been done,” Black says. “They’ve only skimmed the surface.” For instance, May Department Stores Co., based in St. Louis, boasts a 12.5% operating margin, while Nordstrom’s was among retailing’s lowest, at 5.6% for 1998. Nordstrom’s certainly has opportunity for improvement. Its sales per square foot of store space, at $382 for 1998, are the envy of the industry. May’s sales per square foot were just $201. But inefficient operations have prevented Nordstrom’s from boosting its bottom line, despite its higher sales. Becoming efficient requires Nordstrom’s family, which owns a controlling 35 percent stake in the company, to embrace change at what has been an insular operation. So far, the family is talking the talk. “Nothing is sacred,” says 36 year old William Nordstrom.

a. What is Nordstrom’s strategy as implied by the discussion in the news article?

b. Given your answer to part (a), discuss how, as a paid consultant to Nordstrom’s, you would go about developing a plan to recommend cost management changes at the company.

ford motor co reported a 58 percent drop in its fourth quarter profits as a result o 567981

Ford Motor Co. reported a 58 percent drop in its fourth quarter profits as a result of the heavy costs of launching new vehicles. And officials predicted that similar costs will continue to depress earnings through the first half of this year. Ford launched its Taurus sedan, its biggest selling car, in the fourth quarter, while preparing for the debut of its F series pickup trucks. The two vehicle lines account for sales of more than one million vehicles each year. In the first half of 1996, Ford also plans to introduce a new version of its Escort small car, another of Ford’s top sellers. “The time to make changes is when you are strong,” said David McCammon, Ford’s vice president of finance. He said the automaker still managed to finish 1995 with $12.4 billion in cash despite a drop in full year reported profit of 22%.

a. Why would Ford’s reported profits for 1995 have dropped because of the launching of new vehicles?

b. How would Ford’s reported profit have differed if the company had used life cycle costing techniques to account for the costs of launching new products?

c. Explain what McCammon meant when he said, “The time to make changes is when you are strong.” d. By management’s willingness to proceed with launching new products even though doing so lowers reported profits for the current year, what can be inferred about the motivational elements in Ford’s cost management

d. By management’s willingness to proceed with launching new products even though doing so lowers reported profits for the current year, what can be inferred about the motivational elements in Ford’s cost management system?

a joke making the rounds in philadelphia area doctors rsquo lounges goes like this l 567982

A joke making the rounds in Philadelphia area doctors’ lounges goes like this: Leonard Abramson, chief executive officer of U.S. Healthcare Inc., the big health maintenance company, dies and goes to heaven, where he tells God what a great place it is. “Don’t get too comfortable,” God advised, “You’re only approved for a three day stay.” That’s the kind of cost control that the messianic Abramson understands. In the past two years, U.S. Healthcare has slashed the fees it pays to specialists and hospitals by 12 percent to 20 percent and sometimes more, these providers say. In the past year, it has cut members’ days in hospitals by 11 percent. Increasingly, it asks specialists and hospitals to assume the financial risk for procedures that cost more than anticipated. U.S. Healthcare is widely considered one of the country’s toughest HMO companies and one of the most innovative. It keeps 30 cents of every premium dollar to pay for salaries, marketing, administration and shareholder dividends, nearly 10 cents more than the industry average. It zealously tracks the performance of doctors and hospitals, paying more to those whose quality scores are high. It is earning robust profits—up 99 percent in the past 24 months—while rocking the tradition bound, health care markets along the East Coast. “Unless you change the culture of the community you’re working in, you’re not changing health care,” Abramson declares. In the health care community, U.S. Healthcare has both staunch supporters and critics. Consider the following additional information:

• Last year, Abramson earned $9.8 million in salary, bonuses, and stock options. Critics suggest this is excessive pay and takes resources that could otherwise have been applied to benefit patients. Abramson says, in a free market economy, large rewards flow to those who provide superior performance.

• Critics claim U.S. Healthcare selects service providers based on price rather than quality.

• The company pays doctors to take training courses, such as one in breast cancer screening techniques.

• The company has an information system that allows it to rank hospitals according to infection rates of urology patients, by the length of stay for coronary bypass surgery, or by the number of babies delivered by Cesarean. The company shows the comparative data to its service providers and uses it as leverage in negotiations.

• The company is increasingly using performance based pay contracts for its service providers.

• All of U.S. Healthcare’s HMOs have earned three year accreditation from the National Committee for Quality Assurance; this is the best performance of any U.S. managed care company. Examine the preceding information and discuss your opinion as to whether U.S. Healthcare is applying an ethical approach to the management of healthcare costs. Where possible, use concepts presented in the chapter to defend your position.

strazzanti is president of com corp industries a 13 million 100 employee metal stamp 567983

Strazzanti is president of Com Corp Industries, a $13 million, 100 employee metal stamping shop he incorporated in Cleveland in 1980. He’d started out as amachine operator with a tool and die manufacturer, rapidly climbing the ladder to become general manager of another stamping company. Along the way, he didn’t just dream about what he’d change if he were a company president. He figured out ways to make his dreams a reality. [Dateline Cleveland, 1977] Packie Presser was vice president of the notoriously demanding local chapter of the teamsters’ union. The chapter controlled a metal stamping plant where Strazzanti had just been promoted from floor supervisor to general manager. Strazzanti recalls: Two coworkers marched into my office. It was a hot summer day; they had had a few beers at lunch and were fired up. They worked hard in the warehouse and saw the engineers working in the air conditioning and getting paid a lot more. They didn’t think it was fair and wanted more money. I knew I was in a no win situation. If I told them I thought they were being paid fairly, that’s what they expected; they were going to argue, and they weren’t going to be happy with the results. If I gave them more money, I was being unfair to everybody else. So I took out a legal pad and I told them to write down whatever they wantedto be paid. Thirty days from that date, they would get that pay—with one caveat. During the 30 days, I would shop for replacements for them. If I could get highly qualified people to work for anything less than that number, they would have to take a hike. They asked for time to think about it and never came back with a number. A lot of these guys think that if a company fills an order for a million dollars, it earns a million dollars in profit. I realized that if workers understood how a company earned a profit and how it had to be competitive, a lot of the resentment between managers and employees could be eliminated. And they needed to understand that if they improved their job skills, they could receive higher wage.

a. How does the sharing of information in an organization contribute to the empowerment of employees in a decentralized organizational structure to enhance their performance and that of the organization?

b. In a decentralized organization, how does the sharing of information allow employees to better understand their organizational roles relative to the roles of others?

c. In a decentralized organization, how does quality control depend on widespread distribution of information?

the motivational elements of a cost management system are integral to the success of 567984

The motivational elements of a cost management system are integral to the success of cost management goals. It is understood that the stronger the individual incentive to manage costs correctly, the greater is the likelihood that a given manager will act to manage costs effectively. Currently, many employers provide fringe benefits to their employees that may provide a significant social benefit but that do not necessarily provide the strongest incentive to effectively manage costs. A significant employee benefit of this type is employer provided health care. Discuss whether employers have an ethical responsibility to their employees, and to society, to provide health coverage to their employees, given that other forms of compensation that provide more powerful incentives could be offered to employees instead of health coverage.

match the following lettered terms on the left with the appropriate numbered descrip 568009

Match the following lettered terms on the left with the appropriate numbered description on the right.

a. Budgeted cost

1. An expense or loss

b. Direct cost

2. A cost that remains constant on a per unit basis

c. Distribution cost

3. A cost associated with a specific cost object

d. Expired cost

4. Direct material, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead

e. Fixed cost

5. Product cost

f. Inventoriable cost

6. A cost that varies inversely on a per unit basis with changes in activity

g. Period cost

7. A cost primarily associaed with the passage of time rather than production activity

h. Product cost

8. An expected future cost

i. Variable cost

9. A cost of transporting a product

classify the following into capital and revenue expenditure by stating reasons 567562

Classify the following into capital and revenue expenditure by stating reasons:

  1. Employees State Insurance premium paid Rs 750.
  2. Cost of cleaning, leveling and ploughing to plant coffee plant.
  3. Premium paid for a lease Rs 5,000.
  4. Rs 4,000 spent on painting the factory.
  5. Repair Rs 1,500 occurred due to the negligence of the foreman.
  6. Compensation paid on account of breach of contract to acquire raw material.
  7. A cine projector was replaced with a new one having the latest digital features for audio effect.
  8. Rs 25,000 was spent as lawyer’s fee to defend a suit, but it was not successful.
  9. Insurance claim of Rs 7,500 received from an insurance company for loss of goods by fire for Rs 10,000.
  10. Canal irrigation charges paid to the government.

state with reasons whether the following transactions are capital or revenue expendi 567563

State with reasons whether the following transactions are capital or revenue expenditure.

  1. Cost of pulling down an old building for raising a new one in its place.
  2. Rs 1,000 was spent to remove a worn out part and fix a new part.
  3. Rs 3,00,000 spent in advertisement, the benefit will spread over the next 5–6 years.
  4. Interest on a term loan for purchase of machinery.
    1. production has not yet begun,
    2. production has already begun.
  5. Legal expenses incurred in
    1. raising a debenture loan,
    2. purchasing a land for business expansion,
    3. incurred in a Tax Tribunal.
  6. Heavy expenditure on research of a particular product to be introduced.

state whether the following statements are true or false 567565

State whether the following statements are true or false

  1. Capital expenditure is money spent on purchase of fixed assets for immediate resale.
  2. Fixtures and fittings are intangible assets.
  3. Copyrights belong to intangible assets.
  4. Legal expenses incurred in connection with the purchase of property are revenue expenditures.
  5. Interest paid on a loan to purchase a fixed asset is also a capital expenditure.
  6. The direct benefit of revenue expenditure is usually exhausted in the accounting period itself.
  7. The cost of raw materials used in the manufacture of goods intended for resale is capital expenditure.
  8. All expenses incurred for upkeep of fixed assets are capital expenditure.
  9. Capital expenditure may result in enhancement of the value of an existing asset.
  10. Capital expenditure is transferred to trading and profit and loss account.
  11. The money spent on repairs of a second hand machine is capital expenditure.
  12. Prepaid expense is a capital expenditure.
  13. Preliminary expenses incurred on the formation of a limited company are deferred revenue expenditure.
  14. Any contributions to the capital of the business are capital receipts.
  15. Sale of inventories is a capital receipt.

fill in the blanks with appropriate word s 567566

Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s)

  1. Expenditures which results in the acquisition of a permanent asset is a __________expenditure.
  2. Amounts written off from the cost of fixed assets is __________ expenditure.
  3. Wages paid for the erection of machinery is a __________ expenditure.
  4. Amount spent on acquiring goodwill is a __________ expenditure.
  5. Amount spent to put second hand machinery in working condition is a __________ expenditure.
  6. Amount spent for replacement of part of a machine is __________ expenditure.
  7. Expenses incurred on whitewashing the factory premises at regular intervals are __________ expenditure.
  8. Heavy advertising to introduce a new product is __________ .
  9. Travelling expenses of Rs 30,000 paid to a technician for the erection of a new machine is __________ expenditure.
  10. Expenses incurred on consultancy service are __________ expenditure.
  11. Wages paid to workers for manufacturing a part of its plant are __________ expenditure.
  12. Temporary shed put up in the factory premises to store finished product is __________ expenditure.
  13. Gain on sale of fixed assets is treated as __________
  14. Assets minus liabilities is equal to __________
  15. Any expenditure incurred to reap benefit for a few accounting periods in future is called __________ expenditure.

from the following extracts of receipts and payments account and additional informat 567581

From the following extracts of Receipts and Payments Account and additional information you are required to calculate the income from subscriptions for the year ending Dec 31, 2008 and show them in the Income and Expenditure Account and the Balance Sheet of a recreation club in Delhi.

Extract of Receipts and Payments Accounts for the Year Ended Dec 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Subscription

2007: 5,000

2008:30,000

2009:6000

41,000

Additional information

  1. Subscription outstanding on Dec 31, 2007 – Rs 6000
  2. Subscriptions outstanding on Dec 31, 2008 – Rs 5,000
  3. Subscriptions received in advance on Dec 31, 2007 – Rs 6,000

from the following extracts of receipts and payments account and the additional info 567583

From the following extracts of Receipts and Payments Account and the additional information, you are required to compute the income from subscriptions for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008 and show the subscriptions items in the Income and Expenditure Account and the Balance Sheet as on Dec 31, 2008.

Extract of Receipts and Payments Account for the Year Ending on Dec 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs.

Income

Rs.

By Subscriptions (1,600 x Rs 100)

1,60,000

Additional Information

Subscriptions outstanding as on Dec 31, 2007: Rs 13,000

Subscriptions received in advance as Dec 31, 2007: Rs 14,500

(including Rs 2,500 for 2008)

There are 1,600 members each paying an annual subscription of Rs 100.

how will you deal with the following items while preparing the income and expenditur 567588

How will you deal with the following items while preparing the Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending on Mar 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet as on that date.

Case (a)

As on Apr 1, 2007

As on Mar 31, 2008

Rs

Rs

Creditors for Sports Materials

3,000

1,500

Stock of Sport Materials

5,000

500

During 2007–2008, the payment made to these creditors was Rs 20,750. There was no cash purchase.

Case (b)

As on Apr 1, 2007

As on Mar 31, 2008

Rs

Rs

Creditors for Sports Materials

4,000

9,000

Stock of Sport Materials

10,000

25,000

During 2007–2008, the payment made to these creditors amounted to Rs 35,000 and cash payments amounted to Rs 10,000.

from the following information compute the amount of stationery to be debited to inc 567589

From the following information, compute the amount of stationery to be debited to Income and Expenditure Account for 2008.

Rs

Stock of Stationery on Jan 1, 2008

5,000

Creditors for stationery on Jan 1, 2008

2,500

Advance paid for stationery carried forward from 2007

600

Amount paid for stationery during 2008

15,500

Stock on stationery on Dec 31, 2008

1,500

Creditors for stationery for 2008

4,400

Advance paid for stationery on Dec 31, 2008

500

from the following receipts and payments account of a social club and from the infor 567591

From the following Receipts and Payments Account of a social club and from the information, you are required to prepare an Income and Expenditure Account, for the year ended 31st December, 2008

Receipts and Payment Account for the Year Ending Dec 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Balance b/d

850

By Salaries

2,400

To Subscriptions

By General Expenses

800

2007: Rs 500

By Electric Charges

700

2008 : Rs 2,000

By Books

1,100

2009: Rs 400

2,900

By Newspapers

500

To Rent Received

1,200

By Balance c/d

500

To Profit from Entertainment

950

To Sale of Newspapers

100

6,000

6000

Information

  • The club has 100 members each paying an annual subscription of Rs 25, subscription outstanding on Dec 31, 2007 were Rs 600.
  • On Dec 31, 2008 salaries outstanding amounted to Rs 250. Salaries paid in 2008 included Rs 500 for the year 2007.
  • On Jan 1, 2008, the club owned building valued at Rs 50,000, furniture Rs 5,000 and books Rs 4,000.
  • Provide depreciation on furniture @ 10% p.a.

the secretary of a social club provides you with the following receipts and payments 567592

The secretary of a social club provides you with the following Receipts and Payments Account and the Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended Mar 31, 2009.

Receipts and Payments Account for the Year Ending Mar 31, 2009

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance B/d

9.000

Printing

1,500

2007 2008

2,000

Advertisements

2,820

2008 2009

3,000

5,000

Salary

26,000

Tuition Fees

Furniture Purchased

13,400

2008 2009

20,000

Rent Paid

10,400

2009 2010

2,000

22,000

Miscellaneous Expenses

2,200

Entrance Fees

Balance c/d

27,480

2008 2009

8,400

Membership Fees

2007 2008

6,000

2008 2009

23,000

2009 2010

7,800

36,800

Miscellaneous income

2,600

83,800

83,800

Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Mar 31, 2009

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

Income

Rs

Printing

1,600

Tuition Fees

22,000

Advertisement

3,000

Membership Fees

23,000

Rent Paid

12,000

Miscellaneous

2,600

Salary

24,000

Income

3,200

Miscellaneous Expenses

2,200

Interest

Excess of Income over Expenditure

8,000

50,800

50,800

The club had the following assets on Mar 31, 2008:

Investments

Rs 80,000

Furniture

Rs 20,000

Reference Books

Rs 10,000

You are required to prepare the Balance Sheets of the club as on Mar 31, 2008 and Mar 31, 2009.

from the following information and receipts and payments account of a club prepare i 567593

From the following information and Receipts and Payments Account of a club, prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Dec 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet on that date.

Receipts and Payments Account for the year ending Dec 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance b/d

4,000

Rent

2,400

Entrance Fees

600

Wages

2,600

Subscriptions

21,400

Lighting Charges

1,000

Donations

4,000

Books Purchases

3,000

Life Membership Fees

3,000

Office Expenses

4,000

Interest on Deposits

500

10% Fixed Deposits

2,000

Proceeds of Tournaments

4,500

(on July 1, 2008)

3,600

Tournament Expenses

1,400

Cash in Hand

38,000

38,000

Additional Information

  1. On Dec 31, 2007, the club possessed books worth Rs 25,000 and furniture worth Rs 10,000. Provide depreciation on these assets @ 10% including the purchases during the year.
  2. Subscription in arrears at the beginning of the year amounted to Rs 500 and at the end of end of the year Rs 800 was outstanding.
  3. The club paid three months rents in advance both in the beginning and at the end of the year.

prepare income and expenditure account for the year ending dec 31 2008 and a balance 567594

Prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Dec 31, 2008 and a Balance Sheet on that date from the following Receipts and Payments Account and the Balance Sheet.

Receipts and Payments Account for 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

Balance (Jan 1. 2008)

20,000

Expenses

Subscriptions

2007

1,500

2007

500

2008

4,000

2008

2,500

Furniture

5,000

2009

800

Interest

1,600

Entrance Fees

1,200

Misc. Expenses

5,400

Locket Rent

100

Balance (Dec 31, 2008)

17,500

Misc. Incomes

9,000

35,000

35,000

Balance Sheet as on Dec 31, 2007

Liabilities

Rs

Assets

Rs

Capital Fund

50,000

Buildings + Land

50,000

Subscriptions received in advance

2,000

Outstanding Subscription

600

Outstanding Expenses

3,000

Outstanding Locker Rent

400

Loan

16,000

Cash

20,000

71,000

71,000

from the following information of a club prepare income and expenditure account for 567595

From the following information of a club, prepare Income and Expenditure Account for year ending Mar 31, 2008 and Balance Sheet as on that date.

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Member’s Subscriptions

10,000

By Upkeep of Pavilion

5,000

To Member’s Admission Fees

1,000

By Expenses regarding

To Sale of old balls, bat, etc.

200

Tournaments

1,000

To Hire of Ground

1,000

By Rates and Insurance

500

To Subscription for Tournament

1,800

By Telephones

500

To Drawn from Bank

5,000

By Printing and Stationery

1,000

To Donations

16,000

By General Charges

300

By Secretary’s Honorarium

2,000

By Grass Seeds

200

By Bats, Balls, etc.

I,500

By Deposit in Bank

23,000

35,000

35,000

Rs

Assets on Apr 1, 2007

Cash at Bank

5,000

Stock of balls, bats, etc.

3,000

Printing and Stationery (stock)

500

Subscription Due

1,000

Information

  1. Surplus on account of tournaments and donations should be kept in reserve for a permanent pavilion.
  2. Subscription due on Mar 31, 2008 Rs 1,500.
  3. Write off 50% of balls, Bats Account and Printing and Stationery Account.
  4. Treat Admission Fees as of Revenue Nature.

prepare income and expenditure account for the year ending on mar 31 2009 and balanc 567596

Prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending on Mar 31, 2009 and Balance Sheet on that date from the following:

Receipts and Payments Account for the Year Ending on Mar 31, 2009

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Balance b/d

1,000

By Rent

9,000

Cash

6,000

By Miscellaneous Expenses

27,500

Bank

200

By Postage Expenses

1,000

Stamps

By Furniture

7,000

Rs

By Creditors for Sports Materials

13,000

To Subscriptions

Rs

By Cost of Prizes (to be awarded)

3,000

2007 2008

4,000

By Cash Purchase of Sports materials

4,500

2008 2009

70,000

By Match Expenses

6,000

2009 2010

3,000

77,000

By Balance c/d

To Entrance Fees

10,000

Cash

500

To General Donations

5,000

Bank

36,900

To Donations for Prize Fund

3,500

Stamps

100

To Sale of Old Sports Materials

4,300

To Interest on Prize Fund

1,000

Investments

To Miscellaneous Receipts

500

1,08,500

1,08,500

Information

Particulars

Apr 1, 2008

Mar 31, 2009

Rs

Rs

Sports Materials

5,000

6,000

Furniture

70,000

10% Prize Fund Investments (face value Rs 20,000)

19,000

Creditors for Sports Materials

1,500

3,000

Subscriptions in arrears

5,000

Subscription in advance

2,000

Prize fund

20,000

Rent paid in advance

1,500

Outstanding Rent

1,500

Outstanding Miscellaneous Expenses

2,500

4,500

Miscellaneous Expenses paid in Advance

1,000

2,000

Additional Information

  1. There are 800 members, each paying an annual subscription of Rs 100.
  2. 50% of Entrance Fees is to be capitalised.
  3. Book value of Sports materials sold was Rs 4,000.
  4. Depreciation on Furniture is to be provided @ 10%.

summary of bank transactions of a club for the year ending mar 31 2008 567597

Summary of Bank Transactions of a Club for the Year Ending Mar 31, 2008

Dr.

Cr.

Receipts

Rs

Payments

Rs

To Petty Cash in hand

300

By Rent

1,000

To Balance as per Pass Book

5,000

By Entertainment

1,500

To Subscriptions

4,000

By Advertisement (for 2006 2007 Rs 200)

1,200

To Entertainment

2,700

By Capital Expenditure

3,000

To Legacy (to be capitalised)

1,000

By Upkeep of Grounds

800

To Donation for Books

1,500

By Bank Charges

100

To General Donations

1,200

By Salary

2,400

By Party Expenses

100

By Balance as per Pass Book

5,500

By Petty Cash in Hand

100

15,700

15,700

Information

Apr 1, 2007

Mar 31, 2008

Rs

Rs

Unpresented cheque, being payment for Rent

200

100

Interest on fixed deposit of Rs 10,000

not entered in Pass Book

1,000

Entry in respect of bank charges was not

passed through the Cash Book

100

A member deposited subscription for 2008–2009,

direct into bank, not passed through the Cash Book

50

Cheques deposited for subscription but

not yet cleared by the bank

2,000

1,000

Required: Prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Mar 31, 2008 and Balance Sheet on that date.

the following is the trial balance of a public school on mar 31 2005 567598

The following is the Trial Balance of a Public School on Mar 31, 2005

Debit Balance

Rs

Credit Balance

Rs

Land

50,000

Capital Fund

15,60,000

Building

15,00,000

Tuition Fees Received

25,10,000

Furniture

3,00,000

Salaries Payable

1,75,000

Teacher’s Salary

12,00,000

Prize Fund

2,00,000

Clerk’s Salary

2,60,000

Tournament Fund

300,000

Investments

7,00,000

General Reserve Fund

2,00,000

Stationery

1,73.000

Interest received on Investments

77,000

Lighting

36,000

Donations for School Hall

1,50,000

General Expenses

65,000

Prize Awarded

20,000

Tournament Expenses

30,000

Books

3,75,000

Bank Balance

4,63,000

51,72,000

51,72,000

Depreciation of Building @ 2%, furniture @ 10% and Books @ 20%. The investments were made against various funds commonly.

Prepare Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending Mar 31, 2005 and the Balance Sheet on that date.

calculate the total amount of salary paid in cash in 2008 from the following income 567600

Calculate the total amount of salary paid in cash in 2008, from the following Income and Expenditure Account extract, to be included in Receipts and payments Account for the year ending Dec 31, 2008.

Rs

Salary paid as per Income and Expenditure A/c for 2008

95,000

Outstanding Salary on Dec 31, 2008

15,000

Advance Salaries paid in 2007

7,500

Outstanding Salary on Jan 1, 2008

9,000

Advance Salary paid in 2008

16,500

in extract of income and expenditure account for the year ending 2008 is shown below 567601

In extract of Income and Expenditure Account for the year ending 2008 is shown below:

Rs

(i) Expenditures stationery as per Income and Expenditure Account for 2008

75,000

(ii) Stock of stationery on Jan 1, 2008

15,000

(iii) Creditors for stationery on Jan 1, 2008

30,000

(iv) Creditors for stationery on Dec 31, 2008

12,000

(v) Advance payments for stationery in 2008

2,500

(vi) Stock of stationery on Dec 31, 2008

5,500

(vii) Advance payments for stationery on Jan 1, 2008

1,000

Calculate amount spent on stationeries to be included in Receipts and Payments Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 2008.

you are required to prepare receipts and payments account from the following income 567602

You are required to prepare Receipts and Payments Account from the following Income and Expenditure A/c for the year 2008.

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

Income

Rs

To Rent

Rs

By Subscription

Rs

Paid

9,000

Received

20,000

Add: O/s at end

1,000

Add: O/s at end

5,000

Less: O/s In beg

2,000

8,000

Add: Advance in the

2,000

To Insurance Premium

beginning

3,000

Paid

5,000

Less: O/s in the beg

1,000

23,000

Add: Pre paid in the beginning

1,000

Less: Advance at the end

Less: Pre paid in the end

2,000

4,000

By Entrance Fees (40%

12,000

To Sports Materials

6,000

capitalised)

Add: Opening Stock

1,000

By Life Membership Fees

4,000

Less: Closing Stock

2,750

4,250

(60% capitalised)

To Newspaper and Periodicals

1,000

By General Donations

5,000

To Depreciation010%0n old

By Locker Rent

Rs

Bulding

7,000

Received

3,000

To Depreciation ek10% on

3,000

Add: 0/s at end

500

furniture bought on Jan 1, 2008

Less: Advance end

600

2,900

To loss on sale of Sports

750

By Interest @ 10% on

Materials

General Fund investment

(Book value: As 1000)

Received

5,000

To Salaries

4,000

Add: Accrued

1,000

6,000

To Surplus

27,000

By Sale of Newspapers

100

By Income from Charity Show

Show income

11,000

Less: Show Expenses

5,000

6,000

59,000

59,000

Information

Cash Balance as on Jan 1, 2008

Rs 3,000

Cash Balance as on Dec 31, 2008

Rs 25,000

Bank Balance as on Jan 1, 2008

Rs 2,000

the income and expenditure account of the chennai club for the year ending at mar 31 567603

The Income and Expenditure Account of the Chennai Club for the year ending at Mar 31, 2008 is as follows:

Dr.

Cr.

Expenditure

Rs

Income

Rs

Salaries

90,000

Subscriptions

1,20,000

Printing and Stationery

5,000

Entrance Fees

5,000

Postage

300

Contribution to Dinner

27,000

Telephone

1,200

General Expenses

9,000

Interest and Bank Charge

3,500

Audit Fees

2,000

Annual Dinner Expenses

15,000

Depreciation

6,000

Surplus

20,000

1,52,000

1,52,000

The account has been prepared after the following adjustments.

Mar 31, 2007

Mar 31, 2008

Rs

Rs

Subscription Outstanding

10,000

12,000

Subscription received in Advance

9,000

8,000

Salaries Outstanding

4,000

6,000

Audit Fee Outstanding

1,000

2,000

Land and Buildings

1,50,000

1,50,000

Sports Equipments

40,000

54,000

(after 10% Depreciation)

Loan

50,000

50,000

Cash in Hand

20,000

You are required to prepare Receipts and Payments Account of the Chennai Club for the year 2007–2008 and the Balance Sheet as on Mar 31, 2008.

from the following particulars of mr raj for the year ending on mar 31 2010 prepare 567541

From the following particulars of Mr. Raj for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010, prepare the trading account.

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock

1,25.000

Sales

22,50,000

Purchases

10,25,000

Sales Returns

12,500

Purchases Returns

6.000

Clearing Charges

2250

Carriage and Freight

20.000

Carriage on Sales

3,350

Royalty on Productton

2.700

Customs Duty

28,000

Office Rent

6,000

Dock Dues

1,200

Factory Rent

12,500

Octroi

3,750

Manager’s Salary (office)

60,000

Manager’s Salary (factory)

82,500

Salary of Foreman

56,000

Factory Insurance

2,750

Office Insurance

2,100

Fuel. Gas. Water

37,500

Factory Light and Power

39,000

General Expenses

27,500

Stock at the end

1,87,500

Wages (productive)

2,06,000

from the following balances of m s kapil and sons prepare a trading and profit and l 567542

From the following balances of M/S Kapil and Sons, prepare a Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010.

Rs

Rs

Opening stock

1,60,000

Creditors

56,000

Stock (Apr 1. 2009)

21,600

Bills Payable

36,000

Sales

1,00,864

Purchases

56,912

Returns inwards

2,000

Returns Outwards

4,200

Discount (Cr.)

440

Discount (Dr.)

200

Commission (Cr.)

1,600

Salaries

6,000

Wages

8,400

Insurance

600

Interest

520

Bad Debts

204

Postage

540

Carriage

1,600

Carriage on Sales

1,000

Depreciation

600

General Charges

2,460

Travelling Expenses

1,640

Building

20,000

Advertisements

1,700

Stock (Mar 31, 2010)

10,000

prepare the manufacturing and trading account 567543

The following balances appeared in the Trial Balance of Star and Co.

Rs

Opening Stock:

Raw Material

1,20,000

Work in progress

70,000

Finished goods

1,40,000

Purchases

5,40,000

Sales

10,50,000

Returns:

Purchases

15,000

Sales

9,000

Wages

1,95,000

Factory expenses

1,35,000

Freight:

Inwards

25,000

Outwards

45,000

Carriage:

Inwards

5,000

Outwards

10,000

At the end of the accounting period, the stock on hand were:

Raw Materials

1,05,000

Work in progress

30,000

Finished Goods

1,65,000

Prepare the Manufacturing and Trading Account.

prepare manufacturing and trading account and profit and loss account from the follo 567544

Prepare Manufacturing and Trading account and Profit and Loss Account from the following information for year ending on Mar 31, 2010.

Stock of raw materials (opening)

7,31,520

Stock of raw materials (closing)

8,89,200

Purchases of raw materials

6,25,824

Work in progress on Apr 1, 2009

2,25,072

Work in progress on Mar 31, 2009

2,47,824

Finished goods on Apr 1, 2009

5,15,232

Finished goods on Mar 31, 2010

3,04,560

Productive Wages

5,02,568

Unproductive Wages

14,160

Carriage Inward

9,648

Rent and Taxes

15,840

Lighting and Heating

8,064

Depreciation and Maintenance of Plant

76,896

Works Salaries

56,304

Stores Expenses

10,512

General Works Expenses

2,01,600

Sales

21,60,000

Sales Returns

60,000

Sale of Scrap

60,000

Office Rent

2,400

Office Salaries

6,000

Distribution Expenses

7,200

Bad Debts

8,400

from the following trial balance of mrs renu prepare trading profit and loss account 567545

From the following trial balance of Mrs. Renu prepare Trading, Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Dec 31, 2009.

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Purchases

16,20,000

Sales

31,20,000

Salaries and Wages

10,50,000

Returns Outward

36,000

Office Expenses

12,000

Discount Received

18,000

Trading Expenses

24,000

Interest Received

9,000

Factory Expenses

33,000

Capital

5,34,000

Carriage Inwards

24,000

Return Inward

36,000

Discount Allowed

12,000

Commission

6,000

Stock

1,80,000

Income Tax

1,20,000

Cash in hand

6,00,000

37,17,000

37,17,000

give the necessary adjusting entries for the following items appearing outside the t 567546

Give the necessary adjusting entries for the following items appearing outside the Trial Balance as on Dec 31, 2009

  1. Closing stock as on Dec 31, 2009 Rs 10,000
  2. Rent received in advance Rs 3,750
  3. Salary due but not paid Rs 5,400
  4. Interest due but not received Rs 1,200
  5. Unexpired insurance on Dec 31, 2009 Rs 970
  6. Bad debts to be written off Rs 600
  7. Depreciation on fixed assets @ 20%
  8. Create provision for doubtful debts @ 5%
  9. Create provision for discount on debtors @ 2%
  10. Create provision for discount on creditors @ 2%
  11. All interest on capital @ 12% p.a.
  12. Charge interest on drawings @ 10% p.a.

Other Information: Fixed Assets Rs 69,000; Debtors: Rs 90,000; Creditors: Rs 40,000; Capital: Rs 2,50,000; Drawings: Rs 10,000.

trial balance of mr balaji as on mar 31 2010 was as follows 567547

Trial Balance of Mr. Balaji as on Mar 31, 2010 was as follows:

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Dr. Rs

Capital/Drawings

1,600

90,000

Stock as on Apr 1, 2009

4,500

Purchases/Sales

59,500

32,250

Sales Returns

1,000

Insurance Premium

750

Duty Paid on Purchases

5,000

Primary Packing Expenses

1,000

Carriage Outwards

4,000

Postage

50

Advertisement

500

Bad Debts

150

Discount

250

Bills Payable

4,500

Bank Overdraft

1,500

Land and Buildings

45,000

Plant and Machinery

35,000

Furniture

500

Debtors/Creditors

12,700

21,000

Goodwill

4,500

Wages and Salaries

8,000

Cash in Hand

250

Cash at Bank

20,000

1,76,750

1,76,750

Adjustments

  1. Closing stock as on Mar 31, 2010 is Rs 10,800
  2. Interest on bank O/D unpaid is Rs 138
  3. Half yearly insurance premium pre paid
  4. Depreciate land and buildings @ 10%
  5. Depreciate plant and machinery @ 20%
  6. Write off further bad debts of Rs 200
  7. Make provisions for required doubtful debts @ 5% on debtors.

You are required to prepare trading and profit and loss A/c for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010 and a balance sheet as on that date.

from the following data prepare trading and profit and loss account for the year end 567548

From the following data prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010 and a Balance sheet as on that date:

Rs

Rs

Cash at bank

45,800

Purchases

2,24,800

Accounts Receivable

81,300

Sales

7,14,000

Merchandise Inventory

122,200

Dealing Expenses

24,400

Stores Equipment

77,000

Selling Expenses

2,400

Office equipment

51,600

Accumulated Depreciation

Salaries

64,000

On Stores equipment

24,500

Drawings

48,000

On Office equipment

18,500

Sales Returns

8,240

Accounts Payable

77,200

Office Expenses

36,000

Capital

1,77,000

Rent

18,400

Purchases Returns

5,440

Insurance

15,500

Merchandise inventory on Mar 31, 2010 is Rs 1,14,600. Depreciation for current year on stores equipment is Rs 6,200; and on office equipment: Rs 5,400; Rs 3,200 for rent is due but not paid. Insurance prepaid is Rs 5,500. At computer of the value of Rs 10,000 purchased during the year is included in the purchase.

you are required to show necessary accounts in the ledger 567549

A trader maintained provision for doubtful debts @ 5%; provision for discount @ 2% on debtors and reserve for discount @ 2% on creditors which on Jan 1, 2008 stood at Rs 4,500, Rs 1,500 and Rs 1,200, respectively. His balances on Dec 31, 2008 and on Dec 31, 2009 were:

Dec 31, 2008 Rs

Dec 31, 2009 Rs

Bad Debts written off

5,400

900

Discount Allowed

1,800

600

Sundry Debtors

60,000

18,000

Discount Received

900

150

Sundry Creditors

45,000

90,000

You are required to show necessary accounts in the ledger:

from the following particulars prepare 1 reserve the doubtful debts a c 2 reserve fo 567550

From the following particulars prepare (1) Reserve the Doubtful Debts A/c; (2) Reserve for Discount on Debtors and (3) Reserve for Discount on Creditors for both the years:

  1. Balance as on Jan 1, 2008; Reserve for doubtful debts Rs 3,000; Reserve for Discount on debtors Rs 1,500; Reserve for discount on creditors Rs 1,200.
  2. Total debtors as on Dec 31, 2008 were Rs 75,000 after writing off bad debts Rs 1,800 and allowing discount Rs 600.
  3. Total debtors as on Dec 31, 2009 were Rs 60,000 after writing off bad debts Rs 1,800 and allowing discount Rs 150.
  4. Total creditors as on Dec 31, 2008 and 2000 were Rs 45,000 and Rs 30,000, respectively.
  5. Discounts received during the years were Rs 900 and Rs 150, respectively.
  6. Provide 5% as Reserve for Doubtful Debts; 2½12; % as Reserve for Discount on Debtors and 2% as Reserve for Discount on Creditors.

an inexperienced book keeper prepared the following trial balance as on mar 31 2010 567551

An inexperienced book keeper prepared the following Trial Balance as on Mar 31, 2010

Debit Balance

Rs

Credit Balance

Rs

Capital

34.000

Building

25

10% Loan

30.000

Funiture

5

Creditors

15.000

Plant

20

Bills Receivable

6.000

Debtors

25

Returns Inward

3.000

Bills Payable

5,500

Carriage Outward

2,000

Commission Received

2,500

Sales

75,000

Opening stock

15

Wages

7,500

Salaries

6

Rent and Rates

5

Printing and Stationery

2

Purchases

40

Interest on loan

(Paid up to Mar 31. 2010)

2,500

Returns Inward

1,500

Carriage Inward

1,500

1.60.000

1,60,000

Correct the Trial Balance.

Prepare Trading and P and L account for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010 and the Balance Sheet on that date after considering the following adjustments:

  1. Closing stock was valued at Rs 20,500
  2. Write off bad debts of Rs 500
  3. Outstanding salary Rs 500
  4. Depreciate building and furniture by 10% p.a.
  5. Depreciate plant by 15% p.a.

write off rs 2 400 as bad debts and make reserve for bad debts on sundry debtors 5 567552

Mrs. Bhagya submitted to you the following trial balance which she has not been able to agree. Rewrite the Trial Balance and prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Dec 31, 2009 and a balance as on that date after giving effect to the under mentioned adjustments:

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Dr. Rs

Capital

64,000

Opening stock

70,000

Closing stock

75,160

Drawings

13,220

Return Inward

2,200

Carriage Inward

4,960

Deposit with Mr. x

5,600

Return Outward

3,360

Carriage Outward

2,900

Rent Paid

3,200

Rent Outstanding

600

Purchases

52,000

Sundry Debtors

20,000

Sundry Creditors

16,000

Furniture

6,000

Sales

1,16,000

Wages

3,400

Cash

5,480

Goodwill

7,200

Advertisement

3,800

1,93,220

2,81,860

Adjustments

  1. Write off Rs 2,400 as bad debts and make Reserve for Bad Debts on Sundry Debtors @ 5%
  2. Stock values at Rs 8,000 were destroyed by fire on Dec 20, 2009 but insurance company admitted a claim for Rs 6,000; and paid the sum in Jan 2010.
  3. Depreciate furniture by 10%:

from the following trial balance and information prepare trading and profit and loss 567553

From the following Trial Balance and information prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account of Mr. Kumar for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010 and a Balance Sheet on that date.

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Dr. Rs

Capital/Drawings

6,000

50,000

Land and Buildings

45,000

Plant and Machinery

10,000

Furniture

2,500

Sales/Purchases

40,000

70,000

Returns

2,500

2,000

Debtors/Creditors

9,200

6,000

Loam from “x” on July 1, 2009 @ 6% p.a.

15,000

Carriage

5,000

Sundry Expenses

300

Printing and Stationery

250

Insurance

500

Provision for Doubtful Debts

500

Provision for Discount on Debtors

190

Bad Debts

200

Profit of Textile Department

5,000

Stock of general goods on Apr 1, 2009

10,650

Salaries and Wages

9,250

Trade Expenses

400

Stock of goods (textiles) on Mar 31, 2010

4,000

Cash at bank

2,300

Cash in hand

640

1,48,690

1,48,690

Information

  1. Stock of general goods on Mar 31, 2010 valued at Rs 13,650.
  2. Fire occurred on Mar 25, 2010 and Rs 5,000 worth of general goods were destroyed. The insurance company accepted claim for Rs 3,000 only and paid the claim money on Apr 15, 2010.
  3. Bad debts amounting to Rs 200 are to be written off.
  4. Provision for doubtful debts is to be made at 5% and for discount at 2% on debtors.
  5. Make a provision of 2% on creditors for discount.
  6. Received Rs 3,000 worth of goods on Mar 28, 2010 but the invoice of purchase was not recorded in purchases book.
  7. Kumar took away goods worth Rs 1,000 for personal use but no record was made thereof.
  8. Depreciate land and buildings as 2%, plant and machinery at 20% and furniture at 5%.
  9. Insurance prepaid amounts to Rs 100.

the accountant of m s leo enterprises extracted the following trial balance as on de 567554

The accountant of M/s Leo Enterprises extracted the following Trial Balance as on Dec 31, 2009.

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Dr. Rs

Capital

50,000

Drawings

9,000

Buildings

7,500

Furniture and Fittings

3,750

Motor Van

12,500

Loan from x @ 12% interest

7,500

Interest paid on above

225

Sales

50,000

Purchases

37,500

Stock as on Jan 1, 2009

16,000

Stock as on Dec 31, 2009

12,500

Establishment Expenses

7,500

Freight Inward

1,000

Freight Outward

500

Commission Received

3,750

Sundry Debtors

14,050

Bank Balance

10,250

Sundry Creditors

5,000

1,34,250

1,34,250

The accountant located the following errors but is unable to proceed any further:

  1. A totaling error in bank column of payment side of cash book whereby the column was under totaled by Rs 250.
  2. Interest on loan paid for the quarter ending Sep 30, 2009. Rs 225 was omitted to be posted in the ledger. There was no further payment of interest.

You are required to set right the Trial Balance and prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Dec 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet as on that date after carrying out the following:

  1. Depreciate:
    1. Building at 2.5% p.a.
    2. Furniture at 10% p.a.
    3. Motor van at 25% p.a.
  2. Balance of interest on the loan is also to be provided for

from the following particulars extracted from the books of gambir prepare trading an 567555

From the following particulars extracted from the books of Gambir, prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010 after making the necessary adjustments:

Rs

Rs

Gambirs’ Capital A/c

1,08,100

Interest Received

1,450

Stock (Apr 1, 2009)

46,800

Cash at bank

8,000

Sales

2,89,600

Discount Received

2,990

Sales Returns

8,600

Investments @ 5%

Purchases

2,43,100

as on Apr 1, 2009

5,000

Purchases Returns

5,800

Furniture (Apr 1, 2009)

1,800

Capital Inwards

18,600

Discount Allowed

7,540

Rent

5,700

General Expenses

3,920

Salaries

9,300

Audit Fees

700

Sundry Debtors

24,000

Fire Insurance Premium

600

Sundry Creditors

14,800

Travelling Expenses

2,330

Loan from

Postage and Telegrams

870

State Bank of India @ 12%

20,000

Cash on hand

380

Interest paid

900

Deposits at 10% as on

Printing and Stationery

3,400

Apr 1, 2009 (Dr.)

30,000

Advertisement

11,200

Drawings

10,000

Adjustments

  1. Value of stock as on Mar 31, 2010 is Rs 78,600. This includes goods returned by customers on Mar 31, 2010 to the value of Rs 3,000 for which no entry has been passed in the books.
  2. Purchases include furniture purchased on Jan 1, 2010 for Rs 2,000.
  3. Depreciate furniture as 10% p.a.

Rs

Rs

Mar 31, 2010

To Balance c/d

20,000

Apr 1, 2009

By Balance b/d

10,000

Mar 31,2010

By Bank

10,000

20,000

20,000

  • The loan account from State Bank of India in the books of Gambir appears as follows:
  • Sundry Debtors included Rs 4,000 due from Rahul and Sundry Creditors include Rs 2,000 due to him.
  • Interest paid include Rs 600 paid to State Bank of India.
  • Interest received represents Rs 200 from the Sundry Debtors and the balance on investments and deposits.
  • Provide for interest payable to State Bank of India and for interest receivable on investments and deposits.
  • Make a provision for doubtful debts at 5% on the balance under “Sundry Debtors.” No such provision needs to be made for the deposits.

following figures are extracted from the books of bintu 567556

Following figures are extracted from the books of Bintu:

Rs

Rs

Capital

2,28800

Stock (Apr I, 2009)

38,500

Drawings

13,200

Wages

35,200

Plant and Machinery

99,000

Sundry Creditors

44,000

Freehold Property

66,000

Postage and Telegrams

1,540

Purchases

1,10,000

Insurance

1,760

Returns Outwards

1,100

Gas and Fuel

2,970

Salaries

13,200

Bad Debts

660

Office Expenses

2,750

Office Rent

2,860

Office Furniture

5,500

Freight

9,900

Discount (Dr.)

1,320

Loose Tools

2,200

Sundry Debtors

20,260

Factory Lighting

1,100

Loan to ‘x” @ 10% p.a.

Provision for Doubtfull Debts

880

on Apr 1, 2009

44,000

Interest on loan to ‘x”

1,100

Sales

2,31,440

Cash at bank

29,260

Bills Payable

5,500

Cash in hand

2,640

Adjustment

  1. Stock on Mar 31, 2010 was valued as Rs 72,600
  2. A new machine was installed during the year costing Rs 15,400, but it was not recorded in the books and no payment was made for it. Wages Rs 1,100 paid for its erection have been debited to wages account.
  3. Depreciate plant and machinery by 33 1/3%, Furniture by 10% and Freehold property by 5%.
  4. Loose tools were valued at Rs 1,760 on Mar 31, 2010.
  5. If the Sundry Debtors Rs 660 are bad and should be written off.
  6. Maintain a provision of 5% on Sundry Debtors for doubtful debts.
  7. The manager is entitled to a commission of 10% of the net profits after charging such commission.

following is the trial balance as on dec 31 2009 567557

Following is the Trial Balance as on Dec 31, 2009

Dr.

Cr.

Particulars

Rs

Rs

Opening Stock

15,000

Drawings and Capital

5,000

50,000

Purchases and Sales (adjusted)

75,000

1,37,500

Wages

3,000

Salaries

10,000

Import Duty

2,500

Carriage Inwards

2,000

Insurance

2,500

Advertisement

5,000

Furniture

20,000

Bad Debts

2,500

Book Debts

25,000

Creditors

15,000

Loose Tools

12,500

Reserve for Bad Debts

1,000

Rent

2,500

Discount Received

4,000

Depreciation of Furniture

2,500

Depreciation of Loose Tools

2,500

Closing Stock

15,000

Outstanding Import Duty

5,000

Premises

35,000

Commission Received

5,000

Cash Balance

10,000

Bank Balance

2,500

32,500

2,50,000

2,50,000

Adjustments

  1. A customer of Rs 2,500 is also a creditor of Rs 5,000. Create Reserve for Bad Debts @ 5% p.a. after writing off further bad debt of Rs 2,500.
  2. Depreciate furniture and loose tools @ 25% and by Rs 5,000, respectively, and appreciate premises by Rs 5,000.
  3. Annual payment is salaries Rs 12,500 and rent Rs 5,000.
  4. Unexpired import duty and insurance are Rs 500 each.
  5. Sale of furniture (book value nil) for Rs 1,500 to be accounted for as omitted in the books.
  6. Withdrawn from the bank by the owner for domestic use of Rs 7,500.

You are required to prepare the final accounts by applying marshalling of balance sheet as on Dec 31, 2009.

from the following balances extracted from this books of mrs rukhmani prepare tradin 567558

From the following balances extracted from this books of Mrs. Rukhmani, prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year Mar 31, 2010 and a Balance Sheet as on that date:

Dr.

Dr.

Particulars

Rs

Rs

Purchases

35,640

Mrs. Rukhmani’s Capital

30,000

Computer at Cost

9,190

Cash at Bank

2,000

Cash in Hand

1,418

Sundry Creditors

6,500

Bills Payable

5,110

Furniture and Fittings

770

Rent

6,270

Discount Received

11,000

Bills Receivable

3,360

Trade Charges

460

Sundry Debtors

17,078

Sales

30,360

Return Outwards

5,716

Drawings

2,600

Rent Due

160

Discount Allowed

270

Wages

900

Salaries

8,390

Returns Inwards

500

88,846

88,846

Adjustments

  1. Closing stock on Mar 31, 2010 was valued at cost Rs 12,800 (Market value, Rs 13,100)
  2. Rs 3,000 paid to Mrs. Y against bill payable were debited by mistake to Mrs. Z. and included in the list of Sundry Debtors.
  3. Travelling expenses paid to sales representative Rs 2,500 for the month of Mar 2010 were debited to his personal account and included in the list of Sundry Debtors.
  4. Depreciate furniture and fittings by 10% p.a.
  5. Provide for doubtful debts at 5% on Sundry Debtors.
  6. Goods casting Rs 750 were used by the proprietor. Entry for it has not yet been passed.
  7. Salaries include Rs 6,000 paid to the sales representative who is further entitled to a commission of 5% on net sales.
  8. Stationery charges Rs 600 on Mar 31, 2010.
  9. Purchases include opening stock values at Rs 3,500 (cost price).
  10. Sales representative is further entitled to an extra commission of 5% on net profit after charging his extra commission.
  11. No depreciation need be provided for computer, as it was purchased on Mar 31, 2010 and not to put to use on that date.

trading and profit and loss account for the year ending on mar 31 2010 567559

The accountant of Khurana ascertained the business profits; but due to his defective knowledge or otherwise a number of discrepancies have crept in the Trading and Profit and Loss Account prepared by him. You are requested to draft these accounts properly ascertaining the cost of goods produced. The accounts prepared by the accountant are as under:

Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010

Particulars

Rs

Rs

Particulars

Rs

Rs

To Purchases of

By Last Year’s Balance

21,550

Raw Materials

67,475

By Opening Stock:

Add: Returns Inwards

350

Raw Materials

2,000

Add. Closing Stock:

67,825

Work in Progress

1,500

Raw Materials

6,075

Finished Stock

2,050

5,550

W.I.P.

5,000

By Sales

85,500

Finished Stock

6,850

Less: Returns Outwards

425

85,075

To Wages Productive

17,925

85,750

By Carriage Outward

525

To Factory Expenses

10,000

Less: Carriage Inward

500

25

To Factory Expenses

8,200

By Trade Discount

paid in Advance

2,900

On Purchases

1,500

To General Office

1,250

Lest Cash Discount Allowed

Expenses

3,000

By Net Loss

50

1,450

To Distribution Expenses

500

4,700

To Sales Expenses

3,500

Less Purchase Expenses

3,000

500

To Export Duty

1,500

Less: Import duty

1,000

500

To Interest on Bank Loan

3,000

To Depreciation on Plant

2,500

To Depreciation on

Office Furniture

250

1,18,350

1,18,350

from the following particulars for the year ending on mar 31 2010 of m s gemini comp 567560

From the following particulars for the year ending on Mar 31, 2010 of M/s Gemini Company, prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet on that date:

Rs

Rs

Stock Apr 1. 2009

46.400

Land and Building

3.19.000

Capital Apr 1, 2009

2.90.000

Furniture and Fixture

14,500

Purchases

1.16.000

Bills Receivable

20.300

Sales

4.64.000

Bills Payable

14.500

Office Expenses

46,690

Sundry Debtors

1,16,000

Return Inward

8.700

Plant and Machinery

26.100

Interest on Loan

1.740

Sundry Creditors

91.640

Return Outward

2.320

Loan (Dr.) @ 10% on Apr I. 2009

29.000

Drawings

17.400

Investment

17,400

Wages

40.020

Cash at Bank

20.300

Advertisement

31.900

Cash in Hand

1.450

Apprenticeship Premium

6,960

Stock as on Mr 31, 2010

40,600

Adjustments to be made for the current year are:

  1. Interest on capital to be allowed at 5% for the year.
  2. Interest on drawings to be charged to him as ascertained for the year Rs 464.
  3. Apprenticeship premium is for three years received in advance on Apr 1, 2009.
  4. Stock valued at Rs 17,400 destroyed by fire on Mar 26, 2010 but the insurance company admitted a claim of Rs 11,600 only to be paid in the year 2011.
  5. Rs 29,000 out of advertisement expenses are to be carried forward.
  6. The manager is entitled to a commission of 10% of the net profit calculated after charging such commission.
  7. The stock includes material worth Rs 5,800 for which bill had not been received and therefore, not yet accounted for

from the following information prepare the profit and loss account for the year endi 567500

From the following information, prepare the Profit and Loss Account for the year ending on Mar 31, 20….

Rs

Rs

Gross Profit

3,70,000

Apprenticeship Premium paid

2,000

Salaries

7,500

General Expenses

6,000

Carriage Outwards

2,500

Miscellaneous Income

3,500

Freight Outwards

3,000

Reinvestment on Fixed Assets

30,000

Discount Allowed

1,000

Machinery sold

12,000

Discount Received

1,500

(Book value Rs 15,000)

3,000

Commission Allowed

1,500

Interest Received

Commission Received

2,000

Rent (factory)

3,000

Dividend Received

2,000

following is the extract of a balance sheet relating to this particular item debtors 567509

Following is the extract of a Balance Sheet (relating to this particular item Debtors and Bad Debt) as on Mar 31, 2009:

Dr. Balance

Cr. Balance

Rs

Rs

Sundry Debtors

1,10,000

Bad Debts

7,500

Additional information

  1. After preparing Trial Balance, it is surfaced that one Mr. Yadav has become insolvent and the entire amount of Rs 10,000 was not recoverable from him.
  2. It is desired to make a provision of 5% on debtors. Write up the relevant adjustment entry and prepare the final accounts.

following is the extract from the trial balance of a business entry as on mar 31 200 567510

Following is the extract from the Trial Balance of a business entry as on Mar 31, 2009:

Account

Dr. Balance Rs

Cr. Balance Rs

Sundry Debtors

1,10,000

Provision for Doubtful debts

5,000

Bad Debts

7,500

Additional Information

  1. Additional Bad debts Rs 20,000
  2. Maintain the provision for doubtful debts @ 5% on debtors make the necessary journal entries, ledger accounts and final accounts.

pass necessary journal entries and make necessary ledger accounts 567511

An extract of Trial Balance as on Mar 31, 2009:

Account

Dr. Balance Rs

Cr. Balance Rs

Sundry Debtors

1,05,800

Bad Debts

3,200

Discount

1,500

Additional Information

  1. Create a provision for doubtful debts @ 10% on debtors.
  2. Create a provision of discount on debtors @ 3% on debtors.
  3. Additional discount given to debtors Rs 5,800.

Pass necessary Journal entries and make necessary ledger accounts.

you are also required to show how this will appear in final accounts 567513

From the following information, calculate the manager’s commission at 12% of profit (i) before charging such commission and (ii) after charging such commission.

Rs

Rs

Gross Profit

70,000

Salaries

24,000

Rent and Rates

4,800

Office Expenses

8,000

Selling Expenses

10,000

Advertisement

12,000

58,800

Profit before Commission:

11,200

You are also required to show how this will appear in final accounts.

you are required to pass the necessary adjusting entries for the following that appe 567521

You are required to pass the necessary adjusting entries for the following that appear outside the Trial Balance as on Mar 31, 2009:

  1. Goods purchased Rs 5,000 were taken to stock but brought to enter in purchases book.
  2. Bad debts to be written off Rs 2,000
  3. Depreciation is to be provided on fixed assets @ 10%
  4. Create provision for doubtful debts @ 5%
  5. Provide a provision for discount on debtors @ 3%
  6. Create reserve for discount on creditors @ 2%
  7. Goods worth Rs 500 were given as charity
  8. Allow interest on drawings @ 12%
  9. Salaries unpaid Rs 4,800 further information: Fixed Assets: 7,000

Debtors: 1,05,000

Creditors: 80,000

Drawings: 10,000

following are the extracts from a trial balance of a business firm as on mar 31 2009 567522

Following are the extracts from a Trial Balance of a business firm as on Mar 31, 2009

Dr. Balance

Cr. Balance

Name of Account

Rs

Rs

Sundry Debtors

1,05,000

Provision for Doubtful Debts

10,000

Provision for Discount on Debtors

1,200

Bad Debts

2,500

Discount

1,000

Additional Information

  1. Additional bad debts: Rs 3,500
  2. Additional discount allowed to debtors Rs 1,500
  3. Provision for bad debts to be maintained @ 10% on debtors
  4. Maintain a provision for discount @ 3% on debtors

You are required to

  1. Pass the necessary journal entries
  2. Prepare the necessary (ledger) accounts
  3. Prepare the final accounts (relating to these items only).

a book keeper has submitted to you the following trial balance of mr patel wherein t 567523

A book keeper has submitted to you the following Trial balance of Mr. Patel wherein the total of debit and credit balances is not equal:

Particulars

Debit Balance Rs

Credit Balance Rs

Capital

15,340

Cash in hand

60

Purchases

17,980

Sales

22,120

Cash at bank

1,770

Fixtures and Fittings

450

Freehold Premises

3,000

Lighting and Heating

130

Bills Receivable

1,650

Returns Inwards

60

Salaries

2,150

Creditors

3,780

Debtors

11,400

Stock (Apr 1, 2008)

6,000

Printing

450

Bills Payable

3,750

Rates, Taxes and Insurance

380

Discounts Received

890

Discounts Allowed

400

48,350

43,410

  1. You are required to redraft the Trial Balance correctly.
  2. Prepare a Trading and Profit and Loss Account and a Balance Sheet after taking into account the following adjustments:
    1. Stock in hand on Mar 31, 2009 was valued at Rs 3,600
    2. Depreciate fixtures and fittings by Rs 50
    3. Rs 700 was due and unpaid in respect of salaries
    4. Rates and insurance has been paid in advance to the extent of Rs 80

from the following trial balance of mr reddy you are required to prepare trading and 567524

From the following Trial Balance of Mr. Reddy, you are required to prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet on that date:

Debit Balance

Credit Balance

Particulars

Rs

Rs

Capital

1,00,000

Drawings

12,000

Sundry Creditors

40,000

Cash in hand

5,000

Cash at bank

11,600

Sundry Debtors

51,000

10% Loan (taken on Sep 1, 2008)

20,000

Provision for Doubtful Debts

4,000

Furniture

12,000

Machinery

28,400

Stock (Apr 1, 2008)

80,000

Purchases

1,80,000

Rent and Taxes

6,800

Salaries

18,000

Manufacturing Wages

25,000

Sales

2,80,800

Sundry Expenses

2,000

Insurance (including a premium of Rs 600 per annum paid Sep 30, 2009)

800

Commission

1,400

Carriage

4,000

Travelling Expenses

1,600

Bills Receivable

8,000

4,46,200

4,46,200

Adjustments

  1. Stock on Mar 31, 2009 was Rs 76,000
  2. Write off bad debts Rs 1,000 and maintain the provision for doubtful debts at 5% on debtors
  3. Manufacturing wages include Rs 1,600 for erection of new machinery on Mar 1, 2009
  4. Depreciate machinery by 5% and furniture by 10%

the following is the trial balance extracted from the books of shri arvind as on dec 567525

The following is the Trial Balance extracted from the books of Shri Arvind as on Dec 31, 2008:

Particulars

Debit Balance Rs

Credit Balance Rs

Capital

2,00,000

Plant and Machinery

1,56,000

Furniture

4,000

Purchases and Sales

1,20,000

2,54,000

Returns

2,000

1,500

Opening Stock

60,000

Discount

850

1,600

Sundry Debtors/Creditors

90,000

50,000

Salaries

15,100

Manufacturing Wages

20,000

Carriage Outwards

2,400

Provision for Doubtful Debts

1,050

Rent, Rates and Taxes

20,000

Advertisements

4,000

Cash

13,800

5,08,150

5,08,150

Adjustments

  1. Closing stock was valued at Rs 68,440
  2. Provision for doubtful debts is to be kept at Rs 1,000
  3. Depreciate plant and machinery @ 10%
  4. The proprietor has taken goods worth Rs 10,000 for his personal use and additionally distributed goods worth Rs 2,000 as samples
  5. Purchase of furniture Rs 1,840 has been passed through purchases book

create provision for doubtful debts 5 on debtors you are required to prepare a tradi 567526

The following Trial Balance is extracted from the books of Shri Gulsar on Mar 31, 2009

Particulars

Dr. (Rs)

Cr. (Rs)

Capital

25,000

Furniture and Fittings

1,280

Motor cycle

12,500

Building

15,000

Bad Debts

250

Provision for Doubtful Debts

400

Sundry Debtors/Creditors

7,600

5,000

Stock (as on Apr 1, 2008)

6,920

Purchases and Sales

10,950

30,900

Bank Overdraft

5,700

Returns

400

250

Interest on Bank Overdraft

236

Advertising

900

Commission

750

Cash

1,300

Taxes and Insurance Premium

1,564

General Expenses

2,500

Salaries

6,600

68,000

68,000

Adjustments

  1. Stock on hand (as on Mar 31, 2009) Rs 6,500
  2. Depreciate building @ 5% p.a.; furniture @ 10% p.a.; motor cycle @ 20% p.a.
  3. Rs 170 is due for interest on bank overdraft
  4. Salaries Rs 600 and taxes Rs 400 are outstanding
  5. Insurance premium Rs 200 is prepaid
  6. One third of the commission received is in respect of work to be done next year
  7. Write off a further sum of Rs 200 as bad debts from the debtors
  8. Create provision for doubtful debts @ 5% on debtors, you are required to prepare a Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet on that date

prepare trading and profit and loss account and balance sheet from the following par 567527

Prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet from the following particulars as on Mar 31, 2009.

Trial Balance

Particulars

Dr. (Rs)

Cr. (Rs)

Capital/Drawings

2,800

20,000

Cash in hand

3,000

Purchases/Sales

24,000

30,000

Returns

2,000

4,000;

Bank Overdraft @ 5%

4,000

Salaries

5,000

P.F. remittance (deducted from salary)

1,000

Taxes and Insurance

1,000

Provision for Doubtful debts

2,000

Bad Debts

1,000

Sundry Debtors and Creditors

10,000

3,700

Commission

1,000

Investments

8,000

Stock (as on Apr 1, 2008)

6,000

Furniture

2,200

Bills Receivable and Bills Payable

6,000

5,000

Sales Tax Collected

300

71,000

71,000

Further, you are required to take into account the following information:

  1. Salary Rs 200 and taxes Rs 800 are outstanding but insurance Rs 100 pre paid
  2. Commission Rs 200 is received in advance for work to be done next year
  3. Provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 20%
  4. Depreciation on furniture is to be charged @ 10% p.a.
  5. Interest accrued on investments Rs 420
  6. Stock as on Mar 31, 2009 is valued at Rs 9,000
  7. A fire accrued on Mar 1, 2009 in the godown which destroyed the goods worth Rs 8,000, and insurance claim was received for Rs 6,000
  8. Provide for employer’s share of P.F. equivalent to employee’s share to P.F.

from the following trial balance of mr kannan as on mar 31 2009 and additional infor 567528

From the following Trial Balance of Mr. Kannan as on Mar 31, 2009 and additional information given, prepare the Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet on that date:

Particulars

Debit Balance Rs

Credit Balance Rs

Opening Stock

12,500

Capital

1,12,500

Debtors and Creditors

15,000

8,750

Purchases and Sales

1,00,000

1,75,000

Returns

3,750

2,500

Carriage

2,000

Wages and Salaries

6,250

Commission

3,250

Machinery

20,000

Furniture

5,000

Bad Debts

2,000

Provision for Doubtful Debts

2,500

Bills Receivable/Bills Payable

7,500

1,750

Land and Buildings

1,00,000

Taxes and Insurance

4,250

Discount Allowed

3,000

Bank

12,500

Drawings

12,500

3,06,250

3,06,250

Additional Information

  1. Value of the closing stock as on Mar 31, 2009 is Rs 10,000
  2. Wages and salaries outstanding is Rs 250
  3. Insurance prepaid is Rs 1,000
  4. Provide for doubtful debts on the debtors at the rate of 10%
  5. Depreciate the machinery @ 10% and the furniture @ 15%
  6. Goods costing Rs 6,000 have sold on the approval basis for Rs 7,500, but these were not approved by the customers as yet.

on mar 31 2009 the following trial balance has been extracted from the books of shri 567529

On Mar 31, 2009, the following Trial Balance has been extracted from the books of Shri Gokale.

Particulars

Dr. Balance Rs

Cr. Balance Rs

Capital/Drawings

6,000

60,000

Sundry Debtors/Creditors

38,200

16,802

Purchases/Sales

1,34,916

2,22,486

Returns

15,642

2,692

Bills Receivable/Bills Payable

13,764

5,428

5% Loan on Mortgage (1,4,2008)

17,000

Interest on Loan

400

Cash in Hand

6,100

Stock (Apr 1, 2008)

11,678

Motor vehicle

18,000

Cash at bank

9,110

Land and Buildings

24,000

Bad Debts

1,250

Carriage Outward

2,808

Bad Debts Provision

1,420

Discount

880

Carriage Inward

7,858

Establishment Expenses

16,194

Rates, Taxes and Insurance

7,782

Advertisement

4,528

General Expenses

8,978

Rent Received

500

Total

3,27,208

3,27,208

Prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet on that date after considering the following:

  1. Depreciate land and building @ 5% p.a. and motor vehicle @ 15% p.a.
  2. Salaries Rs 1,400 and rates Rs 800 are due
  3. The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained @ 5% on Sundry Debtors
  4. Stock in hand on Mar 31, 2009 is valued at Rs 12,500
  5. Goods costing Rs 1,000 were taken by the proprietor for his personal use, no entry has been made in the books of accounts
  6. Prepaid insurance Rs 350
  7. Provide for manager’s commission at 5% net profit after charging such commission
  8. A fire broke out on Apr 1, 2009 destroying goods worth Rs 4,700
  9. Goods costing Rs 1,200 were sent to a customer on sale or return for Rs 1,400 on Mar 27, 2009, and have been recorded in the books as actual sales

the following is the trial balance of a merchant on mar 31 2009 567531

The following is the Trial Balance of a merchant on Mar 31, 2009

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Capital/Drawings

30,000

4,00,000

Opening Stock

37,500

Purchases/Sales

7,97,500

11,55,000

Freight on Purchases

12,500

Wages (11 months upto Feb 28, 2009)

33,000

Salaries

70,000

Postage, Telegrams, Telephone

6,000

Printing and Stationery

9,000

Miscellaneous Expenses

15,000

Debtors/Creditors

1,25,000

1,50,000

Investments

50,000

Discount Received

7,500

Bad Debts

7,500

Provision for Bad Debts

4,000

Building

15,0000

Machinery

2,50,000

Furniture

20,000

Commission on Sales

22,500

Interest on Investments

6,000

Insurance (up to Aug 31, 2009)

12,000

Bank Balance

75,000

17,22,500

17,22,500

Adjustments

  1. Closing Stock Rs 1,12,500
  2. Machinery worth Rs 22,500 purchased on Oct 1, 2008 was shown as purchases. Freight paid on the machinery was Rs 2,500, which was included in freight on purchases
  3. Commission is payable at 2½ on sales
  4. Investments were sold @ 10% profit but the entire sale proceeds have been taken as sales
  5. Write off bad debts Rs 5,000
  6. Create a provision for doubtful debts at 5% on debtors
  7. Depreciate Building by 2½12; %; Plant and Machinery at 10% p.a. you are required to prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet as on that date.

mr shewag carries on a retail business and his trial balance on mar 31 2009 is as fo 567532

Mr. Shewag carries on a retail business and his Trial Balance on Mar 31, 2009 is as follows:

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Cr. Rs

Purchases

11,31,250

Sales

14,13,300

Returns Inwards

8,500

Returns Outwards

6,240

Provision for Doubtful Debts

10,400

Sundry Debtors

76,400

Sundry Creditors

51,052

Bills Payable (promissory notes to be paid)

17,900

Stock in the beginning

1,13,450

Wages

40,274

Salaries

37,150

Furniture

30,150

Alternations to shop

9,000

Postage, Stationery, Insurance, etc.

26,452

Heading and Lighting

4,700

Trade Expenses

20,628

Rent, Rates and Taxes

27,034

Bad Debts

1,050

Loan at 15% (to Ajay, Dec 1, 2008)

6,000

Investments (at cost)

23,000

Dividends from Investments

3,650

Unexpired Insurance

1,048

Cash at Hand and at Bank

31,504

Bills Receivable (amount receivable on Promissory Notes

38,140

Promissory Notes

38,140

Capital Account

1,54,000

Drawings Account

32,000

Outstanding Wages

4,038

Rent Accrued but not Paid

1,500

Depreciation on Furniture

3,350

Additions to Furniture

1,000

16,62,080

16,62,080

Prepare the Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet on that date after taking into consideration the following:

  1. Sundry Debtors include an item of Rs 500 for goods supplied to the proprietor and on item of Rs 1,200 due from a customer who has become insolvent.
  2. Provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 5% of the Sundry Debtors.
  3. One fifth of alternations to the shop is to be written off.
  4. Goods of the value of Rs 2,000 have been destroyed by fire and the insurance company had admitted the claim for Rs 1,400 only.
  5. Bills receivable include a dishonored promissory note for Rs 5,300.
  6. Stock at the end was Rs 1,21,040.
  7. An intimation from the bank that a customer’s cheque for Rs 2,000 had been dishonored is still to be entered in the books.

the following trial balance has been extracted from the books of a merchant 567533

The following Trial Balance has been extracted from the books of a merchant.

Debit

Credit

Particulars

Dr. Rs

Cr.Rs

Drawings

17,500

Buildings

30,000

Debtors and Creditors

25,000

40,000

Purchases and Sales

1,50,000

2,32,500

Returns

1,750

1,450

Discount

3,550

2,550

Life Insurance

1,500

Cash

15,000

Stock (opening)

6,000

Bad Debts

2,500

Reserve for Bad Debts

8,500

Carriage Inwards

3,100

Wages

13,850

Machinery

4,00,000

Furniture

30,000

Salaries

17,500

Bank Commission

1,000

Bills Receivable/Bills Payable

30,000

20,000

Trade Expenses/Capital

6,750

4,50,000

7,55,000

7,55,000

Adjustments

  1. Allow interest on capital @ 5% p.a.
  2. Machinery includes Rs 1,00,000 of a machine purchased on Dec 31, 2008. Wages include Rs 2,850 spent on the installation of a machine.
  3. Trade expenses Rs 1,250 and wages Rs 1,750 have not been paid as yet.
  4. Depreciate building by 5%; furniture and machinery by 10% p.a.
  5. Make provision of doubtful debts at 5%.
  6. Stock on Mar 31, 2009 was valued at Rs 25,000.

You are required to prepare the Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and a Balance Sheet as on that date.

from the following trial balance and additional information of mr raj prepare tradin 567534

From the following Trial Balance and additional information of Mr Raj, prepare Trading and Profit and Loss Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009 and the Balance Sheet as on that date.

Particulars

Debit Dr. Rs

Credit Rs

Capital

69,214

Purchases/Sales

33,729

50,350

Bad Debts

1,155

Rent

5,500

3,250

Wages

10,480

Building

30,000

Machinery

8,000

Salaries

20,800

Debtors (including Goel’s dishonoured bills of Rs 400)

16,850

Printing and Advertising

7,300

Commission Received

8,500

Creditors

9,500

1,33,814

1,33,814

Additional Information

  1. Wages include a sum of Rs 2,000 spent on the erection of a cycle shed for employees and customers and Rs 1,000 for preparation of new machinery on Jan 1, 2009.
  2. Depreciate machinery and building by 5%.
  3. Remuneration of Rs 1,000 paid to an employee was debited to his personal account.
  4. Sundry Creditors include an amount of Rs 2,750 received from Rajeev and credited to his account. The amount was written off as a bad debt in the previous year.
  5. Goods costing Rs 250 were taken by the proprietor for his personal use but no entry was made in the books of accounts.
  6. Goods costing Rs 300 were sent to a customer on sale or return for Rs 350 on Mar 27, 2009 and were recorded in the books as actual sale.
  7. A fire occurred on Mar 15, 2009 in the godown and goods worth Rs 500 were destroyed. It was fully insured but the insurance company admitted the claim for Rs 300.
  8. 50% of the amount of Goel’s bill is irrecoverable.
  9. Create a provision of 5% on debtors.
  10. One third of the commission received is in respect of work to be done next year.
  11. Rent has been paid for 11 months but received for 13 months.
  12. Included among the debtors is Rs 1,500 due from Rohit and included among the creditors Rs 500 due to him.
  13. Provide for personal income tax @ 10% on net profit in excess of Rs 25,000.
  14. Stock in hand on Mar 31, 2009 was valued as Rs 55,944.
  15. Manager is entitled to a commission of 5% on net profit after charging his commission.

state whether the following statements are true or false 567535

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Balance Sheet is not an account but only a statement.
  2. According to business entity concept, business is a separate identity for accounting purposes.
  3. The final accounts of sole trader are governed by specific statue – Schedule VI of Companies Act, 1956.
  4. Trading Account is prepared to know whether the business entity has earned gross profit or suffered gross loss.
  5. Trading Account is prepared after the preparation of Profit and Loss Account.
  6. If closing stock is given in the Trial Balance, it will be shown on the credit side of the Trading Account.
  7. Gross Profit/Loss is shown in the Balance Sheet.
  8. The nominal accounts are transferred to either Trading Account or Profit and Loss Account.
  9. Profit and Loss Account is prepared to ascertain net profit or net loss of a firm for a specified accounting period.
  10. Net profit increases the capital.
  11. Accrued income means that amount which has been earned but yet due.
  12. Profit and Loss Account deals with both direct expenses and indirect expenses.
  13. Carriage inward and carriage outward – both are debited to Profit and Loss Account.
  14. Charity is a direct expense and should be debited to Trading Account.
  15. Manufacturing Account is prepared to ascertain the cost of the goods produced.
  16. Manufacturing Account deals with finished goods only.
  17. The Balance Sheet contains only personal and real accounts.
  18. The Balance Sheet contains both opening and closing stock.
  19. Putting together items of the same nature under the common heading is called “Marshalling.”
  20. Contingent liability is not shown in the Balance Sheet.

fill in the blanks with appropriate word s 567536

Fill in the blanks with appropriate word(s)

  1. Gross profit is the excess of net sales revenue over __________.
  2. Net Sales Revenues = Cash Sales + Credit Sales minus __________.
  3. Cost of Goods Sold = Opening Stock + Net Purchases – Stock at the end + __________.
  4. Net Purchases = Cash Purchases + Credit purchases minus __________.
  5. If closing stock is given in the Trial Balance, it is not shown in Trading Account because purchases have already been __________.
  6. Gross Profit/Loss is transferred to __________.
  7. Transfer items of revenues and expenses to Trading and Profit and Loss Account are made by means of Journal entries which are technically called __________.
  8. Net loss __________ the capital.
  9. Outstanding income means that amount of income which is due and receivable but not yet ________.
  10. Gross Profit/Loss is transferred to __________.
  11. Net Profit/Loss is transferred to __________.
  12. Excess of gross profit over operating expenses is known as __________.
  13. Carriage inward is debited to __________.
  14. Combined item – salaries and wages should be debited to __________.
  15. Any duty paid on purchases should be debited to __________.
  16. Bonus is charged to __________.
  17. Manufacturing Account is prepared to ascertain the __________ produced.
  18. The order or classes in which the assets and liabilities are stated in the Balance Sheet is termed as __________.
  19. Debit balance in the Profit and Loss Account appearing on the Assets side of a Balance Sheet is called __________.
  20. Contingent liability is shown by way of __________ to the Balance Sheet.
  21. The amount provided by the owners is known as __________.
  22. If accrued income appears in the Trial Balance, it will be shown on the __________ side of the Balance Sheet.
  23. Goods sold on approval are never treated as __________.
  24. Goods lying with the customers who have not given their approval are treated as part of the __________.
  25. The Net Profit calculated in the Profit and Loss Account is transferred to a new account known as __________ to record items of appropriation as against charges against the profit.

the following transactions took place during the week ending 25 apr 2009 prepare the 567464

The following transactions took place during the week ending 25 Apr 2009. Prepare the Petty Cash Book which is maintained with a weekly ‘float’ of Rs 4,500.

Rs

2009 Apr

19

Sweeper and scavenger paid

225

Conveyance

1,371

20

Fax

132

Stationery purchased

204

21

Freight

975

Cooly

90

Service charges to computers

225

22

Advertisement charges

500

Subscription to “Daily”

100

23

Copier Papers

150

24

Refreshment to customers

103

the following balances were extracted from the ledger of vas dev on mar 31 2009 prep 567465

The following balances were extracted from the ledger of Vas Dev on Mar 31, 2009. Prepare a Trial Balance as on that date in the proper form.

Rs

Salaries

72,640

Sales

3,47,000

Plant and machinery

68,600

Commission paid

3,760

Purchases

2,89,340

Stock on 1.4.2009

22,200

Repairs

3,340

Sundry expenses

920

Sundry debtors

2,860

Returns inward

2,000

Returns outward

800

Discount allowed

2,300

Rent and rates

6,440

Sundry creditors

28,520

Carriage inward

480

Travelling expenses

5,260

Drawings

7,000

Investments

12,000

Capital 1.4.2009

1,25,000

Cash at Bank

2,180

mention the type of error involved in the transactions and its impact on the agreeme 567466

Mention the type of error involved in the transactions and its impact on the agreement of Trial Balance.

  1. The Sales Book is cast short by Rs 6,000.
  2. The Sales Returns Book is overcast by Rs 3,000.
  3. The Purchase Book is overcast by Rs 2,500.
  4. The Purchases Return Book is overcast by Rs 1,600.
  5. Goods returned by Sharma for Rs 2,200 were not entered.
  6. Goods sold to Raj for Rs 7,000 has been debited to Ravi A/c.
  7. Credit sale of Rs 11,000 to Gupta was entered as Rs 10,100.
  8. A purchase of machine has been passed through the Purchases Book.
  9. A credit purchase from Renu for Rs 25,000 was debited to Venu A/c from Purchases book.
  10. Cash received for commission Rs 1,008 was posted to Commission Account as Rs 1,080.
  11. The monthly discount column on the debit side of the Cash Book Rs 3,000 was credited to Discount Allowed Account.
  12. Depreciation on machinery Rs 1,000 is not posted to Depreciation Account.
  13. Life Insurance Premium Rs 2,640 paid on behalf of the proprietor by a cheque was debited to General Expenses A/c.
  14. The total of the discount column in the Cash Book on the debit side was Rs 2,302 on page 56, which was carried forward to the page 57 as Rs 2,032.
  15. An amount of Rs 1,600 received from Shweta was entered in the credit side of her account.

pass the necessary rectifying journal entries and prepare suspense account to ascert 567473

An Accountant could not tally the Trial Balance. The difference of Rs 10,360 was temporarily placed to the credit of Suspense Account to prepare final accounts. The following errors were located:

  1. Commission of Rs 1,000 paid, was posted twice, once to Discount Allowed Account and once to Commission Account.
  2. The Purchase Returns Account was undercast by Rs 2,000.
  3. A credit purchase from Verma of Rs 3,000 entered in Purchases Book, was wrongly debited to his Personal Account.
  4. A credit sale of Rs 6,200 to Sharma was entered in Sales Book, but posted wrongly to his account as Rs 8,360.
  5. Discount column of the payments side of the Cash Book was wrongly totalled as Rs 8,800 instead of Rs 8,000.

Pass the necessary rectifying journal entries and prepare Suspense Account to ascertain the difference in the Trial Balance.

the following balances were extracted from the ledger of mrs devi as on mar 31 2009 567474

The following balances were extracted from the ledger of Mrs. Devi as on Mar 31, 2009. You are required to prepare a Trial Balance as on that date:

Rs

Capital

90,000

Drawings

3,000

Purchases

1,00,000

Sales

1,40,000

Returns inward

500

Returns outward

1,000

Carriage inward

1,500

Carriage outward

1,000

Opening stock

15,000

Scooter

20,000

Salaries

7,000

Rent

3,000

Taxes

1,500

Insurance

1,200

Sundry creditors

9,000

Sundry debtors

2,000

Cash in hand

300

Cash at Bank

3,000

Furniture

6,500

Bank overdraft

20,000

Land

73,000

enter the following transactions of narayana in the proper books of original entry p 567475

Enter the following transactions of Narayana in the proper books of original entry, post them into the ledger, balance the accounts and extract a Trial Balance as on Mar 31, 2009.

2009

Mar 1

Cash in hand Rs 300; Cash at Bank Rs 10,000; Stock Rs 7,500; Debtors: Sekhar Rs 2,250, Parul Rs 3,100, Renu Rs 4,200; Furniture Rs 2,700; Computers Rs 29,250; Creditors: Shree Rs 2,400, Raj Rs 3,400

Mar 2

Paid wages Rs 600

Mar 3

Cash sales Rs 840

Mar 4

Withdrawn from Bank Rs 1,250

Mar 5

Sold to Rao 15 pieces of T Shirts @ Rs 100 per T Shirt

Mar 6

Purchased 80 pieces of T Shirts @ Rs 70 per T Shirt

Mar 7

Purchased a computer table for Rs 2,900 from Royal and Co.

Mar 8

Cash sales Rs 11,000

Mar 9

Deposited with Bank Rs 2,800

Mar 10

Received a cheque from Rao Rs 1,100

Mar 11

Renu pays a cheque Rs 4,000 in full settlement of her account

Mar 12

Paid to Shree Rs 1,200; Discount received Rs 20

Mar 13

Loan from Bank Rs 20,000

Mar 14

Purchased from Khuber 40 T Shirts @ Rs 75 each; 50 pieces of casual wears @ Rs 125 each. Trade discount 25%

Mar 15

Purchased from Krishna Mart: 50 jeans @ Rs 120 each; 100 banians @ Rs 25 each. Trade discount 10%

Mar 16

Sold to Meena Enterprises: 40 jeans @ Rs 200 each; 50 banians @ Rs 45 each. Trade discount 10%

Mar 17

Paid Krishna Mart Rs 6,000 by cheque and Rs 1,000 cash

Mar 18

Paid Electricity bills Rs 750; Mobile recharges Rs 285

Mar 19

Sekhar pays Rs 1,600; Discount allowed Rs 25

Mar 20

Parul settles her account by cheque Rs 3,000

Mar 21

Paid to Raj by cheque Rs 2,250; Discount received Rs 45

Mar 22

Cash withdrawn for physician consultation Rs 600

Mar 23

Old newspapers sold for Rs 75

Mar 24

Sold to Ravi & Co. 10 T Shirts @ Rs 100 each; 5 pieces of casual wears @ Rs 200 each. Trade discount 10%

Mar 25

Received acceptance from Ravi & Co. for Rs 1,250

Mar 26

Goods returned to Khuber Rs 275

Mar 27

Sales returns from Meena Enterprises Rs 700

Mar 28

Cheque received from Parul returned dishonoured. Parul found insolvent. Only 50% recovered.

state whether the following statements are true or false 567476

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Trial Balance is a statement which shows debit balances and credit balances of all accounts in the ledger.
  2. The total of debit balances and the total of credit balances need not tally, always.
  3. Trial Balance can be prepared only at the end of an accounting period. It cannot be prepared at any date.
  4. Trial Balance is the basis on which final accounts are prepared.
  5. If any error is found in the preparation of a Trial Balance, such errors can be rectified only when the balance sheet is prepared.
  6. A debit balance is either an asset or expense or loss.
  7. All the errors committed are not disclosed by the Trial Balance.
  8. A Trial Balance will disclose errors of principle.
  9. If any of the GAAP is violated, error resulting from such violation is called “errors of principle.”
  10. Error of complete omission affects the Trial Balance.
  11. Error of partial omission does not affect the Trial Balance.
  12. Error of recording does not affect the Trial Balance.
  13. Error of posting may or may not affect the Trial Balance.
  14. When it is difficult to locate and rectify errors, the difference caused due to such errors is transferred to a new and temporary account known as “Suspense Account.”
  15. When all the errors affecting the Trial Balance are located and rectified, the “Suspense Account” gets closed automatically.
  16. Journal entries passed to rectify the errors are called “rectifying entries.”
  17. Suspense Account having credit balance will be shown on the assets side of a balance sheet.
  18. Excess debit of an account can be rectified by debiting the same amount.
  19. Short debit of an account can be rectified by further debit (of the short amount) of the same account.
  20. Suspense Account in the Trial Balance is entered in the Profit and Loss Account.

fill in the blanks with suitable words 567477

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. Trial Balance is prepared as per the rules of _____ system.
  2. Trial Balance is a statement prepared with the debit and credit balances of ______accounts.
  3. Trial Balance is the basis on which _______ are prepared.
  4. List of names with debit balances are grouped under a common caption known as ________
  5. List of names with credit balances are grouped together under a single heading called _________
  6. A ______balance is either a liability or income or gain.
  7. If the totals of debit balances and credit balances in a Trial Balance do not tally, it implies that some ________would have been committed.
  8. If the debit column or credit column is totaled wrongly in a Trial Balance as Rs 15,100 instead of Rs 11,500, it is called _________.
  9. In the same case (as in Q.8), if it is wrongly totalled as Rs 10,150 it is called __________
  10. Errors of posting in the wrong side of the correct account are ________by Trial Balance.

choose the correct answer 567478

Choose the correct answer

  1. Trial Balance is prepared to find out
    1. profit or loss
    2. financial position
    3. arithmetical accuracy of accounts
    4. none of the above
  2. Suspense Account in the Trial Balance is to be shown in
    1. Trading Account
    2. Profit and Loss Account
    3. Balance Sheet
    4. none of the above
  3. Suspense Account having debit balance will be shown in the
    1. assets side of the Balance Sheet
    2. liabilities side of the Balance Sheet
    3. debit side of the Profit and Loss Account
    4. credit side of the Profit and Loss Account
  4. Suspense Account will get closed when
    1. Trading Account is prepared
    2. Profit and Loss Account is prepared
    3. Balance Sheet is drawn
    4. errors are rectified
  5. Errors which are not disclosed by Trial Balance are
    1. Errors of partial omission
    2. Errors of complete omission
    3. Errors of carrying forward
    4. Wrong totalling to ledger
  6. Trial Balance can be prepared on
    1. the end of an accounting period
    2. any date
    3. directions by the statutory provision
    4. none of the above
  7. Errors that affect one side of an account are called
    1. Single sided errors
    2. Double sided errors
    3. Absolute errors
    4. none of the above
  8. Wages paid to workers for erection of a new machinery will have to be debited to
    1. Wages Account
    2. Machinery Account
    3. Production Expenses Account
    4. none of the above
  9. Goods taken by the Proprietor for own use will be credited to
    1. Drawings Account
    2. Sales Account
    3. Office Account
    4. Purchases Account
  10. While totalling a subsidiary book, errors that are committed belong to
    1. Error of recording
    2. Error of posting
    3. Error of casting
    4. Error of omission

prepare trial balance as on 31 12 2009 from the following balances of mr raj 567481

Prepare Trial Balance as on 31.12.2009 from the following balances of Mr. Raj.

Rs.

Rs.

Capital

1,70,000

Creditors

6,500

Drawing

2,000

Salaries

19,100

Purchase

47,000

Sales returns

1,700

Purchase return

1,200

Carriage inwards

700

Bills receivable

2,900

Bills payble

3,500

Debtors

8,000

Sales

72,000

Printing and stationery

2,500

Insurance

1,100

Stock

14,950

Machinery

25,000

Wages

2,500

Rent

800

Land

1,25,000

Electronic charges

1,200

Interest received

850

Commission received

400

the following balances are extracted from the books of mr vas prepare trial balance 567482

The following balances are extracted from the books of Mr. Vas. Prepare Trial Balance as on 31.12.2009.

Rs.

Rs.

Stock (1.1.2009)

15,000

Purchase

1,47,850

Drawing

37,400

Capital

1,25,000

Discount received

500

Discount allowed

475

Sales

1,67,675

Furniture

16,500

Sundry creditors

37,500

Bank loan

60,000

Rent

36,250

Printing charge

750

Sundry expense

10,500

Freight

1,750

Taxes

4,750

Machinery

1,57,700

Bills receivable

26,250

Bills payble

15,850

Insurance

600

Carriage outward

750

from the following information taken from the ledger of sathyan prepare a trial bala 567484

From the following information taken from the ledger of Sathyan, prepare a Trial Balance as on 31.3.2010.

Rs.

Rs.

Purchases

43,500

Wages

13,000

Discount allowed

2,600

Sales

70,000

Salaries

4,000

Commission (Dr.)

850

Travelling expense

800

Carriage inward

550

Trade espense

1,200

Administration expense

210

Interest

500

Building

10,000

Furniture

400

Debtors

8,500

Creditors

4,200

Cash in hand

2,090

Capital

?

Cash at Bank

12,000

prepare a trial balance from the following balances of mrs renuka as on 31 12 2009 567485

Prepare a Trial Balance from the following balances of Mrs. Renuka as on 31.12.2009.

Rs.

Rs.

Capital

2,10,000

Building

57,500

Machinery

30,000

Furniture

5,500

Salaries

47,000

Rent

24,000

Two wheelers

34,000

Commission

700

Rates and taxes

1,300

Stock (1.1.2009)

43,000

Purchases

47,000

Sales

98,000

Debtors

8,100

Bad debts

1,600

Insurance

1,200

General expense

400

Creditors

34,000

Reserve for doubtful debts

4,650

Cash in Hand

2,500

Cash at bank

52,350

the following balances have been taken from the ledger of mr vasanth as on mar 31 20 567486

The following balances have been taken from the ledger of Mr. Vasanth as on Mar 31, 2010. You are required to prepare the Trial Balance as on 31.3.2010.

Rs.

Rs.

Stock (1.4.2009)

60,000

Purshased (adjusted)

1,20,000

Capital

90,000

Wages

7,400

Drawing

22,000

Salary

13,600

Rent and insurance

4,000

Travelling expense

1,200

Sales

3,12,000

Interest received

800

Sundry creditors

70,000

Bad debts

2,800

Provisions for bad debts

5,000

Plant and machinery

20,000

Building

12,000

Furniture

10,000

Sundry debtors

1,00,000

General expense

3,600

Stock (31.03.2010)

80,000

Outstanding salary

1,400

Outstanding wages

1,000

Pre paid insurance

1,200

Depriciation on:

Cash at Bank

16,000

Plant and machinery

5,000

Building

1,000

Furniture

1,000

rectify the following errors 567488

Rectify the following errors:

  1. Received Rs 15,000 from Patel debited to his account.
  2. The Sales Book undercast by Rs 3,500.
  3. The Purchases Return Book overcast by Rs 2,500.
  4. Sale of old furniture for Rs 700, treated as sale of goods.
  5. Rs 5,000 received from Bhagya was entered on the debit side of the Cash Book. No posting was done to Bhagya’s Account.
  6. An amount of Rs 2,000 withdrawn by the proprietor for his personal use has been debited to Trade Expenses Account.
  7. Cash received from Mala Rs 1,000 was credited to Kala.
  8. A credit sale of Rs 15,000 to Jain has been wrongly passed through the Purchases Book.
  9. Credit purchase of goods from Reddy of Rs 7,500 has been wrongly entered in the Sales Book.
  10. Sales Book total Rs 9,190 was wrongly totalled as Rs 9,910.
  11. Rs 9,950 received from Vincent in full settlement of his account of Rs 10,000 was posted in Cash Book but omitted to enter into his account.
  12. Discount allowed Rs 100 to Vijaya has been credited to Discount Account.
  13. The total of the discount column on the debit side of the Cash Book Rs 50 was omitted to be posted in the ledger.
  14. Rs 40,000 paid for the purchase of a computer was charged to Office Expenses Account.
  15. Repairs made were debited to Building Account Rs 1,750.

you are required to rectify the errors through suspense account give rectifying entr 567490

A book keeper could not tally the Trial Balance. The difference of Rs 1,040 was temporarily placed to the credit of Suspense Account and subsequently the following errors have been detected.

  1. A sale of Rs 1,000 to Shankar has been entered in the Purchase Book.
  2. The total of Purchase Book was short by Rs 1,200.
  3. The total of the “Discount column” on the debit side of the Cash Book Rs 300 was omitted to be posted in the ledger.
  4. The total of the “Discount column” on the credit side of the Cash Book of Rs 460 was not posted in the ledger.
  5. A sale of Rs 6,390 was entered in the Sales Book as Rs 6,990.

You are required to rectify the errors through Suspense Account. Give rectifying entries also.

record the following transactions in proper books post them to ledger and extract a 567492

Record the following transactions in proper books, post them to ledger and extract a Trial Balance.

Date

Rs

2009

Dec

1

Bhamini commenced business with cash

1,20,000

2

Goods purchased for cash

18,000

3

Goods purchased from Lal

24,000

4

Goods sold for cash

36,000

5

Goods sold to Krishna

30,000

6

Goods returned by Krishna

6,000

7

Goods returned to Lal

1,200

8

Furniture bought for cash

2,400

9

Cartage paid

600

10

Cash received from Krishna allowed discount 5%

24,000

11

Cash paid to Lal

22,200

Lal allowed us discount

600

12

Paid charities

1,200

13

Goods sold for cash

36,000

14

Goods purchased for cash

18,000

15

Goods sold to Singh

30,000

16

Goods purchased from Hemant

12,000

17

Goods returned by Singh

1,200

18

Cash paid by Singh

28,200

Discount received

600

19

Goods returned to Hemant

1,200

21

Cash paid to Hemant

9,000

Discount received

300

22

Old newspapers sold to Mohan on credit

150

27

Paid for interest

600

31

Paid for salaries

3,000

31

Deposited with bank

1,50,000

enter the following transactions in proper books post them to ledger and draw out a 567493

Enter the following transactions in proper books, post them to ledger and draw out a Trial Balance:

2009

Dec

1

Assets: Cash in hand Rs 4,000; Cash at Bank Rs 6,000; Leela Rs 16,000;

Shekar Rs 10,000; Furniture Rs 20,000; Building Rs 1,60,000;

Stock Rs 1,62,000

Liabilities: Sundry creditors – Arun Rs 9,200;

Gopi Rs 18,000

2

Cash sales

60,000

3

Employed Madhavan, accountant and received from him security deposit

1,00,000

4

Purchased goods from Babu

2,00,000

6

Sold goods to Titus

80,000

7

Leela cleared her account less 5% discount

9

Payment made to Arun less discount 8% in full settlement

10

Cash sales

88,000

11

Shekar clears his account

13

Sale of old newspapers

600

15

Sold goods to Bharat

44,000

16

Bought goods from Gopi

88,000

17

Purchased stationery

1,000

20

Paid Gopi and availed a discount at 5%

80,000

21

Returned defective goods to Gopi

2,000

22

Sold goods to Nataraj

60,000

23

Paid rent

2,000

24

One old computer, fully depreciated, sold

2,200

25

Paid insurance premium

1,800

26

Repairs to building

3,000

26

Cash sales

1,80,000

27

Paid Babu

1,20,000

Discount received

6,000

27

Sales returns from Nataraj

8,000

28

Paid Hostel bill for proprietor’s son

6,000

30

Paid sales tax

10,000

from the following particulars of raj chand prepare the trading account for the year 567497

From the following particulars of Raj Chand, prepare the Trading Account for the year ending on Dec 31, 20…..

Rs.

Rs.

Opening stock

60,000

Manager’s salary (office)

1,20,000

purchase

5,00,000

Manager’s salary (factory)

1,25,000

Purchase returns

10,000

Fuel, gas, water

30,000

Sales

11,00,000

Custom duty

10,000

Sales return

20,000

Dock dues

1,500

Clearing charges

4,000

Rent (office)

12,000

Carriage on sales

7,700

Rent (factory)

20,000

Royalty

5,000

Wages (Productivity)

1,60,000

Factory light and power

25,000

Carriage and freight

12,000

Office insurance

19,000

Salary of foreman

1,48,000

Octroi

2,500

Stock at the end

3,40,000

Factory insurance

17,500

General insurance

67,500

the following were some of the ledger balances in the books of dev and co on mar 31 567498

The following were some of the ledger balances in the books of Dev and co. on Mar 31, 2009.

Rs.

Rs.

Raw material stock on apr1, 2000

20,000

Plant and machinery as cost

80,000

Stock of work progress

30,000

Leasehold building as cost

50,000

Direct wages

80,000

Provision for depreciation

Sales

2,70,000

Leasehold building

7,000

Purchase

1,80,000

Plant and machinery

5,000

Return inwards

10,000

Fixture and fitting

2,000

Carriage inwards

2,500

Replacement cost of fixed cost

18,000

Direct wages

70,000

Sale of scrap

2,500

Repair to building

3,000

Factory power

7,500

Indirect wages

9,000

Factory rates

9,000

Bank overdraft

20,000

Stock of finished goods as on apr1, 2008

45,000

Additional Information

  1. Factory buildings are held on a 60 year lease
  2. Stocks on Mar 31, 2009: Raw materials Rs 25,000; Work in Progress Rs 35,000; Finished Goods Rs 60,000
  3. Depreciate the Plant and Machinery @10% p.a.
  4. The factory production was charged to finished goods at cost
  5. Prepare a Manufacturing Account for the year ended on Mar 31, 2009.

enter the following transactions in sales day book and post them to ledger 567432

Enter the following transactions in Sales Day Book and post them to ledger.

2009

Jan 2

Sold to Laxmi Textiles, 300 metres of polycot quality @ Rs 120 per metre. Trader discount 10%, VAT @ 10%.

Jan 5

Sold to Chennai Tex, 200 pieces of Jeans @ Rs 350 each; 200 pieces of T shirts @ Rs 125 each. Trade discount @ 10%, VAT @ 12%.

Jan 19

Sold to Anand Enterprises, 300 pieces of chudidhars @ Rs 400 each; 300 pieces of Tops @ Rs 250 each. Trade discount 20%. VAT @ 12%.

Use separate columns.

you are required to pass entries in journal proper 567436

2009

Mar 1

Purchased on credit two computers with system for Rs 50,000 from Delhi Computers.

Mar 3

Purchased on credit from Tiruppur Tex, 100 hosiery products @ Rs 100 each.

Mar 5

Purchased for cash electronic goods Rs 40,000 from Sharma Traders

Mar 6

Purchased for cash from Royal Furniture 4 chairs @ Rs 750 each

Mar 9

Returned one chair Rs 750 which was purchased for cash

Mar 11

Returned to Tiruppur Tex 10 hosiery products @ Rs 100

Mar 13

Returned one computer @ Rs 50,000 to Delhi computers

You are required to pass entries in Journal Proper.

state whether the following statements are true or false 567437

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Each one of the subsidiary books is a special journal and a book of original or prime entry.
  2. Journal entries are passed in all the subsidiary books.
  3. Purchases Book records all purchases of goods by the trader.
  4. Purchases Return Book records the goods returned by the customers.
  5. Sales Book is meant for recording only credit sales of goods.
  6. Sales Return Book records the goods returned by the trader to suppliers.
  7. Bills Receivable Book records the receipt of bills
  8. Bills Payable Book records the acceptance of Bills Receivable.
  9. Cash Book is used for recording only cash transactions.
  10. Journal Proper is the journal which records the entries which cannot be entered in any of the subsidiary books.
  11. When a customer returns the goods, a Debit Note is sent to him.
  12. When the goods are sent to a supplier, a Credit Note is sent to him.
  13. Cash Book is Journal as well as Ledger.
  14. Closing entries are recorded in Balance Sheet.
  15. The source document used for recording entries in Sales Book is invoice sent out.
  16. The Sales Day Book is a part of the Ledger.
  17. The debit notes issued are used to prepare Sales Return Book.
  18. Trade discount is not recorded in the books.
  19. Cash discount is shown in the invoice.
  20. In the calculation of the due date five extra days are added to the specified period of the bill are known as “Days of Grace.”
  21. Cash Book will always show debit balance.
  22. When an entry affects both cash and bank accounts, it is called a Contra Entry.
  23. Discount Account must be balanced in the Cash Book.
  24. The balance in the Cash Book shows net income.
  25. Petty Cash is an expense.
  26. A cheque received and paid into the bank on the same day is recorded in the cash column of Three Column Cash Book.
  27. When a cheque received from a customer is dishonoured his account is debited.
  28. In Triple Column Cash Book, cash withdrawn from the bank for office use will appear on credit side of the Cash Book only.
  29. The total of Journal Proper will be debited Cash Account.
  30. The total of Return Inward Book is posted to Purchase Returns Book.

choose the correct answer 567438

Choose the Correct Answer

  1. Purchase Book is used to record
    1. all purchases
    2. Only cash purchases
    3. Only credit purchases
    4. none of the above
  2. Sales Book is kept to record
    1. all sales of goods
    2. all credit sales of goods
    3. all cash sales of goods
    4. all goods sent on consignment
  3. Purchase of Machinery is recorded in
    1. Sales Book
    2. Purchases Book
    3. Cash Book
    4. Journal Proper
  4. Purchases Return Book is used to record
    1. returns of goods purchased on credit
    2. returns of goods purchased for cash
    3. returns of goods purchased by cash and credit
    4. returns of goods by the seller
  5. Sales Return Book is used to record
    1. returns of goods sold for cash
    2. returns of goods sold on credit
    3. returns of goods sold on both cash and credit
    4. none of the above
  6. On 1st May 2009, Vivek draws a bill on Bhaskar for three months, its due date is:
    1. 1st August, 2009
    2. 4th August, 2009
    3. 31st July, 2009
    4. none of the above
  7. The Cash Book records
    1. all cash payment
    2. all cash receipts
    3. all cash receipts and cash payments
    4. goods purchased for cash only
  8. The balance of Cash Book indicates
    1. cash in hand
    2. cash in bank
    3. net profit
    4. only the difference between creditors and debtors
  9. If a cheque issued by us is dishonoured the credit is given to:
    1. bank account
    2. supplier’s account
    3. customer’s account
    4. none of the above
  10. The balance in the Petty Cash Book is
    1. a liability
    2. profit
    3. an asset
    4. an income
  11. On 1 January 2009, Rs 1,750 was given to a petty cashier. The amount spent by him was Rs 1,250. On 1 February the cashier under the imprest system will receive:
    1. Rs 1,250
    2. Rs 500
    3. Rs 1,750
    4. Rs 3,000

fill in the blanks with suitable word s 567439

Fill in the blanks with suitable word(s)

  1. Subdivisions of the journals into various books for recording transactions of similar nature are known as __________.
  2. Each one of the Subsidiary books is a special journal and a book of ________ entry.
  3. Purchases book is meant for recording ________.
  4. Only credit sales are recorded in ___________.
  5. Goods returned by customers are recorded in ________.
  6. The goods returned by their trader to suppliers are recorded in ________.
  7. The person who prepares the bill of exchange is called the ________.
  8. Bills Receivable Book records the _____ of Bills
  9. Entries which cannot be entered in any of the subsidiary books are entered in ________.
  10. When a customer returns the goods, a ________ note is sent to him.
  11. When the goods are sent to a supplier, a ________ note is sent to him.
  12. Purchase – Day Book is a part of ________.
  13. Closing entries are recorded in ________.
  14. In general, Cash Book shows ________ balance
  15. Petty cash is an ________.

enter the following transactions in the sales day book of king electricals 567445

Enter the following transactions in the Sales Day Book of King Electricals.

2009

Feb 1

Sold on credit to Azhar and Co:

(i) 100 Osram bulbs @ Rs 190 each

(ii) 100 electrical main switches @ Rs 150 each

Feb 10

Sold to Thomas and Co:

(i) 1 H.P. motors, 15 each at the cost of Rs 2,100

(ii) 50 fans each @ Rs 1,200

Feb 20

Sold to Bhamini Mart:

(i) 15 electric chimneys @ Rs 4000 each

(ii) 100 exhaust fans @ Rs 2000 each

enter the following transactions in the proper subsidiary books and post them to the 567446

Enter the following transactions in the proper subsidiary books and post them to the respective ledger accounts:

2009

Mar 1

Purchased goods from Kamala and Co. Rs 25,000

Mar 4

Sold goods to Susheela Rs 15,000

Mar 7

Goods purchased from Vimala Rs 20,000

Mar 10

Sold goods to Kala Rs 22,000

Mar 14

Sold goods to Surya Rs 17,000

Mar 17

Goods returned by Kala Rs 2,000

Mar 19

Goods returned to Kamala and Co. Rs 3,000

Mar 21

Goods returned to Vimala Rs 1,250

Mar 23

Goods returned by Surya Rs 700

Mar 27

Sold goods to Vijaya Rs 12,500

enter the following transactions in the proper subsidiary books 567447

Enter the following transactions in the proper subsidiary books

2009

Apr 1

Bought goods from Mr. A. Rs 20,000 less trade discount at 10%

Apr 3

Sold goods to Mr. B Rs 25,000. Trade discount at 5%

Apr 5

Purchased goods Rs 40,000 from Mr. C. Trade discount at 10%

Apr 6

Returned to Mr. A. goods Rs 5,000

Apr 10

Mr. B returned goods Rs 6,000

Apr 15

Returned goods to Mr. C Rs 4,500

enter the following transactions in the appropriate special journal of m s vas and c 567448

Enter the following transactions in the appropriate special journal of M/s Vas and Co.

2009

May 1

Bought goods from Mr. X Rs 30,000 as per invoice No. 15

May 3

Sold goods to Mr. Y Rs 40,000 as per invoice No. 32

May 3

Sold goods to Mr. Y Rs 40,000 as per invoice No. 32

May 7

Returned to Mr. X goods Rs 1,000 as per debit note No. 1

May 9

Y returned goods Rs 7,500 as per credit note No. 7

May 15

Purchased goods from Mr. Z Rs 50,000 as per invoice no. 51

May 19

Returned goods to Mr. Z Rs 1,600 as per debit note no. 9.

write up the appropriate journals of aishwarya for june 2009 from the following info 567449

Write up the appropriate journals of Aishwarya for June 2009 from the following information.

1 June

Received invoice from Sneha:

100 chudidhars at Rs 275 each

100 top ups at Rs 250 each

All subject to 20% trade discount

6 June

Sent invoice to Shreya:

40 chudidhars at Rs 325 each

50 top ups at Rs 270 each

All subject to 10% discount

10 June

Received credit note from Sneha:

2 chudidhars damaged as invoiced on June 1

15 June

Invoiced to Banu:

100 baba suits at Rs 600 each

All subject to 25% trade discount

enter the following transactions into a single column cash book of mr sekhar 567451

Enter the following transactions into a Single Column Cash Book of Mr. Sekhar:

2009 June

1

Cash in hand

1,00,000

2

Introduced additional capital

1,00,000

3

Purchased goods for cash

50,000

5

Sold goods to Moon Enterprises for cash

75,000

6

Paid for stationery purchased

2,500

7

Bought ceiling fans

7,500

9

Received form Kashyap, a customer

10,000

12

Paid to Anju, a creditor

7,000

15

Paid to Verma an account

20,000

17

Purchased goods

70,000

20

Sales (cash)

50,000

30

Paid salaries

36,000

enter the following transactions in cash book with cash and discount columns and bal 567452

Enter the following transactions in Cash Book with cash and discount columns and balance the same.

Rs

2009 July

1

Cash in hand

25,000

2

Received from Stalin (discount Rs 1,500)

60,000

3

Paid cash to Gopi

7,500

5

Paid to Senthil (discount Rs 700)

9,300

7

Purchased goods from Narayana

12,500

9

Cash Sales

35,000

11

Received from Raj on account (Discount Rs 800)

20,800

13

Paid rent

3,200

15

Received interest on bank account in cash

1,500

17

Received commission

1,750

19

Paid cartage

500

20

Paid to Narayana on account (discount Rs 400)

10,400

22

Paid electricity bill

600

25

Paid telephone bill

500

mrs renu deposits all receipts into bank and makes all payments through cheques 567453

Mrs Renu deposits all receipts into bank and makes all payments through cheques:

2009 Sep

1

Started business by opening bank account

1,50,000

Bought goods from Sun Enterprises on credit

15,000

5

Sold goods for cash to Rani

12,000

9

Purchased furniture (cheque no. 601)

9,000

12

Paid Sun Enterprises in full settlement (Cheque 602)

4,700

15

Ashok sent an advance of Rs 10,000 for goods to be supplied on 25th. Show how would you maintain her Cash Book?

mr kalyan maintains cash book with bank columns enter the following transactions of 567454

Mr. Kalyan maintains cash book with bank columns. Enter the following transactions of June 15, 2009 in the Cash Book.

  1. Balance (Opening on that date)

Rs

Cash

500

Indian Bank

50,000

State Bank of India (Overdraft)

2,500

  1. Received a cheque of Rs 9,610 from ABC and Co., in full settlement of invoice for Rs 10,000. The cheque was deposited in State Bank of India, who charged Rs 15 as collection charges.
  2. Cash purchases Rs 15,000. Paid bearer cheque on Indian Bank.
  3. Transferred Rs 15,000 from Indian Bank to State Bank of India
  4. Withdrew Rs 4,000 from Indian Bank – Rs 2,500 for office use and Rs 1,500 for personal use.
  5. Paid advance salary to clerk Rs 1,500 by bearer cheque on State Bank of India.

make out the three column cash book of raj and co from the following transactions 567455

Make out the Three Column Cash Book of Raj and Co. from the following transactions:

Rs

2009 June

1

Cash in hand

500

Bank overdraft

1,500

Paid salaries for Mar

3,600

2

Cash sales

10,000

3

Purchased goods for cash

2,000

5

Issued cheque in favour of Mohan and Co. (discount allowed Rs 20)

480

7

Received cheque from Ram Dev. 385 (in full settlement of their debt of Rs 400)

385

9

Cheque issued in favour of Nayak for purchase of a ceiling fan

750

11

Cheque of Ram Dev, dishonoured, bank charges

15

15

Cash sales

5,000

17

Rent paid by cheque

1,000

20

Bank collects interest on securities

750

mr vincent does not pay all cash received into his bank he desires to record all cas 567457

Mr. Vincent does not pay all cash received into his bank. He desires to record all cash received and paid and all his bank transactions in one cash book. His transactions are:

Rs

2009 Aug

1

Cash in hand

1,000

Bank overdraft

1,750

Received cash from Mr. X (Discount allowed Rs 25)

175

2

Paid into bank

1,000

5

Drew cheque for Mr. Y (after deducting discount Rs 50)

200

9

Drew from bank

750

11

Cash sales

5,000

16

Paid wages by cheque

700

18

Received cheque from Z (after allowing him discount Rs 200 and paid it in bank)

2,800

(after allowing him discount Rs 200 and paid it in bank)

21

Z’s cheque returned dishonoured

23

Received cash from Mr. A (after allowing him discount Rs 50)

950

25

Paid into bank

1,000

27

Paid cash to Mr. B (after deducting discount Rs 35)

465

30

Bank charges as per Pass Book

15

transactions during the month of january 2009 567459

Transactions during the month of January 2009.

Rs

Jan

1

Paid wages due

200

3

Sold goods to Mr. P less 10% for cash in 20 days.

2,000

5

Sold goods to Mr. X less 5% trade discount

5,000

7

Cash paid into bank

7,000

9

Paid Kumar by cheque in full settlement

950

11

Sent Mr. X a credit note for Rs 250 for an allowance claimed by him for inferior goods

15

Discounted A’s acceptance at bank for

975

17

B became insolvent; received from him first and final dividend of forty paise in the rupee.

19

Withdrew from bank for office use

750

23

Received cheque from Mr. P for the amount due and paid the same into bank.

25

Sold shares Rs 5,000 at a premium of 3% less brokerage 1%

27

Paid Ravi by cheque in full settlement

2,450

28

Mr. P’s cheque was returned dishonoured and the discount was disallowed.

prepare a cash book with cash bank and discount columns from the transactions given 567460

Prepare a Cash Book with cash, bank and discount columns from the transactions given below:

Rs

2009 Sep

1

Cash balance

1,50,000

Bank balance

90,000

5

Deposited into bank

1,20,000

6

Bought fans for office by cheque

15,000

8

Paid for repairs

1,300

10

Goods purchased by cheque

25,000

13

Received a cheque for Rs 42,000 from Govind and allowed him discount Rs 400.

17

Gave Lal a cheque for Rs 23,000 and received a discount of Rs 300.

21

Sharath directly paid into our bank account

30,000

23

Withdrew from the bank for office use

5,000

25

Withdrew from the bank for personal use

1,000

enter into anand rsquo s cash book the following transactions which took place on 8 567461

Enter into Anand’s Cash Book the following transactions which took place on 8 June 2009 and balance the Cash Book.

  1. Balance bought forward from the previous day: cash in hand Rs 180 and at bank Rs 14,400
  2. Instructed the bank to issue a bank draft for Rs 9,000 in favour of Bhagya. The bank charged Rs 18 for it.
  3. Received a bank draft for Rs 10,368 from Mr. X in full settlement of Rs 10,800.
  4. Received a cheque from Mr. Y for Rs 3,600; Allowed him a discount of Rs 216.
  5. Endorsed Mr. Y’s cheque in favour of Mr. A.
  6. Sent a cheque for Rs 90 in payment of medicines for his wife.
  7. Withdrew Rs 900 form the bank.
  8. Placed order with Bintu for goods of the value of Rs 1,800 and sent cheque for Rs 1,800 for the same.

insert the following transactions in tabular petty cash book on 1st november 2009 th 567463

Insert the following transactions in Tabular Petty Cash Book. On 1st November 2009, the petty cashier begins with an imprest amount of Rs 3,000.

Rs

2009 Nov

1

Postage stamps

120

7

Travelling expenses

225

9

Cartage

450

11

Lorry freight

150

15

Repairs

750

16

Cleaning the office

150

19

Stationery

525

21

Office refreshment expenses

510

fill in the blanks with suitable word s 567403

Fill in the blanks with suitable word(s)

  1. There must be at least __________ parties to a transaction.
  2. One party __________ the benefit and the other party gives such benefit in a business transaction, in exchange for an equivalent value.
  3. The business transaction involves an exchange or transfer of _____ or _____ relating to goods or services.
  4. An account is a _____ of business transactions.
  5. Recording of a business transaction in an account is called __________.
  6. There are two main types of accounts namely __________ and Impersonal accounts.
  7. Persons to whom the goods have been sold on credit are called __________.
  8. Persons who have supplied goods on credit (or) who have advanced loans to the business enterprises are called __________.
  9. Accounts in the name of natural persons accounts is a __________.
  10. Accounts of legal entities or (artificial) is __________.
  11. Accounts of different persons of the same nature but more than one, is referred to as __________.
  12. Real account consists of both tangible real accounts and __________ accounts.
  13. Accounts of income and gains, and expenses and losses are known as __________ accounts.
  14. Valuation accounts are also known as __________ accounts.
  15. Items of expenses (such as salary account, rent account, interest account) account are nominal accounts whereas the respective item is shown as outstanding expenses (such as outstanding salary, outstanding rent and outstanding interest) are __________.
  16. The accounting system which recognises the twofold aspect of every business transaction is known as “__________”.
  17. The two aspects of each business transaction are depicted in terms of __________ and __________.
  18. The golden rule of double entry system is:
    1. _____ the account that receives the benefit
    2. _____ the account that gives the benefit
  19. For personal accounts __________ the receiver and __________ the giver.
  20. For real accounts: debit what __________ and credit what __________.
  21. For nominal accounts: all incomes and gains are __________ and all expenses and losses are __________.
  22. A daily record in which all daily transactions are first recorded chronologically is referred to as “__________”.
  23. For every debit, there should be a corresponding __________.
  24. American way of journalising is also based on “__________”.
  25. In all cases of entries the sum of debits must be equal to the __________.
  26. Accounting Equation is expressed as: Assets = __________ + Capital.
  27. Accounting Equation must remain __________ at all times.
  28. As per Accounting Equation approach, the assets and the __________ are always equal.

state whether the following statements are true or false 567404

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. A business transaction not necessarily involves an exchange of money or money’s worth.
  2. Business transactions are classified into Cash Transactions, Credit Transactions and Non cash Transactions.
  3. Depreciation is a credit transaction.
  4. Only one account is prepared for all transactions and it is not prepared for each and every item.
  5. Credit transactions are always nominal account.
  6. Accounts of legal entities in the nature of limited companies accounts belong to groups or representative personal accounts.
  7. Goodwill is a tangible account.
  8. Bad debt is a nominal account.
  9. Valuation accounts are also known as Contra Accounts.
  10. Interest received in advance is a Personal Account.
  11. Insurance Premium Account is a Personal Account.
  12. The giving and receiving aspects take place between accounts and in different account books and not in the same set of books.
  13. The giving and receiving aspects of a business transaction must be recorded simultaneously and at the same time.
  14. Double Entry System means recording each transaction twice.
  15. Every debit must have a corresponding credit
  16. A Goods account is generally not opened.
  17. In accounting, transactions are recorded on the basis of business entity concept.
  18. The business transactions are not recorded chronologically.
  19. The terms “General Journal” and “Journal Paper” both denote the same meaning.
  20. A Journal is a permanent record of the business
  21. Each transaction is provided with an explanation (written at the end of transaction briefly within brackets) is referred to as “narration.”
  22. The application of debit credit rules do not apply to American approach of journalising.
  23. The accounts with the balances in the previous year, comprising Real and Personal Accounts are entered in the new books of account with the help of “Opening Entry.”
  24. In an Accounting Equation Approach, transactions are analysed in terms of variables: assets, liabilities, capital, revenues and expenses.
  25. In an Accounting Equation Approach, decrease in an asset item is debited
  26. In an Accounting Equation Approach, decrease in liability is debited
  27. In an Accounting Equation Approach, increase in Capital is debited
  28. In an Accounting Equation Approach, increase in an expense item is debited
  29. Increase in an income item is debited as per American procedure.

Journal entry will be the same for both the conventional approach and accounting equation approach in recording business transactions

analyse the following business transactions accounts affected classification of acco 567407

  1. Analyse the following business transactions: accounts affected, classification of accounts, apply rules of debit and credit
    1. Sri Ram commences a business with a capital of Rs 5,00,000 in the name of Ram Enterprises.
    2. Bought goods for Rs 1,00,000.
    3. Bought goods from Jain for Rs 75,000.
    4. Goods sold to Gupta for Rs 90,000.
    5. Goods sold to Lal for cash Rs 60,000.
    6. Bought machinery for cash Rs 2,20,000.
    7. Paid into State Bank of India Rs 55,000.
    8. Bought office furniture from Modern Furn Mart for Rs 45,000.
    9. Received rent Rs 3,000.
    10. Paid salary to staff Rs 65,000.
    11. Bought shares in Real Ltd for Rs 15,000.
    12. Paid Ram’s insurance premium Rs 3,300.
    13. Withdraw from Bank Rs 10,000.
    14. Bank collected dividends on investments on our behalf Rs 6,200.
    15. Received from Ashok a bill at two months for Rs 25,000.
    16. Accepted the bill drawn by Sathyam Rs 55,000.
    17. Paid by cheque for an advertisement Rs 7,500.
    18. Paid by cheque for rent Rs 11,000.
    19. Received commission from Balu and Co. Rs 3,500.
    20. Paid for repairs (office) Rs 3,000.

journalise the following transactions in the books of mr vas 567408

  1. Journalise the following transactions in the books of Mr. Vas.
    1. Vas started his business with cash Rs 1,00,000.
    2. Purchased goods from Star and Co for cash Rs 20,000.
    3. Bought office furniture for cash Rs 7,500.
    4. Bought from Kumar, goods on credit for Rs 30,000.
    5. goods to Ravi for Rs 5,000 against a cheque.
    6. Purchased machinery from Biswas and Co. for Rs 1,00,000 out of which Rs 40,000 was paid by cheque.
    7. Paid office rent Rs 6,000.
    8. Received from Shekar Rs 4,850 in full settlement of his account for Rs 5,000.
    9. Salary to a salesman paid by cheque Rs 9,000.
    10. Received as commission Rs 350.
    11. Withdrawn cash from bank Rs 6,000 for personal use.
    12. Cash deposited into Bank Rs 10,000.
    13. Received on sale of investments Rs 37,000.
    14. Bank paid directly insurance premium Rs 1,100 for Vas.
    15. Paid Rs 300 for repair to furniture.
    16. Wages paid for erection of machinery Rs 600.
    17. Purchase of a computer on credit from Aditya and Co for Rs 40,000.
    18. Issued a cheque in favour of Aditya and Co for the purchase of a computer.
    19. Paid rent by cheque Rs 2,900.
    20. Paid electricity bill Rs 700 for the month.
    21. Paid for stationery Rs 250.
    22. Bank collected interest on our investments Rs 1,200.
    23. Bought shares in XY Ltd. for Rs 20,000.
    24. Received Rs 15,000 from Devi by cheque.
    25. Paid Devi’s cheque into Bank for Rs 15,000.

journalise the following transactions in the books of praveen and post them in the l 567412

Journalise the following transactions in the books of Praveen and post them in the ledger and balance them.

Apr 2009

1

Bought goods for cash Rs 50,000.

2

Sold goods for cash Rs 90,000.

3

Bought goods for credit from Govind Rs 15,000.

4

Sold goods on credit to Roy Rs 10,000.

5

Received from Roy Rs 7,000.

6

Paid to Govind Rs 5,000.

7

Bought furniture for cash Rs 3,000.

the process of transferring the transactions relating to changes in a particular ite 567414

Choose the Correct Answer

  1. Ledger is a book of:
    1. journalizing
    2. original entry
    3. secondary
    4. all credit transaction
  2. L.F. column in the Journal is to be entered at the time of:
    1. journalising
    2. casting
    3. balancing
    4. posting
  3. The process of transferring the transactions relating to changes in a particular item at one place in the form of an account is called:
    1. posting
    2. balancing
    3. journalizing
    4. none of the above
  4. The process of recording a transaction in the journal is called:
    1. posting
    2. journalising
    3. balancing
    4. none of the above
  5. The words “To Balance b/f, By Balance b/d are recorded in the “Particular Column” of the ledger book: at the time of
    1. opening entry
    2. closing entry
    3. simple entry
    4. compound entry
  6. Personal and real accounts are:
    1. at sometimes balance
    2. always balance
    3. closed
    4. closed and transferred
  7. The column of ledger which links the entry with journal is:
    1. L.F. Column
    2. J.F. Column
    3. Amount Column
    4. Date Column
  8. Real accounts always show:
    1. debit balance
    2. credit balance
    3. nil balance
    4. cannot be balanced
  9. Nominal account having credit balance represents:
    1. income and gain
    2. expense or loss
    3. assets
    4. liabilities
  10. Nominal account having debit balance represents:
    1. assets
    2. liabilities
    3. expense or loss
    4. income or gain
  11. When the total of the debits and the total of the credits are equal, it represents:
    1. nil balance
    2. debit balance
    3. credit balance
    4. none of the above
  12. Account having credit balance is closed by writing:
    1. To Balance c/d
    2. By Balance b/d
    3. To Balance b/d
    4. By balance b/f
  13. The balances of personal and real accounts are shown in the:
    1. Balance Sheet
    2. Profit and Loss Account
    3. both
    4. none of the above
  14. The nominal accounts are closed by transferring to:
    1. Balance Sheet
    2. Profit and Loss Account
    3. both
    4. none of the above
  15. In general, the following accounts are balanced:
    1. real accounts and nominal accounts
    2. personal accounts and real accounts
    3. personal accounts and nominal accounts
    4. none of the above

journalise the following transactions in the books of dev post them in the ledger an 567416

Journalise the following transactions in the books of Dev. Post them in the ledger and balance the various accounts opened in the ledger.

2009

Mar 1

Ramkumar commenced business with cash Rs 1,00,000.

Mar 2

Paid into the Bank Rs 60,000.

Mar 5

Purchased goods for cash Rs 70,000.

Mar 7

Sold goods for cash Rs 1,00,000.

Mar 9

Purchased goods from Tiwari Rs 60,000.

Mar 10

Sold goods to Diraj Rs 90,000.

Mar 15

Withdraw cash for personal use Rs 2,000.

Mar 17

Paid travelling charges Rs 1,800.

Mar 20

Paid electric charges Rs 700.

Mar 23

Draw cash from Bank for office purpose Rs 10,000.

Mar 30

Paid salaries to staff Rs 9,000.

journalise the following transaction in the books of govind post them in the ledger 567417

Journalise the following transaction in the books of Govind. Post them in the ledger and balance the various accounts opened in the ledger.

2009

Apr 1

Govind commenced business with the following assets and liabilities.

Cash

Rs 1,00,000

Stock

Rs 75,000

Machinery

Rs 90,000

Furniture

Rs 5,000

Creditors

Rs 1,00,000

Apr 4

Sold goods to Kamal Rs 1,15,000.

Apr 7

Bought goods from Ajay Rs 75,000.

Apr 9

Paid to Ajay Rs 50,000 on account.

Apr 11

Withdraw cash for personal use Rs 3,500.

Apr 13

Received Commission Rs 6,000.

Apr 15

Furniture purchased Rs 9,000.

Apr 17

Brought in additional capital Rs 25,000.

Apr 18

Issued a cheque for rent Rs 6,000.

Apr 19

Drew from bank for personal use Rs 4,000.

Apr 21

Paid life insurance premium Rs 1,327.

make journal entries and post them to ledger and balance them 567418

On 1, Apr 2009, the following were the ledger balance of Vasant.

Cash in hand – Rs 5,000.

Cash at Bank – Rs 60,000.

Bills Payable – Rs 7,000.

Stock – Rs 30,000.

Mr. A – Rs 7,000 (Dr.).

Mr. B – Rs 15,000; (Cr).

Mr. C. –Rs 9,000 (Dr.).

Mr. D – Rs 4,300 (Cr).

Other transactions

Apr 2

Bought goods from Mr. B – Rs 7,500.

Apr 4

Sold goods to Mr. B – Rs 6,000.

Apr 6

Bought goods from Mr. D – Rs 7,000.

Apr 8

Sold to Mr. A – Rs 4,000.

Apr 10

Paid to Mr. by cheque – Rs 9,000.

Apr 12

Received from Mr. C – Rs 10,000.

Allowed him discount – Rs 100.

Apr 14

Accepted Mr. D‘s bills at 2 months Rs 5,000.

Apr 15

Sold goods to Mr. C – Rs 6,500.

Apr 17

Paid rent by cheque – Rs 2,300.

Apr 20

Sold to Mr. A – Rs 8,000.

Apr 22

Paid salaries by cheque – Rs 4,800.

Make journal entries and post them to ledger and balance them.

prepare ajay rsquo s account as it would appear in the books of vijay 567419

Prepare Ajay’s account as it would appear in the books of Vijay.

2009

May 1

Sold goods to ajay

25,000

May 2

Received from ajay

10,000

May 7

Purchased goods from ajay

9,000

May 9

Paid to ajay

5,000

May 12

Sold goods to ajay

15,000

Allowed him discount

1,000

May 15

Ajay returned goods

2,500

May 16

Received cash from ajay

7,500

May 19

Sold goods for cash to ajay

4,000

May 24

Purchased goods from ajay

15,000

Discount received from him

1,500

May 27

Paid to ajay

10,000

prepare krishna rsquo s account in the books of venkat and venkat rsquo s account in 567420

Prepare Krishna’s account in the books of Venkat and Venkat’s account in the ledger of Krishna.

2009

May1

Venkat sold goods to Krishna

50,000

May3

Krishna paid cash to Venkat

30,000

May7

Krishna returned goods to venkat

2,000

May10

Venkat boughts goods from Krishna

15,000

May15

Venkat paid cash to Krishna

10000

May18

Venkat retrned goods to Krishna

1,000

record the following transactions in the journal of anand and open only personal acc 567421

Record the following transactions in the journal of Anand and open only personal account in the ledger and balance them.

2009

May 1

Anand started business with Rs 1,00,000.

May 2

Purchased goods from Sachin Rs 25,000.

May 7

Purchased furniture Rs 12,000 from King Enterprises.

May 9

Goods returned to Sachin – Rs 650.

May 13

Goods sold to Gopi for Rs 9,000.

May 15

Paid to Sachin Rs 19,500 and discount received Rs 500.

May 17

Goods returned by Gopi Rs 350.

May 25

Cash returned from Gopi – Rs 7,000.

May 27

Paid rent by cheque to the landlord Rs 5,000.

May 30

Paid to Sachin Rs 2,000.

enter the following transactions in a single column cash book of mr dev anand 567422

Enter the following transactions in a single column cash book of Mr. Dev Anand.

2009

Rs

Jan

2

Started business with cash

10,000

3

Purchased goods for cash

2,000

6

Sold goods

2,000

7

Cash paid for mobile recharge

200

8

Paid cheque to a creditor

1,800

9

Cash received from Babu

1,000

12

Bought furniture

1,750

14

Received commission

250

15

Sale of securities

7,000

17

Part payment to suppliers X Ltd. Rs 1,000 against their previous bill for

5,000

19

Cash sales

12,000

20

Goods purchased by credit

10,000

prepare a two column cash book from the following transactions of mr ravisankar 567423

Prepare a two column cash book from the following transactions of Mr. Ravisankar.

2009

Rs

May

1

Cash in hand

6,000

3

Cash purchase

4,000

5

Cartage paid

100

7

Cash sales

10,000

9

Cash received from Ravi

4,900

and allowed him discount

100

11

Cash paid to Radha and

1,450

discount received

50

12

Received cheque from Rai and

4,800

allowed him discount

200

14

Rent paid

1,000

16

Salaries paid

3,000

18

Cash received from Lal

2,400

and allowed him discount

100

19

Cash paid to Rao and

1,950

received discount

50

enter the following transactions in the cash book with discount columns for the mont 567424

Enter the following transactions in the cash book with discount columns for the month of May 2009.

Rs

May

1

Cash sales

15,000

2

Goods sold to Tandon on credit

30,000

3

Goods purchased on credit from Hemant

40,000

4

Cash withdrawn for L.I.C. Premium

2,000

10

Received cash Rs 24,800 and a cheque for Rs. 5,000 from Tandon as a fi nal settlement

12

Cash sale of goods; Cash sent to Bank

17,000

14

Paid Hemant Rs 20,000 cash and the balance Rs 19,800 by cheque and his account was closed

15

Received from Ashok cash

50,000

and allowed him discount

1,000

16

Received insurance claim

2,000

17

Cash recovered from Sachin, which was written off bad in January

7,500

19

Withdrawn from Bank

3,500

20

Withdrawn from offi ce to meet the medical expenses of the proprietors parents

2,500

21

Parents deposited with Bank

25,000

enter the following transactions in the three column cash book of bhagya shree 567427

Enter the following transactions in the three column cash book of Bhagya Shree.

2009, Mar

1

Bhagya Shree started business with cash Rs 1,50,000

2

Deposited into bank Rs 50,000

4

Sold goods to Sathyan for Rs 20,000, cash discount allowed 2% and received cash for the balance

5

Bought goods Rs 20,000 on credit

6

Sent to Kaveri by money order Rs 400, the money order commission Rs 20

7

Dividend collected by the bank as per Pass Book Rs 1,600

8

Received repayment of loan from Parul Rs 17,000

9

Vasanth, one of our customers, paid directly into the Bank Account Rs 9,000

10

Cheque issued in favour of Raj, for the purchase of office equipment Rs 7,600

11

Renu settled her account for Rs 5,000 by giving cheque for Rs 4,850

12

Renu’s cheque sent for collection to the bank

13

Raj, to whom she issued a cheque was dishonoured

14

Renu’s cheque returned dishonoured

on apr 1 2009 a cheque of rs 9 850 was given to the petty cashier to pay petty cash 567428

On Apr 1, 2009 a cheque of Rs 9,850 was given to the petty cashier to pay petty cash expenses for which the transactions are as follows:

Rs

Apr

1

Petty cash in hand

150

2

Carriage

100

3

Bus fare

50

4

Postal stamps

150

5

Stationery

1,300

6

Railway fare

150

7

Courier service expenses

200

8

Printing charges

300

9

Fax expenses

200

10

Internet expenses

350

14

Office expenses

600

18

Taxi

400

19

Paper to take print outs

890

20

Advertisement

1,850

21

Floppy and Pen drives

1,200

27

Office cleaning

600

28

Charities

50

29

Refreshment to customers in the form of cool drink/coffee who visit office

300

30

Railway freight

710

prepare the purchases book and ledger accounts related to this from the following tr 567429

Prepare the Purchases Book and ledger accounts related to this, from the following transactions of Good Luck Enterprises for June 2009.

2009

June 8

Bought from Vivek and Co. on credit:

10 Washing Machines @ Rs 9,000

5 Micro Wave Ovens @ Rs 7,000

Trade Discount @ 20%

June 15

Purchased for cash from Rahman and Bros.

2 Computers @ Rs 47,500

June 28

Purchase on credit from Lalit and Co.

2000 CDs @ Rs 25

100 Pen Drives @ Rs 500

Trade Discount @ 10%

June 29

Purchased on credit, from Robert and Bros.

2 Lap Tops @ Rs 80,000

modern electronics purchased the following goods on credit during february 2009 ente 567430

Modern Electronics purchased the following goods on credit during February 2009. Enter them in the Purchases Book.

2009

Feb 3

Bought from Crescent Electronics, 100 F.M. Radio sets @ Rs 150 per set. Trade discount @ 10%. VAT paid by us @ 12%.

Feb 7

Purchased from Alpha Electronics, 30 pieces of Two in one Tape Records @ Rs 1,750. Trade discount 20%. Packing and forwarding charges Rs 300. VAT @ 8%.

Feb 15

Purchased from Moon Electronics, compact MP3 Players @ Rs 1,350 20 players. Trade discount 10%. DVD players 50 pieces each costing Rs 3,000. Packing charges Rs 400. Transport charges Rs 5,000. All expenses to be borne by purchasing firm.

from the following transactions prepare the sales book of venkatesh for apr 2009 and 567431

From the following transactions, prepare the Sales Book of Venkatesh for Apr 2009 and necessary ledger accounts related to it.

2009

Apr 2

Sold on credit to Sun Traders 10 Titan watches @ Rs 1,500 10% discount is allowed.

Apr 5

Sold to Banu for cash 5 Titan (crystal) watches @ Rs 2,000.

Apr 7

Sold to Singh and Co. 10 Titan (digital) watches @ Rs 2,500 10% discount is allowed.

Apr 10

Sold on credit an old show case Rs 9,000.

liability recognition and measurement the transactions listed next relate to hana mi 566901

Liability recognition and measurement. The transactions listed next relate to Hana Microelectronic Public Company Limited (Hana Microelectronic), an electronics and semiconductor firm headquartered in Thailand. Indicate whether each transaction immediately gives rise to a liability under U.S. GAAP and, separately, IFRS. If accounting recognizes a liability, state the account title, the amount, and the classification of the liability on the balance sheet as either a current liability or a noncurrent liability. Hana Microelectronic

reports its results in millions of baht (Bt).

a. Hana Microelectronic agrees to purchase land and a manufacturing plant from Fujitsu Limited, for Bt3,000 million.

b. Hana Microelectronic receives a check for Bt168 million from a customer for the delivery of merchandise that Hana Microelectronic will produce next month.

c. Refer to the event in part b, except now assume that Hana Microelectronic will deliver half of the merchandise next month and the remainder three years from now.

d. During the year, Hana Microelectronic issues 6 million shares of Bt1 par value common stock, for Bt62 million.

e. Hana Microelectronic borrows Bt24 million from a local bank, payable in equal installments over the next three years and bearing interest at the annual rate of 9%.

f. Hana Microelectronic signs a contract to purchase at least Bt45 million of merchandise from a particular supplier over the next two years.

g. Refer to part f, and assume Hana Microelectronic places an order for Bt15 million of this merchandise.

liability recognition and measurement the following hypothetical events relate to th 566902

Liability recognition and measurement. The following hypothetical events relate to the Berlin Philharmonic. Indicate whether each transaction immediately gives rise to a liability under U.S. GAAP and, separately, IFRS. If the Berlin Philharmonic recognizes a liability, state the account title, the amount, and the classification of the liability on the balance sheet as either a current liability or a noncurrent liability. The Berlin Philharmonic reports its results in euros.

a. The Berlin Philharmonic receives €3,040,000 for season tickets sold for next season.

b. The Berlin Philharmonic places an order with a printing company totaling €185,000 for symphony performance programs for next season.

c. The Berlin Philharmonic receives the programs ordered in part b, along with an invoice for €185,000.

d. The Berlin Philharmonic receives notice from its attorneys that a loyal customer attending a concert last season and sitting in the first row of the symphony hall has sued the Berlin Philharmonic for €10 million claiming hearing loss. The customer normally sits further back but staff asked her to move forward for this particular concert because of damage to the regular seat.

e. The Berlin Philharmonic signs a three year contract with its first violinist at a salary of €140,000 per year.

f. The Berlin Philharmonic signs a five year contract with Sir Simon Rattle, present conductor of the Philharmonic, to be the spokesman for the symphony at the end of his current contract, in 2012. Under the terms of the deal, the Berlin Philharmonic will pay compensation of €2 million a year to Sir Simon, beginning in 2012. Sir Simon will earn this compensation regardless of whether the Berlin Philharmonic asks him to perform any speaking engagements each year.

recognition and measurement of a loss contingency consider the following hypothetica 566903

Recognition and measurement of a loss contingency. Consider the following hypothetical scenario for Beyond Petroleum (BP), a U.K. oil and gas firm. One of BP’s oil rig platforms collapsed, creating damage to the seafloor as well as environmental damage to surrounding ocean water. Given the following additional information, what amount, if any, should BP recognize as a liability were it applying U.S. GAAP and, separately, IFRS? BP reports its results in millions of U.S. dollars.

a. Engineers who have examined the damaged site believe that much of the damage will naturally resolve itself, leading them to conclude that there is a 90% chance that damages are zero. They further estimate there is a 10% chance that the forces of nature will not resolve the damages, which will require additional intervention at a cost of $10 million.

b. Upon further analysis, the engineers in part a have revised their assessments. They now believe there is a 51% chance that damages will be $5 million, and a 49% chance damages will be zero.

c. Environmentalists who have examined the damaged site believe that the damage is extensive and requires immediate cleanup, with the following range of damage estimates: $25 million (probability 20%); $300 million (probability 35%); and $4,000 million (probability 45%).

d. Upon further analysis, the environmentalists in part c have revised their assessments. They now believe there is an 85% chance that damages will be $5,000 million and a 15% chance they will be zero.

effect of recording errors on the balance sheet equation magyar telekom is a hungari 566904

Effect of recording errors on the balance sheet equation. Magyar Telekom is a Hungarian telecommunications company. The company applies IFRS and reports its results in millions of Hungarian forints (HUF). For each of the following hypothetical transactions or events facing Magyar Telekom, indicate the effects on assets, liabilities, and shareholders’ equity of failing to record or recording incorrectlythe transaction or event. Use the notation O/S (overstated), U/S (understated), or No (no effect). For example, Magyar

Telekom’s failure to record the issuance of common stock for HUF10,000 cash would be shown as follows:

Assets—U/S HUF10,000.

Liabilities—No.

Shareholders’ equity—U/S HUF10,000.

(1) Magyar Telekom ordered HUF5,600 million of inventory from a supplier but did not record anything in its accounts.

(2) Magyar Telekom received the merchandise in transaction (1) and recorded it by debiting Inventory and crediting Accounts Payable for HUF6,500 million.

(3) Magyar Telekom acquired new equipment costing HUF17,000 million by paying HUF2,500 million in cash and signing a note payable for the remainder of the purchase price. It recorded the acquisition by debiting Equipment for HUF2,500 million and crediting Cash for HUF2,500 million.

(4) The firm paid the HUF36,000 million annual insurance premium on its headquarters building by debiting Property and crediting Cash for HUF36,000 million. The insurance period begins next month.

(5) Magyar Telekom won a contract to supply telecommunications services to a customer next year. The value of the contract is HUF25,000 million. The customer delivered a check to Magyar Telekom in the amount of HUF6,000 million. The firm made no journal entries for these events.

(6) The firm issued 2 million shares of its HUF100 par value common stock when the shares traded in the stock market at HUF700 per share. It issued the shares to acquire land. It recorded the transaction by debiting Land and crediting Common Stock for HUF200.

(7) The firm signed a three year employment agreement with its chairperson for an annual salary of HUF6.6 million. The employment period begins next month. The firm did not record anything in its accounts related to this agreement.

effect of recording errors on the balance sheet equation sider rgica venezolana sive 566905

Effect of recording errors on the balance sheet equation. Siderúrgica Venezolana “Sivensa,” S.A., is a Venezuelan steel and metalworking company. Assume that during a recent year, Sivensa recorded various transactions with the following journal entries. The company applies IFRS and reports its results in thousands of U.S. dollars. Using the notation O/S (overstated), U/S (understated), or No (no effect), indicate the effects on assets, liabilities, and shareholders’ equity of any errors in Sivensa’s recording of each of these transactions. For example, if Sivensa recorded the issue of $10,000 of common stock by debiting Cash and crediting Bonds Payable, the effects of the error are as follows:

Assets—No.

Liabilities—O/S $10,000.

Shareholders’ equity—U/S $10,000.

prepare a balance sheet for cathay pacific on december 31 2007 and december 31 2006 566906

Balance sheet format, terminology, and accounting methods. Exhibit 3.3 presents the balance sheet of Cathay Pacific Airways Limited (Cathay Pacific), the Hong Kong airline, for the years ended December 31, 2007 and 2006. This balance sheet uses the terminology, format, and accounting methods of Hong Kong Financial Reporting Standards (HKFRS). Cathay reports results in millions of Hong Kong dollars (HKD).

a. Prepare a balance sheet for Cathay Pacific on December 31, 2007, and December 31, 2006, following the format and terminology commonly used by firms that apply U.S. GAAP.

b. Prepare a balance sheet for Cathay Pacific on December 31, 2007, and December 31, 2006, following the format and terminology commonly used by firms that apply IFRS.

balance sheet format terminology and accounting methods exhibit 3 5 presents the bal 566908

Balance sheet format, terminology, and accounting methods. Exhibit 3.5 presents the balance sheet prepared by Ericsson, the Swedish telecommunications firm, for the years

Cathay Pacific Airways Limited
Balance Sheets
(amounts in millions of HK dollars (HKD))
(Problem 29)

Year ended December 31,

2007

2006

ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

Noncurrent Assets and Liabilities

Fixed Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD 62,388

HKD 57,602

Intangible Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7,782

7,749

Investments in Associates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10,054

8,826

Other Long Term Receivables and Investments . . . . .

3,519

3,406

HKD 83,743

HKD 77,583

Long Term Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD(40,323)

HKD(33,956)

Related Pledged Security Deposits . . . .

7,833

8,164

Net Long Term Liabilities . . . . . . . . . .

32,490

25,792

Retirement Benefit Obligations . . . . . .

268

170

Deferred Taxation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6,771

6,508

HKD(39,529)

HKD(32,470)

Net Noncurrent Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD 44,214

HKD 45,113

Current Assets and Liabilities

Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD 882

HKD 789

Trade and Other Receivables . . . . . . . . . . . .

11,376

8,735

Liquid Funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21,649

15,624

HKD 33,907

HKD 25,148

Current Portion of Long Term Liabilities . . . . .

HKD (4,788)

HKD (7,503)

Related Pledged Security Deposits . . . . . . . .

910

1,352

Net Current Portion of Long Term Liabilities . .

3,878

6,151

Trade and Other Payables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14,787

10,999

Unearned Transportation Revenue . . . . . . . . .

6,254

4,671

Taxation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,475

2,902

HKD(27,394)

HKD(24,723)

Net Current Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD 6,513

HKD 425

Net Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD 50,727

HKD 45,538

CAPITAL AND RESERVES

Share Capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD 788

HKD 787

Reserves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49,761

44,599

Funds Attributable to Cathay Pacific Shareholders . .

HKD 50,549

HKD 4 5,386

Minority Interests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD 178

HKD 152

Total Equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HKD 50,727

HKD 45,538

ended December 31, 2007, and December 31, 2006. Ericsson applies IFRS, and reports its results in millions of Swedish kronor (SEK). In addition to the items reported in Ericsson’s balance sheet, assume the following hypothetical information is available to you:

In 2007 Ericsson revalued land with an acquisition cost of SEK300 million upward, to its current fair value of SEK1,200 million.

In 2007 Ericsson wrote down the value of equipment, with a net carrying value of SEK2,400 million, to its fair value of SEK1,600 million.

Included in current provisions for 2007 is the estimated loss on a lawsuit, which a competitor filed, alleging patent infringement. Ericsson estimates the following range

Infosys Technologies
Limited Balance Sheet
For Years Ended March 31, 2008 and 2007
(Problem 30)

2008

2007

SOURCES OF FUNDS

SHAREHOLDERS’ FUNDS

Share capital

286

286

Reserves and surplus

13,204

10,876

13,490

11,162

APPLICATION OF FUNDS

FIXED ASSETS

Original cost

4,508

3,889

Less: Accumulated depreciation

1,837

1,739

Net book value

2,671

2,150

Add: Capital work in progress

1,260

957

3,931

3,107

INVESTMENTS

964

839

DEFERRED TAX ASSETS

99

79

CURRENT ASSETS, LOANS AND ADVANCES

Sundry debtors

3,093

2,292

Cash and bank balances

6,429

5,470

Loans and advances

2,705

1,199

12,227

8,961

LESS: CURRENT LIABILITIES AND PROVISIONS

Current liabilities

1,483

1,162

Provisions

2,248

662

NET CURRENT ASSETS

8,496

7,137

13,490

11,162

of outcomes for this lawsuit: 10% chance of damages of SEK6,000 million, 10% chance of damages of SEK2,400 million, 30% chance of damages of SEK500 million, 10% chance of damages of SEK40 million, and 40% chance of zero damages. Prepare a balance sheet for Ericsson on December 31, 2007, following the format, terminology and accounting methods required by U.S. GAAP. Ignore any income tax effects of any revisions to reported amounts.

if the transaction cannot be translated in monetary terms it is not considered as pa 567376

State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Accounting information is useful only to the management.
  2. Accounting is the language of business.
  3. Accounting involves communication.
  4. Financial statements are the channel of accounting communication.
  5. If the transaction cannot be translated in monetary terms, it is not considered as part of the accounting information system.
  6. Information needs of accounting are not required for owners of small business enterprises.
  7. Most of the needs of the accounting information are met from unpublished internal reports by the management.
  8. Under cash basis of accounting, credit transactions are not at all recorded in the books of account.
  9. Under accrual basis of accounting, revenue is recognised only when cash is actually received.
  10. Under cash basis of accounting, no adjustments are made for outstanding expenses and accrued income.

the major internal user of the accounting information is of an enterprise 567377

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. The information generated by final reports of an enterprise is generally known as __________ information.
  2. The two broad categories of users of the financial accounting information are __________ and __________.
  3. Ability of the firm to meet its long term obligations is referred to as __________.
  4. Ability of the firm to meet its short term obligations is referred to as __________.
  5. The major internal user of the accounting information is __________ of an enterprise.
  6. Consistency __________ the switching of accounting methods from year to year.
  7. Under cash basis of accounting __________ transactions are not recorded.
  8. Under accrual basis of accounting, revenues are recognised when they are __________.
  9. Under hybrid basis of accounting, revenues are recognised on __________ basis while expenses are recorded on __________ basis.
  10. Under accrual basis of accounting, outstanding expenses and unaccrued income will affect the Profit and Loss Account showing a __________ profit

state whether the following statements are true or false 567381

I. State whether the following statements are True or False

  1. Accounting principles are judged on their general acceptability (subject to laws of the land) is the underlying concept of GAPP.
  2. Accounting principles are final statement.
  3. In all types of organisations, business is an accounting entity that separates from the owners.
  4. Different accounting concepts are independent of each other.
  5. GAPP manifest themselves through basic accounting concepts and accounting conventions.
  6. Accounting concepts are based on accounting conventions
  7. Accounting concepts are not internally inconsistent.
  8. The capital of the owner is treated as a creditor for his investment in business.
  9. The separate legal entity is recognised in law in the case of partnership firms.
  10. As per entity concept, income is the property of the business and not that of the owners.
  11. Money, the unit of measurement, has always a constant value.
  12. The going concern concept facilitates the classification of assets and liabilities into short term and long term.
  13. The accounting period concept necessitates the preparation of income statement on accrual basis.
  14. As per the cost concept, assets are always values at historical cost.
  15. Unexpired costs are not recorded in the balance sheet.
  16. Realisation of revenue occurs at the time of exchange of goods or services.
  17. Under accrual basis of accounting, revenue is recognised when the cash is received.
  18. The accrual concept can also be described as the matching concept.
  19. As per prudence convention, the accountants should anticipate profit and should not make provision for loss
  20. As per materiality convention, the accountants should disclose all information in the financial statements, irrespective of the nature of materiality.

fill in the blanks with suitable words 567382

Fill in the blanks with suitable words

  1. In double entry accounting, all business transactions are marked as having __________ aspect.
  2. Accounting principles are only __________ based on usage, and experience over a period of years.
  3. Accounting concepts are not _________ forever.
  4. The separate legal entity is recognised by law in the case of a _______ form of business organisation.
  5. Though separate entity is not recognised by law in some types of organisations, the assumption of separate entity has to be followed in __________ types of business organisations.
  6. The capital of the business is considered as a __________ of the business to its owners.
  7. At cost or book value means cost ____________ depreciation.
  8. Periodicity concept emphasises _____________ period assumption.
  9. The cost concept is also referred at as ________ cost concept.
  10. __________ concept assumes that the business entity will continue its activities independently.
  11. The money measurement assumption which assumes that purchasing power of money is always __________.
  12. The realisation concept emphasises the timing of __________.
  13. The essence of accrual concept is that the earning of a revenue and consumption of expenses are related to a __________.
  14. Disclosure is the_________ and _________ of financial information to its users.
  15. Accounting records and statements must confirm to __________.

on jan 4 2009 raj commences a business enterprise under the name of ldquo good luck 567391

Analysis of some business transactions

  1. On Jan 1, 2009, Goods bought for Rs 50,000.
  2. On Jan 2, 2009, goods bought from Sri Jain for Rs 70,000.
  3. On Jan 4, 2009, Raj commences a business enterprise under the name of “Good Luck Enterprises” with a capital of Rs 5,00,000.
  4. On Jan 5, 2009, Goods sold to Sathyan for cash Rs 1,00,000.
  5. On Jan 7, 2009, goods sold to Kashyap for Rs 2,00,000.
  6. On Jan 8, 2009, Bought Laptop from “E Top Enterprises” for Rs 50,000.
  7. On Jan 9, 2009, paid Rs 60,000 for goods received from Sun Textiles.
  8. On Jan 10, 2009, paid into Indian Bank Rs 15,000.
  9. On Jan 11, 2009, withdrawn from the Bank Rs 15,000.
  10. On Jan 12, 2009, Borrowed from the Bank Rs 3,00,000.
  11. On Jan 14, 2009, paid by cheque for the rent Rs 5,000.
  12. On Jan 15, 2009, opened a Current Account with the State Bank of India for Rs 25,000.
  13. On Feb 15, 2009, received cheque from Gupta for Rs 15,000.
  14. On Feb 20, 2009, cheque received from Sekhar for Rs 20,000 and banked immediately.
  15. On Feb 27, 2009, paid Verma Rs 5,000 in lieu of a cheque.
  16. On Mar 1, 2009, received from Sharma a bill at 3 months for Rs 30,000.
  17. On Mar 5, 2009, Accepted the bill drawn by Shree for Rs 15,000.
  18. On Mar 7, 2009, Narayan withdrew for personal use Rs 15,000.
  19. On Mar 9, 2009, paid by cheque for Group Insurance Premium (for employees in a business concern) Rs 25,000.
  20. On Mar 10, 2009, Renu paid life insurance premium of Rs 1,200.
  21. On Mar 15, 2009, bought shares in VRV Ltd. for Rs 60,000.
  22. On Mar 20, 2009, Bank collected dividends on Renu’s investments Rs 15,000.

purchased goods from khan of the list price of rs 50 000 at a trade discount of 12 567393

Journalise the following transactions:

Feb 1, 2009

Bought goods for Rs 1,00,000.

Feb 2, 2009

Bought goods from Banerjee for Rs 30,000.

Feb 5, 2009

Bought goods from Lal for Rs 25,000 against a current dated cheque.

Feb 10, 2009

Purchased goods from Khan of the list price of Rs 50,000, at a trade discount of 12%.

Feb 12, 2009

Purchased goods of the list price of Rs 2,00,000 from Chopra less 5% trade discount and 5% cash discount and paid 50% by cheque.

Feb 15, 2009

Rejected and returned 5% of goods supplied by Banerjee.

Feb 16, 2009

Rejected and returned 10% of goods bought from Khan.

sold goods costing rs 1 00 000 to ram at a profit of 20 on sales less 10 trade disco 567394

Journalise the following transactions:

1.3.2009

Sold goods for Rs 1,25,000.

3.3.2009

Sold goods to Sathyan for Rs 25,000.

5.3.2009

Sold goods to Kashyap for Rs 20,000 against a cheque.

7.3.2009

Sold goods to Ajay of the list price of Rs 50,000 at a trade discount of 10%.

9.3.2009

Sold goods to Vas of the list price of Rs 90,000, less with 10% trade discount and received a cheque under a cash discount of 5%.

11.3.2009

Sold goods to Dev of list price of Rs 90,000, less with 10% trade discount and 5% cash discount and paid 50% by cheque.

13.3.2009

Sold goods to Gopi costing Rs 1,00,000 for cash at a profit of 25% on cost less 10% trade discount and charged VAT @ 12% and paid package charge Rs 1000 (not to be charged from customer).

15.3.2009

Sold goods costing Rs 1,00,000 to Ram at a profit of 20% on sales, less 10% trade discount and charged VAT @ 12% and paid cartage Rs 1000 (to be charged from customer).

17.3.2009

Sathyan rejected and returned 5% of goods.

19.3.2009

Ajay rejected and returned 10% of goods.

bought goods worth rs 6 000 from gopal and sold the same to thomas for rs 7 500 567395

Journalise the following transactions:

Apr 1, 2009:

Bought goods worth Rs 6,000 from Gopal and sold the same to Thomas for Rs 7,500.

Apr 3, 2009:

Paid salaries to staff Rs 5,000 and recovered from travelling salesman Rs 1,000 for goods supplied to him after deducting his travelling expenses Rs 175.

Apr 5, 2009:

Goods destroyed by fire (Sale price Rs 4,000, Cost Rs 3,200).

Apr 6, 2009:

Goods worth Rs 1,20,000 are insured against loss by fire. The policy is for Rs 1,00,000. Actual loss caused by fire is Rs 72,000. The insurance company admits the claim and pays proportionately.

goods costing rs 1 000 supplied as charity sale price rs 1250 567396

Journalise the following transactions:

Feb 15, 2009

Goods costing Rs 1,000 supplied as charity (Sale price Rs 1250)

Feb 16, 2009

Goods used in making of furniture costing Rs 1,000 (Sale price Rs 2,500)

Feb 17, 2009

Goods costing Rs 2,000 distributed as free samples (Sale price Rs 2,500)

Feb 18, 2009

Goods stolen in transit costing Rs 500 (Sale price Rs 750)

Feb 19, 2009

Goods stolen by storekeeper costing Rs 2,200

the buffalo bought was dead its carcass was sold for rs 800 567397

Journalise the following transactions:

Jan 1, 2009:

Cash in hand: Rs 20,000; Machinery Rs 40,000; Furniture Rs 3,000; Land and Building Rs 1,75,000; Bills Receivable Rs 10,000; Bills Payable Rs 7,500; Lal — Rs 10,000 (Debtor); Chand — Rs 7,000 (Debitor); Krish — Rs 8,000 (Creditor).

Jan 3, 2009:

Bought a buffalo for Rs 20,000 and a wooden cart for Rs 20,000 for supply of goods to remote rural customers.

Jan 5, 2009:

A customer’s cheque for Rs 10,000 returned dishonoured for insufficient funds in his accounts. The customer had availed cash discount of Rs 500.

Jan 30, 2009:

The buffalo bought was dead. Its carcass was sold for Rs 800.

received a first and final dividend of 70 paise in the rupee from the official recei 567398

Journalise the following transactions:

Apr 1, 2009

Capital Rs 2,00,000; Debtors — Rs 20,000; Cash in hand — Rs 5,000; Cash at Bank — Stock Rs 7,000; Creditors Rs 25,000; Rs 15,000; Machinery Rs 1,50,000; Furniture and Fixtures — Rs 25,000.

Apr 2, 2009

Received Rs 1,500 from Mohamed in full settlement of his account Rs 2,000.

Apr 3, 2009

Received Rs 1,500 from Xavier on his account for Rs 2,000.

Apr 4, 2009

Paid Rs 1,400 to Guru in full settlement of his account for Rs 1500.

Apr 5, 2009

Paid Rs 1,400 to Veer Singh on his account for Rs 1,500.

Apr 6, 2009

Received a first and final dividend of 70 paise in the rupee from the official receiver of Mr. Rao who owed Rs 3,000.

Apr 7, 2009

Wages paid Rs 1000 for erection of plant.

exchanged old metador van for a new piageo tempo carrier the old van was valued at r 567399

Journalise the following transactions:

Apr 10, 2009

Purchased 200 shares of VRV Ltd @ Rs 90 per share (Face value Rs 100 per share); brokerage paid 2%.

Apr 17, 2009

Sold 100 shares of VRV Ltd @ Rs 95 per share brokerage paid Rs 190.

Apr 20, 2009

Sold personal scooter for Rs 25,000 and bought a new car for business plus Rs 1,80,000 from office cash.

Apr 25, 2009

Damaged goods worth Rs 3,000 are sold for Rs 1,000.

Apr 27, 2009

Exchanged old Metador van for a new Piageo tempo carrier. The old van was valued at Rs 35,000. The price of new tempo is Rs 2,70,000. The balance was paid in cash.

apply the rules of debit and credit for each of the accounts as given in under moder 567401

Apply the Rules of Debit and Credit for each of the accounts as given in under modern approach.

1. Capital brought in

Category

Capital Accounts

Rule

Debit the decrease and Credit the increase

2. Land purchased

Category

Assets Accounts

Rule

Debit the increase and Credit the decrease

3. Purchases A/c

Category

Expenses Accounts

Rule

Debit the increase and Credit the decrease

4. Sales A/c

Category

Revenue Accounts or Income and Gains A/c

Rule

Debit the decrease and Credit the increase

5. Cash paid

Category

Assets Accounts

Rule

Debit the increase and Credit the decrease

continuing with the transaction proposed in example 6 both the owner of the facility 566866

Continuing with the transaction proposed in Example 6, both the owner of the facility and Scania sign a contract in which they promise to transact—to sell and purchase the facility—one year later. Such an exchange of promises is an executory contract, an exchange of promises for mutual performance in the future that neither party has yet begun to perform. In the executory contract described in this example, Scania has acquired the rights to the future benefits arising from the facility, but the contract is unexecuted by both the facility owner (who must relinquish control of the facility) and Scania (who must pay the agreed purchase price). Executory contracts are typically not assets or liabilities until one or both of the contracting parties begin to complete their contractual obligations.

which is also the fair value is calculated as follows with each cash flow occurring 566869

Nordstrom lends $1 million to Worldwide Retailers Inc. (Worldwide). The terms of the loan call for Worldwide to pay Nordstrom $130,000 at the end of each of the next five years and an additional $655,000 at the end of the fifth year. The total amount of cash that Worldwide will pay Nordstrom is $1.305 million [_ ($130,000 _ 5) _ $655,000]. The present value of the future cash inflows to Nordstrom associated with this loan differs as the discount rate changes. If the discount rate is the rate that a market participant would demand in an arm’s length lending arrangement, the present value is an estimate of the fair value of the loan. For example, if that rate is 7%, the present value, which is also the fair value, is calculated as follows (with each cash flow occurring at the end of the year indicated, amounts in millions):

First Year:. . .

$130 ÷ (1.07)1=

$121.50

Second Year: .

$130 ÷ (1.07)2 =

$113.55

Third Year: . .

$130 ÷ (1.07)3 =

$106.12

Fourth Year: .

$130 ÷ (1.07)4 =

$99.18

Fifth Year: . .

$130 ÷ (1.07)5 =

$92.69

Fifth Year: . .

$655 ÷ (1.07)5 =

$467.01

The sum of these discounted future cash flows is $1 million (after rounding). From a business perspective, Nordstrom is lending $1 million with the expectation that it will receive both the principal of $1 million and an annual return of 7%. Nordstrom expects to receive a total undiscountedcash inflow from Worldwide of $1.305 million (5 [$130 3 5] 1 $655); these undiscounted cash inflows include both principal and interest at 7%. Other techniques for estimating the fair value of assets go beyond the scope of this textbook. We can use the discounted cash flow technique to illustrate the problems that the firm must solve to estimate a fair value in the absence of an observable market price. First, the firm identifies the amounts of future cash flows. In the loan example, there is no uncertainty about the cash flows, but as a practical matter, the future cash flows associated with an asset may depend on numerous factors, including technological innovation, product introductions by competitors, and inflation rates to name but a few. Even in the example of the loan with contractually specified cash flows, there is some possibility that Worldwide will default (that is, not make the promised payments). In a fair value measurement, Nordstrom would use a market participant perspective to estimate the probability of default. Second, the firm selects the appropriate rate to discount the future cash flows to the present.

To provide an estimate of the asset’s fair value, the discount rate should be the rate that market participants would use, reflecting current economic conditions including, for example, expectations of inflation and any uncertainty about the cash flows of the asset. We discuss fair value measurement more fully in Chapter 10.

Asset recognition and measurement. The transactions listed below relate to Polo Ralph Lauren (“Polo”). For each, indicate whether the transaction immediately gives rise to an asset for Polo and, if so, state the account title and amount Polo will record.

a. Polo spends $16 million to advertise a new line of perfume in the expectation that the advertisements will attract new customers.

b. Polo signs a contract with Nordstrom for the distribution of its fall line of clothes. Polo promises to distribute certain jeans exclusively through Nordstrom, and Nordstrom promises to display and market the jeans in a manner designed to increase sales. Polo estimates the fair value of the contract to be $4 million.

c. Polo invests $24 million in research and development related to its paint line of business.

d. Polo spends $800,000 on tuition assistance programs for its middle level managers to obtain MBAs. Historically, 80% of the managers who seek MBAs receive them and remain with the company five years or more.

e. Polo acquires and occupies a warehouse outside of Seattle by signing a mortgage payable for $75 million. Legal title for the warehouse remains with the bank (the holder of the mortgage) because Polo has not completed all required payments under the mortgage. Solutions to self study problems appear at the end of the chapter.

nordstrom borrowed 4 million by issuing long term bonds whose terms require that on 566871

Nordstrom borrowed $4 million by issuing long term bonds whose terms require that on December 31 of each year, Nordstrom make a payment of 10% of the amount borrowed. In addition, Nordstrom must repay the $4 million initial amount borrowed in 20 years. The $4 million obligation is a liability because Nordstrom received the cash and must repay the debt. Nordstrom reports the borrowed amount as a noncurrent liability on its balance sheet (included in Long Term Debt) until the last year. At the end of the 19th year, Nordstrom will reclassify the $4 million as a current liability (included in Current Portion of Long Term Debt). In contrast, the annual 10% interest becomes a liability as time passes. By the end of each year, Nordstrom will record (accrue) $400,000 (_ .10 _ $4 million) as Interest Payable, a current liability. The obligating event is the passage of time.

scania signs an agreement with its employees labor union promising to increase wages 566873

Scania signs an agreement with its employees” labor union, promising to increase wages by 6% and to increase medical benefits. Although this agreement creates an obligation, it does not immediately create an accounting liability because the obligating event has not yet occurred. That event occurs when employees provide labor services that require Scania to pay wages and provide medical benefits. As employees work, Scania recognizes a liability on its balance sheet. The agreement in Example 14 is, at the time of signing, a mutually unexecuted contract (also called an executory contract) because neither Scania nor its employees have performed under the contract. Other examples include most purchase orders and some leases. Firms usually do not recognize the obligations created by mutually unexecuted contracts as accounting liabilities, nor do they recognize the benefits of such contracts as assets, as illustrated previously in Example 7. Chapter 11 discusses the accounting treatment of some of these arrangements.

scania provides a five year warranty on the engines it builds and sells the promise 566874

Scania provides a five year warranty on the engines it builds and sells. The promise to stand ready to provide repair services under the warranty agreement creates an obligation, resulting from the sale of the engines under warranty. The selling price for a Scania engine includes payment for future warranty services even if the invoice does not explicitly show the portion of the total purchase price that is associated with the warranty. At the time of sale, Scania receives a benefit (the cash collected from the customer), but it has not fulfilled its obligations with respect to the warranty period. It will fulfill those obligations over the five year warranty period. Based on past experience, Scania estimates both the proportion of customers who will seek services under the warranty agreement and the expected cost of providing the warranty services. These estimates form the basis for measuring the warranty liability. Scania reports the portion of the liability that it expects to discharge in the next 12 months as a current liability (included in Current Provisions). It reports the portion that relates to warranty obligations it will discharge beyond the next 12 months as a noncurrent liability (included in Other Noncurrent Provisions). Chapter 8 discusses warranty liabilities.

a customer files a suit claiming damages of sek10 million from faulty engines that s 566875

A customer files a suit claiming damages of SEK10 million from faulty engines that Scania manufactured. The case has not yet gone to trial, so no court has yet rendered a decision or verdict. Firms do not recognize unsettled lawsuits as liabilities unless the firm judges that it will probably lose, and the loss estimate satisfies some other conditions. If the firm judges the eventual loss to be less than probable or if it judges the loss to be probable but it cannot estimate the amount of any payment within a range, it will not recognize a liability. That is, unless it is probable that Scania will have to pay and Scania can estimate the amount of payment, then it will not record a liability for the lawsuit. Scania will disclose in notes to its financial statements the existence of the lawsuit (if it is material) and the potential for future payments.

to facilitate a sale scania guaranteed a customer s bank loan which the customer had 566876

To facilitate a sale, Scania guaranteed a customer’s bank loan, which the customer had undertaken to raise funds to finance the payments for Scania’s product. Scania promises that it will make the specified loan payments if the customer defaults. This arrangement is an example of a financial guarantee contract, in which the issuer (Scania) must make payments to the holder of the contract (the bank) for a loss incurred if a specified debtor (the customer) fails to make payments when due. These contracts give rise to accounting liabilities in the form of obligations to stand ready to make payments under circumstances specified in the contract. Both U.S. GAAP and IFRS require initial recognition of the liability at its fair

The warranty in Example 15 illustrates a liability that is of uncertain timing or amount or both. U.S. GAAP refers to these liabilities as loss contingencies, and IFRS refers to them as provisions.18 Recall that the word probablewas also used in the asset and liability definitions, and in that context, it captures the notion of what can be reasonably expected or believed based on the available evidence, acknowledging that the environment of business is inherently uncertain. In contrast, probableas a recognition criterion for liabilities with uncertain amount, uncertain timing, or both, has a different meaning. The IFRS guidance for recognizing these liabilities defines probableas more likely than not, which implies more than 50%. Applying this criterion to Example 15, we can see that Scania would determine whether the likelihood that customers will require warranty services exceeds 50%. U.S. GAAP does not ascribe a precise threshold to probable; we believe that in practice the rule of thumb is approximately 80%. That is, a liability with uncertain amount or timing or both must be at least 80% likely in order for a firm to recognize it. U.S. GAAP and IFRS require similar (but not identical) measurements for these liabilities; both specify that the firm will recognize the liability (that is, measure the liability) at the most likely amount.

The lawsuit (Example 16) illustrates an obligation that a firm would not recognize under either U.S. GAAP or IFRS, although the firm would disclose it in the notes if it judged the lawsuit to be material. The description of Example 16 illustrates the applicability of the recognition criteria for uncertain obligations to a lawsuit. In this example, the firm does not judge the obligation arising from the lawsuit as probable and it cannot reasonably estimate the amount, so the firm does not recognize the potential obligation arising from the lawsuit asan accounting liability. IFRS refers to such items as contingent liabilities. (If the arrangementembodies a possible gain—that is, an asset—the IFRS term is contingent asset). U.S. GAAPdoes not have special terms for these items; descriptively, they are unrecognized loss contingenciesand unrecognized gain contingencies.The financial guarantee contract (Example 17) illustrates an arrangement that containsboth a stand ready obligation and an obligation that is uncertain as to timing and amount.As described in the example, both U.S. GAAP and IFRS require initial recognition of thefair value of the obligation to stand ready to pay the bank if the customer defaults. In addition,both U.S. GAAP and IFRS would require the recognition of a loss contingency (U.S.GAAP) or a provision (IFRS) if the obligation becomes probable and the amount to be paidis reasonably estimable.

Arrangements of the sort illustrated in Examples 15, 16, and 17 are common; for example, most firms that sell products include some kind of warranty (Example 15). Arrangements like the lawsuit in Example 16 are often disclosed, not recognized, because they do not meet the criteria specified for the accounting recognition of obligations as liabilities. For example, Polo Ralph Lauren (whose balance sheet for the year ending March 31, 2007, appears in Exhibit 3.1) displays a commitment and contingencies line on the balance sheet, to direct the user of the financial reports to the notes, specifically, note 15. Scania’s balance sheet (Exhibit 1.5) displays both current and noncurrent provisions, with a reference to note 18. Scania’s provision accounts contain, among other items, its warranty liabilities.

Liability recognition and measurement. The transactions listed below relate to Polo Ralph Lauren (“Polo”). For each, indicate whether the transaction immediately gives rise to a liability and, if so, state the account title and amount that Polo would recognize.

a. Polo’s boutique stores sell gift cards for $100 per card. Assume that gift cards expire 3 years from the date of issuance.

b. Refer to Problem 3.1 for Self Study, part a. Polo receives an invoice for $16 million in advertising services from the supplier, an agency that specializes in television advertisements.

c. Attorneys have notified Polo that the firm is a defendant in a lawsuit claiming $12 million in lost profits and damages, based on allegations that Polo unlawfully used fashion designs belonging to the plaintiff. Polo’s lawyers predict that the court will probably find Polo liable in the lawsuit, and Polo’s management estimates that the range of damages is $2 million to $10 million, with all amounts in this range equally likely.

d. A two week strike by employees closed down one of Polo’s clothing manufacturing facilities. As a result, Polo could not deliver merchandise totaling $20 million, for which it has already received payment.

hoskins limited legally incorporated on january 1 2008 in its initial public offerin 566877

Hoskins Limited legally incorporated on January 1, 2008. In its initial public offering (IPO), the firm issued 15,000 shares of €0.10 par value common stock for €10 cash per share. During 2008, Hoskins generated net income of €30,000 and paid dividends of €10,000. The shareholders’ equity section of the balance sheet of Hoskins on December 31, 2008, is as follows:

Common Stock (at par value of €0.10 per share, 15,000 shares issued and outstanding)

€ 1,500

Additional Paid in Capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

148,500

Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20,000

Total Shareholders’ Equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€170,000

The €1,500 amount reported as the total par value of the shares is the par value per share times the total number of shares issued, or €0.10 per share _ 15,000 shares. The €148,500 amount reported as additional paid in capital (APIC) is the difference between the proceeds from the sale of stock of €150,000 (_ 15,000 _ €10) and the par value of €1,500. The €20,000 amount of retained earnings reported by Hoskins for its first year of operations is the amount of undistributed earnings, €30,000 of income minus €10,000 dividends.

continuing example 18 assume another year has passed and it is now december 31 2009 566878

Continuing Example 18, assume another year has passed, and it is now December 31, 2009. During 2009, Hoskins issued another 5,000 shares of stock at €12 per share, earned net income of €5,000, and paid dividends of €10,000. The shareholders’ equity section of the balance sheet of Hoskins on December 31, 2009, is as follows:

Common Stock (at par value of €0.10 per share, 20,000 shares issued and outstanding)

€ 2,000

Additional Paid in Capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

208,000

Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15,000

Total Shareholders’ Equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€225,000

The €2,000 amount reported as total par value is the par value per share times the total number of shares issued, or €0.10 per share _ 20,000 shares. This €2,000 amount is the sum of the par value of 1,500 shares issued in 2008 plus the par value of 500 shares issued in 2009. The €208,000 amount reported as additional paid in capital (APIC) is the sum of the €148,500 of APIC from 2008 plus the €59,500 of APIC from the issuance of 5,000 shares in 2009 (_ €12 per share _ 5,000 shares minus €500 par value, or €60,000 _ €500). The increase in Hoskins’ share price, from €10 per share in 2008 to €12 per share in 2009, does not change the amount reported on the balance sheet for the 15,000 shares issued in 2008. The firm does not change the amounts reported for total paid in capital (par value and APIC) to reflect changes in share price; rather, those amounts reflect the share price at the time the firm originally issued the shares.23

Hoskins’ retained earnings at the end of 2009 of €15,000 is the cumulative undistributed earnings through its second year of operations, equal to the beginning of 2009 retained earnings of €20,000, plus 2009 earnings of €5,000, minus 2009 dividends of €10,000. Because dividends reduce retained earnings, not current earnings, a firm can declare and pay a dividend that exceeds its net income for the year. A firm could even pay dividends in a year that it generated a loss.

for each of the following items indicate whether the item meets all of the criteria 566885

For each of the following items, indicate whether the item meets all of the criteria in the definition of a liability. If so, how does the firm value it?

a. Interest accrued but not paid on a note.

b. Advances from customers for goods and services to be delivered later.

c. Confirmed orders from customers for goods and services to be delivered later.

d. Bonds payable.

e. Product warranties.

f. Damages the company must pay if it loses a pending lawsuit.

g. Future costs of restoring strip mining sites after completing mining operations.

h. Contractual promises to purchase specific quantities of natural gas for each of the next 10 years.

i. Promises by an airline to provide flights in the future in exchange for miles flown, if customers accumulate a certain number of miles at regular fares.

prepare a balance sheet for aracruz celulose assuming the firm follows u s gaap 566888

Balance sheet formats.The following information is based on the balance sheet of Aracruz Celulose, a Brazilian manufacturer of bleached pulp used to make paper, for the year ended December 31, 2006. Aracruz Celulose applies U.S. GAAP and reports its results in thousands of U.S. dollars:

Inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 202,704

Other Current Assets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

132,782

Other Long Term Liabilities . . . . . . . . .

350,761

Property, Plant, and Equipment, net . .

2,151,212

Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,293,301

Cash and Short Term Investments . . . .

579,643

Goodwill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

129,035

Common Stock (no par) . . . . . . . . . . . .

295,501

Preferred Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

614,496

Other Noncurrent Assets . . . . . . . . . . .

451,757

Current Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286,819

Long Term Debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,155,050

Accounts Receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285,795

a.Prepare a balance sheet for Aracruz Celulose assuming the firm follows U.S. GAAP.

b.Prepare a balance sheet for Aracruz Celulose assuming the firm follows IFRS.

the following information is based on the balance sheet of delhaize group delhaize t 566889

Balance sheet formats. The following information is based on the balance sheet of Delhaize Group (Delhaize), the Belgian food distributor, for 2007 (in € million). Delhaize applies IFRS and reports its results in millions of euros. Prepare a balance sheet for Delhaize that uses a format common to firms reporting under U.S. GAAP.

Assets

Goodwill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 2,445.7

Intangible Assets . . . . . . . . . .

552.1

Property, Plant, and Equipment .

3,383.1

Other Noncurrent Assets . . . . . .

244.0

€ 6,624.9

Inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 1,262.0

Receivables . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

564.6

Other Current Assets . . . . . . . .

121.5

Cash and Cash Equivalents . . . .

248.9

€ 2,197.0

Total Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 8,821.9

Liabilities and Equity

Share Capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 50.1

Share Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,698.9

Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,355.3

Other Reserves and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1,428.3)

Total Shareholders’ Equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 3,676.0

Long Term Debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 1,911.7

Obligations Under Finance Leases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

595.9

Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

207.2

Other Noncurrent Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

210.4

Total Noncurrent Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 2,925.2

Short Term Borrowings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 41.5

Long Term Debt, Current Portion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

108.9

Obligations Under Finance Lease, Current Portion . . . . .

39.0

Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41.8

Income Tax Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58.7

Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,435.8

Accrued Expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

375.7

Other Current Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119.3

Total Current Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 2,220.7

Total Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 5,145.9

Total Liabilities and Equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 8,821.9

balance sheet relations genting group a malaysian investment management company repo 566891

Balance sheet relations. Genting Group, a Malaysian investment management company, reported the following data for four recent years. Genting Group applies Malaysian accounting standards and reports its results in millions of ringgit (RM). Compute the missing balance sheet amounts for each of the four years. In answering this question, assume that Genting Group uses U.S. GAAP.

Noncurrent Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

RM 18,717.4

RM 11,289.1

RM 9,713.9

Shareholders’ Equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RM 21,537.3

16,666.90

9,002.00

?

Total Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

28,224.70

?

?

Current Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

4,351.30

1,494.20

1,755.20

Current Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10,999.20

?

?

6,882.60

Noncurrent Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5,721.70

?

?

3,540.70

Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity . . .

30,178.90

?

18,491.30

?

balance sheet relations selected balance sheet amounts for kajima corporation a japa 566892

Balance sheet relations. Selected balance sheet amounts for Kajima Corporation, a Japanese construction firm, are shown in the following table for four recent years. Kajima applies Japanese accounting standards and reports its results in billions of yen (¥). Compute the missing balance sheet amounts for each of the four years. In answering this question, assume that Kajima uses IFRS.

2007

2006

2005

2004

Total Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

¥2,107

?

?

¥1,870

Noncurrent Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

437

?

¥ 411

467

Noncurrent Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

¥ 773

703

?

Total Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

?

1,583

?

Current Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,318

1,148

?

1,172

Shareholders’ Equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

298

220

?

Current Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,323

1,133

?

1,110

Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity .

?

?

?

?

balance sheet relations selected data based on the balance sheet amounts for metso c 566893

Balance sheet relations. Selected data based on the balance sheet amounts for Metso Corporation, a Finnish paper company, for four recent years appear in the following table. Metso applies IFRS and reports its results in millions of euros (€). Compute the missing balance sheet amounts for each of the four years.

2007

2006

2005

2004

Current Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

€ 3,357

€ 2,995

?a

€ 2,097

Noncurrent Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

1,973

?

?

Total Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

?

?

?

Total Assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

?

3,904

?

Current Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?c

2,610

1,802

1,466

Noncurrent Liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . .

957

?

?

1,109

Total Shareholders’ Equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

?

1,292

?

Contributed Capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

?

711

?

634

Retained Earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

910

? b

553

361

Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity. . . .

5,254

?

?

?

aCurrent Assets Current Liabilities= €675.

bNet income for 2006 is €252 and dividends are €66.

cCurrent Assets Current Liabilities= €651.

asset measurement assume that trader joe s an organic food retailer in the united st 566896

Asset measurement. Assume that Trader Joe”s, an organic food retailer in the United States, recently purchased a new refrigeration system for its Chapel Hill, North Carolina, store. Trader Joe”s paid $1.3 million for the refrigeration unit and paid an additional $120,000 to modify the unit to meet its specific needs. Trader Joe”s paid $55,000 for the transportation and installation of the unit, plus $48,000 for an annual insurance premium for the first year, which begins next month. Finally, assume that Trader Joe”s hired a refrigeration technician, who is charged with the maintenance of the unit; that technician”s annual salary is $80,000. How much should Trader Joe”s record as the acquisition cost of the refrigeration unit? Describe the treatment of any of the above amounts that you did not include in the acquisition cost of the unit.

how would your response change if nordstrom were applying ifrs 566897

Recognition of a loss contingency. Consider the following hypothetical series of events. While shopping in a Nordstrom store on July 5, 2007, a customer slips on the escalator and falls, sustaining back and neck injuries. On January 15, 2008, the customer sues Nordstrom for $1 million. The case comes to trial on April 30, 2008. The jury renders its verdict on June 15, 2008, and finds Nordstrom liable for negligence. The jury grants a damage award of $400,000 to the customer. Nordstrom, on June 25, 2008, appeals the decision to a higher court, which rules on November 1, 2008, that the trial court should retry the case. The trial court retries the case beginning March 21, 2009. Another jury, on April 20, 2009, again finds Nordstrom liable for negligence and awards $500,000. On May 15, 2009, the store pays the $500,000 judgment. Nordstrom applies U.S. GAAP.

a. When, if at all, should Nordstrom recognize a liability from these events? If Nordstrom recognizes a liability, what is the amount? Explain your reasoning.

b. How would your response change if Nordstrom were applying IFRS?

asset recognition and measurement the following hypothetical transactions relate to 566898

Asset recognition and measurement. The following hypothetical transactions relate to Nestlé S.A., the Swiss chocolate manufacturer. Indicate whether each transaction immediately gives rise to an asset of the company under U.S. GAAP and separately, under IFRS. If Nestlé recognizes an asset, state the account title, the amount, and the classification of the asset on the balance sheet as either a current asset or a noncurrent asset. Nestlé reports its results in millions of Swiss Francs (CHF).

a. Nestlé invests CHF800 million in a government bond. The bond has a maturity value of CHF1,000 million in five years, and Nestlé intends to hold the bond to maturity.

b. Two months prior to its year end, Nestle pays its insurer CHF240 million to cover annual premiums on its European plants.

asset recognition and measurement the following hypothetical transactions relate to 566899

Asset recognition and measurement. The following hypothetical transactions relate to Nestlé S.A., the Swiss chocolate manufacturer. Indicate whether each transaction immediately gives rise to an asset of the company under U.S. GAAP and separately, under IFRS. If Nestlé recognizes an asset, state the account title, the amount, and the classification of the asset on the balance sheet as either a current asset or a noncurrent asset. Nestlé reports its results in millions of Swiss Francs (CHF).

a. Nestlé invests CHF800 million in a government bond. The bond has a maturity value of CHF1,000 million in five years, and Nestlé intends to hold the bond to maturity.

b. Two months prior to its year end, Nestle pays its insurer CHF240 million to cover annual premiums on its European plants.

c.Nestlé pays a developer in the Czech Republic CHF6 million for an option to purchase a tract of land on which it intends to build a warehouse to serve the eastern European markets. The price of the land is CHF450 million.

d.Nestlé signs a four year employment agreement with its chief executive officer for a package valued at CHF17.4 million per year. Of this amount, CHF3.1 million is base salary; the rest is expected bonus and deferred compensation arrangements. The contract period begins next month.

e.Nestlé spends CHF80 million on research and development related to a new, lowcalorie chocolate; 60% of the total amount was spent on pure research, the rest on development. The R&D is successful, and the firm is able to acquire a patent on the new formula. The cost of filing the paperwork and other procedures to obtain the

patent is CHF0.5 million.

f.Nestlé received notice that a cocoa supplier had shipped by freight cocoa beans invoiced at CHF700 million with payment due in 30 days. The supplier retains title to the cocoa beans until received by Nestlé.

asset recognition and measurement the hypothetical transactions listed next relate t 566900

Asset recognition and measurement. The hypothetical transactions listed next relate to Ryanair Holdings, Plc. (Ryanair), an Irish airline. Indicate whether each transaction immediately gives rise to an asset under U.S. GAAP and, separately, IFRS. If Ryanair recognizes an asset, state the account title, the amount, and the classification of the asset on the balance sheet as either a current asset or a noncurrent asset. Ryanair reports its results in thousands of euros.

a. Ryanair’s board of directors decides to purchase 10 Boeing 777 airplanes, costing €640 million each.

b. Ryanair places an order with Boeing for 10 Boeing 777 airplanes, costing €640 million each.

c. Ryanair pays Boeing €60 million as a deposit on the aircraft it ordered in part b.

d. Ryanair spends €50 million to obtain landing rights for the next five years at Beijing Capital International Airport.

e. Ryanair writes a check for €12 million and assumes a mortgage from its bank for another €65 million to purchase new ground equipment costing €77 million.

f. Ryanair issues common stock with a market value of €160 million to acquire used aircraft from a bankrupt regional airline. The carrying value of the equipment on the bankrupt airline’s books is €75 million.

present the journal entries made under ifrs on january 2 2008 to issue the bonds 566738

Journal entries for convertible bonds. Higgins Corporation issues $1 million of 20 year, $1,000 face value, 10% semiannual coupon bonds at par on January 2, 2008. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 40 shares of $1 par value common stock. Assume that Higgins Corporation’s credit rating is such that it could issue 15% semiannual, nonconvertible bonds at par. On January 2, 2012, holders convert their bonds into common stock. The common stock has a market price of $45 per share on January 2, 2012.

a. Present the journal entries made under U.S. GAAP on January 2, 2008, and January 2, 2012, to record the issue and conversion of these bonds. Use the carrying value method to record the conversion.

b. Present the journal entries made under IFRS on January 2, 2008, to issue the bonds.

present journal entries on february 26 2008 june 6 2010 and february 26 2012 relatin 566740

Journal entries for stock warrants. Kiersten Corporation sells 60,000 common stock warrants for $4 each on February 26, 2008. Each warrant permits its holder to purchase a share of the firm”s $10 par value common stock for $30 per share at any time during the next two years. The market price of the common shares was $20 per share on February 26, 2008. Holders of 40,000 warrants exercised their warrants on June 6, 2010, at a time when the market price of the stock was $38 per share. Kiersten Corporation experienced a major uninsured loss from a fire lare in 20110, and its market price fell immediately to $22 per share. The market price remained around $22 until the stock warrants expired on February 26, 2012. Present journal entries on February 26, 2008; June 6, 2010; and February 26, 2012, relating to these stock warrants.

use the carrying value method to record the conversion the warrants remain outstandi 566741

Journal entries for stock warrants. On December 7, 2012, Altus Pharmaceuticals issued shares of convertible preferred issue price of $46,180,000 in a private placement of securities. Investment bankers estimated the fair value of the warrants on this dare to be $2,730,000. The Company therefore allocated $43,450,000 to the preferred stock and $2,730,000 to the warrants. Between the issue date and January 15, 2007, dividends of $19,083,000 accrued on the preferred stock but remain unpaid. The preferred stock carries cumulative dividends rights. Because of a deficit in Retained Earnings, the Company debited the dividends to Additional Paid in Capital each year and credited Convertible Preferred Stock. Holders of the preferred stock converted their shares into 5,269,705 shares of $.01 par value common stock. The warrants to purchase preferred stock became warrants to purchase stock. Give the journal entry on December 7, 2002, to issue the preferred stock and warrants and the entry on January 15, 2007, to convert the preferred stock to common stock. Use the carrying value method to record the conversion. The warrants remain outstanding.

journal entries for dividends give journal entries if required for the following tra 566742

Journal entries for dividends. Give journal entries, if required, for the following transactions, which are unrelated unless otherwise specified:

a. A firm declares the regular quarterly dividend on its 6%, $100 par value preferred stock. There are 30,000 shares authorized and 15,000 shares issued, of which the firm has previously reacquired 2,000 shares and holds them in the treasury.

b. The firm pays the dividend on the preferred stock (see part a).

c. A company declares and issues a stock dividend of $300,000 of no par common stock to its common shareholders.

d. The shares of no par stock of the corporation sell on the market for $200 a share. To bring the market value down to a more popular price and thereby broaden the distribution of its stockholdings, the board of directors votes to issue four extra shares to shareholders for each share they already hold. The corporation issues the shares.

declares a cash dividend of 0 50 per share on march 31 2008 566743

Journal entries for dividends. Prepare journal entries for the following transactions of Watt Corporation. The firm has 20,000 shares of $15 par value common stock outstanding on January 1, 2008. The balance in the Additional Paid In Capital account on this date is $200,000.

a. Declares a cash dividend of $0.50 per share on March 31, 2008.

b. Pays the dividend in part a on April 15, 2008.

c. Declares and distributes a 10% stock dividend on June 30, 2008. The market price of the stock is $20 on this date.

d. Declares a cash dividend of $0.50 per share on September 30, 2008.

e. Pays the dividend in part d on October 15, 2008.

f. Declares a three for two stock split on December 31, 2008, but does not alter the par value.

prepare journal entries under the cost method to record the following treasury stock 566744

Journal entries for treasury stock transactions. Prepare journal entries under the cost method to record the following treasury stock transactions of Danos Corporation.

a. Purchases 10,000 shares of its own $10 par value common stock for $30 per share.

b. Issues 6,000 treasury shares to employees under stock option plans. The exercise price is $32 per share. Assume that the market price of the common stock on the exercise date is $35 per share. The stock options had a value of $6 per option when issued, which the firm has already amortized to expense.

c. Purchases 7,000 shares of its own common stock for $38 per share.

d. Issues 8,000 treasury shares in the acquisition of land valued at $300,000. Danos Corporation uses a FIFO assumption for reissues of treasury stock.

e. Sells the 3,000 remaining shares of treasury stock for $36 per share.

treatment of accounting errors changes in accounting principles and changes in accou 566746

Treatment of accounting errors, changes in accounting principles, and changes in accounting estimates. A firm computes net income for 2008 of $1,500 and for 2009 of $1,800, its first two years of operations. Before issuing its financial statements for 2009, the firm discovers that an item requires an income reducing adjustment of $400 after taxes. Indicate the amount of net income for 2008 and 2009 assuming (1) the item is an error in the computation of depreciation expense for 2008 (2009 depreciation expense is correct as computed), (2) the item is the change in net income for 2008 as a result of adopting a new method of accounting for stock options in 2009 (2009 stock option expense reflects the new accounting principle), and (3) the item is the change in estimated uncollectible accounts for 2008 as a result of worsened credit losses experienced in 2009; the firm included the adjustment amount in bad debt expense for 2009.

journal entries to record the issuance of capital stock 566747

Journal entries to record the issuance of capital stock. Prepare journal entries under U.S. GAAP to record the issuance of capital stock in each of the following independent cases. You may omit explanations for the journal entries. A firm does the following:

a. Issues 50,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $30 per share.

b. Issues 20,000 shares of $100 par value convertible preferred stock at par.

c. Issues 16,000 shares of $10 par value common stock in the acquisition of a patent. The shares of the firm traded on a stock exchange for $15 per share on the day of the transaction. The seller listed the patent for sale at $250,000.

d. Issues 25,000 shares of $1 par value common stock in exchange for convertible preferred stock with a par and carrying value of $400,000. The common shares traded on the market for $18 per share on the date of the transaction. Use the carrying value method to record the conversion.

e. Issues 5,000 shares of $10 par value common stock to employees as a bonus for reaching sales goals for the year. The shares traded for $12 per share on the day of the transaction.

prepare journal entries to record the issuance of capital stock in each of the follo 566748

Journal entries for the issuance of capital stock. Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of capital stock in each of the following independent cases. You may omit explanations for the journal entries. A firm does the following:

a. Issues 20,000 shares of $10 par value common stock in the acquisition of inventory with a market value of $175,000, land valued at $220,000, a building valued at $1,400,000, and equipment valued at $405,000.

b. Issues 10,000 shares of $100 par value preferred stock at par. The preferred stock is subject to mandatory redemption in five years.

c. Issues 5,000 shares of $1 par value common stock upon the exercise of stock warrants. The firm had issued the stock warrants several years previously for $8 per war rant and properly recorded the sale of the warrants in the accounts. The exercise price is $24 plus one warrant for each share of common stock.

d. Issues 20,000 shares of $10 par value common stock upon the conversion of 10,000 shares of $50 par value convertible preferred stock originally issued for par. Record the conversion using carrying values.

the authorized capital stock consists of 5 000 shares of 100 par value preferred sto 566749

Transactions to incorporate and run a business. The following events relate to shareholders’ equity transactions of Wilson Supply Company during the first year of its existence. Present journal entries for each of the transactions.

a. January 2: The firm files articles of incorporation with the State Corporation Commission. The authorized capital stock consists of 5,000 shares of $100 par value preferred stock that offers an 8% annual dividend, and 50,000 shares of no par common stock. The original incorporators acquire 300 shares of common stock at $30 per share; the firm collects cash for the shares. It assigns a stated value of $30 per share to the common stock.

b. January 6: The firm issues 2,000 shares of common stock for cash at $30 per share.

c. January 8: The firm issues 4,000 shares of preferred stock at par.

d. January 9: The firm issues certificates for the shares of preferred stock.

e. January 12: The firm acquires the tangible assets and goodwill of Richardson Supply, a partnership, in exchange for 1,000 shares of preferred stock and 12,000 shares of common stock. It values the tangible assets acquired as follows: inventories, $50,000; land, $80,000; buildings, $210,000; and equipment, $120,000.

f. July 3: The directors declare the semiannual dividend on preferred stock outstanding, payable July 25, to shareholders of record on July 12.

g. July 5: The firm operated profitably for the first six months, and it decides to expand. The company issues 25,000 shares of common stock for cash at $33 per share.

h. July 25: It pays the dividend on preferred stock declared on July 3.

i. October 2: The directors declare a dividend of $1 per share on the common stock, payable October 25, to shareholders of record on October 12.

j. October 25: The firm pays the dividend on common stock declared on October 2.

how many shares did it reissue from the block of treasury shares 566750

Reconstructing transactions involving shareholders’ equity. Fisher Company began business on January 1. Its balance sheet on December 31 contained the shareholders’ equity section. During the year, Fisher Company engaged in the following transactions:

(1) Issued shares for $15 each.

(2) Acquired a block of 600 shares for the treasury in a single transaction.

(3) Reissued some of the treasury shares.

(4) Sold for $10,000 securities available for sale with original acquisition cost of $6,000. At the end of the year, securities available for sale, still on hand, had originally cost $12,000 and had a fair value of $14,000. Assuming that these were all of the common stock transactions during the year and that the firm used the cost method to account for treasury stock transactions, answer the following questions:

a. How many shares did Fisher Company issue for $15?

b. What was the price at which it acquired the treasury shares?

Fisher Company Shareholders’ Equity as of December 31

Common Stock ($10 par value)

$60,000

Additional Paid In Capital

31,440

Retained Earnings

12,000

Plus Unrealized Holding Gain on Securities Available for Sale

2,000

Less 360 Shares Held in Treasury—At Cost

(7,200)

Total Shareholders’ Equity

$98,240

c. How many shares did it reissue from the block of treasury shares?

d. What was the price at which it reissued the treasury shares?

e. What journal entries did it make during the year for items (1) to (4)?

f. In which statement or statements will Fisher Company report the various gains and losses on its holdings of securities available for sale?

what was the price at which it acquired the treasury shares 566751

Reconstructing transactions involving shareholders’ equity. Shea Company began business on January 1. Its balance sheet on December 31 contained the shareholders’ equity section. During the year, Shea Company engaged in the following transactions:

(1) Issued shares for $30 each.

(2) Acquired a block of 2,000 shares for the treasury in a single transaction.

(3) Reissued some of the treasury shares.

(4) Sold for $12,000 securities available for sale that had originally cost $14,000. At the end of the year, securities available for sale, still on hand, that had originally cost $25,000 had a fair value of $18,000.

Assuming that these were the only common stock transactions during the year and that the firm used the cost method to account for treasury stock transactions, answer the following questions:

a. How many shares did Shea Company issue for $30 each?

b. What was the price at which it acquired the treasury shares?

c. How many shares did it reissue from the block of treasury shares?

d. What was the price at which it reissued the treasury shares?

e. What journal entries did it make during the year for items (1) to (4)?

f. In which statement or statements will Shea Company report the various gains and losses on its holdings of securities available for sale?

Shea Company Shareholders’ Equity as of December 31

Common Stock ($5 par value)

$100,000

Additional Paid In Capital

509,600

Retained Earnings

50,000

Less Unrealized Holding Loss on Securities Available for Sale

(7,000)

Less 1,200 Shares Held in Treasury—At Cost

(33,600)

Total Shareholders’ Equity

$619,000

effects of transactions on the statement of cash flows presents a simplified stateme 566757

Effects of transactions on the statement of cash flows presents a simplified statement of cash flows. For each of the transactions that follow, indicate the number(s) of the line(s) in affected by the transaction and the amount and direction (increase or decrease) of the effect. Expand the definition of Line (1) to include receipts from other operating revenue sources. If the transaction affects net income, be sure to indicate whether it increases or decreases. Ignore income tax effects.

a. A firm sells for $12,000 equipment that originally cost $30,000 and has accumulated depreciation of $16,000 at the time of sale.

b. A firm owns 25% of the common stock of an investee acquired several years ago at its net book value and uses the equity method. The investee had net income of $80,000 and paid dividends of $20,000 during the period.

c. A firm, as lessee (tenant), records lease payments of $50,000 on capital leases for the period, of which $35,000 represents interest expense.

d. Income tax expense for the period totals $120,000, of which the firm pays $90,000 immediately and defers the remaining $30,000 because of temporary differences between the accounting principles used for financial reporting and those used for tax reporting.

e. A firm owns 10% of the common stock of an investee acquired at its net carrying value several years ago and accounts for it as an available for sale security classified as a long term investment. The investee had net income of $100,000 and paid dividends of $40,000 during the period. The market value at the end of the period equaled the market value at the beginning of the period.

a firm records an impairment loss of 22 000 for the period on goodwill arising from 566758

Effects of transactions on statement of cash flows provides a simplified statement of cash flows. For each of the transactions that follow, indicate the number(s) of the line(s) in affected by the transaction and the amount and direction (increase or decrease) of the effect. If the transaction affects net income on line (3) or cash on line (11), be sure to indicate if it increases or decreases the line. Expand the definition of Line (1) to include receipts from other operating revenue sources. Ignore income tax effects. Indicate the effects of each transaction on the Cash Change Equation.

a. A firm declares cash dividends of $15,000, of which it pays $12,000 immediately to its shareholders; it will pay the remaining $3,000 early in the next accounting period.

b. A firm borrows $75,000 from its bank.

c. A firm sells for $20,000 machinery originally costing $40,000 and with accumulated depreciation of $35,000.

d. A firm as lessee records lease payments on operating leases of $28,000 for the period.

e. A firm acquires, with temporarily excess cash, marketable equity securities costing $39,000.

f. A firm writes off a fully depreciated truck originally costing $14,000.

g. A marketable equity security (available for sale) acquired during the current period for $90,000 has a fair value of $82,000 at the end of the period. Indicate the effect of any year end adjusting entry to apply the market value method.

h. A firm records interest expense of $15,000 for the period on bonds issued several years ago at a discount, comprising a $14,500 cash payment and a $500 addition to Bonds Payable.

i. A firm records an impairment loss of $22,000 for the period on goodwill arising from the acquisition several years ago of an 80% investment in a subsidiary.

a firm acquires a building costing 400 000 paying 40 000 cash and signing a promisso 566759

Effects of transactions on statement of cash flows provides a simplified statement of cash flows. For each of the transactions that follow, indicate the number(s) of the line(s) in affected by the transaction and the amount and direction (increase or decrease) of the effect. If the transaction affects net income on line (3) or cash on line (11), be sure to indicate if it increases or decreases the line. Expand the definition of Line (1) to include receipts from other operating revenue sources. Ignore income tax effects. Indicate the effects of each transaction on the Cash Change Equation.

a. A firm acquires a building costing $400,000, paying $40,000 cash and signing a promissory note to the seller for $360,000.

b. A firm using the allowance method records $32,000 of bad debt expense for the period.

c. A firm using the allowance method writes off accounts totaling $28,000 as uncollectible.

d. A firm owns 30% of the common stock of an investee acquired several years ago at carrying value. The investee had net income of $40,000 and paid dividends of $50,000 during the period.

e. A firm sells for $22,000 marketable equity securities (available for sale) originally costing $25,000 and with a carrying value of $23,000 at the time of sale.

f. Holders of a firm’s preferred stock with a carrying value of $10,000 convert their preferred shares into common stock with a par value of $2,000. Use the book value method.

g. A firm gives land with an acquisition cost and market value of $5,000 in settlement of the annual legal fees of its corporate attorney.

h. A firm reduces the liability account Rental Fees Received in Advance for $8,000 when it provides rental services.

i. A firm reclassifies long term debt of $30,000, maturing within the next year, as a current liability.

a firm writes down long term investments in securities by 8 000 to reflect a decreas 566760

Effects of transactions on statement of cash flows Provides a simplified statement of cash flows. For each of the transactions that follow, indicate the number(s) of the line(s) in affected by the transaction and the amount and direction (increase or decrease) of the effect. If the transaction affects net income on line (3) or cash on line (11), be sure to indicate if it increases or decreases the line. Expand the definition of Line (1) to include receipts from other operating revenue sources. Ignore income tax effects. Indicate the effects of each transaction on the Cash Change Equation.

a. A firm using the percentage of completion method for long term contracts recognizes $15,000 of revenue for the period.

b. A local government donates land with a fair value of $50,000 to a firm as an inducement to locate manufacturing facilities in the area.

c. A firm writes down long term investments in securities by $8,000 to reflect a decrease in fair value.

d. A firm records $60,000 depreciation on manufacturing facilities for the period. The firm has sold all goods it manufactured this period.

e. A firm using the allowance method recognizes $35,000 as warranty expense for the period.

f. A firm using the allowance method makes expenditures totaling $28,000 to provide warranty services during the period.

g. A firm recognizes income tax expense of $80,000 for the period, comprising $100,000 paid currently and a $20,000 reduction in the Deferred Income Tax Liability account.

h. A firm writes down inventories by $18,000 to reflect the lower of cost or market valuation.

prepare a comparative statement of cash flows for irish for 2007 2008 and 2009 using 566765

Preparing and interpreting the statement of cash flows. Irish Paper Company (Irish) manufactures and markets various paper products around the world. Paper manufacturing is a capital intensive activity. A firm that does not adequately use its manufacturing capacity will experience poor operating performance. Sales of paper products tend to be cyclical with general economic conditions, although consumer paper products are less cyclical than business paper products. Presents comparative income statements presents comparative balance sheets for Irish Paper Company for 2007, 2008, and 2009. Additional information appears below (amounts in millions).

Cash Flow Information

2009

2008

2007

Investments in Affiliatesa

$ (13)

$ 86

$ (92)

Expenditures on Property, Plant, and Equipment

(315)

(931)

(775)

Long Term Debt Issued

36

890

449

aExcludes earnings and dividends.

(2) Depreciation expense was $306 million in 2007, $346 million in 2008, and $353 million in 2009.

(3) During 2007, Irish purchased outstanding stock warrants for $201 million. It recorded the transaction by debiting the Common Stock account.

(4) During 2007, Irish sold timberlands at a gain. It received cash of $5 million and a long term note receivable for $220 million, which it includes in Other Assets on the balance sheet.

(5) In addition to the preceding cash expenditures, Irish acquired property, plant, and equipment during 2008 costing $221 million by assuming a long term mortgage payable.

(6) During 2009, Irish resold treasury stock for an amount greater than its cost.

(7) Changes in Other Assets are investing activities.

a. Prepare T account work sheets for a statement of cash flows for Irish for 2007, 2008, and 2009.

b. Prepare a comparative statement of cash flows for Irish for 2007, 2008, and 2009 using the indirect method.

c. Comment on the pattern of cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities for each of the three years.

identifying accounting principles indicate the accounting principle or method descri 566767

Identifying accounting principles. Indicate the accounting principle or method described in each of the following statements. Explain your reasoning.

a. This inventory cost flow assumption results in reporting the largest net income during periods of rising acquisition costs and nondecreasing inventory levels.

b. This method of accounting for uncollectible accounts recognizes the implied income reduction in the period of sale.

c. This method of accounting for long term investments in the common stock of other corporations usually requires an adjustment to net income to calculate cash flow from operations under the indirect method in the statement of cash flows.

d. This method of accounting for long term leases by the lessee gives rise to a noncurrent liability.

e. This inventory cost flow assumption results in approximately the same balance sheet amount as the FIFO cost flow assumption.

f. This method of recognizing interest expense on bonds provides a uniform annual rate of interest expense over the life of the bond.

g. The accounting for this type of hedging instrument designated as a hedge results in a change in other comprehensive income each period.

h. This method of accounting for intercorporate investments in securities can result in a decrease in the investor’s total shareholders’ equity without affecting the Retained Earnings account.

i. This method of recognizing income from a long term contract generally results in the least amount of fluctuation in earnings over several periods.

j. When a firm identifies specific customers’ accounts as uncollectible and writes them off, this method of accounting results in no change in working capital.

k. The accounting for this type of hedging instrument designated as a hedge affects net income each period but not other comprehensive income.

l. This method of accounting for long term leases of equipment by the lessor shows on the income statement an amount for depreciation expense.

m. This inventory cost flow assumption results in inventory balance sheet amounts closest to current replacement cost.

n. This method of accounting for long term investments in common stock results in recognizing revenue for dividends received or receivable.

o. This method of depreciation generally results in the largest amounts for depreciable assets on the balance sheet during the first several years of an asset’s life.

p. This inventory cost flow assumption results in reporting the smallest net income during periods of falling acquisition costs.

q. This method of accounting for long term leases of equipment by the lessee results in showing an amount for rent expense on the income statement.

r. This inventory cost flow assumption results in inventory balance sheet amounts that may differ significantly from current replacement cost.

s. This method of accounting for long term leases of equipment by the lessor results in showing revenue at the time of signing a lease.

t. This inventory cost flow assumption can result in substantial changes in the relation between cost of goods sold and sales if inventory quantities decrease during a period.

assume that the amounts scania classifies as cash and cash equivalents on its balanc 566768

Recasting financial statements to proposed reporting format. Refer to the financial statements of Scania in (balance sheet) and (income statement) and (statement of cash flows).

a. Recast the balance sheet on December 31, 2006, and December 31, 2005, into a statement of financial position for Scania using the proposed reporting format of the joint FASB/IASB financial presentation project. Incorporate the following additional information into the preparation of this financial statement.

(1) Current and noncurrent receivables, except tax assets, relate to Scania’s sales of vehicles.

(2) Short term investments serve an investing purpose, whereas short term investments comprising cash and cash equivalents serve an operating purpose. Assume that the amounts Scania classifies as cash and cash equivalents on its balance sheet are entirely cash equivalents for purposes of this problem. Cash and bank balances also serve an operating purpose.

(3) Investments in associated companies and joint ventures serve an operating purpose.

(4) Current interest bearing liabilities directly finance Scania’s trade receivables and noncurrent interest bearing liabilities provide Scania with financing for its broad corporate needs.

(5) Other current and noncurrent liabilities relate to Scania’s operating activities.

b. Recast Scania’s income statement into a statement of comprehensive income for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004, using the proposed reporting format of the joint FASB/IASB financial presentation project. Incorporate the following information into the preparation of this financial statement.

(1) Scania derives interest income of SEK632, SEK679, and SEK346 for 2006, 2005, and 2004 respectively from short term investments comprising cash and cash equivalents.

(2) Scania derives other financial income of SEK142, SEK299, and SEK96, and other financial expenses of SEK81, SEK206, and SEK127 for 2006, 2005, and 2004 respectively from short term investments.

(3) Interest expenses of SEK863, SEK866, and SEK638 for 2006, 2005, and 2004 respectively relate to noncurrent interest bearing liabilities.

(4) Items of other comprehensive income include hedge reserve and accumulated exchange rate differences. The amounts for these items on December 31, 2003, were zero and (SEK150) respectively.

c. Recast Scania’s statement of cash flows for the years ended December 31, 2006, 2005, and 2004 using the proposed reporting format of the joint FASB/IASB financial presentation project. Although you will likely require additional line items. To calculate cash received from operating revenues, list all operating revenues and then adjust the sum for changes in receivables. To calculate cash disbursed for manufacturing costs, adjust cost of goods sold for changes in inventory and trade payables. To calculate cash disbursed for operating expenses, list all operating expenses and then adjust the sum for noncash expenses and changes in provisions and other liabilities and provisions. You may wish to assistance in computing cash flow from operatins under the direct method. Be sure to use the amounts for changes in balance sheet accounts from Scania’s statement of cash flows and not the amounts on its comparative balance sheet. Be sure that the classification of items as operating, investing, financing, taxes, and equity are consistent with the classifications in parts a and b. Incorporate the following information into the preparation of this statement.

(1) The statement of cash flows should explain changes in cash and bank balances. Short term investments comprising cash and cash equivalents are operating items.

(2) The balance in cash and bank balances on December 31, 2003, was SEK1,243 million, and the balance in short term investments comprising cash and cash equivalents on December 31, 2003, was SEK420 million.

(3) List the effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents as the last item before summing to the net change in cash and bank balances for each year.

the nordstrom name has become synonymous with a quality shopping experience 566863

The Nordstrom name has become synonymous with a quality shopping experience. The company has a reputation for the helpfulness and friendliness of its employees in satisfying customer needs, even at the potential cost of losing a Nordstrom sale if the customer will be more satisfied purchasing merchandise at a competitor”s store. Nordstrom management invests in this reputation by hiring talented staff, by investing in training, and by forgoing a sale now in order to achieve higher levels of customer satisfaction in the long term. Nordstrom management believes that satisfied customers are more loyal and therefore will spend more at Nordstrom in the future. Thus, satisfied customers provide future benefits in the form of increased future sales. Neither the expected future sales nor the satisfied customers are assets on Nordstrom”s balance sheet because Nordstrom cannot control customers” future purchasing decisions.

what is the amount of temporary differences for the year give the amount and indicat 566634

Deriving permanent and temporary differences from financial statement disclosures. Pownall Company reports the following information for a year:

Book Income Before Income Taxes

$318,000

Income Tax Expense

156,000

Income Taxes Payable for the Year

48,000

Income Tax Rate on Taxable Income

40%

The company has both permanent and temporary differences between book income and taxable income.

a. What is the amount of temporary differences for the year? Give the amount, and indicate whether the effect is to make book income larger or smaller than taxable income.

b. What is the amount of permanent differences for the year? Give the amount, and indicate whether the effect is to make book income larger or smaller than taxable income.

reconstructing information about income taxes lilly company reports the following in 566635

Reconstructing information about income taxes. Lilly Company reports the following information about its financial statements and tax return for a year:

Depreciation Expense from Financial Statements

$322,800

Financial Statement Pretax Book Income

190,800

Income Tax Expense from Financial Statements

42,000

Income Taxes Payable from Tax Returns

27,600

Together the federal and state governments tax taxable income at a rate of 40%. Permanent differences result from municipal bond interest that appears as revenue in the financial statements but is exempt from income taxes. Temporary differences result from the use of accelerated depreciation for tax returns and straight line depreciation for financial reporting. Reconstruct the income statement for financial reporting and for tax reporting for the year, identifying temporary differences and permanent differences.

compute the amount of income tax expense for each of the four years 566636

Effect of temporary differences on income taxes. Woodward Corporation purchases a new machine for $50,000 on January 1, 2008. The machine has a four year estimated service life and an estimated salvage value of zero. After paying the cost of running and maintaining the machine, the firm enjoys a $25,000 per year excess of revenues over expenses (except depreciation and taxes). In addition to the $25,000 from the machine, other pretax income each year is $35,000. Woodward uses straight line depreciation for financial reporting and depreciates the machine for tax reporting using the following percentages: 33% in the first year, 44% in the second, 15% in the third, and 8% in the fourth. Depreciation is Woodward’s only temporary difference. Woodward pays combined federal and local income taxes at a rate of 40% of taxable income.

a. Compute the amount of income taxes currently payable for each of the four years.

b. Compute the carrying value of the machine for financial reporting and the tax basis of the machine for tax reporting at the end of each of the four years. The tax basis is the amortized cost for income tax purposes.

c. Compute the amount of income tax expense for each of the four years.

d. Give the journal entries to record income tax expense and income tax payable for 2008 through 2011.

what will happen to the balance in the deferred tax liability account on the balance 566638

Behavior of deferred income tax account when a firm acquires new assets every year. Equilibrium Company has adopted a program of purchasing a new machine each year. It uses a prescribed method of depreciation on its income tax return and straight line depreciation on its financial statements. Each machine costs $12,000 installed and has an economic life of six years for financial reporting. Equilibrium Company depreciates this equipment for tax purposes using the following percentages of acquisition cost each year: 20%, 32%, 19%, 12%, 11%, and 6% of cost in each of the six years, respectively.

a. Calculate the total depreciation deduction on the tax return for each of the first seven years.

b. Calculate depreciation for each year using the straight line method of depreciation.

c. Calculate the annual difference in depreciation charges using the results from parts a and b.

d. Calculate the annual increase in the Deferred Tax Liability account for the balance sheet by multiplying the tax rate, 40%, by the amount found in part c.

e. Calculate year end balances for the Deferred Tax Liability account on the balance sheet.

f. If Equilibrium Company continues to follow its policy of buying a new machine every year for $12,000, what will happen to the balance in the Deferred Tax Liability account on the balance sheet?

discuss whether shiraz company should recognize any of these obligations or commitme 566639

Attempts to achieve off balance sheet financing. (Adapted from materials by R. Dieter, D. Landsittel, J. Stewart, and A. Wyatt.) Shiraz Company wants to raise $50 million cash but, for various reasons, does not want to do so in a way that results in a newly recorded liability. It is sufficiently solvent and profitable that its bank will lend up to $50 million at the prime interest rate. Shiraz Company’s financial executives have devised six different plans, described in the following paragraphs.

Plan 1: Transfer of Receivables with Recourse. Shiraz Company will transfer to Credit Company its long term accounts receivable, which call for payments over the next two years. Credit Company will pay an amount equal to the present value of the receivables less an allowance for uncollectibles as well as a discount, because it pays now but will collect cash later. Shiraz Company must repurchase from Credit Company at face value any receivables that become uncollectible in excess of the allowance. In addition, Shiraz Company may repurchase any of the receivables not yet due at face value less a discount specified by formula and based on the prime rate at the time of the initial transfer. (This option permits Shiraz Company to benefit if an unexpected drop in interest rates occurs after the transfer.) The accounting issue is whether the transfer is a sale (Shiraz Company debits Cash, credits Accounts Receivable, and debits an expense or loss on transfer) or whether the transfer is merely a loan collateralized by the receivables (Shiraz Company debits Cash and credits Notes Payable at the time of transfer).

Plan 2: Product Financing Arrangement. Shiraz Company will transfer inventory to Credit Company, who will store the inventory in a public warehouse. Credit Company may use the inventory as collateral for its own borrowings, whose proceeds will be used to pay Shiraz Company. Shiraz Company will pay storage costs and will repurchase all the inventory within the next four years at contractually fixed prices plus interest accrued for the time elapsed between the transfer and later repurchase. The accounting issue is whether Shiraz has sold the inventory to Credit Company, with later repurchases treated as new acquisitions for Shiraz’s inventory, or whether Shiraz has merely borrowed from Credit Company, with the inventory remaining on Shiraz’s balance sheet.

Plan 3: Throughput Contract. Shiraz Company wants a branch line of a railroad built from the main rail line to carry raw material directly to its own plant. It could, of course, borrow the funds and build the branch line itself. Instead, it will sign an agreement with the railroad to ship specified amounts of material each month for 10 years. Even if it does not ship the specified amounts of material, it will pay the agreed shipping costs. The railroad will take the contract to its bank and, using it as collateral, borrow the funds to build the branch line. The accounting issue is whether Shiraz Company should debit an asset for future rail services and credit a liability for payments to the railroad. The alternative is to make no accounting entry except when Shiraz makes payments to

Plan 4: Construction Joint Venture. Shiraz Company and Mission Company will jointly build a plant to manufacture chemicals that both companies need in their production processes. Each will contribute $5 million to the project, called Chemical. Chemical will borrow another $40 million from a bank, with Shiraz only guaranteeing the debt. Shiraz and Mission are each to contribute equally to future operating expenses and debtservice payments of Chemical, but in return for guaranteeing the debt, Shiraz will have an option to purchase Mission’s interest for $20 million four years later. The accounting issue is whether Shiraz Company, which will ultimately be responsible for all debt service payments, should recognize a liability for the funds that Chemical borrowed. Alternatively, the debt guarantee is merely a commitment that Shiraz Company must disclose in notes to its financial statements.

Plan 5: Research and Development Partnership. Shiraz Company will contribute a laboratory and preliminary finding about a potentially profitable gene splicing discovery to a partnership, called Venture. Venture will raise funds by selling the remaining interest in the partnership to outside investors for $2 million and by borrowing $48 million from a bank, with Shiraz Company guaranteeing the debt. Although Venture will operate under the management of Shiraz Company, it will be free to sell the results of its further discoveries and development efforts to anyone, including Shiraz Company. Shiraz Company has no obligation to purchase any of Venture’s output. The accounting issue is whether Shiraz Company should recognize the liability. (Would it make any difference if Shiraz Company did not guarantee the loan but had either the option to purchase or an obligation to purchase the results of Venture’s work?)

Plan 6: Hotel Financing. Shiraz Company owns and operates a profitable hotel. It could use the hotel as collateral for a conventional mortgage loan. Instead, it considers selling the hotel to a partnership for $50 million cash. The partnership will sell ownership interests to outside investors for $5 million and borrow $45 million from a bank on a conventional mortgage loan, using the hotel as collateral. Shiraz Company guarantees the debt. The accounting issue is whether Shiraz Company should record the liability for the guaranteed debt of the partnership.

Discuss whether Shiraz Company should recognize any of these obligations or commitments as a liability on its balance sheet.

general electric ibm and scania among others have wholly owned finance subsidiaries 566688

General Electric, IBM, and Scania, among others, have wholly owned finance subsidiaries that make loans to customers who want to purchase the products of the parent company. The parent company consolidates the financial statements of these subsidiaries. These subsidiaries have billions of dollars of assets, mostly receivables; consolidation combines the parent’s assets—largely noncurrent manufacturing plant and equipment—with the more liquid assets of the finance subsidiary. Although a focus on liquidity analysis would suggest preparing separate statements for the manufacturing parent and for the financial subsidiary, these entities in fact operate as a single integrated unit so that consolidated financial statements more accurately depict their combined operations. However, nothing prevents the separate display of the finance subsidiary’s financial statements; General Electric follows this practice.

give the journal entries to record the acquisition of the shares of albee computer c 566705

Equity method entries. Weber Corporation acquired significant influence over. Albee Computer Company on January 2 by purchasing 20% of its outstanding stock for $100 million. Weber Corporation attributes the entire excess of acquisition cost over the carrying value of Albee Computer Company’s net assets to a patent, which it amortizes over 10 years. The shareholders’ equity accounts of Albee Computer Company appeared as follows on January 2 and December 31 of the current year (amounts in millions):

Jan. 2

Dec. 31

Common Stock

$300

$300

Retained Earnings

120

190

Albee Computer Company had earnings of $100 million and declared dividends of $30 million during the year. The accounts receivable of Weber Corporation at December 31 included $600,000 due from Albee Computer Company. Weber Corporation accounts for its investment in Albee Computer Company using the equity method. Give the journal entries to record the acquisition of the shares of Albee Computer Company and apply the equity method during the year on the books of Weber Corporation.

journal entries to apply the equity method of accounting for investment in securitie 566706

Journal entries to apply the equity method of accounting for investment in securities.

Wood Corporation made three long term intercorporate investments on January 2. Data relating to these investments for the year appear next.

Company

Percentage Acquired

Carrying Value and
Fair Value of Identifiable Net Assets on January 2

Acquisition Cost

Net Income (Loss) for the Year

Dividends
Declared
During
the Year

Knox Corporation

50%

$700,000

$350,000

$ 70,000

$30,000

Vachi Corporation

30

520,000

196,000

40,000

15,000

Snow Corporation

20

400,000

100,000

(24,000)

Give the journal entries to record the acquisition of these investments and to apply the equity method during the year. There are no goodwill impairments.

if laesch owns 80 of lily its consolidated subsidiary what are the retained earnings 566707

Working backward to consolidation relations. Laesch Company, as parent, owns shares in Lily Company. Laesch has owned the shares since it formed Lily. Lily has never declared a dividend. Laesch has retained earnings from its own operations independent of intercorporate investments of $100,000. The consolidated balance sheet shows no goodwill and shows retained earnings of $156,000. Consider each of the following questions independently of the others:

a. If Laesch owns 80% of Lily, its consolidated subsidiary, what are the retained earnings of the subsidiary?

b. If Lily has retained earnings of $77,000, what fraction of Lily does Laesch own?

c. If Laesch had not consolidated Lily but instead had accounted for it using the equity method, how much revenue would Laesch have recognized from the investment?

which if any of the companies does car incorrectly account for according to u s gaap 566709

Consolidation policy and principal consolidation concepts. CAR Corporation manufactures computers in the United States. It owns 75% of the voting stock of Charles Electronics, 80% of the voting stock of Alexandre du France Software Systems (in France), and 90% of the voting stock of R Credit Corporation (a finance company). CAR Corporation prepares consolidated financial statements consolidating Charles Electronics, uses the equity method for R Credit Corporation, and treats its investment in Alexandre du France Software Systems as securities available for sale. Data from the annual reports of these companies appear next. There are no intercompany transactions.

Percentage Owned

Net Income

Dividends

Accounting Method

CAR Corporation Consolidated

$1,200,000

$ 84,000

Charles Electronics

75%

120,000

48,000

Consolidated

Alexandre du France Software Systemsa

80

96,000

60,000 Fair Value (Securities Available for Sale)

R Credit Corporation

90

144,000

120,000

Equity

aFair value of shares exceeds acquisition cost.

a. Which, if any, of the companies does CAR incorrectly account for according to U.S. GAAP? Assuming the accounting methods and accounting itself for the three subsidiaries shown above are correct, answer the following questions:

b. How much of the net income reported by CAR Corporation Consolidated results from the operations of the three subsidiaries?

c. What is the amount of the noncontrolling, or minority, interest now shown on the consolidated income statement, and how does it affect net income of CAR Corporation Consolidated?

d. If CAR had consolidated all three subsidiaries, what would have been the net income of CAR Corporation Consolidated?

e. If CAR had consolidated all three subsidiaries, what noncontrolling, or minority, interest would appear on the income statement?

equity method entries vogel company is a subsidiary of joyce company 566710

Equity method entries. Vogel Company is a subsidiary of Joyce Company. Joyce Company accounts for its investment in Vogel Company using the equity method on its singlecompany books. Present journal entries for the following selected transactions. Record the set of entries on the books of Vogel Company separately from the set of entries on the books of Joyce Company.

(1) On January 2, Joyce Company acquired on the market, for cash, 100% of the common stock of Vogel Company. The outlay was $420,000. The total contributed capital of Vogel Company’s stock outstanding was $300,000; the retained earnings balance was $80,000. Joyce attributes the excess of acquisition cost over the carrying value of the net assets acquired to an internally developed patent that has a 10 year remaining useful life on January 2.

(2) Vogel Company purchased materials for $29,000 from Joyce Company on account at the latter’s cost.

(3) Vogel Company obtained an advance of $6,000 from Joyce Company. Vogel Company deposited the funds in the bank.

(4) Vogel Company paid $16,000 on the purchases in (2).

(5) Vogel Company repaid $4,000 of the loan received from Joyce Company in (3).

(6) Vogel Company declared and paid a dividend of $20,000 during the year.

(7) The net income of Vogel Company for the year was $30,000.

which of those two numbers appears in the total merchandise inventory on the consoli 566711

Working backward from data that has eliminated intercompany transactions. Alpha owns 100% of Omega and consolidates Omega in an entity called Alpha/Omega. Beginning in 2008, Alpha sold merchandise to Omega at a price 50% larger than Alpha’s costs. Omega sold some, but not all, of these goods to customers at a further markup. Excerpts from the single company statements of Alpha and Omega and from the consolidated financial statements of Alpha/Omega appear next.

Single Company Statements

Alpha

Omega

Consolidated Financial Statements

Sales Revenue

$450,000

$250,000

$620,000

Cost of Goods Sold

300,000

210,000

430,000

Merchandise Inventory

60,000

50,000

100,000

a. What was the total sales price at which Alpha sold goods to Omega during 2008?

b. What was Omega’s cost of the goods it had purchased from Alpha but has not yet sold by the end of 2008? What was Alpha’s cost of those goods? Which of those two numbers appears in the total Merchandise Inventory on the consolidated balance sheet?

what was the carrying value of depreciable assets of tonga just before the acquisiti 566712

Working backward from purchase data. On May 1, 2008, Homer acquired the assets and agreed to take on and pay off the liabilities of Tonga in exchange for 10,000 of Homer’s common shares. Homer accounted for the acquisition of the net assets of Tonga using the purchase method. On the date of acquisition, Tonga’s carrying value of depreciable assets exceeded Homer’s estimate of their fair value, but Homer judged all other items on Tonga’s books to reflect fair value on that date so that the purchase price exceeded the fair value of the identifiable assets, generating goodwill. On the date of the acquisition, Tonga’s shareholders’ equity was $980,000, and its liabilities totaled $80,000. Tonga reported no goodwill on its balance sheet.

Homer made the following journal entry to record the acquisition:

Current Assets

210,000

Depreciable Assets (net)

700,000

Goodwill

120,000

Liabilities

80,000

Common Stock—Par

150,000

Additional Paid In Capital

800,000

Assets

=

Liabilities

+

Shareholders’ Equity

(Class.)

+210,000

+80,000

+150,000

ContriCap

+700,000

+800,000

ContriCap

+120,000

a. What was the carrying value on Tonga’s books of its total assets just before the acquisition?

b. What was the carrying value of depreciable assets of Tonga just before the acquisition?

effect of errors on financial statements using the notation o s overstated u s under 566713

Effect of errors on financial statements. Using the notation O/S (overstated), U/S (understated), or NO (no effect), indicate the effects on assets, liabilities, shareholders’ equity, and net income of each of the independent errors that follow. Ignore income tax effects.

a. In applying the equity method, P correctly accrues its share of S’s net income for the year. However, when receiving a dividend, P credits Dividend Revenue.

b. P acquired 30% of S on January 1 of the current year for an amount in excess of the carrying value of S’s net assets. The excess relates to patents. P correctly accounted for its share of S’s net income and dividends for the year but neglected to amortize any of the excess purchase prices.

c. During the current year, P sold inventory items to S, its wholly owned subsidiary, at a profit. S sold these inventory items, and S paid P for them before the end of the year. The firms made no elimination entry for this intercompany sale on the consolidation work sheet.

d. Refer to part c. Assume that S owes P $10,000 for intercompany purchases at yearend. The firm made no elimination entry for this intercompany debt.

e. P owns 90% of S. P treats the noncontrolling interest in consolidated subsidiaries as a liability. In preparing a consolidated work sheet, the firms made no entry to accrue the noncontrolling interest’s share of S’s net income or of S’s net assets.

prepare journal entries to record the following transactions for healy corporation d 566717

Journal entries for capital contributions. Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions for Healy Corporation during the current year under U.S. GAAP. The accounting period of Healy Corporation ends on December 31.

a. Issued 100,000 of $10 par value common stock for $14 per share on January 2.

b. Issued 10,000 shares of common stock on January 2 in the acquisition of a patent. The firm has no separate information about the fair value of the patent.

c. Issued 2,000 shares of $100 convertible preferred stock on March 1 for $100 per share. Holders may convert each share of preferred stock into four shares of common stock.

d. Sold 10,000 common warrants on the open market on June 1 for $5 per warrant. Holders can exchange each warrant and $24 in cash for a share of common stock.

e. Holders of 600 shares of convertible preferred stock (see c) exchanged their shares for common stock on September 15. The market price of the common stock on this date was $26 per share. Record the conversion using the carrying values. f. Holders of 4,000 common stock warrants exchanged their warrants (see d) and $96,000 in cash for common stock on November 20. The market price of the common stock on this date was $32 per share.

g. Granted options to employees to purchase 5,000 shares of common stock for $35 per share on January 2. The fair value of these options is $30,000 and the requisite service period is three years. The firm expects all the options to vest.

prepare journal entries for each of the following transactions of baker corporation 566718

Journal entries for dividends and stock splits. The shareholders’ equity section of the balance sheet of Baker Corporation on January 1 of the current year appears below:

Shareholders’ Equity Common Stock, $10 par value, 25,000 shares issued and outstanding

$250,000

Additional Paid In Capital

50,000

Retained Earnings

150,000

Total

$450,000

Prepare journal entries for each of the following transactions of Baker Corporation for the current year. Ignore income taxes.

a. March 31: The board of directors declares a cash dividend of $0.50 per share. The firm will pay the dividend on April 15.

b. April 15: The firm pays the dividend declared on March 31.

c. June 30: The board of directors declares and distributes a 10% stock dividend. The market price per share on this date is $15.

d. December 31: The board of directors declares a two for one stock split and changes the par value of the common shares from $10 to $5.

journal entries for treasury stock transactions prepare journal entries for the foll 566719

Journal entries for treasury stock transactions. Prepare journal entries for the following transactions of Crissie Corporation using the cost method to account for treasury stock transactions:

a. Reacquired 2,000 shares of $10 par value common stock on January 15 for $45 per share.

b. Issued 1,200 shares of treasury stock to employees upon the exercise of stock options at a price of $28 per share on April 26.

c. Reacquired 3,000 shares of $10 par value common stock for $52 per share on August 15.

d. Issued 1,600 shares of treasury stock to holders of 800 shares of convertible preferred stock, which had a carrying value of $80,000 on November 24. Crissie Corporation uses a first in, first out assumption on reissues of treasury stock and uses carrying values to record conversions of preferred stock.

e. Sold 1,500 shares of treasury stock on the open market for $47 per share on December 20.

prepare journal entries for each of the following transactions of able corporation f 566720

Journal entries for net income and retained earnings transactions. Prepare journal entries for each of the following transactions of Able Corporation for 2008. Ignore income taxes.

a. January 15: As a result of a computer software error the preceding December, the firm failed to record depreciation on office facilities totaling $35,000.

b. March 20: An earthquake in California causes an uninsured loss of $70,000 to a warehouse.

c. December 31: The firm acquired its office building six years before December 31, 2008. The building cost $400,000, had zero estimated salvage value, and had a 40 year life. The firm uses the straight line depreciation method. Able Corporation now estimates that the building will have a total useful life of 30 years instead of 40 years. Record depreciation expense on the building for 2008 and any required adjustment to depreciation of previous years.

journal entries for employee stock options 566735

Journal entries for employee stock options. Morrissey Corporation grants 50,000 stock options to its managerial employees on December 31, 2008, to purchase 50,000 shares of its $1 par value common stock for $60 per share. The market price of a share of common stock on this dare in $50 per share. Employees must wait two years before the options vest and they can exercise the options, and this two year period is the expected period of benefit from the stock options. An option pricing model indicates that the value of these options on the grant date is $400,000. On June 30, 2011, holders of 30,000 options exercise their options at a time when the market price of the stock is $65 per share. On November 15, 2011, holders of the remaining options exercise them at a time when the market price of the stock is $72 per share.

journal entries for employee stock options watson corporation grants 20 000 stock op 566737

Journal entries for employee stock options. Watson Corporation grants 20,000 stock options to its managerial employees on December 31, 2008, to purchase 20,000 shares of its $10 par value common stock for $25 per share. The market price of a share of common stock on this dare is $18 per share. Employees must work for another three years before they can exercise the options. An option pricing model indicates that the value of these options on the grant date is $75,000. On April 30, 2012, holders of 15,000 options exercise their options at a time when the market price of the stock is $30 per share. On September 15, 2013, holders of the remaining options exercise them at a time when the market price of the stock is $38 per share.

Present journal entries to record these transactions on December 31, 2009, 2010, and 2011; on April 30, 2012; and on September 15, 2013. Assume that the firm receives any benefits of the stock option plan during 2009, 2010, and 2011 and that the firm reports on a calendar year basis income tax effects.

indicate whether each arrangement qualifies as an operating lease or a capital lease 566592

Applying the capital lease criteria. Boeing manufactures a jet aircraft at a cost of $50 million. The usual selling price for this aircraft is $60 million, and its typical useful life is 25 years. American Airlines desires to lease this aircraft from Boeing. The parties contemplate the following alternatives for structuring the lease. Indicate whether each arrangement qualifies as an operating lease or a capital lease. Assume that all cash flows occur at the end of each year.

a. American Airlines will lease the aircraft for 20 years at an annual rental of $6 million. At the end of 20 years, American will return the aircraft to Boeing. The interest rate appropriate to a 20 year collateralized loan for American Airlines is 10%.

b. American Airlines will lease the aircraft for 15 years at an annual rental of $7.2 million. At the end of 15 years, American Airlines will return the aircraft to Boeing. The interest rate appropriate for a 15 year collateralized loan for American Airlines is 10%.

c. American Airlines will lease the aircraft for 10 years at an annual rental of $5.5 million. At the end of 10 years, American Airlines has the option of returning the aircraft to Boeing or purchasing it for $55 million. The interest rate appropriate for a 10 year collateralized loan for American Airlines is 8%.

d. American Airlines will lease the aircraft for 18 years at an annual rental of $6.2 million, and will return the aircraft at the end of the lease term. In addition, American Airlines will pay a fee of $1,500 per hour for each hour over 5,000 hours per year that American Airlines flies the aircraft. American Airlines’ average usage of its aircraft is currently 6,200 hours per year. The interest rate appropriate for an 18 year collateralized loan for American Airlines is 10%.

does this lease qualify as an operating lease or a capital lease explain 566593

Preparing lessee’s journal entries for an operating lease and a capital lease. General Motors Corporation (GM) sells a luxury minivan for $25,000. FedUp Delivery Services agrees to lease a minivan for a monthly rental of $750 for three years. FedUp Delivery Services will return the minivan to GM at the end of the lease period. GM expects to lease the minivan to Rent a Wreck for the remaining two years of its useful life. The appropriate interest rate for a three year collateralized loan for FedUp Delivery Services is 6%, compounded monthly. Assume that FedUp Delivery Services makes all rental payments at the end of each month.

a. Does this lease qualify as an operating lease or a capital lease? Explain.

b. Assume that this lease is an operating lease. Give the journal entries for FedUp Delivery Services at the time it signs the lease and at the end of the first two months of the lease period.

c. Repeat part b assuming that the lease is a capital lease. FedUp Delivery Services uses the straight line depreciation method and records depreciation monthly.

compute the total expenses for the three year period under the operating and capital 566595

Preparing lessee’s journal entries for an operating lease and a capital lease. On January 1, 2008, Baldwin Products, as lessee, leases a machine used in its operations. The annual lease payment of $10,000 is due on December 31 of 2008, 2009, and 2010. The machine reverts to the lessor at the end of the three years. The lessor can either sell the machine or lease it to another firm for the remainder of its expected total useful life of five years. Baldwin Products could borrow on a three year collateralized loan at 8%. The market value of the machine at the inception of the lease is $30,000. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.

a. Does this lease qualify as an operating lease or a capital lease?

b. Assume that this lease qualifies as an operating lease. Give the journal entries for Baldwin Products over the three year period.

c. Assume this lease qualifies as a capital lease. Repeat part b.

d. Compute the total expenses for the three year period under the operating and capital lease methods.

compute the amount of interest expense for 2008 on the 7 bonds 566596

Accounting for long term bonds. The notes to the financial statements of Aggarwal Corporation for 2008 reveal the following information with respect to long term debt. All interest rates in this problem assume semiannual compounding and the effective interest method of amortization using amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate.

December 31

2008

2007

$800,000 zero coupon notes due December 31, 2017, initially priced to yield 10%

?

$ 301,512

$1,000,000 7% bonds due December 31, 2012. Interest is payable on June 30 and December 31. The bonds’ initial price implies a yield of 8%

$966,336

?

$1,000,000, 9% bonds due December 31, 2023. Interest is payable on June 30 and December 31. The bonds’ initial price implies a yield of 6%

?

$1,305,832

a. Compute the carrying value of the zero coupon notes on December 31, 2008. A zero coupon note requires no periodic cash payments; only the face value is payable at maturity. Do not overlook the italicized sentence above.

b. Compute the amount of interest expense for 2008 on the 7% bonds.

c. On July 1, 2008, Aggarwal Corporation acquires half of the 9% bonds ($500,000 face value) in the market for $526,720 and retires them. Give the journal entry to record this retirement.

d. Compute the amount of interest expense on the 9% bonds for the second half of 2008.

accounting for zero coupon debt when time warner inc announced its intention to borr 566597

Accounting for zero coupon debt. When Time Warner Inc. announced its intention to borrow about $500 million by issuing 20 year zero coupon (single payment) notes, The Wall Street Journal reported the following:

New York—Time Warner announced an offering of debt that could yield the company as much as $500 million. . . . The media and entertainment giant said that it would offer $1.55 billion principal amount of zero coupon . . . notes due [in 20 years] . . . through Merrill Lynch. . . . Zero coupon debt is priced at a steep discount to principal, [which] is fully paid at maturity. . . . A preliminary prospectus . . . didn’t include the issue price and yield on the notes.18

Assume Time Warner borrows funds at the beginning of 2008 and pays $1.55 billion in a single payment at the end of 2027.

a. Assume the initial yield on the notes is 6% per year, compounded annually. What initial issue proceeds will Time Warner Inc. realize from issuing these notes?

b. Assume the initial issue proceeds from these notes are $500 million. What is the initial yield on these notes?

c. Assume the initial issue proceeds from these notes are $400 million and their annual yield is 7% compounded annually. What interest expense will Time Warner Inc. record for 2008, the first year the notes are outstanding, assuming that it uses the amortized cost method based on the historical market interest rate?

d. Assume the initial issue proceeds from these notes are $400 million and their annual yield is 7% compounded annually. What interest expense will Time Warner Inc. record for 2027, the last year the notes are outstanding, assuming that it uses the amortized cost method based on the historical market interest rate?

e. Assume that Time Warner Inc. initially issued the notes to yield 6% compounded annually and that the bonds traded in the market on December 31, 2017, to yield 8% compounded annually. Give the journal entry that Time Warner Inc. would make if it repurchased and retired $700 million face value of these zero coupon notes on this date. Round amounts to the nearest one million.

why are the interest rates on the convertible notes so much lower than those on lowe 566598

Interpreting disclosures of long term debt. Presents excerpts from the notes to the financial statements of Lowe’s.

a. The amounts shown for Debentures, Notes, and the Medium Term Notes appear as the same amounts on February 3, 2006, and February 2, 2007. What is the likely interpretation for the identical reported amounts at the beginning and end of the year?

b. The Senior Notes comprise two debt issues on February 3, 2006, and an additional two debt issues on February 2, 2007. Indicate the amounts in each of the following cells.

Issue Date

Face Value

Term to Maturity at Issue Date

Issue Price

Coupon Interest Rate

Historical Market Interest Rate

October 2005

October 2005

October 2006

October 2006

c. The amount on the balance sheet for Senior Notes on February 2, 2007, of $1,980 million slightly exceeds the total issue price of the four Senior Notes of $1,979 million (_ $988 _ $991). Why do the amounts differ and why is the difference so small?

d. Why are the interest rates on the convertible notes so much lower than those on Lowe’s other debt?

e. Refer to Note 7 on Financial Instruments. Is the weighted average historical market interest rate on long term debt higher or lower than the weighted average current market interest rate on February 3, 2006, and February 2, 2007? Explain.

f. Assume that Lowe’s had elected the fair value option of FASB Statement No. 159 on February 2, 2006, and February 2, 2007. Compute the amount that Lowe’s would include in net income before taxes for the fiscal year ending February 2, 2007, related to long term debt.

prepare a schedule of the total revenues and total expenses recognized by ibm for 20 566599

Accounting for lease by lessor and lessee. IBM manufactures a particular computer for $6,000 and sells it for $10,000. Adair Corporation needs this computer in its operations and contemplates three ways of acquiring it on January 1, 2008. The computer has a three year estimated useful life and zero salvage value. Both firms use the straight line depreciation method.

(1) Outright Purchase: Adair Corporation will borrow $10,000 from its bank and purchase the computer from IBM. The bank loan bears interest at 8% annually and requires payments of $3,880, which includes principal and interest, on December 31 of 2008, 2009, and 2010.

(2) Operating Lease: Adair Corporation will lease the computer from IBM and account for it as an operating lease. IBM sets the annual payment due on December 31, 2008, 2009, and 2010 at $3,810.

(3) Capital Lease: Adair Corporation will lease the computer from IBM and account for it as a capital lease, using an annual interest rate of 7%. The annual payment due on December 31 of 2008, 2009, and 2010 is $3,810.

a. Give the journal entries on the books of Adair Corporation on January 1, 2008, December 31, 2008, and December 31, 2009, related to the loan and acquisition of the equipment assuming the outright purchase alternative.

b. Repeat part a assuming the operating lease alternative.

c. Repeat part a assuming the capital lease alternative.

d. Give the journal entries on the books of IBM on January 1, 2008, December 31, 2008, and December 31, 2009, related to the sale of the equipment assuming the outright sale alternative.

e. Repeat part d assuming the operating lease alternative.

f. Repeat part d assuming the capital lease alternative.

g. Prepare a schedule of the total expenses incurred by Adair Corporation for 2008, 2009, and 2010 under each of the three alternatives.

h. Prepare a schedule of the total revenues and total expenses recognized by IBM for 2008, 2009, and 2010 under each of the three alternatives.

compute the amount of interest expense on these bonds for the last six months of the 566600

Measuring interest expense. GSB Corporation issued semiannual coupon bonds with a face value of $110,000 several years ago. The annual coupon rate is 8%, with two coupons due each year, six months apart. The historical market interest rate was 10% compounded semiannually when GSB Corporation issued the bonds, equal to an effective interest rate of 10.25% [= (1.05 x 1.05) 1]. GSB Corporation accounts for these bonds using amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate. The current market interest rate at the beginning of the current year on these bonds was 6% compounded semiannually, for an effective interest rate of 6.09% [= (1.03 x 1.03) – 1]. The market interest rate remained at this level throughout the current year. The bonds had a book value of $100,000 at the beginning of the current year. When the firm made the payment at the end of the first six months of the current year, the accountant debited a liability for the exact amount of cash paid. Compute the amount of interest expense on these bonds for the last six months of the life of the bonds, assuming all bonds remain outstanding until the retirement date.

operating lease commitments are the most frequently encountered example of an execut 566601

Operating lease commitments, are the most frequently encountered example of an executory contract. If American Airlines (American) needs additional aircraft to expand internationally, it could borrow the needed funds and purchase the aircraft. This arrangement places additional debt on the balance sheet. Instead, American signs an operating lease agreement in which it agrees to pay the owner of the aircraft certain amounts each year for 12 years. The aircraft has an estimated service life of 18 years. American paints its name on the aircraft, uses the aircraft in operations, and makes the required lease payments. The assumption underlying an operating lease is that American receives benefits when it uses the aircraft, not when it initially signs the lease. That is, American has future benefits, not past or current benefits. Thus, American obtains financing for its flight equipment without showing a liability on the balance sheet.2

should the transferor account for the transfer of the asset as a sale or as a secure 566602

Louisiana Pacific Corporation and Weyerhaeuser Company (forest products companies) need additional pulp processing capacity. Each firm could borrow the needed funds and build its own manufacturing plant. Instead, they form a joint venture to build a pulp processing plant. Each firm agrees to use half of the new plant’s capacity each year for 20 years and to pay half of all operating and debt service costs. The joint venture uses the purchase commitments of Louisiana Pacific Corporation and Weyerhaeuser Company to obtain a loan to build the facility. Accounting views the purchase commitments as executor contracts—all benefits occur in the future—and therefore neither firm will recognize a liability for its portion of the loan. The loan will appear as a liability on the balance sheet of the joint venture. Thus, each firm obtains financing for the services of the plant without showing a liability on its balance sheet.3

Contingent Obligations As an alternative to borrowing and using a particular asset as collateral, a firm might obtain cash by selling (transferring) an asset to a purchaser (transferee). In some cases, the arrangement includes a requirement that the seller will pay cash to the purchaser under certain conditions, for example, if the asset sold generates less cash for the purchaser than anticipated at the time of sale. In this arrangement, the seller has relinquished its claim to the cash flows that the transferred asset will generate and has assumed an obligation to stand ready to make a cash payment if the stated condition is met. These are the accounting issues:

1. Should the transferor account for the transfer of the asset as a sale or as a secured borrowing?

2. If the transferor accounts for the transfer as a sale, how should it account for the obligation (referred to as a contingent obligation by U.S. GAAP and as a provision by IFRS) to stand ready to make a future cash payment?

We present two examples to illustrate these arrangements now, and return to these questions later in the chapter.

sears extends credit to its customers to purchase appliances furniture and other goo 566603

Sears extends credit to its customers to purchase appliances, furniture, and other goods. Sears could borrow from a bank using its accounts receivable as collateral, thereby placing debt on the balance sheet. Sears would then use the cash collections from the receivables to repay the bank loan with interest. Instead, Sears sells the accounts receivable to the bank for an amount that is less than the cash the bank expects to collect from receivables purchased. The amount takes account of expected defaults, which would reduce the cash generated by the receivables. This difference between the amount paid to Sears by the bank for the receivables and the amount that the bank expects to collect from the receivables provides the bank with its expected return. In this scenario, Sears has no further obligation and will treat this transaction as a sale, with no incremental debt on the balance sheet.

when the lessor enjoys the benefits and incurs the risk the lease is an operating le 566604

When the lessor enjoys the benefits and incurs the risk, the lease is an operating lease and no liability appears on the balance sheet of the lessee. When the lessee enjoys the benefits and incurs the risk, the lease is a capital lease and a lease liability appears on the balance sheet of the lessee. The lease life in the American Airlines example of 12 years is less than 75% of the 18 year useful life of the aircraft, making it likely that this lease is an operating lease under U.S. GAAP. If, instead, the lease life were 18 years and the minimum lease payments compensated the lessor for the cost of the aircraft and provided a reasonable return for the risk involved, then the parties would likely treat the lease as a capital lease under both U.S. GAAP and IFRS. The lessee (in this case, American Airlines) would therefore recognize a lease liability on its balance sheet.

identify ip rsquo s economic returns and risks in this arrangement 566608

Off balance sheet financing. Assume that International Paper Company (IP) wishes to obtain $75 million of additional financing without recording additional debt on its balance sheet. To do this, it creates a trust to which, on January 1, it transfers cutting rights to a mature timber tract. The trust will pay for these rights by borrowing $75 million for five years from a bank, with interest at 8%. The trust promises to make five equal installment payments, one on December 31 of each year. The trust will harvest and sell timber each year to obtain cash to make the loan payments and to pay operating costs. At current prices, the value of the standing wood exceeds by 10% the amounts the trust will need to service the loan and to pay ongoing operating costs (including wind, fire, and erosion insurance). The future selling price of timber will determine the trust’s actions, as follows: If the selling price of timber declines, the trust will harvest more timber and sell it to service the debt and to pay operating costs. If the selling price of timber increases, the trust will harvest timber at the level originally planned and invest cash receipts that exceed debt service and operating costs to provide a cushion for possible future price decreases. At the end of five years, the trust will distribute the value of any cash and uncut timber to IP. IP will guarantee the debt in the event cash flows from selling the timber are inadequate to pay operating costs and service the debt. The bank has the right to inspect the tract at any time and to replace IP’s forest management personnel with managers of its own choosing if it feels that IP is mismanaging the tract.

a. Identify IP’s economic returns and risks in this arrangement.

b. Identify the bank (lender’s) economic returns and risks in this arrangement.

c. Should IP treat this transaction as a loan (a liability will appear on IP’s balance sheet) or as a sale (no liability will appear on IP’s balance sheet)? Explain your reasoning.

how should cypres appliance store structure this transaction to ensure that it quali 566627

Using accounts receivable to achieve off balance sheet financing. Cypres Appliance Store has $100,000 of accounts receivable on its books on January 2, 2008. These receivables are due on December 31, 2008. The firm wants to use these accounts receivables to obtain financing.

a. Prepare journal entries during 2008 for the transactions in parts (i) and (ii) below:

(i) The firm borrows $92,593 from its bank, using the accounts receivable as collateral. The loan is repayable on December 31, 2008, with interest at 8%.

(ii) The firm sells the accounts receivable to the bank for $92,593. It collects amounts due from customers on these accounts and remits the cash to the bank.

b. Compare and contrast the income statement and balance sheet effects of these two transactions.

c. How should Cypres Appliance Store structure this transaction to ensure that it qualifies as a sale instead of a collateralized loan?

compare and contrast the income statement and balance sheet effects of these two tra 566628

Using inventory to achieve off balance sheet financing. P. J. Lorimar Company grows and ages tobacco. On January 2, 2008, the firm has aging tobacco with a cost of $200,000 and a current market value of $300,000. P. J. Lorimar Company wants to use this tobacco to obtain financing. The firm uses a December 31 year end.

a. Prepare journal entries during 2008 and 2009 for the transactions in parts (i) and (ii) below:

(i) The firm borrows $300,000 from its bank, using the tobacco inventory as collateral. The loan is repayable on December 31, 2009, with interest at 10% per year compounded annually. Assume zero storage costs. The firm expects to sell the tobacco on December 31, 2009, for $363,000.

(ii) The firm sells the tobacco inventory to the bank for $300,000. It promises to sell the inventory on behalf of the bank at the end of two years and remit the proceeds to the bank.

b. Compare and contrast the income statement and balance sheet effects of these two transactions.

c. How should P. J. Lorimar Company structure this transaction to ensure that it qualifies as a sale instead of a collateralized loan?

give a single journal entry on the books of the aerospace manufacturer to recognize 566629

Preparing journal entry for pension plan. An aerospace manufacturer reports the following information related to its only pension plan for 2008 (amounts in millions).

Pension Plan Assets, Beginning of 2008

$43,484

Plus Actual Return on Investments

4,239

Plus Employer Contribution

526

Less Benefits Paid

(2,046)

Pension Plan Assets, End of 2008

$46,203

Pension Plan Liability, Beginning of 2008

$45,183

Plus Service Cost

908

Plus Interest Cost

2,497

Less Actuarial Gain

(960)

Less Benefits Paid

(2,046)

Pension Plan Liability, End of 2008

$45,582

Service Cost

$ 908

Interest Cost

2,497

Expected Return on Pension Plan Investments

(3,456)

Amortization of Actuarial Losses

1,101

Net Pension Expense

$ 1,050

Give a single journal entry on the books of the aerospace manufacturer to recognize pension expense, the pension plan contribution, and the change in the net pension asset or net pension liability for 2008. Be sure to consider needed entries in Other Comprehensive Income, supporting the entry in this account with amounts from the disclosures above. Ignore income taxes.

preparing journal entry for pension plan a consumer foods company reports the follow 566630

Preparing journal entry for pension plan. A consumer foods company reports the following information related to its only pension plan for 2008 (amounts in millions).

Pension Plan Assets, Beginning of 2008

$5,086

Plus Actual Return on Investments

513

Plus Employer Contribution

19

Less Benefits Paid

(233)

Pension Plan Assets, End of 2008

$5,385

Pension Plan Liability, Beginning of 2008

$5,771

Plus Service Cost

245

Plus Interest Cost

319

Less Actuarial Gain

(155)

Less Benefits Paid

(233)

Pension Plan Liability, End of 2008

$5,947

Service Cost

$ 245

Interest Cost

319

Expected Return on Pension Plan Investments

(391)

Amortization of Actuarial Losses

167

Net Pension Expense

$ 340

Give a single journal entry for the consumer foods company to recognize pension expense, the pension plan contribution, and the change in the net pension asset or net pension liability for 2008. Be sure to consider needed entries in Other Comprehensive Income, supporting the entry in this account with amounts from the disclosures above. Ignore income taxes.

be sure to consider needed entries in other comprehensive income supporting the entr 566631

Preparing journal entry for health care plan. An automobile manufacturer reports the following information related to its health care plan for 2008 (amounts in millions).

Health Care Plan Assets, Beginning of 2008

$ 6,497

Plus Actual Return on Investments

510

Plus Employer Contribution

0

Less Benefits Paid

(1,547)

Health Care Plan Assets, End of 2008

$ 5,460

Health Care Plan Liability, Beginning of 2008

$39,274

Plus Service Cost

617

Plus Interest Cost

2,004

Less Actuarial Gain

(9,485)

Less Benefits Paid

(1,547)

Health Care Plan Liability, End of 2008

$30,863

Service Cost

$ 617

Interest Cost

2,004

Expected Return on Health Care Plan Investments

(479)

Amortization of Actuarial Losses

41

Net Health Care Benefits Expense

$ 2,183

Give a single journal entry for the automobile manufacturer to recognize health care benefits expense, the health care plan contribution, and the change in the net health care benefits asset or net health care benefits liability for 2008. Be sure to consider needed entries in Other Comprehensive Income, supporting the entry in this account with amounts from the preceding disclosures. Ignore income taxes.

give the journal entries to record income tax expense for 2006 2007 and 2008 566632

Preparing journal entries for income tax expense. An athletic shoe company reports the following information about its income taxes for three recent years (amounts in millions):

Components of Income Tax Expense

2008

2007

2006

Currently Payable

$775.6

$622.8

$495.4

Deferred

(26.0)

25.4

9.0

Total Income Tax Expense

$749.6

$648.2

$504.4

a. Give the journal entries to record income tax expense for 2006, 2007, and 2008.

b. Describe the likely reasons for the pattern of taxes currently payable and deferred for each year. Assume that the deferred taxes relate primarily to retirement benefits. The effective tax rate was relatively stable for the three years.

describe the likely reasons for the pattern of taxes currently payable and deferred 566633

Preparing journal entries for income tax expense. An electric utility reports the following information about its income taxes for three recent years (amounts in millions):

Components of Income Tax Expense

2008

2007

2006

Currently Payable

$ 46

$415

$ (96)

Deferred

344

(74)

368

Total Income Tax Expense

$390

$341

$272

a. Give the journal entries to record income tax expense for 2006, 2007, and 2008.

b. Describe the likely reasons for the pattern of taxes currently payable and deferred for each year. Assume that deferred taxes relate primarily to depreciation temporary differences. The effective tax rate was relatively stable for the three years.

ascertain the missing items a l in the following independent situations 566526

Fill in the Blanks

Ascertain the missing items (A L) in the following independent situations.

1

2

3

Assets, January 1

$ 5,000

E

I

Assets, December 31

$ 8,000

F

$ 9,000

Liabilities, January 1

A

$ 2,000

$ 3,000

Liabilities, December 31

$ 3,000

$ 2,200

J

Owners’ equity, January 1

$ 3,000

$ 4,000

K

Owners’ equity, December 31

B

$ 4,800

$ 7,000

Revenues

20,000

$15,000

L

Expenses

18,500

G

$20,000

Contributions by owners

$ 1,000

H

$ 1,000

Withdrawals by owners

C

1,200

$ 3,000

Net income

D

2,000

$ 5,000

ascertain the missing items a l in the following independent situations 566527

Fill in the Blanks

Ascertain the missing items (A L) in the following independent situations.

1

2

3

Assets, January 1

$12,000

E

I

Assets, December 31

$ 9,000

F

$ 9,500

Liabilities, January 1

A

$ 5,000

$ 3,200

Liabilities, December 31

$ 7,500

$ 5,200

J

Owners’ equity, January 1

$ 7,500

$ 3,200

K

Owners’ equity, December 31

B

$ 5,300

$ 8,000

Revenues

$25,000

$12,000

L

Expenses

$16,200

G

$22,000

Contributions by owners

$ 2,000

H

$ 2,000

Withdrawals by owners

C

$ 1,200

$ 3,500

Net income

D

$ 3,000

$ 4,000

on the basis of the following limited information which of the following would you p 566528

Analyzing Investment Alternatives

Assume that you inherit $10,000, which according to the terms of the bequest must be invested in a single company. After much research, you find two attractive alternatives: The Salt Company and The Pepper Company.

Required

a. On the basis of the following limited information, which of the following would you prefer (M = millions of dollars)?

Salt Co.

Pepper Co.

Total assets

$40M

$25M

Net income

$4M

$4M

b. If you then find the following additional information about each company’s liabilities, which company would you prefer? Why?

Salt Co.

Pepper Co.

Total liabilities

$20M

$23M

c. If you then read a newspaper article predicting each firm’s future income6. Last year, Beth purchased a three year insurance policy for liability and related incidents costing $1,200.

7. Beth expects to have six really good months of sales revenue during the summer and six slower months. Based on last year, her purchases of coffee, pastries, and mineral water during the peak months averaged about $2,000 each month. During the slower months, these items cost about $1,400 each month.

8. During peak months, Beth generally collected $4,500 each month, and during slower months she collected $3,000.

Required

a. Identify the amount of annual revenues and expenses that would be expected for each of the items above. Construct a single step income statement for Beth’s Espresso Cart for the next year.

b. What should Beth consider as she makes plans for next year? What other items should be considered for inclusion in her income statement? Why?

c. Why is an income statement useful to Beth? Discuss how the income statement may be more useful than a checkbook listing each cash inflow and outflow? prospects, which firm is now preferable? Why?

Salt Co.

Pepper Co.

Next year’s predicted net income

$1M

$10M

d. Write a short memo describing any additional information that you might find helpful in making an investment in either of the two companies.

use a balance sheet equation to show how each of the following events would be treat 566529

Recording Transactions Using Cash and Accrual Methods

Use a balance sheet equation to show how each of the following events would be treated under

1. the cash basis of accounting and

2. the accrual basis of accounting.

a. Ordered airline tickets, hotel accommodations, and tour guidance from Hugo’s U Go Travel at a cost of $5,000.

b. Changed the airline reservation.

c. Paid a $35 fee to a travel advisor.

d. Paid $2,000 for the airline tickets, room, and tour.

e. Arrived at the hotel and checked in.

f. Found the room to be next to the hotel laundry and facing the noisy loading zone. Furthermore, the room only had two cheap radios and no television! Asked the hotel manager for a more suitable room.

g. Tipped the bellhop $5 after luggage was moved to an upgraded room.

h. Charged $257 for meals and telephone calls during the week.

i. Upon checking out of the hotel at the end of the week, found a $40 per day (for five days) upgrade charge on the hotel bill.

j. Paid for the meals and phone charges on the hotel bill, but denied responsibility for the upgrade charges.

k. The hotel manager insisted that the upgrade charges were not covered by the prepaid vouchers from Hugo’s, and they would be charged to the Visa credit card account number on file with the hotel.

l. Took vacation film to a photo shop for developing. Charges for developing and printing this film were expected to be $45, not yet paid.

m. Paid the $45 two weeks later.

the customer paid the 2 500 invoice after reducing the invoice by the 55 freight cos 566530

Transaction Analysis

Use the accounting equation to analyze the effects of the following events. Assume that the beginning balances are zero. Prepare an income statement and balance sheet after recording each transaction.

a. Sugar Loaf Enterprises bought inventory for resale at a cost of $350,000 on account.

b. Half the inventory was sold to customers for $525,000, all on account.

c. Customers paid $200,000 on account.

d. A particularly interested customer paid $10,000 in advance to reserve an especially desirable item.

e. The item was shipped at an invoiced charge of $2,500 more than the deposit. The inventory cost was $6,000.

f. The customer paid the $2,500 invoice, after reducing the invoice by the $55 freight cost, which, in the customer’s opinion, should have been waived because of the $10,000 advance payment.

on july 1 jaml renegotiated the terms of the loan which increased the interest rate 566533

Transaction Analysis: Liabilities and Interest Accruals

John’s Anti Mediation League (JAML), a sole proprietorship, engaged in the following transactions in 1999:

1. On January 1, JAML borrowed $100,000 at 6% per year with interest due quarterly.

2. JAML paid a $1,000 kickback to a good friend who helped obtain the loan.

3. JAML had not yet paid any interest after the loan had been in effect for three months.

4. On June 30, JAML paid the interest due.

5. On July 1, JAML renegotiated the terms of the loan, which increased the interest rate to 9% per year.

6. At the end of September, John paid the interest on the loan from his personal account.

7. At the end of December, JAML accrued the interest due.

8. On January 1, 2000, JAML paid the interest due to the lender and to John’s personal account.

Required

Record these transactions, using the accounting equation.

saap repaid sharon rsquo s loan along with a loan ldquo cancellation rdquo fee of 2 566534

Transaction Analysis: Liabilities and Interest Accruals

Sharon’s Affairs and Parties (SAAP), a sole proprietorship, engaged in the following transactions in 1999:

1. SAAP borrowed $150,000 at 10% per year to begin operations.

2. SAAP accrued the first month’s interest on the loan.

3. SAAP accrued the second month’s interest.

4. SAAP paid the interest due.

5. Sharon loaned SAAP $10,000 at 24% interest per year.

6. SAAP accrued interest for the next month on both loans.

7. SAAP paid the accrued interest.

8. SAAP repaid Sharon’s loan, along with a loan “cancellation” fee of $2,500. 9. SAAP accrued interest for the next month.

10. SAAP repaid the original loan, along with the accrued interest.

Required

Record these transactions, using the accounting equation.

shown below are several transactions recorded by beth rsquo s coffee shop the bitter 566535

Transaction Analysis: Describing Underlying Events

Shown below are several transactions recorded by Beth’s coffee shop, The Bitter Bean (TBB):

Assets

=

LIABILITIES

+

OWNER’S EQUITY

a. Cash, +$30,000

Accounts payable,

Capital, +$30,00

b. Inventory, +$12,000

+$12,000

c. Cash, $3,000

Loans, $3,000

Capital, +$27,000

d.

Loans, $27,000

Revenue, +$10,000

e. Accounts receivable,

+$10,000

f. Inventory, $3,000

Cost of goods sold,

g. Cash, $8,000

$3,000

Accounts receivable,

$8,000

h.

Accounts payable,

Operating expenses,

+$30,000

$30,000

Required

For each transaction, describe the event or activity that occurred. For example:

what if you find out that the bank issued and redeemed the same number of five year 566536

Analyzing Effects of Cash and Accrual Accounting

Assume that you are auditing a small bank that uses the cash basis of accounting to record interest on its customers’ accounts and uses the accrual basis of accounting for interest earned on its investments.

a. If most of the bank’s investments were earning daily interest, while most of the bank’s customers had their money invested in five year certificates of deposit, do you think that the income reported by the bank represents a fair or useful measure of accomplishment? Why?

b. Reconsider your prior answer. What if you find out that most of the five year certificates of deposit had just been issued? What if you find out that the bank issued and redeemed the same number of five year certificates every month? How do the issues of timing or renewal cycles affect your view of this situation?

what are its assets suppose that pieter has conducted an appraisal and has found tha 566537

Analyzing Transactions: Effects of Missing Information

Answer each of the following independentquestions:

a. Dennis Company has assets of $125,000 and owners’ equity of $40,000. What are its liabilities? If these liabilities include an outstanding mortgage of $60,000, identify some of the other liabilities that Dennis Company might have.

b. Bruce Company has assets of $300,000 and liabilities of $110,000. Suppose that the original owners invested $200,000 in this business. What might account for the difference between the original investment and the current balance in owners’ equity?

c. Pieter Company has liabilities of $400,000 and owners’ equity of $155,000.

What are its assets? Suppose that Pieter has conducted an appraisal and has found that its assets are valued at $1,000,000. How can such a difference occur?

d. Elizabeth Company has assets of $500,000 and liabilities of $600,000. What conclusions can you draw about this firm?

should they be recorded in the financial statements of the firm why or why not 566538

Identifying Accounting Transactions

T shirt business first described in Chapter 1, “Financial Accounting and Its Environment.”The firm now has a small store near the football stadium to display and sell various sporting goods. During the first week that the shop is open, the following events occur. Should they be recorded in the financial statements of the firm? Why or why not?

a. A famous football player gives a signed football to the store owner’s daughter.

b. The firm received a bill from the Public Service Co. for gas and electricity used by the prior tenants in the store.

c. The owner bought three lottery tickets for $6.

d. One of the three lottery tickets won $150. (In this case, assume that you did not originally record the purchase of the tickets and that the owner did not want to record the winnings.)

e. The owner learned that the Super Bowl will be held at the nearby stadium in three years.

how would this situation differ if gil were merely the manager who was making these 566545

Identifying Unusual Transactions and Events

As the staff accountant for Gil’s Plumbing, you notice that a $1,000 check is drawn (payable to “Cash”) on the third Monday of each month and is charged to miscellaneous expenses. You also notice that a sleazy character with a canvas bag comes into the office on the third Tuesday of each month for a 30 second meeting with Gil. After inquiring about what the $1,000 check is for and to which account it might more properly be charged, Gil suggests that you should “mind your own business” and just record the expenses where you are told.

Required

a. What would you guess is really happening in this situation?

b. Is the $1,000 properly recorded in Gil’s accounts? Why?

c. Is this a personal transaction or a business transaction?

d. Since Gil is the sole owner of the plumbing business, can he do whatever he wants with his money? How would this situation differ if Gil were merely the manager who was making these payments without the owner’s knowledge?

What should you do in this case? Why?

which methods do you suspect these are 566549

The Income Statement

Reality Check

Reader’s Digest records sales of magazine subscriptions as unearned revenue at the gross subscription price at the time the orders are received. Proportionate shares of the gross subscription price are recognized as revenue when the subscriptions are fulfilled.

Required

a. Assume that Reader’s Digest receives $48 from a customer for a two year subscription. Analyze this transaction in terms of the basic accounting equation.

b. Assume that the subscription is for 24 monthly issues. In terms of the basic accounting equation, what analysis would Reader’s Digest undertake when each issue is mailed?

Cendant Corporation markets memberships in discount purchasing clubs. Typical subscriptions last one year. The first month is a trial membership; members pay no fee. After the first month, members are billed monthly. However, at any time during the year long subscription period, a member can terminate the agreement and receive a refund for all amounts paid. Cendant also incurs marketing costs in attracting new members (such as mailings and phone solicitations).

Required

a. Describe two methods that Cendant could use to recognize revenue. Which method is the most conservative?

b. For each of the two revenue recognition methods described above, suggest a method of expense recognition that adheres to the matching principle.

c. Because Cendant has experienced significant accounting regularities, the SEC has forced Cendant to use certain revenue and expense methods. Which methods do you suspect these are?

Ford Motor Company reported a first quarter profit of $904 million. However, that profit included a $440 million loss from the sale of First Nationwide, a financial institution. Because Ford did not dispose of its entire financial services unit, this disposal does not qualify as a discontinued operation, but some analysts might prefer to exclude the disposal loss from Ford’s earnings when making projections about future earnings.

Required

Eliminate the First Nationwide loss from Ford’s reported net income.

compute the issue price of each of the following bonds 566584

Computing the issue price of bonds. Compute the issue price of each of the following bonds.

a. $1,000,000 face value, zero coupon bonds due in 20 years, priced on the market to yield 10% compounded semiannually.

b. $1,000,000 face value, serial bonds repayable in equal semiannual installments of $50,000 for 20 years, priced on the market to yield 6% compounded semiannually.

c. $1,000,000 face value, 10% semiannual coupon bonds with interest payable each six months and the principal due in 20 years, priced on the market to yield 8% compounded semiannually.

d. $1,000,000 face value semiannual coupon bonds, with an annual coupon rate of 6% for the first ten years and 8% for the second ten years and the principal due in 20 years, priced on the market to yield 10% compounded semiannually.

give the journal entries related to these bonds for 2008 seward uses the calendar ye 566586

Amortization schedule for bonds. On January 1, 2008, Seward Corporation issues $100,000 face value, 8% semiannual coupon bonds maturing three years from the date of issue. The coupons, dated for June 30 and December 31 of each year, each promise 4% of the face value, 8% total for a year. The firm issues the bonds to yield 10%, compounded semiannually.

a. Compute the initial issue proceeds of these bonds.

b. Construct an amortization schedule, for this bond issue, assuming that Seward Company uses amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate to account for the bonds.

c. Give the journal entries related to these bonds for 2008. Seward uses the calendar year as its reporting period.

d. On January 1, 2010, Seward Corporation reacquires $20,000 face value of these bonds for 102% of face value and retires them. Give the journal entry to record the retirement.

accounting for bonds using amortized cost measurement based on the historical market 566587

Accounting for bonds using amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate. O’Brien Corporation issues $8,000,000 face value, 8% semiannual coupon bonds maturing in 20 years. The market initially prices these bonds to yield 6% compounded semiannually. O’Brien Corporation accounts for these bonds using amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate.

a. Compute the issue price of these bonds.

b. Compute the interest expense on these bonds for the first six months.

c. Compute the interest expense on these bonds for the second six months.

d. Compute the carrying value of these bonds at the end of the second six month period.

e. Use present value computations to verify the carrying value of the bonds at the end of the second six month period as computed in part d above.

compute the carrying value of these bonds at the end of the second six month period 566588

Accounting for bonds using amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate. Robinson Company issues $5,000,000 face value, 8% semiannual coupon bonds maturing in 10 years. The market initially prices these bonds to yield 10% compounded semiannually. Robinson Company accounts for these bonds using amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate.

a. Compute the issue price of these bonds.

b. Compute the interest expense for the first six months.

c. Compute the interest expense for the second six months.

d. Compute the carrying value of these bonds at the end of the second six month period.

e. Use present value computations to verify the carrying value of the bonds at the end of the second six month period as computed in part d above.

compute the carrying value of these bonds on january 1 2008 assuming that hdc has us 566589

Accounting for bonds using amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate. Several years ago, Huergo Dooley Corporation (HDC) issued $2,000,000 face value, 8% semiannual coupon bonds on the market initially priced to yield 10% compounded semiannually. The bonds require HDC to make semiannual payments of 4% of face value on June 30 and December 31 of each year. The bonds mature on December 31, 2012.

a. Compute the carrying value of these bonds on January 1, 2008, assuming that HDC has used amortized cost measurement based on the historical market interest rate to account for these bonds.

b. Give HDC’s journal entry to recognize interest expense and cash payment on June 30, 2008.

c. Give HDC’s journal entry to recognize interest expense and cash payment on December 31, 2008.

d. On January 1, 2009, these bonds trade in the market at a price to yield 6%, compounded semiannually. On this date, HDC repurchased 20% of these bonds on the open market and retired them. Give the journal entry to record the repurchase.

compute the carrying value of these bonds on january 1 june 30 and december 31 of 20 566590

Accounting for bonds using the fair value option based on the current market interest rate. Stroud Corporation issues $10,000,000 face value, 10 year, 6% semiannual coupon bonds on January 1, 2008. The bonds require coupon payments on June 30 and December 31 of each year. The market initially priced the bonds to yield 6% compounded semiannually. The current market yield on these bonds was 6.2% compounded semiannually on June 30, 2008, and 6.6% compounded semiannually on December 31, 2008. Stroud Corporation computes interest expense for each six month period using the market yield at the beginning of the period.

a. Compute the carrying value of these bonds on January 1, June 30, and December 31 of 2008 using the fair value option.

b. Compute the amount of interest expense and the amount of the unrealized gain or loss for the first six months of 2008.

c. Compute the amount of interest expense and the amount of the unrealized gain or loss for the second six months of 2008.

d. Give the journal entries for these bonds on January 1, June 30, and December 31 of 2008.

compute the amount of interest expense and the amount of the unrealized gain or loss 566591

Accounting for bonds using the fair value option based on the current market interest rate. Restin Corporation issues $20,000,000 face value, 10 year, 8% semiannual coupon bonds on January 1, 2008. The bonds promise coupon payments on June 30 and December 31 of each year. The market initially priced the bonds to yield 7% compounded semiannually. The current market yield on these bonds was 6.8% compounded semiannually on June 30, 2008, and 6.4% on December 31, 2008. Restin Corporation computes interest expense for each six month period using the market yield at the beginning of the period.

a. Compute the carrying value of these bonds on January 1, June 30, and December 31 of 2008 using the fair value option.

b. Compute the amount of interest expense and the amount of the unrealized gain or loss for the first six months of 2008.

c. Compute the amount of interest expense and the amount of the unrealized gain or loss for the second six months of 2008.

d. Give the journal entries for these bonds on January 1, June 30, and December 31 of 2008.

assume that the internal revenue service accepts the proposed depreciation method in 566340

Depreciation May Manufacturing Company was organized January 2, 2007. During 2007, it has used in its reports to management the straight line method of depreciating its plant assets. On November 9, you are having a conference with May’s officers to discuss the depreciation method to be used for income tax and stockholder reporting. The president of May has suggested the use of a new method, which he feels is more suitable than the straight line method for the needs of the company during the period of rapid expansion of production and capacity that he foresees. The following is a schedule in which the proposed method is applied to a fixed asset with an original cost of $32,000, an estimated useful life of five years, and a scrap value of approximately $2,000.

Year

Years of Life
Used

Fraction
Rate

Depreciation Expense

Accumulated Depreciation,
Year End

Book Value at
Year End

1

1

15 Jan

$2,000

$2,000

$30,000

2

2

15 Feb

4,000

6,000

26,000

3

3

15 Mar

6,000

12,000

20,000

4

4

15 Apr

8,000

20,000

12,000

5

5

15 May

10,000

30,000

2,000

The president favors the new method because he has heard that:

1. It will increase the funds recovered during the years near the end of the asset’s useful life when maintenance and replacement disbursements are high.

2. It will result in increased write offs in later years, thereby reducing taxes.

Required

1. Explain the purpose and, hence, the nature of accounting for depreciation.

2. Is the president’s proposal within the scope of generally accepted accounting principles? In making your decision, explain the circumstances, if any, under which the method would be reasonable and those, if any, under which it would not be reasonable.

3. The president wants your advice.

a. Explain whether depreciation recovers or creates funds.

b. Assume that the Internal Revenue Service accepts the proposed depreciation method in this particular case. If the proposed method were used for stockholder and tax reporting purposes, explain how it would affect the availability of funds generated by operations.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives what depreciation methods and live 566343

Ethics and Depreciation Issues You are auditing the financial records of a company and are reviewing the depreciation computations. Included in the assets are two buildings and numerous machines in each building. One of the buildings is used to manufacture components of toys and the other for assembly and packing, using the manufactured components as well as others purchased from suppliers. You see that the company uses straight line depreciation over 40 years for the buildings and 20 years for the machinery. You decide to ask the CFO about these calculations, and he replies, “We use 40 years for the buildings because it is close to the 39 we use for tax. And our best guess is that we will replace the machines twice while we use the building. And the method is easy to use and most companies use it, don’t they? Or have things changed that much since I was in college?” You feel as if you have annoyed the CFO with your questions, so you decide to leave. As you walk back to your office, you recall from earlier in the audit that the company uses FIFO and LIFO for different segments of its inventory and that all top level managers receive bonuses based on reported income.

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, what depreciation methods and lives would you recommend?

an item of factory equipment is removed from service the item has a book value of 10 566490

Identification of Accounting Transactions

Which of the following transactions or events should be recorded in the firm”s accounting records? Explain your answer.

a. Cash is received from a sale previously made on credit.

b. A year after obtaining a bank loan, a business owes the bank interest charges.

These charges remain unpaid at the end of the year.

c. A professional baseball player, hitting .425, expects a bonus under his incentive contract for leading the league in hitting for the season. The bonus was “pegged”at $1,000 for every point that he exceeded the batting target of .375. How much should the baseball player record in his checkbook at the end of the season?

d. An employer and a labor union sign a new collective bargaining agreement.

e. An item of factory equipment is removed from service. The item has a book value of $10,000. It is determined that the equipment is worthless.

are audits expensive are they time consuming will an audit delay her application why 566491

Conceptual Discussion: Audits and Loan Applications

T shirt business described at the beginning of this chapter. The owner has decided to expand her business by trying to secure a bank loan. After meeting with the bank loan officer, she asked for your help in answering several questions before proceeding with the loan application.

a. Required: What is an audit, and why would a bank require an audit before granting a loan?

b. Are audits expensive? Are they time consuming? Will an audit delay her application? Why?

c. Identify several alternative types of loans that the owner might consider.

d. The owner is considering whether to purchase and install a computer based accounting system to replace the checkbook that she has been using. What information should the owner gather?

what other useful information is shown in this opinion 566492

Following is the auditor’s opinion expressed on the financial statements of Kleen ware, Inc.:

AN AUDITOR’S REPORT

The Board of Directors

Kleen ware, Incorporated and Subsidiaries (the Company)

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Kleen ware, Inc. and subsidiaries (the company) as of December 31, 1997 and 1998, and the related consolidated statements of income, changes in shareholders’ equity, and cash flows for years then ended. These financial statements are the responsibility of the company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards.

Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the 1997 and 1998 financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of the Company at December 31, 1997 and 1998, and the consolidated results of its operations and its cash flows for the years then ended in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles.

Max Ernst & Company

Milwaukee, Wisconsin

February 14, 1999

Required

Review the following auditor’s opinion. Identify the specific sentence indicating the auditor’s opinion. What other useful information is shown in this opinion?

Why is it useful?

would it make any difference if all the partners followed the same procedure and poc 566493

Company Perquisites and Cash Transactions

Assume that you are employed by a law firm as a staff accountant. The firm has purchased four season tickets for the Colorado Rockies (a baseball franchise).

Your boss, one of the partners in the firm, has offered individual tickets to you, but also asked you to pay $10 for each ticket. Since they are $14 tickets, you are happy to get a bargain. You are even happier to get a chance to go to the game because tickets are in short supply.

Next month, while reviewing the financial statements for your department, you are unable to find the $40 of cash receipts for these tickets. Since you know that the firm has purchased these tickets, you wonder what happened to your $40 payment. After discussing this matter with several other junior staff members who had also paid the partner for tickets to Rockies’games, you guess that the partner has pocketed the money and not reported the revenue to the other partners.

Required

a. What should or would you do? Why?

b. Would it make any difference if the firm were a single proprietorship and not a partnership? Why?

c. Would it make any difference if all the partners followed the same procedure and pocketed the ticket money? Why?

d. Is this an issue that should be reported to any other parties such as the Internal Revenue Service, the State Auditor, or the Attorney General? Why?

write a short memo to the key accounting group noted in the article from the perspec 566501

Essay: Changes in Accounting Disclosure Requirements

The accounting profession considered increasing its required disclosures and the type of information that is required from public companies. The following paragraphs appeared in The Wall Street Journal.

A key accounting group calls for a sharp increase in the amount of information companies must disclose in their annual reports. The prospect alarms corporate financial officers.

If adopted, the recommendations could force companies to change the way they figure profits. It could make them disclose more data about the competitive pressures they face. They could transform the auditor’s report from the current boilerplate message to a longer and much more revealing statement about the company’s health. Information about changes in the firm’s product prices in response to competitive price shifts would be required.

The new requirements would favor more segmenting of data so that sales and profits for each company unit would be shown. More meaningful breakdowns of company data would be required. Much more data would be required from larger companies than from small companies.

Required

Write a short memo to the key accounting group noted in the article from the perspective of a company president, responding to the proposed changes in accounting disclosures.

a sole proprietorship and its owner are the same entity for financial reporting 566507

Indicate whether each of the following statements concerning possible organization structures is true or false. If a statement is false, indicate why.

a. A sole proprietorship and its owner are legally the same entity.

b. The partners in a partnership are not liable for the debts of the partnership.

c. All partners in a partnership must agree on all decisions.

d. A sole proprietorship and its owner are the same entity for financial reporting.

e. A partnership is less risky (for the partners) than a sole proprietorship.

f. Two people can form a sole proprietorship.

g. Twenty people cannot form a partnership.

h. It is more expensive to form a partnership than a sole proprietorship.

i. Any group of people (less than five) can form a partnership by oral agreement.

the sales manager kindly transferred the warranty to the second vehicle 566511

Identifying Transactions: Cash Versus Accrual Method

Identify which of the following events should be reported on financial statements under

1. the cash basis of accounting,

2. the accrual basis of accounting,

3. both methods, or

4. neither method.

Explain each choice.

a. Agreed (verbally) to purchase a used car from Slee Z Auto.

b. Paid $300 for a warranty on the used car.

c. Took the car on a test drive, found it faulty, and asked the salesperson for a different car.

d. The sales manager helped choose another car.

e. The sales manager kindly transferred the warranty to the second vehicle.

f. Paid $6,500 for the vehicle.

g. Paid license and taxes of $275.

h. Bought new tires for $450 on account.

i. On a cold winter morning, the car failed to start.

j. Purchased a new battery for $65 on account.

k. Filed a warranty claim for the new battery.

l. Received $45 payment under the warranty.

employees worked this month but the payroll payment was delayed until the following 566512

Analyzing Transactions: Cash and Accrual Bases

Use pluses and minuses (or NA for not applicable) to show how the following events should be analyzed using the accounting equation under`

1. the cash basis of accounting and

2. the accrual basis of accounting.

a. Signed a contract for the purchase of land.

b. Paid a deposit on the land purchase.

c. Received money in advance from a customer.

d. Listed land for sale with a local realtor.

e. Used equipment, such as a computer, in the business.

f. Had a computer repaired; the repair person just leaves a bill, but cannot accept payment for the repair.

g. Paid the repair bill.

h. Provided services to customers who will not pay until next month.

i. Received compliments from customers about excellent customer services.

j. Hired a well trained accountant to prepare financial statements and provide financial advice. (Assume no payments have been made.)

k. Collected money from customers who have already been billed.

l. Employees worked this month, but the payroll (payment) was delayed until the following month.

m. Failed to pay suppliers for three months because there is not enough money in the bank.

n. Received supplies from a vendor, along with a bill.

o. Sold land under a contract for 10 future payments.

p. Collected one of the contract payments from the land sale.

what is the net income loss for the six months ended december 31 1999 566515

Transaction Analysis

The Western Fittings Corporation began business on July 1, 1999. The following transactions occurred during its first six months:

1. Three individuals each invested $30,000 in exchange for capital stock.

2. One year’s rent was paid for $12,000 on July 1.

3. On August 1, several pieces of property, plant, and equipment were purchased for $75,000 on account.

4. During the six months, clothing, boots, and accessories were purchased for $60,000 cash.

5. The corporation had sales revenue of $85,000, of which $35,000 has not yet been collected in cash.

6. The cost of the clothing, boots, and accessories sold in item 5 was $55,250.

7. Employees were paid $24,000 in wages.

8. The corporation paid utilities and telephone expenses of $5,000.

Required

a. Analyze and record these transactions using the basic accounting equation.

b. Record the following adjustments for the six months ended December 31, 1999: rent expense and depreciation expense. Assume a 10 year life and zero residual value.

c. What is the net income (loss) for the six months ended December 31, 1999?

what additional information is needed to fully analyze hasty bakery results for marc 566516

Transaction Analysis

John Hasty opened his bakery on March 1, 1999, as a sole proprietor. The following transactions took place at the beginning of March:

1. Deposited $10,000 into a checking account in the name of the Hasty Bakery.

2. Rented a small kitchen and paid the first month’s rent of $500.

3. Purchased kitchen equipment for $3,000 cash.

4. Purchased baking ingredients for $6,000 on account.

5. Obtained a $2,000, 9%, one year loan.

6. Obtained a one year insurance policy on the kitchen equipment. Paid the entire premium of $500.

Required

a. Analyze the above transactions for March, using the basic accounting equation.

b. Record necessary adjustments: interest expense, insurance expense, and depreciation expense. (Assume a 60 month life and zero residual value.)

c. What additional information is needed to fully analyze Hasty Bakery results for March?

how should the ski chalet be reflected on the corporation rsquo s financial statemen 566518

Fill in the Blanks

Ascertain the missing items (A, B,and C) in the following situation:

Assets, January 1

$10,000

Assets, December 31

$14,000

Liabilities, January 1

A

Liabilities, December 31

$ 7,000

Owners’ equity, January 1

$ 8,000

Owners’ equity, December 31

B

Owners’ contributions

0

Owners’ withdrawals

C

Net income

$ 2,000

record the following business transactions in the basic accounting equation use colu 566519

Transaction Analysis

Record the following business transactions in the basic accounting equation. Use column headings for Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Accounts Payable, Unearned revenue, Notes Payable, Invested Capital, and Retained Earnings.

a. Three individuals each invested $70,000 in a newly formed corporation in exchange for capital stock.

b. Paid $12,500 for land.

c. Performed services for customers, all on account; billed the customers $24,300.

d. Received a utility bill for $850 and immediately paid it.

e. Received $11,200 for services not yet performed.

f. Received a telephone bill for $650, but did not pay it yet.

g. Borrowed $34,000 cash from a bank and signed the loan documents.

h. Received $10,000 from customers on account.

i. Performed the services described in part e.

a company purchased a trash compactor for 200 that has an expected life of five year 566520

Transaction Analysis: Income Statement and Balance Sheet Effects

Identify the effects of the following events on the first year’s income statement and balance sheet:

a. A company paid a $2,000 bill for a fire insurance policy that covers the current year and the next year.

b. A company purchased a trash compactor for $200 that has an expected life of five years. What are the balance sheet effects of treating the $200 as an expense this year versus the effects of depreciating the trash compactor over five years? What are the effects on net income?

c. Two attorneys, working together under a corporate structure, decide that a ski chalet at Vail is necessary to entertain current and prospective clients. At the same time, they are considering the addition of a third attorney as another owner of their company. This third attorney has a ski chalet that she purchased five years ago for $120,000. Its current market value is $200,000.

How should the ski chalet be reflected on the corporation’s financial statements, assuming that the new attorney is hired and the ski chalet is transferred to the corporation?

as of december 31 workers have earned 10 200 in wages that are unpaid and unrecorded 566522

Transaction Analysis: Accrual Adjustments

The accounting firm Seaver & Co. prepares its own financial statements at the end of each year. Based on the following information, prepare any adjustments that are needed for the accounting records as of December 31, 1999 in terms of the basic accounting equation.

a. As of December 31, Seaver & Co. has rendered $20,500 worth of services to clients for which they have not yet billed the client and for which they have not made any accounting entry.

b. Seaver & Co. owns equipment (computers and so on) having an original cost of $12,000. The equipment has an expected life of six years.

c. On January 1, 1999, Seaver borrowed $15,000. Both principal and interest are due on December 31, 2000. The interest rate is 11%.

d. On January 1, 1999, Seaver rented storage space for three years. The entire three year charge of $15,000 was paid at this time. Seaver (correctly) created a prepaid rent account in the amount of $15,000.

e. As of December 31, workers have earned $10,200 in wages that are unpaid and unrecorded.

prepare an income statement for the month ended december 31 1999 566523

Transaction Analysis: Preparing Financial Statements

The following account balances are shown on November 30, 1999, for the

Clever Bookstore:

Cash

$ 8,000

Accounts payable

$ 4,000

Accounts receivable

9,000

Salaries payable

2,000

Inventory

60,000

Notes payable

35,000

Supplies

3,000

J. Clever, capital

39,000

Total

$80,000

Total

$80,000

The following transactions occurred during December.

1. Paid workers the $2,000 owed them on November 30.

2. Made sales totaling $40,000. Half of the sales were for cash. The other half were on account. The cost of goods sold was $25,000.

3. Purchased inventory on account, $15,000.

4. Collected in cash $22,000 of receivables.

5. Used supplies totaling $800.

6. Paid accounts payable of $12,000.

7. Paid all December’s interest on the note payable in the amount of $300.

Required

a. Analyze all transactions using the basic accounting equation. Begin your analysis by entering the November 30 account balances into a worksheet. Then enter each of the transactions above into your worksheet.

b. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 1999.

c. Prepare an income statement for the month ended December 31, 1999.

based on that analysis prepare a balance sheet and an income statement for the first 566524

Transaction Analysis: Preparing Financial Statements

Susan’s Sweets, a candy shop, opened on January 1, 1999, with the following transactions:

1.Susan deposited $100,000 in cash on January 1, 1999, and began business as a sole proprietorship.

2.Susan transferred a rental agreement for commercial premises to the candy shop. She personally had paid $20,000 rent for the next six months on December 31 of the prior year, and now transferred all rights under the six month agreement. This agreement is renewable for another six months on July 1.

3.Susan purchased candy and other “sweetments” at a cost of $40,000 in cash.

4.Susan purchased store fixtures at a cost of $15,000, paying $5,000 in cash and the balance on account. These store fixtures have a useful life of five years, with no expected salvage value.

5.The six month rental agreement expired. She renewed it for another six months and paid $20,000.

6.During the first year of operations, Susan’s sales totaled $132,000 on account.

7.Collections from customers totaled $130,500.

8.During the first year, her other operating expenses were $37,300 on account. In addition, she received “salaries” of $10,000, which were really a withdrawal or drawing.

9. At the end of the first year, Susan’s Sweets had $2,000 of inventory.

10.Record depreciation for the first year.

11.Record the adjustment to prepaid rent.

Required

a. Use the basic accounting equation to show the effects of the transactions and any necessary accruals during Susan’s first year of business.

b. Based on that analysis, prepare a balance sheet and an income statement for the first year.

identify any significant missing elements in your income statement 566525

Transaction Analysis: Preparing Financial Statements

Susan’s Shoe Shop opened on January 1. The following transactions took place during the first month:

1.Deposited $30,000 in the firm’s checking account.

2.Purchased shoes, boots, socks, and other inventory for $45,000 on account.

3.Purchased display shelving, chairs, and other fixtures for $10,000 cash and

$40,000 on account. Assume a useful life of five years.

4.Obtained $20,000 and signed a three year, $20,000 bank loan at 8% annual interest.

5.Had sales revenue during January of $75,000. Of this amount, $25,000 was received in cash and the balance was on account.

6.The cost of the merchandise sold in item 5 was $32,000.

7.Paid $10,000 to each of two different creditors.

8.Signed an application for a one year insurance policy and paid the year’s premium of $2,400.

9.Paid three employees a monthly salary of $2,000 each.

10.Collected $35,000 from (accounts receivable) customers.

Required

a. Analyze these transactions, including any appropriate adjustments, using the basic accounting equation.

b. Prepare a simple income statement for the firm.

c. Identify any significant missing elements in your income statement.

d. Prepare a simple balance sheet for Susan’s Shoe Shop.

compute the depreciation expense for 2007 and 2008 566317

Cost of Asset and Depreciation Method The Heist Company purchased a machine on January 2, 2007 and uses the 150% declining balance depreciation method. The machine has an expected life of 10 years and an expected residual value of $5,000. The following costs relate to the acquisition and use of the machine during the first year of its operations:

Invoice price

$50,000

Discounts available and taken

1,000

Freight

700

Installation

900

Testing

$1,100

Normal spoilage of materials during the year

750

Abnormal spoilage of materials during the year

250

Wages of machine operator

15,000

Required

Compute the depreciation expense for 2007 and 2008.

prepare the journal entries to record depreciation on each asset for 2005 through 20 566318

Depreciation and Partial Periods The following assets are owned by the Dinnell Company:

Asset

A

B

C

Year purchased

2005

2006

2007

Cost

$20,000

$40,000

$100,000

Expected life

5 years

8 years

10 years

Residual value

$2,000

$10,000

Depreciation method

Straight line

Sum of the years’ digits

Double declining balance

In the year of acquisition and retirement of an asset, the company records depreciation for one half year. During 2008, asset A was sold for $7,000.

Required

Prepare the journal entries to record depreciation on each asset for 2005 through 2008 and the sale of asset A.

assume that the company expected all the trucks to last four years and be retired fo 566319

Group and Composite Depreciation The Cheadle Company purchased a fleet of 20 delivery trucks for $8,000 each on January 2, 2007. It decided to use composite depreciation on a straight line basis, and calculated the depreciation from the following schedule:

Year

Number of Trucks to Be Retired at Year End

Estimated Residual Value per Truck

2008

2

$4,000

2009

6

4,000

2010

8

2,000

2011

4

The company actually retired the trucks according to the following schedule (assume each truck was retired at the beginning of the year):

Year

Number of Trucks Retired

Total Proceeds from Retirements

2008

1

$4,000

2009

3

11,000

2010

6

19,000

2011

5

6,000

2012

3

4,000

2013

2

1,000

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record the preceding events.

2. Assume that the company expected all the trucks to last four years and be retired for $1,600 each. Using group depreciation, prepare journal entries for all six years, assuming the company retired the trucks as shown by the latter schedule.

how would your answer change if management planned to implement efficiencies that wo 566321

Asset Impairment On January 1, 2002, the Borstad Company purchased a factory for $180,000 and machinery for $1 million. It is depreciating the factory over 30 years and the machinery over 20 years, both by the straight line method to zero residual values. Late in 2007, because of technological changes in the industry and reduced selling prices for its products, the company believes that its asset(s) may be impaired and will have a remaining useful life of eight years. The cash flows from the factory and machinery are not separable, and are independent of the company’s other activities. The company estimates that the asset will produce cash inflows of $400,000 and will incur cash outflows of $295,000 each year for the next 8 years. It is not able to determine the fair value of the asset based on a current selling price of the factory and machinery. The company’s discount rate is 12%.

Required

1. Prepare schedules to determine whether, at the end of 2007, the machinery is impaired and, if so, the impairment loss to be recognized.

2. Prepare the journal entry to record the impairment.

3. How would your answer to Requirement 1 change if the discount rate was 16% and the cash flows were expected to continue for 6 years?

4. How would your answer change if management planned to implement efficiencies that would save $10,000 each year?

compare the total income for all five years under requirement 1 and requirement 2 566322

Asset Impairment On January 1, 2002, the Borstad Company purchased a factory for $180,000 and machinery for $1 million. It is depreciating the factory over 30 years and the machinery over 20 years, both by the straight line method to zero residual values. Late in 2007, because of technological changes in the industry and reduced selling prices for its products, the company believes that its asset(s) may be impaired and will have a remaining useful life of eight years. The cash flows from the factory and machinery are not separable, and are independent of the company’s other activities. The company estimates that the asset will produce cash inflows of $400,000 and will incur cash outflows of $295,000 each year for the next 8 years. It is not able to determine the fair value of the asset based on a current selling price of the factory and machinery. The company’s discount rate is 12%.

Required

1. Prepare schedules to determine whether, at the end of 2007, the machinery is impaired and, if so, the impairment loss to be recognized.

2. Prepare the journal entry to record the impairment.

3. How would your answer to Requirement 1 change if the discount rate was 16% and the cash flows were expected to continue for 6 years?

4. How would your answer change if management planned to implement efficiencies that would save $10,000 each year?

Depreciation for Financial Statements and Income Tax Purposes The Hunter Company purchased a light truck on January 2, 2007 for $18,000. The truck, which will be used for deliveries, has the following characteristics:

Estimated life: 5 years

Estimated residual value: $3,000

Depreciation for financial statements: straight line

Depreciation for income tax purposes: MACRS (three year life)

From 2007 through 2011, each year, the company had sales of $100,000, cost of goods sold of $60,000, and operating expenses (excluding depreciation) of $15,000. The truck was disposed of on December 31, 2011 for $2,000.

Required

1. Prepare an income statement for financial reporting through pretax accounting income for each of the five years, 2007 through 2011.

2. Prepare, instead, an income statement for income tax purposes through taxable income for each of the five years, 2007 through 2011.

3. Compare the total income for all five years under Requirement 1 and Requirement 2.

prepare the natural resources section of the balance sheet on december 31 2007 2008 566323

Depletion On January 2, 2007, the Whistler Company purchased land for $450,000, from which it is estimated that 400,000 tons of ore could be extracted. It estimates that it will cost $80,000 to restore the land, after which it could be sold for $30,000. During 2007, the company mined 80,000 tons and sold 50,000 tons. During 2008, the company mined 100,000 tons and sold 120,000 tons. At the beginning of 2009, the company spent an additional $100,000, which increased the reserves by 60,000 tons.

In 2009, the company mined 140,000 tons and sold 130,000 tons. The company uses a FIFO cost flow assumption.

Required

1. Calculate the depletion included in the income statement and ending inventory for 2007, 2008, and 2009.

2. Prepare the natural resources section of the balance sheet on December 31, 2007, 2008, and 2009, assuming that an accumulated depletion account is used.

compute the company rsquo s expenses included on the 2007 income statement 566324

Depletion On July 1, 2007, the Amplex Company purchased a coal mine for $2 million. The estimated capacity of the mine was 800,000 tons. During 2007, the company mines 10,000 tons of coal per month and sells 9,000 tons per month. The selling price is $30 per ton and production costs (excluding depletion and depreciation) are $8 per ton. At the end of the mine’s life, it is expected that it will cost $300,000 to restore the land, after which it can be sold for $100,000. The company also purchased some temporary housing for the miners at a cost of $170,000. The housing has an expected life of 10 years but is expected to be sold for $10,000 at the end of the mine’s life. The company uses the FIFO cost flow assumption.

Required

1. Compute the company’s expenses included on the 2007 income statement.

2. Compute the cost of the company’s inventory at December 31, 2007.

3. In January 2008 a new estimate indicated that the capacity of the mine was only 500,000 tons at that time. Compute the company’s expenses included on the 2008 income statement if the company mines and sells 10,000 tons per month.

prepare any necessary correcting journal entries for each situation also prepare the 566325

Changes and Corrections of Depreciation During 2007, the controller of the Ryel Company asked you to prepare correcting journal entries for the following three situations:

1. Machine A was purchased for $50,000 on January 1, 2002. Straight line depreciation has been recorded for five years, and the Accumulated Depreciation account has a balance of $25,000. The estimated residual value remains at $5,000, but the service life is now estimated to be one year longer than estimated originally.

2. Machine B was purchased for $40,000 on January 1, 2005. It had an estimated residual value of $5,000 and an estimated service life of 10 years. It has been depreciated under the double declining balance method for two years. Now, at the beginning of the third year, Ryel has decided to change to the straight line method.

3. Machine C was purchased for $20,000 on January 1, 2006. Double declining balance depreciation has been recorded for one year. The estimated residual value of the machine is $2,000 and the estimated service life is five years. The computation of the depreciation erroneously included the estimated residual value.

Required

Prepare any necessary correcting journal entries for each situation. Also prepare the journal entry necessary for each situation to record the depreciation for 2007.

prepare the formal journal entries that you would suggest at december 31 2007 to adj 566326

Adjusting Entries You are engaged in the examination of the financial statements of the Madle Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2007. The schedules for the property, plant, and equipment and the related accumulated depreciation accounts that follow have been prepared by the client. You have checked the opening balances to your prior year’s audit work papers. Your examination reveals the following information:

1. All equipment is depreciated on the straight line basis (no salvage value taken into consideration) using the following estimated lives: buildings 25 years, all other items 10 years. The company’s policy is to take one half year’s depreciation on all asset acquisitions and disposals during the year.

2. The company completed the construction of a wing on the plant building on June 30. The useful life of the building was not extended by this addition. The lowest construction bid received was $17,500, the amount recorded in the Buildings account. Company personnel were used to construct the addition at a cost of $16,000 (materials $7,500, labor $5,500, and overhead $3,000).

3. On August 18, $5,000 was paid for paving and fencing a portion of land owned by the company and used as a parking lot for employees. The expenditure was capitalized to the Land account.

4. The amount shown in the Machinery and Equipment asset retirement column represents cash received on September 4 upon disposal of a machine purchased four years ago in July for $48,000. The bookkeeper recorded depreciation expense of $3,500 on this machine in 2007.

5. Sydney City donated land and building appraised at $10,000 and $40,000, respectively, to the Madle Corporation for a plant. On September 1, the company began operating the plant. Because no costs were involved, the bookkeeper made no entry to record the transaction.

MADLE CORP.
Analysis of Property, Plant, and Equipment, and of
Related Accumulated Depreciation Accounts
Year Ended December 31, 2007

Description

Final
12/31/06

Additions

Retirements

Per Books
12/31/07

Assets:

Land

$22,500

$5,000

$27,500

Buildings

120,000

17,500

137,500

Machinery and Equipment

385,000

40,400

$26,000

399,400

$527,500

$62,900

$26,000

$564,400

Accumulated Depreciation:

Buildings

$60,000

$ 5,150*

$65,150

Machinery and Equipment

173,250

39,220*

212,470

$233,250

$44,370

$277,620

*Depreciation expenses for the year

Required

Prepare the formal journal entries that you would suggest at December 31, 2007 to adjust the accounts for the transactions noted previously. Disregard income tax implications. The books have not been closed. Computations should be rounded off to the nearest dollar.

prepare an accumulated depreciation account for each category of assets enter the be 566327

Comprehensive On December 31, 2007, the Vail Company owned the following assets:

Asset

Date of Purchase

Cost

Accumulated Depreciation

Life in Years

Residual Value

Building

1/1/2005

$50,000

$ 3,750a

40

$0

Office machinery

1/1/2005

20,000

9,760b

10

2,000

Office fixtures

1/1/2005

30,000

20,000c

5

5,000

a. Straight line depreciation

b. Double declining balance depreciation

c. Sum of the years’ digits depreciation

The company computes depreciation and amortization expense to the nearest whole year. During 2008, the company engaged in the following transactions:

Jan. 3 Extended the building at a cost of $30,000. The extension provided an addition to the service potential of the building.

Mar. 7 Sold a piece of office machinery that had originally cost $4,000 and that had accumulated depreciation of $1,952 on December 31, 2007. The machine was sold for $3,000.

Apr. 28 Obtained a patent on an invention by paying $7,000. The company expected that the patent would provide protection against competition for 10 years.

May 16 Purchased office fixtures and office machinery for $9,200. The supplier reduced the price because of the joint purchase.

If purchased separately, the office fixtures would have cost $6,000 and the office machinery $4,000. Delivery costs paid by Vail were $200. The machinery was accidentally damaged during installation and cost $230 to repair. The office fixtures have an estimated life of five years and a residual value of $250. The office machinery has an estimated life of 10 years and a residual value of $500. Aug. 10 Exchanged the president’s desk (classified as office fixtures) for a larger desk belonging to a friend of the president. The desk had cost $600 and had accumulated depreciation on December 31, 2007 of $400 and an estimated residual value of $100. The new desk had a value of $900 and $700 cash was paid. Oct. 20 Serviced and adjusted the office machinery at a cost of $125.

Required

1. Check the accuracy of the accumulated depreciation balances at December 31, 2007. (Round to the nearest whole dollar in all requirements.)

2. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding events in 2008, as well as the year end recording of depreciation expense.

3. Prepare an Accumulated Depreciation account for each category of assets, enter the beginning balance, post the journal entries from Requirement 2, and compute the ending balance.

prepare a schedule showing the depreciation expense computation of the office buildi 566328

Comprehensive On January 2, 2007, Brock Corporation purchased a tract of land (site number 101) with a building for $600,000. Additionally, Brock paid a real estate broker’s commission of $36,000, legal fees of $6,000, and title guarantee insurance of $18,000. The closing statement indicated that the land value was $500,000 and the building value was $100,000. Shortly after acquisition, the building was razed at a cost of $75,000. Brock entered into a $3,000,000 fixed price contract with Barnett Builders, Inc. on March 2, 2007 for the construction of an office building on land site number 101. The building was completed and occupied on September 30, 2008. Additional construction costs were incurred as follows:

Plans, specifications, and blueprints

$12,000

Architects’ fees for design and supervision

95,000

The company estimates that the building will have a 40 year life from date of completion and decides to use the 150% declining balance depreciation method.

To finance the construction cost, Brock borrowed $3,000,000 on March 2, 2007. The loan is payable in 10 annual installments of $300,000 plus interest at the rate of 14%. Brock’s average amounts of accumulated building construction expenditures were as follows:

For the period March 2 to December 31, 2007

$900,000

For the period January 1 to September 30, 2008

2,300,000

Required

1. Prepare a schedule that discloses the individual costs making up the balance in the Land account with respect to land site number 101 as of September 30, 2008.

2. Prepare a schedule that discloses the individual costs that the company should capitalize in the Office Building account as of September 30, 2008. Show supporting computations in good form.

3. Prepare a schedule showing the depreciation expense computation of the office building for the year ended December 31, 2008.

prove your work by one compound journal entry as of december 31 2007 the adjustment 566329

Errors Soon after December 31, 2007 the auditor requested a depreciation schedule for trucks of the Jarrett Trucking Company, showing the additions, retirements, depreciation, and other data affecting the income of the company in the four year period 2004 to 2007, inclusive. The following data were in the truck account as of January 1, 2004:

Truck no. 1

Purchased January 1, 2001

$12,000

Truck no. 2

Purchased July 1, 2001

10,400

Truck no. 3

Purchased January 1, 2003

12,800

Truck no. 4

Purchased July 1, 2003

15,000

Balance January 1, 2004

$50,200

The Accumulated Depreciation—Trucks account, previously adjusted to January 1, 2004 and duly entered in the ledger, had a balance on that date of $16,460. This amount represented the straight line depreciation on the four trucks from the respective dates of purchase, based on a five year life and no residual value. No debits had been made to this account prior to January 1, 2004.

Transactions between January 1, 2004 and December 31, 2007 and their record in the ledger were as follows:

1. July 1, 2004: Truck no. 1 was sold for $1,000 cash. The entry was a debit to Cash and a credit to Trucks, $1,000.

2. January 1, 2005: Truck no. 3 was traded for a larger one (no. 5) with a five year life. The agreed purchase price was $12,000.

The Jarrett Company paid the other company $1,780 cash on the transaction. The entry was a debit to Trucks, $1,780, and a credit to Cash, $1,780.

3. July 1, 2006: Truck no. 4 was damaged in a wreck to such an extent that it was sold as junk for $50 cash. Jarrett Company received $950 from the insurance company. The entry made by the bookkeeper was a debit to Cash, $1,000, and credits to Miscellaneous Revenue, $50, and Trucks, $950.

4. July 1, 2006: A new truck (no. 6) was acquired for $20,000 cash and debited at that amount to the Trucks account. The truck has a five year life.

Entries for depreciation had been made at the close of each year as follows: 2004, $8,840; 2005, $5,436; 2006, $4,896; 2007, $4,356.

Required

1. For each of the four years, calculate separately the increase or decrease in earnings arising from the company’s errors in determining or entering depreciation or in recording transactions affecting trucks.

2. Prove your work by one compound journal entry as of December 31, 2007; the adjustment of the Trucks account is to reflect the correct balances, assuming that the books have not been closed for 2007.

prepare the property plant and equipment section of blake rsquo s december 31 2007 b 566330

Comprehensive Information for Blake Corporation’s property, plant, and equipment for 2007 is:

Account Balances at January 1, 2007

Debit

Credit

Land

$150,000

Building

1,200,000

Accumulated depreciation

$263,100

Machinery and equipment

900,000

Accumulated depreciation

250,000

Automotive equipment

115,000

Accumulated depreciation

84,600

Depreciation Method and Useful Life

Building: 150% declining balance; 25 years.

Machinery and equipment: Straight line; 10 years.

Automotive equipment: Sum of the years’ digits; 4 years.

Leasehold improvements: Straight line.

The residual value of the depreciable assets is immaterial.

Depreciation is computed to the nearest month.

Transactions during 2007 and other information were as follows:

1. On January 2, 2007, Blake purchased a new car for $10,000 cash and a trade in of a two year old car with a cost of $9,000 and a book value of $2,700. The new car has a cash price of $12,000; the market value of the trade in is not known.

2. On April 1, 2007, a machine purchased for $23,000 on April 1, 2002 was destroyed by fire. Blake recovered $15,500 from its insurance company.

3. On May 1, 2007, costs of $168,000 were incurred to improve leased office premises. The leasehold improvements have a useful life of eight years. The related lease, which terminates on December 31, 2013, is renewable for an additional six year term. The decision to renew will be made in 2013 based on office space needs at that time.

4. On July 1, 2007, machinery and equipment were purchased at a total invoice cost of $280,000; additional costs of $5,000 for freight and $25,000 for installation were incurred.

5. Blake determined that the automotive equipment comprising the $115,000 balance at January 1, 2007 would have been depreciated at a total amount of $18,000 for the year ended December 31, 2007.

Required

1. For each asset classification, prepare schedules showing depreciation and amortization expense, and accumulated depreciation and amortization that would appear on Blake’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2007 and on the balance sheet at December 31, 2007, respectively.

2. Prepare a schedule showing the gain or loss from disposal of assets that would appear in Blake’s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2007.

3. Prepare the property, plant, and equipment section of Blake’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet.

prepare a schedule showing the gain or loss from each asset disposal that pell would 566331

Comprehensive The Plant Asset and Accumulated Depreciation accounts of Pell Corporation had the following balances at December 31, 2006:

Plant
Asset

Accumulated
Depreciation

Land

$350,000

$ —

Land improvements

180,000

45,000

Building

1,500,000

350,000

Machinery and equipment

1,158,000

405,000

Automobiles

150,000

112,000

Depreciation method and useful lives:

  • Land improvements: Straight line; 15 years.
  • Building: 150% declining balance; 20 years.
  • Machinery and equipment: Straight line; 10 years.
  • Automobiles: 150% declining balance; 3 years.
  • Depreciation is computed to the nearest month. No salvage values are recognized. Transactions during 2007:

1. On January 2, 2007, machinery and equipment were purchased at a total invoice cost of $260,000, which included a $5,500 charge for freight. Installation costs of $27,000 were incurred.

2. On March 31, 2007, a machine purchased for $58,000 on January 3, 2003 was sold for $36,500.

3. On May 1, 2007, expenditures of $50,000 were made to repave parking lots at Pell’s plant location. The work was necessitated by damage caused by severe winter weather.

4. On November 2, 2007, Pell acquired a tract of land with an existing building in exchange for 10,000 shares of Pell’s $20 par common stock, which had a market price of $38 a share on this date. Pell paid legal fees and title insurance totaling $23,000. The last property tax bill indicated assessed values of $240,000 for land and $60,000 for building. Shortly after acquisition, the building was razed at a cost of $35,000 in anticipation of new building construction in 2008.

5. On December 31, 2007, Pell purchased a new automobile for $15,250 cash and trade in of an automobile purchased for $18,000 on January 1, 2006. The new automobile has a cash value of $19,000.

Required

1. Prepare a schedule analyzing the changes in each of the plant assets during 2007, with detailed supporting computations. Disregard the related accumulated depreciation accounts.

2. For each asset classification, prepare a schedule showing depreciation expense for the year ended December 31, 2007.

3. Prepare a schedule showing the gain or loss from each asset disposal that Pell would recognize in its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2007.

prepare lurch rsquo s income statement and statement of retained earnings for the fi 566332

Comprehensive The Lurch Company’s December 31, 2006 balance sheet follows:

Assets

Cash

$540,000

Inventory

450,000

Prepaid rent

60,000

Machine

$500,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

135,000

365,000

$1,415,000

Liabilities and Equities

Accounts payable

$400,000

Common stock, $10 par

300,000

Additional paid in capital

515,000

Retained earnings

200,000

$1,415,000

During 2007, the following transactions occurred:

1. To avoid paying monthly rent of $5,000 on existing plant facilities, the company decided to buy a tract of land and construct a building of its own on it. On January 2, 2007, Lurch exchanged 6,000 shares of its common stock to acquire the land; the stock was selling for $25 per share. Construction of the building also began on January 2, 2007. At the time, Lurch borrowed funds by issuing a one year, $500,000 note at 12% to help finance the project. The principal and interest on the note are due January 3, 2008. Construction costs (paid in cash) that occurred evenly throughout the year totaled $700,000. The building was completed on December 30, 2007 and the move in to the new building was to occur during the next week.

2. On January 2, 2007 Lurch exchanged its one existing machine plus $50,000 for a newer machine with a fair value of $430,000. The new machine is to be depreciated using straight line depreciation based on an economic life of five years and a residual value of $55,000.

3. Lurch uses a FIFO perpetual inventory system. Lurch sold $350,000 of its inventory for $700,000 cash, paid for its beginning accounts payable, and purchased $480,000 of inventory on account during the year.

4. On July 31, 2007, Lurch declared and paid a $2.50 per share cash dividend to its shareholders.

5. Lurch is subject to a 30% income tax rate, and income taxes are accrued at year end.

Required

Prepare Lurch’s income statement and statement of retained earnings for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2007 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2007. Show all supporting journal entries and computations made during 2007.

what theoretical justifications are there for the use of accelerated depreciation me 566334

Capitalization and Depreciation Gehl Company purchased significant amounts of new equipment this year to be used in its operations. The equipment was delivered by the suppliers, installed by Gehl, and placed into operation. Gehl purchased some for cash with discounts available for prompt payments. It purchased some under long term payment plans, for which the interest charges approximate prevailing rates. As a result, Gehl is studying its capitalization and depreciation policies.

Required

1. What costs should Gehl capitalize for the new equipment purchased this year?

2. What factors cause the equipment to lose its future economic benefit?

3. What factors should be considered in computing the equipment’s depreciation expense?

4. What theoretical justifications are there for the use of accelerated depreciation methods?

how should patrick account for and report the disposal of the automobile 566335

Capitalization and Depreciation At the beginning of the year, Patrick Company acquired a computer to be used in its operations. The computer was delivered by the supplier, installed by Patrick, and placed into operation. The estimated useful life of the computer is five years, and its estimated residual (salvage) value is significant. During the year, Patrick received cash in exchange for an automobile that was purchased in a prior year.

Required

1. a. What costs should Patrick capitalize for the computer?

b. Explain the objective of depreciation accounting. (Do not discuss specific methods of depreciation.)

2. Explain the rationale for using accelerated depreciation methods.

3. How should Patrick account for and report the disposal of the automobile?

how should portland calculate the manufacturing machinery rsquo s annual depreciatio 566336

Straight Line and Composite Depreciation Portland Co. uses the straight line depreciation method for depreciable assets. All assets are depreciated individually, except manufacturing machinery, which is depreciated by the composite method. During the year, Portland exchanged a delivery truck with Maine Co. for a larger delivery truck. It paid cash equal to 10% of the larger truck’s value.

Required

1. Explain the factors that should influence Portland’s selection of the straight line depreciation method.

2. Explain how Portland should account for and report the truck exchange transaction.

3. a. What benefits should Portland derive from using the composite method rather than the individual basis for manufacturing machinery?

b. How should Portland calculate the manufacturing machinery’s annual depreciation expense in its first year of operation?

explain why depreciation is usually shown in the net cash flow from operating activi 566337

Operating and Capital Expenditures Property, plant, and equipment (plant assets) generally represent a material portion of the total assets of most companies. Accounting for the acquisition and usage of such assets is, therefore, an important part of the financial reporting process.

Required

1. Distinguish between operating (revenue) and capital expenditures and explain why this distinction is important.

2. Briefly define depreciation as used in accounting.

3. Identify the factors that are relevant in determining the annual depreciation and explain whether these factors are determined objectively or whether they are based on judgment.

4. Explain why depreciation is usually shown in the net cash flow from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows.

what depreciation methods might be used for the computer system 566338

Depreciation Concepts Depreciation continues to be one of the most controversial, difficult, and important problem areas in accounting.

Required

1. a. Explain the conventional accounting concept of depreciation accounting, and b. Discuss its conceptual merit with respect to (1) the value of the asset, (2) the amount(s) expensed, and (3) the discretion of management in selecting the method.

2. a. Explain the factors that should be considered when applying the conventional concept of depreciation to the determination of how the value of a newly acquired computer system should be assigned to expense for financial reporting purposes. (Ignore income tax considerations for this case.)

b. What depreciation methods might be used for the computer system?

how does a company account for the sale of the land and building include in your ans 566265

Capitalization Issues George Company purchased land for use as its corporate headquarters. A small factory that was on the land when it was purchased was torn down before construction of the office building began. Furthermore, a substantial amount of rock blasting and removal had to be done to the site before construction of the building foundation began. Because the office building was set back on the land, far from the public road, George Company had the contractor construct a paved road that led from the public road to the parking lot of the office building. Three years after it occupied the office building, George Company added four stories to the office building. The four stories had an estimated useful life of five years more than the remaining estimated useful life of the original office building. Ten years later George Company sold the land and building at an amount more than their book value and had a new office building constructed in another state for use as its new corporate headquarters.

Required

1. Which of the preceding expenditures does the company capitalize? How does it depreciate or amortize each? Explain the rationale for your answers.

2. How does a company account for the sale of the land and building? Include in your answer how to determine the book value at the date of sale. Explain the rationale for your answer.

at what amount should a company record a plant asset acquired on a deferred payment 566267

Acquisition Costs A company may acquire plant assets (among other ways) for cash, on a deferred payment plan, by exchanging other assets, or by a combination of these ways.

Required

1. Identify six costs that a company should capitalize as the cost of land. For your answer, assume that a company acquires land with an existing building for cash and that it removes the existing building immediately in order that it can construct a new building on that site.

2. At what amount should a company record a plant asset acquired on a deferred payment plan?

3. In general, at what amount should a company record plant assets received in exchange for other nonmonetary assets? Specifically, at what amount should a company record a new machine acquired by exchanging an older, similar machine and paying cash? What amount should it recognize as a gain or loss?

indicate how the company should account for and report expenditures for each of the 566268

Capital and Revenue Expenditures Bristol Company purchased land as a site for construction of a factory. Outside contractors were engaged to:

1. Construct the factory

2. Grade and pave a parking lot adjacent to the factory for the exclusive use of the factory workers. Operations at the new location began during the year and normal factory maintenance costs were incurred after production began.

Required

1. Distinguish between capital and revenue (operating) expenditures.

2. Indicate how the company should account for and report expenditures for each of the following at the time incurred and in subsequent accounting periods.

a. Purchase of land

b. Construction of factory

c. Grading and paving parking lot

d. Payment of normal factory maintenance costs

Do not discuss capitalization of interest during construction in your response.

how much of the purchase price was assignable to player contracts and options 566269

Lump Sum Acquisition In 1975 a trial was held to settle a tax dispute between the owners of the Atlanta Falcons, a National Football League franchise, and the Internal Revenue Service. In 1966, the owners had paid $8.5 million to purchase the franchise. They considered $50,000 to be the cost of the franchise (which is not depreciable for income tax reporting), $727,000 was deferred interest, and the remaining $7.7 million was claimed to be the cost of the players’ contracts and options. The dispute centered on several variables:

1. How much of the purchase price was assignable to television rights?

2. Is the value assignable to television rights depreciable? If so, what is the expected life?

3. How much of the purchase price was assignable to player contracts and options?

4. Over what life should the value assigned to the players be depreciated?

5. What is the value of the franchise?

Required

1. As an independent accountant, explain the approach you would take and the information you would need to provide advice to the court for the resolution of the points in dispute.

2. Do these valuation issues also create ethical issues?

how might the decision be influenced if the company were interested in earnings mana 566270

Interest Capitalization The Gold Creek Company has borrowed large amounts of money to purchase 5,000 acres of land, which it will develop as a new ski area over the next 10 years. Development is currently under way on the first 2,000 acres, with trails being cut and ski lifts being built. When the company completes this initial development after four years, it will develop the remaining acreage at the rate of approximately 500 acres per year. The company also used some of the money it borrowed to purchase adjacent land, which it will use to expand the ski area if it is successful. Since this is the first year of the company’s existence, it has not developed a policy about interest capitalization. Specifically, it is uncertain about whether it is entitled to capitalize interest on the amounts borrowed to acquire the first 2,000 acres, the total 5,000 acres, the 5,000 acres plus the adjacent land, or the land and the development.

Required

1. Explain the interest capitalization that is appropriate under these circumstances.

2. How might the decision be influenced if the company were interested in earnings management?

write a short memo to the controller that evaluates each of the arguments made by th 566272

Donated Asset and Its Modification The Birkby Company acquires a building as a donation from the City of Avalon. The controller argues that since there was no payment by the company, it is not necessary to record the asset and therefore no depreciation should be recorded. The company has to spend $15,000 altering the building to suit its unique needs. The controller argues that the $15,000 should be expensed because if the building is sold or returned to the city, it cannot recover the $15,000. In addition, expensing the $15,000 results in a closer approximation of the apparent market value of the asset and reduces income taxes immediately.

Required

Write a short memo to the controller that evaluates each of the arguments made by the controller.

discuss the propriety of charging one tenth of the recorded value of the leases agai 566273

Natural Resource Assets You have been engaged to examine the financial statements of Brahe Corporation for the year ending December 31, 2007. Brahe Corporation was organized in January 2007 by Messrs. Moses and Price, original owners of options to acquire oil leases on 5,000 acres of land for $350,000. They expected that first the oil leases would be acquired by the corporation and subsequently 180,000 shares of the corporation’s common stock would be sold to the public at $6 per share. In February 2007 they exchanged their options, $150,000 cash, and $50,000 of other assets for 75,000 shares of common stock of the corporation. The corporation’s board of directors appraised the leases at $600,000, basing its appraisal on the price of other acreage recently leased in the same area. The options were therefore recorded at $250,000 ($600,000 _ $350,000 option price). The options were exercised by the corporation in March 2007 prior to the sale of common stock to the public in April 2007. Leases on approximately 500 acres of land were abandoned as worthless during the year.

Required

1. Explain why the valuation of assets acquired by a corporation in exchange for its own common stock is sometimes difficult.

2. a. Explain the reasoning Brahe Corporation might use to support valuing the leases at $600,000, the amount of the appraisal by the board of directors.

b. Assuming the board’s appraisal was sincere, what steps might Brahe Corporation have taken to strengthen its position to use the $600,000 value and to provide additional information if questions were raised about possible overvaluation of the leases?

3. Discuss the propriety of charging one tenth of the recorded value of the leases against income at December 31, 2007 because leases on 500 acres of land were abandoned during the year.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives how would you reply to the ceo 566274

Ethics and Construction Costs You are the accountant for a division of a company that is constructing a building for its own use. It is January 2008, and you are working on closing the books for 2007. The CEO of the division stops by your office and says, “I have some questions about our building. Although we started construction at the beginning of June this year, we started planning it at the beginning of the previous year. I believe that we can capitalize interest since then. Check to see if we did capitalize some in 2006. If not, we can take it out of this year’s expense and get a double dose. Also, I want you to add lots of overhead to the cost of the building so we can increase our profit for this year. For example, you spent quite a bit of time on the project. So perhaps we could add 1/12 of your salary to the cost of the building. You get the idea?” When the CEO leaves, you check the files and find a letter to an architect dated January 2, 2006. There are numerous subsequent letters to and from the architect.

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, how would you reply to the CEO?

research the related generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short me 566275

Researching GAAP Situation The Tenth National Bank had taken possession of a shopping mall in foreclosure of a mortgage. When the mall was inspected prior to being sold by the bank to a real estate company, it was discovered that it had extensive asbestos problems. An estimate indicated that it would cost $1 million to remove the asbestos. The bank has also purchased an office building for its headquarters. The building was inspected before the purchase and a similar asbestos problem was discovered. An estimate indicated that it would cost $2 million to remove the asbestos, and the bank completed the purchase. The bank’s president has asked you how to account for these transactions.

Directions

1. Research the related generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short memo to the president that answers her question. Cite your references and applicable paragraph numbers.

2. Does this situation create ethical issues?

research the related generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short me 566276

Researching GAAP Situation The Perry Park Company (a privately held company) was searching for a way to expand its operating capacity even though it was short of cash. The president of the company was playing golf and mentioned his concern to his playing partner, who owned some land and a building, and was interested in disposing of them. After some negotiation, the two agreed to swap the land and building for shares in the company. The president of the company has asked you how to account for this transaction, including whether the transaction qualifies as an exception to the general rule to use fair value and the value to place on the transaction and its components.

Directions

1. Research the related generally accepted accounting principles and prepare a short memo to the president. Cite your references and applicable paragraph numbers.

2. Does this situation create ethical issues?

vorst takes a full year rsquo s depreciation expense in the year of an asset rsquo s 566287

A method that excludes residual value from the base for the depreciation calculation is

a. Straight line

b. Sum of the years’ digits

c. Double declining balance

d. Productive output

Vorst Corporation’s schedule of depreciable assets at December 31, 2007 was as follows:

Asset

Cost

Accumulated Depreciation

Acquisition Date

Residual Value

A

$100,000

$64,000

2006

$20,000

B

55,000

36,000

2005

10,000

C

70,000

33,600

2005

14,000

$225,000

$133,600

$44,000

Vorst takes a full year’s depreciation expense in the year of an asset’s acquisition, and no depreciation expense in the year of an asset’s disposition. The estimated useful life of each depreciable asset is five years.

if crowder maintains no inventories of extracted material what should be the depleti 566294

Crowder Company acquired a tract of land containing an extractable natural resource. Crowder is required by the purchase contract to restore the land to a condition suitable for recreational use after it has extracted the natural resource. Geological surveys estimate that the recoverable reserves will be 5,000,000 tons and that the land will have a value of $1,000,000 after restoration. Relevant cost information follows:

Land

$9,000,000

Estimated restoration costs

1,500,000

If Crowder maintains no inventories of extracted material, what should be the depletion expense per ton of extracted material?

a. $2.10

b. $1.90

c. $1.80

d. $1.60

compute the depreciation for the years indicated using the following methods round y 566299

Acquisition Cost and Depreciation Reveille, Inc. purchased Machine #204 on April 1, 2007 and placed the machine into production on April 3, 2007. The following information is relevant to Machine #204:

Price

$60,000

Freight in costs

2,500

Preparation and installation costs

3,900

Labor costs during regular production operation

10,200

Credit terms

2/10, n/30

Total productive output

138,500 units

The company expects that the machine could be used for 10 years, after which the salvage value would be zero. However, Reveille, Inc. intends to use the machine only eight years, after which it expects to be able to sell it for $9,800. The invoice for Machine #204 was paid April 10, 2007. The number of units produced in 2007 and 2008 were 23,200 and 29,000, respectively. Reveille computes depreciation to the nearest whole month.

Required

Compute the depreciation for the years indicated, using the following methods (round your answer to the nearest dollar):

1. 2007: Units of production

2. 2008: Sum of the years’ digits method (Contributed by Norma C. Powell)

compute the depreciation expense for 2009 and 2010 under each method 566300

Depreciation Methods The Nickle Company purchased an asset for $17,000 on January 2, 2007. The asset has an expected residual value of $1,000. The depreciation expense for 2007 and 2008 is shown next for three alternative depreciation methods:

Year

Method A

Method B

Method C

2007

$4,000

$6,400

$6,375

2008

4,000

4,800

3,984

Required

1. Which depreciation method is the company using in each example?

2. Compute the depreciation expense for 2009 and 2010 under each method.

what arguments may be used to support the composite depreciation method 566304

Composite Depreciation The Wilcox Company acquires four machines that have the following characteristics:

Machine

Cost

Estimated Residual Value

Estimated Service Life

A

$26,000

$2,000

6 years

B

19,000

1,000

9

C

30,000

5,000

5

D

28,000

7

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the acquisition and the first year’s depreciation, assuming that the composite method is used on a straight line basis.

2. If the company sells machine B after four years for $10,000, prepare the journal entry.

3. What arguments may be used to support the composite depreciation method?

the company records one half year rsquo s depreciation on all assets purchased durin 566306

Partial Periods On May 10, 2007, the Horan Company purchased equipment for $25,000. The equipment has an estimated service life of five years and zero residual value. Assume that straight line depreciation is used.

Required

Compute the depreciation for 2007 for each of the following four alternatives:

1. The company computes depreciation to the nearest day.

2. The company computes depreciation to the nearest month. Assets purchased in the first half of the month are considered owned for the whole month.

3. The company computes depreciation to the nearest whole year. Assets purchased in the first half of the year are considered owned for the whole year.

4. The company records one half year’s depreciation on all assets purchased during the year.

prepare schedules to determine whether at the end of 2007 the machinery is impaired 566307

Asset Impairment On January 1, 2003, the Vallahara Company purchased machinery for $650,000 which it installed in a rented factory. It is depreciating the machinery over 12 years by the straight line method to a residual value of $50,000. Late in 2007, because of increasing competition in the industry, the company believes that its asset may be impaired and will have a remaining useful life of five years, over which it estimates the asset will produce total cash inflows of $1,000,000 and will incur total cash outflows of $825,000. The cash flows are independent of the company’s other activities and will occur evenly each year. The company is not able to determine the fair value based on a current selling price of the machinery. The company’s discount rate is 10%.

Required

1. Prepare schedules to determine whether, at the end of 2007, the machinery is impaired and, if so, the impairment loss to be recognized.

2. If the machinery is impaired, prepare the journal entry to record the impairment.

compute the company rsquo s return on assets for each method for 2007 and 2008 assum 566312

Depreciation Methods The Winsey Company purchased equipment on January 2, 2007 for $700,000. The equipment has the following characteristics:

Estimated service life

20 years

Estimated residual value

$50,000

100,000 hours

950,000 units of output

During 2007 and 2008, the company used the machine for 4,500 and 5,500 hours, respectively, and produced 40,000 and 60,000 units, respectively.

Required

Compute the depreciation for 2007 and 2008 under each of the following methods:

1. Straight line

2. Hours worked

3. Units of output

4. Sum of the years’ digits

5. Double declining balance

6. 150% declining balance

7. Compute the company’s return on assets for each method for 2007 and 2008, assuming that income before depreciation is $100,000. For simplicity, use ending assets, and ignore interest, income taxes, and other assets.

compute the company rsquo s return on assets for each method in 2007 and 2008 assumi 566314

Depreciation Methods The Sayers Company purchased a building for $250,000 on January 2, 2007. The building has an expected residual value of $20,000 at the end of its expected life of 20 years.

Required

Prepare a schedule showing the depreciation for 2007 and 2008 and the book value on December 31, 2007 and December 31, 2008 for each of the following methods:

1. Straight line

2. Sum of the years’ digits

3. Double declining balance

4. 150% declining balance

5. Compute the company’s return on assets for each method in 2007 and 2008 assuming that income before depreciation is $50,000. For simplicity, use ending assets, and ignore interest, income taxes, and other assets. Why does the rate of return increase each year?

assuming that the company always changes to the straight line method at the beginnin 566316

Changing Depreciation The Kam Company purchased a machine on January 2, 2007 for $20,000. The machine had an expected life of eight years and a residual value of $300. The double declining balance method of depreciation is used.

Required

1. Compute the depreciation for each year of the asset’s life.

2. Assuming that the company has a policy of always changing to the straight line method at the midpoint of the asset’s life, compute the depreciation for each year of the asset’s life.

3. Assuming that the company always changes to the straight line method at the beginning of the year when the annual straight line amount exceeds the double declining balance amount, compute the depreciation for each year of the asset’s life.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives how would you reply to kelly 566210

Ethics and Retail Inventory You are the accountant for the South Western Division of HiValue Grocery Stores. Late in December, Kelly Cholak, the CEO of the Division stops by your office and says “I have a couple of questions. I recently received a report from the head office on the first 11 months of the year. We are not doing as well as we budgeted and they are not happy with the gross profit we have earned. But the good news is that I just got off the phone with a big supplier who has excess inventory and could sell us enough of their products to last us three months. They have offered us a great price—lower than we have paid in a couple of years. Then I remembered that you use that funny LIFO retail inventory method where you play with such confusing numbers. Will the purchase reduce our retail ratio, or whatever you call it, so that our inventory is lower and cost of goods sold higher, because that would only make us look worse? Alternatively, I thought that we could delay this purchase until after January 1 and we might be able to have one of those LIFO liquid profits and make ourselves look good for the year’s results. Give these issues some thought and let’s have a drink after work today to discuss them.”

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, how would you reply to Kelly?

what cost should be assigned to machines a b and c respectively 566223

The Hickory Company made a lump sum purchase of three pieces of machinery for $115,000 from an unaffiliated company. At the time of acquisition Hickory paid $5,000 to determine the appraised value of the machinery. The appraisal disclosed the following values:

Machine A $70,000

Machine C $28,000

Machine B $42,000

What cost should be assigned to machines A, B, and C, respectively?

A

B

C

$40,000

$40,000

$40,000

$57,500

$34,500

$23,000

$60,000

$36,000

$24,000

$70,000

$42,000

$28,000

all of these assets required an extended period of time for completion assuming that 566231

During 2007, Belardo Corporation constructed and manufactured certain assets, and incurred the following interest costs in connection with those activities:

Interest Costs Incurred

Warehouse constructed for

Belardo’s own use

$20,000

Special order machine for sale

to unrelated customer,

produced according to

customer’s specifications

9,000

Inventories routinely manufactured,

produced on a repetitive basis

7,000

All of these assets required an extended period of time for completion. Assuming that the effect of interest capitalization is material, what is the total amount of interest costs to be capitalized?

a. $0

b. $20,000

c. $29,000

d. $36,000

determination of cost which of the following 22 items does a company include in the 566233

Determination of Cost Which of the following 22 items does a company include in the cost of property, plant, and equipment?

1. Contract price

2. List price

3. Freight costs

4. Discounts taken

5. Discounts not taken

6. Installation costs

7. Testing costs

8. Cost of overhaul before initial use

9. Costs of grading land prior to construction

10. Tax assessment for street improvements

11. Delinquent property taxes on acquired property

12. Cost of tearing down an old building (already owned) in preparation for new construction

13. Cost of insurance during construction

14. Excess of costs over revenues during the development stage of the company

15. Interest costs during construction

16. Landscaping costs

17. Severance pay for employees dismissed because of the acquisition of a new machine

18. Cost of tearing down a building on newly acquired land

19. Replacement of an electric motor in a machine

20. Expansion of the heating/cooling system to accommodate an expansion of a building and certain expected future needs

21. Service contract for two years on the acquired asset

22. Cost of training new employees

prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition of the machine 566234

Inclusion in Property, Plant, and Equipment Which of the following does a company include in property, plant, and equipment on the balance sheet?

1. Idle equipment awaiting sale

2. Land held for future use as a plant site

3. Land held for investment

4. Deposits on machinery not yet received

5. Progress payments on building being constructed by a contractor

6. Fully depreciated assets still being used

7. Leasehold improvements

8. Assets leased to others

Acquisition Costs The Voiture Company manufactures compact, energy efficient cars. On April 1, it purchased a machine for its assembly line at a contract price of $200,000 with terms of 2/10, n/30. The company paid the contract price on April 8 and also incurred installation and transportation costs of $5,000, sales tax of $10,000, and testing costs of $2,000. During testing the machine was accidentally damaged, so the company had to pay $1,000 to repair it.

Required

Prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition of the machine.

how would your answer change if at all if the 215 000 cash price were not available 566235

Determination of Acquisition Cost In January 2007 Cordova Company entered into a contract to acquire a new machine for its factory. The machine, which has a cash price of $215,000, was paid for as follows:

Down payment

$55,000

Note payable in four equal annual payments starting in January 2008

120,000

600 shares of Cordova preferred stock with a mutually agreed value of $100 per share (par value $100)

60,000

Fair rate of interest on the non interest bearing note

10%

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition of the machine.

2. How would your answer change, if at all, if the $215,000 cash price were not available?

at what amount should edwards record the cost of the land and the new building respe 566237

Acquisition of Land and Building On February 1, 2007 Edwards Corporation purchased a parcel of land as a factory site for $50,000. It demolished an old building on the property, and began construction on a new building that was completed on October 2, 2007. Costs incurred during this period are:

Demolition of old building

$4,000

Architect’s fees

20,000

Legal fees for title investigation and purchase contract

2,000

Construction costs

500,000

The company sold salvaged materials resulting from the demolition for $3,000.

Required

At what amount should Edwards record the cost of the land and the new building, respectively?

prepare adjusting entries on december 31 2007 to properly reclassify the preceding i 566251

Acquisition Costs The Mawn Company bought land and built a warehouse during 2007. It debited the following related costs to an account titled Land and Buildings:

Land purchase

$22,000

Demolition of old building

3,000

Legal fees for land acquisition

1,500

Interest on loan for construction (based on average costs incurred)

2,900

Building construction

53,000

Assessment by city for sewer connection

1,200

Landscaping

3,500

Equipment purchased for excavation

18,800

Fixed overhead charged to building

15,000

Insurance on building during construction

1,000

Profit on construction

12,000

Compensation for injury to construction worker

3,000

Modifications to building ordered by building inspectors

7,500

Property taxes on land paid in 2007

2,500

The following credits were made to the account:

Salvage from demolished old building

$700

Sale of excavation equipment

14,000

In addition, you discover that compensation for the worker’s injury was necessary because it was not covered by the particular insurance policy purchased by the company. Accident insurance that would have covered the injury would have cost an additional $350. The modifications ordered by the building inspectors resulted from poor planning by the company.

Required

Prepare adjusting entries on December 31, 2007 to properly reclassify the preceding items.

prepare adjusting entries at december 31 2008 to correct the books assuming they hav 566252

Costs Subsequent to Acquisition As the first auditor of the Newberg Company you discover that the following entries have been made in the property, plant, and equipment account:

Property, Plant, and Equipment

2006

Plant purchased

60,000

2006

Legal fees

700

Depreciation

6,310

Insurance

2,400

2007

Repairs

2,000

2007

Addition to building

10,000

Depreciation

6,879

2008

Repairs

3,000

2008

Insurance

2,800

Machine sold

500

Machine purchased

7,000

Depreciation

7,421

You discover the following additional information:

1. The purchase of the plant included a building and machinery. When the plant was purchased, an appraisal showed that the building was valued at $39,000 and the machinery at $26,000.

2. Depreciation has been recorded each year at 10% of the balance in the account. The 10% was chosen because the property is being depreciated over 10 years for tax purposes. Subsequent investigation indicates that the expected lives at the time of acquisition were: building, 20 years; machinery, 8 years.

3. Each insurance payment was made on January 1 and was for a two year policy.

4. The machine that was sold in 2008 had an original cost of $800.

5. All purchases and sales of property, plant, and equipment items occurred at the beginning of the year indicated.

Required

Prepare adjusting entries at December 31, 2008 to correct the books assuming they have not been closed for the year.

prepare journal entries to record all the preceding events unless otherwise indicate 566253

Classification of Costs Associated with Assets The following account balances were included in the balance sheet of the Bromley Company on December 31, 2006:

Land

$100,000

Land improvements

20,000

Buildings

300,000

Machinery and equipment

500,000

During 2007 the following transactions occurred:

1. Land was acquired for $70,000 for a future building site. Commissions of $4,000 were paid to a real estate agent.

2. A factory and land were acquired from the Kent Development Company by issuing 20,000 shares of $3 par common stock. At that time the stock was selling for $10 per share on the New York Stock Exchange. The independently appraised values of the land and the factory were $60,000 and $180,000, respectively.

3. Machinery and equipment was acquired at a cost of $120,000. In addition, sales tax, freight costs, and installation costs were $7,000, $10,000, and $16,000, respectively. During installation, the machinery was damaged and $2,000 was spent in repairs.

4. A new parking lot was installed at a cost of $30,000.

5. A machine that had cost $20,000 on January 1, 2003 and had a book value on December 31, 2007 of $4,000 was sold on that date for $6,000.

6. Half the land purchased in item 1 was prepared as a building site. Costs of $26,000 were incurred to clear the land, and the timber recovered was sold for $3,000. A new building was built for $60,000 plus architect’s fees and imputed interest on equity funds used during construction of $18,000 and $15,000, respectively. No debt is outstanding.

7. Costs of $20,000 were incurred to improve some leased office space. The lease will terminate in 2009 and is not expected to be renewed.

8. A group of new machines was purchased under a royalty agreement that provides for payment of annual royalties based on units produced. The invoice price of the machines was $30,000, freight costs were $2,000, and royalty payments for 2007 were $12,000.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record all the preceding events. Unless otherwise indicated, assume the company makes all payments in cash.

identify the costs you included in requirement 1 for which there are acceptable alte 566254

Self Construction The Olson Machine Company manufactures small and large milling machines. Selling prices of these machines range from $35,000 to $200,000. During the five month period from August 1, 2007 through December 31, 2007, the company manufactured a milling machine for its own use. This machine was built as part of the regular production activities. The project required a large amount of time from planning and supervisory personnel, as well as that of some of the company’s officers, because it was a more sophisticated type of machine than the regular production models. Throughout the five month period, the company charged all costs directly associated with the construction of the machine to a special account entitled “Asset Construction Account.” An analysis of the charges to this account as of December 31, 2007 follows:

ASSET CONSTRUCTION ACCOUNT

Item Description

Cost

Raw Materials

Iron castings:

Main housing, 3 sections

$37,480

Movable heads, 2 heads @ $3,900

7,800

Machine bed

4,760

Table, 2 sections @ $5,500

11,000

$61,040

Other raw materials:

Electrical components and wiring

$28,000

Worm screws and housing

8,600

Cutter housings

2,700

Conveyor system

8,400

Other parts

2,500

50,200

Direct Labor Costs

Layout 90 hr. @ $5.00

$450

Electricians 380 hr. @ 9.00

3,420

Machining 1,100 hr. @ 8.00

8,800

Heat treatment 100 hr. @ 7.50

750

Assembly 450 hr. @ 7.00

3,150

Testing 180 hr. @ 8.00

1,440

18,010

Other Direct Charges

Repairs and maintenance during testing period

$1,340

Interest expense from 8/1/07 to 12/31/07 on funds borrowed for

construction purposes

4,260

Additional labor to assist during machine testing period, 180 hr. @ $5.00

900

6,500

Balance, December 31, 2007

$135,750

The company allocates factory overhead to normal production as a percent of direct labor dollars as follows:

Departments

Variable

Factory Overhead Rates (applied as a percent of direct labor dollars) Fixed

Total

Layout and electricians

50%

20%

70%

Machining,* heat treatment, and assembly

50%

50%

100%

The company uses a flat rate of 40% of direct labor dollars to allocate general and administrative overhead. During the machine testing period, a cutter head malfunctioned and did extensive damage to the machine table and one cutter housing. This damage was not anticipated and was the result of an error in the assembly operation. Although no additional raw materials were needed to make the machine operational after the accident, the following labor for rework was required:

Direct Labor Hours

Electric

80

Machining

200

Assembly

100

Testing (conducted by machining department)

20

The company has included all these labor charges in the Asset Construction account. In addition, it included in the account the repairs and maintenance charges of $1,340 that it incurred as a result of the malfunction.

Required

1. Compute, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, the amount that Olson Machine Company should capitalize for the milling machine as of December 31, 2007 when it declares the machine operational.

2. Identify the costs you included in Requirement 1 for which there are acceptable alternative procedures. Describe the alternative procedure(s) in each case.

prepare journal entries to record the preceding events 566255

Acquisition Cost The following transactions of the Weber Company occurred during 2007:

1. The company acquired a tract of land in exchange for 1,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. The stock was traded on the New York Stock Exchange at $24 on the date of exchange. The land had a book value on the selling company’s records of $5,000, and it was believed to be worth “anything up to $30,000.”

2. An engine on a truck was replaced. The truck originally cost $10,000 three years ago and was being depreciated at $2,000 per year. The engine cost $1,000 to replace.

3. The company acquired a tract of land that was believed to have mineral deposits by issuing 500 shares of preferred stock of $50 par value. The preferred stock was rarely traded. The last transaction was two months earlier, when 50 shares were sold at $75 per share. The owner of the land was willing to accept cash of $55,000, and an appraisal had shown a value of $60,000.

4. The company purchased a machine with a list price of $8,500 by issuing a two year $10,000 non interest bearing note when the market rate of interest was 10%.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the preceding events.

list the items in the fact situation which were not used to determine the answer to 566256

Comprehensive At December 31, 2006 certain accounts included in the property, plant, and equipment section of the Townsand Company’s balance sheet had the following balances:

Land

$100,000

Leasehold improvements

$500,000

Buildings

800,000

Machinery and equipment

700,000

During 2007, the following transactions occurred:

1. Land site number 621 was acquired for $1,000,000. Additionally, to acquire the land Townsand paid a $60,000 commission to a real estate agent. Costs of $15,000 were incurred to clear the land. During the course of clearing the land, timber and gravel were recovered and sold for $5,000.

2. A second tract of land (site number 622) with a building was acquired for $300,000. The closing statement indicated that the land value was $200,000 and the building value was $100,000. Shortly after acquisition, the building was demolished at a cost of $30,000. A new building was constructed for $150,000 plus the following costs:

Excavation fees

$11,000

Architectural design fees

8,000

Building permit fee

1,000

The building was completed and occupied on September 29, 2007.

3. A third tract of land (site number 623) was acquired for $600,000 and was put on the market for resale.

4. Extensive work was done to a building occupied by Townsand under a lease agreement that expires on December 31, 2016. The total cost of the work was $125,000, which consisted of the following:

Painting of ceilings

$10,000

(estimated useful life is one year)

Electrical work

35,000

(estimated useful life is ten years)

Construction of extension to current working area

80,000

(estimated useful life is thirty years)

$125,000

The lessor paid one half of the costs incurred in connection with the extension to the current working area.

5. During December 2007 costs of $65,000 were incurred to improve leased office space. The related lease will terminate on December 31, 2009, and is not expected to be renewed.

6. A group of new machines was purchased under a royalty agreement which provides for payment of royalties based on units of production for the machines. The invoice price of the machines was $75,000, freight costs were $2,000, unloading charges were $1,500, and royalty payments for 2007 were $13,000.

Required

1. Prepare a detailed analysis of the changes in each of the following balance sheet accounts for 2007:

Land

Leasehold improvements

Buildings

Machinery and equipment

Disregard the related accumulated depreciation accounts.

2. List the items in the fact situation which were not used to determine the answer to Requirement 1, and indicate where, or if, these items should be included in Townsand’s financial statements.

prepare the journal entry of the bremer company for each exchange 566257

Assets Acquired by Exchange The Bremer Company made the following exchanges of assets during 2007:

1. Acquired a more advanced machine worth $10,000 by paying $2,000 cash and giving a machine that had originally cost $40,000 and has a book value of $12,000.

2. Acquired a building worth $55,000 by paying $5,000 cash and giving a piece of land that had originally cost $35,000.

3. Acquired a more advanced machine worth $20,000 by paying $5,000 cash and giving a machine that had originally cost $13,000 and has a book value of $11,000.

4. Acquired a car by giving a truck that had originally cost $20,000, has a book value of $15,000, and has a “blue book” value of $16,800. In addition the company received $1,000 cash.

Required

Prepare the journal entry of the Bremer Company for each exchange.

prepare the journal entry to record each acquisition of the bussell company 566258

Assets Acquired by Exchange The Bussell Company exchanged the following assets during 2007:

1. Acquired a newer machine by paying $4,000 cash and giving a machine that originally cost $40,000, has a book value of $25,000, and is worth $30,000.

2. Same facts as in item 1, except that the asset being surrendered has a book value of $33,000.

3. Acquired a newer machine by giving a machine that originally cost $45,000, has a book value of $20,000, and is worth $32,000. In addition $5,000 cash was received.

4. Same facts as in item 3, except that the asset being surrendered has a book value of $36,000.

5. Acquired a newer machine worth $90,000 by giving up a machine of equal value. The machine surrendered had originally cost $150,000 and has a book value of $80,000.

6. Same facts as in item 5, except that the asset being surrendered has a book value of $94,000.

7. Acquired a building in exchange for land that had originally cost $130,000 and is now worth $200,000.

8. Same facts as in item 7, except that $30,000 was paid.

9. Same facts as in item 7, except that $20,000 was received.

Required

Prepare the journal entry to record each acquisition of the Bussell Company.

explain the effects of the interest capitalization on the financial statements for a 566259

Interest During Construction The Alta Company is constructing a production complex which qualifies for interest capitalization. The following information is available:

Capitalization period: January 1, 2007 to June 30, 2009

Expenditures on project (incurred evenly during each period and excluding capitalized interest from previous years):

2007

$2,000,000

2008

$3,760,000

2009

$4,324,000

Amounts borrowed and outstanding:

$3 million borrowed at 12%, specifically for the project

$6 million borrowed on July 1, 2003, at 14%

$14 million borrowed on January 1, 1999, at 8%

Required

1. Compute the amount of interest costs capitalized each year.

2. If it is assumed that the production complex has an estimated life of 20 years and a residual value of zero, compute the straight line depreciation in 2010.

3. Explain the effects of the interest capitalization on the financial statements for all three years. Ignore income taxes.

how would your answer to requirement 1 change if the three month suspension in the c 566260

Comprehensive The Foothills Power Company begins a two year construction project on a power plant on January

1, 2007. The following information is available:

1. The company borrows $10 million on January 1, 2007 at 12%, specifically for use on the project.

2. The company’s other borrowings are:

$20 million at 10%

$60 million at 8%

3. The expenditures for the project, incurred evenly each year (excluding capitalized interest from previous years), are as follows:

$6,000,000 in 2007

$11,460,000 in 2008

$1,800,000 in 2009

4. The project is completed on March 31, 2009. It took longer than originally planned because the company suspended construction for the last three months of 2007 because of a concern about the salability of the electricity produced by the plant.

5. Because of reduced demand for electricity, the plant does not begin operations until October 1, 2009.

6. The company invests at 11% the unused amounts of the $10 million borrowed in item 1.

7. Assume all transactions are in cash unless otherwise indicated.

Required

1. Prepare all the necessary journal entries for each of the three years. Record all construction costs in a Construction in Progress inventory account.

2. How would your answer to Requirement 1 change if the three month suspension in the construction activity was due to an environmental dispute with the federal government?

prepare journal entries for the preceding transactions 566261

Events Subsequent to Acquisition The following selected events occurred during 2007:

Jan. 10 A motor breaks on a machine and is replaced for $800. This replacement was expected when the machine was purchased.

Jan. 24 A machine that was purchased for $10,000 and has a book value of $1,000 is sold for $600.

Feb. 3 A fully depreciated building that originally cost $25,000 is demolished so that a new building may be constructed.

The demolition cost $2,200 and resulted in $700 of salvageable materials.

Feb. 14 A machine breaks down unexpectedly and requires repairs of $700.

Mar. 10 An accident damages some equipment. Repairs cost $2,000.

Mar. 19 A motor breaks on a machine and is replaced for $900. The new motor is of an improved design that increases the capacity of the machine.

Mar. 27 Office layout is rearranged at a cost of $700. At the same time, the walls are repainted for $500.

Required

Prepare journal entries for the preceding transactions.

prepare the adjusting journal entries that you would suggest for entry on the books 566262

Adjusting Entries In your examination of the financial statements of Ericson Corporation at December 31, 2007 you observe the contents of certain accounts and other pertinent information as follows:

Building

Date

Explanation

Post REF

Debit

Credit

Balance

12/31/2006

Balance

X

$100,000

$100,000

7/1/2007

New boiler

CD

16,480

$1,480

115,000

9/1/2008

Insurance recovery

CR

2,000

113,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Building

Date

Explanation

LF

Debit

Credit

Balance

12/31/2006

Balance: 15 years @ 4% of $100,000 (no salvage value)

X

$60,000

$60,000

12/31/2007

Annual depreciation

GJ

4,440

64,440

You learn that on June 15 the company’s old high pressure boiler exploded and was partially damaged. Damage to the building was insignificant, but the boiler was replaced by a more efficient oil burning boiler. The company received $2,000 as an insurance adjustment under terms of its policy for damage to the boiler. The disbursement voucher charged to the Building account on July 1, 2007 is reproduced here:

To: Leetsdale Heating Company

Fair value—new oil burning boiler (including fuel oil tank and 1,000 gallons fuel oil)

$16,000

Sales tax—3% of $16,000

480

Total

$16,480

Less: Allowance (fair value) for old coal burning boiler in building—to be removed at the expense of the Leetsdale Heating Company

1,480

Total price

$15,000

In vouching the expenditure, you determine that the terms included a 2% cash discount that was properly computed and taken. Neither the sales tax nor the trade in allowance on the old boiler is subject to discount. Your audit discloses that a voucher for $1,000 was paid to Monaco Company on July 3, 2007 and charged to the Repair Expense account. The voucher is adequately supported and is marked “installation costs for new oil burning boiler.”

The company’s fuel oil supplier advises that fuel oil had a market price of 80 cents per gallon on July 1 and 85 cents per gallon on December 31. The fuel oil inventory at December 31 was 100 gallons. A review of subsidiary property records discloses that the replaced coal burning boiler was installed when the building was constructed and was recorded at a cost of $10,000. According to its manufacturers, the new boiler should be serviceable for the estimated useful life of the building. In computing depreciation for retirements, Ericson Corporation consistently treats a fraction of a month as a full month.

Required

Prepare the adjusting journal entries that you would suggest for entry on the books of the Ericson Corporation. The books have not been closed. Support your entries with computations in good form. Assume that the building has no salvage value.

explain how a company accounts for the gain or loss on the sale of property plant an 566264

Acquisition and Retirement Among the principal topics related to the accounting for property, plant, and equipment of a company are acquisition and retirement.

Required

1. Explain the expenditures that a company capitalizes when it acquires equipment for cash.

2. Assume that a company cannot determine the market value of equipment acquired by reference to a similar purchase for cash. Explain how the company determines the capitalizable cost of equipment purchased by exchanging it for each of the following three items:

a. Bonds having an established market price.

b. Common stock not having an established market price.

c. Similar equipment having a determinable market value.

3. Explain the factors that a company uses to determine whether it capitalizes expenditures relating to property, plant, and equipment already in use.

4. Explain how a company accounts for the gain or loss on the sale of property, plant, and equipment for cash.

if a company discloses that it uses a periodic inventory system what concerns might 566191

Estimation of Fire Loss On January 20, 2008 the records of the Stewart Company revealed the following information:

Inventory, July 1, 2007

$53,600

Purchases discounts taken

$5,800

Purchases, July 1, 2007–January 20, 2008

368,000

Freight in

3,800

Sales, July 1, 2007–January 20, 2008

583,000

Sales returns

6,600

Purchases returns

11,200

A fire destroyed the entire inventory on January 20, 2008 except for purchases in transit, FOB shipping point, of $6,000 and goods having a selling price of $4,700 that were salvaged from the fire. The salvaged goods had an estimated salvage value of $2,900. The average gross profit on net sales in previous periods was 40%.

Required

1. Compute the cost of the inventory lost in the fire.

2. If a company discloses that it uses a periodic inventory system, what concerns might you have about its interim financial statements?

compute the value of the inventory destroyed by the flood 566192

Estimation of Loss On February 17, 2007 a flood destroyed the work in process inventory and half the raw materials inventory of the LRT Company. There was no damage to the finished goods inventory. A physical inventory taken after the flood indicated the following values:

Raw materials

$35,000

Finished goods

$79,000

Inventories, December 31, 2006

Raw materials

$70,000

Raw materials purchases

$20,000

Work in process

80,000

Direct labor cost

30,000

Finished goods

72,000

Manufacturing overhead cost

15,000

Sales (to February 17)

50,000

Gross profit rate (on sales)

40%

Required

Compute the value of the inventory destroyed by the flood.

compute the value of the work in process inventory lost at june 30 2007 show support 566193

Estimation of Flood Loss On June 30, 2007 a flash flood damaged the warehouse and factory of Padway Corporation, completely destroying the work in process inventory. There was no damage to either the raw materials or finished goods inventories. A physical inventory taken after the flood revealed the following valuations:

Raw materials

$62,000

Work in process

0

Finished goods

119,000

The inventory on January 1, 2007 consisted of the following:

Raw materials

$30,000

Work in process

100,000

Finished goods

140,000

$270,000

A review of the books and records disclosed that the gross profit margin historically approximated 25% of sales. The sales for the first six months of 2007 were $340,000. Raw material purchases were $115,000. Direct labor costs for this period were $80,000, and manufacturing overhead was historically applied at 50% of direct labor.

Required

Compute the value of the work in process inventory lost at June 30, 2007. Show supporting computations in good form.

compute the cost of the ending inventory under each of the following cost flow assum 566194

Retail Inventory Method The Turner Corporation uses the retail inventory method. The following information relates to 2007:

Cost

Retail

Cost

Retail

Inventory, January 1

$29,000

$ 45,000 Additional markups

$50,000

Purchases (gross price)

140,000

190,000 Markup cancellations

10,000

Purchases discounts taken

3,000

— Markdowns

15,000

Purchases returns

5,000

8,000 Markdown cancellations

3,000

Freight in

20,000

— Sales

190,000

Employee discounts

3,000

Required

Compute the cost of the ending inventory under each of the following cost flow assumptions:

1. FIFO

2. Average cost

3. LIFO

4. Lower of cost or market (based on average cost)

compute the cost of the ending inventory under each of the following cost flow assum 566195

Comprehensive The EKC Company uses the retail inventory method. The following information for 2007 is available:

Cost

Retail

Cost

Retail

Inventory, January 1

$100,000

$180,000

Markdowns

$15,000

Purchases (gross price)

320,000

600,000

Markdown cancellations

4,000

Purchases discounts taken

6,000

Sales

610,000

Freight in

16,000

Sales returns

30,000

Additional markups

60,000

Sales discounts

10,000

Markup cancellations

12,000

Required

Compute the cost of the ending inventory under each of the following cost flow assumptions:

1. FIFO

2. Average cost

3. LIFO

4. Lower of cost or market (based on average cost)

prepare a schedule to calculate the estimated ending inventory at the lower of avera 566196

Retail Inventory Method The Red Department Store uses the retail inventory method. Information relating to the computation of the inventory at December 31, 2007 is as follows:

Cost

Retail

Cost

Retail

Inventory at January 1, 2007

$32,000

$80,000

Markups

$60,000

Sales

600,000

Markup cancellations

10,000

Purchases

270,000

590,000

Markdowns

25,000

Freight in

7,600

Markdown cancellations

5,000

Estimated normal shrinkage is

2% of sales.

Required

Prepare a schedule to calculate the estimated ending inventory at the lower of average cost or market at December 31, 2007, using the retail inventory method. Show supporting computations in good form.

compute the inventory on june 30 using the ldquo normal rdquo retail inventory metho 566197

Retail Inventory Method The Weber Corporation uses the retail inventory method to estimate its inventory balances. The following information is available on June 30:

Cost

Retail

Cost

Retail

Inventory, January 1

$25,000

$60,000

Markdowns

$7,000

Purchases

75,000

180,000

Additional markups

3,000

Sales

210,000

Markdown cancellations

2,000

Purchases returns

2,000

5,000

Markup cancellations

1,000

Sales returns

5,000

Required

1. Compute the inventory on June 30 using the “normal” retail inventory method (lower of average cost or market).

2. Independent of Requirement 1, assume that the June 30 inventory was $80,000 at retail and that the cost to retail ratio is 50%. If the price level of the inventory has risen by 5% during the period, compute the cost of the June 30 inventory under the dollar value retail LIFO method, assuming that the company adopted the method at the beginning of the year.

compute the cost of the ending inventory for 2007 2008 and 2009 566198

Dollar Value LIFO Retail The following information is obtained from the records of the Burger Company, which uses the dollar value LIFO retail method:

2007

2008

2009

Cost

Retail

Retail

Retail

Cost

Retail

Purchases

$200,000

$420,000

$420,000

$550,000

$240,000

$500,000

Net markups

20,000

20,000

30,000

10,000

Net markdowns

10,000

10,000

40,000

20,000

Sales

400,000

400,000

600,000

450,000

The company adopted LIFO on January 1, 2007, when the cost and retail values of the inventory were $50,000 and $100,000, respectively. The following price indexes were experienced by the Burger Company:

1 Jan 07

100

31 Dec 08

115

31 Dec 07

108

31 Dec 09

120

Required

Compute the cost of the ending inventory for 2007, 2008, and 2009.

compute the inventory at the end of each of the 4 years 566199

Dollar Value LIFO Retail Intella, Inc. adopted the dollar value retail LIFO method on January 1, 2006. The following data apply to the 4 subsequent years:

Cost

Retail

Cost

Retail

2006

Inventory, January 1

$40,000

$80,000

2008

Purchases

$117,600

$280,000

Purchases

85,500

190,000

Sales

260,000

Sales

200,000

2009

Purchases

147,200

320,000

2007

Purchases

92,000

230,000

Sales

300,000

Sales

210,000

In addition the following price indexes are available:

January 1, 2006 100

December 31, 2008 120

December 31, 2006 105

December 31, 2009 125

December 31, 2007 110

Required

Compute the inventory at the end of each of the 4 years.

compute the cost of the inventory destroyed in the fire 566200

Dollar Value LIFO Retail and Fire Loss The Golden Company adopted the dollar value retail LIFO method on January 1, 2007. The following information relates to the following 2 years:

2007

2008 (through September 7)

Cost

Retail

Cost

Retail

Inventory, January 1

$40,000

$90,000

Purchases

$160,000

$350,000

Purchases

100,000

210,000

Sales

280,000

Sales

200,000

Net markups

40,000

Net markups

20,000

Net markdowns

70,000

Net markdowns

40,000

In addition the following price indexes are available:

Jan 07

100

Dec 07

106

Sep 08

110

On September 8, 2008 a fire destroyed the inventory except for goods in transit (properly recorded), FOB shipping point, at a cost of $8,000, and undamaged goods salvaged from the fire, which had a retail value of $10,000.

Required

Compute the cost of the inventory destroyed in the fire.

as controller of the lerner company which uses a periodic inventory system you disco 566201

Errors As controller of the Lerner Company, which uses a periodic inventory system, you discover the following errors in the current year:

1. Merchandise with a cost of $17,500 was properly included in the final inventory, but the purchase was not recorded until the following year.

2. Merchandise purchases are in transit under terms of FOB shipping point. They have been excluded from the inventory, but the purchase was recorded in the current year on the receipt of the invoice of $4,300.

3. Goods out on consignment have been excluded from inventory.

4. Merchandise purchases under terms FOB shipping point have been omitted from the Purchases account and the ending inventory. The purchases were recorded in the following year.

5. Goods held on consignment from Talbert Supply Co. were included in the inventory.

Required

For each error indicate the effect on the ending inventory and the net income for the current year and on the net income for the following year.

prepare a schedule of adjustments as of december 31 2007 to the initial amounts in i 566202

Comprehensive Layne Corporation, a manufacturer of small tools, provided the following information from its accounting records for the year ended December 31, 2007: Inventory at December 31, 2007 (based on physical

Inventory at December 31, 2007 (based on physical count of goods in Layne’s plant at cost on December 31, 2007)

$1,750,000

Accounts payable at December 31, 2007

1,200,000

Net sales (sales less sales returns)

8,500,000

Additional information is as follows:

1. Included in the physical count were tools billed to a customer FOB shipping point on December 31, 2007. These tools had a cost of $28,000 and had been billed at $35,000. The shipment was on Layne’s loading dock waiting to be picked up by the common carrier.

2. Goods were in transit from a vendor to Layne on December 31, 2007. The invoice cost was $50,000, and the goods were shipped FOB shipping point on December 29, 2007.

3. Work in process inventory costing $20,000 was sent to an outside processor for plating on December 30, 2007.

4. Tools returned by customers and held pending inspection in the returned goods area on December 31, 2007 were not included in the physical count. On January 8, 2008 the tools costing $26,000 were inspected and returned to inventory. Credit memos totaling $40,000 were issued to the customers on the same date.

5. Tools shipped to a customer FOB destination on December 24, 2007 were in transit at December 31, 2007 and had a cost of $25,000. Upon notification of receipt by the customer on January 2, 2008, Layne issued a sales invoice for $42,000.

6. Goods, with an invoice cost of $30,000, received from a vendor at 5:00 p.m. on December 31, 2007, were recorded on a receiving report dated January 2, 2008. The goods were not included in the physical count, but the invoice was included in accounts payable at December 31, 2007.

7. Goods received from a vendor on December 24, 2007 were included in the physical count. However, the related $60,000 vendor invoice was not included in accounts payable at December 31, 2007 because the accounts payable copy of the receiving report was lost.

8. On January 4, 2008, a monthly freight bill in the amount of $4,000 was received. The bill specifically related to merchandise purchased in December 2007, one half of which was still in the inventory at December 31, 2007. The freight charges were not included in either the inventory or in accounts payable at December 31, 2007.

Required

Prepare a schedule of adjustments as of December 31, 2007 to the initial amounts in inventory, accounts payable, and sales. Show separately the effect, if any, of each of the eight transactions on the December 31, 2007 amounts. Indicate if the transactions would have no effect on the initial amount shown.

prepare a report to the president explaining the retail method of pricing inventorie 566203

Retail Inventory Method The Sandberg Paint Company, your client, manufactures paint. The company’s president, Ms. Sandberg, has decided to open a retail store to sell Sandberg paint as well as wallpaper and other supplies that it would purchase from other suppliers. She has asked you for information about the retail method of pricing inventories at the retail store.

Required

Prepare a report to the president explaining the retail method of pricing inventories. Your report should include these four points:

1. Description and accounting features of the method.

2. The conditions that may distort the results under the method.

3. A comparison of the advantages of using the retail method with those of using cost methods of inventory pricing.

4. The accounting theory underlying the treatment of net markdowns and net markups under the method.

considering only the 2008 model lawnmower explain the impact of the fifo cost flow a 566204

Lower of Cost or Market Method Blaedon Co. makes ongoing design refinements to lawnmowers that are produced for it by contractors. Blaedon stores the lawnmowers in its own warehouse and sells them at list price, directly to retailers. Blaedon uses the FIFO inventory method. Approximately two thirds of new lawnmower sales involve trade ins. For each used lawnmower traded in and returned to Blaedon, retailers receive a $40 allowance regardless of whether the trade in was associated with a sale of a 2007 or 2008 model. Blaedon’s net realizable value on a used lawnmower averages $25. At December 31, 2007, Blaedon’s inventory of new lawnmowers includes both 2007 and 2008 models. When the 2008 model was introduced in September 2007, the list price of the remaining 2007 model lawnmowers was reduced below cost. Blaedon is experiencing rising costs.

Required

1. At December 31, 2007, how should Blaedon determine the carrying amounts assigned to its lawnmower inventory of

a. 2008 models?

b. 2007 models?

2. Considering only the 2008 model lawnmower, explain the impact of the FIFO cost flow assumptions on Blaedon’s 2007

a. Income statement amounts.

b. Balance sheet amounts.

explain what products on consignment are and how they are presented on the balance s 566205

Retail Inventory Method Retail, Inc., sells normal brand name house hold products both from its own store and on consignment through The Mall Space Company.

Required

1. Explain whether Retail, Inc., should include in its inventory normal brand name goods purchased from its suppliers but not yet received if the terms of purchase are FOB shipping point (manufacturer’s plant).

2. Explain whether Retail, Inc., should include freight in expenditures as an inventoriable cost.

3. Retail, Inc., purchased cooking utensils for sale in the ordinary course of business three times during the current year, each time at a higher price than the previous purchase. Explain the effect on ending inventory and cost of goods sold if Retail, Inc., used the weighted average cost method instead of the FIFO method.

4. Explain how and why Retail, Inc., will treat net markdowns when it calculates the estimated cost of ending inventory using the conventional (lower of cost or market) retail inventory method.

5. Explain what products on consignment are and how they are presented on the balance sheets of Retail, Inc., and The Mall Space Company.

what criteria are used to determine which of diane rsquo s costs are inventoriable 566206

Various Inventory Issues Diane Company, a retailer and wholesaler of national brand name household lighting fixtures, purchases its inventories from various suppliers.

Required

1. a. What criteria are used to determine which of Diane’s costs are inventoriable?

b. Are Diane’s administrative costs inventoriable? Defend your answer.

2. a. Diane uses the lower of cost or market rule for its whole sale inventories. Explain the theoretical arguments for that rule.

b. The replacement cost of the inventories is below the net realizable value less a normal profit margin, which, in turn, is below the original cost. Explain the amount that is used to value the inventories.

3. Diane calculates the estimated cost of its ending inventories held for sale at retail using the conventional (lower of average cost or market) retail inventory method. Explain how Diane would treat the beginning inventories and net markdowns in calculating the cost ratio used to determine its ending inventories.

when reed applies the lower of cost or market method what are the ceiling and floor 566207

LCM,Dollar Value LIFO,and Consignments Caddell Company, a wholesaler, purchases its inventories from various suppliers FOB destination; it incurs substantial warehousing costs. Caddell uses the dollar value LIFO inventory cost flow method. Caddell also consigns some of its inventories to Reed Company. Reed also has items for sale that it purchases from other wholesalers. Reed uses the lower of FIFO cost or market inventory method.

Required

1.When are the purchases from various suppliers generally included in Caddell’s inventory? Why?

2. Theoretically, how should Caddell account for the ware housing costs? Why?

3. a. Explain the advantages of using the dollar value LIFO inventory cost flow method as opposed to the conventional quantity of goods LIFO method.

b. How does the calculation of dollar value LIFO differ from the conventional quantity of goods method?

4. Explain how Caddell should account for the inventories consigned to Reed Company.

5. When Reed applies the lower of cost or market method, what are the ceiling and floor limits?

explain what would have been the effect on ending inventory and cost of goods sold h 566208

Inventory Valuation Issues Hanlon Company purchased a significant amount of raw materials inventory for a new product that it is manufacturing. Hanlon purchased insurance on these raw materials while they were in transit from the supplier. Hanlon uses the lower of cost or market rule for these raw materials. The replacement cost of the raw materials is above the net realizable value and both are below the original cost. Hanlon uses the average cost inventory method for these raw materials. In the last two years, each purchase has been at a lower price than the previous purchase, and the ending inventory quantity for each period has been higher than the beginning inventory quantity for that period.

Required

1. Explain the theoretically appropriate method that Hanlon should use to account for the insurance costs on the raw materials while they were in transit from the supplier.

2. a. Explain the amount at which Hanlon should report the raw materials inventory on its balance sheet.

b. In general, explain why the lower of cost or market rule is used to report inventory.

3. Explain what would have been the effect on ending inventory and cost of goods sold had Hanlon used the LIFO inventory method instead of the average cost inventory method for the raw materials.

explain why hudson rsquo s retail inventory method approximates lower of average cos 566209

Various Inventory Issues Hudson Company, which is both a wholesaler and a retailer, purchases its inventories from various suppliers. Additional facts for Hudson’s wholesale operations are as follows:

  • Hudson incurs substantial warehousing costs.
  • Hudson uses the lower of cost or market method.
  • The replacement cost of the inventories is below the net realizable value and above the net realizable value less the normal profit margin. The original cost of the inventories is above the replacement cost and below the net realizable value. Additional facts for Hudson’s retail operations are as follows:
  • Hudson determines the estimated cost of its ending inventories held for sale at retail using the conventional retail inventory method, which approximates lower of average cost or market.
  • Hudson incurs substantial freight in costs.
  • Hudson has net markups and net markdowns.

Required

1. Theoretically, how should Hudson account for the ware housing costs related to its wholesale inventories? Why?

2. a. In general, explain why the lower of cost or market method is used to report inventory.

b. At which amount should Hudson report the whole sale inventories on its balance sheet? Explain the application of the lower of cost or market method in this situation.

3. In the calculation of the cost to retail percentage used to determine the estimated cost of its ending retail inventories, how should Hudson treat

a. Freight in costs?

b. Net markups?

c. Net markdowns?

4. Explain why Hudson’s retail inventory method approximates lower of average cost or market.

compute the inventory lost during the theft 566190

Estimation of Theft Loss You are requested by a client on September 28 to prepare an insurance claim for a theft loss which occurred on that day. You immediately take an inventory and obtain the following data:

Inventory, September 1

$38,000

Purchases received, September 1–September 28

19,000

Sales, September 1–September 28

$52,000

Sales returns

1,000

The inventory on September 28 indicates that an inventory of $15,000 remains after the theft. During the past year net sales were made at 50% above the cost of goods sold.

Required

Compute the inventory lost during the theft.

bad debts mdash aging puckett inc includes the following account among its trade re 566156

E7 11 (Bad Debts—Aging) Puckett, Inc. includes the following account among its trade receivables.

Alstott Co.

1/1

Balance forward

700

1/28

Cash (#1710)

1,100

1/20

Invoice #1710

1,100

4/2

Cash (#2116)

1,350

3/14

Invoice #2116

1,350

4/10

Cash (1/1 Balance)

255

4/12

Invoice #2412

1,710

4/30

Cash (#2412)

1,000

9/5

Invoice #3614

490

9/20

Cash (#3614 and part of #2412)

890

10/17

Invoice #4912

860

10/31

Cash (#4912)

860

11/18

Invoice #5681

2,000

12/1

Cash (#5681)

1,250

12/20

Invoice #6347

800

12/29

Cash (#6347)

800

Instructions

Age the balance and specify any items that apparently require particular attention at year end.

during 2007 r corp a manufacturer of chocolate candies contracted to purchase 100 00 566162

During 2007 R Corp. , a manufacturer of chocolate candies, contracted to purchase 100,000 pounds of cocoa beans at $1.00 per pound, delivery to be made in the spring of 2008. Because a record harvest is predicted for 2008, the price per pound for cocoa beans had fallen to $.80 by December 31, 2007. Of the following journal entries, the one that would properly reflect in 2007 the effect of the commitment of R Corp. to purchase the 100,000 pounds of cocoa is

Debit

Credit

a. Cocoa Inventory

100,000

Accounts Payable

100,000

b. Cocoa Inventory

80,000

Loss on Purchase Commitments (an expense account)

20,000

Accounts Payable

100,000

c. Loss on Purchase Commitments (an expense account)

20,000

Accrued Loss on Purchase

Commitments (a liability account)

20,000

d. No entry would be necessary in 2007.

sales for the year totaled 110 600 markdowns amounted to 1 400 under the approximate 566164

At December 31, 2007 the following information was available from Crisford Company’s books:

Cost

Retail

Inventory, 1/1/07

$14,700

$20,300

Purchases

83,300

115,500

Additional markups

4,200

Available for sale

$98,000

$140,000

Sales for the year totaled $110,600; markdowns amounted to $1,400. Under the approximate lower of average cost or market retail method, Crisford’s inventory at December 31, 2007 was

a. $30,800

b. $28,000.

c. $21,560

d. $19,600

hestor suspects some of the inventory may have been taken by some new employees at d 566165

Hestor Company’s records indicate the following information:

Merchandise inventory,

1 Jan 07

$550,000

Purchases, January 1 through

31 Dec 07

2,250,000

Sales, January 1 through

31 Dec 07

3,000,000

On December 31, 2007 a physical inventory determined that ending inventory of $600,000 was in the warehouse. Hestors gross profit on sales has remained constant at 30%. Hestor suspects some of the inventory may have been taken by some new employees. At December 31, 2007 what is the estimated cost of missing inventory?

a. $100,000

b. $200,000.

c. $300,000

d. $700,000

a company forgets to record a purchase on credit in the purchases account but ending 566167

A company forgets to record a purchase on credit in the Purchases account, but ending inventory is correct. The effect of this mistake in the current year is:

Income

Cost of goods sold

Accounts payable

Retained earnings

a. Overstated

Understated

Understated

Overstated

b. Understated

Overstated

Overstated

Understated

c. Overstated

Understated

Overstated

Understated

d. Understated

Overstated

Understated

Overstated

what is the correct inventory value for each product 566168

Lower of Cost or Market The Stiles Corporation uses the lower of cost or market method for each of two products in its ending inventory. A profit margin of 30% on the selling price is considered normal for each product. Specific data for each product are as follows:

Product A

Product B

Historical cost

$68

$91

Replacement cost

60

93

Estimated cost of disposal

32

52

Estimated selling price

140

200

Required

What is the correct inventory value for each product?

what is the correct inventory value in each of the preceding situations 566169

Lower of Cost or Market The following information for the Tuell Company is available:

Case

1

2

3

4

5

Cost

$5.00

$5.00

$5.00

$5.00

$5.00

Net realizable value

5.1

5.5

4.8

4.2

4.7

Net realizable value less normal profit

4.8

5.3

4.7

4

4.6

Replacement cost

5.3

5.2

4.6

4.1

4.8

Required

What is the correct inventory value in each of the preceding situations?

what is the correct inventory value if the company applies the lower of cost or mark 566170

Lower of Cost or Market The following information is taken from the records of the Aden Company:

Product

Group

Units

Cost/Unit

Market/Unit

A

1

600

$1.00

$0.80

B

1

250

1.5

1.55

C

2

150

5

5.25

D

2

100

6.5

6.4

E

3

80

25

24.6

Required

What is the correct inventory value if the company applies the lower of cost or market to each of the following?

1. Individual items

2. Groups of items

3. The inventory as a whole

what is the estimated inventory on september 28 2007 immediately prior to the fire 566173

Estimation of Fire Loss On September 28, 2007 a fire destroyed the entire merchandise inventory of the Carroll Corporation. The following information is available:

Sales, January 1—September 28, 2007

$540,000

Inventory, January 1, 2007

$150,000

Merchandise purchases, January 1—September 28, 2007 (including $60,000 of goods in transit on September 28, 2007, shipped FOB shipping point)

$465,000

Markup percentage on cost

20%

Required

What is the estimated inventory on September 28, 2007 immediately prior to the fire?

prepare a schedule to calculate the estimated loss on the inventory in the fire usin 566174

Gross Profit Method On November 21, 2007 a fire at Hodge Company’s warehouse caused severe damage to its entire inventory of Product Tex. Hodge estimates that all usable damaged goods can be sold for $10,000. The following information was available from Hodge’s accounting records for Product Tex:

Inventory at November 1, 2007

$100,000

Purchases from November 1, 2007 to date of fire

140,000

Net sales from November 1, 2007 to date of fire

220,000

Based on recent history, Hodge had a gross margin (profit) on Product Tex of 30% of net sales.

Required

Prepare a schedule to calculate the estimated loss on the inventory in the fire, using the gross margin (profit) method. Show supporting computations in good form.

if costs increased by 7 from 2007 to 2008 what effect would this factor have on gros 566175

Gross Profit The following gross profit data are taken from the financial records of the Eckhardt Company:

2007

2008

Sales

$300,000

$296,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

203,300

Gross profit

$100,000

$92,700

Required

1. If it is known that volume declined 5% from 2007 to 2008, by how much did selling prices change?

2. If it is known that volume declined 5% from 2007 to 2008, by how much did costs change?

3. If selling prices increased 4% from 2007 to 2008, what effect would this factor alone have on gross profit?

4. If costs increased by 7% from 2007 to 2008, what effect would this factor have on gross profit?

compute the ending inventory by the retail inventory method for the following cost f 566177

Retail Inventory Method The Harmes Company is a clothing store that uses the retail inventory method. The following information relates to its operations during 2007:

Cost

Retail

Inventory, January 1

$28,400

$40,200

Purchases

65,200

100,000

Markups (net)

1,900

Markdowns (net)

400

Sales

80,000

Required

Compute the ending inventory by the retail inventory method for the following cost flow assumptions:

1. FIFO

2. Average cost

3. LIFO

4. Lower of cost or market (based on average cost)

using the retail method what is the estimate of the merchandise inventory at decembe 566178

Retail Inventory Method The following data were available from the records of the Hegge Department Store for the year ended December 31, 2007:

At Cost

At Retail

Merchandise inventory, January 1, 2007:

$90,000

$130,000

Purchases

330,000

460,000

Markups

10,000

Markdowns

40,000

Sales

480,000

Required

Using the retail method, what is the estimate of the merchandise inventory at December 31, 2007 valued at the lower of cost or market?

compute the ending inventory by the retail inventory method using the following cost 566179

Retail Inventory Method The following information relates to the retail inventory method used by the Jeffress Company:

Cost

Retail

Beginning inventory

$11,160

$18,000

Purchases

54,600

92,400

Freight in

840

Net markups

600

Net markdowns

1,144

Sales

94,056

Required

Compute the ending inventory by the retail inventory method, using the following cost flow assumptions:

1. FIFO

2. Average cost

3. LIFO

4. Lower of cost or market (based on average cost)

compute the cost of the inventory on december 31 2007 566180

Dollar Value LIFO Retail The Johns Company adopts the dollar value LIFO retail inventory method on January 1, 2007. The following information for 2007 is obtained from the company’s records:

Cost

Retail

Inventory, January 1, 2007

$20,000

$29,000

Purchases

60,000

92,000

Net markups

1,000

Net markdowns

3,000

Sales

75,000

The price index on January 1, 2007 was 100 and on December 31, 2007 it was 110.

Required

Compute the cost of the inventory on December 31, 2007.

compute the cost of davison company rsquo s inventory at december 31 2007 566182

Dollar Value LIFO Retail On December 31, 2006 Davison Company adopted the dollar value LIFO retail inventory method. Inventory data for 2007 are as follows:

LIFO Cost

Retail

Inventory, 12/31/06

$360,000

$500,000

Inventory, 12/31/07

?

660,000

Increase in price level for 2007

10%

Cost to retail ratio for 2007

70%

Required

Compute the cost of Davison Company’s inventory at December 31, 2007.

compute the total inventory value if the lower of cost or market is applied to a eac 566185

Lower of Cost or Market The Palmquist Company has five different inventory items that it values by the lower of cost or market method. The normal markup on all items is 20% of cost. The following information is obtained from the company’s records:

Item

Units

Cost

Replacement Cost

Net Realizable Value

1

500

$10.00

$9.10

$9.20

2

400

8

8.1

7.8

3

300

15

13.5

14

4

200

18

12

17

5

100

25

25.5

25.3

Required

1. Compute the lower of cost or market value for each item.

2. Compute the total inventory value if the lower of cost or market is applied to (a) each individual item and (b) the inventory as a whole. Explain the reason for the difference between the two values.

prepare journal entries to record the lower of cost or market for each of the follow 566186

Lower of Cost or Market The following are the inventories for the years 2007, 2008, and 2009 for the Parry Company:

Cost

Market

1 Jan 07

$50,000

$50,000

31 Dec 07

64,000

60,000

31 Dec 08

71,000

70,000

31 Dec 09

75,000

78,000

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the lower of cost or market for each of the following alternatives:

1. Allowance method, periodic inventory system

2. Allowance method, perpetual inventory system

3. Direct method, periodic inventory system

4. Direct method, perpetual inventory system

assuming that the company records the market value what is the journal entry to reco 566187

Lower of Cost or Market and Interim Financial Statements The following values were obtained from the inventory records of the Robb Company, which has a fiscal year ending on December 31:

Cost

Market

Inventory, January 1, 2007

$10,000

$10,500

Inventory, March 31, 2007

12,000

11,500

Required

1. Under what conditions does the company ignore the decline in inventory value below cost in its interim financial statements?

2. Assuming that the company records the market value, what is the journal entry to record the decline if the company uses the perpetual inventory system and the allowance method?

prepare the cost of goods sold section of the income statement and show how the comp 566188

Lower of Cost or Market The inventory records of the Frost Company for the years 2007 and 2008 reveal the cost and market of the January 1, 2007 inventory to be $125,000. On December 31, 2007 the cost of inventory was $130,000, while the market value was only $128,000. The December 31, 2008 market value of inventory was $140,000, and the cost was only $135,000. The Frost Company uses a periodic inventory system. Purchases for 2007 were $100,000 and for 2008 were $110,000.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries at the end of 2007 and 2008 to record the lower of cost or market under the (a) allowance method, and (b) direct method.

2. Prepare the cost of goods sold section of the income statement and show how the company would record the inventory on its balance sheet for 2007 and 2008 under the (a) allowance method, and (b) direct method.

the adjusted trial balance of eastwood company and other related information for the 566014

P5 3 (Balance Sheet Adjustment and Preparation) The adjusted trial balance of Eastwood Company and other related information for the year 2012 are presented on the next page.

EASTWOOD COMPANY
ADJUSTED TRIAL BALANCE
DECEMBER 31, 2012

Debits

Credits

Cash

$ 41,000

Accounts Receivable

163,500

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$ 8,700

Prepaid Insurance

5,900

Inventory

208,500

Equity Investments (long term)

339,000

Land

85,000

Construction in Process (building)

124,000

Patents

36,000

Equipment

400,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

240,000

Discount on Bonds Payable

20,000

Accounts Payable

148,000

Accrued Expenses

49,200

Notes Payable

94,000

Bonds Payable

200,000

Common Stock

500,000

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock

45,000

Retained Earnings

138,000

$1,422,900

$1,422,900

Additional information:

1. The LIFO method of inventory value is used.

2. The cost and fair value of the long term investments that consist of stocks and bonds is the same.

3. The amount of the Construction in Progress account represents the costs expended to date on a building in the process of construction. (The company rents factory space at the present time.) The land on which the building is being constructed cost $85,000, as shown in the trial balance.

4. The patents were purchased by the company at a cost of $40,000 and are being amortized on a straight line basis.

5. Of the discount on bonds payable, $2,000 will be amortized in 2013.

6. The notes payable represent bank loans that are secured by long term investments carried at $120,000.

These bank loans are due in 2013.

7. The bonds payable bear interest at 8% payable every December 31, and are due January 1, 2023.

8. 600,000 shares of common stock of a par value of $1 were authorized, of which 500,000 shares were issued and outstanding.

Instructions

Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2012, so that all important information is fully disclosed.

presented below and on the next page is the balance sheet of kishwaukee corporation 566015

P5 4 (Preparation of a Corrected Balance Sheet) Presented below and on the next page is the balance sheet of Kishwaukee Corporation as of December 31, 2012.

Assets

Goodwill (Note 2)

$ 120,000

Buildings (Note 1)

1,640,000

Inventory

312,100

Land

950,000

Accounts receivable

170,000

Treasury stock (50,000 shares)

87,000

Cash on hand

175,900

Assets allocated to trustee for plant expansion

Cash in bank

70,000

Debt investments (held to maturity)

138,000

$3,663,000

Equities

Notes payable (Note 3)

$ 600,000

Common stock, authorized and issued, 1,000,000 shares, no par

1,150,000

Retained earnings

858,000

Appreciation capital (Note 1)

570,000

Income tax payable

75,000

Reserve for depreciation recorded to date on the building

410,000

$3,663,000

Note 1: Buildings are stated at cost, except for one building that was recorded at appraised value. The excess of appraisal value over cost was $570,000. Depreciation has been recorded based on cost.

Note 2: Goodwill in the amount of $120,000 was recognized because the company believed that book value was not an accurate representation of the fair value of the company. The gain of $120,000 was credited to Retained Earnings.

Note 3: Notes payable are long term except for the current installment due of $100,000.

Instructions

Prepare a corrected classified balance sheet in good form. The notes above are for information only.

presented below is the balance sheet of sargent corporation for the current year 201 566016

P5 5 (Balance Sheet Adjustment and Preparation) Presented below is the balance sheet of Sargent Corporation for the current year, 2012.

SARGENT CORPORATION

BALANCE SHEET

DECEMBER 31, 2012

Current assets

$ 485,000

Current liabilities

$ 380,000

Investments

640,000

Long term liabilities

1,000,000

Property, plant, and equipment

1,720,000

Stockholders’ equity

1,770,000

Intangible assets

305,000

$3,150,000

$3,150,000

The following information is presented.

1. The current assets section includes: cash $150,000, accounts receivable $170,000 less $10,000 for allowance for doubtful accounts, inventories $180,000, and unearned revenue $5,000. Inventories are stated on the lower of FIFO cost or market.

2. The investments section includes: the cash surrender value of a life insurance contract $40,000; investments in common stock, short term (trading) $80,000 and long term (available for sale) $270,000; and bond sinking fund $250,000. The cost and fair value of investments in common stock are the same.

3. Property, plant, and equipment includes: buildings $1,040,000 less accumulated depreciation $360,000; equipment $450,000 less accumulated depreciation $180,000; land $500,000; and land held for future use $270,000.

4. Intangible assets include: a franchise $165,000; goodwill $100,000; and discount on bonds payable $40,000.

5. Current liabilities include: accounts payable $140,000; notes payable—short term $80,000 and longterm $120,000; and taxes payable $40,000.

6. Long term liabilities are composed solely of 7% bonds payable due 2020.

7. Stockholders’ equity has: preferred stock, no par value, authorized 200,000 shares, issued 70,000 shares for $450,000; and common stock, $1.00 par value, authorized 400,000 shares, issued 100,000 shares at an average price of $10. In addition, the corporation has retained earnings of $320,000.

Instructions

Prepare a balance sheet in good form, adjusting the amounts in each balance sheet classification as affected by the information given above.

lansbury inc had the balance sheet shown on the next page at december 31 2011 566017

P5 6 (Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows and a Balance Sheet) Lansbury Inc. had the balance sheet shown on the next page at December 31, 2011.

LANSBURY INC.
BALANCE SHEET
DECEMBER 31, 2011

Cash

$20,000

Accounts payable

$30,000

Accounts receivable

21,200

Notes payable (long term)

41,000

Investments

32,000

Common stock

100,000

Plant assets (net)

81,000

Retained earnings

23,200

Land

$40,000

194,200

194,200

During 2012, the following occurred.

1. Lansbury Inc. sold part of its investment portfolio for $15,000. This transaction resulted in a gain of $3,400 for the firm. The company classifies its investments as available for sale.

2. A tract of land was purchased for $18,000 cash.

3. Long term notes payable in the amount of $16,000 were retired before maturity by paying $16,000 cash.

4. An additional $20,000 in common stock was issued at par.

5. Dividends of $8,200 were declared and paid to stockholders.

6. Net income for 2012 was $32,000 after allowing for depreciation of $11,000.

7. Land was purchased through the issuance of $30,000 in bonds.

8. At December 31, 2012, Cash was $32,000, Accounts Receivable was $41,600, and Accounts Payable remained at $30,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012.

(b) Prepare an unclassified balance sheet as it would appear at December 31, 2012.

(c) How might the statement of cash flows help the user of the financial statements? Compute two cash flow ratios.

aero inc had the following balance sheet at december 31 2011 566018

P5 7 (Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows and Balance Sheet) Aero Inc. had the following balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

AERO INC.
BALANCE SHEET
DECEMBER 31, 2011

Cash

20,000

Accounts payable

30,000

Accounts receivable

21,200

Bonds payable

41,000

Investments

32,000

Common stock

100,000

Plant assets (net)

$81,000

Retained earnings

23,200

Land

40,000

$194,200

194,200

During 2012, the following occurred.

1. Aero liquidated its available for sale investment portfolio at a loss of $5,000.

2. A tract of land was purchased for $38,000.

3. An additional $30,000 in common stock was issued at par.

4. Dividends totaling $10,000 were declared and paid to stockholders.

5. Net income for 2012 was $35,000, including $12,000 in depreciation expense.

6. Land was purchased through the issuance of $30,000 in additional bonds.

7. At December 31, 2012, Cash was $70,200, Accounts Receivable was $42,000, and Accounts Payable was $40,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year 2012 for Aero.

(b) Prepare the balance sheet as it would appear at December 31, 2012.

(c) Compute Aero’s free cash flow and the current cash debt coverage ratio for 2012.

(d) Use the analysis of Aero to illustrate how information in the balance sheet and statement of cash flows helps the user of the financial statements.

in an examination of arenes corporation as of december 31 2012 you have learned that 566019

CA5 1 (Reporting the Financial Effects of Varied Transactions) In an examination of Arenes Corporation as of December 31, 2012, you have learned that the following situations exist. No entries have been made in the accounting records for these items.

1. The corporation erected its present factory building in 1997. Depreciation was calculated by the straight line method, using an estimated life of 35 years. Early in 2012, the board of directors conducted careful survey and estimated that the factory building had a remaining useful life of 25 years as of January 1, 2012.

2. An additional assessment of 2011 income taxes was levied and paid in 2012.

3. When calculating the accrual for officers’ salaries at December 31, 2012, it was discovered that the accrual for officers’ salaries for December 31, 2011, had been overstated.

4. On December 15, 2012, Arenes Corporation declared a cash dividend on its common stock outstanding, payable February 1, 2013, to the common stockholders of record December 31, 2012.

Instructions

Describe fully how each of the items above should be reported in the financial statements of Arenes Corporation for the year 2012.

below are the titles of a number of debit and credit accounts as they might appear o 566020

CA5 2 (Current Asset and Liability Classification) Below are the titles of a number of debit and credit accounts as they might appear on the balance sheet of Hayduke Corporation as of October 31, 2012.

Debits

Credits

Interest Receivable on U.S. Government

Preferred Stock

Securities

11% First Mortgage Bonds, due in 2017

Notes Receivable

Preferred Cash Dividend, payable Nov. 1, 2012

Petty Cash Fund

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Receivable

Debt Investments (trading)

Federal Income Taxes Payable

Treasury Stock

Customers’ Advances (on contracts to be

Unamortized Bond Discount

completed next year)

Cash in Bank

Premium on Bonds Redeemable in 2012

Land

Officers’ 2012 Bonus Accrued

Inventory of Operating Parts and Supplies

Accrued Payroll

Inventory of Raw Materials

Notes Payable

Patents

Interest Expense

Cash and U.S. Government Bonds Set Aside

Accumulated Depreciation

for Property Additions

Accounts Payable

Investment in Subsidiary

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par

Accounts Receivable:

Accrued Interest on Notes Payable

U.S. Government Contracts

8% First Mortgage Bonds, to be redeemed in 2012

Regular

out of current assets

Installments—Due Next Year

Installments—Due After Next year

Goodwill

Inventory of Finished Goods

Inventory of Work in Process

Deficit

Instructions

Select the current asset and current liability items from among these debits and credits. If there appear to be certain borderline cases that you are unable to classify without further information, mention them and explain your difficulty, or give your reasons for making questionable classifications, if any.

identifying balance sheet deficiencies the assets of fonzarelli corporation are pre 566021

CA5 3 (Identifying Balance Sheet Deficiencies) The assets of Fonzarelli Corporation are presented on the next page (000s omitted).

FONZARELLI CORPORATION
BALANCE SHEET (PARTIAL)
DECEMBER 31, 2012

Assets

$100,000

Current assets

27,500

Cash

37,000

Unclaimed payroll checks

75,000

Debt investments (trading) (fair value $30,000) at cost

Accounts receivable (less bad debt reserve)

Inventory—at lower of cost (determined by the next in,

fi rst out method) or market

240,000

Total current assets

479,500

Tangible assets

Land (less accumulated depreciation)

80,000

Buildings and equipment

$800,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

250,000

550,000

Net tangible assets

630,000

Long term investments

Stocks and bonds

100,000

Treasury stock

70,000

Total long term investments

170,000

Other assets

Discount on bonds payable

19,400

Sinking fund

975,000

Total other assets

994,400

Total assets

$2,273,900

Instructions

Indicate the deficiencies, if any, in the foregoing presentation of Fonzarelli Corporation’s assets.

presentation of property plant and equipment carol keene corporate comptroller for 566022

CA5 5 (Presentation of Property, Plant, and Equipment) Carol Keene, corporate comptroller for Dumaine Industries, is trying to decide how to present “Property, plant, and equipment” in the balance sheet. She realizes that the statement of cash flows will show that the company made a significant investment in purchasing new equipment this year, but overall she knows the company’s plant assets are rather old. She feels that she can disclose one figure titled “Property, plant, and equipment, net of depreciation,” and

the result will be a low figure. However, it will not disclose the age of the assets. If she chooses to show the cost less accumulated depreciation, the age of the assets will be apparent. She proposes the following.

Property, plant, and equipment,
net of depreciation

$10,000,000

rather than

Property, plant, and equipment

50,000,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

40,000,000

Net book value

$10,000,000

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What are the ethical issues involved?

(b) What should Keene do?

ca5 4 critique of balance sheet format and content presented below and on the next p 566023

CA5 4 (Critique of Balance Sheet Format and Content) Presented below and on the next page is the balance sheet of Rasheed Brothers Corporation (000s omitted).

Current assets

$26,000

Cash

18,000

Marketable securities

25,000

Accounts receivable

20,000

Inventory

4,000

Supplies

20,000

$113,000

Stock investment in subsidiary company

Investments

25,000

Treasury stock

Property, plant, and equipment

91,000

Buildings and land

31,000

60,000

Less: Reserve for depreciation

Other assets

19,000

Cash surrender value of life insurance

$217,000

Total assets

Liabilities and Stockholders’

Current liabilities

$22,000

Accounts payable

15,000

Reserve for income taxes

1

$ 37,001

Customers’ accounts with credit balances

Deferred credits

2,000

Unamortized premium on bonds payable

Long term liabilities

Bonds payable

60,000

Total liabilities

99,001

Common stock

Common stock, par $5

85,000

Earned surplus

24,999

Cash dividends declared

8,000

117,999

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity

$217,000

Instructions

Evaluate the balance sheet presented. State briefly the proper treatment of any item criticized.

cash flow analysis the partner in charge of the kappeler corporation audit comes by 566024

CA5 6 (Cash Flow Analysis) The partner in charge of the Kappeler Corporation audit comes by your desk and leaves a letter he has started to the CEO and a copy of the cash flow statement for the year ended December 31, 2012. Because he must leave on an emergency, he asks you to finish the letter by explaining:

(1) the disparity between net income and cash flow; (2) the importance of operating cash flow; (3) the renewable source(s) of cash flow; and (4) possible suggestions to improve the cash position.

KAPPELER CORPORATION
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012

Cash flows from operating activities

Net income

$100,000

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by

operating activities:

Depreciation expense

$ 10,000

Amortization expense

1,000

Loss on sale of fixed assets

5,000

Increase in accounts receivable (net)

(40,000)

Increase in inventory

(35,000)

Decrease in accounts payable

(41,000)

(100,000)

Net cash provided by operating activities

–0–

Cash flows from investing activities

Sale of plant assets

25,000

Purchase of equipment

(100,000)

Purchase of land

(200,000)

Net cash used by investing activities

(275,000)

Cash flows from financing activities

Payment of dividends

(10,000)

Redemption of bonds

(100,000)

Net cash used by financing activities

(110,000)

Net decrease in cash

(385,000)

Cash balance, January 1, 2012

400,000

Cash balance, December 31, 2012

$ 15,000

Date

President Kappeler, CEO

Kappeler Corporation 125 Wall Street

Middleton, Kansas 67458

Dear Mr. Kappeler:

I have good news and bad news about the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012.

The good news is that net income of $100,000 is close to what we predicted in the strategic plan last year, indicating strong performance this year. The bad news is that the cash balance is seriously low. Enclosed is the Statement of Cash Flows, which best illustrates how both of these situations occurred simultaneously . . .

Instructions

Complete the letter to the CEO, including the four components requested by your boss.

horizon outfitters company includes in its trial balance for december 31 an item for 566129

Horizon Outfitters Company includes in its trial balance for December 31 an item for Accounts Receivable $789,000. This balance consists of the following items:

Due from regular customers

$523,000

Refund receivable on prior year’s income
taxes (an established claim)

15,500

Travel advance to employees

22,000

Loan to wholly owned subsidiary

45,500

Advances to creditors for goods ordered

61,000

Accounts receivable assigned as security
for loans payable

75,000

Notes receivable past due plus interest on
these notes

47,000

Total

$789,000

the controller for weinstein co is attempting to determine the amount of cash and ca 566146

E7 1 (Determining Cash Balance) The controller for Weinstein Co. is attempting to determine the amount of cash and cash equivalents to be reported on its December 31, 2012, balance sheet. The following information is provided.

1. Commercial savings account of $600,000 and a commercial checking account balance of $800,000 are held at First National Bank of Olathe.

2. Money market fund account held at Volonte Co. (a mutual fund organization) permits Weinstein to write checks on this balance, $5,000,000.

3. Travel advances of $180,000 for executive travel for the first quarter of next year (employee to reimburse through salary reduction).

4. A separate cash fund in the amount of $1,500,000 is restricted for the retirement of long term debt.

5. Petty cash fund of $1,000.

6. An I.O.U. from Marianne Koch, a company customer, in the amount of $150,000.

7. A bank overdraft of $110,000 has occurred at one of the banks the company uses to deposit its cash receipts. At the present time, the company has no deposits at this bank.

8. The company has two certificates of deposit, each totaling $500,000. These CDs have a maturity of 120 days.

9. Weinstein has received a check that is dated January 12, 2013, in the amount of $125,000.

10. Weinstein has agreed to maintain a cash balance of $500,000 at all times at First National Bank of Olathe to ensure future credit availability.

11. Weinstein has purchased $2,100,000 of commercial paper of Sergio Leone Co. which is due in 60 days.

12. Currency and coin on hand amounted to $7,700.

Instructions

(a) Compute the amount of cash and cash equivalents to be reported on Weinstein Co.’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

(b) Indicate the proper reporting for items that are not reported as cash on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet.

checking account balance 925 000 certificate of deposit 1 400 000 cash advance to su 566147

E7 2 (Determine Cash Balance) Presented below are a number of independent situations.

Instructions

For each individual situation, determine the amount that should be reported as cash. If the item(s) is not reported as cash, explain the rationale.

1. Checking account balance $925,000; certificate of deposit $1,400,000; cash advance to subsidiary of $980,000; utility deposit paid to gas company $180.

2. Checking account balance $500,000; an overdraft in special checking account at same bank as normal checking account of $17,000; cash held in a bond sinking fund $200,000; petty cash fund $300; coins and currency on hand $1,350.

3. Checking account balance $590,000; postdated check from a customer $11,000; cash restricted due to maintaining compensating balance requirement of $100,000; certified check from customer $9,800; postage stamps on hand $620.

4. Checking account balance at bank $42,000; money market balance at mutual fund (has checking privileges) $48,000; NSF check received from customer $800.

5. Checking account balance $700,000; cash restricted for future plant expansion $500,000; short term Treasury bills $180,000; cash advance received from customer $900 (not included in checking account balance); cash advance of $7,000 to company executive, payable on demand; refundable deposit of $26,000 paid to federal government to guarantee performance on construction contract.

e7 3 financial statement presentation of receivables patriot company shows a balance 566148

E7 3 (Financial Statement Presentation of Receivables) Patriot Company shows a balance of $241,140 in the Accounts Receivable account on December 31, 2012. The balance consists of the following

Installment accounts due in 2013

$23,000

Installment accounts due after 2013

34,000

Overpayments to creditors

2,640

Due from regular customers, of which $40,000 represents
accounts pledged as security for a bank loan

89,000

Advances to employees

1,500

Advance to subsidiary company (made in 2010)

91,000

Instructions

Illustrate how the information above should be shown on the balance sheet of Patriot Company on December 31, 2012.

your accounts receivable clerk mary herman to whom you pay a salary of 1 500 per mon 566149

E7 4 (Determine Ending Accounts Receivable) Your accounts receivable clerk, Mary Herman, to whom you pay a salary of $1,500 per month, has just purchased a new Audi. You decided to test the accuracy of the accounts receivable balance of $117,000 as shown in the ledger.

The following information is available for your first year in business.

1) Collections from customers

$198,000

2) Merchandise purchased

320,000

3) Ending merchandise inventory

70,000

4) Goods are marked to sell at 40% above cost

Instructions

Compute an estimate of the ending balance of accounts receivable from customers that should appear in the ledger and any apparent shortages. Assume that all sales are made on account.

on june 3 bolton company sold to arquette company merchandise having a sale price of 566150

E7 5 (Record Sales Gross and Net) On June 3, Bolton Company sold to Arquette Company merchandise having a sale price of $2,000 with terms of 2/10, n/60, f.o.b. shipping point. An invoice totaling $90, terms n/30, was received by Arquette on June 8 from John Booth Transport Service for the freight cost. On June 12, the company received a check for the balance due from Arquette Company.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries on the Bolton Company books to record all the events noted above under each of the following bases.

(1) Sales and receivables are entered at gross selling price.

(2) Sales and receivables are entered at net of cash discounts.

(b) Prepare the journal entry under basis 2, assuming that Arquette Company did not remit payment until July 29.

presented below is information from lopez computers incorporated 566151

E7 6 (Recording Sales Transactions) Presented below is information from Lopez Computers Incorporated

July 1

Sold $30,000 of computers to Smallwood Company with terms 3/15, n/60. Lopez uses the gross
method to record cash discounts.

10

Lopez received payment from Smallwood for the full amount owed from the July transactions.

17

Sold $250,000 in computers and peripherals to The Clark Store with terms of 2/10, n/30.

30

The Clark Store paid Lopez for its purchase of July 17.

Instructions

Prepare the necessary journal entries for Lopez Computers.

sandel company reports the following financial information before adjustments 566152

E7 7 (Recording Bad Debts) Sandel Company reports the following financial information before adjustments.

Dr.

Cr.

Accounts Receivable

$160,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$ 2,000

Sales Revenue (all on credit)

800,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

50,000

Instructions

Prepare the journal entry to record bad debt expense assuming Sandel Company estimates bad debts at

(a) 1% of net sales and

(b) 5% of accounts receivable.

do you agree or disagree with dollywood rsquo s policy concerning recognition of bad 566155

E7 10 (Bad Debt Reporting) The chief accountant for Dollywood Corporation provides you with the following list of accounts receivable written off in the current year.

Date

Customer

Amount

March 31

E. L. Masters Company

$7,800

June 30

Hocking Associates

9,700

September 30

Amy Lowell’s Dress Shop

7,000

December 31

R. Bronson, Inc.

9,830

Dollywood Corporation follows the policy of debiting Bad Debt Expense as accounts are written off. The chief accountant maintains that this procedure is appropriate for financial statement purposes because the Internal Revenue Service will not accept other methods for recognizing bad debts. All of Dollywood Corporation’s sales are on a 30 day credit basis. Sales for the current year total $2,400,000, and research has determined that bad debt losses approximate 2% of sales.

Instructions

(a) Do you agree or disagree with Dollywood’s policy concerning recognition of bad debt expense? Why or why not?

(b) By what amount would net income differ if bad debt expense was computed using the percentage of sales approach?

keyser beverage company reported the following items in the most recent year 565990

BE 12 Keyser Beverage Company reported the following items in the most recent year.

Net income

$40,000

Dividends paid

5,000

Increase in accounts receivable

10,000

Increase in accounts payable

7,000

Purchase of equipment (capital expenditure)

8,000

Depreciation expense

4,000

Issue of notes payable

20,000

Compute net cash provided by operating activities, the net change in cash during the year, and free cash flow.

martinez corporation engaged in the following cash transactions during 2012 565992

BE 14 Martinez Corporation engaged in the following cash transactions during 2012.

Sale of land and building

$191,000

Purchase of treasury stock

40,000

Purchase of land

37,000

Payment of cash dividend

$95,000

Purchase of equipment

53,000

Issuance of common stock

147,000

Retirement of bonds

100,000

Compute the net cash provided (used) by investing activities.

for each of the accounts above indicate the proper balance sheet classification in t 565995

E 1 Presented below are a number of balance sheet accounts of Cunningham, Inc.

(a) Investment in Preferred Stock.

(b) Treasury Stock.

(c) Common Stock.

(d) Dividends Payable.

(e) Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment.

(f) Construction in Process.

(g) Petty Cash.

(h) Interest Payable.

(i) Deficit.

(j) Equity Investments (trading).

(k) Income Tax Payable.

(l) Unearned Subscription Revenue.

(m) Work in Process.

(n) Vacation Wages Payable

Instructions

For each of the accounts above, indicate the proper balance sheet classification. In the case of borderline items, indicate the additional information that would be required to determine the proper classification.

presented below is the captions of nikos company s balance sheet 565996

E 2 Presented below is the captions of Nikos Company’s balance sheet.

(a) Current assets.

(b) Investments.

(c) Property, plant, and equipment..

(d) Intangible assets.

(e) Other assets.

(f) Current liabilities. 3

(g) Non current liabilities.

(h) Capital stock

(i) Additional paid in capital.

(j) Retained earnings.

Instructions

Indicate by letter where each of the following items would be classified.

1. Preferred stock.

2. Goodwill.

3. Salaries and wages payable.

4. Accounts payable.

5. Buildings.

6. Equity investments (trading).

7. Current portion of long term debt.

8. Premium on bonds payable.

9. Allowance for doubtful accounts.

10. Accounts receivable.

11. Cash surrender value of life insurance.

12. Notes payable (due next year).

13. Supplies.

14. Common stock.

15. Land.

16. Bond sinking fund.

17. Inventory.

18. Prepaid insurance.

19. Bonds payable.

20. Income tax payable.

assume that masters enterprises uses the following headings on its balance sheet 565997

E 3 Assume that Masters Enterprises uses the following headings on its balance sheet.

(a) Current assets.

(b) Investments.

(c) Property, plant, and equipment.

(d) Intangible assets.

(e) Other assets.

(f) Current liabilities.

(g) Long term liabilities.

(h) Capital stock.

(i) Paid in capital in excess of par.

(j) Retained earnings.

Instructions

Indicate by letter how each of the following usually should be classified. If an item should appear in a note to the financial statements, use the letter “N” to indicate this fact. If an item need not be reported at all on the balance sheet, use the letter “X.”

1. Prepaid insurance.

2. Stock owned in affiliated companies.

3. Unearned subscriptions revenue.

4. Advances to suppliers.

5. Unearned rent revenue.

6. Preferred stock.

7. Additional paid in capital on preferred stock.

8. Copyrights.

9. Petty cash fund.

10. Sales tax payable.

11. Accrued interest on notes receivable.

12. Twenty year issue of bonds payable that will mature within the next year.

13. Machinery retired from use and held for sale.

14. Fully depreciated machine still in use.

15. Accrued interest on bonds payable.

16. Salaries that company budget shows will be paid to employees within the next year.

17. Discount on bonds payable. (Assume related to bonds payable in No. 12.)

18. Accumulated depreciation—buildings

assume that gulistan inc has the following accounts at the end of the current year 565998

E 4 Assume that Gulistan Inc. has the following accounts at the end of the current year.

1. Common Stock.

2. Discount on Bonds Payable.

3. Treasury Stock (at cost).

4. Notes Payable (short term).

5. Raw Materials.

6. Preferred Stock Investments (long term).

7. Unearned Rent Revenue.

8. Work in Process.

9. Copyrights.

10. Buildings.

11. Notes Receivable (short term).

12. Cash.

13. Salaries and Wages Payable.

14. Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings.

15. Cash Restricted for Plant Expansion.

16. Land Held for Future Plant Site.

17. Allowance for Doubtful Accounts—Accounts Receivable.

18. Retained Earnings.

19. Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Common Stock.

20. Unearned Subscriptions Revenue.

21. Receivables—Officers (due in one year).

22. Finished Goods.

23. Accounts Receivable.

24. Bonds Payable (due in 4 years).

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form. (No monetary amounts are necessary.)

bruno company has decided to expand its operations the bookkeeper recently completed 565999

E 5 Bruno Company has decided to expand its operations. The bookkeeper recently completed the balance sheet presented on the next page in order to obtain additional funds for expansion.

BRUNO COMPANY
BALANCE SHEET
DECEMBER 31, 2012

Current assets

Cash

$260,000

Accounts receivable (net)

340,000

Inventories (lower of average cost or market)

401,000

Equity investments (trading)—at cost (fair value $120,000)

140,000

Property, plant, and equipment

Buildings (net)

570,000

Office equipment (net)

160,000

Land held for future use

175,000

Intangible assets

Goodwill

80,000

Cash surrender value of life insurance

90,000

Prepaid expenses

12,000

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

135,000

Notes payable (due next year)

125,000

Pension obligation

82,000

Rent payable

49,000

Premium on bonds payable

53,000

Long term liabilities

Bonds payable

500,000

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock, $1.00 par, authorized

400,000 shares, issued 290,000

290,000

Additional paid in capital

180,000

Retained earnings

?

Instructions

Prepare a revised balance sheet given the available information. Assume that the accumulated depreciation balance for the buildings is $160,000 and for the office equipment, $105,000. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a balance of $17,000. The pension obligation is considered a long term liability.

the bookkeeper for garfield company has prepared the following balance sheet as of j 566000

E 6 The bookkeeper for Garfield Company has prepared the following balance sheet as of July 31, 2012.

GARFIELD COMPANY
BALANCE SHEET
AS OF JULY 31, 2012

Cash

69,000

Notes and accounts payable

$44,000

Accounts receivable (net)

40,500

Long term liabilities

75,000

Inventory

60,000

Stockholders’ equity

155,500

Equipment (net)

84,000

$274,500

Patents

21,000

$274,500

The following additional information is provided.

1. Cash includes $1,200 in a petty cash fund and $12,000 in a bond sinking fund.

2. The net accounts receivable balance is comprised of the following three items: (a) accounts receivable—debit balances $52,000; (b) accounts receivable—credit balances $8,000; (c) allowance for doubtful accounts $3,500.

3. Merchandise inventory costing $5,300 was shipped out on consignment on July 31, 2012. The ending inventory balance does not include the consigned goods. Receivables in the amount of $5,300 were recognized on these consigned goods.

4. Equipment had a cost of $112,000 and an accumulated depreciation balance of $28,000.

5. Taxes payable of $9,000 were accrued on July 31. Garfield Company, however, had set up a cash fund to meet this obligation. This cash fund was not included in the cash balance, but was offset against the taxes payable amount.

Instructions

Prepare a corrected classified balance sheet as of July 31, 2012, from the available information, adjusting the account balances using the additional information.

presented below are selected accounts of aramid company at december 31 2012 566001

E 7 Presented below are selected accounts of aramid Company at December 31, 2012.

Finished Goods

52,000

Unearned Revenue

90,000

Equipment

$253,000

Work in Process

34,000

Cash

$42,000

Equity Investments (short term)

31,000

Customer Advances

36,000

Cash Restricted for Plant Expansion

50,000

Cost of Goods Sold

$2,100,000

Notes Receivable

40,000

Accounts Receivable

161,000

Raw Materials

187,000

Supplies Expense

60,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

12,000

Licenses

18,000

Additional Paid in Capital

88,000

Treasury Stock

22,000

The following additional information is available.

1. Inventories are valued at lower of cost or market using LIFO.

2. Equipment is recorded at cost. Accumulated depreciation, computed on a straight line basis, is $50,600.

3. The short term investments have a fair value of $29,000. (Assume they are trading securities.)

4. The notes receivable are due April 30, 2014, with interest receivable every April 30. The notes bear interest at 6%. (Hint: Accrue interest due on December 31, 2012.)

5. The allowance for doubtful accounts applies to the accounts receivable Accounts receivable of $50,000 are pledged as collateral on a bank loan.

6. Licenses are recorded net of accumulated amortization of $14,000.

7. Treasury stock is recorded at cost.

Instructions

Prepare the current assets section of Aramis Company’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet, with appropriate disclosures.

pascal corporation is preparing its december 31 2012 balance sheet the following ite 566002

E 8 Pascal Corporation is preparing its December 31, 2012, balance sheet. The following items may be reported as either a current or long term liability.

1. On December 15, 2012, Pascal declared a cash dividend of $2.00 per share to stockholders of record on December 31. The dividend is payable on January 15, 2013. Pascal has issued 1,000,000 shares of common stock, of which 50,000 shares are held in treasury.

2. At December 31, bonds payable of $100,000,000 are outstanding. The bonds pay 10% interest every September 30 and mature in installments of $25,000,000 every September 30, beginning September 30, 2013.

3. At December 31, 2011, customer advances were $12,000,000. During 2012, Pascal collected $30,000,000 of customer advances, and advances of $25,000,000 were earned.

Instructions

For each item above, indicate the dollar amounts to be reported as a current liability and as a long term liability, if any.

the current assets and current liabilities sections of the balance sheet of agincour 566003

E5 9 The current assets and current liabilities sections of the balance sheet of Agincourt Company appear as follows.

AGINCOURT COMPANY
BALANCE SHEET (PARTIAL)
DECEMBER 31, 2012

Cash

40,000

Accounts payable

$61,000

Accounts receivable

$89,000

Notes payable

67,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

7,000

82,000

$128,000

Inventory

171,000

Prepaid expenses

9,000

$302,000

The following errors in the corporation’s accounting have been discovered:

1. January 2013 cash disbursements entered as of December 2012 included payments of accounts payable in the amount of $35,000, on which a cash discount of 2% was taken.

2. The inventory included $27,000 of merchandise that had been received at December 31 but for which no purchase invoices had been received or entered. Of this amount, $10,000 had been received on consignment; the remainder was purchased f.o.b. destination, terms 2/10, n/30.

3. Sales for the first four days in January 2013 in the amount of $30,000 were entered in the sales book as of December 31, 2012. Of these, $21,500 were sales on account and the remainder were cash sales.

4. Cash, not including cash sales, collected in January 2013 and entered as of December 31, 2012, totaled $35,324. Of this amount, $23,324 was received on account after cash discounts of 2% had been deducted; the remainder represented the proceeds of a bank loan.

Instructions

(a) Restate the current assets and current liabilities sections of the balance sheet in accordance with good accounting practice. (Assume that both accounts receivable and accounts payable are recorded gross.)

(b) State the net effect of your adjustments on Agincourt Company’s retained earnings balance.

mary pierce is the controller of arnold corporation and is responsible for the prepa 566004

E 10 (Current Liabilities) Mary Pierce is the controller of Arnold Corporation and is responsible for the preparation of the year end financial statements. The following transactions occurred during the year.

(a) On December 20, 2012, an employee filed a legal action against Arnold for $100,000 for wrongful dismissal. Management believes the action to be frivolous and without merit. The likelihood of payment to the employee is remote.

(b) Bonuses to key employees based on net income for 2012 are estimated to be $150,000.

(c) On December 1, 2012, the company borrowed $900,000 at 8% per year. Interest is paid quarterly.

(d) Credit sales for the year amounted to $10,000,000. Arnold’s expense provision for doubtful accounts is estimated to be 2% of credit sales.

(e) On December 15, 2012, the company declared a $2.00 per share dividend on the 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding, to be paid on January 5, 2013.

(f) During the year, customer advances of $160,000 were received; $50,000 of this amount was earned by December 31, 2012.

Instructions

For each item above, indicate the dollar amount to be reported as a current liability. If a liability is not reported, explain why.

presented below is the adjusted trial balance of abbey corporation at december 31 20 566005

E 11 Presented below is the adjusted trial balance of Abbey Corporation at December 31, 2012.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$ ?

Supplies

1,200

Prepaid Insurance

1,000

Equipment

48,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$9,000

Trademarks

950

Accounts Payable

10,000

Salaries and Wages Payable

500

Unearned Service Revenue

2,000

Bonds Payable (due 2017)

9,000

Common Stock

10,000

Retained Earnings

20,000

Service Revenue

10,000

Salaries and Wages Expense

9,000

Insurance Expense

1,400

Rent Expense

1,200

Interest Expense

900

Total

$ ?

$ ?

Additional information:

1. Net loss for the year was $2,500.

2. No dividends were declared during 2012.

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.

the major classifications of activities reported in the statement of cash flows are 566006

E 13 The major classifications of activities reported in the statement of cash flows are operating, investing, and financing. Classify each of the transactions listed below as:

1. Operating activity—add to net income.

2. Operating activity—deduct from net income.

3. Investing activity.

4. Financing activity.

5. Reported as significant noncash activity.

The transactions are as follows.

(a) Issuance of capital stock.

(b) Purchase of land and building.

(c) Redemption of bonds.

(d) Sale of equipment.

(e) Depreciation of machinery.

(f) Amortization of patent.

(g) Issuance of bonds for plant assets.

(h) Payment of cash dividends.

(i) Exchange of furniture for office equipment.

(j) Purchase of treasury stock.

(k) Loss on sale of equipment

(l) Increase in accounts receivable during the year.

(m) Decrease in accounts payable during the year.

the comparative balance sheets of connecticut inc at the beginning and the end of th 566007

E 14 The comparative balance sheets of Connecticut Inc. at the beginning and the end of the year 2012 appear on the next page.

CONNECTICUT INC.
BALANCE SHEETS

Assets

Dec. 31, 2012

Jan.1,2012

Inc./Dec.

Cash

$45,000

$13,000

$32,000 Inc.

Accounts receivable

91,000

88,000

3,000 Inc.

Equipment

39,000

22,000

17,000 Inc.

Less: Accumulated depreciation equipment

17,000

11,000

6,000 Inc.

Total

$158,000

$112,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$20,000

$15,000

5,000 Inc.

Common stock

100,000

80,000

20,000 Inc.

Retained earnings

38,000

17,000

21,000 Inc.

Total

$158,000

$112,000

Net income of $34,000 was reported, and dividends of $13,000 were paid in 2012. New equipment was purchased and none was sold.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year 2012

a comparative balance sheet for orozco corporation is presented below 566009

E 16 (Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows) A comparative balance sheet for Orozco Corporation is presented below.

31 Dec

Assets

2012

2011

Cash

$63,000

$22,000

Accounts receivable

82,000

66,000

Inventory

180,000

189,000

Land

71,000

110,000

Equipment

270,000

200,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

69,000

42,000

Total

$597,000

$545,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$34,000

$47,000

Bonds payable

150,000

200,000

Common stock ($1 par)

214,000

164,000

Retained earnings

199,000

134,000

Total

$597,000

$545,000

Additional information:

1. Net income for 2012 was $105,000.

2. Cash dividends of $40,000 were declared and paid.

3. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were retired through issuance of common stock.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012 for Orozco Corporation.

(b) Determine Orozco Corporation’s current cash debt coverage ratio, cash debt coverage ratio, and free cash flow. Comment on its liquidity and financial flexibility.

chekov corporation s balance sheet at the end of 2011 included the following items 566010

E 17 (Preparation of a Statement of Cash Flows and a Balance Sheet) Chekov Corporation’s balance sheet at the end of 2011 included the following items.

Current assets

$235,000

Current liabilities

$150,000

Land

30,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Buildings

120,000

Common stock

180,000

Equipment

90,000

Retained earnings

44,000

Accum. depr.—buildings

30,000

Total

$474,000

Accum. depr.—equipment

11,000

Patents

40,000

Total

$474,000

The following information is available for 2012.

1. Net income was $55,000.

2. Equipment (cost $20,000 and accumulated depreciation $8,000) was sold for $9,000.

3. Depreciation expense was $4,000 on the building and $9,000 on equipment.

4. Patent amortization was $2,500.

5. Current assets other than cash increased by $25,000. Current liabilities increased by $13,000.

6. An addition to the building was completed at a cost of $27,000.

7. A long term investment in stock was purchased for $16,000.

8. Bonds payable of $50,000 were issued.

9. Cash dividends of $25,000 were declared and paid.

10. Treasury stock was purchased at a cost of $11,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012.

(b) Prepare a balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

the comparative balance sheets of menachem corporation at the beginning and end of t 566011

E 18 The comparative balance sheets of Menachem Corporation at the beginning and end of the year 2012 appear below.

MENACHEM CORPORATION
BALANCE SHEETS

Assets

Dec.31,2012

Jan.1,2012

Inc./Dec.

Cash

$22,000

$13,000

$ 9,000 Inc.

Accounts receivable

106,000

88,000

18,000 Inc.

Equipment

37,000

22,000

15,000 Inc.

Less: Accumulated depreciation equipment

17,000

11,000

6,000 Inc.

Total

$148,000

$112,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable

$20,000

$15,000

5,000 Inc.

Common stock

100,000

80,000

20,000 Inc.

Retained earnings

28,000

17,000

11,000 Inc.

Total

$148,000

$112,000

Net income of $34,000 was reported, and dividends of $23,000 were paid in 2012. New equipment was purchased and none was sold.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year 2012.

(b) Compute the current ratio (current assets 4 current liabilities) as of January 1, 2012, and December 31, 2012, and compute free cash flow for the year 2012.

(c) In light of the analysis in (b), comment on Menachem’s liquidity and financial flexibility.

preparation of a classified balance sheet periodic inventory presented below is a l 566012

P5 1 (Preparation of a Classified Balance Sheet, Periodic Inventory) Presented below is a list of accounts in alphabetical order.

Accounts Receivable

Land

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings

Land for Future Plant Site

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

Loss from Flood

Advances to Employees

Notes Payable (due next year)

Advertising Expense

Patents

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

Payroll Taxes Payable

Bond Sinking Fund

Pension Obligations

Bonds Payable

Petty Cash

Buildings

Preferred Stock

Cash in Bank

Premium on Bonds Payable

Cash on Hand

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock

Cash Surrender Value of Life Insurance

Prepaid Rent

Commission Expense

Purchases

Common Stock

Purchase Returns and Allowances

Copyrights

Retained Earnings

Debt Investments (trading)

Sales

Dividends Payable

Sales Discounts

Equipment

Salaries and Wages Expense (sales)

Gain on Sale of Equipment

Salaries and Wages Payable

Interest Receivable

Transportation in

Inventory—Beginning

Treasury Stock (at cost)

Inventory—Ending

Unearned Subscriptions Revenue

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form.

presented below are a number of balance sheet items for montoya inc for the current 566013

P5 2 (Balance Sheet Preparation) Presented below are a number of balance sheet items for Montoya, Inc., for the current year, 2012.

Goodwill

$ 125,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

$ 292,000

Payroll taxes payable

177,591

Inventory

239,800

Bonds payable

300,000

Rent payable (short term)

45,000

Discount on bonds payable

15,000

Income tax payable

98,362

Cash

360,000

Rent payable (long term)

480,000

Land

480,000

Common stock, $1 par value

200,000

Notes receivable

445,700

Preferred stock, $10 par value

150,000

Notes payable (to banks)

265,000

Prepaid expenses

87,920

Accounts payable

490,000

Equipment

1,470,000

Retained earnings

?

Equity investments (trading)

121,000

Income taxes receivable

97,630

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

270,200

Unsecured notes payable (long term)

1,600,000

Buildings

1,640,000

Instructions

Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form. Common stock authorized was 400,000 shares, and preferred stock authorized was 20,000 shares. Assume that notes receivable and notes payable are short term, unless stated otherwise. Cost and fair value of equity investments (trading) are the same.

determine the accounting income of the machine 565883

Hollywood Games operates a video arcade in the Lincoln Mall. The owner of Hollywood Games, Joe Lynch, is considering acquiring a new “centerpiece” video machine. The cost of the new equipment would be $60,000. The equipment would have an expected life of five years and no salvage value .Straight line depreciation would be used for both financial and tax purposes.

Mr. Lynch expects the new machine to generate an additional $25,000 per year in net, pretax cash flows. The cost of capital and tax rate for Mr. Lynchare 10 and 28 percent, respectively.

a. Determine the after tax cash flows from the new machine.

b. Determine the net present value of the machine.

c. Determine the accounting income of the machine.

d. Determine the accounting rate of return and the payback period on an after tax basis.

prepare a brief oral report in which you identify other cost saving sand other costs 565884

In 1996 General Motors announced that it was preparing to invest $850 million to update its metal stamping operations. The new metal stamping operations would be more flexible and less labor intensive than current equipment. GM’s Metal Fabricating Division expected to reduce employment of hourly workers by 30,000 and salaried workers by 4,000. Much of the new investment would be spent on modern transfer presses. Unlike some of GM’s older presses, such units accept different dies, or forms for shaping sheet metal. As Japanese automakers proved, such flexible machinery is much more efficient, because it allows an auto maker to alter its production mix to match what’s selling and to compensate for breakdowns.

a. Assume that the only justification for upgrading the metal stamping machinery is the labor costs to be saved; also, assume the average pay of the 34,000 workers to be displaced by the upgraded machinery is $25,000. Compute the payback period for the upgrade project (ignore tax).

b. The two major financial dimensions of the upgrade project mentioned in the news article were the initial cost of $850 million and the labor cost savings. Prepare a brief oral report in which you identify other cost saving sand other costs of the upgrade project.

in the presentation of your response distinguish between those factors that tend to 565885

Lenin’s Linen provides laundered items to various commercial and service establishments in a large metropolitan city. Lenin’s is scheduled to acquire new cleaning equipment in mid 2001 that should provide some operating efficiencies. The new equipment would enable Lenin’s to increase the volume of laundry it handles without any increase in labor costs. In addition, the estimated maintenance costs in terms of pounds of laundry would be reduced slightly with the new equipment. The new equipment was justified on the basis not only of reduced cost but also of expected increase in demand starting in late 2001. However, since the original forecast was prepared, several potential new customers have either delayed or discontinued their own expansion plans in the market area that is serviced by Lenin’s. The most recent forecast indicates that no great increase in demand can be expected until late 2002 or early 2003. Identify and explain the factors that Lenin’s should consider in deciding whether to delay the investment in the new cleaning equipment. In the presentation of your response, distinguish between those factors that tend to indicate that the investment should be made as scheduled versus those that tend to indicate that the investment should be delayed.

drug companies rely on their research activities as the primary source of future rev 565886

Drug companies rely on their research activities as the primary source of future revenues and profits. The capital budget is the principal tool used to allocate resources to research activities. In 1996 Merck & Co., a giant in the drug industry, unveiled a list of its products in early development stages. The products included drugs to treat major maladies such as arthritis and cancer. Analysts who were present at the unveiling were unimpressed. Some of the analysts commented that it was not Merck’s long term prospects that were in question; rather, “its short term pipeline contains no clear breakthroughs. That poses potential problems for the bottom line, because the company’s core products—cardiovascular drugs—face increasing competition, and several new drugs have fallen short of expectations.” Prepare a written report in which you explain how short term operations and plans are linked to long term operations and plans. This report should be directed at an audience that is expected to have little knowledge of formal business planning systems. The major point to be explained in your report is why stock analysts would meet Merck’s announcement of an aggressive R&D program with apathy because success of current operations is marginal.

determine the payback period ignore tax 565892

Black Hills Souvenir Show is considering expanding its building so it can stock additional merchandise for travelers and tourists. Store manager Allison Crowe anticipates that building expansion costs would be $90,000. Although Ms. Crowe would need to invest in additional inventory, her suppliers are willing to provide inventory on a consignment basis. Annual incremental fixed cash costs for the store expansion are expected to

Year

Amount

1

$ 5,550

2

7,200

3

7,200

4

7,200

5

7,950

6

9,450

7

9,750

8

11,250

Ms. Crowe estimates that annual cash inflows could be increased by $120,000 from the additional merchandise sales. The firm’s contribution margin is typically 20 percent of sales. Because of uncertainty about the future, Ms. Crowe does not want to consider any cash flows after eight years. The firm uses a 10 percent discount rate.

a. Construct a time line for the investment.

b. Determine the payback period (ignore tax).

c. Calculate the net present value of the project (ignore tax).

calculate the net present value of the van ignore tax 565893

Fred’s Freight line is considering the purchase of a new van to replace an existing truck. The van would cost $35,000 and would have a life of seven years with no salvage value at that time. The truck could be sold currently for $4,000; alternatively, if it is kept, it will have a remaining life of seven years with no salvage value. By purchasing the van, Fred’s would anticipate operating cost savings as follows:

Year

Amount

1

6,300

2

7,100

3

7,200

4

7,000

5

7,000

6

7,100

7

7,200

Fred’s cost of capital and capital project evaluation rate is 12 percent.

a. Construct a time line for the purchase of the van.

b. Determine the payback period (ignore tax).

c. Calculate the net present value of the van (ignore tax).

compute the irr for this project to the nearest percent based on the computed irr is 565894

Ted’s Bookkeeping Service prepares tax returns for individuals and small businesses. The firm employs four professional people in the tax practice. Currently, all tax returns are prepared on a manual basis. The firm’s owner, Ted Moore, is considering purchasing a computer system that would allow the firm to service all its existing clients with only three employees. Toe valuate the feasibility of the computerized system, Ted has gathered the following information:

Initial cost of the hardware and software

$32,000

Expected salvage value in 4 years

$0

Annual depreciation

$8,000

Annual operating costs

$4,500

Annual labor savings

$25,000

Expected life of the computer system

4 years

Ted has determined that he will invest in the computer system if its pretax payback period is less than 3.5 years and its pretax IRR exceeds 12 percent.

a. Compute the payback period for this investment. Does the payback meet Ted’s criterion? Explain.

b. Compute the IRR for this project to the nearest percent. Based on the computed IRR, is this project acceptable to Ted?

compute the profitability index for this potential investment ignore tax 565895

Houston Storage provides warehousing services for industrial firms. Usual items stored include records, inventory, and waste items. The company is evaluating more efficient methods of moving inventory items into and out of storage areas. One vendor has proposed to sell Houston Storage a conveyor system that would offer high speed routing of inventory items. The required equipment would have an initial cost of $2,500,000 including installation. The vendor has indicated that the machinery would have an expected life of seven years, with an estimated salvage value of $200,000. Below are estimates of the annual labor savings as well as the additional costs associated with the operation of the new equipment:

Annual labor cost savings (14 workers)

$465,000

Annual maintenance costs

20,000

Annual property taxes

14,000

Annual insurance costs

22,000

a. Assuming the company’s cost of capital is 9 percent, compute the NPV of the investment in the conveyor equipment (ignore tax).

b. Based on the NPV, should the company invest in the new machinery?

c. Compute the profitability index for this potential investment (ignore tax).

d. What other factors should the company consider in evaluating this investment?

what is the minimum amount by which net annual cash revenues must increase to make t 565897

The manager of Crain Street Cold Storage is considering the installation of a new refrigerated storage room. She has learned that the installation would require an initial cash outlay of $780,000. The installation would have an expected life of 20 years with no salvage value. The installation would increase annual labor and maintenance costs by $75,000. The firm’s cost of capital is estimated to be 11 percent, and its tax rate is 30 percent. The storage room is expected to generate net annual cash revenues (before tax, labor ,and maintenance costs) of $172,000.

a. Using straight line depreciation, calculate the after tax net present value of the storage room.

b. Based on your answer to part (a), is this investment financially acceptable? Explain.

c. What is the minimum amount by which net annual cash revenues must increase to make this an acceptable investment?

what is the minimum amount by which net annual cash revenues must increase to make t 565898

Forrester Fashions is considering the purchase of computerized clothes designing software. The software is expected to cost $160,000, have a useful life of five years, and have a zero salvage value at the end of its useful life. Assume tax regulations permit the following depreciation patterns for this asset:

Year

Percent Deductible

1

20

2

32

3

19

4

15

5

14

The company’s tax rate is 30 percent, and its cost of capital is 8 percent. The software is expected to generate the following cash savings and cash expenses:

Cash

Year

Cash Savings

Expenses

1

$60,000

$ 9,000

2

67,000

7,000

3

72,000

13,000

4

60,000

8,000

5

49,000

5,000

a. What is the minimum amount by which net annual cash revenues must increase to make this an acceptable investment?

b. Determine the following on an after tax basis: payback period, net present value, profitability index, and internal rate of return.

what is the fisher rate for the two projects 565899

Florida Financial Consultants is expanding operations and the firm’s president, Ms. Hillary Rose, is trying to make a decision about new office space. The following are Ms. Rose’s options:

Maple Commercial Plaza

5,000 square feet; cost, $800,000; useful life, 10 years; salvage, $400,000

High Tower

20,000 square feet; cost, $3,400,000; useful life, 10 years; salvage, $1,500,000

If the Maple Commercial Plaza is purchased, the company will occupy all of the space. If High Tower is purchased, the extra space will be rented for $620,000 per year. If purchased, either building will be depreciated on a straight line basis. For tax purposes, the buildings would be depreciated assuming a 25 year life. By purchasing either building, the company will save $210,000 annually in rental payments. All other costs of the two purchases (such as land cost) are expected to be the same. The firm’s tax rate is 40 percent.

a. Determine the before tax net cash flows from each project for each year.

b. Determine the after tax cash flows from each project for each year.

c. Determine the net present value for each project if the cost of capital for

Florida Financial Consultants is 11 percent. Which purchase is the better investment based on the NPV method?

d. Ms. Rose is concerned about the ability to rent the excess space in High Tower for the 10 year period. To compute the NPV for that portion of the project’s cash flows, she has decided to use a discount rate of 20 percent to compensate for risk. Compute the NPV and determine which investment is more acceptable.

Project A

Project B

Investment

$96,000

$160,000

After tax cash flows

$25,600

$30,400

Asset life

6 years

10 years

a. Determine the net present value, profitability index, and internal rate of return for Projects A and B.

b. Using the answers to part (a), which is the more acceptable project? Why?

c. What is the Fisher rate for the two projects?

determine the net present value profitability index and internal rate of return for 565900

Following are the capital projects being considered by the management of Up Town Productions:

Annual After Tax

Number of

Project

Cost

Cash Flows

Years

Film studios

$18,000,000

$2,800,000

15

Cameras and equipment

3,200,000

800,000

8

Land improvement

5,000,000

1,180,000

10

Motion picture #1

17,800,000

4,970,000

5

Motion picture #2

11,400,000

3,920,000

4

Motion picture #3

7,800,000

2,100,000

7

Corporate aircraft

2,400,000

770,000

5

Assume that all projects have no salvage value and that the firm uses a discount rate of 10 percent. Company management has decided that only $25,000,000 can be spent in the current year for capital projects.

a. Determine the net present value, profitability index, and internal rate of return for each of the seven projects.

b. Rank the seven projects according to each method used in part (a).

c. Indicate how you would suggest to the management of Uptown Production that the money be spent. What would be the total net present value of your selected investments?

Following are the capital projects being considered by the management of Up Town Productions:

Annual After Tax

Number of

Project

Cost

Cash Flows

Years

Film studios

$18,000,000

$2,800,000

15

Cameras and equipment

3,200,000

800,000

8

Land improvement

5,000,000

1,180,000

10

Motion picture #1

17,800,000

4,970,000

5

Motion picture #2

11,400,000

3,920,000

4

Motion picture #3

7,800,000

2,100,000

7

Corporate aircraft

2,400,000

770,000

5

Assume that all projects have no salvage value and that the firm uses a discount rate of 10 percent. Company management has decided that only $25,000,000 can be spent in the current year for capital projects.

a. Determine the net present value, profitability index, and internal rate of return for each of the seven projects.

b. Rank the seven projects according to each method used in part (a).

c. Indicate how you would suggest to the management of Uptown Production that the money be spent. What would be the total net present value of your selected investments?

the chain rsquo s tax rate is estimated at 35 percent for all years 565901

;A 50 room motel is for sale in Houston and is being considered by the Lone Star Motel Chain as an investment. The current owners indicate that the occupancy of the motel averages 80 percent each day of the year that the motel is open. The motel is open 300 days per year. Each room rents for $75 per day, and variable cash operating costs are $10 per day that the room is occupied. Fixed annual cash operating costs are $100,000. An acquisition price of $2,000,000 is being offered by Lone Star. The chain plans on keeping the motel for 14 years and then disposing of it. Because the market for motels is so difficult to predict, Lone Star estimates the salvage value to be zero at the time of disposal. Depreciation will be taken on a straight line basis for tax purposes. In making the following computations, assume that there will be no tax consequences of the sale in 14 years. The chain’s tax rate is estimated at 35 percent for all years.

a. Determine the after tax net present value of the motel to Lone Star, assuming a cost of capital rate of 13 percent.

b. What is the highest level that the discount rate can be and still allow this project to be considered acceptable by Lone Star? If this discount rate exceeds the highest rate shown in the table (20 percent), simply state this fact and provide supporting computations and reasons.

c. How small can the net after tax cash flows be and still allow the project to be considered acceptable by Lone Star, assuming a cost of capital rate of 13 percent?

d. What is the shortest number of years for which the net after tax cash flows can be received and still have the project be considered acceptable?

e. Assume that the answer to part (c) is $217,425. If all costs remain as they are currently stated and the motel continues to stay open 300 days per year, approximately how many rooms would have to be rented each night to achieve this level of cash flows?

determine the projected npv on the product line investment 565902

Ten years ago, based on a before tax NPV analysis, Johnson Wholesaling decided to add a new product line. The data used in the analysis were as follows:

Discount rate

12%

Life of product line

10 years

Annual sales increase:

Years 1–4

$125,000

Years 5–8

$175,000

Years 9–10

$100,000

Annual fixed cash costs

$20,000

Contribution margin ratio

40%

Cost of production equipment

$125,000

Investment in working capital

$10,000

Salvage value

$0

Because the product line was discontinued this year, corporate managers decided to conduct a post investment audit to assess the accuracy of their planning process. Accordingly, the actual cash flows generated from the product line were estimated to be as follows:

Actual Investment

Production equipment

$120,000

Working capital

17,500

Total

$137,500

Actual Revenues

Years 1–4

$110,000

Years 5–8

$200,000

Years 9–10

$105,000

Actual Fixed Cash Costs

Years 1–4

$15,000

Years 5–8

$17,500

Years 9–10

$25,000

Actual contribution margin ratio

35%

Actual salvage value

$5,000

Actual cost of capital

12%

a. Determine the projected NPV on the product line investment.

b. Determine the NPV of the project based on the post investment audit.

c. Identify the factors that are most responsible for the differences between the projected NPV and the post investment audit NPV.

calculate the net present value ignore tax 565903

Caldwell Department Stores is a growing business that is presently considering adding a new product line. The firm would be required by the manufacturer to incur setup costs of $1,600,000 to handle the new product line. Caldwell has estimated that the product line would have an expected life of eight years. Following is a schedule of revenues and annual fixed operating expenses (including $200,000 of annual depreciation on the investment) associated with the new product line. Variable costs are estimated to average 65 percent of revenues. All revenues are collected as earned. All expenses shown, except for the included amount of straight line depreciation,are paid in cash when incurred.

Year

Revenues

Expenses

1

$ 720,000

$360,000

2

800,000

320,000

3

960,000

320,000

4

1,280,000

360,000

5

1,600,000

320,000

6

1,600,000

320,000

7

1,120,000

320,000

8

680,000

280,000

The company has a cost of capital of 13 percent. Management uses this rate in discounting cash flows for evaluating capital projects.

a. Calculate the accounting rate of return (ignore tax).

b. Calculate the payback period (ignore tax).

c. Calculate the net present value (ignore tax).

calculate the annual incremental after tax cash flows for michigan motor company rsq 565906

Michigan Motor Company is considering a proposal to acquire new manufacturing equipment. The new equipment has the same capacity as the current equipment but will provide operating efficiencies in direct and indirect labor, direct material usage, indirect supplies, and power. Consequently, the savings in operating costs are estimated to be $150,000 annually. The new equipment will cost $300,000 and will be purchased at the beginning of the year when the project is started. The equipment dealer is certain that the equipment will be operational during the second quarter of the year it is installed. Therefore, 60 percent of the estimated annual savings can be obtained in the first year. Michigan Motor will incur a one time expense of $30,000 to transfer the production activities from the old equipment to the new equipment. No loss of sales will occur, however, because the plant is large enough to install the new equipment without disrupting operations of the current equipment. The equipment dealer states that most companies use a 4 year life when depreciating this equipment. The current equipment has been fully depreciated and is carried in the accounts at zero book value. Management has reviewed the condition of the current equipment and has concluded that it can be used an additional four years. Michigan Motor would receive $5,000 net of removal costs if it elected to buy the new equipment and dispose of its current equipment at this time. Michigan Motor currently leases its manufacturing plant. The annual lease payments are $60,000. The lease, which will have four years remaining when the equipment installation would begin, is not renewable. Michigan Motor would be required to remove any equipment in the plant at the end of the lease. The cost of equipment removal is expected to equal the salvage value of either the old or the new equipment at the time of removal. The company uses the sum of the years’ digits depreciation method for tax purposes. A full year’s depreciation is taken in the first year an asset is put into use. The company is subject to a 40 percent income tax rate and requires an after tax return of at least 12 percent on an investment.

a. Calculate the annual incremental after tax cash flows for Michigan Motor Company’s proposal to acquire the new manufacturing equipment.

b. Calculate the net present value of Michigan Motor’s proposal to acquire the new manufacturing equipment using the cash flows calculated in part (a) and indicate what action Michigan Motor’s management should take. Assume all recurring cash flows occur at the end of the year.

discuss the benefits a company could derive from a post completion audit program for 565907

Smyth Brothers Inc. has formal policies and procedures to screen and approve capital projects. Proposed capital projects are classified as one of the following types:

1. Expansion requiring new plant and equipment

2. Expansion by replacement of present equipment with more productive Equipment

3. Replacement of old equipment with new equipment of similar quality All expansion projects and replacement projects that will cost more than $50,000 must be submitted to the top management capital investment committee for approval. The investment committee evaluates proposed projects considering the costs and benefits outlined in the supporting proposal and the long range effects on the company. The projected revenue and/or expense effects of the projects, once operational, are included in the proposal. Once a project is accepted, the committee approves an expenditure budget for the project from its inception until it becomes operational. The expenditures required each year for the expansions or replacements are also incorporated into Smyth Brothers’ annual budget procedure. The budgeted revenue and/or cost effects of the projects, for the periods in which they become operational, are incorporated into the five year forecast. Smyth Brothers Inc. does not have a procedure for evaluating projects once they have been implemented and become operational. The vice president of finance has recommended that Smyth Brothers establish a post completion audit program to evaluate its capital expenditure projects.

a. Discuss the benefits a company could derive from a post completion audit program for capital expenditure projects.

b. Discuss the practical difficulties in collecting and accumulating information that would be used to evaluate a capital project once it becomes operational. (CMA adapted)

as an accountant how could you contribute to the quality of investment analysis of 565908

Traditionally, capital budgeting in health care has tended to focus on projected financial returns from investments. To justify the commitment of capital resources, a proposed investment must be shown to provide sufficient benefits in the form of additional revenues or reduced expenses. A hospital, for example, might invest in an automated drug dispensing system if forecasted savings from reduced labor and supplies are greater than the initial outlay for the equipment. Present value calculations are used to weigh immediate costs against eventual benefits over the life of an investment. This approach, however, discourages strategic investments in areas where long term benefits are difficult to measure in financial terms, such as investing in healthcare technologies to improve quality of care or patient satisfaction. Upgrading diagnostic equipment, for example, may be seen as a way to enhance revenues over the long term based on the rationale that patients and physicians are drawn to healthcare organizations that demonstrate a commitment to providing high quality care. The problem with such an investment from a traditional capital budgeting perspective is that it is difficult to predict when this benefit will occur or how large it will be. Similarly, capital investments whose objectives are to attract physicians or boost an organization’s market share eventually may increase revenues or reduce costs, but are hard to justify solely in terms of short term financial benefits.

a. Assume, as the article states, that health care entities tend to not invest in strategic investments in areas where long term benefits are difficult to measure in financial terms. Should these firms invest in certain assets even ifthey cannot measure the outcomes financially? Explain.

b. As an accountant, how could you contribute to the quality of investment analysis of a health care provider?

in addition to labor rates what other factors might be considered in global firms rs 565909

In February 1996, the German firm, Jos. L. Meyer GmbH was negotiating for the right to build ships in the United States. The family owned German shipbuilder, which specializes in cruise ships, gas tankers and other complex, laborintensive vessels would employ as many as 2,000 workers at the U.S. shipyard where wages and benefit rates would be significantly lower than in Germany. Under the plan being negotiated, Meyer Werft (as the company is known) would invest $60 million in the Philadelphia yard and seek additional private and public funding of about $300 million. The money would be used to enclose one of the yard’s huge drydocks and to fund worker retraining and facility improvements.

a. For labor intensive operations, such as shipbuilding, how would labor quality considerations affect capital budgeting (and location) decisions of firms with global operations?

b. In addition to labor rates, what other factors might be considered in global firms’ location decisions for new capital investment?

discuss why some consumers might find leasing a car to be more appealing than purcha 565912

Although they should be considered independently, often the investing and financing decisions are considered together. It”s easy to understand the allure of auto leasing: Consumers make lower monthly payments; dealers gain volume, move expensive inventory—and keep customers. So it”s not surprising to find that one of every three new cars on the road today is leased. The truth is, dealers have profited more from leasing than from selling. An Atlanta based leasing expert says, “On a sale a dealer makes about $1,200 to $1,500 in profit. On a lease, it might be $2,500 or $3,000.” That”s fine, he notes, “unless it”s done deceptively.” Complex lease contracts combined with hidden costs complicate the decision to lease or buy. Only recently have key lease terms such as the cost of the car been disclosed to consumers. Laws in a handful of states, as well as Federal Reserve Board Regulation M, which became effective in October 1997, and leasing data available on the Internet are prompting dealers to make increased disclosures. Unfortunately, some fees, including the interest rate the dealer uses to calculate the lease payment, known in the industry as the money factor, still remain unknown to the consumer. a. Discuss why some consumers might find leasing a car to be more appealing than purchasing one. b. Even if not required by law, is the practice of not disclosing lease information ethical? Discuss. c. As an accountant, how could you aid a client in a car buying situation?

what will be the projected balance in retained earnings at february 29 2000 565834

(Cash budget) The January 31, 1999, balance sheet of Sara’s Plaques follows:

Liabilities and

Assets Stockholders’ Equity

Cash $ 12,000 Accounts Payable $ 70,200

Accounts Receivable (Net of Allowance

for Uncollectibles of $1,440) 34,560

Inventory 52,400 Common Stock $90,000

Plant Assets (Net of Accumulated Retained Earnings

Depreciation of $60,000) 36,000 (Deficit) (25,240) 64,760

Total Liabilities and Total Assets $134,960 Stockholders’ Equity $134,960

Additional information about the company includes the following:

• Expected sales for February and March are $120,000 and $130,000, respectively.

• The collection pattern from the month of sale forward is 50 percent, 48 percent, and 2 percent uncollectible.

• Cost of goods sold is 75 percent of sales.

• Purchases each month are 55 percent of the current month’s sales and 45 percent of the next month’s projected sales. All purchases are paid for in full in the month following purchase.

• Other cash expenses each month are $21,500. The only noncash expense each month is $4,000 of depreciation.

a. What are budgeted cash collections for February 2000?

b. What will be the Inventory balance at February 29, 2000?

c. What will be the projected balance in Retained Earnings at February 29, 2000?

d. If the company wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $8,000, how much will be available for investment or need to be borrowed at the end of February 2000?

what will be the budgeted dollar value of tim rsquo s inventory on august 31 2000 565835

(Cash budget) Tim’s Department Store typically makes 50 percent of its sales on credit. Sales are billed twice monthly, on the 10th of the month for the last half of the prior month’s sales and on the 20th of the month for the first half of the current month’s sales. All sales are made with terms of 2/10, n/30. Based on past experience, Accounts Receivable are collected as follows:

Within the discount period

80%

On the 30th day

18%

Uncollectible

2%

Sales for May 2000 were $600,000 and projected sales for the next four months Are

June

$800,000

July

700,000

August

800,000

September

600,000

Tim’s average profit margin on its products is 30 percent of selling price. Tim’s purchases merchandise for resale to meet the current month’s sales demand and to maintain a desired monthly ending inventory of 25 percent of the next month’s sales. All purchases are on account with terms of n/30. Tim’ pays for one half of a month’s purchases in the month of purchase and the other half in the month following the purchase. All sales and purchases occur evenly throughout the month.

a. How much cash can Tim’s plan to collect from Accounts Receivable during July 2000?

b. How much cash can Tim’s plan to collect in September 2000 from sales made in August?

c. What will be the budgeted dollar value of Tim’s inventory on August 31, 2000?

d. How much merchandise should Tim’s plan to purchase during June 2000?

e. What are Tim’s budgeted cash payments for merchandise during August 2000? (CMA adapted)

showing the cash expected to be available to pay the claims of the general creditors 565836

(Cash budget) Andrews Manufacturing has incurred substantial losses for several years and has decided to declare bankruptcy. The company petitioned the court for protection from creditors on March 31, 1999, and submitted the following

balance sheet:

ANDREWS MANUFACTURING

Balance Sheet

March 31, 1999

ANDREWS MANUFACTURING

Book Value

Liquidation Value

Balance Sheet

$100,000

$ 50,000

March 31, 1999

90,000

40,000

Plant Assets (Net)

150,000

160,000

Totals

$340,000

$250,000

The liabilities and stockholders’ equity of Andrews at this date are

Accounts Payable—General Creditors

$600,000

Common Stock

60,000

Retained Earnings Deficit

(320,000)

Total

$340,000

Andrews’ management informed the court that the company has developed a new product and that a prospective customer is willing to sign a contract for the purchase of 10,000 units of this product during the year ending March 31, 2000, 12,000 units during the year ending March 31, 2001, and 15,000 units during the year ending March 31, 2002, at a price of $90 per unit. This product can be manufactured using Andrews’ present facilities. Monthly production with immediate delivery is expected to be uniform within each year. Receivables are expected to be collected during the calendar month following g sales. Unit production costs of the new product are estimated as follows:

Direct material

$20

Direct labor

30

Variable overhead

10

Fixed costs of $130,000 (excluding depreciation) are estimated per year. Purchases of direct material will be paid during the calendar month following purchase. Fixed costs, direct labor, and variable overhead will be paid as incurred. Inventory of direct material will be equal to 60 days’ usage. After the first month of operations, 30 days’ usage will be ordered each month The general creditors have agreed to reduce their total claims to 60% of their March 31, 1999, balances under the following conditions:

• Existing accounts receivable and inventories are to be liquidated immediately, with the proceeds turned over to the general creditors.

• The reduced balance of accounts payable is to be paid as cash is generated from future operations, but no later than March 31, 2001. No interest will be paid on these obligations. Under this proposed plan, the general creditors would receive $110,000 more than the current liquidation value of Andrews’ assets. The court has engaged you to determine the feasibility of this plan. Ignoring any need to borrow and repay short term funds for working capital purposes, prepare a cash budget for the years ending March 31, 2000 and 2001, showing the cash expected to be available to pay the claims of the general creditors, payments to general creditors, and the cash remaining after payment of claims. (CPA adapted)

what is grecian urns rsquo normal contribution margin ratio 565837

(Budgeted sales and S&A; other computations) Grecian Urns has projected Cost of Goods Sold for June 2000 of $960,000. Of this amount, $60,000 represents fixed overhead costs. Total variable costs for the company each month average 70 percent of sales. The company’s cost to retail (CGS to sales) percentage is 60 percent and the company normally shows a 15 percent rate of net income on sales. All purchases and expenses (except depreciation) are paid in cash: 55 percent in the month incurred and 45 percent in the following month. Depreciationis $30,000 per month.

a. What are Grecian Urns’ expected sales for June?

b. What are Grecian Urns’ expected variable selling and administrative costsfor June?

c. What is Grecian Urns’ normal contribution margin ratio?

d. What are Grecian Urns’ total fixed costs?

e. Grecian Urns normally collects 45 percent of its sales in the month of sale and the rest in the next month. What are expected cash receipts and disbursements related only to June’s transactions?

what would be the required selling price for the company to earn income before tax e 565838

(Pro forma results) The James Company is attempting to set a new selling price for its single product, a metal file cabinet, for the upcoming year. The current variable production cost is $40 per unit and total fixed costs are $2,000,000. Fixed manufacturing costs are 80 percent of total fixed costs and are allocated to the product based on the number of units produced. There are no variable selling or administrative costs. Variable and fixed costs are expected to increase by 15 and 8 percent, respectively, next year. Estimated production and sales are 200,000 units. Selling price is normally set at full production cost plus 25 percent.

a. What is the expected full production cost per unit of James’s file cabinets for next year?

b. What is the expected selling price of the product?

c. What is pro forma income before tax using the selling price computed in part (b)?

d. What would be the required selling price for the company to earn income before tax equal to 25 percent of sales?

projected direct labor requirements for 2000 and rates are as follows 565839

Reliable Appliance Company produces and sells two kitchen appliances: mixers and doughmakers. In July 1999, Reliable’s budget department gathered the following data to meet budget requirements for 2000.

2000 PROJECTED SALES

Product

Units

Price

Mixers

60,000

$ 50

Doughmakers

40,000

120

2000 INVENTORIES (UNITS)

Expected

Expected

Product

1/1/00

1/1/00

Mixers

15,000

15,000

Doughmakers

4,000

4,000

To produce one unit of each product, the following major internal components are used (in addition to the plastic housing for products, which is subcontracted in a subsequent operation):

Component

Mixer

Doughmaker

Motor

1

1

Beater

2

4

Fuse

2

3

Projected data for 2000 with respect to components are as follows:

Anticipated

Expected Inventory

Desired Inventory

Component

Purchase Price

1/1/00

12/31/00

Motor

$15.00

2,000

3,600 units

Beater

1.25

21,000

24,000 units

Fuse

2.00

6,000

7,500 units

Projected direct labor requirements for 2000 and rates are as follows:

Product

Hours per Unit

Rate per Hour

Mixers

2

$7

Doughmakers

3

9

Overhead is applied at a rate of $5 per direct labor hour. Based on the above projections and budget requirements for 2000 for mixers and doughmakers, prepare the following budgets for 2000:

a. Sales budget (in dollars).

b. Production budget (in units).

c. Internal components purchases budget (in units).

d. Internal components purchases budget (in dollars).

e. Direct labor budget (in dollars). (CPA adapted)

estimated sales in gallons of dye for january through may 2000 are shown below 565840

Sopchoppy Company manufactures a red industrialdye. The company is preparing its 2000 master budget and has presented you with the following information.

1. The December 31, 1999, balance sheet for the company is shown below.

SOPCHOPPY COMPANY

Balance Sheet

December 31, 1999

Assets

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Cash

$ 5,080

Notes Payable

$ 25,000

Accounts Receivable

26,500

Accounts Payable

2,148

Raw Materials Inventory

800

Dividends Payable

10,000

Finished Goods Inventory

2,104

Total Liabilities

$ 37,148

Prepaid Insurance

1,200

Common Stock

$100,000

Building

$300,000

Paid in Capital

50,000

Accumulated Depreciation

(20,000)

280,000

Retained Earnings

128,536

278,536

Total Liabilities and

Total Assets

$315,684

Stockholders’ Equity

$315,684

2. The Accounts Receivable balance at 12/31/99 represents the remaining balances of November and December credit sales. Sales were $70,000 and $65,000, respectively, in those two months.

3. Estimated sales in gallons of dye for January through May 2000 are shown Below

January

8,000

February

10,000

March

15,000

April

12,000

May

11,000

Each gallon of dye sells for $12.

4. The collection pattern for accounts receivable is as follows: 70 percent in the month of sale; 20 percent in the first month after the sale; 10 percent in the second month after the sale. Sopchoppy expects no bad debts and no customers are given cash discounts.

5. Each gallon of dye has the following standard quantities and costs for direct materials and direct labor: 1.2 gallons of direct material (some evaporation occurs during processing) @ $0.80 per gallon $0.96 1/2 hour of direct labor @ $6 per hour 3.00 Variable overhead is applied to the product on a machine hour basis. It takes 5 hours of machine time to process 1 gallon of dye. The variable overhead rate is $0.06 per machine hour; VOH consists entirely of utility costs. Total annual fixed overhead is $120,000; it is applied at $1.00 per gallon based on an expected annual capacity of 120,000 gallons. Fixed overhead per year is composed of the following costs:

Salaries

$78,000

Utilities

12,000

Insurance—factory

2,400

Depreciation—factory

27,600

Fixed overhead is incurred evenly throughout the year.

6. There is no beginning inventory of Work in Process. All work in process is completed in the period in which it is started. Raw Materials Inventory at the beginning of the year consists of 1,000 gallons of direct material at a standard cost of $0.80 per gallon. There are 400 gallons of dye in Finished Goods Inventory at the beginning of the year carried at a standard cost of $5.26 per gallon: Direct Material, $0.96; Direct Labor, $3.00; Variable Overhead, $0.30; and Fixed Overhead, $1.00.

7. Accounts Payable relates solely to raw material. Accounts Payable are paid 60 percent in the month of purchase and 40 percent in the month after purchase. No discounts are given for prompt payment.

8. The dividend will be paid in January 2000.

9. A new piece of equipment costing $9,000 will be purchased on March 1, 2000. Payment of 80 percent will be made in March and 20 percent in April. The equipment will have no salvage value and has a useful life of three years.

10. The note payable has a 12 percent interest rate; interest is paid at the end of each month. The principal of the note is paid off as cash is available to do so.

11. Sopchoppy’s management has set a minimum cash balance at $5,000. Investments and borrowings are made in even $100 amounts. Investments will earn 9 percent per year.

12. The ending Finished Goods Inventory should be 5 percent of the next month’s needs. This is not true at the beginning of 2000 due to a miscalculation in sales for December. The ending inventory of raw materials should be 5 percent of the next month’s needs.

13. Selling and administrative costs per month are as follows: salaries, $18,000; rent, $7,000; and utilities, $800. These costs are paid in cash as they are incurred. Prepare a master budget for each month of the first quarter of 2000 and pro forma financial statements as of the end of the first quarter of 2000.

determine the minimum level of gross billings that would allow the partners to reali 565841

Harvey & Company, a local accounting firm, has a formal budgeting system. The firm is comprised of five partners, two managers, four seniors, two secretaries, and two bookkeepers. The budgeting process has a bottom line focus; that is, the budget and planning process= continues to iterate and evolve until an acceptable budgeted net income is obtained. The determination of an acceptable level of net income is based on two factors: (1) the amount of salary the partners could generate if they were employed elsewhere and (2) a reasonable return on the partners’ investment in the firm’s net assets. For 2001, after careful consideration of alternative employment opportunities, the partners agreed that

Partner 1

$150,000

Partner 2

225,000

Partner 3

110,000

Partner 4

90,000

Partner 5

125,000

Total

$700,000

The second input to determination of the desired net income level is more complex. This part of the desired net income is based on the value of the net assets owned by the accounting firm. The partners have identified two major categories of assets: tangible assets and intangible assets. The partners have agreed that the net tangible assets are worth $230,000. The intangible assets, consisting mostly of the accounting practice itself, are worth 1.1 times gross fees billed in 2000. In 2000, the firm’s gross billings were $1,615,000. The partners have also agreed that a reasonable rate of return on the net assets of the accounting firm is 12 percent. Thus, the partners’ desired net income from return on investment is as follows:

Tangible assets

$ 230,000

Intangible assets ($1,615,000 110%)

1,776,500

Total investment

$2,006,500

Times rate of return

0.12

Equals required dollar return

$ 240,780

The experience of the accounting firm indicates that other operating costs are incurred as follows:

Fixed Expenses (per year):

Salaries (other than partners)

$300,000

Overhead

125,000

Variable Expenses:

Overhead

15% of gross billings

Client service

5% of gross billings

a. Determine the minimum level of gross billings that would allow the partners to realize their net income objective. Prepare a budget of costs and revenues at that level. (continued)

b. If the partners believe that the level of billings you have projected in part (a) is not feasible given the time constraints at the partner, manager, and senior levels, what changes can they make to the budget to preserve the desired level of net income?

prepare a budget of the annual cash receipts and disbursements for 2000 565842

Collegiate Management Education (CME), Inc., is a nonprofit organization that sponsors a wide variety of management seminars throughout the Southwest. In addition, it is heavily involved in research into improved methods of teaching and motivating college administrators. The seminar activity is largely supported by fees, and the research program is supported by membership dues. CME operates on a calendar year basis and is finalizing the budget for 2000. The following information has been taken from approved plans, which are still tentative at this time: SEMINAR PROGRAM Revenue—The scheduled number of programs should produce $12,000,000 of revenue for the year. Each program is budgeted to produce the same amount of revenue. The revenue is collected during the month the program is offered. The programs are scheduled during the basic academic year and are not held during June, July, August, and December. Twelve percent of the revenue is generated in each of the first five months of the year and the remainder is distributed evenly during September, October, and November. Direct expenses—The seminar expenses are made up of three types:

• Instructors’ fees are paid at the rate of 70 percent of seminar revenue in the month following the seminar. The instructors are considered independent contractors and are not eligible for CME employee benefits.

• Facilities fees total $5,600,000 for the year. They are the same for each program and are paid in the month the program is given.

• Annual promotional costs of $1,000,000 are spent equally in all months except June and July when there is no promotional effort. RESEARCH PROGRAM Research grants—The research program has a large number of projects nearing completion. The main research activity this year includes feasibility studies for new projects to be started in 2001. As a result, the total grant expense of $3,000,000 for 2000 is expected to be paid out at the rate of $500,000 per month during the first six months of the year.

SALARIES AND OTHER CME EXPENSES

• Office lease—annual amount of $240,000 paid monthly at the beginning of each month.

• General administrative expenses—$1,500,000 annually or $125,000 per month. These are paid in cash as incurred.

• Depreciation expense—$240,000 per year.

• General CME promotion—annual cost of $600,000, paid monthly.

• Salaries and benefits are as follows:

Number of

Monthly

Total Annual

Employees

Cash Salary

Salaries

1

$50,000

$ 50,000

3

40,000

120,000

4

30,000

120,000

15

25,000

375,000

5

15,000

75,000

22

10,000

220,000

50

$960,000

Employee benefits amount to $240,000 or 25 percent of annual salaries. Except for the pension contribution, the benefits are paid as salaries are paid. The annual pension payment of $24,000, based on 2.5 percent of total annual salaries, is due on April 15, 2000.

• Membership income—CME has 100,000 members who each pay an annual fee of $100. The fee for the calendar year is invoiced in late June.

• The collection schedule is as follows: July, 60 percent; August, 30 percent; September, 5 percent; and October, 5 percent.

• Capital expenditures—The capital expenditures program calls for a total of $510,000 in cash payments to be spread evenly over the first five months of 2000.

• Cash and temporary investments at January 1, 2000, are estimated at $750,000.

a. Prepare a budget of the annual cash receipts and disbursements for 2000.

b. Prepare a cash budget for CME for January 2000.

c. Using the information developed in parts (a) and (b), identify two important operating problems of CME. (CMA adapted)

an unexpected increase in billed hour volume over the original plan is the main reas 565843

The Mason Agency, a division of General Service Industries, offers consulting services to clients for a fee. The corporate management at General Service is pleased with the performance of the Mason Agency for the first nine months of the current year and has recommended that the division manager of the Mason Agency, Ramona Howell, submit a revised forecast for the remaining quarter, because the division has exceeded the annual year to date plan by 20 percent of operating income. An unexpected increase in billed hour volume over the original plan is the main reason for this gain in income. The original operating budget for the first three quarters for the Mason Agency is presented below.

2000 OPERATING BUDGET

1st

2nd

3rd

Total

Revenue:

Quarter

Quarter

Quarter

Consulting fees

9 Months

Management consulting

$ 315,000

$ 315,000

$ 315,000

$ 945,000

EDP consulting

421,875

421,875

421,875

1,265,625

Total

$ 736,875

$ 736,875

$ 736,875

$ 2,210,625

Other revenue

10,000

10,000

10,000

30,000

Total

$ 746,875

$ 746,875

$ 746,875

$ 2,240,625

Expenses:

Consultant salaries

$(386,750)

$(386,750)

$(386,750)

$(1,160,250)

Travel and entertainment

(45,625)

(45,625)

(45,625)

(136,875)

Administrative

(100,000)

(100,000)

(100,000)

(300,000)

Depreciation

(40,000)

(40,000)

(40,000)

(120,000)

Corporate allocation

(50,000)

(50,000)

(50,000)

(150,000)

Total

$(622,375)

$(622,375)

$(622,375)

$(1,867,125)

Operating income

$ 124,500

$ 124,500

$ 124,500

$ 373,500

When comparing the actuals for the first three quarters to the original plan, Howell analyzed the variances and will reflect the following information in her revised forecast for the fourth quarter. The division currently has 25 consultants on staff, 10 for management consulting and 15 for EDP consulting, and has hired 3 additional management consultants to start work at the beginning of the fourth quarter to meet the increased client demand. The hourly billing rate for consulting revenues will remain at $90 per hour for each management consultant and $75 per hour for each EDP consultant. However, due to the favorable increase in billing hour volume when compared to the plan, the hours for each consultant will be increased by 50 hours pe quarter. New employees are equally as capable as current employees and will be billed at the same rates. The budgeted annual salaries and actual annual salaries, paid monthly, are the same at $50,000 for a management consultant and 8 percent less for an EDP consultant. Corporate management has approved a merit increase of 10 percent at the beginning of the fourth quarter for all 25 existing consultants, but the new consultants will be compensated at the planned rate. The planned salary expense includes a provision for employee fringe benefits amounting to 30 percent of the annual salaries; however, the improvement of some corporatewide employee programs will increase the fringe benefit allocation to 40 percent. The original plan assumes a fixed hourly rate for travel and other related expenses for each billing hour of consulting. These are expenses that are not reimbursed by the client, and the previously determined hourly rate has proven to be adequate to cover these costs. Other revenues are derived from temporary rentals and interest income and remain unchanged for the fourth quarter. Administrative expenses have been favorable at 7 percent below the plan; this 7 percent savings on fourth quarter expenses will be reflected in the revised plan. Depreciation for office equipment and computers will stay constant at the projected straight line rate. Due to the favorable experience for the first three quarters and the division’s increased ability to absorb costs, the corporate management at General Service Industries has increased the corporate expense allocation by 50 percent.

a. Prepare a revised operating budget for the fourth quarter for the Mason Agency that Ramona Howell will present to General Service Industries. Be sure to furnish supporting calculations for all revised revenue and expense amounts.

b. Discuss the reasons why an organization would prepare a revised forecast.

c. Discuss your feelings about the 50 percent increase in corporate expense allocations. (CMA adapted)

match the numbered item on the right with the lettered item on the left 565862

Match the numbered item on the right with the lettered item on the left.

a. Annuity

1. A measure of the time that will elapse until an initial investment is recouped.

b. Cost of capital

2. A decision regarding what type of capital will be used to fund an investment.

c. Financing decision

3. A cash flow that is repeated in consecutive periods.

d. Investment decision

4. Present value of cash inflows less present value of cash outflows.

e. Judgmental method

5. A method of evaluating risk.

f. Mutually exclusive projects

6. A decision in which accepting one project requires acceptance of another.

g. Mutually inclusive projects

7. A future amount that has been discounted to the present.

h. Net present value

8. A decision in which the acceptance of one project implies the rejection of others.

i. Payback period

9. A decision about which assets a firm will acquire.

j. Present value

10. The discount rate often used in investment analysis.

28. (Terminology) Match the numbered item on the right with the lettered item on the left.

a. Capital asset

1. Effect of uncertainty.

b. Compound interest

2. Recapture of the original investment.

c. Discount rate

3. Sum plus its accumulated interest.

d. Future value

4. Interest earned on interest.

e. Hurdle rate

5. Discount rate that causes the NPV to equal $0.

f. Internal rate of return

6. Benchmark for evaluating the internal rate of return on a project.

g. Profitability index

7. Rate used to find the present value of a future amount.

h. Return of capital

8. Interest.

i. Return on capital

9. Long lived asset.

j. Risk

10. Derivation of NPV used to compare projects of unequal size.

compute the payback period under the revised circumstances ignore tax 565863

Payback period) Cimarron Manufacturing is considering the purchase of new production technology. The new technology would require an initial investment of $750,000 and have an expected life of 10 years. At the end of its life, the equipment would have no value. By installing the new equipment, the firm’s annual labor and quality costs would decline by $150,000.

a. Compute the payback period for this investment (ignore tax).

b. Assume, now, that the annual cost savings would vary according to the following schedule:

Annual Cost Savings

Years 1–5

$ 75,000

Years 6–10

100,000

Compute the payback period under the revised circumstances (ignore tax).

compute the payback period for the proposed new product line 565864

(Payback) John’s Clothing Store is considering a new product line: umbrellas and rain gear. The new product line would require an investment of $20,000 in equipment and fixtures and $40,000 in working capital. Store managers expect the following pattern of net cash inflows from the new product line over the life of the investment.

Year

Amount

1

$ 5,000

2

9,000

3

16,000

4

18,000

5

15,000

6

14,000

7

12,000

a. Compute the payback period for the proposed new product line. If John’s requires a four year pretax payback on its investments, should the company invest in the new product line? Explain.

b. Should John’s use any other capital project evaluation methods before making an investment decision? Explain.

what is the pretax net present value of this potential investment 565865

Seattle Fish Processing Company is considering the installation of an automated product handling system. The initial cost of such a system would be $400,000. This system would generate labor cost savings over its 10 year life as follows:

Annual Labor

Years

Cost Savings

1–2

$70,000

3–5

85,000

6–8

86,400

9–10

62,000

The system will have no salvage at the end of its 10 year life, and the company uses a discount rate of 12 percent. What is the pretax net present value of this potential investment?

compute the net present value of the machine investment ignore tax 565866

Atlanta Industrial has been approached by one of its customers about producing 400,000 special purpose parts for a new farm implement product. The parts would be required at a rate of 50,000 per year for eight years. T provide these parts, Atlanta Industrial would need to acquire several new production machines. These machines would cost $500,000 in total. The customer has offered to pay Atlanta Industrial $50 per unit for the parts. Managers at Atlanta Industrial have estimated that, in addition to the new machines, the company would incur the following costs to produce each part:

Direct labor

$ 8

Direct material

10

Variable overhead

4

Total

$22

In addition, annual fixed out of pocket costs would be $40,000. The new machinery would have no salvage value at the end of its eight year life. The company uses a discount rate of 8 percent to evaluate capital projects.

a. Compute the net present value of the machine investment (ignore tax).

b. Based on the NPV computed in part (a), is the machine a worthwhile investment? Explain.

c. Aside from the NPV, what other factors should Atlanta Industrial’s managers consider when making the investment decision?

compute the present value of the depreciation tax benefit assuming the company uses 565872

Kansas System Solutions operates consulting offices in three Midwest locations. The firm is presently considering an investment in a new mainframe computer and communication software. The computer would cost $1,000,000 and have an expected life of eight years. For tax purposes, the computer can be depreciated using the straight line method over five years. No salvage value is recognized in computing depreciation expense and no salvage is expected at the end of the life of the equipment. The company’s cost of capital is 10 percent and its tax rate is 35 percent.

a. Compute the present value of the depreciation tax benefit if the company uses the straight line depreciation method.

b. Compute the present value of the depreciation tax benefit assuming the company uses the double declining balance method of depreciation with a five year life.

c. Why is the depreciation tax benefit computed in part (b) larger than that computed in pa

what will be the after tax cash flow from the sale of the asset if its market value 565874

Delta Mechanical Systems purchased a material conveyor

system three years ago. Now, the company is going to sell the system and

acquire more advanced technology. Data relating to this equipme

Market value now

$15,000

Original cost

24,000

Book value now, for tax purposes

8,000

Book value now, for financial accounting purposes

15,000

Corporate tax rate

40%

a. How much depreciation has been claimed on the conveyor system for tax purposes? For financial accounting purposes?

b. What will be the after tax cash flow from the sale of this asset?

c. What will be the after tax cash flow from the sale of the asset if its market value is only $6,000?

what is the lowest acceptable annual cash flow that would allow this project to be c 565877

Quixote Wind Systems manufactures wind powered electricity generators. The company is considering investing in new technology to allow storage of wind generated power in batteries. Initial cost of the technology is expected to be $1,200,000. The investment is expected to increase after tax cash flows by $204,000 for 12 years. The company uses its 9 percent cost of capital rate to discount cash flows for purposes of capital budgeting.

a. What is the lowest acceptable annual cash flow that would allow this project to be considered acceptable (ignore tax)?

b. Assume the company is uncertain as to its actual cost of capital. What is the maximum the company’s cost of capital could be (rounded to the nearest whole percent) and still allow this project to be considered acceptable(ignore tax)?

what amount of investment should he make to achieve his goal ignore tax 565880

Use the tables in Appendix A to determine the answers to the following questions.

a. Elijah Santos wishes to have $50,000 in six years. He can make an investment today that will earn 8 percent each year, compounded annually. What amount of investment should he make to achieve his goal (ignore tax)?

b. Frederick Frazier is going to receive $200,000 on his 50th birthday, 15 years from today. Frederick has the opportunity to invest money today in a government backed security paying 8 percent, compounded semiannually. How much would he be willing to receive today instead of the $200,000 in 15 years (ignore tax)?

c. Marshall Dillon has $60,000 today that he intends to use as a down payment on a house. How much money did Marshall invest 10 years ago to have $60,000 now, if his investment earned 11 percent compounded annually(ignore tax)?

d. Pat Sawhack is the host of a television game show that gives away thousands of dollars each day. One prize on the show is an annuity, paid to the winner, in equal installments of $210,000 at the end of each year for the next five years. If the winner has an investment opportunity to earn 8 percent, semiannually, what present amount would the winner take in exchange for the annuity (ignore tax)? e. Ginger is going to be paid modeling fees for the next 10 years as follows: year 1, $30,000; year 2, $50,000; year 3, $60,000; years 4–8, $100,000; year 9, $70,000; and year 10, $45,000. Ginger can invest her money at 8 percent, compounded annually. What is the present value of her future modeling fees (ignore tax)?

f. Your friend has just won the lottery. The lottery will pay her $200,000 per year for the next five years. If this is the only asset owned by your friend, is she a millionaire (one who has a net worth of $1,000,000 or more)? Explain (ignore tax).

determine the after tax payback period for the project 565882

Kopy Korner is evaluating the purchase of a stateof the art desktop publishing system that costs $50,000. The company’s controller has estimated that the system will generate $16,000 of annual cash receipts for six years. At the end of that time, the system will have no salvage value. The controller also has estimated that cash operating costs will be $2,000 annually. The company’s tax rate is expected to be 35 percent during the life of the asset, and the company uses straight line depreciation.

a. Determine the annual after tax cash flows from the project.

b. Determine the after tax payback period for the project.

c. Determine the after tax accounting rate of return for the project. (Assume tax and financial accounting depreciation are equal.)

carla quentin started her own consulting firm quentin consulting on may 1 2012 the f 565785

Carla Quentin started her own consulting firm, Quentin Consulting, on May 1, 2012. The following transactions occurred during the month of May.

May

1

Carla invested $7,000 cash in the business.

2

Paid $900 for office rent for the month.

3

Purchased $600 of supplies on account.

5

Paid $125 to advertise in the County News.

9

Received $4,000 cash for services provided.

12

Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.

15

Performed $5,400 of services on account.

17

Paid $2,500 for employee salaries.

20

Paid for the supplies purchased on account on May 3.

23

Received a cash payment of $4,000 for services provided on account on May 15.

26

Borrowed $5,000 from the bank on a note payable.

29

Purchased office equipment for $4,200 on account.

30

Paid $275 for utilities.

Instructions

(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation using the following format.

Assets

Liabilities

Owner’s Equity

Accounts

Notes

Accounts

Owner’s

Owner’s

Date

Cash

+ Receivable

+ Supplies

+ Equipment

= Payable

+ Payable

+ Capital

Drawings

+ Revenues

Expenses

(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of May.

(c) Prepare a balance sheet at May 31, 2012.

financial statement information about four different companies is as follows 565786

Financial statement information about four different companies is as follows.

Brent

Lillibridge

Omar

Vizquel

Company

Company

Company

Company

January 1, 2012

Assets

$ 80,000

$ 90,000

(g)

$150,000

Liabilities

48,000

(d)

80,000

(j)

Owner’s equity

(a)

40,000

49,000

90,000

December 31, 2012

Assets

(b)

112,000

180,000

(k)

Liabilities

60,000

72,000

(h)

100,000

Owner’s equity

50,000

(e)

82,000

151,000

Owner’s equity changes in year

Additional investment

(c)

8,000

10,000

15,000

Drawings

15,000

(f)

12,000

10,000

Total revenues

350,000

410,000

(i)

500,000

Total expenses

333,000

385,000

350,000

(l)

Instructions

(a) Determine the missing amounts.

(b) Prepare the owner’s equity statement for Brent Company.

(c) Write a memorandum explaining the sequence for preparing financial statements and the interrelationship of the owner’s equity statement to the income statement and balance sheet.

identify specifi c asset liability and owner rsquo s equity accounts that cookie cre 565787

Natalie Koebel spent much of her childhood learning the art of cookie making from her grandmother. They passed many happy hours mastering every type of cookie imaginable and later creating new recipes that were both healthy and delicious. Now at the start of her second year in college, Natalie is investigating various possibilities for starting her own business as part of the requirements of the entrepreneurship program in which she is enrolled.

A long time friend insists that Natalie has to somehow include cookies in her business plan. After a series of brainstorming sessions, Natalie settles on the idea of operating a cookie making school. She will start on a part time basis and offer her services in people’s homes. Now that she has started thinking about it, the possibilities seem endless. During the fall, she will concentrate on holiday cookies. She will offer individual lessons and group sessions (which will probably be more entertainment than education for the participants). Natalie also decides to include children in her target market.

The fi rst diffi cult decision is coming up with the perfect name for her business. In the end, she settles on “Cookie Creations” and then moves on to more important issues.

Instructions

(a) What form of business organization—proprietorship, partnership, or corporation—do you recommend that Natalie use for her business? Discuss the benefi ts and weaknesses of each form and give the reasons for your choice.

(b) Will Natalie need accounting information? If yes, what information will she need and why? How often will she need this information?

(c) Identify specifi c asset, liability, and owner’s equity accounts that Cookie Creations will likely use to record its business transactions.

(d) Should Natalie open a separate bank account for the business? Why or why not?

explain to lynn benedict in a memo why the original balance sheet is incorrect and w 565791

Lynn Benedict, the bookkeeper for New York Company, has been trying to get the balance sheet to balance. The company’s balance sheet is shown below.

New York Company

Balance Sheet

For the Month Ended December 31, 2012

Assets

Liabilities

Equipment

$25,500

Owner’s capital

$26,000

Cash

9,000

Accounts receivable

(6,000)

Supplies

2,000

Owner’s drawings

(2,000)

Accounts payable

(8,000)

Notes payable

10,500

$28,500

$28,500

Instructions

Explain to Lynn Benedict in a memo why the original balance sheet is incorrect, and what should be done to correct it.

who are the stakeholders affected parties in this situation 565792

After numerous campus interviews, Steve Baden, a senior at Great Northern College, received two office interview invitations from the Baltimore offices of two large fi rms. Both fi rms offered to cover his out of pocket expenses (travel, hotel, and meals). He scheduled the interviews for both fi rms on the same day, one in the morning and one in the afternoon. At the conclusion of each interview, he submitted to both firms his total out of pocket expenses for the trip to Baltimore: mileage $112 (280 miles at $0.40), hotel $130, meals $36, and parking and tolls $18, for a total of $296. He believes this approach is appropriate. If he had made two trips, his cost would have been two times $296. He is also certain that neither fi rm knew he had visited the other on that same trip. Within ten days, Steve received two checks in the mail, each in the amount of $296.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders (affected parties) in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this case?

(c) What would you do in this situation?

the fasb has developed the financial accounting standards board accounting standards 565794

The FASB has developed the Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codifi cation (or more simply “the Codifi cation”). The FASB’s primary goal in developing the Codifi cation is to provide in one place all the authoritative literature related to a particular topic. To provide easy access to the Codifi cation, the FASB also developed the Financial Accounting Standards Board Codifi cation Research System (CRS). CRS is an online, real time database that provides easy access to the Codifi cation. The Codifi cation and the related CRS provide a topically organized structure, subdivided into topic, subtopics, sections, and paragraphs, using a numerical index system.

You may fi nd this system useful in your present and future studies, and so we have provided an opportunity to use this online system as part of the Broadening Your Perspective section.

Instructions

Academic access to the FASB Codifi cation is available through university subscriptions, obtained from the American Accounting Association for an annual fee of $150. This subscription covers an unlimited number of students within a single institution. and familiarize yourself with the resources that are accessible at the FASB Codifi cation site.

the company is expected to be in compliance with this policy as of december 31 1999 565816

(Production budget) The sales budget for Leno Company shows the following sales projections (in units) for the quarters of the calendar year of 2000:

January–March

270,000

April–June

340,000

July–September

245,000

October–December

275,000

Total

1,130,000

Sales for the first quarter of 2001 are expected to be 295,000 units. Finished Goods Inventory at the end of each production period is scheduled to equal 30 percent of the next quarter’s budgeted sales in units. The company is expected to be in compliance with this policy as of December 31, 1999. Develop a quarterly production budget for 2000. Include a column to show total expected production for 2000.

production and related schedules the jansen company manufactures and sells two prod 565819

(Production and related schedules) The Jansen Company manufactures and sells two products: plastic boxes and plastic trays. Estimated needs for a unit of each are

Boxes

Trays

Material A

2 pounds

1 pound

Material B

4 pounds

4 pounds

Direct labor

2 hours

2 hours

Overhead is applied on the basis of $2 per direct labor hour. The estimated sales by product for 2000 are:

Boxes

Trays

Sales

42,000

24,000

The beginning inventories are expected to be as follows:

Material A

4,000 pounds

Material B

6,000 pounds

Boxes

1,000 units

Trays

500 units

The desired inventories are one month’s production requirements, assuming constant sales throughout the year.

Prepare the following information:

a. Production schedule

b. Purchases budget in units

c. Direct labor budget in hours

d. Overhead to be charged to production

prepare a schedule of cash collections for bentham company by month for january febr 565820

(Cash collections) Bentham Company is developing its first quarter monthly cash budget for 2000 and is having difficulty determining its expected cash collections. On investigation, the following actual and expected sales information was revealed: November December January February March $41,500 $38,000 $29,500 $34,000 $39,500 Tracing of collections from prior year monthly sales and discussions with the credit manager helped develop a profile of collection behavior patterns. Of a given month’s sales, 40 percent are typically collected in the month of sale. Because the company terms are 1 percent EOM (end of month), net 30, all collections within the month of sale are net of the 1 percent discount. Thirty percent of a given month’s sales are collected in the month following the sale. The remaining 30 percent are collected in the second month following the month of the sale. Bad debts are negligible and should be ignored.

a. Prepare a schedule of cash collections for Bentham Company by month for January, February, and March.

b. Calculate the Accounts Receivable balance at March 31.

what will be the balance of accounts receivable at june 30 2001 565822

(Cash collections, accounts receivable) Atlanta Waterworks is developing a forecast of June 2001 cash receipts from sales. Total sales for June 2001 are expected to be $650,000. Of each month’s sales, 75 percent is expected to be on credit. The Accounts Receivable balance at May 31 is $171,000 of which $135,000 represents the remainder of May credit sales. There are no receivables from months prior to April 2001. Atlanta Waterworks has an established collection pattern for credit sales of 60 percent in the month of sale, 25 percent in the month following the sale, and 15 percent in the second month following the sale. Atlanta Waterworks has no uncollectible accounts.

a. What were total sales for April 2001?

b. What were credit sales for May 2001?

c. What are projected cash collections for June 2001?

d. What will be the balance of Accounts Receivable at June 30, 2001?

what is the company rsquo s projected increase in cash for may 2000 565823

(Cash balance) Jackson Fabrics has prepared a forecast for May 2000. Some of the projected information follows:

Income after tax

$260,000

Accrued Income Tax Expense

62,000

Increase in Accounts Receivable for month

41,000

Decrease in Accounts Payable for month

18,300

Depreciation Expense

71,200

Estimated Bad Debts Expense

13,100

Dividends declared

20,000

Using the above information, what is the company’s projected increase in cash for May 2000?

how cash disbursements can be computed from these figures if all significant data ar 565824

(Cash disbursements) In trying to decide whether it was feasible for the company to acquire treasury stock during May 2000, Wyatt Jones, president of Dallas Leather, Inc., requested information on projected cash disbursements for that month. He received the following information from his new accountant:

Sales for May

$2,000,000

Gross profit on sales

40%

Wages expense for May

$412,500

Other cash expenses for May

$235,250

Decrease in Accounts Payable during May

$40,000

Decrease in Merchandise Inventory during May

$33,750

Not understanding how the above information could help him compute cash disbursements, Mr. Jones asked the accountant to show how cash disbursements can be computed from these figures. If all significant data are given, what are projected cash disbursements for May?

complete the missing numbers on the cash budget assuming that the accountant has pro 565825

(Cash budget) The accountant for Georgia Pizza prepared the following cash budget for the third quarter of 2000. When the owner was reviewing it, he was eating a deep dish pizza loaded with extra cheese. Some of the topping inadvertently spilled onto the page and smeared the figures. Complete the missing numbers on the cash budget, assuming that the accountant has projected a minimum cash balance at the start of each month of $2,500. All borrowings, repayments, and investments are made in even $500 amounts.

July

August

September

Total

Beginning cash balance

$ 4,500

$ ?

$ ?

$ ?

Cash receipts

8,200

10,100

?

?

Total cash available

$ ?

$13,000

$19,500

$39,400

Cash disbursements:

Payments on account

$ ?

$ 3,900

$ 5,700

$ ?

Wages expense

5,000

?

6,100

17,200

Overhead costs

4,000

4,600

?

13,000

Total disbursements

$10,300

$ ?

$16,200

$ ?

Cash excess (deficiency)

$ ?

$ ?

$ ?

$ ?

Minimum cash balance

(2,500)

(2,500)

?

?

Cash available (needed)

$ ?

$ (4,100)

$ ?

$ (4,200)

Financing:

Borrowings (repayments)

$ 500

$ ?

$ (500)

$ ?

Acquire (sell) investments

0

0

?

?

Receive (pay) interest

0

0

?

(50)

Ending cash balance

$ 2,900

$ ?

$ ?

$ 2,750

in preparing the above forecast sam included no advertising expenditures 565826

(Various budgets) The following are four independent situations.

a. Tasty Frozen Foods is planning to produce two products: frozen dinners and frozen desserts. Sales of frozen dinners are expected to be 200,000 units at $4 per unit; projected sales for frozen desserts are 400,000 units at $3 per unit. Variable costs are 70 percent and 80 percent of sales for dinners and desserts, respectively. What are total fixed costs if Tasty expects net income to be $425,000?

b. Herringbone Suits is projecting sales of $20,000,000 and total fixed manufacturing costs of $4,000,000 for 2000. The company estimates that variable manufacturing costs will be 40 percent of sales. Assuming no change in inventory, what is the company’s projected Cost of Goods Sold?

c. The Sizzle Company has projected the following information for October 2001:

Sales

$800,000

Gross profit (based on sales)

25%

Increase in Merchandise Inventory in October

$60,000

Decrease in Trade Accounts Payable for October

$24,000

What are expected cash disbursements for inventories for October 2001?

d. Sam’s Calculators’ preliminary forecast for its product in 2000 is as follows

Selling price per unit

$20

Unit sales

200,000

Variable costs

$1,200,000

Fixed costs

$600,000

In preparing the above forecast, Sam included no advertising expenditures. Based on a market study conducted in December 1999, the firm estimated that it could increase the unit selling price by 15 percent and increase unit sales volume by 10 percent if $200,000 were spent on advertising. If Sam’s Calculators adjusts its forecast by these amounts, what is the projected operating income for 2000? (CPA adapted)

develop a pro forma income statement for the year for marano company that incorporat 565827

(Projected income statement) Last year’s income statement for Marano Company is presented below:

Sales (50,000 $10)

$500,000

Cost of goods sold:

Direct material

$200,000

Direct labor

100,000

Overhead

50,000

(350,000)

Gross profit

$150,000

Expenses

Selling

$ 50,000

Administrative

40,000

(90,000)

Income before taxes

$ 60,000

Sales are expected to decrease by 10 percent, and material and labor costs are expected to increase by 10 percent. Overhead is applied to production based on a percentage of direct labor costs. Ten thousand dollars of selling expenses are considered fixed. The balance varies with sales dollars. All administrative costs are fixed. Management desires to earn 5 percent on sales this year and will adjust the unit selling price, if necessary. Develop a pro forma income statement for the year for Marano Company that incorporates the indicated changes.

what is the projected balance of accounts receivable at july 31 2000 565828

(Budgeted income, cash, accounts receivable) In preparing its budget for July 2000, Expert Legal Services has the following accounts receivable information available:

Accounts Receivable at June 30

$500,000

Estimated credit sales for July

600,000

Estimated collections in July for credit sales in July and prior months

440,000

Estimated write offs in July for uncollectible credit sales

32,000

Estimated provision for uncollectible accounts for credit sales in July

24,000

a. What is the projected balance of Accounts Receivable at July 31, 2000?

b. Which of the above amounts (if any) will affect the cash budget?

c. Which of the above amounts (if any) will affect the pro forma income statement for July? (CPA adapted)

what is the expected operating profit if actual sales are equal to budgeted sales 565830

(Pro forma income) Joan Wilson, president of Fresh Fashions, is considering

buying a new piece of equipment for her plant. This piece of equipment will increase her fixed overhead by $300,000 per year, but reduce her variable expenses per unit of production by 35 percent. Budgeted sales of her only product, hand painted scarves, for 2001 are 120,000 scarves at an average selling price of $25 each. Variable expenses are currently 75 percent of selling price and fixed costs total $400,000 per year. Assuming that Joan acquires the new piece of equipment, answer the following questions.

a. What is the projected variable cost per scarf?

b. What are the projected fixed costs per year?

c. What is the expected operating profit if actual sales are equal to budgeted sales?

d. Should Joan acquire the equipment?

prepare a production and purchases budget for each semiannual period of 2000 565831

(Production and purchases budgets) Aurora Products has prepared the following

unit sales forecast for 2000:

January–June

July–December

Total

Sales

380,000

420,000

800,000

Estimated ending finished goods inventories are 30,000 units at December 31, 1999; 76,000 units at June 30; and 90,000 units at December 31, 2000. In manufacturing each unit of this product, Aurora Products uses five pounds of Material A and three gallons of Material B. The company carries no Work in Process Inventory. Direct material ending inventories are projected as follows:

December 31, 1999

June 30, 2000

December 31, 2000

Material A (in pounds)

200,000

250,000

300,000

Material B (in gallons)

140,000

160,000

200,000

Prepare a production and purchases budget for each semiannual period of 2000.

how many pounds of sugar need to be purchased in june 565832

(Production, purchases, cash disbursements) West Indies Tea Company has budgeted sales of 300,000 cans of iced tea mix during June 2000 and 375,000 cans during July. Production of the mix requires 14 ounces of tea and 2 ounces of sugar. Beginning inventories of tea and sugar are as follows:

Iced tea mix

4,300 cans of finished product

Tea

2,750 pounds

Sugar

600 pounds

West Indies Tea Company generally carries an inventory of 3 percent of the following month’s needs for finished goods. Raw materials are stocked in relation to finished goods ending inventory. Assuming the desired ending inventory stock is achieved, answer the following questions.

a. How many cans of iced tea mix need to be produced in June?

b. How many pounds of tea need to be purchased in June? (There are 16 ounces in a pound.)

c. How many pounds of sugar need to be purchased in June?

d. If tea and sugar cost $4.50 and $0.30 per pound, respectively, what dollar amount of purchases is budgeted for June?

e. If West Indies Tea Company normally pays for 30 percent of its budgeted purchases during the month of purchase and takes a 2 percent discount, what are budgeted cash disbursements for June purchases during June?

prepare a cash budget for each month and in total for the first quarter of 2001 565833

(Production, purchases, cash budgets) Pop’s Tops makes one style of men’s hats. Sales and collections for the first three months of 2001 are expected to be

January

February

March

Total

Sales quantity

3,200

2,600

3,700

9,500

Revenue

$57,600

$46,800

$66,600

$171,000

Collections

$58,080

$48,960

$62,640

$169,680

The December 31, 2000, balance sheet revealed the following selected balances: Cash, $18,760; Raw Material Inventory, $3,812.50; Finished Goods Inventory, $10,500; and Accounts Payable, $3,800. The Raw Material Inventory balance represents 457.50 yards of felt and 12,200 inches of ribbon. The Finished Goods Inventory consists of 800 hats. During the first quarter of 2001, management expects that all work started within a month will be finished within that month, so no work in process is anticipated. Management plans to have enough hats on hand at the end of each month to satisfy 25 percent of the subsequent month’s sales. In this regard, the company predicts both production and sales of 3,600 hats in April. Each hat requires 3/4 of a yard of felt and 20 inches of ribbon. Felt costs $7 per yard and ribbon costs $0.05 per inch. Ending inventory policy for raw materials is 20 percent of the next month’s production. The company normally pays for 80 percent of a month’s purchases of raw materials in the month of purchase (on which it takes a 2 percent cash discount). The remaining 20 percent is paid in full in the month following the month of purchase. The cost of direct labor is budgeted at $3 per hat produced and is paid in the month of production. Total out of pocket factory overhead can be predicted as $5,200 per month plus $2.25 per hat produced. Total non factory cash costs are equal to $2,800 per month plus 10 percent of sales revenue. All factor and non factory cash expenses are paid in the month of incurrence. In addition, the company plans to make an estimated quarterly tax payment of $5,000 and pay executive bonuses of $15,000 in January 2001. The management of Pop’s Tops wishes to have a minimum of $12,000 of cash at the end of each month. If the company has to borrow funds, it will do so in $1,000 multiples at the beginning of a month at a 12 percent annual interest rate. Loans are to be repaid at the end of a month in multiples of$1,000. Interest is paid only when a repayment is made.

a. Prepare a production budget by month and in total for the first quarter of 2001.

b. Prepare a raw material purchases budget by month and in total for the first quarter of 2001.

c. Prepare a schedule of cash payments for purchases by month and in total for the first quarter of 2001. The Accounts Payable balance on December 31, 2000, represents the unpaid 20 percent of December purchases.

d. Prepare a combined payments schedule for factory overhead and nonfactory cash costs for each month and in total for the first quarter of 2001.

e. Prepare a cash budget for each month and in total for the first quarter of 2001.

thornton computer timeshare company entered into the following transactions during m 565767

Thornton Computer Timeshare Company entered into the following transactions during May 2012.

1. Purchased computer terminals for $20,000 from Digital Equipment on account.

2. Paid $4,000 cash for May rent on storage space.

3. Received $17,000 cash from customers for contracts billed in April.

4. Provided computer services to Fisher Construction Company for $3,000 cash.

5. Paid Northern States Power Co. $11,000 cash for energy usage in May.

6. Thornton invested an additional $29,000 in the business.

7. Paid Digital Equipment for the terminals purchased in (1) above.

8. Incurred advertising expense for May of $1,200 on account.

Instructions

Indicate with the appropriate letter whether each of the transactions above results in:

(a) An increase in assets and a decrease in assets.

(b) An increase in assets and an increase in owner’s equity.

(c) An increase in assets and an increase in liabilities.

(d) A decrease in assets and a decrease in owner’s equity.

(e) A decrease in assets and a decrease in liabilities.

(f) An increase in liabilities and a decrease in owner’s equity.

(g) An increase in owner’s equity and a decrease in liabilities.

an analysis of the transactions made by mark kotsay amp co a certified public accoun 565768

An analysis of the transactions made by Mark Kotsay & Co., a certified public accounting firm, for the month of August is shown below. The expenses were $650 for rent, $4,800 for salaries and wages, and $500 for utilities.

Accounts

Accounts

Owner’s

Owner’s

Cash

+ Receivable

+ Supplies

+ Equipment

= Payable

+ Capital

Drawings

+ Revenues

Expenses

1.

+ $15,000

+ $15,000

2.

2,000

+ $5,000

+ $3,000

3.

750

+ $750

4.

+ 4,600

+ $3,900

+ $8,500

5.

1,500

1,500

6.

2,000

$2,000

7.

650

$650

8.

+ 450

450

9.

4,800

4,800

10.

+ 500

500

Instructions

(a) Describe each transaction that occurred for the month.

(b) Determine how much owner’s equity increased for the month.

(c) Compute the amount of net income for the month.

andruw company had the following assets and liabilities on the dates indicated 565770

Andruw Company had the following assets and liabilities on the dates indicated.

December 31

Total Assets

Total Liabilities

2011

$400,000

$250,000

2012

$460,000

$300,000

2013

$590,000

$400,000

Andruw began business on January 1, 2011, with an investment of $100,000.

Instructions

From an analysis of the change in owner’s equity during the year, compute the net income (or loss) for:

(a) 2011, assuming Andruw’s drawings were $15,000 for the year.

(b) 2012, assuming Andruw made an additional investment of $45,000 and had no drawings in 2012.

(c) 2013, assuming Andruw made an additional investment of $15,000 and had drawings $25,000 in 2013.

determine the missing amounts 565771

Two items are omitted from each of the following summaries of balance sheet and income statement data for two proprietorships for the year 2012, Gavin’s Goods and Floyd Enterprises.

Gavin’s

Floyd

Goods

Enterprises

Beginning of year:

Total assets

$110,000

129,000

Total liabilities

85,000

(c)

Total owner’s equity

(a)

80,000

End of year:

Total assets

160,000

180,000

Total liabilities

120,000

50,000

Total owner’s equity

40,000

130,000

Changes during year in owner’s equity:

Additional investment

(b)

25,000

Drawings

29,000

(d)

Total revenues

215,000

100,000

Total expenses

175,000

60,000

Instructions

Determine the missing amounts.

after analyzing the data prepare an income statement and an owner rsquo s equity sta 565772

The following information relates to Jake Peavy Co. for the year 2012.

Owner’s capital, January 1, 2012

$48,000

Advertising expense

Owner’s drawings during 2012

6,000

Rent expense

10,400

Service revenue

63,600

Utilities expense

3,100

Salaries and wages expense

29,500

Instructions

After analyzing the data, prepare an income statement and an owner’s equity statement for the year ending December 31, 2012.

prepare a correct balance sheet 565773

Linda Puff is the bookkeeper for Sajuki Company. Linda has been trying to get the balance sheet of Sajuki Company to balance. Sajuki’s balance sheet is shown below.

SAJUKI COMPANY

Balance Sheet

December 31, 2012

Assets

Liabilities

Cash

$15,000

Accounts payable

$21,000

Supplies

8,000

Accounts receivable

(9,500)

Equipment

46,000

Owner’s capital

67,500

Owner’s drawings

10,000

Total liabilities and

Total assets

$79,000

owner’s equity

$79,000

Instructions

Prepare a correct balance sheet.

prepare a balance sheet for deer park as of december 31 2012 565774

Toni Pena is the sole owner of Deer Park, a public camping ground near the Lake Mead National Recreation Area. Toni has compiled the following financial information as of December31, 2012.

Revenues during 2012—camping fees

$140,000

Fair value of equipment

$140,000

Revenues during 2012—general store

65,000

Notes payable

60,000

Accounts payable

11,000

Expenses during 2012

150,000

Cash on hand

23,000

Supplies on hand

17,500

Original cost of equipment

105,500

Instructions

(a) Determine Toni Pena’s net income from Deer Park for 2012.

(b) Prepare a balance sheet for Deer Park as of December 31, 2012.

prepare the 2012 owner rsquo s equity statement for sergio santos rsquo legal practi 565776

Presented below is information related to the sole proprietorship of Sergio Santos attorney.

Legal service revenue—2012

$335,000

Total expenses—2012

211,000

Assets, January 1, 2012

96,000

Liabilities, January 1, 2012

62,000

Assets, December 31, 2012

168,000

Liabilities, December 31, 2012

100,000

Drawings—2012

?

Instructions

Prepare the 2012 owner’s equity statement for Sergio Santos’ legal practice.

prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings c 565777

Threet’s Repair Shop was started on May 1 by Erica Threet. A summary of May transactions is presented below.

1. Invested $10,000 cash to start the repair shop.

2. Purchased equipment for $5,000 cash.

3. Paid $400 cash for May office rent.

4. Paid $500 cash for supplies.

5. Incurred $250 of advertising costs in the Beacon News on account.

6. Received $6,100 in cash from customers for repair service.

7. Withdrew $1,000 cash for personal use.

8. Paid part time employee salaries $2,000.

9. Paid utility bills $170.

10. Provided repair service on account to customers $750.

11. Collected cash of $120 for services billed in transaction (10).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions, using the following column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Owner’s Capital, Owner’s Drawings, Revenues, and Expenses.

(b) From an analysis of the owner’s equity columns, compute the net income or net loss for May.

prepare an income statement for september an owner rsquo s equity statement for sept 565778

Ramona Castro opened a veterinary business in Nashville, Tennessee, on August 1. On August 31, the balance sheet showed Cash $9,000, Accounts Receivable $1,700, Supplies $600, Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $3,600, and Owner’s Capital $13,700. During September, the following transactions occurred.

1. Paid $2,900 cash on accounts payable.

2. Collected $1,300 of accounts receivable.

3. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,100, paying $800 in cash and the balance on account.

4. Earned revenue of $7,800, of which $2,500 is received in cash and the balance is due in October.

5. Withdrew $1,100 cash for personal use.

6. Paid salaries $1,700, rent for September $900, and advertising expense $450.

7. Incurred utilities expense for month on account $170.

8. Received $10,000 from Capital Bank (money borrowed on a note payable).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the September transactions beginning with August 31 balances.

The column headings should be as follows: Cash + Accounts Receivable + Supplies +

Equipment = Notes Payable + Accounts Payable + Owner’s Capital Owner’s Drawings + Revenues Expenses.

(b) Prepare an income statement for September, an owner’s equity statement for September, and a balance sheet at September 30.

prepare an income statement and owner rsquo s equity statement for the month of may 565779

On May 1, A. J. Pierzynski started AJ Flying School, a company that provides flying lessons, by investing $40,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company on May 31, 2012, and the revenues and expenses for the month of May.

Cash

$ 3,400

Notes Payable

$30,000

Accounts Receivable

4,900

Rent Expense

1,200

Equipment

64,000

Maintenance and Repairs Expense

400

Service Revenue

8,100

Gasoline Expense

2,500

Advertising Expense

600

Insurance Expense

400

Accounts Payable

800

A. J. Pierzynski made no additional investment in May, but he withdrew $1,500 in cash for personal use.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the month of May and a balance sheet at May 31.

(b) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for May assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at May 31, and (2) $1,500 of gasoline expense was incurred but not paid.

gordon beckham started his own delivery service beckham deliveries on june 1 2012 th 565780

Gordon Beckham started his own delivery service, Beckham Deliveries, on June 1, 2012. The following transactions occurred during the month of June.

June

1

Gordon invested $10,000 cash in the business.

2

Purchased a used van for deliveries for $12,000. Gordon paid $2,000 cash

and signed a note payable for the remaining balance.

3

Paid $500 for office rent for the month.

5

Performed $4,400 of services on account.

9

Withdrew $200 cash for personal use.

12

Purchased supplies for $150 on account.

15

Received a cash payment of $1,250 for services provided on June 5.

17

Purchased gasoline for $200 on account.

20

Received a cash payment of $1,300 for services provided.

23

Made a cash payment of $600 on the note payable.

26

Paid $250 for utilities.

29

Paid for the gasoline purchased on account on June 17.

30

Paid $1,000 for employee salaries.

Instructions

(a) Show the effects of the previous transactions on the accounting equation using the following format.

Assets

Liabilities

Owner’s Equity

Accounts

Notes

Accounts

Owner’s

Owner’s

Date

Cash

+ Receivable

+ Supplies

+ Equipment

= Payable

+ Payable

+ Capital

Drawings

+ Revenues

Expenses

(b) Prepare an income statement for the month of June.

(c) Prepare a balance sheet at June 30, 2012.

financial statement information about four different companies is as follows 565781

Financial statement information about four different companies is as follows.

Brent

Lillibridge

Omar

Vizquel

Company

Company

Company

Company

January 1, 2012

Assets

$ 80,000

$ 90,000

(g)

$150,000

Liabilities

48,000

(d)

80,000

(j)

Owner’s equity

(a)

40,000

49,000

90,000

December 31, 2012

Assets

(b)

112,000

180,000

(k)

Liabilities

60,000

72,000

(h)

100,000

Owner’s equity

50,000

(e)

82,000

151,000

Owner’s equity changes in year

Additional investment

(c)

8,000

10,000

15,000

Drawings

15,000

(f)

12,000

10,000

Total revenues

350,000

410,000

(i)

500,000

Total expenses

333,000

385,000

350,000

(l)

Instructions

(a) Determine the missing amounts.

(b) Prepare the owner’s equity statement for Ramirez Company.

(c) Write a memorandum explaining the sequence for preparing financial statements and the interrelationship of the owner’s equity statement to the income statement and balance sheet.

received 4 000 in cash from customers who have previously been billed in transaction 565782

On April 1, Vince Morelli established Vince’s Travel Agency. The following transactions were completed during the month.

1. Invested $15,000 cash to start the agency.

2. Paid $600 cash for April office rent.

3. Purchased office equipment for $3,000 cash.

4. Incurred $700 of advertising costs in the Chicago Tribune, on account.

5. Paid $800 cash for office supplies.

6. Earned $10,000 for services rendered: $3,000 cash is received from customers, and the balance of $7,000 is billed to customers on account.

7. Withdrew $500 cash for personal use.

8. Paid Chicago Tribune $500 of the amount due in transaction (4).

9. Paid employees’ salaries $2,500.

10. Received $4,000 in cash from customers who have previously been billed in transaction (6).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using the following column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Owner’s Capital, Owner’s Drawings, Revenues, and Expenses.

(b) From an analysis of the owner’s equity columns, compute the net income or net loss for April.

prepare an income statement for august an owner rsquo s equity statement for august 565783

Juanita Pierre opened a law office, on July 1, 2012. On July 31, the balance sheet showed Cash $5,000, Accounts Receivable $1,500, Supplies $500, Equipment $6,000, Accounts Payable $4,200, and Owner’s Capital $8,800. During August, the following transactions occurred.

1. Collected $1,200 of accounts receivable.

2. Paid $2,800 cash on accounts payable.

3. Earned revenue of $7,500 of which $3,000 is collected in cash and the balance is due in September.

4. Purchased additional office equipment for $2,000, paying $400 in cash and the balance on account.

5. Paid salaries $2,500, rent for August $900, and advertising expenses $400.

6. Withdrew $700 in cash for personal use.

7. Received $2,000 from Standard Federal Bank—money borrowed on a note payable.

8. Incurred utility expenses for month on account $270.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the August transactions beginning with July 31 balances. The column headings should be as follows: Cash + Accounts Receivable + Supplies + Equipment = Notes Payable + Accounts Payable + Owner’s Capital Owner’s Drawings + Revenues Expenses.

(b) Prepare an income statement for August, an owner’s equity statement for August, and a balance sheet at August 31.

prepare an income statement and owner rsquo s equity statement for the month of june 565784

On June 1, Alexia Rios started Crazy Creations Co., a company that provides craft opportunities, by investing $12,000 cash in the business. Following are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30 and the revenues and expenses for the month of June.

Cash

$10,150

Notes Payable

$9,000

Accounts Receivable

3,000

Accounts Payable

1,200

Service Revenue

6,700

Supplies Expense

1,600

Supplies

2,000

Gasoline Expense

200

Advertising Expense

500

Utilities Expense

150

Equipment

10,000

Alexia made no additional investment in June but withdrew $1,300 in cash for personal use during the month.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2012.

(b) Prepare an income statement and owner’s equity statement for June assuming the following data are not included above: (1) $900 of revenue was earned and billed but not collected at June 30, and (2) $150 of gasoline expense was incurred but not paid.

identify each of the questions as being more likely asked by an internal user or an 565762

(a) The following are users of financial statements.

Customers

Securities and Exchange Commission

Internal Revenue Service

Store manager

Labor unions

Suppliers

Marketing manager

Vice president of finance

Production supervisor

Instructions

Identify the users as being either external users or internal users.

(b) The following questions could be asked by an internal user or an external user.

Can we afford to give our employees a pay raise?

Did the company earn a satisfactory income?

Do we need to borrow in the near future?

How does the company’s profitability compare to other companies?

What does it cost us to manufacture each unit produced?

Which product should we emphasize?

Will the company be able to pay its short term debts?

Instructions

Identify each of the questions as being more likely asked by an internal user or an external user.

the following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions 565764

The following situations involve accounting principles and assumptions.

1. Rex Company owns buildings that are worth substantially more than they originally cost. In an effort to provide more relevant information, Rex reports the buildings at fair value in its accounting reports.

2. Levi Company includes in its accounting records only transaction data that can be expressed in terms of money.

3. Josh Borke, owner of Josh’s Photography, records his personal living costs as expenses of the business.

Instructions

For each of the three situations, say if the accounting method used is correct or incorrect. If correct, identify which principle or assumption supports the method used. If incorrect, identify which principle or assumption has been violated.

list the numbers of the above transactions and describe the effect of each transacti 565766

Selected transactions for Linebrink Lawn Care Company are listed below.

1. Made cash investment to start business.

2. Paid monthly rent.

3. Purchased equipment on account.

4. Billed customers for services performed.

5. Withdrew cash for owner’s personal use.

6. Received cash from customers billed in (4).

7. Incurred advertising expense on account.

8. Purchased additional equipment for cash.

9. Received cash from customers when service was performed.

Instructions

List the numbers of the above transactions and describe the effect of each transaction on assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity. For example, the fi rst answer is: (1) Increase in assets and increase in owner’s equity.

advise shott as to whether the temporal or closing rate net investment method should 565682

Shott, a public limited company, set up a wholly owned foreign subsidiary company, Hammer, on 1 June 1999 with a share capital of 400 000 ordinary shares of 1 dinar. Shott transacts on a limited basis with Hammer. It maintains a current account with the company but very few transactions are processed through this account. Shott is a multinational company with net assets of £1500 million and ‘normal’ profits are approximately £160 million. The management of Hammer are all based locally although Shott does have a representative on the management board. The prices of the products of Hammer are determined locally and 90% of sales are to local companies. Most of the finance required by Hammer is raised locally, although occasionally short term finance is raised through borrowing monies from Shott. Hammer has made profits of 80 000 dinars and 120 000 dinars after dividend payments respectively for the two years to 31 May 2001. During the financial year to 31 May 2001, the following transactions took place:

(i) On 30 September 2000, a dividend from Hammer of 0.15 dinars per share was declared. The dividend was received on 1 January 2001 by Shott.

(ii) Hammer sold goods of 24 000 dinars to Shott during the year. Hammer made 25% profit on the cost of the goods. The goods were ordered by Shott on 30 September 2000, were shipped free on board (fob) on 1 January 2001, and were received by Shott on 31 January 2001. Shott paid the dinar amount on 31 May 2001 and had not hedged the transaction. All the goods remain unsold as at 31 May 2001.

(iii) Hammer has borrowed 150000 dinars on 31 January 2001 from Shott in order to alleviate its working capital problems. At 31 May 2001 Hammer’s financial statements showed the amount as owing to Shott. The loan is to be treated as permanent and is designated in pounds sterling.

The directors of Shott wish to use the closing rate to translate the balance sheet of Hammer and the average rate to translate the profit and loss account of Hammer but are unsure as to whether this is possible under accounting standards. On 1 June 2001 Hammer was sold for 825 000 dinars, and the proceeds were received on that day.

Dinars to £1

Exchange rates:

1 June 1999

1.0

31 May 2000

1.3

30 September 2000

1.1

1 January 2001

1.2

31 January 2001

1.5

31 May 2001

1.6

1 June 2001

1.65

Average rate for year to

31 May 2001

1.44

Required

(a) (i) Advise Shott as to whether the temporal or closing rate/net investment method should be used to translate the financial statements of Hammer;

(ii) Discuss the claim by SSAP 20 Foreign Currency Translation, that the usage of the temporal or net investment/closing rate method is based upon the economic relationship between the holding company and its foreign subsidiary.

(b) Discuss how the above transactions should be dealt with in the consolidated financial statements of Shott, calculating the gain or loss on the disposal of Hammer on 1 June 2001 and stating how the cumulative exchange differences would be dealt with on the disposal.

howard plc acquired 2 100 000 ordinary shares of kroner 1 in pau ltd on 1 january 19 565683

Howard plc acquired 2 100 000 ordinary shares of Kroner 1 in Pau Ltd on 1 January 1985 when the reserves of Pau Ltd were Kr1 500 000 and the exchange rate was Kr10 to £1. Goodwill was eliminated against the consolidated reserves on 31 December 1985.

The profit and loss accounts of Howard plc and Pau Ltd for the year ended 31 December 1992 were as follows:

Howard

Pau

£000

Kr000

Turnover

9225

94500

Cost of sales

6027

63000

Gross profit

3198

31500

Distribution cost

1290

7550

Administrative expenses

1469

2520

Depreciation

191

2100

248

19330

Dividends from subsidiary

315

563

19330

Tax

195

7570

Profit on ordinary activities after tax

368

11760

Dividends paid 30.6.92

183

4200

Retained profit for the year

185

7560

The balance sheets of Howard plc and Pau Ltd as at 31 December 1992 were as follows:

Howard

Pau

£000

Kr000

Fixed assets

Tangible assets

1765

38500

Investment in Pau Ltd

305

Current assets

Stock

2245

2245

Debtors

615

615

Cash

156

156

3016

3016

Current liabilities

Trade creditors

(2245)

(4375)

Creditors falling due after more than 1 year

Loan

(1230)

(8680)

1611

40320

Capital and reserves

Share capital in £1 ordinary shares

600

Share capital in Kr 1 ordinary shares

3500

Profit and loss account

1011

36820

1611

40320

The tangible assets of Pau Ltd were acquired 1 January 1985 and are stated at cost less depreciation.

Stocks represent six months’ purchases and at 31 December 1991 the stock held by Pau Ltd amounted to Kr4760000.

Exchange rates have been as follows:

Kroner to £1

1 January 1985

10

30 June 1991

10.5

30 September 1991

10

31 December 1991

9.5

Average for 1992

8

30 June 1992

8

30 September 1992

7.5

31 December 1992

7

In determining the appropriate method of currency translation, it is established that the trade of Pau Ltd is more dependent on the economic environment of the investing company’s currency than on that of its own reporting currency.

Required

(a) Explain briefly how it would be established that the trade of Pau Ltd is more dependent on the economic environment of the investing company’s currency than on that of its own reporting currency.

(b) Prepare the consolidated profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 1992 and a balance sheet as at that date, using the temporal method of translation.

(c) Calculate the amount to be included in the consolidated balance sheet of the Howard Group as at 31 December 1992 if Howard plc had sold goods to Pau Ltd on 30 September 1992 for £14 000 which had cost £10 000 and which remained unsold at 31 December 1992 using:

(i) the closing rate method;

(ii) the temporal method.

the balance sheets of uk plc and its subsidiaries france sa and us inc at 30 septemb 565684

The balance sheets of UK plc and its subsidiaries France SA and US Inc at 30 September 1998 are given below:

UK plc

France SA

US Inc

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Fixed assets

Tangible assets

26000

95000

56000

Investments (Notes 1 & 2)

25500

51500

95000

56000

Current assets

Stocks (Note 3)

15000

44000

25000

Debtors (Note 4)

10000

30000

16000

Cash in hand

2000

6000

3000

27000

80000

44000

Current liabilities

Trade creditors (Note 4)

6000

12000

8000

Taxation

3000

6000

4000

Proposed dividend

2000

8000

3000

Bank overdraft

8000

10000

9000

19000

36000

24000

Net current assets

8000

44000

20000

c/f

59500

139000

76000

b/f

59500

139000

76000

Long term loans

(20000)

(25000)

39500

139000

51000

Capital and reserves

Share capital (Note 5)

20000

80000

32000

Profit and loss account

19500

59000

19000

39500

139000

51000

Notes to the financial statements

Note 1

UK plc has owned 100% of the ordinary share capital of France SA since incorporation, subscribing for it at par. The date of incorporation of France SA was 25 May 1990. France SA acts as a selling agent for products manufactured in the UK by UK plc and has no manufacturing capacity of its own. UK plc has negotiated an overdraft facility for France SA and has guaranteed the overdraft. Apart from this overdraft, France SA receives all its funding from UK plc.

Note 2

On 30 September 1992, when the reserves of US Inc stood at $8 million, UK plc purchased 24 million shares in US Inc for $35 million. US Inc has a product range which is similar to that of UK plc and France SA, but is targeted more specifically towards the needs of the US market. The stock is manufactured in the USA, and US Inc negotiates its own day to day financing needs with US financial institutions. The $25 million loan which was outstanding at 30 September 1998 was originally taken out on 30 June 1976 for a 30 year period. The accounting policy of UK plc is to amortise premiums on acquisition over a 20 year period. In the case of US Inc, the first write off took place in the year ended 30 September 1993.

Note 3

The stocks of France SA were acquired from UK plc on 31 August 1998. They represent a consignment which cost UK plc £3.6 million to manufacture but were invoiced to France SA at a price of 44 million Francs. This price represented the sterling transfer price of £4 million translated at the spot rate of exchange in force at 31 August 1998. The stocks of US Inc were all manufactured locally. The stock in hand of US Inc at 30 September 1998 represents 6 months’ production.

Note 4

  • The debtors of UK plc include dividends receivable from France SA and US Inc. These debtors have been translated into sterling using the rate of exchange in force at 30 September 1998.
  • The trade creditors of France SA comprise 12 million Francs payable to UK plc. UK plc’s debtors include the equivalent asset translated into sterling using the rate of exchange in force at 30 September 1998.
  • There was no other inter company trading.

Note 5

  • The shares of UK plc are £1 shares.
  • The shares of France SA are 1 Franc shares.
  • The shares of US Inc are $1 shares.

Note 6

The dates of acquisition of the tangible fixed assets of France SA and US Inc were as follows:

30 September 1998 – Net Book Value of Fixed Assets

France SA

US Inc

Date

Fr million

$ million

25 May 1990

10000

2000

30 September 1993

45000

20000

30 September 1997

40000

34000

95000

56000

Note 7

Exchange rates at relevant dates were as follows:

Date

£/Fr rate

£/$ rate

25 May 1990

10

2.4

30 September 1992

9.5

2.0

30 September 1993

9

1.7

30 September 1997

10

1.6

31 March 1998

10.5

1.7

31 August 1998

11

1.8

30 September 1998

12

1.8

Requirements

(a) Explain how the financial statements [profit and loss account and balance sheet] of France SA and US Inc will be translated into sterling for the purposes of the consolidated financial statements of UK plc. Your answer should refer to relevant Accounting Standards and should explain the treatment of the exchange difference on translation in each case.

(b) Prepare the working schedule for the consolidated balance sheet of the UK plc group at 30 September 1998. Your schedule needs to show only one figure for consolidated reserves, so a separate analysis of the exchange differences is not required.

describe the cash flows which are reported under each of the headings i to viii give 565686

In November 1996 the Accounting Standards Board issued FRS 1 (Revised) – Cash Flow Statements. The appendix to FRS 1 contains a number of examples of cash flow statements drawn up in accordance with the new Standard. The examples given present the cash flows under a number of standard headings, as shown below.

£000

(i)

Cash flow from operating activities

X

(ii)

Returns on investments and servicing of finance

X

(iii)

Taxation

X

(iv)

Capital expenditure and financial investment

X

(v)

Acquisitions and disposals

X

(vi)

Equity dividends paid

X

X

(vii)

Management of liquid resources

X

(viii)

Financing

X

Decrease in cash in the period

X

Requirements

(a) Describe the cash flows which are reported under each of the headings (i) to (viii), given above.

(b) Summarise the changes which FRS 1 (Revised) made to the old FRS 1, and explain why each change was considered necessary by the Accounting Standards Board.

the following information has been extracted from the draft financial statements of 565687

The following information has been extracted from the draft financial statements of T plc:

£000

Sales

15000

Cost of sales

(9000)

6000

Other operating expenses

(2400)

3600

Interest

(24)

Profit before taxation

3576

Taxation

(1040)

Dividends

(1100)

1436

Balance brought forward

4400

5836

T plc

Balance sheets at 30 September

2001

2000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Fixed assets

18160

14 500

Current assets:

Stock

1600

1100

Debtors

1500

800

Bank

150

1200

3250

Current liabilities:

Creditors

(700)

(800)

Proposed dividend

(700)

(600)

Taxation

(1040)

(685)

(2440)

(2085)

Net current assets

810

1015

18970

15515

Net current assets

(1700)

(2900)

17270

12615

Deferred tax

(600)

(400)

16670

Ordinary share capital

2500

2000

Share premium

8334

5815

Profit and loss

5836

4400

16670

12215

Land and buildings

Plant and machinery

Total

£000

£000

£000

Cost

30 September 2000

8400

10800

19200

Additions

2800

5200

8000

Disposals

(2600)

(2600)

30 September 2001

11200

13400

24600

Depreciation

30 September 2000

1300

3400

4700

Disposals

(900)

(900)

Charge for year

240

2400

2640

30 September 2001

1540

4900

6440

Net book value

30 September 2001

9660

8500

18160

30 September 2000

7100

7400

14500

The plant and machinery that was disposed of during the year was sold for £730 000.

Required

(a) Prepare T plc’s cash flow statement and associated notes for the year ended 30 September 2001. These should be in a form suitable for publication.

After the publication of the balance sheet at 30 September 2000, the directors of T plc were criticised for holding too much cash. The annual report for the year ended 30 September 2001 claims that the company has managed its cash more effectively.

Required

(b) Explain whether T plc’s cash management appears to have been any more effective this year.

prepare the consolidated cash flow statement of the holmes group for the year ended 565689

You are the management accountant of Holmes plc and you are in the process of preparing the consolidated cash flow statement. Your Managing Director is aware that the statement is required by FRS 1 – Cash flow statements, and that a number of notes to the statement must also be included. She has a reasonable understanding of the rationale behind the cash flow statement but is not clear as to why so many notes to the statement are required.

Requirements

(a) Prepare the consolidated cash flow statement of the Holmes group for the year ended 30 September 1999 in the form required by FRS 1 – Cash flow statements. Show your workings clearly.

Do not prepare notes to the cash flow statement.

(b) Write a memorandum to your Managing Director which explains the need for the following notes to the cash flow statement:

  • reconciliation of operating profit to operating cash flows;
  • reconciliation of net cash flow to movement in net debt;
  • summary of the effect of the acquisition of Watson plc.

Do not prepare any of these three notes for Holmes plc.

Extracts from the consolidated financial statements of Holmes plc are given overleaf:

Consolidated profit and loss accounts for the year ended

30 September 1999

30 September 1998

£ million

£ million

£ million

£ million

Turnover

600

500

Cost of sales

(300)

(240)

Gross profit

300

260

Other operating expenses (Note 1)

(150)

(130)

Group operating profit

150

130

Share of operating profit of associates

40

35

Interest payable:

– group

50

45

– associates

15

10

(65)

(55)

Profit before exceptional item

125

110

Exceptional item (Note 2)

10

Profit before taxation

135

110

Taxation:

– group

35

25

– associates

8

(43)

8

(33)

Profit after taxation

92

77

Minority interests

(10)

(6)

Group profit

82

71

Equity dividends

(25)

(25)

Retained profit for year

57

46

30 September 1999

30 September 1998

£ million

£ million

£ million

£ million

Fixed assets

Intangible assets (Note 3)

25

19

Tangible assets (Note 4)

240

280

Investments in associates

80

70

345

369

Current assets

105

90

Stocks

120

100

Debtors

20

70

Investments

10

5

Cash in hand

255

265

Creditors falling due within one year

Trade creditors (Note 5)

40

30

Taxation

10

8

Proposed dividends

25

25

Obligations under finance leases

25

20

Other creditors (Note 6)

6

5

Bank overdraft

20

80

126

168

c/f

129

345

97

369

Net current assets

129

97

474

466

Creditors falling due after more than one year

Obligations under finance leases

(80)

(70)

12% loan stock

(90)

Provisions for liabilities and charges

Deferred taxation

(30)

(24)

Minority interests

(65)

(40)

299

242

Capital and reserves

Called-up share capital

100

100

Revaluation reserve

20

Profit and loss account

199

122

299

242

Notes to the financial statements:

Note 1 – other operating expenses

1999

1998

£ million

£ million

Distribution costs

81

75

Administrative expenses

75

70

Investment income

(6)

(15)

150

130

From time to time, the group invests cash surpluses in listed securities which are shown as current asset investments in the consolidated balance sheet.

Note 2 – exceptional item

This represents the gain on sale of a large freehold property sold by Holmes plc on 1 October 1998 and leased back on an operating lease in line with the practice adopted by the rest of the group. The property was not depreciated in the current year. The property had been revalued in 1990 and the revaluation surplus credited to a revaluation reserve. No other entries had been made in the revaluation reserve prior to the sale of the property.

Note 3 – intangible fixed assets

This comprises the unamortised balance of goodwill on consolidation which is written off over its useful economic life. During the year ended 30 September 1999, Holmes plc purchased 80% of the issued equity share capital of Watson plc for £100 million payable in cash. The net assets of Watson plc at the date of acquisition were assessed as having fair values as follows:

£ million

Plant and machinery – owned

50

Fixture and fittings – owned

10

Stocks

30

Debtors

25

Cash at bank and in hand

10

Trade creditors

(15)

Taxation

(5)

105

The goodwill arising was assessed as having a useful economic life of 16 years and a full year’s write-off was made in the year ended 30 September 1999. Apart from the acquisition of Watson plc, there were no other changes to the group structure in the year.

Note 4 – tangible fixed assets

30 September 1999

30 September 1998

£ million

£ million

Freehold land and buildings

90

Plant and machinery – owned

130

100

Plant and machinery – leased

90

70

Fixtures and fittings – owned

20

20

240

280

During the year the group entered into new finance lease agreements in respect of some items of plant and machinery. The amounts debited to fixed assets in respect of such agreements during the year totalled £40 million. No disposals of plant and machinery (owned or leased) or fixtures and fittings took place during the year. Depreciation of tangible fixed assets for the year totalled £58 million.

Note 5 – trade creditors

Trade creditors at 30 September 1999 and 30 September 1998 do not include any accrued interest.

Note 6 – other creditors

These comprise dividends payable to minority shareholders.

the following draft financial statements relate to the duke group plc 565690

The following draft financial statements relate to the Duke Group plc:

2000

1999

£m

£m

Fixed Assets:

Intangible assets – goodwill

90

83

Tangible assets

1239

1010

Investments

780

270

2109

1363

Current Assets:

Stocks

750

588

Debtors

660

530

Cash at bank and in hand

45

140

1455

1258

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

(1501)

(1213)

Net Current Assets

(46)

45

Total assets less current liabilities

2063

1408

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year

(1262)

(930)

Minority interests – equity

(250)

(150)

551

328

Capital and Reserves:

Called up share capital:

– ordinary shares of £1

100

70

– 7% redeemable preference shares of £1 each

136

130

Share premium account

85

15

Revaluation reserve

30

10

Profit and loss account

200

103

551

328

Draft Group Profit and Loss Account for the year ended 31 May 2000

£m

£m

Turnover– continuing operations

5795

– acquisitions

1515

7310

Cost of sales

(5920)

Gross profit

1390

Distribution and administrative expenses

(772)

Share of operating profit in associate

98

Operating profit– continuing operations

598

– acquisitions

118

716

Profit on sale of tangible fixed assets

15

Interest receivable

34

Interest payable

(22)

12

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation

743

Tax on profit on ordinary activities

(213)

(including tax on income from associated undertakings £15 million)

Profit on ordinary activities after taxation

530

Minority interests – equity

(97)

Profit attributable to members of the parent company

433

Dividends

135

Other non equity appropriations

6

(141)

Retained profit for the year

292

Group Statement of Total Recognised Gains and Losses for the year ended 31 May 2000

£m

Profit attributable to members of the parent company

433

Surplus on revaluation of fixed assets

20

Exchange difference on retranslation of foreign equity investment

205)

Exchange difference on loan to finance foreign equity investment

10

258

Reconciliation of Shareholders’ Funds for the year ended 31 May 2000

Total recognised gains and losses

258

Dividends

(135)

Other movements:

New shares issued

100

Total movements during the year

223

Shareholders funds at 1 June 1999

328

Shareholders funds at 31 May 2000

551

The following information is relevant to the Duke Group plc:

(i) Duke acquired an eighty per cent holding in Regent plc on 1 June 1999. The fair values of the assets of Regent on 1 June 1999 were as follows:

£m

Tangible fixed assets

60

Stocks

30

Debtors

25

Cash at bank and in hand

35

Trade Creditors

(20)

Corporation Tax

(30)

100

The purchase consideration was £97 million and comprised 20 million ordinary shares of £1 in Duke, valued at £4, and £17 million in cash. The group amortises goodwill over ten years.

(ii) The tangible fixed asset movement for the period comprised the following amounts at net book value:

£m

Balance at 1 June 1999

1010

Additions (including Regent)

278

Revaluations of properties

20

Disposals

(30)

Depreciation

(39)

1239

(iii) There have been no sales of fixed asset investments in the year. The investments included under fixed assets comprised the following items:

£m

£m

2000

1999

Investment in associated company

300

220

Trade investment (including purchase of foreign equity

480

50

investment of £400m equivalent during year

to 31 May 2000)

780

270

(iv) Interest receivable included in debtors was £15m as at 31 May 1999 and £17m as at 31 May 2000.

(v) Creditors: amounts falling due within one year comprised the following items:

£m

£m

2000

1999

Trade creditors (including interest payable £9m (2000) Nil (1999))

1193

913

Corporation tax

203

200

Dividends

105

100

1501

1213

(vi) Duke had allotted 10 million ordinary shares of £1 at a price of £2 upon the exercise of directors’ options during the year.

(vii) Included in creditors: amounts payable after more than one year is a bill of exchange for £100 million (raised 30 June 1999) which was given to a supplier on the purchase of fixed assets and which is payable on 1 July 2001.

(viii) The exchange differences included in the Statement of Total Recognised Gains and Losses relate to a transaction involving a foreign equity investment. A loan of £300 million was taken out during the year to finance a foreign equity investment in Peer of £400 million. Both amounts are after retranslation at 31 May 2000.

(ix) The preference share dividends are always paid in full on 1 July each year and at 31 May 2000 the preference shares have a par value of £130 million.

Required

(a) Prepare a group cash flow statement using the indirect method for the Duke Group plc for the year ended 31 May 2000 in accordance with the requirements of FRS 1 (Revised), Cash Flow Statements.

Your answer should include the following:

(i) a reconciliation of operating profit to operating cash flows;

(ii) an analysis of cash flows for any headings netted in the cash flow statement.

The notes regarding the acquisition of the subsidiary and a reconciliation of net cash flow to movement in net debt are not required.

(b) Discuss the nature of the additional information which is provided by the Group Cash Flow Statement of the Duke group in (a) above as compared to the Group Profit and Loss Account and Group Balance Sheet of Duke.

you are the consolidation accountant of worldwide plc a uk company with subsidiaries 565691

You are the Consolidation Accountant of Worldwide plc, a UK company with subsidiaries located throughout the world. You are currently involved in preparing the consolidated financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2002. Your assistant has prepared the consolidated profit and loss account, the consolidated statement of total recognised gains and losses, the consolidated balance sheet and some supporting schedules. The material your assistant has prepared is given overleaf.

Worldwide plc – consolidated profit and loss account for the year ended 30 September 2002

Turnover

£ million

Cost of sales

4000

Gross profit

(2200)

Other operating expenses

1800

Operating profit

(800)

Gain on sale of subsidiary (Note 1)

1000

Interest payable (Note 2)

58

Profit before taxation

(200)

Taxation

858

Profit after taxation

(180)

Minority interests

678

(128)

Group profit

550

Dividends paid:

– preference shares

(40)

– ordinary shares

(200)

Retained profit

310

Worldwide plc – consolidated statement of total recognised gains and losses for the year ended 30 September 2002

£ million

Group profit for the period

550

Exchange differences (Note 3)

47

Total gains and losses for the period

597

Worldwide plc – consolidated balance sheets at 30 September

2002

2001

£ million

£ million

£ million

£ million

Fixed assets:

Goodwill on consolidation

42

65

Tangible assets (Note 4)

5900

4100

5942

4165

Current assets:

Stocks

950

800

Trade debtors

1000

900

Short term investments

60

80

Cash

20

18

2030

1798

Creditors: amounts falling due within

one year:

Trade creditors

450

400

Accrued interest

25

20

Taxation

130

120

Obligations under finance leases

45

25

Bank overdrafts

65

40

715

605

c/f

1315

5942

1193

4165

Net current assets

1315

1193

Total assets less current liabilities

7257

5358

Creditors: amounts falling due after

more than one year:

Obligations under finance leases

225

140

Long term loans

1554

1200

(1779)

(1340)

Provisions for liabilities and charges:

Deferred taxation

(278)

(218)

5200

3800

Capital and reserves:

Ordinary share capital

2500

2000

8% preference share capital

500

500

Share premium account

500

Profit and loss account

1157

800

4657

3300

Minority interests

543

500

5200

3800

Note 1 – gain on sale of subsidiary

On 1 April 2002, Worldwide plc disposed of a 75% owned subsidiary incorporated in the UK for £250 million in cash. The balance sheet of the subsidiary drawn up at the date of disposal showed the following:

£ million

Tangible fixed assets

200

Stock

100

Trade debtors

110

Cash

10

Trade creditors

(80)

Taxation payable

(25)

Long term loan

(75)

240

This subsidiary had been acquired on 1 April 1994 for a cash payment of £110 million when its net assets had a fair value of £120 million. Goodwill on consolidation is amortised on a monthly basis over 20 years.

Note 2 – interest payable

During the year, the group constructed a factory in the UK. Construction commenced on 1 November 2001 and the factory was ready for use on 1 June 2002. However, production did not begin at the factory until 1 August 2002. The construction of the factory was financed by general borrowings denominated in £s. Your assistant has included the interest relating to the period from 1 November 2001 to 1 June 2002 in the cost of tangible fixed assets rather than taking it to the profit and loss account. The amount of interest that was treated in this way is £10 million. The figure was arrived at by applying a relevant capitalization rate to expenditure on the factory in the period 1 November 2001 to 1 June 2002.

Note 3 – exchange differences

Total

Group share

£ million

£ million

Arising on retranslation of opening net assets:

Tangible fixed assets

25

20

Stock

20

15

Debtors

20

16

Trade creditors

(9)

(6)

56

45

Arising on retranslation of profit for the period

16

12

Offset of exchange loss on Worldwide plc loans (see below)

(10)

(10)

62

47

Worldwide plc has taken out a number of long term loans denominated in foreign currencies to partly finance the equity investments in its foreign subsidiaries. Your assistant has offset the exchange differences arising on the retranslation of these loans against the exchange differences arising on the retranslation of the net investments in the relevant subsidiaries. The exchange gain on retranslation of the profit and loss account (from average rate for the year to the closing rate) relates to operating profit excluding depreciation.

Note 4 – tangible fixed assets

  • During the period, the depreciation charged in the consolidated profit and loss account was £320 million.
  • Apart from the disposal mentioned in note 1, the group disposed of tangible fixed assets having a net book value of £190 million for cash proceeds of £198 million.
  • During the period, the group entered into a significant number of new finance leases. Additions to tangible fixed assets include £250 million capitalised under finance leases.

Required:

(a) Prepare the consolidated cash flow statement of the Worldwide plc group for the year ended 30 September 2002. You should use the indirect method. Notes to the cash flow statement are NOT required.

(b) Evaluate the extent to which the accounting treatment for capitalising interest described in note 2 above is in accordance with existing Accounting Standards.

(c) Evaluate the extent to which the accounting treatment of exchange differences described in note 3 above is in accordance with existing Accounting Standards. Your answer should refer to any relevant current developments that have the potential to affect your evaluation.

Note: Your evaluations for requirements (b) and (c) should not change your answer to requirement (a) of this question.

the financial highlights printed in the annual report showed 565693

Pitted Prunes plc merged with Rosy Plums plc and changed its name to Pitted Rosy Plums plc in June 1987. The figures included in the accounts for the year ended 31 December 1987 included the results of both companies from 1 January 1987.

The financial highlights printed in the annual report showed:

1987

1986

£000

£000

Turnover

Pitted Prunes plc

46434

43354

Rosy Plums plc

110420

78050

156854

121404

Profit before taxation

Pitted Prunes plc

4336

4171

Rosy Plums plc

2019

1144

6355

5315

Shareholders’ funds

38061

35772

Pence per share

Earnings per ordinary share

19.6

16.80

Dividends per ordinary share (net)

5.9

5.12

The five year review showed:

1987

1986

1986

1985

1984

1983

£000

£000

£000

£000

000

£000

restated

Turnover

156854

121404

43354

40959

34832

25209

Percentage exported

52%

49%

44%

45%

44%

38%

Operating profit

8437

6476

4174

3137

2607

1569

Profit on ordinary

activities before

taxation

6355

5315

4171

2667

2208

1205

Profit on ordinary

activities after

taxation

4538

3940

3040

2072

1836

952

Dividends:

Preference

287

289

285

124

77

77

Ordinary

1288

1601

625

454

403

330

Shareholders’ funds

38061

35772

15470

13529

10066

8590

Earnings per ordinary

share

19.6p

16.8p

22.6p

16.0p

14.4p

7.1p

Dividends per ordinary

share

8.1p

7.2p

7.2p

5.3p

4.7p

3.8p

(a) Explain the current requirements for a company to produce a five year summary with its annual report and the circumstances in which it may be necessary to restate the actual figures.

(b) Discuss how historical summaries may be of interest and use to an investor or potential investor.

(c) Discuss the adequacy of the five year historical summary produced for Pitted Rosy Plums plc and the minimum content that you consider desirable.

explain why companies are permitted to buy back their own shares 565695

H plc was established in 1996 to develop advanced computer software. The company was established with the financial backing of B Bank. B Bank invested £2 million in H plc’s share capital, buying 2 million £1 shares at par. The agreement was that B Bank would leave this investment in place for five years. At the end of that period, H plc would buy the shares back from B Bank at a price that reflected the company’s success during that period.

An independent accountant advised that B Bank’s 2 million shares in H plc were worth £4.5 million. The shares were repurchased on 30 April 2001 for that amount.

H plc’s balance sheet immediately before the repurchase was as follows:

H plc

Balance sheet at 30 April 2001 (before share repurchase)

£ million

Net assets

18.0

Share capital

7.0

Profit and loss

11.0

18.0

The net assets figure includes £8.0 million cash.

Required:

(a) Prepare H plc’s balance sheet as it would appear immediately after the share repurchase.

(b) When a company repurchases its shares, it must normally make a transfer from its profit and loss account to its capital redemption reserve (CRR). It has been suggested that this transfer is necessary to protect the company’s lenders. Explain how the transfer to the CRR protects the interests of lenders when a company repurchases its shares.

(c) Explain why companies are permitted to buy back their own shares.

the balance sheet of renewal plc as at 31 may 1996 showed 565697

Renewal plc was incorporated in 1985 to carry on business as manufacturers of designer jewellery. The company has incurred recent trading losses but has now returned to modest profitability. The directors estimate that raising new capital for additional investment in plant would produce an increase in profit from £1 000 000 to £1 750 000 per year but in order to be able to pay dividends it it necessary to eliminate the debit balance on the profit and loss account.

The balance sheet of Renewal plc as at 31 May 1996 showed:

£000

£000

£000

Capital and reserves

Ordinary shares of £1 each – 80p paid up

4080

8% cumulative preference

shares of £1 each

5440

Profit and loss account balance

(5046)

Profit attributable to arrears of preference

dividends

1306

5780

Fixed assets

Freehold premises

2890

Plant and machinery

2040

Patents

578

Development expenditure

408

Current assets

Stock

2108

Debtors

2720

4828

4828

5916

Current liabilities; amounts due in less than one year

Trade creditors

2176

Overdraft

1768

Loans from directors

1020

4964

Net current liabilities

136)

5780

The directors have formulated the following scheme:

(a) The unpaid capital on the £1 ordinary shares to be called up.

(b) The ordinary shareholders to agree to a reduction of 70p on each share held with new shares having a nominal value of 50p and treated as 30p paid up.

(c) The preference shareholders to agree to the cancellation of their three years’ arrears of dividend.

(d) The preference shareholders to agree to a reduction of 20p on each share held with the new shares having a nominal value of 80p and treated as fully paid up.

(e) The dividend rate on preference shares to be increased from 8% to 11%.

(f) The debit balance on the profit and loss account to be eliminated.

(g) Freehold premises have been professionally valued at £3800000.

(h) Plant is to be written down by £850 000; patents are to be written down to £340 000; development expenditure is to be written off; stock is to be written down by £406 000; a provision for doubtful debts of 10% is to be created.

(i) New capital to be raised by a rights issue with existing ordinary shareholders subscribing for two shares for every one share held, 30p payable on application, and preference shareholders subscribing for one new 80p preference share for every four preference shares held.

(j) The directors to agree to £420 000 of their loans to be written off and to accept ordinary shares of 50p each, at a value of 30p (paid up), in settlement of the balance of their loans. These shares are not affected by the rights issue in (i) above.

Required

(a) (i) Explain the procedure that a company needs to follow to readjust the rights of members under ss. 425 and 426 of the Companies Act 1985.

(ii) Advise the directors on an altemative course of action if the ordinary shareholders are not prepared to accept new obligations arising from the proposal to issue partly paid shares.

(b) Prepare the balance sheet for Renewal plc on the assumption that the directors’ scheme has been put into effect.

(c) Advise the preference shareholders whether they should participate in the scheme.

the balance sheet of the company at 31 march 1997 before the implementation of the c 565698

The Collapsible Chair Company Limited was incorporated in 1972 and traded profitably until the 1990s. During the early 1990s the entry of new competitors into the market led to a fall in demand for its product. Consequently, the company started making losses and no dividend has been paid to its equity shareholders since 1992.

A significant failure to co ordinate production and sales, and a breakdown in credit control following staff illness, has led to an increase in stock and debtors. This, in turn, has led to an increase in the bank overdraft beyond the current limit of £1.3 million. Discussions with the bank have revealed a reluctance to increase the overdraft limit beyond the current level. The debentures, all of which are held by the bank, are due for repayment on 31 December 1997. Both the debentures and the overdraft are secured by a fixed charge over the premises. The bank has threatened to put the company into receivership so as to recover the amounts owed to it. The costs of a receivership and likely subsequent liquidation are estimated at £150000.

The directors of the company approached a venture capitalist with the idea of using a new design to produce an alternative type of chair. With an investment of £1.2 million, production could begin to yield an annual operating profit before debenture interest and taxation of £600000 which would result in a cash inflow of a roughly equal amount. However, the venture capitalist was reluctant to invest in the company unless a scheme of capital reorganisation was agreed, and did not wish to gain a controlling interest in the company.

The balance sheet of the company at 31 March 1997, before the implementation of the capital reorganisation scheme, was as follows:

£000

£000

Fixed assets:

Premises

3000

Plant

2000

5000

Current assets:

Stocks

2000

Debtors

1500

3500

Current liabilities:

Trade creditors

1800

Bank overdraft

1500

8% debentures

2500

5800

Net current liabilities

(2300)

2700

Capital and reserves:

Equity share capital (£1 each)

6000

Profit and loss account

(3300)

2700

The directors have obtained the following estimates for the value of the assets of the company as a going concern, and in a liquidation, at 31 March 1997.

Asset

Going concern value

Liquidation value

£000

£000

Premises

3500

3500

Plant

1600

400

Stock

1500

500

Debtors

1300

900

A scheme of capital reorganisation has been agreed with all interested parties and implemented by the directors. Details of the scheme are as follows:

(1) The equity shares of £1 were redesignated as 30p shares.

(2) The assets of the company were stated at their going concern values.

(3) The repayment date for the debentures was deferred to 31 December 2007 with the interest rate increased to 10% per annum.

(4) The bank was issued with 1 million 30p equity shares in return for its willingness to accept a deferred repayment of the debentures.

(5) The venture capitalist subscribed for 4 million new 30p equity shares at par.

(6) The accumulated losses were written off.

Requirements

(a) Prepare the balance sheet of the company at 31 March 1997 which incorporates the scheme which has been implemented.

(b) Assess the effect of the scheme from the point of view of EACH of

  • the equity shareholders;
  • the bank;
  • the venture capitalist.

the directors immediately approached mr jeremiah a partner in the accounting firm of 565699

Medical Equipment plc was incorporated in 1970 to assemble medical equipment used in hospitals. The directors of the company had a major shareholding and were all engaged full time in the operational management of the company. The company had experienced operating losses and the directors believed that profit improvement depended on reducing labour costs. They accordingly decided to automate the assembly process by investing in the development of an automatic machine known as ‘Auto Assembler’.

The ‘Auto Assembler’ was tested and developed in 1990 and by 31 December 1990 development expenditure of £157 300 incurred in the development of the ‘Auto Assembler’ has been capitalised. It was estimated that its operational use would result in cost savings of £130 000 per annum before tax and that it could be made operational in 1991 for a capital outlay of £75 000. The directors had been building up a short term investment during 1989–1990 to cover this capital outlay.

The production engineer estimated that as a result of automation an additional £40 000 investment would be required for working capital to meet the additional cost of higher specification materials.

In December 1990 the manager of the bank informed the directors that he wanted the overdraft reduced to around £75 000 from its present level of £270480.

The directors immediately approached Mr Jeremiah, a partner in the accounting firm of Hard Reality & Co. who were the company’s auditors. They believed in the potential profitability of the new automated assembly process and advised Mr Jeremiah that they believed that they would be able to negotiate long term loan finance to clear the overdraft.

At the request of the accountants the company produced the following:

(i) draft accounts as at 31 December 1990

(ii) additional information on assets and liabilities.

Draft profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 1990

£

£

Sales

2008000

Cost of sales

Materials

1398800

Labour

300000

1698800

Gross profit

309200

Distribution costs

(213200)

Administration expenses

(129000)

Profit before interest and tax

(33000)

Interest

(51600)

Profit before tax

(84600)

Draft balance sheet as at 31 December 1990

£

Fixed assets

Freehold land and buildings

312000

Plant and machinery

197600

Development cost of ‘Auto Assembler’

157300

666900

Current assets

Stock

302400

Investments

52000

Debtors

169000

Cash

2600

526000

1192900

Current liabilities

Creditors

(303240)

Overdraft

(270480)

(573720)

Non current liabilities

10% debentures

Capital employed

(208000)

411180

Capital and reserves

Ordinary shares of £1 each

425000

Share premium account

42500

7% non cumulative preference shares of £1 each

260000

Profit and loss account

316320)

411180

Additional information on individual assets and liabilities as at 31 December 1990:

Going concern

Going concern

Values

values assuming

values assuming

realisable on

Auto Assembler’

Auto Assembler’

liquidation

does NOT become

DOES become

operational

operational

£

£

£

Freehold land and buildings

385000

385000

385000

Plant and machinery

123500

88400

44200

Stock

292400

254800

200100

Debtors

149000

149000

119840

Investments

52000

52000

81000

Development costs

157300

The creditors comprised:

£

Preferential creditors

34700

Loan interest accrued on debentures

10400

Trade creditors

258140

303240

Trade creditors allow 60 days’ credit.

The debentures were secured on the freehold land and buildings and were redeemable at par in 1997.

Mr Jeremiah was not convinced that the directors would be able to arrange long term loan finance to replace the overdraft and was of the opinion that a scheme of internal reconstruction would become necessary. He requested one of his staff to draft a brief report to explain to the directors feasible ways forward.

Required

(a) Prepare a balance sheet as at 31 December 1990 on the basis that the company ceased trading on that date and explain its significance for the relevant parties.

(b) (i) Explain briefly the purposes of a scheme for reconstruction as it would apply to equity and loan stockholders.

(ii) Propose a scheme for the capital reconstruction of Medical Equipment plc.

Show your calculation of the loss involved in the scheme; state what you would do with this loss; calculate the working capital requirements of the company; calculate the possible additional equity capital that might be required.

Note: The revised balance sheet after the implementation of the scheme is not required.

(iii) Explain briefly to the directors how the scheme will be fair to all relevant parties.

aztec plc was incorporated in 1968 as an importer of silver artefacts from south ame 565700

Aztec plc was incorporated in 1968 as an importer of silver artefacts from South America which it customised for the UK market. The company had sold its products in the luxury market and traded profitably until 1989. Since that date it has suffered continuous losses which have resulted in a negative balance on the profit and loss account. The balance sheet as at 31 December 1993 showed the following:

£

Share capital and reserves

675000

Ordinary shares of 1 each

135000

7% Preference shares of 1 each

573000)

Profit and loss account

237000

Net capital employed

Fixed assets

Leasehold premises

397000

Vehicles and equipment

105000

Machinery

250000

Current assets

Stock

295000

Debtor

120000

Current liabilities

Suppliers

(288000)

Wages VAT and PAYE

(80000)

Hire purchase liability on vehicles/equipment

(20000)

Bank overdraft (secured by a fixed charge over the machinery)

(112000)

Non current liabilities

Hire purchase liability on vehicles and equipment

(25000)

11% Debentures (secured by a floating charge)

405000)

Net assets

237000

Since 1989 the company has been developing an export market for its products in Europe and the directors forecast that the company will return to profit in 1994. They expect profits before tax and debenture interest to be in the range of £70 000 to £140 000 per annum over the next three years. As a result of developing the export market, they expect that the company will require warehouse premises on the Continent in 1996 at a forecast cost of £250000.

However, the directors are concerned that even if the company achieves a profit of £70 000 per year it will be a number of years before a dividend could be distributed to the ordinary shareholders and it would be difficult to raise fresh funds from the shareholders in 1996 if there were to be little prospect of a dividend until the year 2000.

The directors have been considering various possible courses of action available under the Companies Act 1985 and the Insolvency Act 1986 and have had initial discussions with their auditors.

As a result of these discussions it was agreed that the finance director would produce a draft proposal for reorganisation; the auditors would let the finance director have their comments on the draft proposal: and the finance director would then submit a proposal to the board of directors for their consideration.

The following additional information was obtained by the finance director concerning the assets and liabilities at 31 December 1993 and estimated costs of liquidating or reorganising:

(a) Fair values and liquidation values of assets were:

Fair values

Liquidation values

on a going

on a forced sale

concern basis

basis

£

£

Leasehold premises

360000

100000

Vehicles and equipment

85000

35000

Machinery

225000

122000

Current assets

285000

150000

Stock

110000

100000

(b) Preference dividends are four years in arrears.

(c) Wages, VAT and PAYE would be preferential creditors in a liquidation.

(d) The costs of liquidating Aztec plc were estimated at £55 000.

(e) The costs of reorganisation were estimated at £40 000; these would be paid by Aztec (Europe) plc and treated as part of the purchase consideration.

The finance director prepared the following draft proposal:

(i) A new company was to be formed, Aztec (Europe) plc with a share capital of £270 000 in 10p shares to acquire the assets and liabilities of Aztec plc as at 31 December 1993.

(ii) The ordinary shareholders were to receive less than 25% of the ordinary shares in Aztec (Europe) plc so that the existing preference shareholders and debenture holders each had a significant interest and acting together had control of the new company.

(iii) The arrears of preference dividends were to be cancelled.

(iv) The new company was to issue:

– 900 000 ordinary shares and £70 000 of 13% debentures to the existing preference shareholders;

– 1 200 000 ordinary shares and £200 000 of 13% debentures to the existing 11% debenture holders;

– 600000 ordinary shares to the existing ordinary shareholders.

(v) The variation of the rights of the shareholders and creditors was to be effected under s. 425 of the Companies Act 1985 which requires that the scheme should be approved by a majority in number and 75% in value of each class of shareholders, by a majority in number and 75% in value of each class of creditor affected and by the court.

(vi) The transfer of the assets to Aztec (Europe) plc was to be effected under s. 427 of the Companies Act 1985 which would ensure that the court dealt with the transfer of the assets and liabilities and the dissolution of Aztec plc to avoid the costs of winding up that company.

Assume a corporation tax rate of 35% and an income tax rate of 25%. Ignore ACT.

Required

(a) Assuming that the necessary approvals have been obtained for assets and liabilities to be transferred on the proposed terms on 31 December 1993:

(i) Prepare journal entries to close the books of Aztec plc; and

(ii) Prepare the balance sheet of Aztec (Europe) plc after the transfer of assets and liabilities.

(b) Draft a memo to the finance director commenting on his draft proposals for a scheme of capital reduction and reorganisation.

(c) Advise the directors as to the course of action they should take in order to be able to proceed with their plans for reorganisation if they learn that a creditor has obtained a judgment against the company and is considering seeking a compulsory winding up order.

the profit and loss accounts for the year ended 31 march 1991 are set out below comp 565705

An assistant accountant of Changeling plc has been requested to prepare a profit and loss account using the CPP model for the year ended 31 March 1991. He has calculated the net operating profit for the year and the remaining entries are yet to be completed.

The profit and loss accounts for the year ended 31 March 1991 are set out below, comprising the historic cost profit and loss account and partially completed CPP profit and loss account.

Historic

Index

CPP units as

cost

factor

at 31.3.91

£000

000

Sales

6500

2000/1875

6933

Opening stock

700

2000/1700

824

Purchases

4250

2000/1875

4533

4950

5357

Closing stock

(900)

2000/1937

(929)

4050

4428

Gross profit

2450

2505

Expenses

1150

2000/1875

1227

Depreciation:

Original equipment

500

2000/1025

976

New equipment

50

2000/1813

55

Net operating profit

750

247

Tax

338

c/f

412

Profit (loss) after tax

412

Gain (loss) on net monetary assets

Gain (loss) on long term loans

Net profit (loss) for year

412

Dividends

187

Retained profit (loss) for year

225

Retained profit brought forward

750

Retained profit carried forward

975

Balance sheet as at 31 March 1990

Historic

Index

CPP units

Index

CPP units

cost

factor

as at

factor

as at

31.3.90

31.3.91

£000

000

000

Capital

2500

1750

4605

2000

5263

Retained profit

750

950

1142

1750

1305

3250

5747

6568

Fixed assets

Equipment

5000

1750

8537

2000

9757

1025

1750

Depreciation

(1500)

1750

(2561)

2000

(2927)

1025

1750

Current assets

Stock

700

1750

721

2000

824

1700

1750

Debtors

1050

1050

2000

1200

1750

Current liabilities

Trade creditors

(875)

(875)

2000

(1000)

1750

Non current liabilities

Loan

(1125)

(1125)

2000

(1286)

3250

5747

1750

6568

Balance sheet as at 31 March 1991

Historic

Index

CPP units as

cost

factor

at 31.3.91

£000

000

Capital

2500

2000

5263

950

Retained profit

975

1142

3475

6405

Fixed assets

Equipment

5000

2000

9757

1025

Depreciation

(2000)

2000

(3903)

1025

New equipment

500

2000

552

1813

Depreciation

(50)

2000

(55)

1813

Current assets

Stock

900

2000

929

1938

Debtors

1150

1150

5500

8430

Current liabilities

Trade creditors

(400)

(400)

Non current liabilities

Loan

(1625)

(1625)

3475

6405

Assume that inflation index increased evenly throughout the year ended 31 March 1991.

Required

(a) Calculate the retained profit (loss) for the year using the CPP Model for the year ended 31 March 1991.

(b) Explain what the method of indexing is attempting to deal with and discuss the process from the viewpoint of both the entity and the proprietors.

(c) Write a brief report to the principal shareholder of Changeling Ltd who holds 20% of the issued share capital on the management of the company commenting on profitability, liquidity and financial structure.

depreciation of delivery vans is over 4 years using the straight line method 565707

The Paraffin Supply Company Limited acquired freehold land as a depot for its delivery vans and started business on 1 January 1986. It collected sufficient paraffin from a wholesaler each day to satisfy known orders. The wholesaler was paid in cash and the customers paid cash on delivery. The opening balance sheet at 1 January 1986 showed the following:

Balance sheet of Paraffin Supply Company Limited as at 1 January 1986

£

Freehold land for use as garage premises

100000

Delivery vehicles

96000

196000

Financed by: Share capital

150000

Long term loan

46000

196000

The company traded for 2 years until 31 December 1987. All profits had been retained in the business. There were no creditors, debtors or stocks. At 31 December 1987 the directors were considering whether to cease trading at31 December 1988.

The accountant produced the following estimated accounts for the year ended 31 December 1988 with the 1986 and 1987 actual comparative figures:

1986

1987

1988

£

£

£

Sales

140000

184000

248000

Less: Purchases

70000

90000

124000

Administration expenses

21400

22000

27500

Selling expenses

21000

30000

42500

Depreciation

24000

24000

24000

3600

18000

30000

1986

1987

1988

Return on equity

3600/150000 ×100

18000/153600 ×100

30000/171600 ×100

= 2.4%

= 11.7%

= 17.5%

In preparing the accounts the following conventions and policies had been followed:

(a) The capital maintenance concept is that capital will be maintained if the cost of assets representing the initial monetary investment is recovered against operations.

(b) The concept of profit is that profit for the year is regarded as any gains arising during the year which may be distributed while maintaining the amount of the shareholders’ interest in the company at the beginning of the year.

(c) The measurement unit used is the medium of exchange.

(d) Depreciation of delivery vans is over 4 years using the straight line method.

The directors had recently attended a seminar on the treatment of inflation in financial reports and they required the profits to be calculated using the general purchasing power income model and the replacement cost model. The accountant obtained the following information to allow him to redraft the profit and loss account using these two models:

(a) The retail price index was as follows:

1 January 1986

100

31 December 1986

110

31 December 1987

120

31 December 1988 (Estimated)

130

(b) The replacement cost of the assets was:

Garage premises

Delivery vehicles

£

£

31 December 1986

120000

102000

31 December 1987

130000

115000

31 December 1988 (Estimated)

141000

128000

Required

(a) (i) Prepare the profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 1988 using the general purchasing power income model and explain the following:

The concept of capital maintenance used.

The concept of profit used.

The measurement unit used.

(ii) Mention four criteria for selecting an appropriate unit of measurement for financial reporting and briefly discuss whether the general purchasing power income model satisfies these criteria.

(b) (i) Prepare the profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 1988 using the replacement cost model to show reported income on the assumption that backlog depreciation is not deducted in arriving at this reported income and explain the following:

The concept of capital maintenance used.

The concept of profit used.

The measurement unit used.

(ii) Discuss the arguments for and against excluding backlog depreciation when calculating the reported income.

prepare a profit and loss account that shows a result after maintaining the operatin 565708

Air Fare plc is the subsidiary of an American parent company. It had been incorporated in the United Kingdom in 1985 to provide in flight packed meals for American airlines on return flights from the United Kingdom.

The fixed assets in the annual accounts have been carried at cost less depreciation but the directors have been considering the production of supplementary statements that are based on current values and show a profit after maintaining the operating capital and also a profit that encompassed gains on holding assets to the extent that these were real gains after allowing for general/average inflation.

The following information (i) to (vi) was available when preparing the supplementary statements for the year ended 31 December 1993.

(i) Draft profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 1993 prepared under the historic cost convention.

£000

Sales

11441

Cost of sales

10292

1149

Loan interest

625

524

Tax

124

400

Less: Proposed dividend

100

300

(ii) The current cost values of the net assets representing shareholders’ funds was £25 million at 1 January 1993.

(iii) Freehold premises had cost £8 million in 1985 and were being depreciated over 40 years which was the group policy specified by the American parent. The current gross replacement cost was £14 million at 31 December 1993 and £13.8 million at 1 January 1993.

Equipment had cost £12 million in 1991 and was being depreciated over 15 years. The gross replacement cost was £12.6 million at 31 December 1993 and £12.5 million at 1 January 1993.

(iv) The cost of sales had increased by £412 000 during the year due to price increases. The costs and price increases occurred evenly during the year.

(v) The retail price index had risen by 3% during the year.

(vi) Stock at the beginning of the year was £660 000 at cost and £670 000 at current replacement cost and stock at the end of the year was £750 000 at cost and £795 000 at current replacement cost.

The following information relates to a consideration not to provide for depreciation on the freehold property.

The freehold property consisted of the premises where the meals were prepared and packed. When the directors were reviewing the information prepared for the current value supplementary statements they noted that the current value of the freehold property exceeded the book value and decided that it was appropriate not to provide for depreciation.

The chief accountant advised them that it was probable that the auditor would qualify the accounts if depreciation were not provided in accordance with the provisions of SSAP 12 Accounting for Depreciation.

The directors had been discussing the problem over lunch at the local hotel and were surprised when the owner of the hotel informed them that the auditor of the company that owned the hotel had not required depreciation to be provided on the hotel premises. Further enquiry by the directors established that there were a number of companies that were not providing depreciation on freehold properties from a range of industries that included hotels, retail shops and banks. They even discovered that the Financial Reporting Review Panel had accepted one company’s policy on non depreciation of freehold buildings in respect of the accounts of Forte plc. They had therefore formed the view that non depreciation was acceptable provided the auditors were offered and accepted the company’s reasons.

They accordingly requested the chief accountant to prepare a brief report for the board of reasons to support a decision by the company to adopt an accounting policy of nondepreciation which they could subsequently discuss with the auditors.

Required

(a) (i) Prepare a profit and loss account that shows a result after maintaining the operating capital and also a result that encompasses the gains for the year on holding assets to the extent that these are real gains after allowing for inflation.

(ii) Write a brief memo to the directors explaining the results disclosed in the profit and loss account prepared in (i).

(b) As chief accountant, prepare a brief report for the board giving reasons to support a decision by the company to adopt an accounting policy of non depreciation of the freehold property.

extracts from the published financial statements for the year ended 31 march 1996 ar 565710

You are a financial analyst specialising in the analysis of the profitability of organisations in the engineering sector. One such company is D Ltd. The directors of D Ltd have always been interested in the impact of price changes on the performance of their business and have adopted the practice of including current cost accounts (using the ‘Real Terms’ system) alongside the historical cost accounts in the published financial statements.

Extracts from the published financial statements for the year ended 31 March 1996 are given below:

Profit and loss accounts – year ended 31 March 1996

Historical cost

Current cost

£000

£000

£000

Sales

30000

30000

Operating costs (Note 1)

(16000)

(19000)

Operating profit

14000

11000

Interest payable

(2000)

(2000)

Profit before taxation

12000

9000

Taxation

(3500)

(3500)

Profit after taxation

8500

5500

Holding gains arising during the year

3500

Inflation adjustment to shareholders’ funds

(2000)

Real gains

1500

Profit for the year

8500

7000

Dividends

(7000)

(7000)

Retained profit

1500

Balance sheet at 31 March 1996

Historical cost

Current cost

£000

£000

Tangible fixed assets

20000

24000

Current assets (Note 2)

16000

19000

Current liabilities

(10000)

(10000)

Loans

(15000)

(15000)

11000

18000

Shareholders’ funds

11000

18000

Note 1

Operating costs are as follows:

£000

£000

Cost of sales (excluding depreciation)

8000

10000

Depreciation

5000

6000

Other operating costs

3000

3000

16000

19000

Note 2

Current assets comprise:

£000

£000

Stocks

6000

9000

Debtors

9000

9000

Cash

1000

1000

16000

19000

Requirements

(a) Compute (under both conventions) three accounting ratios for D Ltd which differ under the two conventions.

(b) Explain, for each ratio you have computed, the reason why the current cost elements included in the ratio differ from the historical cost elements.

(c) Explain the adjustments ‘Holding gains arising during the year’ and ‘Inflation adjustment to shareholders’ funds’.

determine the owner rsquo s equity of flanagan company at december 31 2012 565714

Presented below is selected information related to Flanagan Company at December 31, 2012. Flanagan reports financial information monthly.

Equipment

$10,000

Cash

8,000

Service Revenue

36,000

Rent Expense

11,000

Accounts Payable

2,000

Utilities Expense

$ 4,000

Accounts Receivable

9,000

Salaries and Wages Expense

7,000

Notes Payable

16,500

Owner’s Drawings

5,000

(a) Determine the total assets of Flanagan Company at December 31, 2012.

(b) Determine the net income that Flanagan Company reported for December 2012.

(c) Determine the owner’s equity of Flanagan Company at December 31, 2012.

determine the net income that lance company reported for december 2012 565719

Presented below is selected information related to Lance Company at December 31, 2012. Lance reports financial information monthly.

Accounts Payable

$ 3,000

Cash

4,500

Advertising Expense

6,000

Service Revenue

51,500

Equipment

29,000

Salaries and Wages Expense

$16,500

Notes Payable

25,000

Rent Expense

10,500

Accounts Receivable

13,500

Owner’s Drawings

7,500

(a) Determine the total assets of Lance Company at December 31, 2012.

(b) Determine the net income that Lance Company reported for December 2012.

(c) Determine the owner’s equity of Lance Company at December 31, 2012.

disclosure note for movements on reserves 565658

Islay plc has acquired the following unincorporated businesses:

(1) ‘Savalight’, a business specialising in the production of low cost, energy efficient light bulbs, acquired on 1 June 1996 for £580 000. The identifiable assets and liabilities of the business had a book value of £550 000 and were valued at £500 000 on 1 June 1996. The company estimated the useful economic life of the goodwill arising at five ears and has been amortising this through the profit and loss account. It was anticipated that the goodwill would have a residual value of £20 000.

(2) ‘Green Goods’, a business specialising in the distribution of a range of environmentally friendly products, acquired on 1 June 1997 for £1.8 million. The identifiable assets and liabilities of the business had a book value of £1.1 million and were valued at £1.3 million on 1 June 1997, including goodwill of the business of £150 000. The company estimated the useful economic life of goodwill arising at 25 years and has been amortising this through the profit and loss account.

(3) ‘Smart IT’, a business specialising in the distribution of computers, acquired on 1 June 1998 for £900 000. The identifiable assets and liabilities of the business had a book value of £1 million and were valued at £1.2 million on 1 June 1998. Assume the major non monetary assets in these amounts have a useful economic life of 15 years.

Islay plc revalued its tangible fixed assets during the year ended 31 May 1999 and created a revaluation reserve of £600 000. In addition, the company believes the goodwill arising on the purchase of ‘Savalight’ is now worth £350 000 and intends to reflect this in the financial statements for the year ended 31 May 1999.

The company’s capital and reserves (before reflecting any adjustments for the above acquisitions) in the draft financial statements as at 31 May 1999 show:

Capital and reserves

£000

Called up share capital (5 000 000 ordinary shares of £1 each)

5000

Revaluation reserve

600

Profit and loss account (£200 000 for the year ended 31 May 1999)

700

6300

Requirements

(a) Calculate and disclose the amounts for goodwill to be included in the financial statements for Islay plc for the year ended 31 May 1999, providing the following disclosures:

Balance sheet extracts

Disclosure note for goodwill

Disclosure note for movements on reserves. (

(b) Explain the accounting treatment you have adopted for any goodwill arising in acquisitions (1) to (3) above, referring to the provisions of FRS 10, ‘Goodwill and Intangible Assets’, and noting any current or future action Islay plc will have to take on goodwill recognised.

calculate the amount of goodwill arising on the acquisition of monans ltd that would 565659

Elie plc acquired 80% of the £1 million ordinary share capital of Monans Ltd on 1 July 2001 by issuing 200 000 £1 ordinary shares. Elie plc’s ordinary shares were quoted at £17 on 1 July 2001. Expenses of the share issue amounted to £90 000.

A further amount of £94 500 is payable in cash on 1 July 2002. Elie plc’s borrowing rate is 5%.

A further contingent consideration of shares with a value of £500 000 is dependent on Monans Ltd achieving a 10% increase in turnover in the year ended 31 October 2002. This would become due on 1 July 2003. Monans Ltd has achieved an increase in turnover over the past five years of 11%, 8%, 10%, 11% and 12% (from the earliest to the most recent year).

The net assets of Monans Ltd in its accounts as at 1 July 2001 were £3 million with fair value being £1 million higher than book value. Monans Ltd had the following reserves at 1 July 2001:

£000

Revaluation reserve

400

General reserve

100

Profit and loss account

1500

A further acquisition of shares took place on 1 September 2001 when Elie plc purchased 60% of the £500 000 preference shares of Monans Ltd for £390 000.

Elie plc is intending to write off any goodwill arising over 9 years, charging a full year in the year of acquisition.

Elie plc has identified the following matters not reflected in the financial statements of Monans Ltd as at 1 July 2001:

(1) A contingent asset amounting to £200 000 existed at 1 July 2001; the company’s lawyers consider it is probable this will be received in the near future.

(2) Operating losses of £300 000 are expected after acquisition.

(3) Reorganisation costs of £100 000 are to be incurred to bring Monans Ltd’s systems into line with those of the group.

(4) A fall in stock value of £50 000 on 5 July 2001 due to a fire at a warehouse. The stock now has a net realisable value of £5000.

Requirements

(a) Calculate the amount of goodwill arising on the acquisition of Monans Ltd that would be shown in the group accounts of Elie plc for the year ended 30 June 2002.

(b) Explain your calculation of the goodwill arising in (a) including your treatment of items (1) to (4) above, referring to appropriate accounting standards.

show how the impairment loss you have calculated in b would affect the carrying valu 565660

FRS 11 – Impairment of fixed assets and goodwill requires that all fixed assets and goodwill should be reviewed for impairment where appropriate and any impairment loss dealt with in the financial statements.

The XY group prepares financial statements to 31 December each year. On 31 December 1998 the group purchased all the shares of MH Ltd for £2 million. The fair value of the identifiable net assets of MH Ltd at that date was £1.8 million. It is the policy of the XY group to amortise goodwill over 20 years. The amortisation of the goodwill of MH Ltd commenced in 1999. MH Ltd made a loss in 1999 and at 31 December 1999 the net assets of MH Ltd – based on fair values at 1 January 1999 – were as follows:

£000

Capitalised development expenditure

200

Tangible fixed assets

1300

Net current assets

250

1750

An impairment review at 31 December 1999 indicated that the value in use of MH Ltd at that date was £1.5 million. The capitalised development expenditure has no ascertainable external market value.

Requirements

(a) Describe what is meant by ‘impairment’ and briefly explain the procedures that must be followed when performing an impairment review.

(b) Calculate the impairment loss that would arise in the consolidated financial statements of the XY group as a result of the impairment review of MH Ltd at 31 December 1999.

(c) Show how the impairment loss you have calculated in (b) would affect the carrying values of the various net assets in the consolidated balance sheet of the XY group at 31 December 1999.

explain and calculate the effect of the impairment review on the carrying value of t 565661

Acquirer plc is a company that regularly purchases new subsidiaries. On 30 June 2000, the company acquired all the equity shares of Prospects plc for a cash payment of £260 illion. The net assets of Prospects plc on 30 June 2000 were £180 million and no fair value adjustments were necessary upon consolidation of Prospects plc for the first time. Acquirer plc assessed the useful economic life of the goodwill that arose on consolidation of Prospects plc as 40 years and charged six months’ amortisation in its consolidated profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 2000. Acquirer plc then charged a full year’s amortisation of the goodwill in its consolidated profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 2001.

On 31 December 2001, Acquirer plc carried out a review of the goodwill on consolidation of Prospects plc for evidence of impairment. The review was carried out despite the fact that there were no obvious indications of adverse trading conditions for Prospects plc. The review involved allocating the net assets of Prospects plc into three incomegenerating units and computing the value in use of each unit. The carrying values of the individual units before any impairment adjustments are given below:

Unit A

Unit B

Unit C

£ million

£ million

£ million

Patents

5

Tangible fixed assets

60

30

40

Net current assets

20

25

20

85

55

60

Value in use of unit

72

60

65

It was not possible to meaningfully allocate the goodwill on consolidation to the individual income generating units, but all the other net assets of Prospects plc are allocated in the table shown above. The patents of Prospects plc have no ascertainable market value but all the current assets have a market value that is above carrying value. The value in use of Prospects plc as a single income generating unit at 31 December 2001 is £205 million.

Required

(a) Explain why it was necessary to review the goodwill on consolidation of Prospects plc for impairment at 31 December 2001.

(b) Explain briefly the purpose of an impairment review and why the net assets of Prospects plc were allocated into income generating units as part of the review of goodwill for impairment.

(c) Demonstrate how the impairment loss in unit A will affect the carrying value of the net assets of unit A in the consolidated financial statements of Acquirer plc.

(d) Explain and calculate the effect of the impairment review on the carrying value of the goodwill on consolidation of Prospects plc at 31 December 2001.

relevant balance sheets as at 31 march 1994 are set out opposite 565665

Relevant balance sheets as at 31 March 1994 are set out opposite:

£000

£000

£000

Jasmin

Kasbah

Fortran

Holdings) plc

plc

plc

Tangible fixed assets

289400

91800

7600

Investments

Shares in Kasbah (at cost)

97600

Shares in Fortran (at cost)

8000

395000

Current assets

Stock

285600

151400

2600

Cash

319000

500

6800

604600

151900

9400

Creditors: amounts falling

due within one year

289600

238500

2200

Net current assets

315000

(86600)

7200

Total assets less current liabilities

710000

5200

14800

Capital and reserves

Called up share capital

Ordinary £1 shares

60000

20000

10000

10% £1 Preference shares

Revaluation reserve

40000

4000

1200

Profit and loss reserve

610000

(18800)

3600

710000

5200

14800

You have recently been appointed chief accountant of Jasmin (Holdings) plc and are about to prepare the group balance sheet at 31 March 1994.

The following points are relevant to the preparation of those accounts.

(a) Jasmin (Holdings) plc owns 90% of the ordinary £1 shares and 20% of the 10% £1 preference shares of Kasbah plc. On 1 April 1993 Jasmin (Holdings) plc paid £96 million for the ordinary £1 shares and £1.6 million for the 10% £1 preference shares when Kasbah’s reserves were a credit balance of £45 million.

(b) Jasmin (Holdings) plc sells part of its output to Kasbah plc. The stock of Kasbah plc on 31 March 1994 includes £1.2 million of stock purchased from Jasmin (Holdings) plc at cost plus one third.

(c) The policy of the group is to revalue its tangible fixed assets on a yearly basis. However the directors of Kasbah plc have always resisted this policy preferring to show tangible fixed assets at historical cost. The market value of the tangible fixed assets of Kasbah plc at 31 March 1994 is £90 million. The directors of Jasmin (Holdings) plc wish you to follow the requirements of FRS 2 ‘Accounting for Subsidiary Undertakings’ in respect of the value of tangible fixed assets to be included in the group accounts.

(d) The ordinary £1 shares of Fortran plc are split into 6 million ‘A’ ordinary £1 shares and 4 million ‘B’ ordinary £1 shares. Holders of ‘A’ shares are assigned 1 vote and holders of ‘B’ ordinary shares are assigned 2 votes per share. On 1 April 1993 Jasmin (Holdings) plc acquired 80% of the ‘A’ ordinary shares and 10% of the ‘B’ ordinary shares when the profit and loss reserve of Fortran plc was £1.6 million and the revaluation reserve was £2 million. The ‘A’ ordinary shares and ‘B’ ordinary shares carry equal rights to share in the company’s profit and losses.

(e) The fair values of Kasbah plc and Fortran plc were not materially different from their book values at the time of acquisition of their shares by Jasmin (Holdings) plc. (f) Goodwill arising on acquisition is amortised over five years.

(g) Kasbah plc has paid its preference dividend for the current year but no other dividends are proposed by the group companies. The preference dividend was paid shortly after the interim results of Kasbah plc were announced and was deemed to be a legal dividend by the auditors.

(h) Because of its substantial losses during the period, the directors of Jasmin (Holdings) plc wish to exclude the financial statements of Kasbah plc from the group accounts on the grounds that Kasbah plc’s output is not similar to that of Jasmin (Holdings) plc and that the resultant accounts therefore would be misleading. Jasmin (Holdings) plc produces synthetic yarn and Kasbah plc produces garments.

Required

(a) List the conditions for exclusion of subsidiaries from consolidation for the directors of Jasmin (Holdings) plc and state whether Kasbah plc may be excluded on these grounds.

(b) Prepare a consolidated balance sheet for Jasmin (Holdings) Group plc for the year ending 31 March 1994.

(c) Comment briefly on the possible implications of the size of Kasbah plc’s losses for the year for the group accounts and the individual accounts of Jasmin (Holdings) plc.

discuss the benefits of consolidated accounts to the users of published financial st 565666

Balmoral plc acquired 75% of the ordinary share capital and 30% of the preference share capital of Glenshee Ltd for £2 million on 1 November 1994. The draft profit and loss accounts for the companies for the year ended 31 October 1998 were:

Balmoral

Glenshee

plc

Ltd

£000

£000

Turnover

2500

800

Changes in stocks of finished

goods and work in progress

200

(100)

Own work capitalised

150

Raw materials and consumables

(1000)

(300)

Staff costs

(400)

(50)

Depreciation

(350)

(110)

Profit before taxation

1100

240

Taxation

(340)

(70)

Profit after taxation

760

170

Additional information

  1. The share capital and reserves of Glenshee Ltd at 1 November 1994 were:

£000

Ordinary shares of £1 each

1500

10% preference shares of £1 each

500

Share premium account

100

Profit and loss account

400

to the share capital.

(2) The share capital of Balmoral plc comprises £2 million of 50p ordinary shares.

(3) The fair value of Glenshee Ltd’s fixed assets was £200 000 higher than their net book value at 1 November 1994 and they have a useful economic life of 10 years.

(4) On 31 July 1998, Glenshee Ltd sold goods to Balmoral plc for £50 000 on the basis of cost plus a mark up of one third. By 31 October 1998, £40 000 of the goods remained in Balmoral plc’s stock.

(5) Neither company has paid dividends in the year but both have proposed a final ordinary dividend of 5p per share and Glenshee Ltd proposes to pay the preference dividend in full. These proposed dividends are yet to be accounted for.

(6) Any goodwill arising is to be amortised over 10 years.

Requirements

(a) Prepare the consolidated profit and loss account of Balmoral plc for the year ended 31 October 1998.

(b) Discuss the benefits of consolidated accounts to the users of published financial statements.

highland plc owns two subsidiaries acquired as follows 565667

Highland plc owns two subsidiaries acquired as follows:

1 July 1991

80% of Aviemore Ltd for £5 million when the book value of the net

assets of Aviemore Ltd was £4 million.

30 November 1997

65% of Buchan Ltd for £2 million when the book value of the net

assets of Buchan Ltd was £1.35 million.

The companies’ profit and loss accounts for the year ended 31 March 1998 were:

Highland

Aviemore

Buchan

plc

Ltd

Ltd

£000

£000

£000

Sales

5000

3000

2910

Cost of sales

(3000)

(2300)

(2820)

Gross profit

2000

700

90

Net operating expenses

(1000)

(500)

(150)

Other income

230

Interest payable and similar charges

(50)

(210)

Profit/(loss) before taxation

1230

150

(270)

Taxation

(300)

(50)

Profit/(loss) after taxation

930

100

(270)

Dividends proposed

(200)

(50)

730

50

(270)

Additional information

(1) On 1 April 1997, Buchan Ltd issued £2.1 million 10% loan stock to Highland plc. Interest is payable twice yearly on 1 October and 1 April. Highland plc has accounted for the interest received on 1 October 1997 only.

(2) On 1 July 1997, Aviemore Ltd sold a freehold property to Highland plc for £800 000 (land element – £300 000). The property originally cost £900 000 (land element – £100 000) on 1 July 1987. The property’s total useful economic life was 50 years on 1 July 1987 and there has been no change in the useful economic life since. Aviemore Ltd has credited the profit on disposal to ‘Net operating expenses’.

(3) The fixed assets of Buchan Ltd on 30 November 1997 were valued at £500 000 (book value £350 000) and were acquired in April 1997. The fixed assets have a total useful economic life of ten years. Buchan Ltd has not adjusted its accounting records to reflect fair values.

(4) All companies use the straight line method of depreciation and charge a full year’s depreciation in the year of acquisition and none in the year of disposal.

(5) Highland plc charges Aviemore Ltd an annual fee of £85 000 for management services and this has been included in ‘Other income’.

(6) Highland plc has accounted for its dividend receivable from Aviemore Ltd in ‘Other income’.

(7) It is group policy to amortise goodwill arising on acquisitions over ten years. Requirement

Prepare the consolidated profit and loss account for Highland plc for the year ended 31 March 1998.

draft a reply to your assistant which evaluates the suggested treatment and recommen 565668

You are the management accountant of Complex plc, a listed company with a number of subsidiaries located throughout the United Kingdom. Your assistant has prepared the first draft of the financial statements of the group for the year ended 31 August 1999. The draft statements show a group profit before taxation of £40 million. She has written you a memorandum concerning two complex transactions which have arisen during the year. The memorandum outlines the key elements of each transaction and suggests the appropriate treatment.

Transaction 1

On 1 March 1999, Complex plc purchased 75% of the equity share capital of Easy Ltd for a total cash price of £60 million. The Directors of Easy Ltd prepared a balance sheet of the company at 1 March 1999. The total of net assets as shown in this balance sheet was £66 million. However, the net assets of Easy Ltd were reckoned to have a fair value to the Complex group of £72 million in total. The Directors of Complex plc considered that a group reorganisation would be necessary because of the acquisition of Easy Ltd and that the cost would be £4 million. This reorganisation was completed by 31 August 1999. Your assistant has computed the goodwill on consolidation of Easy Ltd shown opposite.

£ million

£ million

Fair value of investment

60

Fair value of net assets

72

Less: reorganisation provision

(4)

68

Group share

(51)

Goodwill relating to a 75% investment

9

Goodwill relating to a 25% investment ( ) 25 –––

3

Your assistant has recognised total goodwill of £12 million (£9 million + £3 million). The goodwill attributable to the minority shareholders (£3 million) has been credited to the minority interest account. The reorganisation costs of £4 million have been written off against the provision which was created as part of the fair value exercise.

Transaction 2

On 15 May 1999, Complex plc disposed of one of its subsidiaries – Redundant Ltd. Complex plc had owned 100% of the shares in Redundant Ltd prior to disposal. The goodwill arising on the original consolidation of Redundant Ltd had been written off to reserves in line with the Accounting Standard in force at that time. This goodwill amounted to £5 million.

The subsidiary acted as a retail outlet for one of the product lines of the group. Following the disposal, the group reorganised the retail distribution of its products and the overall output of the group was not significantly affected.

The loss on disposal of the subsidiary amounted to £10 million before taxation. Your assistant proposes to show this loss as an exceptional item under discontinued operations on the grounds that the subsidiary has been disposed of and its results are clearly identifiable. The loss on disposal has been computed as follows:

£ million

Sales proceeds

15

Share of net assets at the date of disposal

(25)

Loss on disposal

(10)

Your assistant has noted that unless the goodwill had previously been written off, the loss on disposal would have been even greater.

Requirements

Draft a reply to your assistant which evaluates the suggested treatment and recommends changes where relevant. In each case, your reply should refer to the provisions of relevant Accounting Standards and explain the rationale behind such provisions.

The allocation of marks is as follows:

Transaction 1

Transaction 2

preference shares ndash pound 500000 8 redeemable preference shares acquired at par 565669

Mull plc acquired shares in two companies as follows:

Skye Ltd

Ordinary shares – 8 million acquired on 1 June 1996 for £4.50 each.

Preference shares – £500000 8% redeemable preference shares acquired, at par, on 1 June 1996. At the date of acquisition the retained profits of Skye Ltd were £10 million.

Arran Ltd

Ordinary shares – 1 million acquired on 1 June 1998 for £6 each.

At the date of acquisition the retained profits of Arran Ltd were £5 million and the revaluation reserve was £11 million.

The draft balance sheets for the above companies at 31 May 1999 show:

Mull plc

Skye Ltd

Arran Ltd

£000

£000

£000

Fixed assets

Freehold property

40000

20000

10000

Plant and equipment

5700

Fixtures and fittings

10500

5900

5200

Investment in Skye Ltd

36500

Investment in Arran Ltd

6000

93000

25900

20900

Current assets

Stock

19000

13000

11000

Debtors

22500

7000

10000

Cash in hand and at bank

1000

570

780

42500

20570

21780

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Bank overdraft

5600

8400

Creditors

18400

9600

7500

Corporation tax payable

4000

5400

2300

Proposed dividends

2000

1500

30000

16500

18200

Net current assets

12500

4070

3580

Net assets

105500

29970

24480

Capital and reserves

Called up share capital

Ordinary shares of £1 each

50000

10000

4000

8% Redeemable preference shares

2000

Revaluation reserve

10600

11000

Profit and loss account

44900

17970

9480

105500

29970

24480

Additional information

  1. Skye Ltd has continued to account for its assets at their book value though their fair values on 1 June 1996 were:

Freehold land

– £2.5 million above book value

Fixtures and fittings

– £1.5 million below book value with an estimated remaining useful economic life of 5 years

The fair values of all other assets and liabilities for both Skye Ltd and Arran Ltd approximated to their book values.

(2) Skye Ltd’s corporation tax payable at 31 May 1999 includes £1.4 million related to its

year ended 31 May 1996. The company had originally provided £500 000 as the estimated

liability as at 31 May 1996. Mull plc incorporated this estimate when establishing the fair values of Skye Ltd’s net assets on acquisition. However, following a protracted Inland Revenue investigation, the final liability was agreed on 31 May 1999 at £1.4 million, £900 000 higher than the estimate.

(3) Skye Ltd paid its preference dividend during the year. All proposed dividends relate to ordinary shares. Mull plc has not yet accounted for any dividends receivable.

(4) Any goodwill arising is amortised over 10 years on the straight line basis.

Requirements

(a) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of Mull plc as at 31 May 1999.

Note: You are not required to produce any disclosure notes.

(b) Briefly explain your accounting treatment of items (1) and (2) above, referring to the provisions of FRS 7, Fair values in acquisition accounting, where appropriate.

the profit and loss accounts of faith plc hope ltd and charity ltd for the year ende 565670

You are the management accountant of Faith plc. One of your responsibilities is the preparation of the consolidated financial statements of the company. Your assistant normally prepares the first draft of the statements for your review. The assistant is able to prepare the basic consolidated financial statements reasonably accurately. However, he has little idea of the principles underpinning consolidation and is unsure how to account for changes in the group structure. In these circumstances he asks you for guidance prior to beginning his work.

The profit and loss accounts of Faith plc, Hope Ltd and Charity Ltd for the year ended 30 September 2000 are given below:

Faith plc

Hope Ltd

Charity Ltd

£ million

£ million

£ million

Turnover

2000

1000

1200

Cost of sales

(1100)

(600)

(600)

Gross profit

900

400

600

Other operating expenses

(350)

(150)

(180)

Operating profit

550

250

420

Investment income

68

Interest payable

(80)

(35)

(45)

Profit before taxation

538

215

375

Taxation

(160)

(65)

(114)

Profit after taxation

378

150

261

Proposed dividends

(160)

(70)

(100)

Retained profit for the year

218

80

161

Retained profit – 1 October 1999

780

330

526

Retained profit – 30 September 2000

998

410

687

Notes to the profit and loss accounts

Note 1 – Investments

Faith plc has made investments in the other two companies as follows:

  • On 1 July 1993, Faith plc purchased 50% of the equity shares of Hope Ltd for a cash payment of £220 million. The net assets of Hope Ltd on 1 July 1993 had a fair value of £400 million. This value did not differ significantly from the carrying value in the balance sheet of Hope Ltd. The profit and loss account at that date showed a credit balance of £200 million. This investment gave Faith plc a reasonably significant influence over the operating and financial policies of Hope Ltd. However, on more than one occasion since 1 July 1993, the other shareholders have combined to prevent Hope Ltd embarking upon a course of action that was proposed by Faith plc.
  • On 1 October 1999, Faith plc purchased a further 30% of the equity shares of Hope Ltd for a cash payment of £179 million. The net assets of Hope Ltd on 1 October 1999 had a fair value of £530 million. This value did not differ significantly from the carrying value in the balance sheet of Hope Ltd. This additional investment gave Faith plc control over the operating and financial policies of Hope Ltd.
  • On 1 October 1999, Faith plc made a medium term loan of £100 million to Hope Ltd. The rate of interest chargeable on that loan was 12% per annum. Both companies have correctly reflected that interest in their financial statements.
  • On 1 January 1992, Faith plc purchased 70% of the equity shares of Charity Ltd for a cash payment of £460 million. The net assets of Charity Ltd on 1 January 1992 had a fair value of £600 million. This value did not differ significantly from the carrying value in the balance sheet of Charity Ltd. The profit and loss account at that date showed a credit balance of £300 million. This investment gave Faith plc control over the operating and financial policies of Charity Ltd.

The accounting policy for goodwill adopted by Faith plc is to amortise it over a 20 year period. Faith plc charges a full year’s amortisation in the year of investment but no amortization in the year the investment is sold.

Note 2 – Disposal

The business of Charity Ltd is significantly different from that of Faith plc and Hope Ltd. Following Faith plc’s additional investment in Hope Ltd, the directors of Faith plc took a strategic decision to concentrate on the core business of the group. Following this decision, Faith plc sold all its shares in Charity Ltd for £750 million on 31 May 2000. The proceeds of sale were credited to a suspense account in the books of Faith plc. No further entries have been made in connection with the sale. The tax department estimates that taxation of £30 million will be payable in connection with the sale. A balance sheet was drawn up for Charity Ltd immediately prior to the sale of its shares by Faith plc. This showed net assets of £1000 million. The profits of Charity Ltd accrued evenly throughout the year ended 30 September 2000.

Note 3 – Inter company trading

Following its securing control over the operating and financial policies of Hope Ltd, Faith plc began to supply Hope Ltd with a component that Hope Ltd was formerly purchasing from an outside supplier. For the year ended 30 September 2000, sales of this product from Faith plc to Hope Ltd totalled £60 million. In setting the selling price, Faith plc added a mark up of one third to the cost price. On 30 September 2000, the stocks of Hope Ltd included £20 million in respect of supplies of the component purchased from Faith plc.

Requirements

(a) Write a memorandum to your assistant that explains the impact of the changes in the group structure during the year on the consolidated profit and loss account. Your memorandum should include instructions regarding:

  • the change of treatment of Hope Ltd caused by the additional share purchase;
  • the profits of Charity Ltd that need to be included in the consolidated profit and loss account for the year ended 30 September 2000;
  • the treatment of the sales proceeds that are currently credited to a suspense account;
  • any separate disclosures that are necessary on the face of the consolidated profit and loss account as a result of the sale of the shares.

Your memorandum should include references to appropriate Accounting Standards.

(b) Prepare the consolidated profit and loss account of Faith plc for the year ended 30 September 2000. You should start with turnover and end with retained profit carried forward. Your consolidated profit and loss account should be in a form suitable for publication.

on 1 october 1999 hepburn plc acquired 80 of the ordinary share capital of salter lt 565672

(a) On 1 October 1999 Hepburn plc acquired 80% of the ordinary share capital of Salter Ltd by way of a share exchange. Hepburn plc issued five of its own shares for every two shares it acquired in Salter Ltd. The market value of Hepburn plc’s shares on 1 October 1999 was £3 each. The share issue has not yet been recorded in Hepburn plc’s books. The summarised financial statements of both companies are:

Profit and loss accounts: Year to 31 March 2000

Hepburn plc

Salter Ltd

£000

£000

£000

£000

Turnover

1200

1000

Cost of sales

(650)

660)

Gross profit

550

340

Operating expenses

(120)

(88)

Debenture interest

nil

(12)

Operating profit

430

240

Taxation

(100)

(40)

Profit after tax

330

200

Dividends– interim

(40)

– final

(40)

(80)

nil

Retained profit for the year

250

200

Balance sheets: as at 31 March 2000

Fixed Assets

Land and buildings

400

150

Plant and Machinery

220

510

Investments

20

10

640

670

Current Assets

Stock

240

280

Debtors

170

210

Bank

20

40

c/f

430

640

530

670

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

Trade creditors

170

155

Taxation

50

45

Dividends

40

nil

(260)

(200)

Net Current Assets

170

330

810

1000

Creditors: amounts falling due after more

than one year

8% Debentures

nil

(150)

Net Assets

810

850

Capital and Reserves

Ordinary shares of £1 each

400

150

Profit and loss account

410

700

810

850

The following information is relevant:

(i) The fair values of Salter Ltd’s assets were equal to their book values with the exception of its land, which had fair value of £125 000 in excess of its book value at the date of acquisition.

(ii) In the post acquisition period Hepburn plc sold goods to Salter Ltd at a price of £100000, this was calculated to give a mark up on cost of 25% to Hepburn plc. Salter Ltd had half of these goods in stock at the year end.

(iii) Consolidated goodwill is to be written off as an operating expense over a five year life. Time apportionment should be used in the year of acquisition.

(iv) The current accounts of the two companies disagreed due to a cash remittance of £20 000 to Hepburn plc on 26 March 2000 not being received until after the year end. Before adjusting for this, Salter Ltd’s debtor balance in Hepburn plc’s books was £56000.

Required

Prepare a consolidated profit and loss account and balance sheet for Hepburn plc for the year to 31 March 2000.

(b) At the same date as Hepburn plc made the share exchange for Salter Ltd’s shares, it also acquired 6000 ‘A’ shares in Woodbridge Ltd for a cash payment of £20 000. The share capital of Woodbridge Ltd is made up of:

Ordinary voting A shares

10000

Ordinary non voting B shares

14000

All of Woodbridge Ltd’s equity shares are entitled to the same dividend rights; however during the year to 31 March 2000 Woodbridge Ltd made substantial losses and did not pay any dividends.

Hepburn plc has treated its investment in Woodbridge Ltd as an ordinary fixed asset investment on the basis that:

– it is only entitled to 25% of any dividends that Woodbridge Ltd may pay;

– it does not any have directors on the Board of Woodbridge Ltd; and

– it does not exert any influence over the operating policies or management of Woodbridge Ltd.

Required

Comment on the accounting treatment of Woodbridge Ltd by Hepburn plc’s directors and state how you believe the investment should be accounted for.

the balance sheets of united plc blue ltd and green ltd at 30 september 2002 the acc 565673

The balance sheets of United plc, Blue Ltd and Green Ltd at 30 September 2002, the accounting date for all three companies, are given below:

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Fixed assets:

Intangible assets (Note 1)

Tangible assets

25000

22000

1200

Investments (Note 2)

23900

20000

48900

22000

22000

Current assets:

Stocks

8000

7000

7500

Debtors (Note 3)

8500

7200

7400

Cash

900

600

500

17400

14800

15400

Creditors: amounts falling

due within one year(Note 3)

(9200)

(7900)

(7300)

Net current assets

8200

6900

8100

Total assets less current

57100

28900

29300

liabilities

Creditors: amounts falling

due after more than one year

(12000)

(10000)

(9000)

45100

18900

20300

Capital and reserves:

Called up share capital

20000

10000

10000

(£1 ordinary shares)

Share premium account

5000

4000

3000

Profit and loss account

20100

4900

7300

45100

18900

20300

Notes to the financial statements

Note 1

The intangible fixed asset of Green Ltd represents capitalised development expenditure. United plc writes off such expenditure as it is incurred. At the date of its acquisition by United plc, the balance sheet of Green Ltd contained capitalised development expenditure of £400 000.

Note 2

Details of the investments by United plc are as follows:

Company

Number of

Date of

Price paid

Reserves balance of

ordinary shares

acquisition

acquired company at

acquired

date of acquisition

Blue Ltd

8 million

1 October 1994

£14.8 million

£2 million

Green Ltd

7.5 million

1 October 1995

£13.5 million

£3 million

The following additional information is relevant:

  • All shares carry one vote at annual general meetings.
  • No fair value adjustments were necessary as a result of the acquisition of either company.
  • Goodwill on acquisition is written off over 10 years.
  • On 30 September 2002, United plc disposed of 2 million shares in Blue Ltd for proceeds of £4.4 million. Upon receiving the cash, United plc credited the proceeds of disposal to its investments account. Apart from this, United plc has made no other entries in respect of the disposal. Taxation of £200000 is expected to be payable on the disposal.
  • Neither Blue Ltd or Green Ltd has issued shares since the dates of acquisition by United plc.

Note 3

United plc provides goods and services to Blue Ltd and Green Ltd and the debtors of United plc at 30 September 2002 contained the following balances:

  • Receivable from Blue Ltd £500000.
  • Receivable from Green Ltd £400000.

The above amounts agreed to the amounts recognised in the trade creditors of Blue Ltd and Green Ltd. There were no goods in the stock of Blue Ltd or Green Ltd at 30 September 2002 that had been purchased from United plc.

Required

Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of United plc at 30 September 2002. Marks will be given for workings and explanations that support your figures.

identify the correct treatment of the investments in harbour ltd inlet ltd and bay l 565674

Both the Statement of Principles for Financial Reporting and individual Accounting Standards make it clear that the treatment in consolidated financial statements of investments in other undertakings is dependent on the extent of the control or influence the investing entity is able to exercise over the other undertaking. Port plc has investments in three other undertakings:

  • On 15 May 1990, Port plc purchased 40 million 50p equity shares in Harbour Ltd. The called up equity share capital of Harbour Ltd on 15 May 1990 was 50 million 50p equity shares.
  • On 15 June 1991, Port plc purchased 30 million £1 equity shares in Inlet Ltd. The called up equity share capital of Inlet Ltd on 15 June 1991 was 75 million £1 equity shares. The remaining equity shares in Inlet Ltd are held by a large number of investors – none with more than 5 million equity shares.
  • On 15 July 1992, Port plc purchased 25 million 50p equity shares in Bay Ltd. The called up equity share capital of Bay Ltd on 15 July 1992 was 80 million 50p equity shares. Another investor owns 50 million equity shares in Bay Ltd. This investor takes an active interest in directing the operating and financial policies of Bay Ltd and on a number of occasions has required Bay Ltd to follow policies that do not meet with the approval of Port plc.

Equity shares in all of the companies carry one vote per share at general meetings. No party can control or influence the composition of the board of directors of any of the companies other than through its ownership of equity shares. There have been no instances where shareholders in any of the companies have acted together to increase their control or influence. None of the companies has issued any additional equity shares since Port plc purchased its interests.

Extracts from the profit and loss accounts of the four companies for their year ended 30 June 2001 are given below:

Port plc

Harbour Ltd

Inlet Ltd

Bay Ltd

£000

£000

£000

£000

Turnover

65000

45000

48000

40000

Cost of sales

(35000)

(25000)

(26000)

(19000)

Gross profit

30000

20000

22000

21000

Note 1

Port plc manufactures a product that is used by Harbour Ltd and Inlet Ltd. During the year ended 30 June 2001, sales of the product to Harbour Ltd and Inlet Ltd were:

  • to Harbour Ltd – £8 million;
  • to Inlet Ltd – £7.5 million.

Opening and closing stocks of this product in the financial statements of Harbour Ltd and Inlet Ltd (all purchased from Port plc at cost plus 25% mark up, unchanged during the year) were as follows:

Company

Closing stock

Opening stock

£000

£000

Harbour Ltd

3000

2400

Inlet Ltd

2500

Nil

At 30 June 2001, there were no amounts payable by Harbour Ltd and Inlet Ltd in respect of stocks purchased from Port plc before 30 June 2001.

Note 2

There was no other trading between the companies other than the payment of dividends.

Required:

(a) State the alternative treatments of investments in consolidated financial statements that are set out in the Statement of Principles for Financial Reporting and UK Accounting Standards. Do NOT describe the mechanics of the methods.

(b) Identify the correct treatment of the investments in Harbour Ltd, Inlet Ltd and Bay Ltd in the consolidated financial statements of Port plc.

(c) Compute the consolidated turnover, cost of sales and gross profit of the Port group for the year ended 30 June 2001. You should ensure that your computations are fully supported by relevant workings.

(d) Compute the adjustments that need to be made in respect of the transactions described in Note 1 above when preparing the consolidated balance sheet of Port plc at 30 June 2001. You should explain the rationale behind each adjustment you make.

explain the criteria which distinguish an associate from an ordinary fixed asset inv 565675

(a) FRS 9, Associates and Joint Ventures, deals not only with the accounting treatment of associated companies and joint venture operations but covers certain types of joint business arrangements not carried on through a separate entity. The main changes made by FRS 9 are to restrict the circumstances in which equity accounting can be applied and to provide detailed rules for accounting for joint ventures.

Required:

(i) Explain the criteria which distinguish an associate from an ordinary fixed asset investment.

(ii) Explain the principal difference between a joint venture and a ‘joint arrangement’ and the impact that this classification has upon the accounting for such relationships.

(b) The following financial statements relate to Baden, a public limited company.

Profit and loss account for year ended 31 December 1998

£m

Turnover

212

Cost of sales

170)

Gross profit

42

Distribution costs

17

Administrative costs

8

(25)

17

Other operating income

12

Operating profit

29

Exceptional item

(10)

Interest payable

(4)

Profit on ordinary activities before tax

15

Taxation on profit on ordinary activities

(3)

12

Ordinary dividend – paid

(4)

Retained profit for year

8

Balance sheet as at 31 December 1998

Fixed assets – tangible

30

goodwill

7

37

Current assets

31

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

(12)

Net current assets

19

Total assets less current liabilities

36

Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year

(10)

46

Capital and Reserves

Called up share capital –

Ordinary shares of £1

10

Share premium account

4

Profit and loss account

32

46

(i) Cable, a public limited company, acquired 30% of the ordinary share capital of Baden at a cost of £14 million on 1 January 1997. The share capital of Baden has not changed since acquisition when the profit and loss reserve of Baden was £9 million.

(ii) At 1 January 1997 the following fair values were attributed to the net assets of Baden but not incorporated in its accounting records.

£m

Tangible fixed assets

30

(carrying value £20m)

Goodwill (estimate)

10

Current assets

31

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year

20

Creditors: amounts falling after more than one year

8

(iii) Guy, an associated company of Cable, also holds a 25% interest in the ordinary share capital of Baden. This was acquired on 1 January 1998.

(iv) During the year to 31 December 1998, Baden sold goods to Cable to the value of £35 million. The inventory of Cable at 31 December 1998 included goods purchased from Baden on which the company made a profit of £10 million.

(v) The policy of all companies in the Cable Group is to amortise goodwill over four years and to depreciate tangible fixed assets at 20% per annum on the straight line basis.

(vi) Baden does not represent a material part of the group and is significantly less than the 15% additional disclosure threshold required under FRS 9 Associates and Joint Ventures.

Required:

(i) Show how the investment in Baden would be stated in the consolidated balance sheet and profit and loss account of the Cable Group under FRS9 Associates and Joint Ventures, for the year ended 31 December 1998 on the assumption that Baden is an associate.

(ii) Show how the treatment of Baden would change if Baden was classified as an investment in a joint venture.

wester ross plc has acquired holdings in the following companies 565676

Wester Ross plc has acquired holdings in the following companies:

Ullapool Ltd

75% of the ordinary share capital acquired on 1 February 2000 financed by the issue of 2 million £1 ordinary shares of Wester Ross plc at £7 per share and £6 million in cash.

Wester Ross plc also acquired 30% of the preference share capital at the same date for £1 million cash.

Glenelg Ltd

30% of the ordinary share capital acquired on 10 March 1998 for £2 million cash.

The draft balance sheets of the companies at 31 October 2000 were:

Wester Ross

Ullapool

Glenelg

plc

Ltd

Ltd

£000

£000

£000

Fixed assets

Freehold property

15000

8000

2000

Fixtures and fittings

27000

10000

1000

Investments

9000

Current assets

Stocks

4000

2500

500

Debtors

8500

1700

400

Cash

700

Current liabilities

(5000)

(1300)

(200)

Long term liabilities

(5500)

(1000)

(300)

53000

20600

3400

Wester Ross

Ullapool

Glenelg

plc

Ltd

Ltd

£000

£000

£000

Capital and Reserves

Ordinary shares of £1 each

35000

12000

1500

Preference shares of £1 each

5000

3000

300

Revaluation reserve

10000

2000

Other reserves

1000

Profit and loss account

3000

2600

1600

53000

20600

3400

Additional information

(1) Wester Ross plc’s investments were acquired when the reserves of the companies were:

Ullapool

Glenelg

Ltd

Ltd

£000

£000

Revaluation reserve

1 500

Other reserves

500

Profit and loss account

2 000

600

There have been no changes to the share capital of the above companies since their acquisition.

(2) The fair value of the freehold property in Glenelg Ltd was £1.5 million above book value at the date of acquisition; all of this related to the land element of the property.

(3) Wester Ross plc has not yet accounted for the shares issued in acquiring Ullapool Ltd but has fully accounted for the cash element of the consideration for both Ullapool Ltd and Glenelg Ltd.

(4) Glenelg Ltd sold various items of fixtures and fittings to Wester Ross plc for £750 000 on 31 March 2000. The assets originally cost £1 million in the year ended 31 October 1995 and are being depreciated over 10 years on a straight line basis. Wester Ross plc is depreciating the assets over their remaining useful economic life.

(5) It is group policy to:

– amortise goodwill over 10 years with a full year’s charge in the year of acquisition

– charge a full year’s depreciation on fixed assets in the year of acquisition and none in the year of disposal.

Requirements

(a) From the above data, calculate the following amounts for the consolidated balance sheet of Wester Ross plc as at 31 October 2000:

(i) Goodwill arising on the acquisitions of Ullapool Ltd and Glenelg Ltd;

(ii) Investment in associate;

(iii) Profit and loss account balance.

(b) Explain the purpose of group accounts and the concepts underlying their preparation.

80 of the ordinary share capital purchased on 1 december 1999 for pound 5 million 565677

Ayr plc acquired holdings in two companies as follows:

Brodick Ltd

80% of the ordinary share capital purchased on 1 December 1999 for £5 million.

5

20% of the preference share capital purchased on 1 June 2001 for £500 000.

Carluke Ltd

30% of the ordinary share capital purchased on 1 April 2001 for £1.5 million.

The draft profit and loss accounts of the companies for the year ended 30 November 2001 were:

Ayr

Brodick

Carluke

plc

Ltd

Ltd

£000

£000

£000

Turnover

4000

2000

1500

Cost of sales

(2800)

(1400)

(1050)

1200

600

450

Distribution costs

(200)

(100)

(50)

Administrative expenses

(400)

(250)

(100)

600

250

300

Taxation

(180)

(80)

(90)

Profit after taxation

420

170

210

Dividends – preference

(40)

(50)

– ordinary

(200)

(70)

(100)

180

50

110

Additional information

(1) The reserves of Brodick Ltd and Carluke Ltd were:

Date

Revaluation reserve

Profit and loss

£000

£000

Brodick Ltd

1 December 1999

400

300

1 June 2001

500

200

Carluke Ltd

1 April 2001

70

The ordinary dividends of Carluke Ltd all relate to the post acquisition period.

(2) There have been no changes in the companies’ share capitals since acquisition. These

are:

Brodick Ltd

Carluke Ltd

£000

£000

Ordinary shares of £1 each

5000

3000

Preference shares of £1 each

2000

The preference dividends of Brodick Ltd were paid in two equal instalments on 31 May 2001, and 30 November 2001.

(3) On 1 December 1999, the value of the tangible fixed assets of Brodick Ltd was £200 000 higher than their net book value. This was due to the land element of freehold property.

(4) On 30 June 2001, Carluke Ltd sold £200 000 of goods to Ayr plc. Carluke Ltd operates a standard mark up of 25% on all sales. On 30 November 2001, Ayr Ltd still had 75% of these goods in stock.

(5) It is group policy to amortise goodwill over ten years with a full year’s charge in the year of acquisition.

(6) Ayr plc has not yet accounted for any dividends receivable.

Requirements

(a) Calculate the following amounts as they would appear in the consolidated profit and loss account of Ayr plc for the year ended 30 November 2001:

(i) Income from investment in associated undertakings

(ii) Minority interests

(iii) Profit after taxation.

Note: Make all calculations to the nearest £000.

(b) Explain the rationale for the accounting treatment in (a) (i) and (ii) above.

ardrossan plc acquired holdings in two companies as follows 565678

Ardrossan plc acquired holdings in two companies as follows:

Barmulloch Ltd

75% of the ordinary share capital purchased on 1 August 2000 for £4 million.

Cumbernauld Ltd

25% of the ordinary share capital purchased on 1 August 1999 for £1 million.

The draft balance sheets of the companies as at 31 July 2002 were:

Ardrossan

Barmulloch

Cumbernauld

plc

Ltd

Ltd

£000

£000

£000

Fixed assets

4500

2500

1500

Investments

5000

Current assets

Stock

1400

900

600

Trade debtors

1200

700

400

Dividends receivable

45

Cash at bank

450

200

3095

1600

1200

Current liabilities

Bank overdraft

(400)

Trade creditors

(1300)

(600)

(300)

Proposed dividends

(200)

(60)

Net current assets

1595

540

900

Debentures 2006

(500)

10595

3040

2400

Ordinary shares of £1 each

8000

3000

2000

Revaluation reserve

1500

500

200

Profit and loss account

1095

(460)

200

10595

3040

2400

Additional information

(1) The reserves of Barmulloch Ltd and Cumbernauld Ltd at the following dates were:

Date

Revaluation

Profit and

Reserve

Loss Account

£000

£000

Barmulloch Ltd

1 August 2000

200

600

Cumbernauld Ltd

1 August 1999

200

100

Cumbernauld Ltd

1 August 2001

200

160

Assume profits accrued evenly in the year ended 31 July 2002.

(2) On 1 February 2002, Ardrossan plc sold its entire holding of shares in Cumbernauld Ltd for £1.3 million cash. This transaction has not yet been recorded in the accounts of Ardrossan plc. For any tax due on this transaction, assume a corporation tax rate of 30% and ignore indexation allowance.

(3) It is group policy to amortise any goodwill arising on consolidation over ten years with a full year’s charge in the year of acquisition and none in the year of disposal.

(4) The trade creditors of Ardrossan plc include £25 000 payable to Barmulloch Ltd. The trade debtors of Barmulloch record the same amount as a debt receivable. None of these transactions. resulted in any stock at the year end.

Requirements

(a) Calculate any profit or loss arising on the disposal of Cumbernauld Ltd to be included in the consolidated accounts of Ardrossan plc.

(b) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of Ardrossan plc as at 31 July 2002.

(c) Explain the basis of your calculations in (a), making appropriate reference to accounting standards and concepts.

aberdeen plc acquired shares in two other companies as follows 565679

Aberdeen plc acquired shares in two other companies as follows:

Date of

Company

Percentage of

Goodwill arising

Company’s

acquisition

equity shares

on acquisition

profit and loss

acquired

at acquisition

1 November 2000

Berwick Ltd

75%

£400000

£1200000

1 May 2002

Coupar Ltd

30%

£150000

£850000

The summarised draft profit and loss accounts of the companies for the year ended 31 October 2002 were:

Aberdeen

Berwick

Coupar

plc

Ltd

Ltd

£000

£000

£000

Turnover

10500

7500

4400

Cost of sales

(7350)

(5000)

3200)

Gross profit

3150

2500

1200

Other operating expenses

(1700)

(1100)

(450)

Profit before taxation

1450

1400

750

Taxation

(430)

(420)

(200)

Profit after taxation

1020

980

550

Dividends proposed

(500)

(400)

(200)

Retained profit

520

580

350

Additional information

(1) It is group policy to amortise purchased goodwill over five years with a full year’s charge in the year of acquisition.

(2) On 1 October 2002, Berwick Ltd sold goods to Aberdeen plc. These goods had a sales value of £200 000, Berwick Ltd having applied a mark up of 25%. As at 31 October 2002, Aberdeen plc still held £140000 of these goods in stock.

(3) Aberdeen plc has not yet accounted for any dividends receivable from Berwick Ltd or Coupar Ltd. The dividends from Coupar Ltd all relate to the post acquisition period.

(4) Aberdeen plc requires Coupar Ltd to bring its depreciation methods in line with group accounting policies. The directors have estimated that this would reduce the profit of Coupar Ltd for the year ended 31 October 2002 by £200 000. Ignore any effect on the taxation charge.

(5) The directors of Aberdeen plc propose a transfer of £100 000 to a general reserve and this should be accounted for.

(6) The retained profit brought forward at 1 November 2001 for the three companies was:

£000

Aberdeen plc

2400

Berwick Ltd

1800

Coupar Ltd

600

Requirement

Prepare the consolidated profit and loss account, statement of reserves and disclosure note for Profit attributable to the members of Aberdeen plc, for the year ended 31 October 2002.

you are required to explain how each of the three subsidiaries would be dealt with i 565680

You are the Chief Accountant of JKL plc, a UK company that has three wholly owned overseas subsidiaries.

  • Company A is located in Spain. The company assembles computer terminals from materials provided by JKL plc. Once assembled, the computer terminals are shipped to the UK where JKL plc sells them.
  • Company B is located in Singapore and produces computers using materials supplied by local companies. Company B sells the computers to customers throughout southeast Asia.
  • Company C, operated on the same basis as Company A, is located in a country where recent legislation forbids the ownership of companies by foreign nationals and where strict currency and import/export controls have been introduced. These currency controls mean that JKL plc is unable to sell its interest in Company C.

You are required to explain how each of the three subsidiaries would be dealt with in the consolidated financial statements of JKL plc.

the financial statements of home plc and away ltd for the year ended 30 june 2001 ar 565681

You are the consolidation accountant of Home plc. Home plc is incorporated in the United Kingdom and prepares its financial statements using UK Accounting Standards. Home plc has a subsidiary, Away Ltd. Away Ltd is incorporated in a country that has the Tot as its unit of currency. The accepted abbreviation for the Tot is ‘T’. The financial statements of Home plc and Away Ltd for the year ended 30 June 2001 are given opposite:

Balance sheets at 30 June 2001

Home plc

Away Ltd

£000

£000

£000

£000

Fixed assets:

Tangible assets

30000

50000

Investment in Away Ltd

14000

44000

50000

Current assets:

Stocks

10000

10000

Debtors

12000

12000

Cash in hand

60

60

22060

22060

Creditors failing due within one year:

Trade creditors

7000

11000

Taxation

1000

2000

Proposed dividends

1000

2000

Bank overdraft

3000

5000

12000

20000

Net current assets

10060

14080

Total assets less current liabilities

54060

64080

Capital and reserves:

Called up share capital (£1/T1 shares)

25000

40000

Profit and loss account

29060

24080

54060

64080

Home plc

Away Ltd

£000

T000

Turnover

12000

20000

Cost of sales

(6000)

(10000)

Gross profit

6000

10000

Other operating expenses

(3000)

(5000)

Operating profit

3000

5000

Interest payable

(100)

(200)

Profit before tax

2900

4800

Tax

(900)

(1600)

Profit after tax

2000

3200

Proposed dividends

(1000)

(2000)

Retained profit

1000

1200

Retained profit – 1 July 2000

28060

22880

Retained profit – 30 June 2001

29060

24080

Notes to the financial statements

1 On 1 July 1995, Home plc purchased 30 million shares in Away Ltd for 42 million Tots. The balance on the profit and loss account of Away Ltd on 1 July 1995 was 8 million Tots. Away Ltd has not issued any additional shares since 1 July 1995. Goodwill on consolidation is amortised over 10 years.

2 Home plc has not made any entries in its financial statements regarding the dividend receivable from Away Ltd.

3 On 30 June 2001, Home plc invoiced Away Ltd for a management charge of £250 000 for the year ended 30 June 2001. This amount was included in the turnover and debtors of Home plc. Away Ltd received the invoice before closing its books for the year ended 30 June 2001 and entered it using the closing rate of exchange to translate the sum into Tots. The relevant amount was included in the other operating expenses and trade creditors of Away Ltd. There was no other trading between the two companies.

4 Relevant rates of exchange are as follows:

Date

Exchange rate (Tots to £l)

1 July 1995

3

30 June 2000

3.75

30 June 2001

4

Average for the year ended 30 June 2001

3.85

5 In previous years, the financial statements of Away Ltd have been translated into sterling for consolidation purposes using the closing rate method. The average rate of exchange for the year has been used to translate the profit and loss account. Exchange differences have been recognised in the consolidated statement of total recognised gains and losses. A junior accountant is puzzled by this treatment and has approached you for clarification. He cannot understand how the consolidated financial statements show a true and fair view if possibly significant exchange differences by-pass the consolidated profit and loss account.

Required

(a) Translate the balance sheet of Away Ltd into sterling (£) using the closing rate method.

(b) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of the Home group at 30 June 2001.

(c) Prepare the consolidated profit and loss account of the Home group for the year ended 30 June 2001. You should start with turnover and end with retained profit for the year.

(d) Prepare a statement that reconciles the opening and closing reserves of the Home group.

(e) Prepare a memorandum to the junior accountant that justifies the fact that exchange differences by-pass the consolidated profit and loss account and summarises recent developments regarding the destination of gains and losses in the performance statements.

the company sold its european business operations excluding the fixed assets on 10 a 565631

Crail plc has the following matters outstanding before finalising its published financial statements for the year ended 30 April 2002.

(1) The company sold its European business operations, excluding the fixed assets, on 10 April 2002 at a profit of £500 000. The turnover and operating profit for the year ended 30 April 2002 relating to the European business amounted to £5 million and £100000 respectively. The disposal of the fixed assets of the European business occurred on 10 May 2002 when a profit of £150 000 was realised. The European operations had been acquired in June 2001 as part of the acquisition of an unincorporated business.

(2) The company changed its accounting policy for research and development expenditure from capitalisation of development expenditure under SSAP 13, Accounting for research and development, to writing off all expenditure as incurred. As at 30 April 2002 the company had £400 000 of development expenditure capitalised with movements from 30 April 2001 being:

£1000

As at 1 May 2001

250

Expenditure in year

200

Amortisation in year

(50)

As at 30 April 2002

400

The company has not yet implemented the new policy.

(3) The company revalued its land and buildings on 1 May 2001 to £5 million (land element – £1 million). The land and buildings were bought for £3 million (land element – £400 000) on 1 July 1997; the buildings had a total useful economic life of 50 years and there has been no change to this following the revaluation. It is company policy to:

– charge a full year’s depreciation in the year of acquisition/revaluation;

– transfer the realised element of the revaluation reserve to realised profits annually.

The revaluation has not yet been accounted for but depreciation has been charged in the year ended 30 April 2002 based on historic cost.

(4) The company intends to pay an ordinary dividend of 10% of profits legally distributable.

(5) The company had a total turnover of £25 million and total operating profit of £1 million for the year ended 30 April 2002 before any adjustments for the above items. The company had opening balances of:

£1000

Profit and loss account

6000

Revaluation reserve

Share capital

2000

(6) The taxation charge for the year ended 30 April 2002 is £350 000. No changes to this are required as a result of the above adjustments.

Requirement

Prepare the following disclosures for the financial statements of Crail plc for the year ended 30 April 2002:

Profit and loss account (relevant extracts only)

Statement of total recognised gains and losses

Note of historical cost profits and losses

Reconciliation of movement in shareholders’ funds

Movement on reserves disclosure note.

glamis plc manufactures distributes and retails glassware the following matters rela 565632

Glamis plc manufactures, distributes and retails glassware. The following matters relate to its financial statements for the year ended 31 July 1998:

(1) On 25 June 1998, one of the company’s factories sustained damage from a freak storm. The cost of repairs in July 1998 was £500 000 and this has been provided for in the financial statements. The company’s insurance does not cover this repair.

(2) The company disposed of a fixed asset for £1 million in June 1998. The asset cost £850 000 in August 1994 and had an expected life of five years. The asset was revalued to £900 000 in the financial statements on 1 August 1996; no change to its total useful economic life was recommended. The company does not charge depreciation in the year of disposal of an asset and has based the profit on disposal in the profit and loss account on the carrying value of the asset.

(3) The board of directors decided to close the company’s retailing division on the basis of a formal plan submitted by the sales director. The company had accepted a firm offer of £3 million for the retail premises by 31 July 1998. The net book value of the premises was £2 million. Half of the staff involved in the retailing division were made redundant by 31 July 1998 at a cost of £500 000; the remaining staff were redeployed and retrained at a cost of £200 000. All these transactions have been included in the financial statements.

(4) The directors decided to change the accounting treatment of development costs to immediate write off against profit as costs are incurred. This change has not yet been reflected in the draft financial statements. The balance on the development costs account at 31 July 1998 was £250 000 of which £200 000 was incurred by 31 July 1997.

The company’s draft summarised profit and loss account shows:

£000

Turnover

5500

Cost of sales

(3100)

Gross profit

2400

Distribution costs

(1100)

Administrative expenses

(500)

Profit before taxation

800

Taxation

(240)

Profit after taxation

560

Dividends

(100)

460

Opening shareholders’ funds as on 1 August 1997 were £1.2 million, as previously reported.

Requirements

(a) Advise the board of directors of Glamis plc on the most appropriate accounting treatment and disclosure for each of the above matters, preparing all necessary calculations. You should refer to relevant accounting standards and legislation as appropriate.

Note: You are not required to prepare extracts of the financial statements.

(b) Prepare the following extracts of the financial statements for Glamis plc:

(i) Statement of total recognised gains and losses

(ii) Note of historical cost profit and losses

(iii) Reconciliation of movements on shareholders’ funds.

Note: You should provide comparative figures as far as you can from the information available.

the accounting standards board has published a discussion paper reporting financial 565633

The Accounting Standards Board has published a Discussion Paper, Reporting Financial Performance: Proposals for Change. The proposals in the Discussion Paper build upon the strengths of, and are a progression from FRS 3, Reporting Financial Performance. It proposes that a single performance statement should replace the profit and loss account and the Statement of Total Recognised Gains and Losses, effectively combining them in one statement. The paper also takes the view that gains and losses should be reported only once and in the period when they arise, and should not be reported again in another component of the financial statements at a later date, a practice which is sometimes called ‘recycling’.

Required:

(a) (i) Explain the reasons for presenting financial performance in one statement rather than two or more statements;

(ii) Discuss the views for and against the recycling of gains and losses in the financial statements.

(b) Describe how the following items are dealt with under current Financial Reporting Standards, and how their treatment would change if the Discussion Paper were adopted:

(i) Gains and losses on the disposal of fixed assets;

(ii) Revaluation gains and losses on fixed assets;

(ii) Foreign currency translation adjustments arising on the net investment in foreign operations.

spreader plc is a uk parent company with a number of wholly owned subsidiaries in th 565636

Spreader plc is a UK parent company with a number of wholly owned subsidiaries in the USA and Europe. Extracts from the consolidated financial statements of the group for the year ended 30 April 1997 are given below.

Profit and loss account – year ended 30 Apri

1997

1996

£000

£000

Turnover

(Note 1)

50000

48000

Cost of sales

(25000)

(22000)

Gross profit

25000

26000

Other operating expenditure

(15000)

(14200)

Operating profit

10000

11800

Interest payable

(1000)

(900)

Profit before taxation

(Note 2)

9000

10900

Taxation

(2800)

(3600)

Profit after taxation

6200

7300

Dividend

(3000)

(3200)

Retained profit

3200

4100

Note 1 Analysis of turnover for the year by geographical segment

UK

US

Rest of Europe

Total

1997

1996

1997

1996

1997

1996

1997

1996

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Total sales

15000

20000

10000

8000

30000

25000

55000

53000

Inter segment sales

(2000)

(2500)

(1000)

(500)

(2000)

(2000)

(5000)

(5000)

Sales to third parties

13000

17500

9000

7500

28000

23000

50000

48000

Note 2 Analysis of profit before tax for the year by geographical segment

UK

US

Rest of Europe

Total

1997

1996

1997

1996

1997

1996

1997

1996

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Segment profit

3000

6000

1500

1200

6000

5000

10500

12200

Common costs

(500)

(400)

Operating profit

10000

11800

Interest payable

(1000)

(900)

Profit before taxation

9000

10900

Note 3 Analysis of net assets at end of year by geographical segment

UK

US

Rest of Europe

Total

1997

1996

1997

1996

1997

1996

1997

1996

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

£000

Segment net assets

15000

13500

6000

5000

20000

20000

41000

38500

Unallocated assets

2000

1800

Total net assets

43000

40300

Requirements

In your capacity as chief accountant of Spreader plc,

(a) prepare a report for the board of directors of the company which analyses the results of the group for the year ended 30 April 1997;

(b) explain why the segmental data which has been included in the extracts may need to be interpreted with caution.

you are the management accountant of global plc global plc has operations in a numbe 565638

You are the Management Accountant of Global plc. Global plc has operations in a number of different areas of the world and presents segmental information on a geographical basis in accordance with SSAP 25 Segmental reporting. The segmental information for the year ended 30 June 2002 is given below:

Europe

America

Africa

Group

2002

2001

2002

2001

2002

2001

2002

2001

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

£m

TURNOVER

Turnover by destination:

Sales to third parties

700

680

600

550

400

200

1700

1430

Turnover by origin:

Total sales

720

685

610

560

440

205

1770

1450

Inter segment sales

(20)

(5)

(10)

(10)

(40)

(5)

(70)

(20)

Sales to third parties

700

680

600

550

400

200

1700

1430

PROFIT BEFORE

TAXATION

Segment profit 1 (loss)

70

69

990

90

(20)

(40)

140

119

Common costs

(25)

(20)

Operating profit

115

99

Net interest

(18)

(15)

Group share of associates’

97

84

profit before taxation

10

9

12

5

22

14

Group profit before taxation

119

98

NET ASSETS

Segment net assets

350

320

360

330

200

180

910

830

Unallocated assets

120

100

Group share of net assets of

1030

930

associates

55

52

36

30

91

82

Total net assets

1121

1012

Your Managing Director has reviewed the segmental information above and has expressed concerns about the performance of Global plc. He is particularly concerned about the fact that the Africa segment has been making losses ever since the initial investment in 2000. He wonders whether operations in Africa should be discontinued, given the consistently poor results.

Required

Prepare a report for the Managing Director of Global plc that analyses the performance of the three geographical segments of the business, based on the data that has been provided. The report can take any form you wish, but you should specifically refer to any reservations you may have regarding the use of the segmental data for analysis purposes.

a plc is a company which is listed on the uk stock exchange your client mr b current 565640

A plc is a company which is listed on the UK Stock Exchange. Your client, Mr B, currently owns 300 shares in A plc. Mr B has recently received the published financial statements of A plc for the year ended 30 September 1998. Extracts from these published financial statements, and other relevant information, are given below. Mr B is confused by the statements. He is unsure how the performance of the company during the year will affect the market value of his shares, but is aware that the published earnings per share (EPS) is a statistic which is often used by analysts in assessing the performance of listed companies.

Profit and loss accounts – year ended 30 September

1998

1997

£ million

£ million

Turnover

10000

8500

Cost of sales

(6300)

(5100)

Gross profit

3700

3400

Other operating expenses

(1900)

(1800)

Operating profit

1800

1600

Interest payable

(300)

(320)

Profit before taxation

1500

1280

Taxation

(470)

(400)

Profit after taxation

1030

880

Equity dividend

(800)

(500)

Retained profit

230

380

Balance sheets at 30 September

1998

1997

£ million

£ million

£ million

£ million

Fixed assets

Intangible assets

3000

Tangible assets

4000

3700

7000

3700

Current assets

Stocks

1300

1000

Debtors

1500

1200

Cash in hand and at bank

100

90

2900

2290

Current liabilities

Trade creditors

900

700

Taxation

500

420

Proposed dividend

800

500

Bank overdraft

600

700

2800

2320

Net current assets

100

(30)

Total assets less current liabilities

7100

3670

Creditors: amounts falling due

after more than one year:

Loan stock

2000)

(2000)

5100

1670

Capital and reserves

Called up share capital

1500

500

Share premium account

2700

500

Profit and loss account

900

670

5100

1670

Information regarding share capital

The called up share capital of the company comprises £1 equity shares only. On 1 April 1998, the company made a rights issue to existing shareholders of two new shares for every one share held, at a price of £3.30 per share, paying issue costs of £100 000. The market price of the shares immediately before the rights issue was £3.50 per share. No changes took place in the equity capital of A plc in the year ended 30 September 1997.

Requirements

(a) Compute the EPS figures (current year plus comparative) that will be included in the published financial statements of A plc for the year ended 30 September 1998.

(b) Using the extracts with which you have been provided, write a short report to Mr B which identifies the key factors which have led to the change in the EPS of A plc since the year ended 30 September 1997.

(c) Comment on the relevance of the EPS statistic to a shareholder like Mr B who is concerned about the market value of his shares.

standard as amended was operating reasonably effectively in fact the accounting stan 565641

standard as amended was operating reasonably effectively. In fact the Accounting Standards Board (ASB) has stated that a review of earnings per share would not normally have been given priority at this stage of the Board’s programme. However, in June 1997 FRED 16 Earnings per share, was issued which proposed amendments to SSAP 3 and subsequently in October 1998 FRS 14 Earnings per share was published.

Required

(a) (i) Describe the main changes to SSAP 3 which have occurred as a result of FRS 14 and the main reasons for those changes.

(ii) Explain why there is a need to disclose diluted earnings per share in financial statements.

  1. The following financial statement extracts for the year ending 31 May 1999 relate to Mayes, a public limited company.

£000

£000

Operating profit

Continuing operations 26700

26700

Discontinued operations

(1120)

Continuing operations

25580

Profit on disposal of tangible fixed assets 2500

2500

Discontinued operations

(Loss) on sale of operations

(5080)

23000

Interest payable

(2100)

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation

20900

Tax on profit on ordinary activities

(7500)

Profit on ordinary activities after tax

13400

Minority interest – equity

(540)

Profit attributable to members of parent company

12860

Dividends:

Preference dividend on non equity shares

210

Ordinary dividend on equity shares

300

(510)

Other appropriations – non equity shares (note iii)

(80)

Retained profit for year

12270

Capital as at 31 May 1999.

£000

Allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary shares of £1 each

12500

7% convertible cumulative redeemable preference shares of £1

3000

15500

Additional Information

(i) On 1 January 1999, 3.6 million ordinary shares were issued at £2.50 in consideration of the acquisition of June Ltd for £9 million. These shares do not rank for dividend in the current period. Additionally the company purchased and cancelled £24 million of its own £1 ordinary shares on 1 April 1999. On 1 July 1999, the company made a bonus issue of 1 for 5 ordinary shares before the financial statements were issued for the year ended 31 May 1999.

(ii) The company has a share option scheme under which certain directors can subscribe for the company’s shares. The following details relate to the scheme.

Options outstanding 31 May 1998:

(i) 1.2 million ordinary shares at £2 each

(ii) 2 million ordinary shares at £3 each both sets of options are exercisable before 31 May 2000.

Options granted during year 31 May 1999

(i) One million ordinary shares at £4 each exercisable before 31 May 2002, granted 1 June 1998.

During the year to 31 May 1999, the options relating to the 1.2 million ordinary shares (at a price of £2) were exercised on 1 March 1999.

The average fair value of one ordinary share during the year was £5.

(iii) The 7% convertible cumulative redeemable preference shares are convertible at the option of the shareholder or the company on 1 July 2000, 2001, 2002 on the basis of two ordinary shares for every three preference shares. The preference share dividends are not in arrears. The shares are redeemable at the option of the shareholder on 1 July 2000, 2001, 2002 at £1.50 per share. The ‘other appropriations – non equity shares’ item charged against the profits relates to the amortisation of the redemption premium and issue costs on the preference shares.

(iv) Mayes issued £6 million of 6% convertible bonds on 1 June 1998 to finance the acquisition of Space Ltd. Each bond is convertible into 2 ordinary shares of £1. Assume a corporation tax rate of 35%.

(v) The interest payable relates entirely to continuing operations and the taxation charge relating to discontinued operations is assessed at £100 000 despite the accounting losses. The loss on discontinued operations relating to the minority interest is £600 000.

Requirement

Calculate the basic and diluted earnings per share for the year ended 31 May 1999 for Mayes plc utilising FRS 14 Earnings per share.

(Candidates should show a calculation of whether potential ordinary shares are dilutive or anti dilutive.)

earnit plc is a listed company the issued share capital of the company at 1 april 19 565642

Earnit plc is a listed company. The issued share capital of the company at 1 April 1999 was as follows:

  • 500 million equity shares of 50p each.
  • 100 million £1 non equity shares, redeemable at a premium on 31 March 2004. The effective finance cost of these shares for Earnit plc is 10% per annum. The carrying value of the non equity shares in the financial statements at 31 March 1999 was £110 million.

Extracts from the consolidated profit and loss account of Earnit plc for the year ended 31 March 2000 showed:

£ million

Turnover

250

Cost of sales

(130)

Gross profit

120

Other operating expenses

(40)

Operating profit

80

Exceptional gain

10

Interest payable

(25)

Profit before taxation

65

Taxation

(20)

Profit after taxation

45

Appropriations of profit (see note)

(26)

Retained profit

19

Note – appropriations of profit:

  • to non equity shareholders

11

  • to equity shareholders

15

The company has a share option scheme in operation. The terms of the option are that option holders are permitted to purchase 1 equity share for every option held at a price of £1.50 per share. At 1 April 1999, 100 million share options were in issue. On 1 October 1999, the holders of 50 million options exercised their option to purchase, and 70 million new options were issued on the same terms as the existing options. During the year ended 31 March 2000, the average market price of an equity share in Earnit plc was £2.00.

There were no changes to the number of shares or share options outstanding during the year ended 31 March 2000 other than as noted in the previous paragraph.

Requirements

(a) Compute the basic and diluted earnings per share of Earnit plc for the year ended 31 March 2000. Comparative figures are NOT required.

(b) Explain to a holder of equity shares in Earnit plc the usefulness of both of the figures you have calculated in part (a).

the accounting standards board asb believes that undue emphasis is placed on earning 565643

(a) The Accounting Standards Board (ASB) believes that undue emphasis is placed on Earnings per share (EPS) and that this leads to simplistic interpretation of financial performance. Many chief executives believe that their share price does not reflect thevalue of their company and yet are pre occupied with earnings based ratios. It appears that if chief executives shared the views of the ASB then they may disclose more meaningful information than EPS to the market, which may then reduce the reporting gap and lead to higher share valuations. The ‘reporting gap’ can be said to be the difference between the information required by the stock market in order to evaluate the performance of a company and the actual information disclosed.

Required

(i) Discuss the potential problems of placing undue emphasis on the Earnings per share figure.

(ii) Discuss the nature of the ‘reporting gap’ and how the ‘gap’ might be eliminated.

(b) Company X has a complex capital structure. The following information relates to the company for the year ending 31 May 2001:

(i) The net profit of the company for the period attributable to the preference and ordinary shareholders of the parent company was £14.6 million. Of this amount the net profit attributable to discontinued operations was £3.3 million.

The following details relate to the capital of the company:

million

(ii)

Ordinary shares of £1 in issue at 1 June 2000

6.0

Ordinary shares of £1 issued 1 September 2000

1.2

at full market price.

The average market price of the shares for the year ending 31 May 2001 was £10 and the closing market price of the shares on 31 May 2001 was £11. On 1 January 2001, 300 000 partly paid ordinary shares of £1 were issued. They were issued at £8 per share with £4 payable on 1 January 2001 and £4 payable on 1 January 2002. Dividend participation was 50 per cent until fully paid.

(iii) Convertible loan stock of £20 million at an interest rate of 5% per annum was issued at par on 1 April 2000. Half a year’s interest is payable on 30 September and 31 March each year. Each £1000 of loan stock is convertible at the holder’s option into 30 ordinary shares at any time. £5 million of loan stock was converted on 1 April 2001 when the market price of the shares was £34 per share.

(iv) £1 million of convertible preference shares of £1 were issued in the year to 31 May 1998. Dividends are paid half yearly on 30 November and 31 May at a rate of 6% per annum. The preference shares are convertible into ordinary shares at the option of the preference shareholder on the basis of two preference shares for each ordinary share issued. Holders of 600 000 preference shares converted them into ordinary shares on 1 December 2000.

(v) Warrants to buy 600 000 ordinary shares at £6.60 per share were issued on 1 January 2001. The warrants expire in five years’ time. All the warrants were exercised on 30 June 2001. The financial statements were approved on 1 August 2001.

(vi) The rate of taxation is to be taken as 30%.

Required

Calculate the basic and diluted Earnings per share for X for the year ended 31 May 2001 in accordance with FRS 14 Earnings per share.

related party relationships and transactions are a normal feature of business enterp 565644

Related party relationships and transactions are a normal feature of business. Enterprises often carry on their business activities through subsidiaries and associates and it is inevitable that transactions will occur between group companies. Until relatively recently the disclosure of related party relationships and transactions has been regarded as an area which has a relatively low priority. However, recent financial scandals have emphasized the importance of an accounting standard in this area.

Required

(a) (i) Explain why the disclosure of related party relationships and transactions is an important issue.

(ii) Discuss the view that small companies should be exempt from the disclosure of related party relationships and transactions on the grounds of their size.

(b) Discuss whether the following events would require disclosure in the financial statements of the RP Group plc under FRS 8 Related Party Disclosures.

RP Group plc, merchant bankers, has a number of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures in its group structure. During the financial year to 31 October 1999, the following events occurred:

(i) The company agreed to finance a management buyout of a group company, AB, a limited company. In addition to providing loan finance, the company has retained a twenty five per cent equity holding in the company and has a main board director on the board of AB. RP received management fees, interest payments and dividends from AB.

(ii) On 1 July 1999, RP sold a wholly owned subsidiary, X a limited company, to Z, a public limited company. During the year RP supplied X with second hand office equipment and X leased its factory from RP. The transactions were all contracted for at market rates.

(iii) The pension scheme of the group is managed by another merchant bank. An investment manager of the group pension scheme is also a non executive director of the RP Group and received an annual fee for his services of £25 000 which is not material in the group context. The company pays £16m per annum into the scheme and occasionally transfers assets into the scheme. In 1999, fixed assets of £10m were transferred into the scheme and a recharge of administrative costs of £3m was made.

explain the purpose of frs 8 related party disclosures its relevance to users of pub 565645

(a) Explain the purpose of FRS 8, Related party disclosures, its relevance to users of published financial information and the main differences to international accounting standards.

(b) The directors of Sidlaw Ltd have requested your advice on the appropriate accounting disclosures for the following:

(1) On 1 February 2001, Sidlaw Ltd purchased 75% of the ordinary share capital of Errol Ltd. Sidlaw Ltd sells £250 000 worth of goods to Errol Ltd every month and has done so for many years.

(2) Sidlaw Ltd has a self managed pension fund for its employees and pays £4 million per annum into the fund. Sidlaw Ltd’s directors also act as fund managers for which Sidlaw Ltd makes no charge to the pension fund.

(3) Mr Muir owns and controls Sidlaw Ltd and Kirric Ltd and has influence, but not control, over Glamis Ltd. All three companies buy and sell goods to each other but are not part of the same group.

Requirement

Advise the directors of Sidlaw Ltd on the appropriate accounting disclosures required under FRS 8, Related party disclosures, for all affected companies, providing brief reasons for your recommendations.

newcars plc is a vehicle dealership it sells both new and good quality second hand c 565646

Newcars plc is a vehicle dealership; it sells both new and good quality second hand cars. The company is large and has a large number of shareholders. The only large block of shares is held by Arthur, who owns 25% of Newcars plc. Arthur is a member of Newcars plc’s board of directors and he takes a keen interest in the day to day management of the company.

Arthur also owns 25% of Oldcars plc. Oldcars plc sells inexpensive second hand cars which tend to be either relatively old or have a high mileage. Arthur is also a member of the board of directors of Oldcars plc.

Apart from Arthur, Newcars plc and Oldcars plc have no shareholders in common. The only thing that they have in common, apart from Arthur’s interest in each, is that Newcars plc sells a large number of cars to Oldcars plc. This usually happens when a customer of Newcars plc has traded in a car that is too old to be sold from Newcars plc’s showroom. Most of these cars are immediately resold to Oldcars plc and go into Oldcars plc’s normal trading stock. These sales account for approximately 5% of Newcars plc’s turnover. Oldcars plc acquires approximately 20% of its cars from Newcars plc.

Required

(a) Explain whether Newcars plc and Oldcars plc are related parties in terms of the requirements of FRS 8, Related party disclosures. List any additional information that you would require before making a final decision.

(b) Assuming that Newcars plc and Oldcars plc are related parties, describe the related parties’ disclosures that would have to be made in the companies’ financial statements in respect of the sale and purchase of cars between the two companies.

(c) Explain why it is necessary to disclose such information in respect of transactions involving related parties.

engina a foreign company has approached a partner in your firm to assist in obtainin 565647

Engina, a foreign company, has approached a partner in your firm to assist in obtaining a Stock Exchange listing for the company. Engina is registered in a country where transactions between related parties are considered to be normal but where such transactions are not disclosed. The directors of Engina are reluctant to disclose the nature of their related party transactions as they feel that although they are a normal feature of business in their part of the world, it could cause significant problems politically and culturally to disclose such transactions.

The partner in your firm has requested a list of all transactions with parties connected with the company and the directors of Engina have produced the following summary:

(a) Every month, Engina sells £50 000 of goods per month to Mr Satay, the financial director. The financial director has set up a small retailing business for his son and the goods are purchased at cost price for him. The annual turnover of Engina is £300 million. Additionally Mr Satay has purchased his company car from the company for £45 000 (market value £80 000). The director, Mr Satay, owns directly 10% of the shares in the company and earns a salary of £500 000 a year, and has a personal fortune of many millions of pounds.

(b) A hotel property had been sold to a brother of Mr Soy, the Managing Director of Engina, for £4 million (net of selling cost of £0.2 million). The market value of the property was £4.3 million but in the overseas country, property prices were falling rapidly. The carrying value of the hotel was £5 million and its value in use was £3.6 million. There was an over supply of hotel accommodation due to government subsidies in an attempt to encourage hotel development and the tourist industry.

(c) Mr Satay owns several companies and the structure of the group is as follows:

Mr Satay

100% ownership of Car Limited

80% ownership of Wheel Limited

90% ownership of Engina Limited

Engina earns 60% of its profit from transactions with Car and 40% of its profit from transactions with Wheel.

Required

Write a report to the directors of Engina setting out the reasons why it is important to disclose related party transactions and the nature of any disclosure required for the above transactions under the UK regulatory system before a Stock Exchange quotation can be obtained.

The mark allocation will be as follows:

Marks

Style/layout of report

4

Reasons

8

Transaction (a)

4

(b)

5

(c)

4

25

explain the main reasons why ssap 15 has been criticised 565648

The Accounting Standards Board (ASB) currently faces a dilemma. IAS 12 (revised), Income Taxes published by the International Accounting Standards Committee (IASC), recommends measures which significantly differ from current UK practice set out in SSAP 15 Accounting for Deferred Tax. IAS 12 requires an enterprise to provide for deferred tax in full for all deferred tax liabilities with only limited exceptions whereas SSAP 15 utilises the partial provision approach. The dilemma facing the ASB is whether to adopt the principles of IAS 12 (revised) and face criticism from many UK companies who agree with the partial provision approach. The discussion paper ‘Accounting for Tax’ appears to indicate that the ASB wish to eliminate the partial provision method.

The different approaches are particularly significant when acquiring subsidiaries because of the fair value adjustments and also when dealing with revaluations of fixed assets as the IAS requires companies to provide for deferred tax on these amounts.

Required

(a) Explain the main reasons why SSAP 15 has been criticised.

(b) Discuss the arguments in favour of and against providing for deferred tax on:

(i) fair value adjustments on the acquisition of a subsidiary

(ii) revaluations of fixed assets.

(c) XL plc has the following net assets at 30 November 1997.

Fixed assets

£000

Tax value (£000)

Buildings

33500

7500

Plant and equipment

52000

13000

Investments

66000

66000

151500

86500

Current assets

15000

15000

Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year

Creditors

(13500)

(13500)

Liability for health care benefits

(300)

(13800)

Net current assets

1200

Provision for deferred tax

(9010)

(9010)

143690

78990

XL plc has acquired 100% of the shares of BZ Ltd on 30 November 1997. The following statement of net assets relates to BZ Ltd on 30 November 1997.

£000

£000

£000

Fair value

Carrying value

Tax value

Buildings

500

300

100

Plant and equipment

40

30

15

Stock

124

114

114

Debtors

110

110

110

Retirement benefit liability

(60)

(60)

Creditors

(105)

(105)

(105)

609

389

234

There is currently no deferred tax provision in the accounts of BZ Ltd. In order to achieve a measure of consistency XL plc decided that it would revalue its land and buildings to £50 million and the plant and equipment to £60 million. The company did not feel it necessary to revalue the investments. The liabilities for retirement benefits and healthcare costs areanticipated to remain at their current amounts for the foreseeable future.

The land and buildings of XL plc had originally cost £45 million and the plant and equipment £70 million. The company has no intention of selling any of its fixed assets other than the land and buildings which it may sell and lease back. XL plc currently utilises the full provision method to account for deferred taxation. The projected depreciation charges and tax allowances of XL plc and BZ Ltd are as follows for the years ending 30 November:

£000

£000

£000

Depreciation

1998

1999

2000

(Buildings, plant and equipment)

XL plc

7010

8400

7560

BZ Ltd

30

32

34

Tax allowances

XL plc

8000

4500

3000

BZ Ltd

40

36

30

The corporation tax rate had changed from 35% to 30% in the current year. Ignore any indexation allowance or rollover relief and assume that XL plc and BZ Ltd are in the same tax jurisdiction.

Required

Calculate the deferred tax expense for XL plc which would appear in the group financial statements at 30 November 1997 using:

(i) the full provision method incorporating the effects of the revaluation of assets in XL plc and the acquisition of BZ Ltd.

(ii) the partial provision method.

explain why the asb rejected the nil provision and partial provision bases when deve 565649

The problem of accounting for deferred taxation is one that has been on the agenda of the Accounting Standards Board for some time. In December 2000, the Accounting Standards Board published FRS 19 – Deferred Tax. The Standard basically requires that full provision is made for deferred tax on all timing differences and therefore rejects the two alternative bases of accounting for deferred tax, the nil provision (or ‘flow through’) basis and the partial provision basis. However, FRS 19 does not normally require companies to provide for deferred tax on revaluation surpluses or fair value adjustments arising on consolidation of a subsidiary for the first time.

Required

(a) Explain why the ASB rejected the nil provision and partial provision bases when developing FRS 19.

(b) Discuss the logic underlying the FRS 19 treatment of deferred tax on revaluation surpluses and fair value adjustments and indicate any exceptions to the general requirement not to provide for deferred tax on these amounts.

You are the management accountant of Payit plc. Your assistant is preparing the consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2002. However, he is unsure how to account for the deferred tax effects of certain transactions as he has not studied FRS 19. These transactions are given below:

Transaction 1

During the year, Payit plc sold goods to a subsidiary for £10 million, making a profit of 20% on selling price. 25% of these goods were still in the stock of the subsidiary at 31 March 2002. The subsidiary and Payit plc are in the same tax jurisdiction and pay tax on profits at 30%.

Transaction 2

An overseas subsidiary made a loss adjusted for tax purposes of £8 million (£ equivalent). The only relief available for this tax loss is to carry it forward for offset against future taxable profits of the overseas subsidiary. Taxable profits of the overseas subsidiary suffer tax at a rate of 25%.

Required

(c) Compute the effect of BOTH the above transactions on the deferred tax amounts in the consolidated BALANCE SHEET of Payit plc at 31 March 2002. You should provide a full explanation for your calculations and indicate any assumptions you make in formulating your answer.

prepare the notes in respect of current taxation and deferred tax as they would appe 565650

H plc is a major manufacturing company. According to the company’s records, timing differences of £2.00 million had arisen at 30 April 2002 because of differences between the carrying amount of tangible fixed assets and their tax base. These had arisen because H plc had exercised its right to claim accelerated tax relief in the earlier years of the asset lives.

At 30 April 2001, the timing differences attributable to tangible fixed assets were £2.30 million.

H plc has a defined benefit pension scheme for its employees. The company administers the scheme itself.

The corporation tax rate has been 30% in the past. On 30 April 2002, the directors of H plc were advised that the rate of taxation would decrease to 28% by the time that the timing differences on the tangible fixed assets reversed.

The estimated corporation tax charge for the year ended 30 April 2002 was £400 000. The estimated charge for the year ended 30 April 2001 was agreed with the Revenue and settled without adjustment.

Required

(a) Prepare the notes in respect of current taxation and deferred tax as they would appear in the financial statements of H plc for the year ended 30 April 2002.

(b) The directors of H plc are concerned that they might be required to report a deferred tax asset in respect of their company pension scheme.

Explain why such an asset might arise.

(c) FRS 19 – Deferred Tax requires companies to publish a reconciliation of the current tax charge reported in the profit and loss account to the charge that would result from applying the standard rate of tax to the profit on ordinary activities before tax. Explain why this reconciliation is helpful to the readers of financial statements.

discuss the extent to which the business combination satisfies the requirements of f 565653

The balance sheets of Left plc and Right plc at 31 December 1999, the accounting date for both companies, were as follows.

Left plc

Right plc

£000

£000

Tangible fixed assets

60000

40000

Stocks

10000

9000

Other current assets

12000

10000

Current liabilities

(9000)

(8000)

Quoted debentures

(15000)

(12000)

58000

39000

Equity share capital (£1 shares)

30000

20000

Share premium account

10000

5000

Profit and loss account

18000

14000

58000

39000

On 31 December 1999, Left plc purchased all the equity shares of Right plc. The purchase consideration was satisfied by the issue of 6 new equity shares in Left plc for every 5 equity shares purchased in Right plc. At 31 December 1999 the market value of a Left plc share was £2.25 and the market value of a Right plc share was £2.40. Relevant details concerning the values of the net assets of Right plc at 31 December 1999 were as follows:

  • The fixed assets had a fair value of £43.5 million.
  • The stocks had a fair value of £9.5 million.
  • The debentures had a market value of £11 million.
  • Other net assets had a fair value that was the same as their book value.

The effect of the purchase of shares in Right plc is NOT reflected in the balance sheet of Left plc that appears above.

Requirements

(a) Prepare the consolidated balance sheet of the Left plc group at 31 December 1999 assuming the business combination is accounted for

  • as an acquisition; and
  • as a merger.

(b) Discuss the extent to which the business combination satisfies the requirements of FRS 6 – Acquisitions and mergers for classification as a merger. You should indicate the other information you would need to enable you to form a definite conclusion.

the following summary financial statements relate to the above companies as at 31 ma 565654

AB, a public limited company manufactures goods for the aerospace industry. It acquired an electronics company CG, a public limited company on 1 December 1999 at an agreed value of £65 million. The purchase consideration was satisfied by the issue of 30 million 394 Part 2 · Financial reporting in practice shares of AB, in exchange for the whole of the share capital of CG. The directors of AB have decided to adopt merger accounting principles in accounting for the acquisition, but the auditors have not as yet concurred with the use of merger accounting in the financial statements.

The following summary financial statements relate to the above companies as at 31 May 2000.

Profit and Loss Accounts for the year ended 31 May 2000

£000

£000

AB

CG

Turnover

45000

34000

Cost of sales

(31450)

(25280)

Gross profit

13550

8720

Distribution and administrative expenses

(9450)

(3820)

Operating profit

4100

4900

Interest payable

(200)

(400)

Profit before taxation

3900

4500

Taxation

(1250)

(1700)

Dividends (proposed)

(250)

Retained profit for the year

2400

2800

Balance Sheets at 31 May 2000

£000

£000

AB

CG

Tangible fixed assets

36000

24500

Cost of investment in CG

30000

Net current assets

29000

17500

Creditors: amounts due after more than one year

(2000)

(4000)

Total assets less liabilities

9300

3800

Capital and Reserves

Ordinary shares of £1

55000

20000

Share premium account

3000

6000

Revaluation reserve

10000

Profit and loss account

25000

12000

9300

3800

The following information should be taken into account when preparing the group

accounts:

(i) The management of AB feel that the adjustments required to bring the following assets of CG to their fair values at 1 December 1999 are as follows:

Fixed Assets to be increased by £4 million;

Stock to be decreased by £3 million (this stock had been sold by the year end);

Provision for bad debts to be increased by £2 million in relation to specific accounts;

Depreciation is charged at 20% per annum on a straight line basis on tangible fixed assets;

The increase in the provision for bad debts was still required at 31 May 2000. No further provisions are required on 31 May 2000.

(ii) CG has a fixed rate bank loan of £4 million which was taken out when interest rates were 10% per annum. The loan is due for repayment on 30 November 2001. At the date of acquisition the company could have raised a loan at an interest rate of 7%. Interest is payable yearly in arrears on 30 November.

(iii) CG acquired a corporate brand name on 1 July 1999. The company did not capitalise the brand name but wrote the cost off against reserves in the Statement of Total Recognised Gains and Losses. The cost of the brand name was £18 million. AB has consulted an expert brand valuation firm who have stated that the brand is worth £20 million at the date of acquisition based on the present value of notional royalty savings arising from ownership of the brand. The auditors are satisfied with the reliability of the brand valuation. Brands are not amortised by AB but are reviewed annually for impairment, and as at 31 May 2000, there has been no impairment in value. Goodwill is amortised over a 10 year period with a full charge in the year of acquisition.

(iv) AB incurred £500 000 of expenses in connection with the acquisition of CG. This figure comprised £300 000 of professional fees and £200 000 of issue costs of the shares. The acquisition expenses have been included in administrative expenses.

Required

(a) Prepare consolidated profit and loss accounts for the year ended 31 May 2000 and consolidated balance sheets as at 31 May 2000 for the AB group utilising:

(i) Merger accounting;

(ii) Acquisition accounting.

(b) Discuss the impact on the group financial statements of the AB group of utilizing merger accounting as opposed to acquisition accounting.

explain and critically discuss the existing regulations for the treatment of negativ 565656

Growmoor plc has carried on business as a food retailer since 1900. It had traded profitably until the late 1980s when it suffered from fierce competition from larger retailers. Its turnover and margins were under severe pressure and its share price fell to an all time low. The directors formulated a strategic plan to grow by acquisition and merger. It has an agreement to be able to borrow funds to finance acquisition at an interest rate of 10% per annum. It is Growmoor plc’s policy to amortise goodwill over ten years.

1. Investment in Smelt plc

On 15 June 1994 Growmoor plc had an issued share capital of 1 625 000 ordinary shares of £1 each. On that date it acquired 240 000 of the 1 500 000 issued £1 ordinary shares of

Smelt plc for a cash payment of £164 000.

Growmoor plc makes up its accounts to 31 July. In early 1996 the directors of Growmoor plc and Smelt plc were having discussions with a view to a combination of the two companies.

The proposal was that:

(i) On 1 May 1996 Growmoor plc should acquire 1 200 000 of the issued ordinary shares of Smelt plc which had a market price of £1.30 per share, in exchange for 1 500 000 newly issued ordinary shares in Growmoor plc which had a market price of £1.20p per share. There has been no change in Growmoor plc’s share capital since 15 June 1994. The market price of the Smelt plc shares had ranged from £1.20 to £1.50 during the year ended 30 April 1996.

(ii) It was agreed that the consideration would be increased by 200 000 shares if a contingent liability in Smelt plc in respect of a claim for wrongful dismissal by a former director did not crystallise.

(iii) After the exchange the new board would consist of 6 directors from Growmoor plc and 6 directors from Smelt plc with the Managing Director of Growmoor plc becoming Managing Director of Smelt plc.

(iv) The Growmoor plc head office should be closed and the staff made redundant and the Smelt plc head office should become the head office of the new combination.

(v) Senior managers of both companies were to re apply for their posts and be interviewed by an interview panel comprising a director and the personnel managers from each company. The age profile of the two companies differed with the average age of the Growmoor plc managers being 40 and that of Smelt plc being 54 and there was an expectation among the directors of both boards that most of the posts would be filled by Growmoor plc managers.

2. Investment in Beaten Ltd

Growmoor plc is planning to acquire all of the 800 000 £1 ordinary shares in Beaten Ltd on 30 June 1996 for a deferred consideration of £500 000 and a contingent consideration payable on 30 June 2000 of 10% of the amount by which profits for the year ended 30 June2000 exceeded £100 000. Beaten Ltd has suffered trading losses and its directors, who are the major shareholders, support a takeover by Growmoor plc. The fair value of net assets of Beaten Ltd was £685 000 and Growmoor plc expected that reorganisation costs would be £85 000 and future trading losses would be £100 000. Growmoor plc agreed to offer four year service contracts to the directors of Beaten Ltd.

The directors had expected to be able to create a provision for the reorganisation costs and future trading losses but were advised by their Finance Director that FRS 7 required these two items to be treated as post acquisition items.

Required

  1. (i) Explain to the directors of Growmoor plc the extent to which the proposed terms of the combination with Smelt plc satisfied the requirements of the Companies Act1985 and FRS 6 for the combination to be treated as a merger; and
  2. (ii) If the proposed terms fail to satisfy any of the requirements, advise the directors on any changes that could be made so that the combination could be treated as a merger as at 31 July 1996.

(b) Explain briefly the reasons for the application of the principles of recognition and measurement on an acquisition set out in FRS 7 to provisions for future operating losses and for re organisation costs.

(c) (i) Explain the treatment in the profit and loss account for the year ended 31 July1996 and the balance sheet as at that date of Growmoor plc on the assumption that the acquisition of Beaten Ltd took place on 30 June 1996 and the consideration for the acquisition was deferred so that £100 000 was payable after one year, £150 000 after two years and the balance after three years. Show your calculations.

(ii) Calculate the goodwill to be dealt with in the consolidated accounts for the years ending 31 July 1996 and 1997, explaining clearly the effect of deferred and contingent consideration.

(iii) Explain and critically discuss the existing regulations for the treatment of negative

goodwill.

explain the action which invest plc must take in 1998 99 and in future years arising 565657

FRS 10 – Goodwill and Intangible Assets – was issued in December 1997. At the same time, SSAP 22, the previous Accounting Standard which dealt with the subject of accounting for goodwill, was withdrawn. SSAP 22 allowed purchased goodwill to be written off directly to reserves as one amount in the accounting period of purchase. FRS 10 does not permit this treatment.

Invest plc has a number of subsidiaries. The accounting date of Invest plc and all its subsidiaries is 30 April. On 1 May 1998, Invest plc purchased 80% of the issued equity shares of Target Ltd. This purchase made Target Ltd a subsidiary of Invest plc from 1 May 1998. Invest plc made a cash payment of £31 million for the shares in Target Ltd. On 1 May 998, the net assets which were included in the balance sheet of Target Ltd had a fair value to Invest plc of £30 million. Target Ltd sells a well known branded product and has taken steps to protect itself legally against unauthorised use of the brand name. A reliable estimate of the value of this brand to the Invest group is £3 million. It is further considered that the value of the brand can be maintained or even increased for the foreseeable future. The value of the brand is not included in the balance sheet of Target Ltd.

For the purposes of preparing the consolidated financial statements, the Directors of Invest plc wish to ensure that the charge to the profit and loss account for the amortisation of intangible fixed assets is kept to a minimum. They estimate that the useful economic life of the purchased goodwill (or premium on acquisition) of Target Ltd is 40 years.

Requirements

(a) Outline the key factors which lay behind the decision of the Accounting Standards Board to prohibit the write off of purchased goodwill to reserves.

(b) Compute the charge to the consolidated profit and loss account in respect of the goodwill on acquisition of Target Ltd for its year ended 30 April 1999.

(c) Explain the action which Invest plc must take in 1998/99 and in future years arising from the chosen accounting treatment of the goodwill on acquisition of Target Ltd.

compute the current ratio gross profit rate profit margin ratio inventory turnover r 565571

Gentry Electronics has enjoyed tremendous sales growth during the last 10 years. However, even though sales have steadily increased, the company’s CEO, Erica Harding, is concerned about certain aspects of its performance. She has called a meeting with the corporate controller and the vice presidents of finance, operations, sales, and marketing to discuss the company’s performance. Erica begins the meeting by making the following observations: We have been forced to take significant write downs on inventory during each of the last three years because of obsolescence. In addition, inventory storage costs have soared. We rent four additional warehouses to store our increasingly diverse inventory. Five years ago inventory represented only 20% of the value of our total assets. It now exceeds 35%. Yet, even with all of this inventory, “stockouts” (measured by complaints by customers that the desired product is not available) have increased by 40% during the last three years. And worse yet, it seems that we constantly must discount merchandise that we have too much of. Erica asks the group to review the following data and make suggestions as to how the company’s performance might be improved.

(in millions)

2010

2009

2008

2007

Inventory

Raw materials

$242

$198

$155

$128

Work in process

116

77

49

33

Finished goods

567

482

398

257

Total inventory

$925

$757

$602

$418

Current assets

$1,800

1,423

1,183

$841

Total assets

$2,643

2,523

2,408

$2,090

Current liabilities

$600

$590

$525

$420

Sales

$9,428

8,674

7,536

$6,840

Cost of goods sold

$6,328

5,474

4,445

$3,557

Net income

$754

$987

$979

$958

Instructions

Using the information provided, answer the following questions.

(a) Compute the current ratio, gross profit rate, profit margin ratio, inventory turnover ratio, and days in inventory for 2008, 2009, and 2010.

(b) Discuss the trends and potential causes of the changes in the ratios in part (a). (c) Discuss potential remedies to any problems discussed in part (b).

(d) What concerns might be raised by some members of management with regard to your suggestions in part (c)?

what impact this change in accounting method has on earnings why the company might w 565572

In a discussion of dramatic increases in coffee bean prices, a Wall Street Journal article noted the following fact about Starbucks.

Before this year’s bean price hike, Starbucks added several defenses that analysts say could help it maintain earnings and revenue. The company last year began accounting for its coffee bean purchases by taking the average price of all beans in inventory.

Source: Aaron Lucchetti, “Crowded Coffee Market May Keep a Lid on Starbucks After Price Rise Hurt Stock,” Wall Street Journal(June 4, 1997), p. C1. Prior to this change the company was using FIFO.

Instructions

Your client, the CEO of Hot Cup Coffee, Inc., read this article and sent you an e mail message requesting that you explain why Starbucks might have taken this action. Your response should explain what impact this change in accounting method has on earnings, why the company might want to do this, and any possible disadvantages of such a change.

what is the effect of this transaction on this year rsquo s and next year rsquo s in 565574

Heinen Wholesale Corp. uses the LIFO cost flow method. In the current year, profit at Heinen is running unusually high. The corporate tax rate is also high this year, but it is scheduled to decline significantly next year. In an effort to lower the current year’s net income and to take advantage of the changing income tax rate, the president of Heinen Wholesale instructs the plant accountant to recommend to the purchasing department a large purchase of inventory for delivery 3 days before the end of the year. The price of the inventory to be purchased has doubled during the year, and the purchase will represent a major portion of the ending inventory value.

Instructions

(a) What is the effect of this transaction on this year’s and next year’s income statement and income tax expense? Why?

(b) If Heinen Wholesale had been using the FIFO method of inventory costing, would the president give the same directive?

(c) Should the plant accountant order the inventory purchase to lower income? What are the ethical implications of this order?

journalize the entries required by the reconciliation 565582

Trillo Company& bank statement for May 2010 shows these data.

Balance May 1

$12,650

Balance May 31

$14,280

Debit memorandum:

Credit memorandum:

NSF check

175

Collection of note receivable

505

The cash balance per books at May 31 is $13,319. Your review of the data reveals the following.

1. The NSF check was from Hup Co., a customer.

2. The note collected by the bank was a $500, 3 month, 12% note. The bank charged a $10 collection fee. No interest has been previously accrued.

3. Outstanding checks at May 31 total $2,410.

4. Deposits in transit at May 31 total $1,752.

5. A Trillo Company check for $352 dated May 10 cleared the bank on May 25. This check, which was a payment on account, was journalized for $325.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a bank reconciliation at May 31.

(b) Journalize the entries required by the reconciliation.

calculate the finance cost in respect of the preference shares for each of the five 565607

You are the management accountant of Short plc. On 1 October 1993 Short plc issued 10 million £1 preference shares at par, incurring issue costs of £100 000. The dividend payable on the preference shares was a fixed 4% per annum, payable on 30 September each year in arrears. The preference shares were redeemed on 1 October 1998 at a price of £1.35 per share. The effective finance cost of the preference shares was 10%. The balance sheet of the company on 30 September 1998, the day before the redemption of the preference shares, was as follows:

£ million

Ordinary share capital (non redeemable)

100.0

Redeemable preference shares

13.5

Share premium account

25.8

`Profit and loss account

59.7

199.0

Net assets

199.0

Requirements

(a) Write a memorandum to your assistant which explains:

  • how the total finance cost of the preference shares should be allocated to the profit and loss account over their period of issue;
  • where in the profit and loss account the finance cost should be reported;
  • where the preference shares should be disclosed in the balance sheet;
  • the nature of any supporting information which is required to be disclosed in the notes to the financial statements regarding the preference shares.

Your memorandum should refer to the provisions of relevant Accounting Standards.

(b) Calculate the finance cost in respect of the preference shares for EACH of the five years ended 30 September 1998.

(c) Assuming no changes other than those caused by the redemption of the preference shares, prepare the balance sheet of Short plc at the end of 1 October 1998. You should give an explanation for any changes to any of the headings or any new headings which are required.

discuss the concerns about the accounting practices used for financial instruments w 565610

Standard setters have been struggling for several years with the practical issues of the disclosure, recognition and measurement of financial instruments. The ASB has issued a Discussion Paper on Derivatives and Other Financial Instruments and Financial Reporting Standard 13 on the disclosure of such instruments. The dynamic nature of international financial markets has resulted in the widespread use of a variety of financial instruments but present accounting rules in this area do not ensure that the financial statements portray effectively the impact and risks of the instruments currently being used. 204 Part 2 · Financial reporting in practice

Required

(a) (i) Discuss the concerns about the accounting practices used for financial instruments which led to demands for an accounting standard.

(ii) Explain why regulations dealing with disclosure alone cannot solve the problem of accounting for financial instruments.

(b) (i) Discuss three ways in which gains and losses on financial instruments might be recorded in the financial statements, commenting on the relative merits of each method.

(ii) AX, a public limited company, issued a three year £30 million 5% debenture at par on 1 December 1998 when the market rate of interest was 5%. Interest is paid annually on 30 November each year. Market rates of interest on debentures of equivalent term and risk are 6% and 4% at the end of the financial years to 30 November 1999 and 30 November 2000. (Assume that the changes in interest rates took place on 30 November each year.)

Show the effect on ‘profit’ for the three years to 30 November 2001 if the debenture and the interest charge were valued on a fair value basis.

identify the strengths and weaknesses of using a historical cost system of measureme 565611

One of the issues dealt with by the Accounting Standards Board in its Statement of Principles for Financial Reporting is the measurement of assets and liabilities in financial statements. The Statement notes that the historical cost system is the one most widely used in financial statements at present. However, the Statement suggests that financial reporting may well evolve towards a mixed measurement system, where some assets and liabilities are measured based on historical cost, while others are based on current values. The use of current values is already accepted practice for measuring certain categories of fixed asset, particularly properties. Recent developments appear to suggest that this practice may in future be applied to the measurement of financial instruments.

In September 1998, the ASB published FRS13 – Derivatives and Other Financial Instruments: Disclosures. Then, in December 2000, the ASB published a discussion paper that suggested measuring most financial instruments at current values, rather than merely providing information about current values in the notes to the financial statements. The discussion paper proposes that hedge accounting should be prohibited. Such a proposal, if implemented, would have a significant effect on current financial reporting practice in the UK. In particular, SSAP 20 – Foreign Currency Translation would need to be reviewed because this Accounting Standard currently permits hedge accounting in certain circumstances.

Required

(a) Identify the strengths and weaknesses of using a historical cost system of measurement for assets and liabilities.

(b) Explain why a current value measurement system is more appropriate for financial instruments than a historical cost system.

(c) Explain why the disclosure requirements of FRS 13 are insufficient on their own to satisfy the needs of users.

(d) Discuss the effect of prohibiting hedge accounting on current UK accounting practice.

the objective of frs 5 ndash reporting the substance of transactions is to ensure th 565612

The objective of FRS 5 – Reporting the substance of transactions, is to ensure that a reporting entity’s financial statements report the substance of the transactions into which it has entered.

You are the management accountant of BLFB plc. BLFB plc imports timber which it uses to manufacture and sell a large range of furniture products. BLFB plc makes up financial statements to 30 June each year.

On 1 June 1999, BLFB plc purchased for £40 million a large quantity of timber from an overseas supplier. The timber was intended to be used in the manufacture of a large quantity of high quality furniture. Before manufacturing such furniture, it is necessary to keep the new timber in controlled conditions for at least five years from the date of purchase.

On 1 July 1999, BLFB plc sold the timber to Southland Bank plc for £45 million. The timber was physically retained by BLFB plc under the controlled conditions that were necessary to render the timber suitable for use. At the date of the sale on 1 July 1999, BLFB plc signed an agreement to re purchase the timber from Southland Bank plc on 30 June 2004 for a price of £66.12 million. Responsibility for the security and condition of the timber remained with BLFB plc.

Your assistant, who is responsible for preparing the draft financial statements for the year ended 30 June 2000, has shown the transaction as a sale of £45 million and recorded a profit of £5 million.

Requirements

(a) Write a memorandum to your assistant that:

(i) describes what is meant by the ‘substance’ of a transaction and how to determine ‘substance’;

(ii) explains why FRS 5 requires transactions to be accounted for according to their substance.

(b) (i) Prepare all the journal entries that should have been made in the financial statements of BLFB plc for the year ended 30 June 2000 in order to account correctly for the sale of timber to Southland Bank plc.

(ii) Explain fully how the entries you have made comply with the relevant provisions of FRS 5. You should also explain why the treatment suggested by your assistant is incorrect.

you are the management accountant of tree plc a listed company that prepares consoli 565613

You are the management accountant of Tree plc, a listed company that prepares consolidated financial statements. Your Managing Director, who is not an accountant, has recently attended a seminar at which key financial reporting issues were discussed. She remembers being told that:

  • financial statements of an entity should reflect the substance of its transactions;
  • the way to determine the substance of a transaction is to consider its effect on the assets and liabilities of the entity carrying out the transaction.

The year end of Tree plc is 31 August. In the year to 31 August 2001, the company entered into the following transactions:

Transaction 1

On 1 March 2001, Tree plc sold a property to a bank for £5 million. The market value of the property at the date of the sale was £10 million. Tree plc continues to occupy the property rentfree. Tree plc has the option to buy the property back from the bank at the end of every month from 31 March 2001 until 28 February 2006. Tree plc has not yet exercised this option. The repurchase price will be £5 million plus £50,000 for every complete month that has elapsed from the date of sale to the date of repurchase. The bank cannot require Tree plc to repurchase the property and the facility lapses after 28 February 2006. The directors of Tree plc expect property prices to rise at around 5% each year for the foreseeable future.

Transaction 2

On 1 September 2000, Tree plc sold one of its branches to Vehicle Ltd for £8 million. The net assets of the branch in the financial statements of Tree plc immediately before the sale were £7 million. Vehicle Ltd is a subsidiary of a bank and was specifically incorporated to carry out the purchase – it has no other business operations. Vehicle Ltd received the £8 million to finance this project from its parent in the form of a loan.

Tree plc continues to control the operations of the branch and receives an annual operating fee from Vehicle Ltd. The annual fee is the operating profit of the branch for the 12 months to the previous 31 August less the interest payable on the loan taken out by Vehicle Ltd for the 12 months to the previous 31 August. If this amount is negative, then Tree plc must pay the negative amount to Vehicle Ltd.

Any payments to or by Tree plc must be made by 30 September following the end of the relevant period. In the year to 31 August 2001, the branch made an operating profit of £2000000. Interest payable by Vehicle Ltd on the loan for this period was £800 000.

Required

(a) Evaluate the extent to which the advice given to the Managing Director at the seminar is in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

(b) Explain how the transactions described above will be dealt with in the consolidated financial statements (balance sheet and profit and loss account) of Tree plc for the year ended 31 August 2001.

explain the reasons why companies may wish to omit assets and liabilities from their 565614

Financial Reporting Standard 5 Reporting the Substance of Transactions requires an entity’s financial statements to report the substance of transactions into which it has entered. The FRS sets out how to determine the substance of a transaction and whether any resulting assets and liabilities should be included in the balance sheet. The FRS came about partly as a result of concern over arrangements made by companies whereby assets and liabilities were omitted from the balance sheet.

Required

(a) Explain the reasons why companies may wish to omit assets and liabilities from their balance sheets.

(b) Explain the reasons why the Accounting Standards Board felt it necessary to introduce FRS 5 Reporting the Substance of Transactions.

(c) Discuss the proposed treatment of the following items in the financial statements:

(i) Beak plc sells land to a property investment company, Wings plc. The sale price is £20 million and the current market value is £30 million. Beak plc can buy the land back at any time in the next five years for the original selling price plus an annual commission of 1% above the current bank base rate. Wings plc cannot require Beak plc to buy the land back at any time.

The accountant of Beak plc proposes to treat this transaction as a sale in the financial statements.

(ii) A car manufacturer, Gocar plc, supplies cars to a car dealer, Sparks Ltd, on the following terms. Sparks Ltd has to pay a monthly fee of £100 per car for the privilege of displaying it in its showroom and also is responsible for insuring the cars. When a car is sold to a customer, Sparks Ltd has to pay Gocar plc the factory price of the car when it was first supplied. Sparks Ltd can only return the cars to Gocar plc on the payment of a fixed penalty charge of 10% of the cost of the car. Sparks Ltd has to pay the factory price for the cars if they remain unsold within a four month period. Gocar plc cannot demand the return of the cars from Sparks Ltd.

The accountant of Sparks Ltd proposes to treat the cars unsold for less than four months as the property of Gocar plc and not show them as stock in the financial statements.

frs 5 ndash reporting the substance of transactions ndash requires that a reporting 565615

FRS 5 – Reporting the Substance of Transactions – requires that a reporting entity’s financial statements should report the substance of the transactions into which it has entered. FRS 5 states that in order to determine the substance of a transaction it is necessary to identify whether the transaction has given rise to new assets or liabilities for the reporting entity and whether it has changed the entity’s existing assets or liabilities.

You are the management accountant of D Ltd which has three principal activities. These are the sale of motor vehicles (both new and second hand), the provision of spare parts for motor vehicles and the servicing of motor vehicles.

During the financial year ended 31 August 1996, the company has entered into a type of business transaction not previously undertaken. With effect from 1 January 1996, D Ltd entered into an agreement whereby it received motor vehicles on a consignment basis from E plc, a large manufacturer. The terms of the arrangement were as follows:

(i) On delivery, the stock of vehicles remains the legal property of E plc.

(ii) Legal title to a vehicle passes to D Ltd either when D Ltd enters into a binding arrangement to sell the vehicle to a third party or six months after the date of delivery by E plc to D Ltd.

(iii) At the date legal title passes, E plc invoices D Ltd for the sale of the vehicles. The price payable by D Ltd is the normal selling price of E plc at the date of delivery, increased by 1% for every complete month the vehicles are held on consignment by D Ltd. Any change in E plc’s normal selling price between the date of delivery and the date legal title to the goods passes to D Ltd does not change the amount payable by D Ltd to E plc.

(iv) At any time between the date of delivery and the date legal title passes to D Ltd, the company (D Ltd) has the right to return the vehicles to E plc provided they are not damaged or obsolete. D Ltd does not have the right to return damaged or obsolete vehicles. If D Ltd exercises this right of return then a return penalty is payable by D Ltd as follows:

Time since date of delivery

Three months or less

0%

Three to four months

75%

More than four months

100%

* i.e. the price that would otherwise be payable by D Ltd if legal title to the vehicles had passed at the date of return.

(v) E plc has no right to demand return of vehicles on consignment to D Ltd unless D Ltd becomes insolvent.

The managing director suggests that the vehicles should be shown as an asset of D Ltd only when title passes, and the purchase price becomes legally payable.

Requirement

Write a report to the managing director which:

(a) explains how (under the principles established in FRS 5) an asset or liability is identified, and when an asset or liability should be recognised and should cease to be

recognised, in the financial statements of a business;

(b) evaluates, in the light of the principles you have explained in (a), the correctness, or otherwise, of the managing director’s suggested accounting treatment for the new transaction.

frs 5 ndash reporting the substance of transactions ndash requires that a reporting 565616

FRS 5 – Reporting the Substance of Transactions – requires that a reporting entity’s financial statements should report the substance of the transactions into which it has entered.

You are the management accountant of S Ltd. During the most recent financial year (ended 31 August 1998), the company has entered into a debt factoring arrangement with F plc. The main terms of the agreement are as follows:

1 On the first day of every month S Ltd transfers (by assignment) all its trade debts to F plc, subject to credit approval by F plc for each debt transferred by S Ltd.

2 At the time of transfer of the debtors to F plc, S Ltd receives a payment from F plc of 70% of the gross amount of the transferred debts. The payment is debited by F plc to a factoring account which is maintained in the books of F plc.

3 Following transfer of the debts, F plc collects payments from debtors and performs any necessary follow up work.

4 After collection by F plc, the cash received from the debtor is credited to the factoring account in the books of F plc.

5 F plc handles all aspects of the collection of the debts of S Ltd in return for a monthly charge of 1% of the total value of the debts transferred at the beginning of that month. The amount is debited to the factoring account in the books of F plc.

6 Any debts not collected by F plc within 90 days of transfer are regarded as bad debts by F plc and re assigned to S Ltd. The cash previously advanced by F plc in respect of bad debts is recovered from S Ltd. The recovery is only possible out of the proceeds of other debtors which have been assigned to S Ltd. For example, if, in a particular month, S Ltd assigned trade debts having a value of £10 000 and a debt of £500 was identified as bad, then the amounts advanced by F plc to S Ltd would be £6650 [70% × £10 000 – 70% × £500].

7 On a monthly basis, F plc debits the factoring account with an interest charge which is calculated on a daily basis on the balance on the factoring account.

8 At the end of every quarter, F plc pays over to S Ltd a sum representing any credit balance on its factoring account with S Ltd at that time.

Requirement

Write a memorandum to the Board of Directors of S Ltd which outlines:

(a) how, under the principles set out in FRS 5, the substance of a transaction should be determined;

(b) how the debt factoring arrangement will be reported in the financial statements of S Ltd.

you are the management accountant of prompt plc a uk company which prepares financia 565617

You are the management accountant of Prompt plc, a UK company which prepares financial statements to 31 March each year. The financial statements for the year ended 31 March 1998 are due to be formally approved by the board of directors on 15 June 1998.

Your assistant has prepared a first draft of the financial statements. These show a turnover of £200 million and a profit before taxation of £18 million. Your assistant has identified a number of transactions [(a), (b) and (c) in Requirement, below] for which he is unsure of the correct accounting treatment. For each transaction, he has indicated the treatment followed in the draft financial statements. You have reviewed the transactions highlighted by your assistant.

Requirement

Draft a memorandum to your assistant which explains the correct accounting treatment for each transaction. Where the treatment adopted by your assistant in the draft financial statements is incorrect, your memorandum should indicate the reasons for this. For each transaction, your memorandum should refer to relevant provisions of company law and Accounting Standards.

Transaction (a)

During the year ended 31 March 1998, Prompt plc entered into an arrangement with a finance company to factor its debts. Each month 90% of the value of the debts arising from credit sales that month was sold to the factor, who assumed legal title and responsibility for collection of all debts. Upon receipt of the cash by the factor, the remaining 10% was paid to Prompt plc less a deduction for administration and finance costs. Any debtor who did not pay the factor within three months of the debt being factored was transferred back to Prompt plc and the amounts advanced by the factor recovered from Prompt plc. In preparing the draft financial statements, your assistant has removed the whole of the factored debts from trade debtors at the date the debts are factored. The net amount receivable from the factor has been shown as a sundry debtor. Transaction (b)

On 15 March 1998, Prompt plc decided to close one of its three factories. This decision was taken because the product (called product X) which was manufactured at the factory was considered obsolete. A gradual run down of the operation commenced on 15 April 1998 and was expected to be complete by 15 June 1998. The factory produced monthly operating statements detailing turnover, profits and assets, and the turnover for the year ended 31 March 1998 was £35 million. Closure costs (including redundancy) were estimated to be £2.5 million. Your assistant has made no entries in the draft financial statements in respect of the closure since it took place in the year ending 31 March 1999.

Transaction (c)

On 30 June 1997, Prompt plc issued 100 million £1 debentures. The issue costs were £100 000. The debentures carry no interest entitlement but are redeemable on 30 June 2007 at a price of £259 million. Your assistant has included the nominal value of the debentures (£100 million) as part of shareholders’ funds since they represent long term finance for the company. The issue costs of £100 000 have been charged to the profit and loss account for the year, and your assistant suggests that the difference between the issue price and the redemption price should be dealt with in 2007 when the debentures are redeemed.

s plc is a large manufacturing company the company needs to purchase a major piece o 565618

S plc is a large manufacturing company. The company needs to purchase a major piece of equipment which is vital to the production process. S plc does not have sufficient cash available to buy this equipment. It cannot raise the necessary finance by issuing shares because it would not be cost effective to have a share issue for the amount involved. The directors are also unwilling to borrow because the company already has a very high level of debt in its balance sheet.

C Bank has offered to lease the equipment to S plc. The bank has proposed a finance package in which S plc would take the equipment on a two year lease. The intention is that S plc will take out a second two year lease at the conclusion of the initial period and a third at the conclusion of that one. By that time the equipment will have reached the end of its useful life.

C Bank will not require S plc to commit itself in writing to the two secondary lease periods. Instead, S plc will agree in writing to refurbish the equipment to a brand new condition before returning it to C Bank. This condition will, however, be waived if the lease is subsequently extended to a total of six years or more. Once the equipment is used, it would be prohibitively expensive to refurbish it.

S plc’s directors are very interested in the arrangement proposed by C Bank. They believe that each of the two year contracts could be accounted for as an operating lease because each covers only a fraction of the equipment’s expected useful life.

Required

(a) Explain how the decision to treat the lease as an operating lease rather than a finance lease would affect S plc’s profit and loss account, balance sheet and any accounting ratios based on these.

(b) Explain whether S plc should account for the proposed lease as an operating lease or as a finance lease.

(C) The relationship between debt and equity in a company’s balance sheet is often referred to as the gearing ratio. Explain why companies are often keen to minimise the gearing ratio.

(d) It has been suggested that the rules governing the preparation of financial statements leave some scope for the preparers of financial statements to influence the profit figure or balance sheet position. Explain whether you agree with this suggestion.

prepare a memorandum for your managing director explaining in simple terms the basic 565619

You are the financial director of Pilgrim plc, a listed company. Your new group managing director, appointed from one of Pilgrim plc’s overseas subsidiaries, is reviewing the principal accounting policies and is having difficulty understanding the accounting treatment and disclosure of assets leased by Pilgrim plc as lessee, of which there are a substantial number (both finance and operating leases).

Requirement

Prepare a memorandum for your managing director explaining, in simple terms, the basics of accounting for leased assets in the accounts of listed companies (in full compliance with the relevant accounting standards and the Companies Acts). Your memorandum should be set out in sections as follows:

(a) Outline the factors which can influence the decision as to whether a particular lease is a finance lease or an operating lease.

(b) As an example, taking the following non cancellable lease details:

– fair value (as defined in SSAP 21): £100 000

– lease payments: five annual payments in advance of £20000 each

– estimated residual value at the end of the lease: £26 750 of which £15 000 is guaranteed by Pilgrim plc as lessee

– interest rate implicit in the lease: 10%

demonstrate whether the lease falls to be considered as a finance lease or an operating lease under the provisions of SSAP 21, explaining the steps in reaching a conclusion.

(c) Explain briefly any circumstances in which a lessor and a lessee might classify a particular lease differently, i.e. the lessee might classify a lease as an operating lease whilst the lessor classifies the same lease as a finance lease or vice versa.

(d) Explain briefly any circumstances in which the requirements of SSAP 21 with regard to accounting for operating leases by lessees might result in charges to the profit and loss account different from the amounts payable for the period under the terms of a lease.

(e) Draft a concise accounting policy in respect of ‘Leasing’ (as a lessee only) suitable for inclusion in the published accounts of Pilgrim plc and comment on the key aspects of your policy to aid your managing director’s understanding.

(f) List the other disclosures Pilgrim plc is required to give in its published accounts in respect of its financial transactions as a lessee.

Note: Ignore taxation.

diverse plc has established a defined benefit pension scheme for all the company rsq 565623

Diverse plc has established a defined benefit pension scheme for all the company’s fulltime employees. The scheme receives contributions from the company and the participating employees. The scheme was originally established on 31 December 1991 and was actuarially valued at 31 December 1994. The scheme showed a deficit of £6 million. This deficit was caused by a reassessment of the original actuarial assumptions (an experience deficiency). No change to contribution levels was made as a result of the 1994 valuation. However, the deficit was funded by a one off lump sum payment of £6 million into the scheme on 30 June 1995. The result of the 1994 valuation was not available when the 1994 financial statements of Diverse plc were approved by the Directors.

The scheme was actuarially valued for the second time at 31 December 1997. The results of this second valuation showed a surplus of £4 million. The actuaries advised that £3 million of this surplus was caused by a significant reduction in the number of scheme members because of a redundancy programme. The result of the 1997 valuation was not available when the 1997 financial statements of Diverse plc were approved by the Directors. No change was made to the normal contribution levels for 1998. Total contributions payable to the scheme for 1998 were £5 million. The average remaining service lives of participating employees in the scheme was estimated to be 20 years at the date of inception of the scheme. This estimate is reckoned to continue to be applicable in the medium term as older employees retire and younger employees join.

Requirements

(a) Explain the principles outlined in SSAP 24 – Accounting for Pension Costs, under which the profit and loss account charge for pension costs is determined in the financial statements of employing companies. You should indicate why the computation of the pension cost is more complicated in the case of defined benefit schemes than defined contribution schemes.

(b) Compute the charge in the profit and loss account of Diverse plc in respect of the pension costs for the year to 31 December 1998.

(c) Compute the pension asset or liability which would appear in the balance sheet of Diverse plc at 31 December 1998 and explain how it would be disclosed on the balance sheet.

you are the financial controller of c ltd a company which has recently established a 565624

You are the financial controller of C Ltd, a company which has recently established a pension scheme for its employees. It chose a defined benefit scheme rather than a defined contribution scheme.

C Ltd makes payments into the pension scheme on a monthly basis as follows:

  • Employer’s contribution of 12% of the gross salaries of the participating employees.
  • Employees’ contribution (via deduction from salary) of 6% of gross salary.
  • Payments are made on the twentieth day of the month following payment of the salary.

C Ltd makes up financial statements to 31 December each year. On 30 June 1995 the scheme was subject to its first actuarial valuation. The valuation revealed a deficit of £2.4 million. The deficit was primarily caused by a change in the assumptions made by the actuary since the scheme was originally established. The deficit was extinguished by a one off lump sum payment of £2.4 million into the scheme by C Ltd on 30 September 1995. The annual salaries of the scheme members for the year ended 31 December 1995 totalled £15 million, accruing evenly throughout the year.

Requirements

(a) Write a memorandum to your Board of Directors which explains:

  • the difference between a defined contribution scheme and a defined benefit scheme,
  • the accounting objective set out in SSAP 24 – Accounting for Pension Costs – concerning the determination of the charge for pension costs in the profit and loss account of the employing company,
  • why the accounting objective is more difficult to satisfy for an employer with a defined benefit scheme.

(b) Determine the total charge in the profit and loss account for pensions (EXCLUDING amounts deducted from employees’ gross salaries) AND any balance sheet amounts in respect of pensions, explaining clearly where exactly on the balance sheet the amounts would be included.

Assume the provisions of SSAP 24 are followed by C Ltd.

You ascertain that at 30 June 1995 the average remaining service lives of the employees who were members of the pension scheme at that date was 24 years. Ignore deferred taxation.

court plc has a defined benefits pension scheme for all its employees based on actua 565625

Court plc has a defined benefits pension scheme for all its employees. Based on actuarial advice the company has previously made contributions of £2 million per annum to the pension fund, being 10% of pensionable earnings. The average remaining service lives of the company’s existing employees is ten years and pensionable earnings will continue at their present level.

An actuarial valuation of the fund as at 1 January 1991 has revealed a surplus of £3 million (i.e. the actuarial value of the pension fund’s assets exceeds the actuarial value of the liabilities). The surplus has arisen solely because the investment performance of the pension fund has been better than anticipated. The actuary has suggested to the company the following funding options:

(a) Reduce contributions from 10% to 7.5% for the next ten years; or

(b) Have a one year pension holiday and reduce contributions to 9% in the following nine years; or

(c) Receive a refund of £3 million now and retain the 10% contribution.

All of these options can be assumed to comply with the requirements of the Taxes Acts (including Finance Act 1986) concerning pension fund surpluses.

In advance of a board meeting, the finance director of Court plc wishes to consider the impact of the various options on the accounts of the company and has asked you to prepare appropriate analyses building up to the average annual profit and loss account charge in accordance with SSAP 24 under each option for the next ten years. Also for each option the finance director wishes to know the balance sheet effect, if any.

Requirements

Note: In parts (i) and (ii), ignore taxation and the interest effect in respect of pension contributions advanced or deferred.

(i) Calculate the average annual charge to the profit and loss account of Court plc in respect of pension costs for the ten years commencing 1 January 1991 under each of the above options (a), (b) and (c).

For each option, (a), (b) and (c), detail the balance sheet effects of accounting for pension costs.

(ii) Assume that Court plc follows option (b) above with effect from 1 January 1991 and that a further actuarial valuation as at 1 January 1996 leads the actuary to recommend reducing the pension contribution to 8% for 1996 only (with continuing contributions at 9%); under these assumptions calculate the profit and loss account charge for pension costs in each of the fifteen years commencing 1 January 1991, and the balance sheet provision at the end of each of those fifteen years. The average remaining service lives of existing employees can be assumed to remain at ten years.

(iii) Set out, in note form, the practical accounting and presentational considerations, including taxation, which you would recommend the board of directors to take into account when deciding on an appropriate course of action in relation to the pension fund surplus as at 1 January 1991.

accounting for retirement benefits remains one of the most challenging areas in fina 565626

(a) Accounting for retirement benefits remains one of the most challenging areas in financial reporting. The values being reported are significant, and the estimation of these values is complex and subjective. Standard setters and preparers of financial statements find it difficult to achieve a measure of consensus on the appropriate way to deal with the assets and costs involved. SSAP 24 ‘Accounting for Pension Costs’ focused on the profit and loss account, viewing retirement benefits as an operating expense. However, FRS 17 ‘Retirement Benefits’ concentrates on the balance sheet and the valuation of the pension fund. The philosophy and rationale of the two statements are fundamentally opposed.

Required

(i) Describe four key issues in the determination of the method of accounting for retirement benefits in respect of defined benefit plans;

(ii) Discuss how FRS 17 ‘Retirement Benefits’ deals with these key issues and to what extent it provides solutions to the problems of accounting for retirement benefits.

(b) A, a public limited company, operates a defined benefit pension scheme. A full actuarial valuation by an independent actuary revealed that the value of the pension liability at 31 May 2000 was £1500 million. This was updated to 31 May 2001 by the actuary and the value of the pension liability at that date was £2000 million. The pension scheme assets comprised mainly UK bonds and equities and the market value of these assets was as follows:

31 May 2000

31 May 2001

£m

£m

Fixed interest and index linked bonds (UK)

380

600

Equities (UK)

1300

1900

Other investments

290

450

1970

2950

The pension scheme had been altered during the year with improved benefits arising for the employees and this alteration had been taken into account by the actuaries. The increase in the actuarial liability in respect of employee service in prior periods was £25 million (past service cost). The increase in the actuarial liability resulting from employee service in the current period was £70 million (current service cost).

The company had paid contributions of £60 million to the scheme during the period. The company expects its return on the pension scheme assets at 31 May 2001 to be £295 million and the interest on pension liabilities to be £230 million.

The company anticipates that a deferred tax liability will arise on the surplus in the scheme. Assume Corporation Tax is at a rate of 30 per cent.

Required

(i) Show the amount which will be shown as the net pension asset/pension reserve in the balance sheet of A plc as at 31 May 2001 under FRS 17, ‘Retirement Benefits’ (comparative figures are not required).

(ii) Show a reconciliation of the movement in the pension surplus during the year stating those amounts which would be charged to operating profit and the amounts which would be recognised in the Statement of Total Recognised Gains and Losses (STRGL), utilising FRS 17, ‘Retirement Benefits’.

a ltd is a company which specialises in the processing of canned beans and canned sp 565630

A Ltd is a company which specialises in the processing of canned beans and canned spaghetti for sale to retail shops. The canned beans are processed from beans bought in directly from UK farmers. The canned spaghetti is processed from pasta which is purchased from suppliers in Italy. Processing and canning take place at one of two factories in the United Kingdom, one factory dealing with beans and one with spaghetti. Each factory maintains separate financial statements in order to produce a monthly operating report for Head Office.

Once canned, the products are transferred to one of four distribution centres (two centres per factory). The distribution centres (which also maintain their own individual financial statements) are used to transfer the products to shops and supermarkets following orders for sales. The accounting year end of the company is 31 December.

On 30 November 1995, a decision was made to rationalise the business. Due to adverse exchange rate movements it was decided to discontinue the processing and sale of canned spaghetti, and concentrate exclusively on canned beans. The consequence of this decision was that the factory which processed pasta into spaghetti and one of the associated distribution centres would be sold, and the majority of the personnel employed at these locations made redundant. It was decided to commence running down the processing operations and the distribution operations in the factory and the distribution centre to be closed on 15 January 1996, with an expectation to complete the closure by 31 March 1996. Apart from carrying out extensive negotiations with relevant Trades Unions regarding redundancy packages, no other closure activities were to be commenced before 15 January 1996.

On 30 November 1995, A Ltd also decided to rationalise its distribution operation. The rationalisation included closing one of the four centres (as noted above) and redefining the areas covered by the remaining centres (so that the three remaining centres took on the distribution formerly carried out by the four centres, with the work relating only to baked beans). The timetable for the rationalisation of the distribution operation in the three remaining centres was identical to that for the closure of the factory and the fourth centre (rundown of spaghetti distribution and reallocation of beans distribution commencing 15 January 1996, rationalisation complete by 31 March 1996).

You are the Chief Accountant of A Ltd, and one of the directors has recently visited you to discuss the accounting treatment of the rationalisation. The director is unsure as to whether the rationalisation will have any impact on the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 1995 given that the programme did not actually commence until 15 January 1996. The director is aware that there is an accounting standard which deals with the issue of discontinued operations but is unaware of any relevant details. The 1995 financial statements are currently in the course of preparation and are expected to be formally approved by the directors at the April 1996 board meeting. For the purposes of this question, you should assume that today’s date is 29 February 1996.

Requirements

Write a memorandum for the Board of Directors which:

(a) explains how a discontinued operation is defined in FRS 3;

(b) outlines the accounting treatment (if any) of the decision to close the factories and one of the distribution centres and to rationalise the operations of the remaining distribution centres, in the financial statements of A Ltd for the year ended 31 December 1995.

Your explanation should encompass the treatment in the balance sheet and profit and loss account and any additional information which is required in the notes to the financial statements.

for each of the above transactions specify whether the item in question should be in 565550

Kitselman Limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory as of February 28, 2010, the company’s year end. The accountant counted everything that was in the warehouse, as of February 28, which resulted in an ending inventory valuation of $48,000. However, she didn’t know how to treat the following transactions so she didnt record them.

(a) On February 26, Kitselman shipped to a customer goods costing $800. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point, and the receiving report indicates that the customer received the goods on March 2.

(b) On February 26, Seller Inc. shipped goods to Kitselman FOB destination. The invoice price was $350 plus $25 for freight. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by Kitselman on March 2.

(c) Kitselman had $500 of inventory at a customer’s warehouse “on approval.” The customer was going to let Kitselman know whether it wanted the merchandise by the end of the week, March 4.

(d) Kitselman also had $400 of inventory at a Balena craft shop, on consignment from Kitselman.

(e) On February 26, Kitselman ordered goods costing $750. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on February 27. Kitselman received the goods on March 1.

(f) On February 28, Kitselman packaged goods and had them ready for shipping to a customer FOB destination. The invoice price was $350 plus $25 for freight; the cost of the items was $280. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received

by the customer on March 2.

(g) Kitselman had damaged goods set aside in the warehouse because they are no longer saleable. These goods originally cost $400 and, originally, Kitselman expected to sell these items for $600.

Instructions

For each of the above transactions, specify whether the item in question should be included in ending inventory, and if so, at what amount. For each item that is not included in ending inventory, indicate who owns it and what account, if any, it should have been recorded in.

determine the cost of goods available for sale 565551

Laramie Distribution markets CDs of numerous performing artists. At the beginning of March, Laramie had in beginning inventory 2,500 CDs with a unit cost of $7. During March Laramie made the following purchases of CDs.

5 Mar

2,000 @ $8

21 Mar

4,000 @ $10

13 Mar

5,500 @ $9

26 Mar

2,000 @ $11

During March 13,000 units were sold. Laramie uses a periodic inventory system.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine (1) the ending inventory and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods. (Note:For average cost, round cost per unit to three decimal places.)

(c) Which cost flow method results in (1) the highest inventory amount for the balance sheet and (2) the highest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

which cost flow method results in the lowest inventory amount for the balance sheet 565552

Reeble Company Inc. had a beginning inventory of 200 units of Product MLN at a cost of $8 per unit. During the year, purchases were:

Feb. 20

700 units at $ 9

Aug. 12

400 units at $11

5 May

500 units at $10

Dec. 8

100 units at $12

Reeble Company uses a periodic inventory system. Sales totalled 1,400 units.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under each of the assumedcost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average cost). Prove the accuracy of thecost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods. (Round average unit cost to three decimal places.)

(c) Which cost flow method results in the lowest inventory amount for the balance sheet? The lowest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

how much more cash will be available under lifo than under fifo why 565553

The management of Kirchner Inc. asks your help in determining the comparative effects of the FIFO and LIFO inventory cost flow methods. For 2010 the accounting records show these data.

Inventory, January 1 (10,000 units)

$35,000

Cost of 120,000 units purchased

20 Jul

Selling price of 95,000 units sold

1 Sep

Operating expenses

120,000

Units purchased consisted of 35,000 units at $3.70 on May 10; 60,000 units at $3.90 on August 15; and 25,000 units at $4.30 on November 20. Income taxes are 28%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare comparative condensed income statements for 2010 under FIFO and LIFO. (Show computations of ending inventory.)

(b) Answer the following questions for management in the form of a business letter.

(1) Which inventory cost flow method produces the most meaningful inventory amount for the balance sheet? Why?

(2) Which inventory cost flow method produces the most meaningful net income? Why?

(3) Which inventory cost flow method is most likely to approximate the actual physical flow of the goods? Why?

(4) How much more cash will be available under LIFO than under FIFO? Why?

(5) How much of the gross profit under FIFO is illusionary in comparison with the gross profit under LIFO?

which cost flow method should gold nugget gems select explain 565554

You have the following information for Gold Nugget Gems. Gold Nugget uses the periodic method of accounting for its inventory transactions. Gold Nugget only carries one brand and size of diamonds—all are identical. Each batch of diamonds purchased is carefully coded and marked with its purchase cost.

1 Mar

Beginning inventory 150 diamonds at a cost of $300 per diamond.

3 Mar

Purchased 200 diamonds at a cost of $350 each.

5 Mar

Sold 180 diamonds for $600 each.

10 Mar

Purchased 350 diamonds at a cost of $375 each.

25 Mar

Sold 400 diamonds for $650 each.

Instructions

(a) Assume that Gold Nugget Gems uses the specific identification cost flow method.

(1) Demonstrate how Gold Nugget could maximize its gross profit for the month by specifically selecting which diamonds to sell on March 5 and March 25.

(2) Demonstrate how Gold Nugget could minimize its gross profit for the month by selecting which diamonds to sell on March 5 and March 25.

(b) Assume that Gold Nugget uses the FIFO cost flow assumption. Calculate cost of goods sold. How much gross profit would Gold Nugget report under this cost flow assumption?

(c) Assume that Gold Nugget uses the LIFO cost flow assumption. Calculate cost of goods sold. How much gross profit would the company report under this cost flow assumption?

(d) Which cost flow method should Gold Nugget Gems select? Explain.

calculate the current ratio after adjusting for the lifo reserve 565555

This information is available for the Automotive and Other Operations Divisions of General Motors Corporation for 2006. General Motors uses the LIFO inventory method.

(in millions)

2006

Beginning inventory

$13,862

Ending inventory

13,921

LIFO reserve

1,508

Current assets

64,131

Current liabilities

67,822

Cost of goods sold

164,682

Sales

172,927

Instructions

(a) Calculate the inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory.

(b) Calculate the current ratio based on inventory as reported using LIFO.

(c) Calculate the current ratio after adjusting for the LIFO reserve.

(d) Comment on any difference between parts (b) and (c).

for each of the above transactions specify whether the item in question should be in 565556

Ewing Limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory as of February 28, 2010, the company’s year end. The following transactions occurred, and the accountant asked your help in determining whether they should be recorded or not.

(a) On February 26, Ewing shipped goods costing $800 to a customer and charged the customer $1,000. The goods were shipped with terms FOB destination and the receiving report indicates that the customer received the goods on March 2. (b) On February 26, Seller Inc. shipped goods to Ewing under terms FOB shipping point. The invoice price was $300 plus $25 for freight. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by Ewing on March 2.

(c) Ewing had $500 of inventory isolated in the warehouse. The inventory is designated for a customer who has requested that the goods be shipped on March 10.

(d) Also included in Ewing’s warehouse is $400 of inventory that Meredith Producers shipped to Ewing on consignment.

(e) On February 26, Ewing issued a purchase order to acquire goods costing $750. The goods were shipped with terms FOB destination on February 27. Ewing received the goods on March 2.

(f) On February 26, Ewing shipped goods to a customer under terms FOB shipping point. The invoice price was $350 plus $25 for freight; the cost of the items was $280. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by the customer on March 2.

Instructions

For each of the above transactions, specify whether the item in question should be included in ending inventory, and if so, at what amount.

which cost flow method results in 1 the highest inventory amount for the balance she 565557

Strom Distribution markets CDs of the performing artist Little Sister. At the beginning of October, Strom had in beginning inventory 1,500 Sister’s CDs with a unit cost of $5. During October Strom made the following purchases of Sister’s CDs.

Oct. 3

4,000 @ $6

Oct. 19

2,000 @ $8

Oct. 9

3,000 @ $7

Oct. 25

2,500 @ $9

During October 9,000 units were sold. Strom uses a periodic inventory system.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine (1) the ending inventory and (2) the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under the FIFO and LIFO methods.

(c) Which cost flow method results in (1) the highest inventory amount for the balance sheet and (2) the highest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

determine the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed 565558

Timmons Company had a beginning inventory on January 1 of 100 units of Product SXL at a cost of $20 per unit. During the year, purchases were:

Mar. 15

300 units at $23

Sept. 4

350 units at $28

20 Jul

250 units at $25

Dec. 2

100 units at $30

Timmons Company sold 800 units, and it uses a periodic inventory system.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cost of goods available for sale.

(b) Determine the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under each of the assumed cost flow methods (FIFO, LIFO, and average cost). Prove the accuracy of the cost of goods sold under each method.

(c) Which cost flow method results in the highest inventory amount for the balance sheet? The highest cost of goods sold for the income statement?

how much more cash will be available for management under lifo than under fifo why 565559

The management of Hadaway is reevaluating the appropriateness of using its present inventory cost flow method, which is average cost. The company requests your help in determining the results of operations for 2010 if either the FIFO or the LIFO method had been used. For 2010 the accounting records show these data:

Inventories

Purchases and Sales

Beginning (10,000 units)

$22,800

Total net sales (220,000 units)

$862,000

Ending (20,000 units)

Total cost of goods purchased

(230,000 units)

576,000

Purchases were made quarterly as follows.

Quarter

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

1

60,000

2.3

$138,000

2

50000

2.5

125,000

3

50000

2.55

127,500

4

70000

2.65

185,500

230000

$576,000

Operating expenses were $147,000, and the company’s income tax rate is 32%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare comparative condensed income statements for 2010 under FIFO and LIFO.

(Show computations of ending inventory.)

(b) Answer the following questions for management in business letter form.

(1) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) produces the more meaningful inventory amount for the balance sheet? Why?

(2) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) produces the more meaningful net income? Why?

(3) Which cost flow method (FIFO or LIFO) is more likely to approximate the actual physical flow of goods? Why?

(4) How much more cash will be available for management under LIFO than under FIFO? Why?

(5) Will gross profit under the average cost method be higher or lower than FIFO? Than LIFO?

calculate i ending inventory ii cost of goods sold iii gross profit and iv gross pro 565560

You have the following information for Waner Inc. for the month ended June 30, 2010. Waner uses the periodic method for inventory.

Date

Description

Quantity

Unit Cost or
Selling Price

June 1

Beginning inventory

25

$60

June 4

Purchase

85

64

June 10

Sale

70

90

June 11

Sale return

5

90

June 18

Purchase

35

68

June 18

Purchase return

15

68

June 25

Sale

55

95

June 28

Purchase

20

70

Instructions

(a) Calculate (i) ending inventory, (ii) cost of goods sold, (iii) gross profit, and (iv) gross profit rate under each of the following methods.

(1) LIFO.

(2) FIFO.

(3) Average cost.

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

how can companies use a cost flow method to justify price increases which cost flow 565561

You have the following information for Gas Saver Plus. Gas Saver Plus uses the periodic method of accounting for its inventory transactions.

March 1

Beginning inventory 1,500 litres at a cost of 40¢ per litre.

March 3

Purchased 2,000 litres at a cost of 45¢ per litre.

March 5

Sold 1,800 litres for 60¢ per litre.

March 10

Purchased 3,500 litres at a cost of 49¢ per litre.

March 20

Purchased 2,000 litres at a cost of 55¢ per litre.

March 30

Sold 5,000 litres for 70¢ per litre.

Instructions

(a) Prepare partial income statements through gross profit, and calculate the value of ending inventory that would be reported on the balance sheet, under each of the following cost flow assumptions. (1) Specific identification method assuming:

(i) the March 5 sale consisted of 900 litres from the March 1 beginning inventory and 900 litres from the March 3 purchase; and

(ii) the March 30 sale consisted of the following number of units sold from each purchase: 400 litres from March 1; 500 litres from March 3; 2,600 litres from

March 10; 1,500 litres from March 20.

(2) FIFO.

(3) LIFO.

(b) How can companies use a cost flow method to justify price increases? Which cost flow method would best support an argument to increase prices?

calculate the inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory 565562

Gehl Company manufactures a full line of construction and agriculture equipment. The following information is available for Gehl for 2006. The company uses the LIFO inventory method.

(in thousands)

2006

Beginning inventory

$ 39,121

Ending inventory

48,649

LIFO reserve

29,652

Current assets

291,033

Current liabilities

89,504

Cost of goods sold

381,813

Sales

486,217

Instructions

(a) Calculate the inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory.

(b) Calculate the current ratio based on LIFO inventory.

(c) After adjusting for the LIFO reserve, calculate the current ratio.

(d) Comment on any difference between parts (b) and (c).

for each of the following cost flow assumptions calculate i cost of goods sold ii en 565563

Mavity Inc. is a retail company that uses the perpetual inventory method. All sales returns from customers result in the goods being returned to inventory. (Assume that the inventory is not damaged.) Assume that there are no credit transactions; all amounts are settled in cash. You have the following information for Mavity Inc. for the month of January 2010.

Date

Description

Quantity

Unit Cost or
Selling Price

January 1

Beginning inventory

40

$14

January 5

Purchase

100

16

January 8

Sale

75

25

January 10

Sale return

10

25

January 15

Purchase

30

18

January 16

Purchase return

5

18

January 20

Sale

80

25

January 25

Purchase

20

20

Instructions

(a) For each of the following cost flow assumptions, calculate (i) cost of goods sold, (ii) ending inventory, and (iii) gross profit.

(1) LIFO. (Assume sales returns had a cost of $16 and purchase returns had a cost of $18.)

(2) FIFO. (Assume sales returns had a cost of $16 and purchase returns had a cost of $18.)

(3) Moving average cost.

(b) Compare results for the three cost flow assumptions.

determine the ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system using 1 fifo 565564

U Save More Center began operations on July 1. It uses a perpetual inventory system. During July the company had the following purchases and sales.

Purchases

Date

Units

Unit Cost

Sales Units

July 1

6

$47

July 6

4

July 11

5

$51

July 14

3

July 21

3

$54

July 27

2

Instructions

(a) Determine the ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system using (1) FIFO,

(2) Average cost, and (3) LIFO.

(b) Which costing method produces the highest ending inventory valuation?

prepare an adjusted trial balance as of december 31 2010 565565

On December 1, 2010, Gonzalez Company had the account balances shown below.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$ 4,800

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$ 1,500

Accounts Receivable

3,900

Accounts Payable

3,000

Merchandise Inventory

1,800*

Common Stock

10,000

Equipment

21,000

Retained Earnings

17,000

$31,500

$31,500

*(3,000 _ $0.60)

The following transactions occurred during December.

Dec.

3

Purchased 4,000 units on account at a cost of $0.75 per unit.

5

Sold 4,500 units on account for $0.90 per unit. (It sold 3,000 of the
$0.60 units and 1,500 of the $0.75)

7

Granted the December 5 customer $180 credit for 200 units returned
costing $150. These units were returned to inventory.

17

Purchased 2,400 units for cash at $0.80 each.

22

Sold 2,000 units on account for $0.95 per unit. (It sold 2,000 of the
$0.75 units).

Adjustment data:

1. Accrued salaries payable $400.

2. Depreciation $200 per month.

3. Income tax expense was $175, to be paid next year.

Instructions

  1. Journalize the December transactions and adjusting entries assuming Gonzalez uses the perpetual inventory method.

(b) Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T accounts and post the December transactions. In addition to the accounts mentioned above use the following additional accounts: Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Salaries Expense, Salaries Payable, Sales, Sales Returns and Allowances Income Tax Expense and Income Tax Payable.

(c) Prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2010.

(d) Prepare an income statement for December 2010 and a classified balance sheet at December 31, 2010.

(e) Compute ending inventory and cost of goods sold under FIFO assuming Gonzalez Company uses the periodic inventory system.

(f) Compute ending inventory and cost of goods sold under LIFO assuming Gonzalez Company uses the periodic inventory system.

what are the product cost of goods sold reported by tootsie roll for 2007 2006 and 2 565566

The notes that accompany a company’s financial statements provide informative details that would clutter the amounts and descriptions presented in the statements.

Refer to the financial statements of Tootsie Roll and the accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements in Appendix A.

Instructions

Answer the following questions. (Give the amounts in thousands of dollars, as shown in Tootsie Roll’s annual report.)

(a) What did Tootsie Roll report for the amount of inventories in its Consolidated Balance Sheet at December 31, 2007? At December 31, 2006?

(b) Compute the dollar amount of change and the percentage change in inventories between 2006 and 2007. Compute inventory as a percentage of current assets for 2007.

(c) What are the (product) cost of goods sold reported by Tootsie Roll for 2007, 2006, and 2005? Compute the ratio of (product) cost of goods sold to net (product) sales in 2007.

how did days in inventory of autonation rsquo s toyota and honda stores compare to i 565568

The February 9, 2007, issue of the Wall Street Journalcontains an article by Neal E. Boudette titled “Lots of Vehicles: Big Dealer to Detroit: Fix How You Make Cars.”

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) Explain what the article identifies as the biggest problem with U.S. auto manufacturers. How does the article’s author think they can solve the problem?

(b) At the time of the article, Toyota had 15.4% of the U.S. market and General Motors (GM) had 24.6%. How did the total inventory of the two companies compare? How did the inventory per 1% of market share compare? What are some possible implications of this difference?

(c) How did days in inventory of AutoNation’s Toyota and Honda stores compare to its GM, Ford, and Chrysler stores at the time of the article?

calculate the company rsquo s 2007 current ratio with the numbers as reported then r 565569

The following information is from the 2007 annual report of American Greetings Corporation (all dollars in thousands).

Feb. 28,
2007

Feb. 28,
2006

Inventories

Finished goods

$207,676

$235,657

Work in process

11,315

15,399

Raw materials and supplies

42,772

41,456

261,763

292,512

Less: LIFO reserve

79,145

79,403

Total (as reported)

$182,618

$213,109

Cost of goods sold

$826,791

$846,958

Current assets (as reported)

$799,281

$1,165,845

Current liabilities

$373,000

$559,082

The following information comes from the notes to the company’s financial statements. Finished products, work in process, and raw material inventories are carried at the lower of cost or market. The last in, first out (LIFO) cost method is used for approximately 65% of the domestic inventories in 2007 and approximately 55% in 2006. The foreign subsidiaries principally use the first in, first out method. Display material and factory supplies are carried at average cost.

Instructions

(a) Define each of the following: finished goods, work in process, and raw materials.

(b) What might be a possible explanation for why the company uses FIFO for its nondomestic inventories?

(c) Calculate the company’s inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory for 2006 and 2007. (2005 inventory was $218,711.) Discuss the implications of any change in the ratios.

(d) What percentage of total inventory does the 2007 LIFO reserve represent? If the company used FIFO in 2007, what would be the value of its inventory? Do you consider this difference a “material” amount from the perspective of an analyst? Which value accurately represents the value of the company’s inventory?

(e) Calculate the company’s 2007 current ratio with the numbers as reported, then recalculate after adjusting for the LIFO reserve.

what is the amount of raw materials work in process and finished goods inventory 565570

Purpose: Use SEC filings to learn about a company’s inventory accounting practices.

Steps

1. Go to this site and click on the name of an equipment manufacturer other than those discussed in the chapter.

2. Click on SEC filings.

3. Under “Recent filings” choose Form 10K (annual report) and click on Full Filing at Edgar Online.

4. Choose option “3,” Online HTML Version.

If the 10K is not listed among the recent filings then click on View All Filings on EDGAR Online.

Instructions

Review the 10K to answer the following questions.

(a) What is the name of the company?

(b) How has its inventory changed from the previous year?

(c) What is the amount of raw materials, work in process, and finished goods inventory?

(d) What inventory method does the company use?

(e) Calculate the inventory turnover ratio and days in inventory for the current year.

(f) If the company uses LIFO, what was the amount of its LIFO reserve?

what was the source of the article 565470

Purpose: No financial decision maker should ever rely solely on the financial information reported in the annual report to make decisions. It is important to keep abreast of financial news. This activity demonstrates how to search for financial news on the Web.

Steps

1. Type in either Wal Mart, Target Corp., or Kmart.

2. Choose News.

3. Select an article that sounds interesting to you and that would be relevant to an investor in these companies.

Instructions

  1. What was the source of the article? (For example, Reuters, Businesswire, Prnewswire.)

Assume that you are a personal financial planner and that one of your clients owns stock in the company. Write a brief memo to your client summarizing the article and explaining the implications of the article for their investment.

when should surfing usa co record the sale 565471

The following situation is presented in chronological order.

1. Finley decides to buy a surfboard.

2. He calls Surfing USA Co. to inquire about their surfboards.

3. Two days later he requests Surfing USA Co. to make him a surfboard.

4. Three days later Surfing USA Co. sends him a purchase order to fill out.

5. He sends back the purchase order.

6. Surfing USA Co. receives the completed purchase order.

7. Surfing USA Co. completes the surfboard.

8. Finley picks up the surfboard.

9. Surfing USA Co. bills Finley.

10. Surfing USA Co. receives payment from Finley.

Instructions

In a memo to the president of Surfing USA Co., answer the following questions.

(a) When should Surfing USA Co. record the sale?

(b) Suppose that with his purchase order, Finley is required to make a down payment Would that change your answer to part (a)?

should angie continue the practice started by harvey does she have any choice 565472

Angie Oaks was just hired as the assistant treasurer of Yorkshire Stores, a specialty chain store company that has nine retail stores concentrated in one metropolitan area. Among other things, the payment of all invoices is centralized in one of the departments Angie will manage. Her primary responsibility is to maintain the company’s high credit rating by paying all bills when due and to take advantage of all cash discounts. Harvey Mayo, the former assistant treasurer, who has been promoted to treasurer, is training Angie in her new duties. He instructs Angie that she is to continue the practice of preparing all checks “net of discount” and dating the checks the last day of the discount period. “But,” Harvey Mayo continues, “we always hold the hecks at least 4 days beyond the discount period before mailing them. That way we get another 4 days of interest on our money. Most of our creditors need our business and don’t complain. And, if they scream about our missing the discount period, we blame it on the mail room or the post office. We’ve only lost one discount out of every hundred we take that way. I think everybody does it. By the way, welcome to our team!”

Instructions

(a) What are the ethical considerations in this case?

(b) What stakeholders are harmed or benefited?

(c) Should Angie continue the practice started by Harvey? Does she have any choice?

at what point should the revenue from the gift cards be recognized 565473

There are many situations in business where it is difficult to determine the proper period in which to record revenue. Suppose that after graduation with a degree in finance, you take a job as a manager at a consumer electronics store called Atlantis Electronics. The company has expanded rapidly in order to compete with Best Buy and Circuit City. Atlantis has also begun selling gift cards. The cards are available in any dollar amount and allow the holder of the card to purchase an item for up to 2 years from the time the card is purchased. If the card is not used during that 2 years, it expires.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

At what point should the revenue from the gift cards be recognized? Should the revenue be recognized at the time the card is sold, or should it be recorded when the card is redeemed? Explain the reasoning to support your answers.

determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2009 and 2010 565479

Early in 2010 Westmoreland Company switched to a just in time inventory system. Its sales, cost of goods sold, and inventory amounts for 2009 and 2010 are shown below.

2009

2010

Sales

$2,000,000

$1,800,000

Cost of goods sold

$1,000,000

910,000

Beginning inventory

290,000

$210,000

Ending inventory

210,000

50,000

Determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2009 and 2010. Discuss the changes in the amount of inventory, the inventory turnover and days in inventory, and the amount of sales across the two years.

determine the cost of inventory on hand at march 31 and the cost of goods sold for m 565480

Englehart Company has the following inventory, purchases, and sales data for the month of March.

Inventory, March 1

200 units @ $4.00

$ 800

Purchases

10 Mar

500 units @ $4.50

2,250

20 Mar

400 units @ $4.75

1,900

30 Mar

300 units @ $5.00

1,500

Sales

15 Mar

500 units

25 Mar

400 units

The physical inventory count on March 31 shows 500 units on hand.

Instructions

Under a periodic inventory system, determine the cost of inventory on hand at March 31 and the cost of goods sold for March under (a) the first in, first out (FIFO) method; (b) the last in, first out (LIFO) method; and (c) the average cost method. (For average cost, carry cost per unit to three decimal places.)

compute the correct december 31 inventory 565531

Neverwas Company just took its physical inventory. The count of inventory items on hand at the company& business locations resulted in a total inventory cost of $300,000. In reviewing the details of the count and related inventory transactions, you have discovered the following items that had not been considered.

1. Neverwas has sent inventory costing $26,000 on consignment to Niagara Company. All of this inventory was at Niagara’s showrooms on December 31.

2. The company did not include in the count inventory (cost, $20,000) that was sold on December 28, terms FOB shipping point. The goods were in transit on December 31.

3. The company did not include in the count inventory (cost, $17,000) that was purchased with terms of FOB shipping point. The goods were in transit on December 31. Compute the correct December 31 inventory.

determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2009 and 2010 discuss the 565534

Early in 2010 Aragon Company switched to a just in time inventory system. Its sales and inventory amounts for 2009 and 2010 are shown below.

2009

2,010

Sales

$3,120,000

3,713,000

Cost of goods sold

1,200,000

1,425,000

Beginning inventory

180,000

220,000

Ending inventory

220,000

80,000

Determine the inventory turnover and days in inventory for 2009 and 2010. Discuss the changes in the amount of inventory, the inventory turnover and days in inventory, and the amount of sales across the two years.

determine the correct inventory amount on december 31 565535

Leavenworth Bank and Trust is considering giving Mabry Company a loan. Before doing so, they decide that further discussions with Mabry’s accountant may be desirable. One area of particular concern is the inventory account, which has a year end balance of $275,000. Discussions with the accountant reveal the following.

1. Mabry sold goods costing $55,000 to Ace Company FOB shipping point on December 28. The goods are not expected to reach Ace until January 12. The goods were not included in the physical inventory because they were not in the warehouse.

2. The physical count of the inventory did not include goods costing $95,000 that were shipped to Mabry FOB destination on December 27 and were still in transit at year end.

3. Mabry received goods costing $25,000 on January 2. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on December 26 by Lenny Co. The goods were not included in the physical count.

4. Mabry sold goods costing $51,000 to Flanders of Canada FOB destination on December

30. The goods were received in Canada on January 8. They were not included in Mabry’s physical inventory.

5. Mabry received goods costing $37,000 on January 2 that were shipped FOB destination on December 29. The shipment was a rush order that was supposed to arrive

December 31. This purchase was included in the ending inventory of $275,000.

Instructions

Determine the correct inventory amount on December 31.

prepare a schedule to determine the correct inventory amount provide explanations fo 565536

Gary Kifer, an auditor with Neely CPAs, is performing a review of Dudley Company’s inventory account. Dudley did not have a good year, and top management is under pressure to boost reported income. According to its records, the inventory balance at year end was $740,000. However, the following information was not considered when determining that amount.

1. Included in the company’s count were goods with a cost of $250,000 that the company is holding on consignment. The goods belong to Anya Corporation.

2. The physical count did not include goods purchased by Dudley with a cost of $40,000 that were shipped FOB shipping point on December 28 and did not arrive at Dudley’s warehouse until January 3.

3. Included in the inventory account was $17,000 of office supplies that were stored in the warehouse and were to be used by the company’s supervisors and managers during the coming year.

4. The company received an order on December 29 that was boxed and was sitting on the loading dock awaiting pick up on December 31. The shipper picked up the goods on January 1 and delivered them on January 6. The shipping terms were FOB shipping point. The goods had a selling price of $40,000 and a cost of $25,000. The goods were not included in the count because they were sitting on the dock.

5. On December 29 Dudley shipped goods with a selling price of $80,000 and a cost of $50,000 to Shawnee Sales Corporation FOB shipping point. The goods arrived on January 3. Shawnee Sales had only ordered goods with a selling price of $10,000 and a cost of $6,000. However, a sales manager at Dudley had authorized the shipment and said that if Shawnee wanted to ship the goods back next week, it could.

6. Included in the count was $50,000 of goods that were parts for a machine that the company no longer made. Given the high tech nature of Dudley’s products, it was unlikely that these obsolete parts had any other use. However, management would prefer to keep them on the books at cost, “since that is what we paid for them, after all.”

Instructions

Prepare a schedule to determine the correct inventory amount. Provide explanations for each item above, saying why you did or did not make an adjustment for each item.

identify which of the preceding items should be included in inventory if the item sh 565537

Guardado Inc. had the following inventory situations to consider at January 31, its year end.

(a) Goods held on consignment for MailBoxes Corp. since December 12.

(b) Goods shipped on consignment to Rinehart Holdings Inc. on January 5.

(c) Goods shipped to a customer, FOB destination, on January 29 that are still in transit.

(d) Goods shipped to a customer, FOB shipping point, on January 29 that are still in transit.

(e) Goods purchased FOB destination from a supplier on January 25, that are still in transit.

(f) Goods purchased FOB shipping point from a supplier on January 25, that are still in transit.

(g) Office supplies on hand at January 31.

Instructions

Identify which of the preceding items should be included in inventory. If the item should not be included in inventory, state in what account, if any, it should have been recorded.

compute the ending inventory at september 30 using the fifo and lifo methods prove t 565538

Snoslope sells a snowboard, Xpert that is popular with snowboard enthusiasts. Below is information relating to Snoslope’s purchases of Xpert snowboards during September.During the same month, 118 Xpert snowboards were sold. Snoslope uses a periodic inventory system.

Date

Explanation

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

Sept. 1

Inventory

14

$ 100

$ 1,400

Sept. 12

Purchases

45

102

4,590

Sept. 19

Purchases

20

104

2,080

Sept. 26

Purchases

50

105

5,250

Totals

129

$ 13,320

Instructions

(a) Compute the ending inventory at September 30 using the FIFO and LIFO methods. Prove the amount allocated to cost of goods sold under each method.

(b) For both FIFO and LIFO, calculate the sum of ending inventory and cost of goods sold. What do you notice about the answers you found for each method?

calculate the ending inventory at may 31 using the a fifo b average cost and c lifo 565539

Naab Inc. uses a periodic inventory system. Its records show the following for the month of May, in which 78 units were sold.

Date

Explanation

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

May 1

Inventory

30

$ 9

$ 270

May15

Purchase

25

10

250

May 24

Purchase

40

11

440

Total

95

$ 960

Instructions

Calculate the ending inventory at May 31 using the (a) FIFO, (b) average cost, and (c) LIFO methods.(For average cost, round the average unit cost to three decimal places.) Prove the amount allocated to cost of goods sold under each method.

which inventory method fifo or specific identification do you recommend that discoun 565540

On December 1, Discount Electronics has three DVD players left in stock. All are identical, all are priced to sell at $85. One of the three DVD players left in stock, with serial #1012, was purchased on June 1 at a cost of $52. Another, with serial #1045, was purchased on November 1 for $48. The last player, serial #1056, was purchased on November 30 for $43.

Instructions

(a) Calculate the cost of goods sold using the FIFO periodic inventory method assuming that two of the three players were sold by the end of December, Discount Electronic’s year end.

(b) If Discount Electronics used the specific identification method instead of the FIFO method, how might it alter its earnings by “selectively choosing” which particular players to sell to the two customers? What would Discount’s cost of goods sold be if the company wished to minimize earnings? Maximize earnings?

(c) Which inventory method, FIFO or specific identification, do you recommend that Discount use? Explain why.

explain why the average cost is not 6 565541

Kiser Company reports the following for the month of June.

Date

Explanation

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

June 1

Inventory

125

$ 5

$ 625

June 12

Purchase

375

6

2,250

June 23

Purchase

500

7

3,500

June 30

Inventory

200

Instructions

(a) Compute the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under (1) FIFO, (2) LIFO, and (3) average cost.

(b) Which costing method gives the highest ending inventory? The highest cost of goods sold? Why?

(c) How do the average cost values for ending inventory and cost of goods sold relate to ending inventory and cost of goods sold for FIFO and LIFO?

(d) Explain why the average cost is not $6.

determine net income under each approach assume a 30 tax rate 565542

The following comparative information is available for Public Company for 2010.

LIFO

FIFO

Sales

$83,000

83,000

Cost of goods sold

38,000

29,000

Operating expenses
(including depreciation)

27,000

27,000

Depreciation

10,000

10,000

Cash paid for inventory purchases

34,000

34,000

Instructions

(a) Determine net income under each approach. Assume a 30% tax rate.

(b) Determine net cash provided by operating activities under each approach. Assume that all sales were on a cash basis and that Income taxes and operating expenses, other than depreciation, were on a cash basis.

(c) Calculate the quality of earnings ratio under each approach and explain your findings.

what amount should be reported on lebo camera shop rsquo s financial statements assu 565543

Lebo Camera Shop Inc. uses the lower of cost or market basis for its inventory. The following data are available at December 31.

Cameras

Units

Cost/Unit

Market
Value/Unit

Minolta

5

$ 175

$ 160

Canon

7

145

152

Light Meters

Vivitar

12

125

119

Kodak

10

120

135

Instructions

What amount should be reported on Lebo Camera Shop’s financial statements, assuming the lower of cost or market rule is applied?

calculate the inventory turnover ratio days in inventory and gross profit rate for p 565544

This information is available for PepsiCo, Inc. for 2004, 2005, and 2006.

(in millions)

2004

2,005

2,006

Beginning inventory

$ 1,412

$ 1,541

$ 1,693

Ending inventory

1,541

1,693

1,926

Cost of goods sold

12,674

14,176

15,762

Sales

29,261

32,562

35,137

Instructions

Calculate the inventory turnover ratio, days in inventory, and gross profit rate for PepsiCo. Inc. for 2004, 2005, and 2006. Comment on any trends.

compute the correct cost of goods sold for each year 565548

Boles Hardware reported cost of goods sold as follows.

2010

2,009

Beginning inventory

$ 30,000

20,000

Cost of goods purchased

175,000

164,000

Cost of goods available for sale

205,000

184,000

Ending inventory

37,000

30,000

Cost of goods sold

$168,000

154,000

Boles made two errors:

1. 2009 ending inventory was overstated by $6,000.

2. 2010 ending inventory was understated by $3,000.

Instructions

Compute the correct cost of goods sold for each year.

prepare correct income statement data for the 2 years 565549

Notson Company reported these income statement data for a 2 year period.

2010

$2,009

Sales

$250,000

210,000

Beginning inventory

40,000

34,000

Cost of goods purchased

202,000

173,000

Cost of goods available for sale

242,000

207,000

Ending inventory

55,000

40,000

Cost of goods sold

187,000

167,000

Gross profit

$ 63,000

43,000

Notson Company uses a periodic inventory system. The inventories at January 1, 2009, and December 31, 2010, are correct. However, the ending inventory at December 31, 2009, is overstated by $10,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare correct income statement data for the 2 years.

(b) What is the cumulative effect of the inventory error on total gross profit for the 2 years?

(c) Explain in a letter to the president of Notson Company what has happened—that is, the nature of the error and its effect on the financial statements.

prepare the journal entries to record the transactions listed above on the books of 565441

This information relates to Prophet Co.

1

On April 5 purchased merchandise from Lombard Company for $25,000, terms 2/10,n/30.

2

On April 6 paid freight costs of $900 on merchandise purchased from Lombard.

3

On April 7 purchased equipment on account for $30,000.

4

On April 8 returned some of April 5 merchandise to Lombard Company which cost$3,600.

5

On April 15 paid the amount due to Lombard Company in full.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions listed above on the books of Prophet Co. Prophet Co. uses a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Assume that Prophet Co. paid the balance due to Lombard Company on May 4 instead of April 15. Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.

calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate 565444

Presented below is information for Yates Co. for the month of January 2010.

Cost of goods sold

$212,000

Rent expense

$32,000

Freight out

$7,000

Sales discounts

$8,000

Insurance expense

$12,000

Sales returns and allowances

17,000

Salary expense

62,000

Sales

$370,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement using the format presented on page 239. Assume a 25% tax rate.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate.

prepare a multiple step income statement 565446

In its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010, Maris Company reported the following condensed data.

Administrative expenses

$435,000

Selling expenses

$490,000

Cost of goods sold

$987,000

Loss on sale of equipment

83,500

Interest expense

68,000

Net sales

$2,050,000

Interest revenue

65,000

Income tax expense

$20,000

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and gross profit rate.

(c) In 2009 Maris had a profit margin ratio of 5%. Is the decline in 2010 a cause for concern?

calculate the gross profit rate and the profit margin ratio and explain what each me 565447

In its income statement for the year ended June 30, 2007, The Clorox Company reported the following condensed data (dollars in millions).

Selling and
administrative expenses

$642

Research and
development expense

$108

Net sales

$4,847

Income tax expense

247

Interest expense

113

Other expense

$11

Advertising expense

474

Cost of goods sold

$2,756

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement.

(b) Calculate the gross profit rate and the profit margin ratio and explain what each means.

(c) Assume the marketing department has presented a plan to increase advertising expenses by $340 million. It expects this plan to result in an increase in both net sales and cost of goods sold of 25%. Redo parts (a) and (b) and discuss whether this plan has merit. (Assume a tax rate of 35%, and round all amounts to whole dollars.)

prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of emley co us 565451

This information relates to Emley Co.

1. On April 5 purchased merchandise from Hatcher Company for $25,000, terms 2/10, net/30.

2. On April 6 paid freight costs of $900 on merchandise purchased from Hatcher Company.

3. On April 7 purchased equipment on account for $30,000.

4. On April 8 returned some of the April 5 merchandise to Hatcher Company which cost $3,600.

5. On April 15 paid the amount due to Hatcher Company in full.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Emley Co. using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Assume that Emley Co. paid the balance due to Hatcher Company on May 4 instead of April 15. Prepare the journal entry to record this payment.

calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate assume operating expense 565452

Stein Hardware Store completed the following merchandising transactions in the month of May. At the beginning of May, Stein’s ledger showed Cash of $8,000 and Common Stock of $8,000.

May

1

Purchased merchandise on account from Hilton Wholesale Supply for
$8,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

2

Sold merchandise on account for $4,400, terms 3/10, n/30. The cost of
the merchandise sold was $3,300.

5

Received credit from Hilton Wholesale Supply for merchandise return
$200.

9

Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on
May 2.

10

Paid Hilton Wholesale Supply in full, less discount.

11

Purchased supplies for cash $900.

12

Purchased merchandise for cash $2,700.

15

Received $230 refund for return of poor quality merchandise from supplier
on cash purchase.

17

Purchased merchandise from Northern Distributors for $2,500, terms
2/10, n/30.

19

Paid freight on May 17 purchase $250.

24

Sold merchandise for cash $5,400. The cost of the merchandise sold
was $4,020.

25

Purchased merchandise from Toolware Inc. for $800, terms 3/10, n/30.

27

Paid Northern Distributors in full, less discount.

29

Made refunds to cash customers for returned merchandise $124. The
returned merchandise had cost $90.

31

Sold merchandise on account for $1,280, terms n/30. The cost of the
merchandise sold was $830.

Stein Hardware’s chart of accounts includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Merchandise Inventory, Supplies, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales, Sales Returns and Allowances, Sales Discounts, and Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Post the transactions to T accounts. Be sure to enter the beginning cash and common stock balances.

(c) Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the month of May 2010.

(d) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate. (Assume operating expenses were $1,400.)

journalize the transactions for the month of june for goldenrod warehouse using a pe 565453

Goldenrod Warehouse distributes hardback books to retail stores and extends credit terms of 2/10, n/30 to all of its customers. During the month of June the following merchandising transactions occurred.

June

1

Purchased books on account for $960 (including freight) from Barnum
Publishers, terms 2/10, n/30.

3

Sold books on account to the Flint Hills bookstore for $1,200. The cost
of the merchandise sold was $720.

6

Received $60 credit for books returned to Barnum Publishers.

9

Paid Barnum Publishers in full.

15

Received payment in full from the Flint Hills bookstore.

17

Sold books on account to Town Crier Bookstore for $1,400. The cost
of the merchandise sold was $840.

20

Purchased books on account for $720 from Good Book Publishers,
terms 1/15, n/30.

24

Received payment in full from Town Crier Bookstore.

26

Paid Good Book Publishers in full.

28

Sold books on account to HomeTown Bookstore for $1,300. The cost
of the merchandise sold was $780.

30

Granted HomeTown Bookstore $150 credit for books returned costing
$90.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions for the month of June for Goldenrod Warehouse, using a perpetual inventory system.

prepare a trial balance on april 30 2010 565454

At the beginning of the current season on April 1, the ledger of Wichita Pro Shop showed Cash $2,500; Merchandise Inventory $3,500; and Common Stock $6,000. The following transactions were completed during April 2010.

Apr.

5

Purchased golf bags, clubs, and balls on account from Roland Co.
$1,500, terms 3/10, n/60.

7

Paid freight on Roland purchase $80.

9

Received credit from Roland Co. for merchandise returned $200.

10

Sold merchandise on account to members $910, terms n/30. The merchandise
sold had a cost of $620.

12

Purchased golf shoes, sweaters, and other accessories on account from
Eagle Sportswear $830, terms 1/10, n/30.

14

Paid Roland Co. in full.

17

Received credit from Eagle Sportswear for merchandise returned $30.

20

Made sales on account to members $810, terms n/30. The cost of the
merchandise sold was $550.

21

Paid Eagle Sportswear in full.

27

Granted an allowance to members for clothing that did not fit properly
$60.

30

Received payments on account from members $1,100.

The chart of accounts for the pro shop includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Merchandise Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales, Sales Returns and Allowances, and Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.

(d) Prepare an income statement through gross profit.

calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate 565455

Lowry Department Store is located in midtown Metropolis. During the past several years, net income has been declining because suburban shopping centers have been attracting business away from city areas. At the end of the company’s fiscal year on November 30, 2010, these accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Accounts Payable

$23,300

Accounts Receivable

$17,200

Accumulated Depreciation—Delivery Equipment

20,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Store Equipment

38,000

Cash

8,000

Common Stock

35,000

Cost of Goods Sold

633,300

Delivery Expense

6,200

Delivery Equipment

57,000

Depreciation Expense—Delivery Equipment

4,000

Depreciation Expense—Store Equipment

9,500

Dividends

12,000

Gain on Sale of Equipment

2,000

Income Tax Expense

10,000

Insurance Expense

9,000

Interest Expense

5,000

Merchandise Inventory

26,200

Notes Payable

47,500

Prepaid Insurance

6,000

Property Tax Expense

3,500

Property Taxes Payable

3,500

Rent Expense

34,000

Retained Earnings

14,200

Salaries Expense

117,000

Sales

904,000

Salaries Payable

6,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

20,000

Store Equipment

105,000

Utilities Expense

10,600

Additional data: Notes payable are due in 2014.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate.

(c) The vice president of marketing and the director of human resources have developed a proposal whereby the company would compensate the sales force on a strictly commission basis using 20% of net sales. Given the increased incentive, they expect net sales to increase by 15%. As a result, they estimate that gross profit will increase by $37,605 and operating expenses by $62,595. Compute the expected new net income.

prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended november 30 2010 565456

At the end of Kane Department Store’s fiscal year on November 30, 2010, these accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Freight in

$5,060

Merchandise Inventory (beginning)

$42,200

Purchases

616,000

Purchase Discounts

7,000

Purchase Returns and Allowances

6,760

Sales

904,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

20,000

Additional facts:

1. Merchandise inventory on November 30, 2010, is $36,200.

2. Note that Kane Department Store uses a periodic system.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended November 30, 2010.

prepare an income statement through gross profit assuming merchandise inventory on h 565457

At the beginning of the current season on April 1, the ledger of Wichita Pro Shop showed Cash $2,500; Merchandise Inventory $3,500; and Common Stock $6,000. These Transactions Occurred during April 2010.

Apr.

5

Purchased golf bags, clubs, and balls on account from Roland Co.$1,500, terms 3/10, n/60.

7

Paid freight on Roland Co. purchases $80.

9

Received credit from Roland Co. for merchandise returned $200.

10

Sold merchandise on account to members $910, terms n/30.

12

Purchased golf shoes, sweaters, and other accessories on account from
Eagle Sportswear $830, terms 1/10, n/30.

14

Paid Roland Co. in full.

17

Received credit from Eagle Sportswear for merchandise returned $30.

20

Made sales on account to members $810, terms n/30.

21

Paid Eagle Sportswear in full.

27

Granted credit to members for clothing that did not fit properly $60.

30

Received payments on account from members $1,100.

The chart of accounts for the pro shop includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Merchandise Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales, Sales Returns and Allowances, Purchases, Purchase Returns and Allowances, Purchase Discounts, and Freight in.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.

(d) Prepare an income statement through Gross Profit, assuming merchandise inventory on hand at April 30 is $4,655.

calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate assume operating expense 565458

Cordell Distributing Company completed these merchandising transactions in the month of April. At the beginning of April, the ledger of Cordell showed Cash of $9,000 and Common Stock of $9,000.

Apr.

2

Purchased merchandise on account from Lang Supply Co. $8,300, terms
2/10, n/30.

4

Sold merchandise on account $6,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The cost of the
merchandise sold was $3,700.

5

Paid $200 freight on April 4 sale.

6

Received credit from Lang Supply Co. for merchandise returned $300.

11

Paid Lang Supply Co. in full, less discount.

13

Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on April 4.

14

Purchased merchandise for cash $4,700.

16

Received refund from supplier for returned merchandise on cash purchase
of April 14, $500.

18

Purchased merchandise from Great Plains Distributors $5,500, terms 2/10,
n/30.

20

Paid freight on April 18 purchase $100.

23

Sold merchandise for cash $8,300. The cost of the merchandise sold was
$5,820.

26

Purchased merchandise for cash $2,300.

27

Paid Great Plains Distributors in full, less discount.

29

Made refunds to cash customers for returned merchandise $180. The returned
merchandise had a cost of $120.

30

Sold merchandise on account $3,980, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise
sold was $2,500.

Cordell Distributing Company’s chart of accounts includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Merchandise Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales, Sales Returns and Allowances, Sales Discounts, Cost of Goods Sold, and Freight out.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions.

(b) Post the transactions to T accounts. Be sure to enter the beginning cash and common stock balances.

(c) Prepare the income statement through gross profit for the month of April 2010.

(d) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate. (Assume operating expenses were $2,050.)

journalize the transactions for the month of july for travelers warehouse using a pe 565459

Travelers Warehouse distributes suitcases to retail stores and extends credit terms of 1/10, n/30 to all of its customers. During the month of July the following merchandising transactions occurred.

July

1

Purchased suitcases on account for $2,700 from Valise Manufacturers,
terms 2/15, n/30.

3

Sold suitcases on account to The Emporium for $2,500. The cost of the
merchandise sold was $1,500.

9

Paid Valise Manufacturers in full.

12

Received payment in full from The Emporium.

17

Sold suitcases on account to Bon Voyage for $2,000. The cost of the merchandise
sold was $1,200.

18

Purchased suitcases on account for $1,800 (including freight) from Vektek
Manufacturers, terms 1/10, n/30.

20

Received $300 credit for suitcases returned to Vektek Manufacturers.

21

Received payment in full from Bon Voyage.

22

Sold suitcases on account to Run Around for $3,120. The cost of the merchandise
sold was $1,800.

30

Paid Vektek Manufacturers in full.

31

Granted Run Around $260 credit for suitcases returned costing $150.

Instructions

Journalize the transactions for the month of July for Travelers Warehouse, using a perpetual inventory system.

prepare a trial balance on april 30 2010 565460

At the beginning of the current season, the ledger of Colorado Tennis Shop showed Cash $2,500; Merchandise Inventory $1,700; and Common Stock $4,200. The following transactions were completed during April.

Apr.

4

Purchased racquets and balls from Helton Co. $980, terms 2/10, n/30.

6

Paid freight on Helton Co. purchase $60.

8

Sold merchandise to members $900, terms n/30. The merchandise sold
cost $600.

10

Received credit of $130 from Helton Co. for damaged racquets that
were returned.

11

Purchased tennis shoes from No Fault for cash $300.

13

Paid Helton Co. in full.

14

Purchased tennis shirts and shorts from Renfro Sportswear $900, terms
3/10, n/60.

15

Received cash refund of $50 from No Fault for damaged merchandise
that was returned.

17

Paid freight on Renfro Sportswear purchase $30.

18

Sold merchandise to members $660, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise
sold was $440.

20

Received $500 in cash from members in settlement of their accounts.

21

Paid Renfro Sportswear in full.

27

Granted an allowance of $30 to members for tennis clothing that did
not fit properly.

30

Received cash payments on account from members $350.

The chart of accounts for the tennis shop includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Merchandise Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales, Sales Returns and Allowances, and Cost of Goods Sold.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post theApril transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.

(d) Prepare an income statement through gross profit.

calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate 565461

Flanagin Department Store is located near the Crystal Shopping Mall. At the end of the company”s fiscal year on December 31, 2010, the following accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance. Accounts Payable 73,300 Accounts Receivable $50,300 Accumulated Depreciation—Building $52,500 Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment 42,600 Building 190,000 Cash 28,000 Common Stock 140,000 Cost of Goods Sold 418,000 Depreciation Expense—Building 10,400 Depreciation Expense—Equipment 13,000 Dividends 15,000 Equipment 100,000 Gain on Sale of Equipment 4,300 Income Tax Expense 15,000 Insurance Expense 8,400 Interest Expense 7,000 Interest Payable 2,000 Merchandise Inventory 53,000 Mortgage Payable 80,000 Office Salaries Expense 37,000 Prepaid Insurance 2,400 Property Taxes Payable 4,800 Property Taxes Expense 6,200 Retained Earnings 19,200 Sales Salaries Expense 75,500 Sales 626,000 Sales Salaries Payable 3,500 Sales Returns and Allowances 8,000 Utilities Expense 11,000 Additional data: $20,000 of the mortgage payable is due for payment next year. Instructions (a) Prepare a multiple step income statement, a retained earnings statement, and a classified balance sheet. (b) Calculate the profit margin ratio and the gross profit rate. (c) The vice president of marketing and the director of human resources have developed a proposal whereby the company would compensate the sales force on a strictly commission basis using 15% of net sales. Given the increased incentive, they expect net sales to increase by 25%. As a result, they estimate that gross profit will increase by $50,500 and operating expenses by $27,800. Compute the expected new net income.

prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended december 31 2010 565462

At the end of Eisenhaver Department Store’s fiscal year on December 31, 2010, these accounts appeared in its adjusted trial balance.

Freight in

5,600

Merchandise Inventory (beginning)

$40,500

Purchases

$456,000

Purchase Discounts

12,000

Purchase Returns and Allowances

6,400

Sales

707,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

8,000

Additional facts:

1. Merchandise inventory on December 31, 2010, is $71,000.

2. Note that Eisenhaver Department Store uses a periodic system.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement through gross profit for the year ended December 31, 2010.

calculate cost of goods sold for each of the 2009 2010 and 2011 fiscal years 565463

Barbara Brislen operates a clothing retail operation. She purchases all merchandise inventory on credit and uses a perpetual inventory system. The accounts payable account is used for recording inventory purchases only; all other current liabilities areaccrued in separate accounts. You are provided with the following selected information for the fiscal years 2008, 2009, 2010, and 2011.

2008

2009

2010

2011

Inventory (ending)

$13,000

$11,300

$16,400

$12,200

Accounts payable (ending)

17,000

Sales

$225,700

227,600

224,000

Purchases of merchandise

inventory on account

146,000

155,700

$141,000

Cash payments to suppliers

$135,000

$159,000

127,000

Instructions

(a) Calculate cost of goods sold for each of the 2009, 2010, and 2011 fiscal years.

(b) Calculate the gross profit for each of the 2009, 2010, and 2011 fiscal years.

(c) Calculate the ending balance of accounts payable for each of the 2009, 2010, and 2011 fiscal years.

(d) The vice presidents of sales, marketing, production, and finance are discussing the company’s results with the CEO. They note that sales declined in fiscal 2011. They wonder whether that means that profitability, as measured by the gross profit rate, necessarily also declined. Explain, calculating the gross profit rate for each fiscal year to help support your answer.

prepare a trial balance on april 30 2010 565464

At the beginning of the current season, the ledger of Colorado Tennis Shop showed Cash $2,500; Merchandise Inventory $1,700; and Common Stock $4,200. The following transactions were completed during April.

Apr.

4

Purchased racquets and balls from Helton Co. $980, terms 2/10, n/30.

6

Paid freight on Helton Co. purchase $60.

8

Sold merchandise to members $900, terms n/30.

10

Received credit of $130 from Helton Co. for damaged racquets that
were returned.

11

Purchased tennis shoes from No Fault for cash $300.

13

Paid Helton Co. in full.

14

Purchased tennis shirts and shorts from Renfro Sportswear $900, terms
3/10, n/60.

15

Received cash refund of $50 from No Fault for damaged merchandise
that was returned.

17

Paid freight on Renfro Sportswear purchase $30.

18

Sold merchandise to members $660, terms n/30.

20

Received $500 in cash from members in settlement of their accounts.

21

Paid Renfro Sportswear in full.

27

Granted an allowance of $30 to members for tennis clothing that did
not fit properly.

30

Received cash payments on account from members $350.

The chart of accounts for the tennis shop includes Cash, Accounts Receivable, Merchandise Inventory, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Sales, Sales Returns and Allowances, Purchases, Purchase Returns and Allowances, Purchase Discounts, and Freight in.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the April transactions using a periodic inventory system.

(b) Using T accounts, enter the beginning balances in the ledger accounts and post the April transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance on April 30, 2010.

(d) Prepare an income statement through Gross Profit, assuming merchandise inventory on hand at April 30 is $2,706.

prepare an adjusted trial balance 565465

On December 1, 2010, Sleezer Distributing Company had the following account balances.

Debits

Credits

Cash

$7,300

Accumulated Depreciation

$2,200

Accounts Receivable

5,600

Accounts Payable

4,600

Merchandise Inventory

12,000

Salaries Payable

1,000

Supplies

1,200

Common stock

15,000

Equipment

22,000

Retained Earnings

25,300

$48,100

$48,100

During December the company completed the following summary transactions.

Dec.

6

Paid $1,600 for salaries due employees, of which $600 is for December
and $1,000 is for November salaries payable.

8

Received $1,800 cash from customers in payment of account (no discount
allowed).

10

Sold merchandise for cash $6,000. The cost of the merchandise sold
was $4,000.

13

Purchased merchandise on account from Helm Co. $9,000, terms 2/10,
n/30.

15

Purchased supplies for cash $2,000.

18

Sold merchandise on account $12,000, terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of
the merchandise sold was $8,000.

20

Paid salaries $1,800.

23

Paid Helm Co. in full, less discount.

27

Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on
December 18.

Adjustment data:

1. Accrued salaries payable $600.

2. Depreciation $300 per month.

3. Supplies on hand $1,500.

4. Income tax due and unpaid at December 31 is $200.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the December transactions.

(b) Enter the December 1 balances in the ledger T accounts and post the December transactions.

Use Cost of Goods Sold, Depreciation Expense, Salaries Expense, Sales, Sales Discounts, Supplies Expense, Income Tax Expense, and Income Tax Payable.

(c) Journalize and post adjusting entries.

(d) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(e) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for December and a classified balance sheet at December 31.

what concerns might you have in relying on this comparison 565469

Recently it was announced that two giant French retailers, Carrefour SA and Promodes SA, would merge. A headline in the Wall Street Journal blared, “French Retailers Create New Wal Mart Rival.” While Wal Mart’s total sales would still exceed those of the combined company, Wal Mart’s international sales are far less than those of the combined company. This is a serious concern for Wal Mart, since its primary opportunity for future growth lies outside of the United States. Below are basic financial data for the combined corporation (in euros) and Wal Mart (in U.S. dollars). Even though their results are presented in different currencies, by employing ratios we can make some basic comparisons.

Carrefour
(in millions)

Wal Mart
(in millions)

Sales

euros 70,486

$256,329

Cost of goods sold

$54,630

198,747

Net income

1,738

9,054

Total assets

39,063

104,912

Current assets

14,521

34,421

Current liabilities

13,660

37,418

Total liabilities

29,434

61,289

Instructions

Compare the two companies by answering the following.

(a) Calculate the gross profit rate for each of the companies, and discuss their relative abilities to control cost of goods sold.

(b) Calculate the profit margin ratio, and discuss the companies’ relative profitability.

(c) Calculate the current ratio and debt to total assets ratios for the two companies, and discuss their relative liquidity and solvency.

(d) What concerns might you have in relying on this comparison?

merck spends 4 8 billion during the current year on research to identify develop and 565378

Merck spends $4.8 billion during the current year on research to identify, develop, and test new drugs to combat diseases and illnesses. This example differs in that Merck (1) incurs the costs internally, and (2) does not acquire a completed asset. Merck would not engage in research if it did not expect future benefits. U.S. GAAP requires firms to expense research and development (R&D) costs in the period incurred. This requirement rests on reasoning that the costs do not satisfy the second criterion for asset recognition because the firm cannot measure the expected future benefits with sufficient reliability. 4 The difficulty is identifying the portion of each year’s expenditure that leads to future benefits and the portion that does not. Thus, Merck recognizes the $4.8 billion as an expense of the current year.

International Accounting Standard No. 38 treats research costs the same as U.S. GAAP but treats development costs as assets.5 when a research project reaches the stage of technical feasibility and the firm intends to continue developing the technology for ultimate use or sale, the research project moves from the research phase to the development phase. Thus, under IFRS, reliable measurement of the cost of future benefits commences at the development phase. A later section illustrates the difference in accounting for development costs under U.S. GAAP and IFRS.

ipr d appears as an asset on the balance sheet only when it arises from a business c 565380

eBay recognized an acquired asset for developed technologies. Assume that Skype Technologies had incurred costs to develop computer software but that the software had not reached the stage of technological feasibility at the time of the acquisition (an example of in process research and development, or, IPR&D). For many technology and pharmaceutical firms, a large portion of their value to an acquirer might relate to IPR&D. Firms recognize IPR&D acquired in a business combination that meets the separability criterion as an asset and measured initially at fair value, even though the firm that developed the IPR&D expensed the costs as they were incurred.9 IPR&D appears as an asset on the balance sheet only when it arises from a business combination.

calculating the acquisition cost of fixed assets jensen company purchased land with 565381

Calculating the acquisition cost of fixed assets. Jensen Company purchased land with a building as the site for a new plant it planned to construct. The company received bids from several independent contractors for demolition of the old building and construction of the new one. It rejected all bids and undertook demolition and construction using company labor, facilities, and equipment.

Jensen Company debited or credited amounts for all transactions relating to these properties to a single account, Construction in Process. Descriptions of various items in the Construction in Process account appear below. At the completion of construction, Jensen Company will remove all amounts in the Construction in Process account and close that account. It will reclassify the amounts into the following accounts:

1. Land account.

2. Building account.

3. Revenue, gain, expense, or loss account.

4. Some balance sheet account other than Land or Building

Reclassify the amounts of the following transactions into one or more of these accounts. If you use 4 (some other balance sheet account), indicate the nature of the account.

a. Cost of land, including old building.

b. Legal fees paid to bring about purchase of land and to transfer its title.

c. Invoice cost of materials and supplies used in construction of the new building.

d. Direct labor and materials costs incurred in demolishing the old building.

e. Direct costs of excavating raw land to prepare it for the foundation of the new building.

f. Discounts earned for prompt payment of item c.

g. Interest for the year on notes issued to finance construction.

h. Amounts equivalent to interest on Jensen Company’s own funds that it used in construction but that it would have invested in marketable securities if it had used an independent contractor; it debited the amount to Construction in Process and credited Interest Revenue so that the cost of the real estate would be comparable to the cost if it had purchased the building from an independent contractor.

i. Depreciation during the construction period on trucks used both in construction and in other company operations.

j. Proceeds of sale of materials salvaged from the old buildings; the firm debited these to Cash and credited Construction in Process.

k. Cost of building permits.

l. Salaries of certain corporate engineering executives; these represent costs for both Salary Expense and Construction in Process, with the portion debited to Construction in Process representing an estimate of the portion of the time spent during the year on planning and construction activities for the new building.

m. Payments for property taxes on the plant site (its former owner owed these taxes, but Jensen Company assumed responsibility to pay them).

n. Payments for property taxes on plant site during construction period.

o. Insurance premiums to cover workers engaged in demolition and construction activities; the insurance policy requires the company to pay the first $5,000 of damages from any accident.

p. Cost of injury claims for $2,000 paid by the company because the amount was less than the deductible amount in the policy.

q. Costs of new machinery to be installed in the new building.

r. Installation costs for the machinery in item q.

s. Profit on construction of the new building (computed as the difference between the lowest independent contractor’s bid and the actual construction cost); the firm debited this to Construction in Process and credited Construction Revenue.

what is the depreciation charge for the first year 565387

Adjustments for changes in estimates. Central States Electric Company constructs a nuclear power plant at a cost of $200 million. It estimates the service life of the plant to be 50 years and the cost to dismantle and retire the asset from service to be $20 million. These “decommissioning” costs include the costs to dismantle the plant and dispose of the radioactive materials. The firm computes and charges straight line depreciation once per year, at year end. During the company’s 11th year of operating the plant, Congress enacts new regulations governing nuclear waste disposal. The estimated decommissioning costs increase from $20 million to $24 million. During the 31st year of operation, the firm revises the estimated service life of the plant to 60 years in total.

a. What is the depreciation charge for the first year?

b. What is the depreciation charge for the 11th year?

c. What is the depreciation charge for the 31st year?

what costs should purdy company record in the accounts for the two trucks 565388

Distinguishing repairs from improvements. Purdy Company acquired two used trucks from Foster Company. Although the trucks were not identical, they both cost $15,000. Purdy knew when it negotiated the purchase price that the first truck required extensive engine repair, estimated to cost $4,000. The repair was made the week after acquisition and actually cost $4,200. Purdy Company thought the second truck was in normal operating condition when it negotiated the purchase price but discovered, after taking possession of the truck, that it required new bearings. The firm made this repair, costing $4,200, during the week after acquisition.

a. What costs should Purdy Company record in the accounts for the two trucks?

b. If the amounts recorded in part a are different, distinguish between the two repairs.

calculate the amounts that outback steakhouse should include in the land account and 565400

Calculating acquisition costs of long lived assets. Outback Steakhouse opened a new restaurant on the site of an existing building. It paid the owner $260,000 for the land and building, of which it attributes $52,000 to the land and $208,000 to the building. Outback incurred legal costs of $12,600 to conduct a title search and prepare the necessary legal documents for the purchase. It then paid $35,900 to renovate the building to make it suitable for Outback”s use. Property and liability insurance on the land and building for the first year was $12,000, of which $4,000 applied to the period during renovation and $8,000 applied to the period after opening. Property taxes on the land and building for the first year totaled $15,000, of which $5,000 applied to the period during renovation and $10,000 applied to the period after opening. Calculate the amounts that Outback Steakhouse should include in the Land account and in the Building account.

management believes that plant asset accounts should include the following additiona 565402

Cost of self constructed assets. Assume that Bolton Company purchased a plot of land for $90,000 as a factory site. A small office building sits on the plot, conservatively appraised at $20,000. The company plans to use the office building after making some modifications and renovations (item (4) below). The company had plans drawn for a factory and received bids for its construction. It rejected all bids and decided to construct the factory itself. Management believes that plant asset accounts should include the following additional items:

(1)

Materials and Supplies for Factory Building

$200,000

(2)

Excavation of Land

12,000

(3)

Labor on Construction of Factory Building

140,000

(4)

Cost of Remodeling Old Building into Office Building

13,000

(5)

Interest Paid on Cash Borrowed by Bolton to Construct Factorya

6,000

(6)

Interest Forgone on Bolton’s Own Cash Used

9,000

(7)

Cash Discounts on Materials Purchased for Factory Building

7,000

(8)

Supervision by Management on Factory Building

10,000

(9)

Workers’ Compensation Insurance Premiums on Labor in (3)

8,000

(10)

Payment of Claims for Injuries During Construction of Factory Building Not Covered by Insurance

3,000

(11)

Clerical and Other Expenses on Construction of Factory Building

8,000

(12)

Paving of Streets and Sidewalks

5,000

(13)

Architect’s Plans and Specifications of Factory Building

4,000

(14)

Legal Costs of Conveying Land

2,000

(15)

Legal Costs of Injury Claim During Construction of Factory Building

1,000

(16)

Income Credited to Retained Earnings Account (the difference between the forgone cost and the lowest contractor’s bid)

11,000

aThis interest is the entire amount of interest paid during the construction period.

Show in detail the items Bolton should include in the following accounts: Land, Factory Building, Office Building, and Site Improvements. Explain the reason for excluding any of these items from the four accounts.

indicate the accounting treatment for each of the following expenditures 565403

Cost of self developed product. Duck Vehicle Manufacturing Company incurs various costs in developing a new, amphibious vehicle for use in providing tours on land and water. Indicate the accounting treatment for each of the following expenditures.

(1)

Salaries of Company Engineers to Design the New Vehicle

$325,000

(2)

Cost of Prototype of New Vehicle Built by External Contractor

278,200

(3)

Cost of Supplies and Salaries of Personnel to Test Prototype

68,900

(4)

Fees Paid to Environmental Protection Agency to Test Emissions of New Vehicle

15,200

(5)

Legal Fees Incurred to Register and Establish a Patent on the New Vehicle

12,500

(6)

Cost of Castings, or Molds, for Metal Parts of New Vehicle

46,000

(7)

Cost of Local Permits to Commence Manufacturing the New Vehicle

5,000

(8)

Cost of Manufacturing the First Vehicle for a Customer

167,600

the tax law allows firms to ignore salvage value in calculating depreciation 565406

Calculations for various depreciation methods. On January 1, 2008, Luck Delivery Company acquired a new truck for $30,000. It estimated the truck to have a useful life of five years and no salvage value. The company closes its books annually on December 31. Indicate the amount of the depreciation charge for each year of the asset’s life under the following methods:

a. The straight line method.

b. The declining balance method at twice the straight line rate, with a switch to straight line in 2011. The declining balance method multiplies the book value (that is, acquisition cost minus accumulated depreciation) of the asset by a depreciation rate. A depreciation rate of twice the straight line rate equals 2/n, or 2/5 in this case. Because

a firm will never fully depreciate an asset using the declining balance method, firms switch to the straight line method at some time prior to the end of an asset’s useful life, 2011 in this case.

c. The sum of the years’ digits method. The sum of the years’ digits method begins by summing the digits of an asset’s useful life. The sum for a five year asset is 15 (5 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1). The depreciation rate for the first year of useful life is 5/15, for the second year is 4/15, and so forth. The depreciation base is the same as for the straight line method, acquisition cost minus salvage value. Multiplying the depreciation base by the depreciation rate yields the amount of depreciation for each year.

d. The truck belongs to a category of property for tax purposes requiring the following proportions of the asset’s cost to be depreciated each year: 0.20, 0.32, 0.192, 0.115, 0.115, 0.058. (Hint: Charge depreciation for each of six calendar years. These fractions result from assuming one half year of use in the first year, a full year of use in each of the next four years, and a final half year of use in the sixth year.) The tax law allows firms to ignore salvage value in calculating depreciation.

journal entries for revising estimate of life give the journal entries for the follo 565408

Journal entries for revising estimate of life. Give the journal entries for the following selected transactions of Florida Manufacturing Corporation. The company uses the straight line method of calculating depreciation and reports on a December 31 yearend.

a. The firm purchases a cutting machine on November 1, 2008, for $180,000. It estimates that the machine will have a useful life of 12 years and a salvage value of $7,200 at the end of that time. Give the journal entry for the depreciation at December 31, 2008.

b. Record the depreciation for the year ending December 31, 2009.

c. In August 2014 the firm estimates that the machine will probably have a total useful life of 14 years and a $3,840 salvage value. Record the depreciation for the year ending December 31, 2014.

d. The firm sells the machine for $40,000 on March 31, 2019. Record the entries of that date, assuming that the firm records depreciation as indicated in part c.

distinguishing repairs versus betterments disney world experienced damage from a tor 565409

Distinguishing repairs versus betterments. Disney World experienced damage from a tornado at Space Mountain, one of its most popular attractions. It paid $30,200 to replace steel reinforcements to the structure damaged by the tornado, $86,100 for a new roof torn off by the tornado, $26,900 for a new air conditioning system that was housed on the roof, and $12,600 to replace carpeting damaged by water. Disney World estimates that higher quality steel used as replacements added 20% more structural support in terms of weight bearing capacity. The new air conditioning system provides 25% more cooling power than the unit previously installed in the attraction. Compute the amount of these expenses that Disney World should treat as a repair and the amount it should treat as a betterment.

computing the amount of an impairment loss on tangible long lived assets 565410

Computing the amount of an impairment loss on tangible long lived assets. Wildwood Properties owns an apartment building that has a carrying value of $15,000,000 on January 1, 2008. The highway department has decided to construct a new highway near the building, which substantially decreases its attractiveness to tenants. Wildwood Properties estimates that it will now collect rentals from the building of $1,400,000 a year for the next six years and that it will sell the building at the end of that time for $4,000,000.

Wildwood Properties will use the present value of expected cash flows to measure the fair value of the building under U.S. GAAP and the recoverable amount under IFRS. An appropriate interest rate to discount cash flows is 10%. Assume that all cash flows occur at the end of the year. Compute the amount of any impairment loss that Wildwood Properties should recognize under U.S. GAAP and under IFRS.

compute the amount of impairment loss recognized on each of kieran rsquo s property 565411

Computing the amount of impairment loss. Tillis Corporation acquired the assets of Kieran Corporation (Kieran) on January 1, 2006, for $2,400,000. On this date the fair values of the assets of Kieran were as follows: land, $400,000; building, $600,000; equipment, $900,000. On June 15, 2008, a competitor introduced a new product that will likely significantly affect future sales of Kieran’s products. It will also affect the value of Kieran’s property, plant, and equipment because of their specialized nature in producing Kieran’s existing products. The following information relates to the property, plant, and equipment of Kieran on June 15, 2008:

Carrying Value

Undiscounted Cash flows

Fair Value

Land

$ 550,000

$575,000

$550,000

Building.

580,000

600,000

580,000

Equipment

1,200,000

950,000

800,000

The fair value of Kieran as an entity on June 15, 2008, is $2,200,000.

Compute the amount of impairment loss recognized on each of Kieran’s property, plant, and equipment and on goodwill on June 15, 2008, under U.S. GAAP.

present journal entries for each of the following transactions of moon macrosystems 565413

Recording transactions involving tangible and intangible assets. Present journal entries for each of the following transactions of Moon Macrosystems:

a. Acquired computers costing $400,000 and computer software costing $40,000 on January 1, 2006. Moon expects the computers to have a service life of 10 years and $40,000 salvage value. It expects the computer software to have a service life of four years and zero salvage value.

b. Paid $20,000 to install the computers in the office. Paid $10,000 to install and test the computer software.

c. Recorded depreciation and amortization using the straight line method for 2006 and 2007. Moon records a full year of depreciation in the year of acquisition. Treat depreciation and amortization as a period expense.

d. On January 1, 2008, new software offered on the market made the software acquired in part a completely obsolete. Give any required journal entry.

e. On January 2, 2008, Moon revised the depreciable life of the computers to a total of 14 years and the salvage value to $56,000. Give the entry to record depreciation for 2008.

f. On December 31, 2009, Moon sold the computers for $260,000. Give the required journal entries for 2009.

calculate the approximate impact on net income of the change in depreciation policy 565414

Effect on net income of changes in estimates for depreciable assets. American Airlines has $3 billion of assets, including airplanes costing $2.5 billion with net carrying value of $1.6 billion. It earns net income equal to approximately 6% of total assets. American Airlines depreciates its airplanes for financial reporting purposes on a straight line basis over 10 year lives to a salvage value equal to 10% of acquisition cost. American announces a change in depreciation policy; it will use 14 year lives and salvage values equal to 12% of acquisition cost. The airplanes are all four years old. Assume an income tax rate of 35%.

Calculate the approximate impact on net income of the change in depreciation policy. Compute both dollar and percentage effects.

commercial realty corporation leases office space to tenants in boston one of its of 565415

Recognizing and measuring impairment losses. Give the journal entry to recognize an impairment loss, if appropriate, in each of the following cases under U.S. GAAP. If a loss does not qualify as an impairment loss, explain the reason, and indicate the appropriate accounting.

a. Commercial Realty Corporation leases office space to tenants in Boston. One of its office buildings originally cost $80 million and has accumulated depreciation of $20 million. The city of Boston has announced its intention to construct an exit ramp from a nearby expressway on one side of the office building. Rental rates in the building will likely decrease as a result. The expected future undiscounted cash flows from rentals and from disposal of the building decreased from $120 million before the announcement to $50 million afterward. The fair value of the building decreased from $85 million before the announcement to $32 million afterward.

b. Refer to part a. Assume that the undiscounted cash flows totaled $70 million and that the fair value totaled $44 million after the announcement.

c. Medical Services Corporation plans, and then builds, its own office building and clinic. It originally anticipated that the building would cost $15 million. The physicians in charge of overseeing construction had medical practices so busy that they did not closely track costs, which ultimately reached $25 million. The expected future cash flows from using the building total $22 million, and the fair value of the building totals $16 million.

d. Medco Pharmaceuticals acquired New Start Biotechnology two years ago for $40 million. Medco allocated $25 million to a patent held by New Start and $15 million to goodwill. By the end of the current period, Medco has amortized the carrying value of the patent to $20 million. A competitor recently received approval for a biotechnology drug that will reduce the fair value of the patent that Medco acquired from New

Start. The expected future undiscounted cash flows from sales of the patented drug total $18 million, and the fair value of the patent is $12 million. The fair value of the former New Start Biotechnology operation owned by Medco is now $25 million.

e. Chicken Franchisees Inc. acquires franchise rights in the Atlanta area for Chicken Delight Restaurants, a national restaurant chain. The franchise rights originally cost $15 million; since acquisition, Chicken Franchisees has amortized the book value to $10 million. Chicken Delight Restaurants recently received negative publicity because the chickens it delivered to its franchisees contained potentially harmful pesticides. As a result, business has declined. Chicken Franchisees estimates that the future undiscounted cash flows associated with the Chicken Delight name total $6 million and that the franchise rights have fair value of $3 million.

in what sense is policy 1 a conservative policy 565416

Expensing versus capitalizing research and development costs. Pfizer, a pharmaceutical company, plans to spend $90 million on research and development (R&D) at the beginning of each of the next several years to develop new drugs. As a result of the R&D expenditure for a given year, it expects pretax income (not counting R&D expense) to increase by $36 million a year for three years, including the year of the expenditure itself. Pfizer has other pretax income of $30 million per year. The controller of Pfizer is curious about the effect on the financial statements of following one of two accounting policies with respect to R&D expenditures:

(1) Expensing the R&D costs in the year of expenditure (the policy required in the United States).

(2) Capitalizing the R&D costs and amortizing them over three years, including the year of the expenditure itself.

Assume that the company does spend $90 million at the beginning of each of four years and that the planned increase in income occurs. Ignore income tax effects.

a. Prepare a four year condensed summary of income before income taxes, assuming that Pfizer follows policy (1) and expenses R&D costs as incurred.

b. Prepare a four year condensed summary of income before income taxes, assuming that Pfizer follows policy (2) and capitalizes R&D costs, then amortizes them over three years. Also compute the amount of Deferred R&D Costs (asset) appearing on the balance sheet at the end of each of the four years.

c. In what sense is policy (1) a conservative policy?

d. Ascertain the effect on income before income taxes and on the balance sheet if Pfizer continues to spend $90 million each year and the pretax income effects continue as in the first four years.

compute a cost of goods purchased and b cost of goods sold 565438

Grand Lake Corporation’s accounting records show the following at yearend December 31, 2010:

Purchase Discounts

$5,700

Beginning Inventory

$31,720

Freight in

$8,400

Ending Inventory

$27,950

Freight out

$11,100

Purchase Returns

3,200

Purchases

162,500

Assuming that Grand Lake Corporation uses the periodic system, compute (a) cost of goods purchased and (b) cost of goods sold.

prepare the journal entry to record the receipt of payment on january 2 565439

The following transactions are for Mack Company.

1. On December 3 Mack Company sold $500,000 of merchandise to Pickert Co., terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $320,000.

2. On December 8 Pickert Co. was granted an allowance of $28,000 for merchandise purchased on December 3.

3. On December 13 Mack Company received the balance due from Pickert Co.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record these transactions on the books of Mack Company.

Mack uses a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Assume that Mack Company received the balance due from Pickert Co. on January 2 of the following year instead of December 13. Prepare the journal entry to record the receipt of payment on January 2.

cjournalize the september transactions 565440

Assume that on September 1 Office Depot had an inventory that included a variety of calculators. The company uses a perpetual inventory system. During September these transactions occurred.

Sept.

6

Purchased calculators from Green Box Co. at a total cost of $1,620,
terms n/30.

9

Paid freight of $50 on calculators purchased from Green Box Co.

10

Returned calculators to Green Box Co. for $38 credit because they did
not meet specifications.

12

Sold calculators costing $520 for $690 to University Book Store, terms
n/30.

14

Granted credit of $45 to University Book Store for the return of one
calculator that was not ordered. The calculator cost $34.

20

Sold calculators costing $570 for $760 to Campus Card Shop, terms
n/30.

Instructions

Journalize the September transactions.

compute the amount of the cost of goods sold that came from the purchases of the per 564908

Comprehensive The following information for 2007 is available for the Marino Company:

1. The beginning inventory is $100,000.

2. Purchases of $300,000 were made on terms of 2/10, n/30. Eighty percent of the discounts were taken.

3. Purchases returns of $4,000 were made.

4. At December 31, purchases of $20,000 were in transit, FOB destination, on terms of 2/10, n/30.

5. The company made sales of $640,000. The gross selling price per unit is twice the net cost of each unit sold.

6. Sales allowances of $6,000 were made.

7. The company uses the LIFO periodic method and the gross method for purchases discounts.

Required

1. Compute the cost of the ending inventory before the physical inventory is taken.

2. Compute the amount of the cost of goods sold that came from the purchases of the period and the amount that came from the beginning inventory.

without prejudice to your solution to requirement 1 assume that the correct amount o 564909

Inventory Valuation You are engaged in an audit of the Roche Mfg. Company for the year ended December 31, 2007. To reduce the workload at year end, the company took its annual physical inventory under your observation on November 30, 2007. The company’s inventory account, which includes raw materials and work in process, is on a perpetual basis and it uses the first in, first out method of pricing. It has no finished goods inventory. The company’s physical inventory revealed that the book inventory of $60,570 was understated by $3,000. To avoid distorting the interim financial statements, the company decided not to adjust the book inventory until year end except for obsolete inventory items. Your audit revealed this information about the November 30 inventory:

a. Pricing tests showed that the physical inventory was overpriced by $2,200.

b. Footing and extension errors resulted in a $150 understatement of the physical inventory.

c. Direct labor included in the physical inventory amounted to $10,000. Overhead was included at the rate of 200% of direct labor. You determined that the amount of direct labor was correct and the overhead rate was proper.

d. The physical inventory included obsolete materials recorded at $250. During December, these materials were removed from the inventory account by a charge to cost of sales. Your audit also disclosed the following information about the December 31, 2007 inventory.

e. Total debits to certain accounts during December are:

December

Purchases

$24,700

Direct labor

12,100

Manufacturing overhead expense

25,200

Cost of sales

68,600

f. The cost of sales of $68,600 included direct labor of $13,800.

g. Normal scrap loss on established product lines is negligible. However, a special order started and completed during December had excessive scrap loss of $800, which was charged to Manufacturing Overhead Expense.

Required

1. Compute the correct amount of the physical inventory at November 30, 2007.

2. Without prejudice to your solution to Requirement 1, assume that the correct amount of the inventory at November 30, 2007 was $57,700. Compute the amount of the inventory at December 31, 2007.

prepare a schedule of adjustments to the initial amounts of inventory accounts payab 564910

Comprehensive The Allen Company is a wholesale distributor of automotive replacement parts. Initial amounts taken from Allen’s accounting records are as follows:

Inventory at December 31, 2007 (based on physical count of goods in Allen’s warehouse on December 31, 2007)

$1,250,000

Sales in 2007

$9,000,000

Accounts payable at December 31, 2007:

Terms

Amount

Vendor

2% 10 days, net 30

$265,000

Baker Company

Net 30

210,000

Charlie Company

Net 30

300,000

Dolly Company

Net 30

225,000

Eager Company

Net 30

Full Company

Net 30

Greg Company

$1,000,000

Additional information is as follows:

1. Parts held on consignment from Charlie to Allen, the consignee, amounting to $155,000, were included in the physical count of goods in Allen’s warehouse on December 31, 2007 and in accounts payable at December 31, 2007.

2. $22,000 of parts, which were purchased from Full and paid for in December 2007 were sold in the last week of 2007 and appropriately recorded as sales of $28,000. The parts were included in the physical count of goods in Allen’s warehouse on December 31, 2007 because the parts were on the loading dock waiting to be picked up by customers.

3. Parts in transit on December 31, 2007 to customers, shipped FOB shipping point on December 28, 2007, amounted to $34,000. The customers received the parts on January 7, 2008. Sales of $40,000 to the customers for the parts were recorded by Allen on January 3, 2008.

4. Retailers were holding $210,000 at cost ($250,000 at retail) of goods on consignment from Allen, the consignor, at their stores on December 31, 2007.

5. Goods were in transit from Greg to Allen on December 31, 2007. The cost of the goods was $25,000, and they were shipped FOB shipping point on December 29, 2007.

6. A quarterly freight bill in the amount of $2,000 specifically relating to merchandise purchases in December 2007, all of which was still in the inventory at December 31, 2007, was received on January 4, 2008. The freight bill was not included in either the inventory or in accounts payable at December 31, 2007.

7. All of the purchases from Baker occurred during the last seven days of the year. These items have been recorded in accounts payable and accounted for in the physical inventory at cost before discount. Allen’s policy is to pay invoices in time to take advantage of all cash discounts, adjust inventory accordingly, and record accounts payable, net of cash discounts.

Required

Prepare a schedule of adjustments to the initial amounts of inventory, accounts payable, and sales. Show the effect, if any, of each of the transactions separately and indicate if the transactions would have no effect on the amount.

discuss the specific advantages and disadvantages of using the dollar value lifo app 564911

Dollar Value LIFO In January Broome, Inc., requested and secured permission from the Commissioner of Internal Revenue to compute inventories under the lastin, first out (LIFO) method and elected to determine inventory cost under the dollar value method. Broome, Inc., satisfied the Commissioner that cost could be accurately determined by use of an index number computed from a representative sample selected from the Company’s single inventory pool.

Required

1. Why should a company include inventories in (a) its statement of financial position and (b) the computation of its net income?

2. The Internal Revenue Code allows some accountable events to be considered differently for income tax reporting purposes and financial accounting purposes, while other accountable events must be reported the same for both purposes. Discuss why it might be desirable to report some accountable events differently for financial accounting purposes than for income tax reporting purposes.

3. Discuss the ways and conditions under which the FIFO and LIFO inventory costing methods produce different inventory valuations. Do not discuss procedures for computing inventory cost.

4. Discuss the specific advantages and disadvantages of using the dollar value LIFO application as compared to traditional LIFO methods. Ignore income tax considerations.

explain why and how a company establishes this ldquo reserve rdquo account and where 564912

FIFO and LIFO Part a. A company may compute inventory under one of various cost flow assumptions. Among these assumptions are first in, first out (FIFO) and last in, first out (LIFO). In the past, some companies have changed from FIFO to LIFO for computing portions or all of their inventory.

Required

1. Ignoring income tax, explain what effects a change from FIFO to LIFO has on a company’s net earnings and working capital.

2. Explain the difference between the FIFO assumption of earnings and operating cycle and the LIFO assumption of earnings and operating cycle. Part b. A company using LIFO inventory may establish a “Reserve for the Replacement of LIFO Inventory” account.

Required

Explain why and how a company establishes this “reserve” account and where it should show the account on its statement of financial position.

identify the effects on both the balance sheet and the income statement of a company 564913

Cash Discounts, FIFO, and LIFO Taylor Company, a household appliances dealer, purchases its inventories from various suppliers. Taylor has consistently stated its inventories at the lower of cost (FIFO) or market.

Required

1. Taylor is considering alternate methods of accounting for the cash discounts it takes when paying its suppliers promptly. From a theoretical standpoint, discuss the acceptability of each of the following methods:

a. Financial income when payments are made.

b. Reduction of cost of goods sold for period when payments are made.

c. Direct reduction of purchase cost.

2. Identify the effects on both the balance sheet and the income statement of a company using the LIFO inventory method instead of the FIFO method over a substantial time period when purchase prices of household appliances are rising. State why these effects take place.

what costs should be reported in happlia rsquo s 2007 income statement ignore lower 564914

Specific Identification Happlia Co. imports expensive household appliances. Each model has many variations and each unit has an identification number. Happlia pays all costs for getting the goods from the port to its central warehouse in Des Moines. After repackaging, the goods are consigned to retailers. A retailer makes a sale, simultaneously buys the appliance from Happlia, and pays the balance due within one week.

To alleviate the overstocking of refrigerators at a Minneapolis retailer, some were reshipped to a Kansas City retailer where they were still held in inventory at December 31, 2007. Happlia paid the costs of this reshipment. Happlia uses the specific identification inventory costing method. Required

1. In regard to the specific identification inventory costing method

a. Describe its key elements.

b. Discuss why it is appropriate for Happlia to use this method.

2. a. What general criteria should Happlia use to determine inventory carrying amounts at December 31, 2007? Ignore lower of cost or market considerations.

b. Give four examples of costs included in these inventory carrying amounts.

3. What costs should be reported in Happlia’s 2007 income statement? Ignore lower of cost or market considerations.

explain whether your answers to requirements 1 and 2 would change if you were discus 564918

LIFO The 1970s were a period of historically high inflation. The 1976 financial statements of the Ford Motor Company included the following note:

Note 1 (in part): Inventory valuation. Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. In 1976 the company changed its method of accounting from first in, first out (FIFO) to last in, first out (LIFO) for most of its U.S. inventories. The change to LIFO reduced net income in 1976 by $81 million or $0.86 a share. There is no effect on prior years’ earnings resulting from the change to LIFO in 1976 and, accordingly, prior years’ earnings have not been restated. If the FIFO method of inventory accounting had been used by the company, inventories on December 31, 1976, would have been $166 million higher than reported.

Required

1. Explain the arguments that must have been used in favor of LIFO for the management of Ford to accept a reduction in net income of $81 million.

2. Explain the disadvantages that are likely to result from the adoption of LIFO.

3. Explain why the effect on earnings is $81 million when the effect on the inventory valuation is $166 million.

4. Explain whether your answers to Requirements 1 and 2 would change if you were discussing a change to LIFO for a Ford dealer.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives discuss the issues raised by the a 564923

Ethics and Free Textbooks Textbook publishers provide a copy of a particular book to each professor who is making a decision about adopting a book for the class. These books may be solicited by the professor or may be unsolicited. Some of the books are stamped “For Faculty Use Only.” “Used book” companies send out reps who are reimbursed for their travel expenses and are paid a commission to buy these books from the professors at a low price. A lot of these books are purchased at the end of spring, held as inventory over the summer, and sold to university bookstores before the beginning of fall classes. The bookstores sell them to students or return them. Depending on the condition of the book, it is sold to students as either “new” or “used.”

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, discuss the issues raised by the above situation.

prepare a t account work sheet for the preparation of the statement of cash flows fo 565222

Preparing a statement of cash flows presents a comparative balance sheet for Gordon Corporation as of December 31, 2007 and 2008.

During 2008 the company declared and paid dividends of $120,000.

During 2008 the company disposed of buildings and equipment that originally cost $55,000 and had accumulated depreciation at the time of disposal of $30,000.

a. Prepare a T account work sheet for the preparation of the statement of cash flows for 2008 using the indirect method for cash flows from operations.

b. Derive a presentation for cash flows from operations using the format, but using a single panel.

c. Present a statement of cash flows for 2008 using the direct method for cash flows from operations and include a reconciliation of net income to cash flows from operations.

rental library firms purchase items such as films and games for short term rentals t 565223

Rental library firms purchase items such as films and games for short term rentals to customers. The useful lives of these items range from about six months to two years.

Are these items inventory? If so, cash paid to acquire rental library items is an operating cash flow.

Or, are the items noncurrent assets? If so, cash paid is an investing cash flow.

Prior to 2006, some firms in the rental library business chose the second alternative, classifying the cash paid for rental library purchases as an investing cash outflow. Practice has now changed, however, to classify these cash payments as part of operations. Note that the total cash paid by the firm has not changed, but cash from operations was larger under the pre 2006 classification than afterwards.

declaration of a cash dividend of 6 500 on common stock the firm paid the dividend b 565224

Effect of transactions on the statement of cash flows shows a simplified statement of cash flows for a period. Numbers appear on 11 of the lines in the statement. Other lines (indicated with an “S”) are various subtotals and grand totals; ignore these in the remainder of the problem. Assume that the accounting cycle is complete for the period and that the firm has prepared all of the financial statements. It then discovers that it has overlooked a transaction. It records that transaction in the accounts and corrects all of the financial statements. For each of the following transactions, indicate which of the numbered lines of the statement of cash flows change, and state the amount and direction of the change. If net income, line (3), changes, be sure to indicate whether it decreases or increases. Ignore income tax effects.

a. Depreciation expense of $2,000 on an office computer.

b. Purchase of machinery for $10,000 cash.

c. Declaration of a cash dividend of $6,500 on common stock; the firm paid the dividend by the end of the fiscal year.

d. Issue of common shares for $12,000 cash.

e. Proceeds of the sale of an investment in another firm’s common shares, a noncurrent asset, for $15,000 cash; the firm sold the investment for its book value of $15,000.

calculate the acquisition cost and accumulated depreciation of the buildings and equ 565246

Working backward from changes in the Buildings and Equipment account. The comparative balance sheets of American Airlines show a balance in the Buildings and Equipment account at cost year end of $17,369 million; a year earlier, the balance was $16,825 million. The Accumulated Depreciation account shows a balance of $5,465 million at year end and of $4,914 million a year earlier. The statement of cash flows reports that expenditures for buildings and equipment during the year totaled $1,314 million. The income statement indicates a depreciation charge of $1,253 million during the year. The firm sold buildings and equipment during the year at their carrying value. Calculate the acquisition cost and accumulated depreciation of the buildings and equipment that American sold for cash during the year and the proceeds from the disposition.

prepare a statement of cash flows for southwest airlines for the year 565247

Preparing a statement of cash flows from changes in balance sheet accounts. The comparative balance sheets of Southwest Airlines show the following information for a recent year (amounts in thousands):

Change

Amount

Direction

Cash

$40,308a

Increase

Accounts Receivable

15,351

Decrease

Inventories

15,117

Increase

Prepayments

16,776

Increase

Property, Plant, and Equipment (at cost)

1,134,644b

Increase

Accumulated Depreciation

264,088b

Increase

Other Nonoperating Assets

8,711

Increase

Accounts Payable

660

Decrease

Other Current Liabilities

114,596

Increase

Long Term Debt

244,285

Increase

Other Nonoperating Liabilities

140,026

Increase

Common Stock

96,991

Increase

Retained Earnings

340,879c

Increase

aCash was $378,511 at the beginning of the year and $418,819 at the end of the year.

bSouthwest Airlines did not sell any property, plant, and equipment during the year.

cNet income was $474,378.

a. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Southwest Airlines for the year. Treat changes in nonoperating assets as investing transactions and changes in nonoperating liabilities as financing transactions.

b. Discuss briefly the pattern of cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities for Southwest Airlines for the year.

comment on the major reasons why cash flow from operations exceeds net income 565248

Calculating and interpreting cash flow from operations. The following items appear in the financial statements of Bamberger Enterprises, a firm offering IT services for Sarbanes Oxley compliance, for a year (amounts in thousands):

Sales

$ 14,600

Depreciation Expense

(210)

Income Taxes

(200)

Other Expenses

(13,900)

Net Income

$ 290

The changes in the current asset and current liability accounts were as follows:

Accounts Receivable

$780

Decrease

Inventories

80

Decrease

Prepayments

100

Decrease

Accounts Payable

90

Increase

Other Current Liabilities

240

Decrease

a. Compute the amount of cash flow from operations.

b. Comment on the major reasons why cash flow from operations exceeds net income.

compute the amount of cash flow from operations for each of the four years using the 565249

Calculating and interpreting cash flow from operations. Selected data for a Finnish cellular phone manufacturer appear below (amounts in millions of euros):

2008

2007

2006

2005

Net Income (Loss)

€3,847

€2,542

€1,689

€1,032

Depreciation Expense

Increase (Decrease) in

1,009

665

509

465

Accounts Receivable

2,304

982

1,573

272

Inventories

422

362

103

121

Prepayments

(49)

33

17

(77)

Accounts Payable

458

312

140

90

Other Current Liabilities

923

867

1,049

450

a. Compute the amount of cash flow from operations for each of the four years using the indirect method.

b. Discuss briefly the most important reasons why cash flow from operations differs from net income or net loss for each year.

effect of various transactions on the statement of cash flows 565251

Effect of various transactions on the statement of cash flows. A simplified statement of cash flows for a period. Numbers appear on 11 of the lines in the statement.

Other lines are various subtotals and grand totals; ignore these in the remainder of the problem. Assume that the accounting cycle is complete for the period and that the firm has prepared all of the financial statements. It then discovers that it has overlooked a transaction. It records that transaction in the accounts and corrects all of the financial statements. For each of the following transactions, indicate which of the numbered lines of the statement of cash flows change, and state the amount and direction of the change. If net income, line (3), changes, be sure to indicate whether it decreases or increases. Ignore income tax effects.

a. Amortization of a patent, treated as an expense, $600.

b. Acquisition of a factory site financed by issuing capital stock with a market value of $50,000 in exchange.

c. Purchase of inventory on account for $7,500; assume inventory had increased for the year before the firm recorded this overlooked transaction.

d. Purchase of inventory for cash of $6,000; assume inventory had increased for the year before the firm recorded this overlooked transaction.

e. Uninsured fire loss of merchandise inventory totaling $1,500; assume inventory had increased for the year before the firm recorded this overlooked transaction.

f. Collection of an account receivable totaling $1,450; assume accounts receivable had increased for the year before the firm recorded this overlooked transaction.

g. Issue of bonds for $10,000 cash.

h. Disposal of equipment for cash at its carrying value of $4,500.

comment on the pattern of cash flows from operating investing and financing activiti 565252

Preparing and interpreting a statement of cash flows using a T account work sheet. Financial statement data for Dickerson Manufacturing Company for the current year. Additional information includes the following:

(1) Net income for the year was $568,000; dividends declared and paid were $60,000.

(2) Depreciation expense for the year was $510,000 on buildings and machinery.

(3) The firm sold for $25,000 machinery originally costing $150,000 with accumulated depreciation of $120,000.

(4) The firm retired bonds during the year at their book value.

a. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Dickerson Manufacturing Company for the year using the indirect method to compute cash flow from operations. Support the statement with a T account work sheet.

b. Comment on the pattern of cash flows from operating, investing, and financing activities.

the amount of goodwill represents the excess of the total purchase price over the fa 565373

eBay acquired all of the common stock of Skype Technologies SA on October 14, 2005, for $2,590 million. eBay identified the following tangible net assets and intangible assets acquired and measured those items initially at their fair value:

Tangible Assets Net of Liabilities

$ (20)

Identifiable Intangible Assets:

Customer List and User Base

27

Trade Names and Trademarks

244

Developed Technologies

8

Network Access Agreements

1

Goodwill

2,330

Total

$2,590

The amount of goodwill represents the excess of the total purchase price over the fair value of identifiable tangible and intangible net assets. Goodwill refers to other unidentifiable assets, such as operating synergies or a trained labor force, acquired in a business combination.

wal mart self constructs new stores using both its employees and outside contractors 565376

Wal Mart self constructs new stores using both its employees and outside contractors. The new stores, when completed, will provide Wal Mart with future benefits. This example differs in that Wal Mart (1) incurs part of the cost internally, and (2) makes expenditures over time to construct the stores instead of acquiring a completed asset. The store buildings in process provide evidence of the likelihood of future benefits; during the construction process the accumulated construction costs measure the cost of those benefits. All expenditures during the construction process are part of the cost of the self constructed asset. When Wal Mart completes construction of the stores, it will compare the accumulated construction costs with the fair value of the stores. If accumulated construction costs exceed fair value, Wal Mart will decrease the recorded amount of the asset and recognize a loss. If fair value exceeds accumulated construction costs, Wal Mart will not increase the recorded amount of the asset and recognize a gain.

compute the cost of goods sold for november and the inventory at the end of november 564881

Alternative Inventory Methods The Nevens Company uses a periodic inventory system. During November the following transactions occurred:

Date

Transaction

Units

Cost/Unit

1 Nov

Balance

500

$3.50

8

Sale

350

13

Purchase

300

4

21

Purchase

200

5

28

Sale

150

Required

Compute the cost of goods sold for November and the inventory at the end of November for each of the following cost flow assumptions:

1. FIFO

2. LIFO

3. Average cost

compute the cost of goods sold for june and the inventory at the end of june using e 564882

Alternative Inventory Methods The perpetual inventory records of the Park Company indicate the following transactions in the month of June:

Units

Cost/Unit

Inventory, June 1

200

$3.20

Purchases

3 Jun

200

3.5

17 Jun

250

3.6

24 Jun

300

3.65

Sales

6 Jun

300

21 Jun

200

27 Jun

150

Required

Compute the cost of goods sold for June and the inventory at the end of June, using each of the following cost flow assumptions:

1. FIFO

2. LIFO

3. Average cost (round unit costs to 2 decimal places)

prepare schedules to compute the ending inventory at march 31 2007 under each of the 564883

Alternative Inventory Methods The Frate Company was formed on December 1, 2006. The following information is available from Frate’s inventory records for Product Ply:

Units

Unit Cost

1 Jan 07

(beginning inventory)

800

$9.00

Purchases:

6 Jan 07

1,500

10

24 Jan 07

1,200

10.5

17 Feb 07

600

11

27 Mar 07

900

11.5

A physical inventory on March 31, 2007 shows 1,600 units on hand.

Required

Prepare schedules to compute the ending inventory at March 31, 2007 under each of the following inventory methods:

1. FIFO

2. LIFO

3. Weighted average Show supporting computations in good form.

compute the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under the lifo cost flow ass 564884

LIFO, Perpetual and Periodic The inventory records of the Riedel Company showed the following transactions for the fiscal period ended June 30:

Units

Cost/Unit

June 1 Inventory

700

$6.20

June 3 Purchases

400

6.4

June 15 Sales @ $12.00

300

June 22 Sales @ $12.50

600

June 30 Purchases

600

6.7

Required

Compute the ending inventory and the cost of goods sold under the LIFO cost flow assumption, assuming both a perpetual and a periodic inventory system. Explain any difference in the final inventory valuations.

compute the ending inventory for the years 2006 2007 2008 and 2009 using the dollar 564886

Dollar Value LIFO On January 1, 2006 the Sato Company adopted the dollar value LIFO method of inventory costing. The company’s ending inventory records appear as follows:

Year

Current Cost

Index

2006

$40,000

100

2007

56,100

120

2008

58,500

130

2009

70,000

140

Required

Compute the ending inventory for the years 2006, 2007, 2008, and 2009, using the dollar value LIFO method (round to the nearest dollar).

compute the inventory for the following dates using the dollar value lifo method for 564887

Dollar Value LIFO The Belstock Company manufactures one product. On December 31, 2006 Belstock adopted the dollar value LIFO inventory method. The inventory on that date, using the dollar value LIFO inventory method, was $200,000. Inventory data for succeeding years are as follows:

Year

Inventory at Respective Year End Prices

Price Index (Base Year 2006)

2007

$231,000

1.05

2008

299,000

1.15

2009

300,000

1.2

Required

Compute the inventory for the following dates using the dollar value LIFO method for each year:

1. December 31, 2007,

2. December 31, 2008, and

3. December 31, 2009.

compute the inventory amounts at december 31 2007 2008 and 2009 using the dollar val 564888

Dollar Value LIFO The Acute Company manufactures a single product. On December 31, 2006 Acute adopted the dollar value LIFO inventory method. It computes the inventory on that date using the dollar value LIFO inventory method as $300,000. Inventory data for succeeding years are as follows:

Year Ended December 31,

Inventory at Respective Year End Prices

Relevant Price Index (Base Year 2003)

2007

$363,000

1.1

2008

420,000

1.2

2009

430,000

1.25

Required

Compute the inventory amounts at December 31, 2007, 2008, and 2009, using the dollar value LIFO inventory method for each year.

by how much would the company rsquo s gross profit be different if it had used four 564889

Inventory Pools The Stone Shoe Company adopted dollar value LIFO on January 1, 2007. The company produces four products and uses a single inventory pool. The company’s beginning inventory consists of the following:

Type

Quantity

Cost per Unit

Total Cost

Running

80,000

$16

$1,280,000

Tennis

30,000

15

450,000

Basketball

60,000

14

840,000

Soccer

40,000

17

680,000

210,000

$3,250,000

During 2007, the company has the following purchases and sales:

Type

Quantity Purchased

Cost per Unit

Quantity Sold

Selling Price per Unit

Running

150,000

$19

140,000

$40

Tennis

130,000

16

100,000

38

Basketball

100,000

14

90,000

37

Soccer

120,000

18

140,000

42

500,000

470,000

Required

1. Compute the LIFO cost of the ending inventory. (Round the cost index to 4 decimal places.)

2. By how much would the company’s gross profit be different if it had used four pools instead of a single pool?

by how much would the company rsquo s cost of goods sold be different in 2007 if it 564890

FIFO Used Internally, LIFO Used Externally The Grimstad Company uses FIFO for internal reporting purposes and LIFO for financial reporting and income tax purposes. At the end of 2007 the following information was obtained from the inventory records:

2006

2007

Ending inventory, FIFO

$100,000

$140,000

Ending inventory, LIFO

80,000

115,000

Required

1. Prepare the necessary adjusting journal entry, assuming that the company converts the accounts to LIFO at the end of 2007.

2. Indicate how the company would disclose the inventory value on its comparative balance sheets prepared at the end of 2007.

3. By how much would the company’s cost of goods sold be different in 2007 if it used FIFO for external reporting?

for each situation state whether the hayes company should include the merchandise in 564894

Items to Be Included in Inventory As the auditor of the Hayes Company for the year ended December 31, 2007, you found the following transactions occurred near its closing date:

1. Merchandise received on January 8, 2008, and costing $800, was recorded on January 6, 2008. An invoice on hand showed the shipment was made FOB supplier’s warehouse on December 31, 2007. Since the merchandise was not on hand at December 31, 2007, it was not included in the inventory.

2. A product costing $600 was in Hayes’ shipping room when the physical inventory was taken. It was not included in the inventory because it was marked “Hold for customer’s shipping instructions.” Investigation revealed that the customer’s order was dated December 18, 2007, but that the case was shipped and the customer billed on January 10, 2008.

3. A machine, made to order for a customer, was finished on December 31, 2007. The customer had inspected it and was satisfied with it. The customer was billed in full for $2,000 on that date. The machine was excluded from inventory although it was shipped on January 2, 2008.

4. Merchandise costing $800 was received on December 26, 2007, but a purchase was not recorded. The goods were “on consignment from Milliken Company.”

5. Merchandise costing $4,000 was received on January 2, 2008, and the related purchase invoice recorded January 5. The invoice showed that the shipment was made on December 29, 2007, FOB destination.

Required

For each situation, state whether the Hayes Company should include the merchandise in its inventory. Give your reason for the decision on each item.

determine the cost of the ending inventory that reddall should report on its decembe 564895

Valuation of Inventory The inventory on hand at the end of 2007 for the Reddall Company is valued at a cost of $87,450. The following items were not included in this inventory:

1. Purchased goods in transit, under terms FOB shipping point, invoice price $3,700, freight costs $170.

2. Goods out on consignment to Marlman Company, sales price $2,800, shipping costs of $210.

3. Goods sold to Grina Co. under terms FOB destination, invoiced for $1,700, which included $251 freight charges to deliver the goods. Goods are in transit.

4. Goods held on consignment by the Reddall Company at a sales price of $2,700, which included sales commission of 20% of sales price.

5. Purchased goods in transit, shipped FOB destination, invoice price $2,100 which included freight charges of $190.

Required

Determine the cost of the ending inventory that Reddall should report on its December 31, 2007 balance sheet, assuming that its selling price is 140% of the cost of the inventory.

prepare schedules computing the ending inventory in units and dollars and proving th 564896

Cost of Sales As an accountant for the Lee Company, your supervisor gave you the following calculations of the gross profit for the first quarter:

Alternative

Sales ($50 per unit)

Cost of Goods Sold

Gross Profit

A

$500,000

$200,000

$300,000

B

500,000

228,000

272,000

C

500,000

213,333

286,667

The three alternative cost flow assumptions are FIFO, Average, and LIFO (the alternatives are not necessarily presented in this sequence). The company uses the periodic inventory system. The computation of the cost of goods sold under each alternative is based on the following data:

Units

Cost/Unit

Inventory, January 1

12,000

$20

Purchase, January 10

4,000

21

Purchase, February 15

6,000

22

Purchase, March 10

8,000

23

Required

Prepare schedules computing the ending inventory (in units and dollars) and proving the cost of goods sold shown here under each of the three alternatives.

compute the costs of goods sold for each month and the inventories at the end of eac 564898

Alternative Inventory Methods The Garrett Company has the following transactions during the months of April and May:

Date

Transaction

Units

Cost/Unit

1 Apr

Balance

400

17

Purchase

200

$5.50

25

Sale

150

28

Purchase

100

5.75

5 May

Purchase

250

5.5

18

Sale

300

22

Sale

50

The cost of the inventory on April 1 is $5, $4, and $2 per unit, respectively, under the FIFO, average, and LIFO cost flow assumptions.

Required

1. Compute the costs of goods sold for each month and the inventories at the end of each month for the following alternatives:

a. FIFO periodic

b. FIFO perpetual

c. LIFO periodic

d. LIFO perpetual

e. Weighted average (round unit costs to 2 decimal places)

f. Moving average (round unit costs to 2 decimal places)

2. Reconcile the difference between the LIFO periodic and the LIFO perpetual results.

which measure would you use in your evaluation of the company how would you convert 564899

Alternative Inventory Methods The Totman Company has the following transactions during the months of January and February:

Date

Transaction

Units

Cost/Unit

1 Jan

Balance

200

10

Purchase

50

$25

22

Sale

40

28

Purchase

60

$27

4 Feb

Purchase

40

$28

14

Sale

50

23

Sale

20

The cost of the inventory at January 1 is $24, $23, and $15 per unit, respectively, under the FIFO, average, and LIFO cost flow assumptions.

Required

1. Compute the cost of goods sold for each month and the inventories at the end of each month for the following alternatives:

a. FIFO periodic

b. FIFO perpetual

c. LIFO periodic

d. LIFO perpetual

e. Weighted average (round unit costs to 2 decimal places)

f. Moving average (round unit costs to 2 decimal places)

2. Reconcile the difference between the LIFO periodic and the LIFO perpetual results.

3. If the company had purchased an additional 25 units for $30 each on February 27, compute the cost of goods sold for February under FIFO periodic and LIFO periodic.

4. For February, compute the company’s inventory turnover under the FIFO and LIFO periodic methods. Use ending inventory instead of average inventory for convenience. Which measure would you use in your evaluation of the company? How would you convert a monthly inventory turnover into an annual measure to use for comparison with other companies? What assumptions are involved?

prepare a schedule to compute the inventory units and dollar amounts of the class f 564901

LIFO and Inventory Pools On January 1, 2004 Grover Company changed its inventory cost flow method to the LIFO cost method from the FIFO cost method for its raw materials inventory. It made the change for both financial statement and income tax reporting purposes. Grover uses the multiple pools approach, under which it groups substantially identical raw materials into LIFO inventory pools; it uses weighted average costs in valuing annual incremental layers. The composition of the December 31, 2006 inventory for the Class F inventory pool is as follows:

Units

Weighted Average Unit Cost

Total Cost

Base year inventory—2004

9,000

$10.00

$90,000

Incremental layer—2005

3,000

11

33,000

Incremental layer—2006

2,000

12.5

25,000

Inventory, December 31, 2006

14,000

$148,000

Inventory transactions for the Class F inventory pool during 2007 were as follows:

  • On March 2, 2007, 4,800 units were purchased at a unit cost of $13.50 for $64,800.
  • On September 1, 2007, 7,200 units were purchased at a unit cost of $14.00 for $100,800.
  • A total of 15,000 units were used for production during 2007.

The following transactions for the Class F inventory pool took place during 2008:

  • On January 11, 2008, 7,500 units were purchased at a unit cost of $14.50 for $108,750.
  • On May 14, 2008, 5,500 units were purchased at a unit cost of $15.50 for $85,250.
  • On December 29, 2008, 7,000 units were purchased at a unit cost of $16.00 for $112,000.
  • A total of 16,000 units were used for production during 2008.

Required

1. Prepare a schedule to compute the inventory (units and dollar amounts) of the Class F inventory pool at December 31, 2007. Show supporting computations in good form.

2. Prepare a schedule to compute the cost of Class F raw materials used in production for the year ended December 31, 2007.

3. Prepare a schedule to compute the inventory (units and dollar amounts) of the Class F inventory pool at December 31, 2008. Show supporting computations in good form.

prepare the appropriate disclosures for the year 2009 annual report if the company u 564902

Dollar Value LIFO The Olson Company adopted the dollar value LIFO method for inventory valuation at the beginning of 2006. The following information about the inventory at the end of each year is available from the company records:

Year

Current Costs

Index

2005

$50,000

100

2006

60,000

108

2007

70,000

115

2008

73,000

125

2009

78,000

135

Required

1. Calculate the dollar value LIFO inventory at the end of each year.

2. Prepare the appropriate disclosures for the year 2009 annual report if the company uses current cost internally and LIFO for financial reporting. Why would the company use current cost internally?

calculate the dollar value lifo inventory at the end of each year 564903

Dollar Value LIFO The Kwestel Company adopted the dollar value LIFO method for inventory valuation at the beginning of 2006. The following information about the inventory at the end of each year is available from the company records:

Year

Current Cost

Index

2005

$8,000

100

2006

10,800

120

2007

11,500

130

2008

14,000

145

2009

10,500

125

Required

Calculate the dollar value LIFO inventory at the end of each year.

compute the lifo cost of the ending inventory assuming webster company uses three in 564904

Dollar Value LIFO and Inventory Pools The Webster Company adopted dollar value LIFO on January 1, 2007. The company produces three products: X, Y, and Z. The company’s beginning inventory consisted of the following:

Type

Quantity

Cost per Unit

Total Cost

X

30,000

$4.25

$127,500

Y

10,000

3.5

35,000

Z

25,000

2

50,000

65,000

$212,500

During 2007, the company had the following purchases and sales:

Type

Quantity Purchased

Cost per Unit

Quantity Sold

Selling Price per Unit

X

110,000

$4.75

90,000

$10.00

Y

100,000

3.75

85,000

7.5

Z

75,000

2.1

70,000

5

285,000

245,000

Required

1. Compute the LIFO cost of the ending inventory assuming Webster Company uses a single inventory pool. (Round cost index to 4 decimal places.)

2. Compute the LIFO cost of the ending inventory assuming Webster Company uses three inventory pools. (Round cost indexes to 4 decimal places.)

compute the cost index for each year for each pool using a base of 100 for each inde 564905

Comprehensive The Kelly Company adopted dollar value LIFO on January 1, 2006 using two inventory pools, each of which includes two types of inventory items. The following information about the inventory at the end of each year is available:

Pool 1

Pool 2

Year

Number of Units

Type

Average Cost per Unit

Number of Units

Type

Average Cost per Unit

2006

20,000

A

$10

40,000

C

$5

10,000

B

20

20,000

D

8

2007

30,000

A

11

50,000

C

7

12,000

B

24

22,000

D

9

2008

40,000

A

12

46,000

C

6

14,000

B

22

20,000

D

8

2009

45,000

A

12

60,000

C

7

13,000

B

25

25,000

D

8

Required

1. Compute the cost index for each year for each pool using a base of 100 for each index. (Round each cost index to 4 decimal places.)

2. Compute the dollar value LIFO inventory at the end of each year.

prepare a schedule to compute the inventory amounts at december 31 2007 and 2008 usi 564906

Double Extension: Dollar Value LIFO On January 1, 2007 Lucas Distributors, Inc., adopted the dollar value LIFO inventory method for income tax and external financial reporting. However, Lucas continued to use the FIFO inventory method for internal accounting and management purposes. In applying the LIFO method, Lucas uses internal conversion cost indexes and the multiple pools approach under which substantially identical inventory items are grouped into LIFO inventory pools. The following data were available for Inventory Pool No. 1, which is comprised of products A and B, for the 2 years following the adoption of LIFO:

FIFO Basis per Records

Units

Unit Cost

Total Cost

Inventory, 1/1/07

Product A

12,000

$30

$360,000

Product B

8,000

25

200,000

$560,000

Inventory, 12/31/07

Product A

17,000

$35

$595,000

Product B

9,000

28

252,000

$847,000

Inventory, 12/31/08

Product A

13,000

$40

$520,000

Product B

10,000

32

320,000

$840,000

Required

1. Prepare a schedule to compute the internal conversion cost indexes for 2007 and 2008. Round indexes to two decimal places.

2. Prepare a schedule to compute the inventory amounts at December 31, 2007 and 2008, using the dollar value LIFO inventory method.

calculate the accounts receivable balance that would be reported under a the gross p 564821

Cash Discounts The Lambert Corporation sells merchandise at a list price of $70,000 with accompanying terms of 2/10, n/30 on December 8, 2007. By December 18, 2007, Lambert had collected from customers for merchandise originally billed at $46,000. By December 31, 2007, additional collections had been received on sales originally billed for $18,000, and sales returns and allowances of $1,500 had been granted by Lambert. By January 15, 2008, all the remaining balances due had been collected.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries using (a) the gross price method and (b) the net price method to record each of the following items:

a. The sale of the merchandise

b. Collections received by December 18, 2007

c. Collections received by December 31, 2007

d. Sales returns and allowances (not estimated in the period of sale)

e. Any required year end adjustments

f. Any January 1, 2008 reversing entries

g. The collections received by January 15, 2008

2. Calculate the accounts receivable balance that would be reported under (a) the gross price method and (b) the net price method on the Lambert Corporation’s December 31, 2007, balance sheet.

compute lufkin rsquo s receivables turnover in days assuming a 360 day business year 564822

Aging Accounts Receivable On September 30, 2007 (the end of its fiscal year), the Lufkin Corporation reported accounts receivable of $331,750 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $16,700. During fiscal 2008 the following transactions occurred:

Credit sales (terms, n/EOM)

$2,017,800

Collections on accounts receivable

1,956,000

Accounts receivable written off

16,200

On September 30, 2008 an aging of the accounts receivable balance indicated the following:

Age

Amount

Estimated Percentage Uncollectible

Under 30 days

$169,250

0.80%

30–90 days

100,000

1.6

91–180 days

55,900

5

181–360 days

38,200

15

Over 360 days

14,000

40

$377,350

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries necessary to record the credit sales, collections on account, write off of accounts receivable, and the bad debts expense for Lufkin for fiscal 2008.

2. What are Lufkin’s September 30, 2008 balances in Accounts Receivable and in its Allowance for Doubtful Accounts and how will they be disclosed on the September 30, 2008 balance sheet?

3. Compute Lufkin’s receivables turnover in days, assuming a 360 day business year. What is your evaluation of its collection policies?

discuss the difference between the income statement and balance sheet approaches to 564823

Estimating Bad Debts An examination of the accounting records of the Keegan Corporation disclosed the following information for 2007:

Cash sales

$680,000

Net credit sales

527,000

Accounts receivable (12/31/07)

190,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts (12/31/07, prior to adjustment)

1,500 (debit)

Keegan wishes to examine the effect of various alternative bad debt estimation policies.

Required

1. Prepare the adjusting entry that would be required under each of the following methods:

a. Bad debts are estimated at 1.4% of total sales (net).

b. Bad debts are estimated at 3% of net credit sales.

c. Bad debts are estimated at 7.5% of gross accounts receivable.

d. An aging of accounts receivable indicates that half of the outstanding accounts will incur a 3% loss, a quarter will incur a 6% loss, the remaining quarter will incur a 20% loss.

2. Discuss the difference between the income statement and balance sheet approaches to estimating bad debts.

prepare all the journal entries necessary for faeber to record the preceding informa 564826

Factoring Accounts Receivable Faeber Textile Company frequently factors its accounts receivable. During 2007, Faeber made credit sales of $100,000 to customers, under terms of 2/10, n/30. Faeber records its credit sales using the gross price method. From past experience, sales returns and allowances are expected to be minimal. In 2007, Faeber sold $70,000 of these receivables to a factor. The factor remitted 90% of the accounts receivable factored and charged a 12% commission on the gross amount of the factored receivables. The factoring agreement also requires Faeber to be responsible for any cash discounts taken by customers upon payment of the factored receivables. Faeber is charged for these cash discounts upon reimbursement by the factor. During 2007, sales returns and allowances were $3,000 on the factored accounts receivable and $1,300 on the un factored accounts receivable. The factor collected the remaining amount of the factored receivables, less the 2% discount on 94% of the collected receivables, and returned the balance owed to Faeber. Faeber collected the remaining amount of the un factored accounts receivable, less the 2% discount on 96% of the collected receivables.

Required

Prepare all the journal entries necessary for Faeber to record the preceding information.

how would the accounts related to lazard rsquo s factoring and assignment agreements 564827

Factoring and Assignment of Accounts Receivable The Lazard Corporation has experienced cash flow problems and decides to improve its current cash position by factoring 30% of its receivables and assigning the remainder with the same finance company. The agreement with the finance company stipulates that a 10% commission will be assessed on factored accounts and 15% annual interest will be charged on the outstanding note payable balance related to the assigned accounts. Additionally, the finance company will advance only 80% of the factored and assigned accounts, and Lazard must continue the collection responsibilities on the assigned accounts. At the beginning of the last month of the company’s fiscal year, the accounts receivable transferred to the finance company amounted to $187,000. During the month, collections on factored accounts were $46,000, and collections on assigned accounts amounted to $84,000. All collections on assigned accounts plus accrued interest were remitted to the finance company at the end of the month. The remaining amounts owed will be remitted within these months.

Required

1. Prepare all journal entries to record the preceding information on Lazard’s books.

2. How would the accounts related to Lazard’s factoring and assignment agreements be reported on Lazard’s year end financial statements?

prepare any journal entry entries required 564828

Examination of Accounts Receivable You are engaged in the annual examination of Faulane Company, a wholesale office supply business, for the year ended June 30, 2007. You have been assigned to examine the accounts receivable. The following information is available at June 30, 2007.

1. Your review of accounts receivable and discussions with the client disclose that the following items are included in the accounts receivable (of both the control and the subsidiary ledgers):

a. Accounts with credit balances total $1,746

b. Receivables from officers total $8,500

c. Advances to employees total $1,411

d. Accounts that are definitely uncollectible total $1,187

2. Uncollectible accounts are estimated to be 0.50% of the year’s net credit sales of $16,750,000.

Required

Prepare any journal entry (entries) required:

1. to reclassify items that are not trade accounts receivable,

2. to write off uncollectible accounts, and

3. to adjust the allowance for doubtful accounts.

prepare the adjusting journal entry or entries with appropriate explanations to set 564829

Allowance for Bad Accounts The Installment Jewelry Company has been in business for 5 years but has never had an audit made of its financial statements. Engaged to make an audit for 2007, you find that the company’s balance sheet carries no allowance for bad accounts, bad accounts having been expensed as written off and recoveries credited to income as collected. The company’s policy is to write off at December 31 of each year those accounts on which no collections have been received for 3 months. The installment contracts generally are for 2 years. On your recommendation the company agrees to revise its accounts for 2007 to give effect to bad account treatment on the allowance basis. The allowance is to be based on a percentage of sales that is derived from the experience of prior years. Statistics for the past 5 years are shown in the following table:

Charge Sales

Accounts Written Off and Year of Sale

Recoveries and Year of Sale

2003

2003

$100,000

$550

2003

2004

2003

2004

250,000

1,500

$1,000

$100

2003

2004

2005

2004

2005

300,000

500

4,000

$1,300

400

2004

2005

2006

2005

2006

325,000

1,200

4,500

1,500

500

2005

2006

2007

2006

2007

275,000

2,700

5,000

1,400

600

Accounts receivable at December 31, 2007 were as follows:

2006 Sales

$15,000

2007 Sales

135,000

$150,000

Required

Prepare the adjusting journal entry or entries with appropriate explanations to set up the Allowance for Bad Accounts.

prepare the journal entry for the year end adjustment to the allowance for doubtful 564830

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts From inception of operations to December 31, 2006, Harris Corporation provided for uncollectible accounts receivable under the allowance method: Provisions were made monthly at 2% of credit sales; bad debts written off were charged to the allowance account; recoveries of bad debts previously written off were credited to the allowance account; and no year end adjustments to the allowance account were made. Harris’s usual credit terms are net 30 days. The balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts was $130,000 at January 1, 2007. During 2007, credit sales totaled $9,000,000, interim provisions for doubtful accounts were made at 2% of credit sales, $90,000 of bad debts were written off, and recoveries of accounts previously written off amounted to $15,000. Harris upgraded its computer facility in November 2007 and an aging of accounts receivable was prepared for the first time as of December 31, 2007. A summary of the aging is as follows:

Classification by Month of Sale

Balance in Each Category

Estimated % Uncollectible

Nov.–Dec. 2007

$1,140,000

2%

July–Oct.

600,000

10

Jan.–June

400,000

25

Prior to 1/1/07

130,000

75

$2,270,000

Based on the review of collectability of the account balances in the “prior to 1/1/07” aging category, additional receivables totaling $60,000 were written off as of December 31, 2007. Effective with the year ended December 31, 2007, Harris adopted a new accounting method for estimating the allowance for doubtful accounts at the amount indicated by the year end aging analysis of accounts receivable.

Required

1. Prepare a schedule analyzing the changes in the allowance for doubtful accounts for the year ended December 31, 2007. Show supporting computations in good form.

2. Prepare the journal entry for the year end adjustment to the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts balance as of December 31, 2007.

prepare a schedule analyzing the changes in the allowance for doubtful accounts acco 564831

Correction of Allowance Account From inception of operations in 2004 Summit carried no allowance for doubtful accounts. Uncollectible receivables were expensed as written off, and recoveries were credited to income as collected. On March 1, 2008 (after the 2007 financial statements were issued), management recognized that Summit’s accounting policy with respect to doubtful accounts was not correct, and determined that an allowance for doubtful accounts was necessary. A policy was established to maintain an allowance for doubtful accounts based on Summit’s historical bad debt loss percentage applied to year end accounts receivable. The historical bad debt loss percentage is to be recomputed each year based on the relationship of net write offs to credit sales for all available past years up to a maximum of five years. Information from Summit’s records for five years is as follows:

Year

Credit Sales

Accounts Written Off

Recoveries

2004

$1,500,000

$15,000

$0

2005

2,250,000

38,000

2,700

2006

2,950,000

52,000

2,500

2007

3,300,000

65,000

4,800

2008

4,000,000

83,000

5,000

Accounts receivable balances were $1,250,000 and $1,460,000 at December 31, 2007 and December 31, 2008 respectively.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry, with appropriate explanation, to set up the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts as of January 1, 2008. Disregard income taxes. Show supporting computations in good form.

2. Prepare a schedule analyzing the changes in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts account for the year ended December 31, 2008. Show supporting computations in good form.

compute blackmon rsquo s accounts receivable turnover in days assuming a 365 day bus 564832

Comprehensive Receivables Problem The December 31, 2006 balance sheet of the Blackmon Corporation disclosed the following information relating to its receivables:

Accounts receivable

$245,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

15,000

$230,000

Notes receivable*

50,000

Total receivables

$280,000

*The company is contingently liable for a discounted note receivable of $10,000.

During 2007, credit sales (terms, n/EOM) totaled $2,200,000 and collections on accounts receivable (unassigned) amounted to $1,900,000. Uncollectible accounts totaling $18,000 from several customers were written off, and a $1,350 accounts receivable previously written off was collected. Additionally, the following transactions relating to Blackmon’s receivables occurred during the year:

Mar. 6

Received payment of $12,460 on a note from the Renko Company. The payment included interest revenue of $460.

Mar. 31

The March bank statement indicated that the discounted note had been paid at maturity.

1 May

Accepted a 120 day, 13% note from the Licata Company in exchange for its account receivable of $4,800.

18 May

Received a $6,900, 90 day, 12% note from the Eagle Manufacturing Corporation for a credit sale.

2 Jun

Discounted both the Licata and Eagle notes with recourse at the bank at 14% (assume that Blackmon normally does not discount its notes).

1 Jul

Assigned $140,000 of accounts receivable to a finance company. Under the terms of the agreement, Blackmon receives 85% of the value of the accounts assigned, less a service charge of $5,000, and is charged 1.5% per month on the outstanding loan balance.

6 Jul

A sales allowance of $2,500 on an assigned account is allowed by Blackmon.

13 Jul

A sales return of $800 on an assigned account is granted by Blackmon.

31 Jul

Collections of $50,000 are made on assigned accounts. This amount and 1 month’s interest are remitted to the finance company.

Aug. 31

Assigned accounts of $60,000 are collected, and the remainder of the loan is repaid, including interest.

Mar. 6

The August bank statement indicated the Eagle note had been paid.

Mar. 31

The bank notifies Blackmon that Licata defaulted on its note and charges a fee of $25.

1 May

Collected the amount due from the Licata Company.

18 May

Collected interest of $5,000 on the outstanding notes receivable.

On December 31, 2007 an aging of the accounts receivable balance indicated the following:

Age

Amount

Estimated Percentage Uncollectible

Under 30 days

$240,487

0.50%

31–60 days

113,421

1.5

61–90 days

30,933

8

91–240 days

17,185

35

Over 240 days

6,874

70

$408,900

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries to record the preceding receivable transactions during 2007 and the necessary adjusting entry on December 31, 2007.

2. Prepare the receivables portion of Blackmon’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet.

3. Compute Blackmon’s accounts receivable turnover in days, assuming a 365 day business year

prepare any journal entries necessary by miller to record the information from requi 564833

Reconciliation of Bank and Company Cash Amounts The December 31, 2007 bank statement for Miller Corporation showed a $2,049.25 balance. On this date the company’s Cash account reflected a $325.60 overdraft. In reconciling these amounts, the following information is discovered:

1. Cash on hand for undeposited sales receipts, December 31, 2007, $130.25.

2. Customer NSF check returned with bank statement, $420.40.

3. Cash sales of $640.25 for the week ended December 18, 2007 were recorded on the books. The cashier reports this amount missing, and it was not deposited in the bank.

4. Note receivable of $2,500 and interest of $25 collected by the bank and not recorded on the books.

5. Deposit in transit December 31, 2007, $350.00.

6. A customer check for $290.40 in payment of its account was recorded on the books at $940.20.

7. Outstanding checks, $2,040.55. Includes a duplicate check of $70.85 to C. Brown, who notified Miller that the original was lost. Miller stopped payment on the original check and has already adjusted the cash account in the accounting records for this amount.

Required

1. Prepare a December 31, 2007 bank reconciliation for Miller.

2. Prepare any journal entries necessary by Miller to record the information from Requirement 1.

prepare the adjusting entries necessary to bring nakamoto rsquo s cash account balan 564834

Unknown Book Balance The following information pertains to the Cash account of the Nakamoto Corporation for the month of July 2007:

Bank statement

Balance July 31

$22,639.54

Service charge for July

15

NSF check returned with July bank statement

184.5

Note receivable collected by bank (not previously recorded on the books)

2,000.00

Interest on note collected by bank (not previously recorded on the books)

60

Books

Balance July 31

?

Cash on hand awaiting deposit

1,824.42

Outstanding checks:

#257

$42.17

#271

$120.19

#272

$80.82

Deposit in transit

2,420.98

Required

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation to determine Nakamoto’s adjusted cash balance on July 31, 2007.

2. Determine Nakamoto’s unadjusted cash balance (per books) on July 31, 2007.

3. Prepare the adjusting entries necessary to bring Nakamoto’s cash account balance up to date on July 31, 2007.

prepare the journal entries that the daisy company should record as a result of the 564835

Bank Reconciliation The Daisy Company received a bank statement for February 2007, as follows:

From: Central Bank, Denver, Co. 80222

To: Daisy Company, 1313 Williams St., Denver, Co. 80218

Date

Checks

Deposits

Balance

Feb. 1

$4,524.80

7

$2,700.33

$8,642.61

9

3,484.81

14

6.00 SC

460.00 CM

16

274.09

21

4,133.60

3,385.49

23

69.69 NSF

28

$6,344.38

SC 5 Service Charge

NSF 5 Check Returned

CM 5 Credit Memo

DM 5 Debit Memo

The receipt of $460 on February 14 was for a $445 note collected by the bank, plus $20 current interest, less a $5 service charge. The company’s accounting records contained the following information:

Cash balance on February 28 from the books: $2,610.42

Cash Disbursements

Cash Receipts

Check No. 155

$2,700.33

Feb. 7

$8,624.61

156

3,484.81

21

3,385.49

157

274.09

All receipts are verified and correct

158

589.02

159

4,133.60

160

2,742.63

Required

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation on February 28, 2007 for the Daisy Company.

2. Prepare the journal entries that the Daisy Company should record as a result of the reconciliation.

prepare journal entries to adjust the train company rsquo s books to reflect the cor 564836

Comprehensive Reconciliation In auditing the Train Company, you obtain directly from the bank Train’s bank statement, canceled checks, and other memoranda which relate to the company’s bank account for December 2007. In reconciling the bank balance on December 31, 2007 with that shown on the company’s books, you observe the following facts:

1. Balance per bank statement

$91,174.63

2. Balance per books

59,088.46

3. Outstanding checks, 12/31/07

33,378.82

4. Receipts of 12/31/07 deposited on 1/1/08

5,317.20

5. Service charge for December

6. Proceeds of bank loan, 12/15/07 omitted from company records (discounted for 3 months at 12% per year)

11,640.00

7. Deposit of 12/20/07 omitted from the bank statement

2,892.41

8. Check of Rome Products Co. charged back on 12/22/07 for lack of countersignature. Redeposited 1/5/08. No entry was made for the chargeback or the redeposit.

873.74

9. Error on bank statement in entering deposit of 12/18/07:

Correct amount

$3,182.40

Entered in statement

3,181.40

1

10. Check No. 3917 of Trait Manufacturing Co. charged in error to company’s account

2,690.00

11. Proceeds of note of J. Somers & Co. collected by bank 12/11/07 not entered on books:

$2,000.00

Principal

40.00

Interest

$2,040.00

Less: collection charge

5.00

2,035.00

12. Erroneous debit memo of 12/22/07 to charge company’s account with settlement of bank loan, which was paid by check No. 8714 on same date

5,000.00

13. Error on bank statement in entering deposit of 12/4/07

Entered as

$4,817.10

Correct amount

4,807.10

10.00

14. Deposit of Trait Manufacturing Co. of 12/8/07 credited in error to the company

1,819.20

Required

1. Prepare a reconciliation of the Train Company’s bank account.

2. Prepare journal entries to adjust the Train Company’s books to reflect the correct bank balance on December 31, 2007.

what are the two basic approaches to estimating uncollectible accounts under the all 564840

Receivables Issues Magrath Company has an operating cycle of less than one year and provides credit terms for all of its customers. On April 3, 2007, the company factored, without recourse, some of its accounts receivable. On August 1, 2007, Magrath sold special order merchandise and received an interest bearing note due April 30, 2008. Magrath uses the allowance method to account for uncollectible accounts. During 2007, some accounts were written off as uncollectible, and other accounts previously written off as uncollectible were collected.

Required

1. Explain how Magrath should account for and report the accounts receivable factored on April 3, 2007. Why is this accounting treatment appropriate?

2. Explain how Magrath should report the effects of the interest bearing note on its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2007 and its December 31, 2007 balance sheet.

3. Explain how Magrath should account for the collection of the accounts previously written off as uncollectible.

4. What are the two basic approaches to estimating uncollectible accounts under the allowance method? What is the rationale for each approach?

explain how carme company should report the allowance for bad debts account on its b 564844

Estimated Bad Debts On December 31, 2007, Carme Company had significant amounts of accounts receivable as a result of credit sales to its customers. Carme Company uses the allowance method based on credit sales to estimate bad debts. Based on past experience, 1% of credit sales normally will not be collected. This pattern is expected to continue.

Required

1. Explain the rationale of using the allowance method based on credit sales to estimate bad debts. Contrast this method with the allowance method based on the balance in the trade receivables accounts.

2. Explain how Carme Company should report the allowance for bad debts account on its balance sheet at December 31, 2007. Also, describe the alternatives, if any, for presentation of bad debt expense in Carme Company’s 2007 income statement.

how should marie account for the trade accounts receivable factored on november 3 20 564846

Assignment and Factoring Marie Company has significant amounts of trade accounts receivable as a result of credit sales to its customers. On October 2, 2007, some trade accounts receivable were assigned to Daniel Finance Company on a with recourse, nonnotification basis for an advance of 75% of their amount at an interest charge of 20% on the balance outstanding. On November 3, 2007, other trade accounts receivable were factored on a without recourse basis. The factor withheld 5% of the trade accounts receivable factored as protection against sales returns and allowances and charged a finance charge of 3%.

Required

1. How should Marie account for subsequent collections on the trade accounts receivable assigned on October 2, 2007, and the payments to Daniel Finance? Why?

2. How should Marie account for the trade accounts receivable factored on November 3, 2007? Why?

explain how tidal should account for the transactions described here for the assignm 564848

Assignment and Discounting Tidal Company has significant amounts of trade accounts receivable. In March of this year, Tidal assigned specific trade accounts receivable to Herb Finance Company on a with recourse, nonnotification basis as collateral for a loan. Tidal signed a note and received 70% of the amount assigned. Tidal was charged a 5% finance fee and agreed to pay interest at 12% on the unpaid balance. Some specific accounts of the assigned receivables were written off as uncollectible. The remainder of the trade accounts receivable assigned were collected by Tidal in March and April of this year. Tidal paid Herb Finance in full at the end of April of this year. Tidal also sold some special order merchandise and received a 90 day, 10%, interest bearing note receivable on July 1 of this year. After 30 days, the note receivable was discounted with recourse at 14% at a bank.

Required

1. Explain how Tidal should account for the transactions described here for the assignment of trade accounts receivable.

2. a. Explain how Tidal should determine the amount of the discount for the note receivable.

b. Explain how the discounting transaction should be accounted for.

from financial reporting and ethical perspectives what do you think about debitus pu 564850

Ethics and Sales Returns At the end of 2007, the accounting firm for which you work is auditing the books of Debitus Publishing Inc. for the first time. Debitus, a calendar year company, publishes textbooks that are used in colleges and universities across the country. These textbooks are purchased by students through their campus bookstores. Debitus normally makes its biggest sales at the beginning of the fall semester. In the past, Debitus has always recorded sales returns in the spring semester when the campus bookstores return any unsold textbooks. This has been satisfactory because the returns have been immaterial in amount. In 2006, as a promotional strategy to stimulate sales, Debitus began offering bookstores a reduced price if they ordered more textbooks. There is no penalty for returns of these textbooks if the bookstores cannot sell them to customers. This strategy worked; sales increased by 10% during 2006. In early 2007, however, a substantial amount of unsold textbooks were returned by bookstores to Debitus.

Continuing the promotional strategy, sales increased by 15% during 2007. While reviewing the sales returns account for 2007, you notice that the only entry was for the textbooks returned earlier in the year. You note that these returns amounted to about 5% of the sales for the fall semester of 2006. Since this pattern of returns seems to you to be a trend that will continue, you raise the issue with the company controller as to whether all of the “sales” for the fall semester of 2007 are actually revenue. The controller responds, “Of course they are revenue; we sold the textbooks. Just because there will be some returns doesn’t mean we haven’t made sales. Besides, we don’t know what percentage the returns will be; they might be as much as 5 percent, but definitely not more. Furthermore, we have already recorded all those returns at the beginning of 2007 that really applied to 2006. So we already have recorded our fair share of returns for 2007. As long as we record returns consistently, it will all work out. We don’t want a drop in earnings for 2007 because of a change in customer returns; our shareholders wouldn’t like that. Let’s just leave this issue alone.”

Required

From financial reporting and ethical perspectives, what do you think about Debitus Publishing Inc.’s policy in regard to sales returns?

when the double extension approach to the dollar value lifo inventory cost flow meth 564873

When the double extension approach to the dollar value LIFO inventory cost flow method is used, the inventory layer added in the current year is multiplied by an index number. How would the following be used in the calculation of this index number?

Ending inventory at current year cost

Ending inventory at base year cost

Numerator

Denominator

Numerator

Not Used

Denominator

Numerator

Not Used

Denominator

all items that were outstanding as of november 30 cleared through the bank in decemb 564793

The following bank reconciliation is presented for the Kingston Company for the month of November 2007:

Balance per bank statement, 11/30/07

$18,040

Add: Deposit in transit

4,150

Less: Outstanding checks

$6,300

$22,190

Bank credit recorded in error

20

6,320

Balance per books, 11/30/07

$15,870

Data for the month of December 2007 follow:

Per bank

December deposits

$26,100

December disbursements

22,420

Balance, 12/31/07

21,720

All items that were outstanding as of November 30 cleared through the bank in December, including the bank credit. In addition, $2,500 in checks were outstanding as of December 31, 2007. What is the balance of cash per books at December 31, 2007?

a. $19,220

b. $19,240

c. $21,720

d. $24,220

indicate whether or not each of the following ten items should be included in the ca 564794

Computing the Cash Balance Indicate whether or not each of the following ten items should be included in the cash balance presented on the balance sheet. Also indicate the normal balance sheet treatment for those items not included as cash.

Item

Include in Cash Balance

Classification of Items Excluded

1. NSF checks

2. Savings account

3. Postage stamps

4. Postdated checks

5. IOUs

6. Cash on hand

7. Cash in sinking fund

8. Travel advance

9. Bank draft

10. Traveler’s checks

describe the balance sheet treatment of the items not included in the cash balance 564795

Reporting Cash on the Balance Sheet Your audit of the Watt Corporation discovers the following information:

1. Reconciled balance in First National Bank checking account

$2,360.75

2. Reconciled balance in City National Bank checking account

40.2

3. Balance in First Federal savings account

28,750.00

4. Certificate of deposit

30,000.00

5. Postage stamps

100

6. Employee’s IOU

125

7. Employees’ travel advances

1,640.00

8. Cash on hand (undeposited sales receipts)

3,609.40

9. Traveler’s checks

600

10. Customer’s postdated check

290.4

Required

1. What amount should be reported as cash on Watt’s balance sheet?

2. Describe the balance sheet treatment of the items not included in the cash balance.

how would each of the preceding items normally be reflected on hutton rsquo s balanc 564796

Journal Entry to Separate Receivables An examination of the accounting records for the Hutton Corporation indicates that all receivables are being recorded in a single account entitled Receivables. An analysis of the account reveals the following:

Accounts receivable (trade)

$15,500

Accounts receivable (officers)

3,600

Common stock subscriptions receivable (current)

12,000

Advances to employees

1,800

Notes receivable (trade), due in 3 years

6,000

Deposit to guarantee contract performance

5,000

Utility deposit

500

Total

$44,400

Required

1. Prepare a journal entry to separate the preceding items into their proper accounts.

2. How would each of the preceding items normally be reflected on Hutton’s balance sheet?

prepare the journal entry necessary to record shelton rsquo s estimate of bad debt e 564801

Estimating Bad Debts from Receivables Balances The following information is extracted from the accounting records of the Shelton Corporation at the beginning of 2007:

Accounts Receivable

$63,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

1,400 (credit)

During 2007, sales on credit amounted to $575,000, $557,400 was collected on outstanding receivables, and $2,600 of receivables were written off as uncollectible. On December 31, 2007, Shelton estimates its bad debts to be 4% of the outstanding gross accounts receivable balance.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry necessary to record Shelton’s estimate of bad debt expense for 2007.

2. Prepare the Accounts Receivable section of Shelton’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet.

3. Compute Shelton’s receivables turnover.

prepare the journal entry to record cowen rsquo s estimated uncollectibles assuming 564802

Aging Analysis of Accounts Receivable – Cowen’s, a large department store located in a metropolitan area, has been experiencing difficulty in estimating its bad debts. The company has decided to prepare an aging schedule for its outstanding accounts receivable and estimate bad debts by the due dates of its receivables. This analysis discloses the following information:

Balance

Age of Receivable

Estimated Percentage Uncollectible

$193,000

Under 30 days

0.80%

114,000

30–60 days

2.00%

73,000

61–120 days

5.00%

41,000

121–240 days

20.00%

25,000

241–360 days

35.00%

19,000

Over 360 days

60.00%

$465,000

Required

1. Use the preceding analysis to compute the estimated amount of uncollectible receivables.

2. Prepare the journal entry to record Cowen’s estimated uncollectibles, assuming the balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts prior to adjustment is:

a. 0

b. $3,000 (debit)

c. $2,800 (credit)

prepare journal entries to record the estimate of bradford rsquo s bad debt expense 564803

Comparison of Bad Debt Estimation Methods The following information (prior to adjustment) is available from the accounting records of the Bradford Company on December 31, 2007:

Cash sales

$93,100

Net credit sales

262,900

Total sales (net)

$356,000

Accounts receivable

126,300

Allowance for doubtful accounts

2,150 (credit)

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the estimate of Bradford’s bad debt expense for 2007 assuming:

1. Bad debts are estimated to be 1.5% of total sales (net).

2. Bad debts are estimated to be 2% of net credit sales.

3. Bad debts are estimated to be 5% of gross accounts receivable.

how would this assignment agreement be reported on white rsquo s december 31 2007 ba 564805

Assigning Accounts Receivable White Corporation has entered into a long term assignment agreement with a finance company. Under the terms of this agreement, White receives 80% of the value of all accounts assigned and is charged a 1% service charge which is based upon the actual dollar amount of cash received. Additionally, the finance company charges White 12% annual interest on the outstanding loan. The following selected transactions relate to this agreement:

1 Dec 07

Accounts receivable of $160,000 are assigned.

11 Dec 07

A sales return of $1,000 on an assigned account is allowed by White.

31 Dec 07

Collections are made on $86,000 of assigned accounts. This amount and 1 month’s interest on the outstanding loan are remitted to the finance company. (For simplicity, the nearest month.)compute interest to

29 Jan 08

$50,000 of assigned accounts are collected and the remainder of the loan is repaid.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries on White’s books to record the preceding transactions.

2. How would this assignment agreement be reported on White’s December 31, 2007 balance sheet (assume the note payable is short term)?

prepare a schedule showing the income statement effect for the year ended december 3 564807

Generating Cash from Receivables The Guide Company requires additional cash for its business. Guide has decided to use its accounts receivable to raise the additional cash as follows:

1. On June 30, 2007, Guide assigned $200,000 of accounts receivable to the Cell Finance Company. Guide received an advance from Cell of 85% of the assigned accounts receivable, less a commission on the advance of 3%. Prior to December 31, 2007, Guide collected $150,000 on the assigned accounts receivable and remitted $160,000 to Cell, $10,000 of which represented interest on the advance from Cell.

2. On December 1, 2007, Guide sold $300,000 of net accounts receivable to the Factoring Company for $260,000. The receivables were sold outright on a nonrecourse basis.

3. On December 29, 2007, Guide received an advance of $100,000 from the Domestic Bank by pledging $120,000 of Guide’s accounts receivable. Guide’s first payment to Domestic is due on January 29, 2008.

Required

Prepare a schedule showing the income statement effect for the year ended December 31, 2007, as a result of the preceding facts. Show supporting computations in good form.

the following are events of the singer corporation for the current year 564810

Recording Notes Receivable Discounted The following are events of the Singer Corporation for the current year:

30 Jun

Barney Manufacturing gives Singer a $5,000, 11%, 90 day note for merchandise purchased.

15 Jul

Dillon Construction Co. gives Singer a $6,000, 10%, 60 day note for merchandise originally purchased on April 20 of the current year.

30 Jul

The Barney and Dillon notes are discounted with recourse by Singer at its bank at 12%.

Sept. 15

The bank notifies Singer that the Dillon note was paid.

Sept. 30

The bank notifies Singer that Barney defaulted on the note and charges the amount of principal, interest, and a fee of $10 against Singer’s bank account.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the preceding information on Singer’s accounting records. (Assume that the company does not normally discount its notes.)

prepare the journal entries necessary to record the crown company rsquo s petty cash 564811

Petty Cash Transactions The Crown Company established a petty cash fund of $600 for incidental expenditures on January 2, 2007. At the end of the month the count of cash on hand indicated that $57.35 remained in the fund. A sorting of petty cash vouchers disclosed that the following expenses had been incurred during the month, and the fund was replenished.

Postage expense

$250.40

Office supplies expense

165.9

Miscellaneous expense

119.05

Required

Prepare the journal entries necessary to record the Crown Company’s petty cash transactions during the month of January 2007.

prepare the journal entries necessary to bring gentry rsquo s cash account balance u 564812

Adjusting an Unknown Cash Balance The information that follows is available from the general ledger and the bank statement of the Gentry Corporation for the month of August 2007:

1. Bank statement balance, August 31

$1,342.50

2. Note collected by the bank not previously recorded by Gentry

600

3. Interest on the preceding note (not previously recorded)

25

4. NSF check returned with the bank statement (not previously recorded)

212.6

5. Outstanding checks at the end of August

684.7

6. Bank service charge for August

12.85

7. Deposit in transit, August 31

329.42

Required

1. Starting with the bank statement balance, prepare a schedule to determine Gentry’s cash balance on August 31, 2007, prior to any required adjustments.

2. Prepare a bank reconciliation to determine Gentry’s adjusted cash balance on August 31, 2007.

3. Prepare the journal entries necessary to bring Gentry’s cash account balance up to date

prepare the journal entries necessary to adjust sun rsquo s books on july 31 2007 564813

Bank Reconciliation The following information is extracted from the bank statement and the accounting records of the Sun Corporation for the month of July 2007:

1. Cash balance from books, July 31

$1,967.35

2. Cash balance from bank, July 31

1,980.20

3. NSF check returned by bank with bank statement

81

4. Note collected by bank on July 31

190

5. Interest on preceding note

5.5

6. Bank service charge for July

4.4

7. Outstanding checks at end of July

150

8. Deposit in transit at end of July

247.25

Required

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation for the Sun Corporation for July 31, 2007.

2. Prepare the journal entries necessary to adjust Sun’s books on July 31, 2007.

prepare any adjusting journal entries necessary to record the information from requi 564814

Bank Reconciliation and Adjusting Entries The Odum Corporation’s cash account showed a balance of $17,198 on March 31, 2007. The bank statement balance for the same date indicated a balance of $17,924.55. The following additional information is available concerning Odum’s cash balance on March 31, 2007.

1. Undeposited cash on hand on March 31 amounted to $724.50.

2. A customer’s NSF check for $173.80 was returned with the bank statement.

3. A note for $2,000 plus interest of $25 was collected for Odum by the bank during March. The bank notified Odum of this collection on the bank statement.

4. The bank service charge for March was $15.

5. A deposit of $951.75 mailed to the bank on March 31 did not appear on the bank statement.

6. The following checks mailed to creditors had not been processed by the bank on March 31:

#429

$57.40

#433

$214.80

#432

$147.50

#434

$191.90

7. A customer check for $149.50 in payment of his account and listed correctly for that amount on the bank statement had been incorrectly recorded on the accounting records as $194.50.

Required

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation for the Odum Corporation for March 31, 2007.

2. Prepare any adjusting journal entries necessary to record the information from Requirement 1.

assume that you contact the bank and are informed that a balance of 5 542 90 had bee 564815

Computing the Bank Statement Balance Your cashier I. Amak rook has notified you that he has misplaced all the bank statements for the past year. You decide to review selected accounting records during the year and discover that the following journal entry was made to reconcile the June 30, 2007 bank statement and the accounting records:

Accounts Receivable

1,520.24

Miscellaneous Expense

12.5

Notes Receivable

200

Interest Revenue

10

Cash

1,322.74

Required

1. What events might have caused each of the preceding reconciling items to occur?

2. Compute the amount that would have appeared as the balance per bank statement on a bank reconciliation if the p read justment cash balance in the accounting records was $7,683.70, outstanding checks were $207.50, and no other adjustments were required.

3. Assume that you contact the bank and are informed that a balance of $5,542.90 had been reported on the June 30, 2007 bank statement. What does this discrepancy indicate and how would you begin investigating it?

determine the balance in atwood rsquo s cash account and discuss the balance sheet t 564816

Cash and Other Items The following information has been extracted from the accounting records of the Atwood Corporation:

1. Cash on hand (undeposited sales receipts)

$1,020

2. Certificates of deposit

25,000

3. Customer’s note receivable

1,000

4. Reconciled balance in University National Bank checking account

350

5. Reconciled balance in Second National Bank checking account

9,350

6. Balance in City Federal savings account

8,560

7. Customer’s postdated check

1,350

8. Employee travel advances

1,600

9. Cash in bond sinking fund

1,200

10. Bond sinking fund investments

8,090

11. Postage stamps

430

Required

Determine the balance in Atwood’s Cash account, and discuss the balance sheet treatment of any items not included as cash.

allowance for doubtful accounts is estimated as a percentage of outstanding year end 564817

Analyzing Bad Debt Expense In 2008, 3 years after it began operations, the Pearce Corporation decided to change from the direct write off method of recording bad debts to estimating bad debts. The following information is available to you:

Year

2005

2006

2007

2008

Sales

$125,000

$180,000

$250,000

$280,000

Credit sales

90,000

158,000

210,000

235,000

Collections on accounts receivable

2005 sales

78,000

8,500

200

2006 sales

137,000

15,000

300

2007 sales

178,800

19,500

2008 sales

200,000

Accounts receivable written off

2005 accounts

2,500

500

300

0

2006 accounts

4,600

700

400

2007 accounts

6,200

1,000

2008 accounts

6,800

Required

1. Prepare an analysis to determine Pearce’s estimated bad debt expense percentage based upon the average relationship of actual bad debts to credit sales.

2. Prepare an analysis to determine Pearce’s estimated percentage of allowance for doubtful accounts based on year end accounts receivable.

3. What amount should Pearce record as bad debts expense for 2008 if:

a. Bad debts are estimated as a percentage of credit sales?

b. Allowance for doubtful accounts is estimated as a percentage of outstanding year end accounts receivable?

prepare an analysis and schedule that shows the amounts of the accounts receivable a 564818

Analyzing Accounts Receivable The June 30, 2006 balance sheet of the Upham Company included the following information:

Accounts receivable

$224,000

Less: Allowance for doubtful accounts

14,100

$209,900

Notes receivable*

21,800

Total receivables

$231,700

*The company is contingently liable for discounted notes receivable of $38,000.

During the company’s fiscal year ending June 30, 2007 the following transactions occurred:

1. Sales on credit

$874,600

2. Collections of accounts receivable

841,000

3. Accounts receivable written off as uncollectible

13,800

4. Notes receivable collected

29,000

5. Customer notes received in payment of accounts receivable

72,000

6. Notes receivable discounted that were paid at maturity

36,000

7. Notes receivable discounted that were defaulted, including interest of $20 and a $5 fee. This amount is expected to be collected during the 2008 fiscal year

2,025

8. Proceeds from customer notes discounted with recourse (face value $45,000, accrued interest revenue $200)

45,075

9. Collections on accounts previously written off

500

10. Sales returns and allowances (on credit sales)

2,000

11. Bad debts were estimated to be 1.5% of credit sales

Required

1. Prepare journal entries necessary for Upham to record the preceding transactions.

2. Prepare an analysis and schedule that shows the amounts of the accounts receivable, allowance for doubtful accounts, notes receivable, and notes receivable dishonored accounts that will be disclosed on Upham’s June 30, 2007 balance sheet.

prepare journal entries to record the preceding information assuming that tara usual 564819

Recording Note Transactions The following information is extracted from the accounting records of the Tara Corporation:

1 May

Received a $6,000, 12%, 90 day note from V. Leigh, a customer.

6 May

Received a $9,000, 10%, 120 day note from C. Gable, a customer.

11 May

Discounted the Leigh and Gable notes with recourse at the bank at 13%. In addition, borrowed $10,000 from the bank for 90 days at 12%. The bank remits the face value less the interest.

31 Jul

The July bank statement indicated that the Leigh note had been paid.

Sept. 4

Received notice that Gable had defaulted on the May 6 note. The bank charged a fee of $10. Paid the amount due on the Gable note to the bank. Informed Gable to pay Tara the entire amount due plus 11% interest on the total of the face amount of the note, the accrued interest, and the fee from the maturity date until Gable remits the amount owed.

Sept. 23

Received the amount due from Gable.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the preceding information, assuming that Tara usually does not discount its notes.

what is the 2008 ending balance in each of the accounts in requirement 1 and how wil 564820

Reconstructing Accounts Receivable and Expense Journal Entries The 2008 audit of the accounting records of the Lane Company discloses the following information:

2007

2008

Accounts receivable (ending)

$186,000

$187,100

Allowance for doubtful accounts (ending)

7,400

7,000

Allowance for sales returns and allowances (ending)

4,700

3,916

Gross sales returns and allowances (estimated for the year)

4,900

5,200

Accounts receivable written off during the year

6,800

7,900

Estimated bad debts for the year

7,200

7,500

Actual gross sales returns and allowances for the year

4,700

6,000

Sales discounts not taken at end of year

0

400

Credit sales during the year (terms, 2/10, n/60)

375,000

380,000

Cash collected on accounts receivable during the year (net of discounts taken)

352,000

367,500

Required

1. Reconstruct the journal entries that were made by Lane during 2008 to record changes in the following accounts, assuming sales returns and allowances are estimated in the period of sale and the net price method is used to account for sales discounts.

a. Allowance for doubtful accounts

b. Allowance for sales returns and allowances

c. Accounts receivable

2. What is the 2008 ending balance in each of the accounts in Requirement 1 and how will it be reported on Lane’s 2008 financial statements?

presented below is information related to dickinson company for 2012 564718

P 1 Presented below is information related to Dickinson Company for 2012.

Retained earnings balance, January 1, 2012

$980,000

Sales revenue

25,000,000

Cost of goods sold

16,000,000

Interest revenue

70,000

Selling and administrative expenses

4,700,000

Write off of goodwill

820,000

Income taxes for 2012

1,244,000

Gain on the sale of investments (normal recurring)

110,000

Loss due to flood damage—extraordinary item (net of tax)

390,000

Loss on the disposition of the wholesale division (net of tax)

440,000

Loss on operations of the wholesale division (net of tax)

90,000

Dividends declared on common stock

250,000

Dividends declared on preferred stock

80,000

Instructions

Prepare a multiple step income statement and a retained earnings statement. Dickinson Company decided to discontinue its entire wholesale operations and to retain its manufacturing operations. On September 15, Dickinson sold the wholesale operations to Rogers Company. During 2012, there were 500,000 shares of common stock outstanding all year.

maher inc reported income from continuing operations before taxes during 2012 of 790 564719

P 3 Maher Inc. reported income from continuing operations before taxes during 2012 of $790,000. Additional transactions occurring in 2012 but not considered in the $790,000 are as follows.

1. The corporation experienced an uninsured flood loss (extraordinary) in the amount of $90,000 during the year. The tax rate on this item is 46%.

2. At the beginning of 2010, the corporation purchased a machine for $54,000 (salvage value of $9,000) that had a useful life of 6 years. The bookkeeper used straight line depreciation for 2010, 2011, and 2012 but failed to deduct the salvage value in computing the depreciation base.

3. Sale of securities held as a part of its portfolio resulted in a loss of $57,000 (pretax).

4. When its president died, the corporation realized $150,000 from an insurance policy. The cash surrender value of this policy had been carried on the books as an investment in the amount of $46,000 (the gain is nontaxable).

5. The corporation disposed of its recreational division at a loss of $115,000 before taxes. Assume that this transaction meets the criteria for discontinued operations.

6. The corporation decided to change its method of inventory pricing from average cost to the FIFO method. The effect of this change on prior years is to increase 2010 income by $60,000 and decrease 2011 income by $20,000 before taxes. The FIFO method has been used for 2012. The tax rate on these items is 40%.

Instructions

Prepare an income statement for the year 2012 starting with income from continuing operations before taxes. Compute earnings per share as it should be shown on the face of the income statement. Common shares outstanding for the year are 120,000 shares. (Assume a tax rate of 30% on all items, unless indicated otherwise.)

using the multiple step form prepare an income statement and a retained earnings sta 564720

P 4 The following account balances were included in the trial balance of Twain Corporation at June 30, 2012.

Sales revenue

1,578,500

Sales discounts

31,150

Cost of goods sold

896,770

Salaries and wages expense (sales)

56,260

Sales commissions

97,600

Travel expense (salespersons)

28,930

Freight out

21,400

Entertainment expense

14,820

Telephone and Internet expense (sales)

9,030

Depreciation expense (sales equipment)

4,980

Maintenance and repairs expense (sales)

6,200

Miscellaneous selling expenses

4,715

Office supplies used

3,450

Telephone and Internet expense (administration)

2,820

Depreciation expense (office furniture and equipment)

7,250

Property tax expense

7,320

Bad debt expense (selling)

4,850

Maintenance and repairs expense (administration)

9,130

Office expense

6,000

Sales returns and allowances

62,300

Dividends received

38,000

Interest expense

18,000

Income tax expense

102,000

Depreciation understatement due to error—2009 (net of tax)

17,700

Dividends declared on preferred stock

9,000

Dividends declared on common stock

37,000

The Retained Earnings account had a balance of $337,000 at July 1, 2011. There are 80,000 shares of common stock outstanding.

Instructions

(a) Using the multiple step form, prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ended June 30, 2012.

(b) Using the single step form, prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ended June 30, 2012.

wade corp has 150 000 shares of common stock outstanding in 2012 the company reports 564721

P 7 Wade Corp. has 150,000 shares of common stock outstanding. In 2012, the company reports income from continuing operations before income tax of $1,210,000. Additional transactions not considered in the $1,210,000 are as follows.

1. In 2012, Wade Corp. sold equipment for $40,000. The machine had originally cost $80,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $30,000. The gain or loss is considered ordinary.

2. The company discontinued operations of one of its subsidiaries during the current year at a loss of $190,000 before taxes. Assume that this transaction meets the criteria for discontinued operations. The loss from operations of the discontinued subsidiary was $90,000 before taxes; the loss from disposal of the subsidiary was $100,000 before taxes.

3. An internal audit discovered that amortization of intangible assets was understated by $35,000 (net of tax) in a prior period. The amount was charged against retained earnings.

4. The company had a gain of $125,000 on the condemnation of much of its property. The gain is taxed at a total effective rate of 40%. Assume that the transaction meets the requirements of an extraordinary item.

Instructions

Analyze the above information and prepare an income statement for the year 2012, starting with income from continuing operations before income tax. Compute earnings per share as it should be shown on the face of the income statement. (Assume a total effective tax rate of 38% on all items, unless otherwise indicated.)

the following represents a recent income statement for boeing company 564722

CA 2 The following represents a recent income statement for Boeing Company.

($ in millions)

Sales

$21,924

Costs and expenses

20,773

Income from operations

1,151

Other income

122

Interest expense

130

Earnings before income taxes

1,143

Income taxes

287

Net income

$856

It includes only five separate numbers (two of which are in billions of dollars), two subtotals, and the net earnings figure.

Instructions

(a) Indicate the deficiencies in the income statement.

(b) What recommendations would you make to Boeing to improve the usefulness of its income statement?

derek lee vice president of finance for atlanta company has recently been asked to d 564723

CA 3 Derek Lee, vice president of finance for Atlanta Company, has recently been asked to discuss with the company’s division controllers the proper accounting for extraordinary items. Derek Lee prepared the factual situations presented below as a basis for discussion.

1. An earthquake destroys one of the oil refineries owned by a large multinational oil company. Earthquakes are rare in this geographical location.

2. A publicly held company has incurred a substantial loss in the unsuccessful registration of a bond issue.

3. A large portion of a cigarette manufacturer’s tobacco crops are destroyed by a hailstorm. Severe damage from hailstorms is rare in this locality.

4. A large diversified company sells a block of shares from its portfolio of securities acquired for investment purposes.

5. A company that operates a chain of warehouses sells the excess land surrounding one of its warehouses. When the company buys property to establish a new warehouse, it usually buys more land than it expects to use for the warehouse with the expectation that the land will appreciate in value. Twice during the past 5 years the company sold excess land.

6. A company experiences a material loss in the repurchase of a large bond issue that has been outstanding for 3 years. The company regularly repurchases bonds of this nature.

7. A railroad experiences an unusual flood loss to part of its track system. Flood losses normally occur every 3 or 4 years.

8. A machine tool company sells the only land it owns. The land was acquired 10 years ago for future expansion, but shortly thereafter the company abandoned all plans for expansion but decided to hold the land for appreciation.

Instructions

Determine whether the foregoing items should be classified as extraordinary items. Present a rationale for your position.

bobek inc has recently reported steadily increasing income the company reported inco 564724

CA 4 Bobek Inc. has recently reported steadily increasing income. The company

reported income of $20,000 in 2009, $25,000 in 2010, and $30,000 in 2011. A number of market analysts have recommended that investors buy the stock because they expect the steady growth in income to continue. Bobek is approaching the end of its fiscal year in 2012, and it again appears to be a good year. However, it has not yet recorded warranty expense. Based on prior experience, this year’s warranty expense should be around $5,000, but some managers have approached the controller to suggest a larger, more conservative warranty expense should be recorded this year. Income before warranty expense is $43,000. Specifically, by recording a $7,000 warranty accrual this year, Bobek could report an increase in income for this year and still be in a position to cover its warranty costs in future years.

Instructions

(a) What is earnings management?

(b) Assume income before warranty expense is $43,000 for both 2012 and 2013 and that total warranty expense over the 2 year period is $10,000. What is the effect of the proposed accounting in 2012? In2013?

(c) What is the appropriate accounting in this situation?

charlie brown controller for the kelly corporation is preparing the company s income 564725

CA 5 Charlie Brown, controller for the Kelly Corporation, is preparing the company’s income statement at year end. He notes that the company lost a considerable sum on the sale of some equipment it had decided to replace. Since the company has sold equipment routinely in the past, Brown knows the losses cannot be reported as extraordinary. He also does not want to highlight it as a material loss since he feels that will reflect poorly on him and the company. He reasons that if the company had recorded more depreciation during the assets’ lives, the losses would not be so great. Since depreciation is included among the company’s operating expenses, he wants to report the losses along with the company’s expenses, where he hopes it will not be noticed.

Instructions

(a) What are the ethical issues involved?

(b) What should Brown do?

on the basis of the foregoing discussion answer the following questions who is corre 564726

CA 6 Simpson Corp. is an entertainment firm that derives approximately 30% of its income from the Casino Knights Division, which manages gambling facilities. As auditor for Simpson Corp., you have recently overheard the following discussion between the controller and financial vice president.

Vice President:

If we sell the Casino Knights Division, it seems ridiculous to segregate the results of the sale in the income statement. Separate categories tend to be absurd and

confusing to the stockholders. I believe that we should simply report the gain on the sale as other income or expense without detail.

Controller:

Professional pronouncements would require that we disclose this information

separately in the income statement. If a sale of this type is considered unusual and infrequent, it must be reported as an extraordinary item.

Vice President:

What about the walkout we had last month when employees were upset about their commission income? Would this situation not also be an extraordinary item?

Controller:

I am not sure whether this item would be reported as extraordinary or not.

Vice President:

Oh well, it doesn’t make any difference because the net effect of all these items is immaterial, so no disclosure is necessary.

Instructions

(a) On the basis of the foregoing discussion, answer the following questions: Who is correct about handling the sale? What would be the correct income statement presentation for the sale of the Casino Knights Division?

(b) How should the walkout by the employees be reported?

(c) What do you think about the vice president’s observation on materiality?

(d) What are the earnings per share implications of these topics?

as audit partner for grupo and rijo you are in charge of reviewing the classificatio 564727

CA 8 As audit partner for Grupo and Rijo, you are in charge of reviewing the classification of unusual items that have occurred during the current year. The following material items have come to your attention.

1. A merchandising company incorrectly overstated its ending inventory 2 years ago. Inventory for all other periods is correctly computed.

2. An automobile dealer sells for $137,000 an extremely rare 1930 S type Invicta which it purchased for $21,000 10 years ago. The Invicta is the only such display item the dealer owns.

3. A drilling company during the current year extended the estimated useful life of certain drilling equipment from 9 to 15 years. As a result, depreciation for the current year was materially lowered.

4. A retail outlet changed its computation for bad debt expense from 1% to ½ of 1% of sales because of changes in its customer clientele.

5. A mining concern sells a foreign subsidiary engaged in uranium mining, although it (the seller) continues to engage in uranium mining in other countries.

6. A steel company changes from the average cost method to the FIFO method for inventory costing purposes.

7. A construction company, at great expense, prepared a major proposal for a government loan. The loan is not approved.

8. A water pump manufacturer has had large losses resulting from a strike by its employees early in the year.

9. Depreciation for a prior period was incorrectly understated by $950,000. The error was discovered in the current year.

10. A large sheep rancher suffered a major loss because the state required that all sheep in the state be killed to halt the spread of a rare disease. Such a situation has not occurred in the state for 20 years.

11. A food distributor that sells wholesale to supermarket chains and to fast food restaurants (two distinguishable classes of customers) decides to discontinue the division that sells to one of the two classes of customers.

Instructions

From the foregoing information, indicate in what section of the income statement or retained earnings statement these items should be classified. Provide a brief rationale for your position.

willie nelson jr controller for jenkins corporation is preparing the company s finan 564728

CA 9 Willie Nelson, Jr., controller for Jenkins Corporation, is preparing the company’s financial statements at year end. Currently, he is focusing on the income statement and determining the format for reporting comprehensive income. During the year, the company earned net income of $400,000 and had unrealized gains on available for sale securities of $15,000. In the previous year, net income was $410,000, and the company had no unrealized gains or losses.

Instructions

(a) Show how income and comprehensive income will be reported on a comparative basis for the current and prior years, using the separate income statement format.

(b) Show how income and comprehensive income will be reported on a comparative basis for the current and prior years, using the combined income statement format.

(c) Which format should Nelson recommend?

presented below is information related to veil company at december 31 2012 the end o 564737

IFRS 4 Presented below is information related to Veil Company at December 31, 2012, the end of its first year of operations.

Sales revenue

310,000

Cost of goods sold

140,000

Selling and administrative expenses

50,000

Gain on sale of plant assets

30,000

Unrealized gain on non trading equity securities

10,000

Interest expense

6,000

Loss on discontinued operations

12,000

Allocation to non controlling interest

40,000

Dividends declared and paid

5,000

Instructions

Compute the following: (a) income from operations, (b) net income,(c) net income attributable to Veil Company controlling shareholders, (d) comprehensive income, and (e) Retained earnings balance at December 31, 2012. (Ignore income taxes.)

the financial records of dunbar inc were destroyed by fire at the end of 2012 564707

E 3 The financial records of Dunbar Inc. were destroyed by fire at the end of 2012. Fortunately, the controller had kept certain statistical data related to the income statement as presented below.

1. The beginning merchandise inventory was $92,000 and decreased 20% during the current year.

2. Sales discounts amount to $17,000.

3. 30,000 shares of common stock were outstanding for the entire year.

4. Interest expense was $20,000.

5. The income tax rate is 30%.

6. Cost of goods sold amounts to $500,000.

7. Administrative expenses are 18% of cost of goods sold but only 8% of gross sales.

8. Four fifths of the operating expenses relate to sales activities.

Instructions

From the foregoing, information, prepare an income statement for the year 2012 in single step form.

two accountants for the firm of allen and wright are arguing about the merits of pre 564708

E 4 Two accountants for the firm of Allen and Wright are arguing about the merits of presenting an income statement in a multiple step versus a single step format. The discussion involves the following 2012 information related to Webster Company ($000 omitted).

Administrative expense

Officers’ salaries

$4,900

Depreciation of office furniture and equipment

3,960

Cost of goods sold

63,570

Rent revenue

17,230

Selling expense

Transportation out

2,690

Sales commissions

7,980

Depreciation of sales equipment

6,480

Sales revenue

96,500

Income tax expense

7,580

Interest expense

1,860

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement for the year 2012 using the multiple step form. Common shares outstanding for 2012 total 40,550 (000 omitted).

(b) Prepare an income statement for the year 2012 using the single step form.

(c) Which one do you prefer? Discuss.

following balances were taken from the books of parnevik corp on december 31 2012 564709

E 5 following balances were taken from the books of Parnevik Corp. on December 31, 2012.

Interest revenue

86,000

Cash

51,000

Sales revenue

1,280,000

Accounts receivable

150,000

Prepaid insurance

20,000

Sales returns and allowances

150,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

7,000

Sales discounts

45,000

Land

100,000

Equipment

200,000

Buildings

140,000

Cost of goods sold

621,000

Accumulated depreciation—equipment

40,000

Accumulated depreciation—buildings

$28,000

Notes receivable

155,000

Selling expenses

194,000

Accounts payable

170,000

Bonds payable

100,000

Offi ce expenses

97,000

Accrued liabilities

32,000

Interest expense

60,000

Notes payable

100,000

Loss from earthquake damage(extraordinary item)

120,000

Common stock

500,000

Retained earnings

21,000

Assume the total effective tax rate on all items is 34%.

Instructions

Prepare a multiple step income statement; 100,000 shares of common stock were outstanding during the year.

presented below are selected amounts from the records of mcgraw corporation as of de 564711

E 7 Presented below are selected amounts from the records of McGraw Corporation as of December 31, 2012.

Cash

$50,000

Administrative expenses

100,000

Selling expenses

80,000

Net sales

540,000

Cost of goods sold

260,000

Cash dividends declared (2012)

20,000

Cash dividends paid (2012)

15,000

Discontinued operations (loss before income

40,000

Depreciation expense, not recorded in 2011

30,000

Retained earnings, December 31, 2011

90,000

Effective tax rate 30%

Instructions

(a) Compute net income for 2012.

(b) Prepare a partial income statement beginning with income from continuing operations before income tax, and including appropriate earnings per share information. Assume 20,000 shares of common stock were outstanding during 2012.

prepare a multiple step income statement for 2012 assume that 60 000 shares of commo 564712

E 8 Presented below is information related to Brokaw Corp. for the year 2012.

Net sales

$1,200,000

Cost of goods sold

780,000

Selling expenses

65,000

Administrative expenses

48,000

Dividend revenue

$20,000

Interest revenue

7,000

Write off of inventory due to obsolescence

80,000

Depreciation expense omitted by accident in 2011

40,000

Casualty loss (extraordinary item) before taxes

50,000

Cash dividends declared

45,000

Retained earnings at December 31, 2011

980,000

Effective tax rate of 34% on all items

Instructions

(a) Prepare a multiple step income statement for 2012. Assume that 60,000 shares of common stock are outstanding.

(b) Prepare a retained earnings statement for 2012.

presented below is selected ledger accounts of woods corporation at december 31 2012 564713

E 10 Presented below is selected ledger accounts of Woods Corporation at December 31, 2012.

Cash

185,000

Inventory

$535,000

Sales revenue

4,175,000

Unearned revenue

117,000

Purchases

2,786,000

Sales discounts

$34,000

Purchase discounts

27,000

Selling expenses

69,000

Accounting and legal services

33,000

Insurance expense (office)

24,000

Advertising

54,000

Transportation out

93,000

Depreciation expense (office equipment)

48,000

Depreciation expense (sales equipment)

36,000

Salaries and wages expense (sales)

284,000

Salaries and wages expense (office)

346,000

Purchase returns

15,000

Sales returns and allowances

79,000

Transportation in

72,000

Accounts receivable

142,500

Sales commissions

83,000

Telephone expense (sales)

17,000

Utilities expense (office)

32,000

Miscellaneous office expenses

8,000

Rent revenue

240,000

Extraordinary loss (before tax)

60,000

Interest expense

176,000

Common stock ($10 par)

900,000

Instructions

Prepare a condensed 2012 income statement for Woods Corporation.

zehms company began operations in 2010 and adopted weighted average pricing for inve 564714

E 13 Zehms Company began operations in 2010 and adopted weighted average pricing for inventory. In 2012, in accordance with other companies in its industry, Zehms changed its inventory pricing to FIFO. The pretax income data is reported below.

Year

Weighted Average

FIFO

2,010

370,000

395,000

2,011

390,000

420,000

2,012

410,000

460,000

Instructions

(a) What is Zehms’s net income in 2012? Assume a 35% tax rate in all years.

(b) Compute the cumulative effect of the change in accounting principle from weighted average to FIFO inventory pricing.

(c) Show comparative income statements for Zehms Company, beginning with income before income tax, as presented on the 2012 income statement.

show how comprehensive income is reported using the second income statement format 564717

E 16 The following information was taken from the records of Gibson Inc. for the year 2012: income tax applicable to income from continuing operations $119,000; income tax applicable to loss on discontinued operations $25,500; income tax applicable to extraordinary gain $32,300; income tax applicable to extraordinary loss $20,400; and unrealized holding gain on availablefor sale securities $15,000.

Extraordinary gain

95,000

Loss on discontinued operations

75,000

Administrative expenses

240,000

Rent revenue

40,000

Extraordinary loss

60,000

Cash dividends declared

$150,000

Retained earnings January 1, 2012

600,000

Cost of goods sold

850,000

Selling expenses

300,000

Sales revenue

1,700,000

Shares outstanding during 2012 were 100,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a single step income statement for 2012.

(b) Prepare a retained earnings statement for 2012.

(c) Show how comprehensive income is reported using the second income statement format.

annual depreciation rates are buildings 4 and equipment 10 salvage value is estimate 564641

E 10 (Adjusting Entries) Uhura Resort opened for business on June 1 with eight air conditioned units. Its trial balance on August 31 is as follows.

UHURA RESORT
TRIAL BALANCE
AUGUST 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$19,600

Prepaid Insurance

4,500

Supplies

2,600

Land

20,000

Buildings

120,000

Equipment

16,000

Accounts Payable

$4,500

Unearned Rent Revenue

4,600

Mortgage Payable

50,000

Common Stock

100,000

Dividends

5,000

Rent Revenue

86,200

Salaries and Wages Expense

44,800

Utilities Expenses

9,200

Maintenance and Repairs Expense

3,600

245300

$245,300

Other data:

1. The balance in prepaid insurance is a one year premium paid on June 1, 2012.

2. An inventory count on August 31 shows $650 of supplies on hand.

3. Annual depreciation rates are buildings (4%) and equipment (10%). Salvage value is estimated to be 10% of cost.

4. Unearned Rent Revenue of $3,800 was earned prior to August 31.

5. Salaries of $375 were unpaid at August 31.

6. Rentals of $800 were due from tenants at August 31.

7. The mortgage interest rate is 8% per year.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the adjusting entries on August 31 for the 3 month period June 1–August 31. (Omit explanations.)

(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance on August 31.

flynn design agency was founded by kevin flynn in january 2006 presented below is th 564643

E 12 (Prepare Financial Statements) Flynn Design Agency was founded by Kevin Flynn in January 2006. Presented below is the adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2012.

FLYNN DESIGN AGENCY
ADJUSTED TRIAL BALANCE
DECEMBER 31, 2012

Dr.

Cr.

Cash

$10,000

Accounts Receivable

21,500

Supplies

5,000

Prepaid Insurance

2,500

Equipment

60,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$35,000

Accounts Payable

8,000

Interest Payable

150

Notes Payable

5,000

Unearned Service Revenue

5,600

Salaries and Wages Payable

1,300

Common Stock

10,000

Retained Earnings

3,500

Service Revenue

58,500

Salaries and Wages Expense

12,300

Insurance Expense

850

Interest Expense

500

Depreciation Expense

7,000

Supplies Expense

3,400

Rent Expense

4,000

$127,050

127,050

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and a statement of retained earnings for the year ending December 31, 2012, and an unclassified balance sheet at December 31.

(b) Answer the following questions.

(1) If the note has been outstanding 6 months, what is the annual interest rate on that note?

(2) If the company paid $17,500 in salaries and wages in 2012, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable on December 31, 2011?

presented below is financial information for two different companies 564646

E 15 Presented below is financial information for two different companies.

Shabbona Company

Jenkins Company

Sales revenue

$90,000

(d)

Sales returns and allowances

(a)

$5,000

Net sales

85,000

90,000

Cost of goods sold

56,000

(e)

Gross profi t

(b)

38,000

Operating expenses

15,000

23,000

Net income

(c)

15,000

Instructions

Compute the missing amounts.

presented below are selected account balances for alistair co as of december 31 2012 564647

E 16 Presented below are selected account balances for Alistair Co. as of December 31, 2012.

Inventory 12/31/12

60,000

Common Stock

75,000

Retained Earnings

45,000

Dividends

18,000

Sales Returns and Allowances

$12,000

Sales Discounts

15,000

Sales Revenue

390,000

Cost of Goods Sold

$235,700

Selling Expenses

16,000

Administrative Expenses

38,000

Income Tax Expense

30,000

Instructions

Prepare closing entries for Alistair Co. on December 31, 2012. (Omit explanations.)

snyder miniature golf and driving range inc was opened on march 1 by mickey snyder 564648

E 17 Snyder Miniature Golf and Driving Range Inc. was opened on March 1 by Mickey Snyder. The following selected events and transactions occurred during March.

Mar. 1

Invested $60,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

3

Purchased Michelle Wie’s Golf Land for $38,000 cash. The price consists of land$10,000; building $22,000; and equipment $6,000. (Make one compound entry.)

5

Advertised the opening of the driving range and miniature golf course, paying advertising expenses of $1,600.

6

Paid cash $1,480 for a one year insurance policy.

10

Purchased golf equipment for $2,500 from Young Company, payable in 30 days.

18

Received golf fees of $1,200 in cash.

25

Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend.

30

Paid wages of $900.

30

Paid Young Company in full.

31

Received $750 of fees in cash.

Snyder uses the following accounts: Cash, Prepaid Insurance, Land, Buildings, Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, Dividends, Service Revenue, Advertising Expense, and Salaries and Wages Expense.

Instructions

Journalize the March transactions. (Provide explanations for the journal entries.)

corinne dunbar m d maintains the accounting records of dunbar clinic on a cash basis 564649

E 18 (Cash to Accrual Basis) Corinne Dunbar, M.D., maintains the accounting records of Dunbar Clinic on a cash basis. During 2012, Dr. Dunbar collected $142,600 from her patients and paid $60,470 in expenses. At January 1, 2012, and December 31, 2012, she had accounts receivable, unearned service revenue, accrued expenses, and prepaid expenses as follows.

1 Jan 12

December 31, 2012

Accounts receivable

$11,250

$15,927

Unearned service revenue

2,840

4,111

Accrued expenses

3,435

2,108

Prepaid expenses

1,917

3,232

Instructions

Prepare a schedule that converts Dr. Dunbar’s “excess of cash collected over cash disbursed” for the year 2012 to net income on an accrual basis for the year 2012.

latta corp maintains its financial records on the cash basis of accounting intereste 564650

E 19 (Cash and Accrual Basis) Latta Corp. maintains its financial records on the cash basis of accounting. Interested in securing a long term loan from its regular bank, Latta Corp. requests you as its independent CPA to convert its cash basis income statement data to the accrual basis. You are provided with the following summarized data covering

2011

2012

2013

Cash receipts from sales:

On 2011 sales

$290,000

$160,000

$30,000

On 2012 sales

–0–

355,000

90,000

On 2013 sales

408,000

Cash payments for expenses:

On 2011 expenses

185,000

67,000

25,000

On 2012 expenses

40,000a

170,000

55,000

On 2013 expenses

45,000b

218,000

aPrepayments of 2012 expenses.

bPrepayments of 2013 expenses.

Instructions

(a) Using the data above, prepare abbreviated income statements for the years 2011 and 2012 on the cash basis.

(b) Using the data above, prepare abbreviated income statements for the years 2011 and 2012 on the accrual basis.

when the accounts of constantine inc are examined the adjusting data listed below ar 564651

E 20 When the accounts of Constantine Inc. are examined, the adjusting data listed below are uncovered on December 31, the end of an annual fiscal period.

1. The prepaid insurance account shows a debit of $6,000, representing the cost of a 2 year fire insurance policy dated August 1 of the current year.

2. On November 1, Rent Revenue was credited for $2,400, representing revenue from a subrental for a 3 month period beginning on that date.

3. Purchase of advertising supplies for $800 during the year was recorded in the Advertising Expense account. On December 31, advertising supplies of $290 are on hand.

4. Interest of $770 has accrued on notes payable.

Instructions

Prepare the following in general journal form.

(a) The adjusting entry for each item.

(b) The reversing entry for each item where appropriate.

listed below are the transactions of yasunari kawabata d d s 564652

P 1 Listed below are the transactions of Yasunari Kawabata, D.D.S., for the month of September.

Sept. 1 Kawabata begins practice as a dentist and invests $20,000 cash.

2 Purchases dental equipment on account from Green Jacket Co. for $17,280.

4 Pays rent for office space, $680 for the month.

4 Employs a receptionist, Michael Bradley.

5 Purchases dental supplies for cash, $942.

8 Receives cash of $1,690 from patients for services performed.

10 Pays miscellaneous office expenses, $430.

14 Bills patients $5,820 for services performed.

18 Pays Green Jacket Co. on account, $3,600.

19 Withdraws $3,000 cash from the business for personal use.

20 Receives $980 from patients on account.

25 Bills patients $2,110 for services performed.

30 Pays the following expenses in cash: Salaries and wages $1,800; miscellaneous office expenses $85.

30 Dental supplies used during September, $330.

Instructions

(a) Enter the transactions shown above in appropriate general ledger accounts (use T accounts). Use the following ledger accounts: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Equipment, Accumulated Depreciation Equipment, Accounts Payable, Owner’s Capital, Service Revenue, Rent Expense, Office Expense, Salaries and Wages Expense, Supplies Expense, Depreciation Expense, and Income Summary. Allow 10 lines for the Cash and Income Summary accounts, and 5 lines for each of the other accounts needed. Record depreciation using a 5 year life on the equipment, the straight line method, and no salvage value. Do not use a drawing account.

(b) Prepare a trial balance.

(c) Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and an unclassified balance sheet.

(d) Close the ledger.

(e) Prepare a post closing trial balance.

a review of the ledger of baylor company at december 31 2012 produces the following 564653

P 3 A review of the ledger of Baylor Company at December 31, 2012, produces the following data pertaining to the preparation of annual adjusting entries.

1. Salaries and Wages Payable $0. There are eight employees. Salaries and wages are paid every Friday for the current week. Five employees receive $700 each per week, and three employees earn $600 each per week. December 31 is a Tuesday. Employees do not work weekends. All employees worked the last 2 days of December.

2. Unearned Rent Revenue $429,000. The company began subleasing office space in its new building on November 1. Each tenant is required to make a $5,000 security deposit that is not refundable until occupancy is terminated. At December 31, the company had the following rental contracts that are paid in full for the entire term of the lease.

Date Term (in months) Monthly Rent Number of Leases

Date

Term (in months)

Monthly Rent

Number of Leases

Nov. 1

6

$6,000

5

Dec. 1

6

$8,500

4

3. Prepaid Advertising $13,200. This balance consists of payments on two advertising contracts. The contracts provide for monthly advertising in two trade magazines. The terms of the contracts are as shown below.

Contract

Date

Amount

Number of Magazine Issues

A650

may 1

$6,000

12

B974

Oct. 1

7,200

24

The first advertisement runs in the month in which the contract is signed.

4. Notes Payable $60,000. This balance consists of a note for one year at an annual interest rate of 12%, dated June 1.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries at December 31, 2012.

the accounts listed below appeared in the december 31 trial balance of the saved the 564655

P 5 The accounts listed below appeared in the December 31 trial balance of the Saved Theater.

Debit

Credit

Equipment

$192,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

$60,000

Notes Payable

90,000

Admissions Revenue

380,000

Advertising Expense

13,680

Salaries and Wages Expense

57,600

Interest Expense

$1,400

Instructions

(a) From the account balances listed above and the information given below, prepare the annual adjusting entries necessary on December 31. (Omit explanations.)

(1) The equipment has an estimated life of 16 years and a salvage value of $24,000 at the end of that time. (Use straight line method.)

(2) The note payable is a 90 day note given to the bank October 20 and bearing interest at 8%. (Use 360 days for denominator.)

(3) In December, 2,000 coupon admission books were sold at $30 each. They could be used for admission any time after January 1.

(4) Advertising expense paid in advance and included in Advertising Expense $1,100.

(5) Salaries and wages accrued but unpaid $4,700.

(b) What amounts should be shown for each of the following on the income statement for the year?

(1) Interest expense..

(2) Admissions revenue.

(3) Advertising expense

(4) Salaries and wages expense.

presented below are the trial balance and the other information related to yorkis pe 564656

P 6 Presented below are the trial balance and the other information related to Yorkis Perez, a consulting engineer.

YORKIS PEREZ, CONSULTING ENGINEER
TRIAL BALANCE
DECEMBER 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$29,500

Accounts Receivable

49,600

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

Inventory

1,960

Prepaid Insurance

1,100

Equipment

$25,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

6,250

Notes Payable

7,200

Owner’s Capital

35,010

Service Revenue

100,000

Rent Expense

9,750

Salaries and Wages Expense

30,500

Utilities Expenses

$1,080

Offi ce Expense

720

$149,210

$149,210

1. Fees received in advance from clients $6,000.

2. Services performed for clients that were not recorded by December 31, $4,900.

3. Bad debt expense for the year is $1,430.

4. Insurance expired during the year $480.

5. Equipment is being depreciated at 10% per year.

6. Yorkis Perez gave the bank a 90 day, 10% note for $7,200 on December 1, 2012.

7. Rent of the building is $750 per month. The rent for 2012 has been paid, as has that for January 2013.

8. Office salaries and wages earned but unpaid December 31, 2012, $2,510.

Instructions

(a) From the trial balance and other information given, prepare annual adjusting entries as of December 31, 2012. (Omit explanations.)

(b) Prepare an income statement for 2012, a statement of owner’s equity, and a classified balance sheet. Yorkis Perez withdrew $17,000 cash for personal use during the year.

vedula advertising agency was founded by murali vedula in january 2007 presented on 564657

P3 8 Vedula Advertising Agency was founded by Murali Vedula in January 2007. Presented on the next page are both the adjusted and unadjusted trial balances as of December 31, 2012.

VEDULA ADVERTISING AGENCY
TRIAL BALANCE
DECEMBER 31, 2012

Unadjusted

Adjusted

Dr.

cr.

Dr.

cr.

Cash

$11,000

$11,000

Accounts Receivable

16,000

19,500

Supplies

9,400

6,500

Prepaid Insurance

3,350

1,790

Equipment

$60,000

60,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

25,000

$30,000

Notes Payable

8,000

8,000

Accounts Payable

2,000

2,000

Interest Payable

0

560

Unearned Service Revenue

$5,000

3,100

Salaries and Wages Payable

$0

820

Common Stock

20,000

20,000

Retained Earnings

5,500

5,500

Dividends

10000

10,000

Service Revenue

57,600

63,000

Salaries and Wages Expense

9,820

Insurance Expense

1,560

Interest Expense

560

Depreciation Expense

5,000

Supplies Expense

2,900

Rent Expense

4,350

4,350

123,100

$123,100

$123,100

$132,980

Instructions

(a) Journalize the annual adjusting entries that were made.

(b) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, and a classified balance sheet at December 31.

(c) Identify which accounts should be closed on December 31.

(d) If the note has been outstanding 10 months, what is the annual interest rate on that note?

(e) If the company paid $10,500 in salaries and wages in 2012, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable on December 31, 2011?

presented below is the december 31 trial balance of new york boutique 564659

P 10 Presented below is the December 31 trial balance of New York Boutique.

NEW YORK BOUTIQUE
TRIAL BALANCE
DECEMBER 31

Debit

Credit

Cash

$18,500

Accounts Receivable

32,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$700.00

Inventory, December 31

80,000

Prepaid Insurance

$5,100

Equipment

84,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

35,000

Notes Payable

28,000

Common Stock

80,600

Retained Earnings

$10,000

Sales Revenue

$600,000

Cost of Goods Sold

408,000

Salaries and Wages Expense (sales)

50,000

Advertising Expense

6,700

Salaries and Wages Expense (administrative)

65,000

Supplies Expense

5,000

$754,300

$754,300

Instructions

(a) Construct T accounts and enter the balances shown.

(b) Prepare adjusting journal entries for the following and post to the T accounts. (Omit explanations.) Open additional T accounts as necessary. (The books are closed yearly on December 31.)

(1) Bad debt expense is estimated to be $1,400.

(2) Equipment is depreciated based on a 7 year life (no salvage value).

(3) Insurance expired during the year $2,550.

(4) Interest accrued on notes payable $3,360.

(5) Sales salaries and wages earned but not paid $2,400.

(6) Advertising paid in advance $700.

(7) Office supplies on hand $1,500, charged to Supplies Expense when purchased.

(c) Prepare closing entries and post to the accounts.

on january 1 2012 norma smith and grant wood formed a computer sales and service ent 564660

P 11 On January 1, 2012, Norma Smith and Grant Wood formed a computer sales and service enterprise in Soapsville, Arkansas, by investing $90,000 cash. The new company, Arkansas Sales and Service, has the following transactions during January.

1. Pays $6,000 in advance for 3 months’ rent of office, showroom, and repair space.

2. Purchases 40 personal computers at a cost of $1,500 each, 6 graphics computers at a cost of $2,500 each, and 25 printers at a cost of $300 each, paying cash upon delivery.

3. Sales, repair, and office employees earn $12,600 in salaries and wages during January, of which $3,000 was still payable at the end of January.

4. Sells 30 personal computers at $2,550 each, 4 graphics computers for $3,600 each, and 15 printers for $500 each; $75,000 is received in cash in January, and $23,400 is sold on a deferred payment basis.

5. Other operating expenses of $8,400 are incurred and paid for during January; $2,000 of incurred expenses are payable at January 31.

Instructions

(a) Using the transaction data above, prepare

(1) A cash basis income statement and

(2) An accrual basis income statement for the month of January.

(b) Using the transaction data above, prepare

(1) A cash basis balance sheet and

(2) An accrual basis balance sheet as of January 31, 2012.

(c) Identify the items in the cash basis financial statements that make cash basis accounting inconsistent with the theory underlying the elements of financial statements.

a patent infringement suit brought 2 years ago against the company by another compan 564680

Discuss the appropriate treatment in the financial statements of each of the following.

(a) An amount of $113,000 realized in excess of the cash surrender value of an insurance policy on the life of one of the founders of the company who died during the year.

(b) A profit sharing bonus to employees computed as a percentage of net income.

(c) Additional depreciation on factory machinery because of an error in computing depreciation for the previous year.

(d) Rent received from subletting a portion of the office space.

(e) A patent infringement suit, brought 2 years ago against the company by another company, was settled this year by a cash payment of $725,000.

(f) A reduction in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts balance, because the account appears to be considerably in excess of the probable loss from uncollectible receivables.

in 2012 a flood destroyed a warehouse that had a book value of 1 600 000 floods are 564681

Indicate where the following items would ordinarily appear on the financial statements of Boleyn, Inc. for the year 2012.

(a) The service life of certain equipment was changed from 8 to 5 years. If a 5 year life had been used previously, additional depreciation of $425,000 would have been charged.

(b) In 2012, a flood destroyed a warehouse that had a book value of $1,600,000. Floods are rare in this locality.

(c) In 2012, the company wrote off $1,000,000 of inventory that was considered obsolete.

(d) An income tax refund related to the 2009 tax year was received.

(e) In 2009, a supply warehouse with an expected useful life of 7 years was erroneously expensed.

(f) Boleyn, Inc. changed from weighted average to FIFO inventory pricing.

starr co had sales revenue of 540 000 in 2012 other items recorded during the year w 564695

BE 1 Starr Co. had sales revenue of $540,000 in 2012. Other items recorded during the year were:

Cost of goods sold

$330,000

Salaries and wages expense

120,000

Income tax expense

25,000

Increase in value of company reputation

15,000

Other operating expenses

10,000

Unrealized gain on value of patents

20,000

Prepare a single step income statement for Starr for 2012. Starr has 100,000 shares of stock outstanding.

presented below are changes in all the account balances of jackson furniture co duri 564705

E 1 Presented below are changes in all the account balances of Jackson Furniture Co. during the current year, except for retained earnings.

Increase
Decrease)

Increase
Decrease)

Cash

$69,000

Accounts Payable

($51,000)

Accounts Receivable (net)

45,000

Bonds Payable

82,000

Inventory

127,000

Common Stock

125,000

Investments

47,000

Paid in Capital in Excess of Par–Common Stock

13,000

Instructions

Compute the net income for the current year, assuming that there were no entries in the Retained Earnings account except for net income and a dividend declaration of $24,000 which was paid in the current year.

presented below is certain account balances of wade products co 564706

E 2 Presented below is certain account balances of Wade Products Co.

Rent revenue

$6,500

Sales discounts

$7,800

Interest expense

12,700

Selling expenses

99,400

Beginning retained earnings

114,400

Sales revenue

400,000

Ending retained earnings

134,000

Income tax expense

26,600

Dividend revenue

71,000

Cost of goods sold

184,400

Sales returns and allowances

12,400

Administrative expenses

82,500

Instructions

From the foregoing, compute the following: (a) total net revenue, (b) net income, (c) dividends declared during the current year.

presented below are a number of business transactions that occurred during the curre 564586

E 9 Presented below are a number of business transactions that occurred during the current year for Gonzales, Inc.

Instructions

In each of the situations, discuss the appropriateness of the journal entries in terms of generally accepted accounting principles.

(a) The president of Gonzales, Inc. used his expense account to purchase a new Suburban solely for personal use. The following journal entry was made. Miscellaneous Expense 29,000

Cash 29,000

(b) Merchandise inventory that cost $620,000 is reported on the balance sheet at $690,000, the expected selling price less estimated selling costs. The following entry was made to record this increase in value.

Inventory 70,000, Sales Revenue 70,000

(c) The company is being sued for $500,000 by a customer who claims damages for personal injury apparently caused by a defective product. Company attorneys feel extremely confident that the company will have no liability for damages resulting from the situation. Nevertheless, the company decides to make the following entry.

Loss from Lawsuit 500,000

Liability for Lawsuit 500,000

(d) Because the general level of prices increased during the current year, Gonzales, Inc. determined that there was a $16,000 understatement of depreciation expense on its equipment and decided to record it in its accounts. The following entry was made. Depreciation Expense 16,000 Accumulated Depreciation —Equipment 16,000

(e) Gonzales, Inc. has been concerned about whether intangible assets could generate cash in case of liquidation. As a consequence, goodwill arising from a purchase transaction during the current year and recorded at $800,000 was written off as follows. Retained Earnings 800,000 Goodwill 800,000

(f) Because of a “fire sale,” equipment obviously worth $200,000 was acquired at a cost of $155,000. The following entry was made. Equipment 200,000, Cash 155,000, Sales Revenue 45,000

depreciation expense on the building for the year was 60 000 because the building wa 564587

E 10 Presented below is information related to Anderson, Inc.

Instructions

Comment on the appropriateness of the accounting procedures followed by Anderson, Inc.

(a) Depreciation expense on the building for the year was $60,000. Because the building was increasing in value during the year, the controller decided to charge the depreciation expense to retained earnings instead of to net income. The following entry is recorded.

Retained Earnings 60,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings 60,000

(b) Materials were purchased on January 1, 2012, for $120,000 and this amount was entered in the Materials account. On December 31, 2012, the materials would have cost $141,000, so the following entry is made.

Inventory 21,000, Gain on Inventories 21,000

(c) During the year, the company purchased equipment through the issuance of common stock. The stock had a par value of $135,000 and a fair value of $450,000. The fair value of the equipment was not easily determinable. The company recorded this transaction as follows. Equipment 135,000 Common Stock 135,000 7

(d) Durng the year, the company sold certain equipment for $285,000, recognizing a gain of $69,000. Because the controller believed that new equipment would be needed in the near future, she decided to defer the gain and amortize it over the life of any new equipment purchased.

(e) An order for $61,500 has been received from a customer for products on hand. This order was shipped on January 9, 2013. The company made the following entry in 2012.

Accounts Receivable 61,500

Sales Revenue 61,500

wayne cooper has some questions regarding the theoretical framework in which gaap is 564588

CA 1 Wayne Cooper has some questions regarding the theoretical framework in which GAAP is set. He knows that the FASB and other predecessor organizations have attempted to develop a conceptual framework for accounting theory formulation. Yet, Wayne’s supervisors have indicated that these theoretical frameworks have little value in the practical sense (i.e., in the real world). Wayne did notice that accounting rules seem to be established after the fact rather than before. He thought this indicated a lack of theory structure but never really questioned the process at school because he was too busy doing the homework. Wayne feels that some of his anxiety about accounting theory and accounting semantics could be alleviated by identifying the basic concepts and definitions accepted by the profession and considering them in light of his current work. By doing this, he hopes to develop an appropriate connection between theory and practice.

Instructions

(a) Help Wayne recognize the purpose of and benefit of a conceptual framework.

(b) Identify any Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts issued by FASB that may be helpful to Wayne in developing his theoretical background.

the financial accounting standards board fasb has developed a conceptual framework f 564589

CA 2 The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) has developed a conceptual framework for financial accounting and reporting. The FASB has issued eight Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts. These statements are intended to set forth the objective and fundamentals that will be the basis for developing financial accounting and reporting standards. The objective identifies the goals and purposes of financial reporting. The fundamentals are the underlying concepts of financial accounting that guide the selection of transactions, events, and circumstances to be accounted for; their recognition and measurement; and the means of summarizing and communicating them to interested parties. The purpose of the statement on qualitative characteristics is to examine the characteristics that make accounting information useful. These characteristics or qualities of information are the ingredients that make information useful and the qualities to be sought when accounting choices are made.

Instructions

(a) Identify and discuss the benefits that can be expected to be derived from the FASB’s conceptual framework study.

(b) What is the most important quality for accounting information as identified in the conceptual framework? Explain why it is the most important.

(c) Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 8 describes a number of key characteristics or qualities for accounting information. Briefly discuss the importance of any three of these qualities for financial reporting purposes.

homer winslow and jane alexander are discussing various aspects of the fasb rsquo s 564590

CA 3 Homer Winslow and Jane Alexander are discussing various aspects of the FASB’s concepts statement on the objective of financial reporting. Homer indicates that this pronouncement provides little, if any, guidance to the practicing professional in resolving accounting controversies. He believes that the statement provides such broad guidelines that it would be impossible to apply the objective to present day reporting problems. Jane concedes this point but indicates that the objective is still needed to provide a starting point for the FASB in helping to improve financial reporting.

Instructions

(a) Indicate the basic objective established in the conceptual framework.

(b) What do you think is the meaning of Jane’s statement that the FASB needs a starting point to resolve accounting controversies?

accounting information provides useful information about business transactions and e 564591

CA 4 Accounting information provides useful information about business transactions and events. Those who provide and use financial reports must often select and evaluate accounting alternatives. The FASB statement on qualitative characteristics of accounting information examines the characteristics of accounting information that make it useful for decision making. It also points out that various limitations inherent in the measurement and reporting process may necessitate trade offs or sacrifices among the characteristics of useful information.

Instructions

(a) Describe briefly the following characteristics of useful accounting information.

(1) Relevance

(2) Faithful representation

(3) Understandability

(4) Comparability

(5) Consistency

(b) For each of the following pairs of information characteristics, give an example of a situation in which one of the characteristics may be sacrificed in return for a gain in the other.

(1) Relevance and faithful representation.

(2) Relevance and consistency.

(3) Comparability and consistency.

(4) Relevance and understandability.

(c) What criterion should be used to evaluate trade offs between information characteristics?

after the presentation of your report on the examination of the financial statements 564592

CA 5 After the presentation of your report on the examination of the financial statements to the board of directors of Piper Publishing Company, one of the new directors expresses surprise that the income statement assumes that an equal proportion of the revenue is earned with the publication of every issue of the company’s magazine. She feels that the “crucial event” in the process of earning revenue in the magazine business is the cash sale of the subscription. She says that she does not understand why most of the revenue cannot be “recognized” in the period of the sale.

Instructions

(a) List the various accepted times for recognizing revenue in the accounts and explain when the methods are appropriate.

(b) Discuss the propriety of timing the recognition of revenue in Piper Publishing Company’s accounts with:

(1) The cash sale of the magazine subscription.

(2) The publication of the magazine every month.

(3) Both events, by recognizing a portion of the revenue with the cash sale of the magazine subscription and a portion of the revenue with the publication of the magazine every month.

on june 5 2011 argot corporation signed a contract with lopez associates under which 564593

CA 6 On June 5, 2011, Argot Corporation signed a contract with Lopez Associates under which Lopez agreed (1) to construct an office building on land owned by Argot, (2) to accept responsibility for procuring financing for the project and finding tenants, and (3) to manage the property for 35 years. The annual net income from the project, after debt service, was to be divided equally between Argot Corporation and Lopez Associates. Lopez was to accept its share of future net income as full payment for its services in construction, obtaining finances and tenants, and management of the project. By May 31, 2012, the project was nearly completed, and tenants had signed leases to occupy 90% of the available space at annual rentals totaling $4,000,000. It is estimated that, after operating expenses and debt service, the annual net income will amount to $1,500,000. The management of Lopez Associates believed that (a) the economic benefit derived from the contract with Argot should be reflected on its financial statements for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, and directed that revenue be accrued in an amount equal to the commercial value of the services Lopez had rendered during the year, (b) this amount should be carried in contracts receivable, and (c) all related

expenditures should be charged against the revenue.

Instructions

(a) Explain the main difference between the economic concept of business income as reflected by Lopez’s management and the measurement of income under generally accepted accounting principles.

(b) Discuss the factors to be considered in determining when revenue should be recognized for the purpose of accounting measurement of periodic income.

(c) Is the belief of Lopez’s management in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles for the measurement of revenue and expense for the year ended May 31, 2012? Support your opinion by discussing the application to this case of the factors to be considered for asset measurement and revenue and expense recognition.

an accountant must be familiar with the concepts involved in determining earnings of 564594

CA 7 An accountant must be familiar with the concepts involved in determining earnings of a business entity. The amount of earnings reported for a business entity is dependent on the proper recognition, in general, of revenue and expense for a given time period. In some situations, costs are recognized as expenses at the time of product sale. In other situations, guidelines have been developed for recognizing costs as expenses or losses by other criteria.

Instructions

(a) Explain the rationale for recognizing costs as expenses at the time of product sale.

(b) What is the rationale underlying the appropriateness of treating costs as expenses of a period instead of assigning the costs to an asset? Explain.

(c) In what general circumstances would it be appropriate to treat a cost as an asset instead of as an expense? Explain.

(d) Some expenses are assigned to specific accounting periods on the basis of systematic and rational allocation of asset cost. Explain the underlying rationale for recognizing expenses on the basis of systematic and rational allocation of asset cost.

(e) Identify the conditions under which it would be appropriate to treat a cost as a loss. (AICPA adapted)

accountants try to prepare income statements that are as accurate as possible a basi 564595

CA 8 Accountants try to prepare income statements that are as accurate as possible. A basic requirement in preparing accurate income statements is to record costs and revenues properly. Proper recognition of costs and revenues requires that costs resulting from typical business operations be recognized in the period in which they expired.

Instructions

(a) List three criteria that can be used to determine whether such costs should appear as charges in the income statement for the current period.

(b) As generally presented in financial statements, the following items or procedures have been criticized as improperly recognizing costs. Briefly discuss each item from the viewpoint of matching costs with revenues and suggest corrective or alternative means of presenting the financial information.

(1) Receiving and handling costs.

(2) Cash discounts on purchases.

daniel barenboim sells and erects shell houses that is frame structures that are com 564596

CA 9 Daniel Barenboim sells and erects shell houses, that is, frame structures that are completely finished on the outside but are unfinished on the inside except for flooring, partition studding, and ceiling joists. Shell houses are sold chiefly to customers who are handy with tools and who have time to do the interior wiring, plumbing, wall completion and finishing, and other work necessary to make the shell houses livable dwellings. Barenboim buys shell houses from a manufacturer in unassembled packages consisting of all lumber, roofing, doors, windows, and similar materials necessary to complete a shell house. Upon commencing operations in a new area, Barenboim buys or leases land as a site for its local warehouse, field office, and display houses. Sample display houses are erected at a total cost of $30,000 to $44,000 including the cost of the unassembled packages. The chief element of cost of the display houses is the unassembled packages, inasmuch as erection is a short, low cost operation. Old sample models are torn down or altered into new models every 3 to 7 years. Sample display houses have little salvage value because dismantling and moving costs amount to nearly as much as the cost of an unassembled package.

Instructions

(a) A choice must be made between (1) expensing the costs of sample display houses in the periods in which the expenditure is made and (2) spreading the costs over more than one period. Discuss the advantages of each method.

(b) Would it be preferable to amortize the cost of display houses on the basis of (1) the passage of time or (2) the number of shell houses sold? Explain. (AICPA adapted)

recently your uncle carlos beltran who knows that you always have your eye out for a 564597

CA 10 (Qualitative Characteristics) Recently, your Uncle Carlos Beltran, who knows that you always have your eye out for a profitable investment, has discussed the possibility of your purchasing some corporate bonds. He suggests that you may wish to get in on the “ground floor” of this deal. The bonds being issued by Neville Corp. are 10 year debentures which promise a 40% rate of return. Neville manufactures novelty/party items. You have told Neville that, unless you can take a look at its financial statements, you would not feel comfortable about such an investment. Believing that this is the chance of a life time, Uncle Carlos has procured a copy of Neville’s most recent, unaudited financial statements which are a year old. These statements were prepared by Mrs. Andy Neville. You peruse these statements, and they are quite impressive. The balance sheet showed a debt to equity ratio of 0.10 and, for the year shown, the company reported net income of $2,424,240. The financial statements are not shown in comparison with amounts from other years. In addition, no significant note disclosures about inventory valuation, depreciation methods, loan agreements, etc. are available.

Instructions

Write a letter to Uncle Carlos explaining why it would be unwise to base an investment decision on the financial statements that he has provided to you. Be sure to explain why these financial statements are neither relevant nor representationally faithful.

the aicpa special committee on financial reporting proposed the following constraint 564599

CA 12 The AICPA Special Committee on Financial Reporting proposed the following constraints related to financial reporting.

1. Business reporting should exclude information outside of management’s expertise or for which management is not the best source, such as information about competitors.

2. Management should not be required to report information that would significantly harm the company’s competitive position.

3. Management should not be required to provide forecasted financial statements. Rather, management should provide information that helps users forecast for themselves the company’s financial future.

4. Other than for financial statements, management need report only the information it knows. That is, management should be under no obligation to gather information it does not have, or does not need, to manage the business.

5. Companies should present certain elements of business reporting only if users and management agree they should be reported—a concept of flexible reporting.

6. Companies should not have to report forward looking information unless there are effective deterrents to unwarranted litigation that discourages companies from doing so.

Instructions

For each item, briefly discuss how the proposed constraint addresses concerns about the costs and benefits of financial reporting.

the trial balance of geronimo company shown on the next page does not balance 564634

E 2 The trial balance of Geronimo Company, shown on the next page, does not balance. Your review of the ledger reveals the following: (a) Each account had a normal balance. (b) The debit footings in Prepaid Insurance, Accounts Payable, and Property Tax Expense were each understated $1,000. (c) A transposition error was made in Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue; the correct balances for Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue are $2,750 and $6,690, respectively. (d) A debit posting to Advertising Expense of $300 was omitted. (e) A $3,200 cash drawing by the owner was debited to Owner’s Capital and credited to Cash.

GERONIMO COMPANY
TRIAL BALANCE
APRIL 30, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$2,100

Accounts Receivable

2,570

Prepaid Insurance

700

Equipment

$8,000

Accounts Payable

4,500

Property Taxes Payable

560

Owner’s Capital

11,200

Service Revenue

6,960

Salaries and Wages Expense

4,200

Advertising Expense

1,100

Property Tax Expense

800

$18,190

$24,500

Instructions

Prepare a correct trial balance

cash received from a customer on account was recorded both debit and credit as 1 580 564635

E 3 the following trial balance of Scarlatti Corporation does not balance.

SCARLATTI CORPORATION
TRIAL BALANCE
APRIL 30, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

5,912

Accounts Receivable

5,240

Supplies

2,967

Equipment

6,100

Accounts Payable

7,044

Common Stock

8,000

Retained Earnings

2,000

Service Revenue

5,200

Offi ce Expense

4,320

24,539

$22,244

An examination of the ledger shows these errors.

1. Cash received from a customer on account was recorded (both debit and credit) as $1,580 instead of $1,850.

2. The purchase on account of a computer costing $1,900 was recorded as a debit to Office Expense and a credit to Accounts Payable.

3. Services were performed on account for a client, $2,250, for which Accounts Receivable was debited $2,250 and Service Revenue was credited $225.

4. A payment of $95 for telephone charges was entered as a debit to Office Expenses and a debit to Cash.

5. The Service Revenue account was totaled at $5,200 instead of $5,280.

Instructions

From this information, prepare a corrected trial balance.

cash received from a customer on account was debited for 370 and accounts receivable 564636

E 4 The following trial balance of Oakley Co. does not balance.

OAKLEY CO.
TRIAL BALANCE
JUNE 30, 2012

Debit

Credit

Cash

$2,870

Accounts Receivable

3,231

Supplies

800

Equipment

3,800

Accounts Payable

2,666

Unearned Service Revenue

1,200

Common Stock

6,000

Retained Earnings

3,000

Service Revenue

2,380

Salaries and Wages Expense

3,400

Office Expense

940

$13,371

$16,916

Each of the listed accounts should have a normal balance per the general ledger. An examination of the ledger and journal reveals the following errors.

1. Cash received from a customer on account was debited for $370, and Accounts Receivable was credited for the same amount. The actual collection was for $730.

2. The purchase of a computer printer on account for $500 was recorded as a debit to Supplies for $500 and a credit to Accounts Payable for $500.

3. Services were performed on account for a client for $890. Accounts Receivable was debited for $890 and Service Revenue was credited for $89.

4. A payment of $65 for telephone charges was recorded as a debit to Office Expense for $65 and a debit to Cash for $65.

5. When the Unearned Service Revenue account was reviewed, it was found that $225 of the balance was earned prior to June 30.

6. A debit posting to Salaries and Wages Expense of $670 was omitted.

7. A payment on account for $206 was credited to Cash for $206 and credited to Accounts Payable for $260.

8. A dividend of $575 was debited to Salaries and Wages Expense for $575 and credited to Cash for $575.

Instructions

Prepare a correct trial balance. (Note: It may be necessary to add one or more accounts to the trial balance.)

one third of the unearned rent was earned during the quarter 564637

E 5 (Adjusting Entries) The ledger of Chopin Rental Agency on March 31 of the current year includes the following selected accounts before adjusting entries have been prepared.

Debit

Credit

Prepaid Insurance

$3,600.00

Supplies

2,800

Equipment

25,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

8,400

Notes Payable

20,000

Unearned Rent Revenue

6,300

Rent Revenue

60,000

Interest Expense

–0–

Salaries and Wages Expense

14,000

An analysis of the accounts shows the following.

1. The equipment depreciates $250 per month.

2. One third of the unearned rent was earned during the quarter.

3. Interest of $500 is accrued on the notes payable.

4. Supplies on hand total $650.

5. Insurance expires at the rate of $300 per month.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries at March 31, assuming that adjusting entries are made quarterly. Additional accounts are: Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Interest Payable, and Supplies Expense.

performed services for patients who had dental plan insurance at january 31 750 of s 564638

E 6 Stephen King, D.D.S., opened a dental practice on January 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.

1. Performed services for patients who had dental plan insurance. At January 31, $750 of such services was earned but not yet billed to the insurance companies.

2. Utility expenses incurred but not paid prior to January 31 totaled $520.

3. Purchased dental equipment on January 1 for $80,000, paying $20,000 in cash and signing a $60,000, 3 year note payable. The equipment depreciates $400 per month. Interest is $500 per month.

4. Purchased a one year malpractice insurance policy on January 1 for $15,000.

5. Purchased $1,600 of dental supplies. On January 31, determined that $400 of supplies were on hand.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries on January 31. (Omit explanations.) Account titles are Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment, Depreciation Expense, Service Revenue, Accounts Receivable, Insurance Expense, Interest Expense, Interest Payable, Prepaid Insurance, Supplies, Supplies Expense, Utilities Expenses, and Accounts Payable.

if the amount in supplies expense is the january 31 adjusting entry and 850 of suppl 564639

E 7 A partial adjusted trial balance of Safin Company at January 31, 2012, shows the following.

SAFIN COMPANY
ADJUSTED TRIAL BALANCE
JANUARY 31, 2012

Debit

Credit

Supplies

900

Prepaid Insurance

2,400

Salaries and Wages Payable

800

Unearned Revenue

750

Supplies Expense

950

Insurance Expense

400

Salaries and Wages Expense

1,800

Service Revenue

2000

Instructions

Answer the following questions, assuming the year begins January 1.

(a) If the amount in Supplies Expense is the January 31 adjusting entry, and $850 of supplies was purchased in January, what was the balance in Supplies on January 1?

(b) If the amount in Insurance Expense is the January 31 adjusting entry, and the original insurance premium was for one year, what was the total premium and when was the policy purchased?

(c) If $2,700 of salaries and wages was paid in January, what was the balance in Salaries and Wages Payable at December 31, 2011?

(d) If $1,600 was received in January for services performed in January, what was the balance in Unearned Service Revenue at December 31, 2011?

at the end of the month he had not yet received the month rsquo s utility bill based 564640

E 8 William Bryant is the new owner of Ace Computer Services. At the end of August 2012, his first month of ownership, Bryant is trying to prepare monthly financial statements. Below is some information related to unrecorded expenses that the business incurred during August.

1. At August 31, Bryant owed his employees $2,900 in salaries and wages that will be paid on September 1.

2. At the end of the month, he had not yet received the month’s utility bill. Based on past experience, he estimated the bill would be approximately $600.

3. On August 1, Bryant borrowed $60,000 from a local bank on a 15 year mortgage. The annual interest rate is 8%.

4. A telephone bill in the amount of $117 covering August charges is unpaid at August 31.

Instructions

Prepare the adjusting journal entries as of August 31, 2012, suggested by the information above.

how would layoffs that would occur as a consequence of dropping the chicken line pot 564556

(Product line) Festival Packing Company sells two major lines of products, fish and chicken, to grocery chains and food wholesalers. Income statements showing revenues and costs of fiscal year 2000 for each product line follow:

Fish

Chicken

Sales

$ 4,000,000

$ 1,800,000

Less: Cost of merchandise sold

(2,400,000)

(1,300,000)

Less: Commissions to salespeople

(400,000)

(150,000)

Less: Delivery costs

(600,000)

(120,000)

Less: Depreciation on equipment

(200,000)

(100,000)

Less: Salaries of division managers

(80,000)

(75,000)

Less: Allocated corporate costs

(100,000)

(100,000)

Net income (loss)

$ 220,000

$ (45,000)

Management is concerned about profitability of chicken sales and is considering the possibility of dropping the line. Management estimates that the equipment currently used to process chickens could be rented to a competitor for $85,000 annually. If the chicken product line is dropped, allocated corporate costs will decrease from a total of $200,000 to $185,000; and all employees, including the manager of the product line, would be dismissed. The depreciation would be unaffected by the decision, but $105,000 of the delivery costs charged to the chicken line could be eliminated if the chicken product line is dropped.

a. Recast the above income statements in a format that provides more information in making this decision regarding the chicken product line.

b. What is the net advantage or disadvantage (change in total company pretax profits) of continuing sales of chicken?

c. Should the company be concerned about losing sales of fish products if it drops the chicken line? Explain.

d. How would layoffs that would occur as a consequence of dropping the chicken line potentially adversely affect the whole company?

expansion of the georgia factory 564557

(Product line) You have been engaged to assist the management of Quality Chair Company in resolving certain decisions. Quality has its home office in Tennessee and leases facilities in Tennessee, Georgia, and Florida, which produce a high quality bean bag chair designed for residential use. The management of Quality has provided you with a projection of operations for fiscal 2001, the forthcoming year, as follows:

Total

Tennessee

Georgia

Florida

Sales

8,800,000

$ 4,400,000

$ 2,800,000

$ 1,600,000

Fixed costs:

Factory

2,200,000

$ 1,120,000

$ 560,000

$ 520,000

Administration

700,000

420,000

220,000

60,000

Variable costs

2,900,000

1,330,000

850,000

720,000

Allocated home office costs

1,000,000

450,000

350,000

200,000

Total

6,800,000)

$(3,320,000)

$(1,980,000)

$(1,500,000)

Pretax profit from operations

2,000,000

$ 1,080,000

$ 820,000

$ 100,000

The sales price per unit is $50. Due to the marginal results of operations in Florida, Quality has decided to cease operations and sell that factory’s machinery and equipment by the end of 2001. Managers expect proceeds from the sale of these assets will exceed the assets’ book values by enough to cover termination costs. However, Quality would like to continue serving its customers in that area if it is economically feasible and is considering one of the following three alternatives:

1. Expand the operations of the Georgia factory by using space that is currently idle. This move would result in the following changes in that factory’s operations

Increase over Factory’s

Sales

Current Operations

Fixed costs:

Factory

20%

Administration

10%

Under this proposal, variable costs would be $16 per unit sold.

2. Enter into a long term contract with a competitor who will serve that area’s customers. This competitor would pay Quality a royalty of $8 per unit based on an estimate of 30,000 units being sold.

3. Close the Florida factory and not expand the operations of the Georgia factory. To assist the management of Quality Chair Company in determining which alternative is more economically feasible, prepare a schedule computing Quality’s estimated pretax profit from total operations that would result from each of the following methods:

a. Expansion of the Georgia factory.

b. Negotiation of a long term contract on a royalty basis.

c. Shutdown the Florida operations with no expansion at other locations. Note: Total home office costs of $500,000 will remain the same under each situation. (AICPA adapted)

prepare a schedule by plant and in total computing eastern glass rsquo s budgeted co 564558

(Comprehensive) Eastern Glass Products has processing plants in Ohio and New Jersey. Both plants use recycled glass to produce jars that are used in food canning by a variety of food processors. The jars sell for $10 per hundred units. Budgeted revenues and costs for the year ending December 31, 2001, are:

(In $000)

Ohio

New Jersey

New Jersey

Sales

$1,100

$2,000

$2,000

Variable production costs:

Direct material

$ 275

$ 500

$ 500

Direct labor

330

500

500

Factory overhead

220

350

350

Fixed factory overhead

350

450

450

Fixed regional promotion costs

50

50

50

Allocated home office costs

55

100

100

Total costs

$1,280

$1,950

$1,950

Operating income (loss)

$ (180)

$ 50

$ 50

Home office costs are fixed, and are allocated to manufacturing plants on the basis of relative sales levels. Fixed regional promotional costs are discretionary advertising costs needed to obtain budgeted sales levels. Because of the budgeted operating loss, Eastern Glass is considering the possibility of ceasing operations at its Ohio plant. If Eastern Glass ceases operations at its Ohio plant, proceeds from the sale of plant assets will exceed asset book values and exactly cover all termination costs; fixed factory overhead costs of $25,000 would not be eliminated. Eastern Glass is considering the following three alternative plans: PLAN A: Expand Ohio’s operations from its budgeted 11,000,000 units to a budgeted 17,000,000 units. It is believed that this can be accomplished by increasing Ohio’s fixed regional promotional expenditures by $120,000. PLAN B: Close the Ohio plant and expand New Jersey’s operations from the current budgeted 20,000,000 units to 31,000,000 units in order to fill Ohio’s budgeted production of 11,000,000 units. The Ohio region would continue to incur promotional costs in order to sell the 11,000,000 units. All sales and costs would be budgeted through the New Jersey plant. PLAN C: Close the Ohio plant and enter into a long term contract with a competitor to serve the Ohio region’s customers. This competitor would pay Eastern Glass a royalty of $1.25 per 100 units sold. Eastern Glass would continue to incur fixed regional promotional costs to maintain sales of 11,000,000 units in the Ohio region.

a. Without considering the effects of implementing Plans A, B, and C, compute the number of units that must be produced and sold by the Ohio plant to cover its fixed factory overhead costs and fixed regional promotional costs.

b. Prepare a schedule by plant, and in total, computing Eastern Glass’s budgeted contribution margin and operating income resulting from the implementation of each of the following plans:

1. Plan A.

2. Plan B.

3. Plan C. (AICPA adapted)

district a expenses are allocated to the stores based on sales 564559

(Sales and profit improvement) Sixteen Candles is a retail organization that sells upscale clothing to girls and young women in the Northeast. Each year, store managers, in consultation with their supervisors, establish financial goals and then actual performance is captured by a monthly reporting system. One sales district of the firm, District A, contains three stores. This district has historically been a very poor performer. Consequently, its supervisor has been searching for ways to improve the performance of her three stores. For the month of May, the district supervisor has set performance goals with the managers of Stores 1 and 2. The managers will receive bonuses if certain performance measures are exceeded. The manager of Store 3 decided not to participate in the bonus scheme. Since the district supervisor is unsure what type of bonus will encourage better performance, the manager of Store 1 will receive a bonus based on sales in excess of budgeted sales of $570,000, while the manager of Store 2 will receive a bonus based on net income in excess of budgeted net income. The company’s net income goal for each store is 12 percent of sales. The budgeted sales for Store 2 are $530,000. Other pertinent data for May follow:

• At Store 1, sales were 40 percent of total District A sales while sales at Store 2 were 35 percent of total District A sales. The cost of goods sol at both stores was 42 percent of sales.

• Variable selling expenses (sales commissions) were 6 percent of sales for all stores and districts.

• Variable administrative expenses were 2.5 percent of sales for all stores and districts. • Maintenance cost includes janitorial and repair services and is a direct cost for each store. The store manager has complete control over this outlay; however, this cost should not be below 1 percent of sales.

• Advertising is considered a direct cost for each store and is completely under the control of the store manager. Store 1 spent two thirds of District A’s total outlay for advertising, which was ten times more than Store 2 spent on advertising.

• The rental expenses at Store 1 are 40 percent of District A’s total, while Store 2 incurs 30 percent of District A’s total.

• District A expenses are allocated to the stores based on sales.

a. Which store, Store 1 or Store 2, would appear to be generating the most profit under the new bonus scheme?

b. Which store, Store 1 or Store 2, would appear to be generating the most revenue under the new bonus scheme?

c. Why would Store 1 have an incentive to spend so much more on advertising than Store 2?

d. Which store manager has the most incentive to spend money on regular maintenance? Explain.

e. Which bonus scheme appears to offer the most incentive to improve the profit performance of the district in the short term? Long term?

hastings group is a multiproduct company with several manufacturing plants 564560

(Special order) Hastings Group is a multiproduct company with several manufacturing plants. The Cincinnati Plant manufactures and distributes two household cleaning and polishing compounds, regular and heavy duty, under the House Safe label. The forecasted operating results for the first six months of 2001, when 100,000 cases of each compound are expected to be manufactured and sold, are presented in the following statement HOUSESAFE COMPOUNDS—CINCINNATI PLANT Forecasted Results of Operations For the Six Month Period Ending June 30, 2001

(In $000)

Sales

Regular

Heavy Duty

Total

Cost of sales

$ 2,000

$ 3,000

$ 5,000

Gross profit

(1,600)

(1,900)

(3,500)

Selling and administrative expenses

$ 400

$ 1,100

$ 1,500

Variable

$ 400

$ 700

$ 1,100

Fixed*

240

360

600

Total selling and administrative expenses

$ (640)

$(1,060)

$(1,700)

Income (loss) before taxes

$ (240)

$ 40

$ (200)

$30 a case during the first six months of 2001. The manufacturing costs by case of product are presented in the following schedule.

COST PER CASE

Regular

Heavy Duty

Raw material

$ 7.00

$ 8.00

Direct labor

4.00

4.00

Variable manufacturing overhead

1.00

2.00

Fixed manufacturing overhead*

4.00

5.00

Total manufacturing cost

$16.00

$19.00

Variable selling and administrative costs

$ 4.00

$ 7.00

Each product is manufactured on a separate production line. Annual normal manufacturing capacity is 200,000 cases of each product. However, the plant is capable of producing 250,000 cases of regular compound and 350,000 cases of heavy duty compound annually. The schedule below reflects the consensus of top management regarding the price/volume alternatives for the House Safe products for the last six months of 2001. These are essentially the same alternatives management had during the first six months of 2001.

REGULAR COMPOUND

HEAVY DUTY COMPOUND

Alternative Prices

Sales Volume

Alternative Prices

Sales Volume

(per case)

in cases)

(per case)

(in cases)

$18

120,000

$25

175,000

20

100,000

27

140,000

21

90,000

30

100,000

22

80,000

32

55,000

23

50,000

35

35,000

Top management believes the loss for the first six months reflects a tight profit margin caused by intense competition. Management also believes that many companies will be forced out of this market by next year and profits should improve.

a. What unit selling price should Hastings Group select for each of the House Safe compounds for the remaining six months of 2001? Support your answer with appropriate calculations.

b. Without prejudice to your answer for requirement (a), assume the optimum price/volume alternatives for the last six months were a selling price of $23and volume level of 50,000 cases for the regular compound and a selling price of $35 and volume of 35,000 cases for the heavy duty compound.

1. Should Hastings Group consider closing down its operations until 2002 in order to minimize its losses? Support your answer with appropriate calculations.

2. Identify and discuss the qualitative factors that should be considered in deciding whether the Cincinnati plant should be closed down during the last six months of 2001. (CMA adapted)

calculate the minimum unit price that hydraulic engineering rsquo s management could 564561

(Special order) Hydraulic Engineering, located in Toronto, manufactures a variety of industrial valves and pipe fittings that are sold to customers in the United States. Currently, the company is operating at 70 percent of capacity and is earning a satisfactory return on investment. Prince Industries Ltd. of Scotland has approached management with an offer to buy 120,000 units of a pressure valve. Prince Industries manufactures a valve that is almost identical to Hydraulic Engineering’s pressure valve; however, a fire in Prince Industries’ valve plant has shut down its manufacturing operations. Prince needs the 120,000 valves over the next four months to meet commitments to its regular customers; the company is prepared to pay $19 each for the valves, FOB shipping point. Hydraulic Engineering’s product cost, based on current attainable standards, for the pressure valve is

Direct material

$ 5

Direct labor

6

Manufacturing overhead

9

Total cost

$20

Manufacturing overhead is applied to production at the rate of $18 per standard direct labor hour. This overhead rate is made up of the following components:

Variable factory overhead

$ 6

Fixed factory overhead—direct

8

Fixed factory overhead—allocated

4

Applied manufacturing overhead rate

$18

Additional costs incurred in connection with sales of the pressure valve include sales commissions of 5 percent and freight expense of $1 per unit. However, the company does not pay sales commissions on special orders that come directly to management. In determining selling prices, Hydraulic Engineering adds a 40 percent markup to product cost. This provides a $28 suggested selling price for the pressure valve. The marketing department, however, has set the current selling price at $27 to maintain market share. Production management believes that it can handle the Prince Industries order without disrupting its scheduled production. The order would, however, require additional fixed factory overhead of $12,000 per month in the form of supervision and clerical costs. If management accepts the order, 30,000 pressure valves will be manufactured and shipped to Prince Industries each month for the next four months. Shipments will be made in weekly consignments, FOB shipping point.

a. Determine how many additional direct labor hours would be required each month to fill the Prince Industries order.

b. Prepare an incremental analysis showing the impact of accepting the Prince Industries order.

c. Calculate the minimum unit price that Hydraulic Engineering’s management could accept for the Prince Industries order without reducing net income.

d. Identify the factors, other than price, that Hydraulic Engineering should consider before accepting the Prince Industries order. (CMA adapted)

how can managers be confident that they are not harming long term survival of their 564562

Some evidence suggests consumers are less than thrilled with what they are purchasing. American consumers are notoriously finicky, and pleasing them has always been difficult. But the latest results of the American Customer Satisfaction Index (ACSI) show consumers barely give companies a passing grade when it comes to satisfying their expectations of quality and service. The ACSI is based on a quarterly survey conducted by the National Quality Research Center at the University of Michigan Business School in partnership with Arthur Andersen consultants and the American Society for Quality. The overall index declined slightly in the second quarter (1999) to 72, out of a possible score of 100, from 72.1 in the first quarter. Since 1994, when the index made its debut, it has fallen 3.4%. This is the downside of corporate America’s cost cutting drive, says Claes Fornell, director of the research center and keeper of the index. Cost cutting has boosted earnings for many companies, but may hurt profits in the long term by undermining customer relationships. “If you cut too much on the cost side,” says Mr. Fornell, “customer satisfaction goes down.” And that, he contends could signal problems for the economy as a whole in years to come.

a. Does cost cutting automatically result in quality reductions? Defend your answer.

b. How can managers be confident that they are not harming long term survival of their organizations as they strive to manage “relevant” costs?

what are the likely impacts of this arrangement on quality of the output at isuzu th 564563

In Japan, the decision to stop production of a product or to close down a plant has different cost consequences than in the United States. One principal difference is that Japanese managers are much less likely to fire workers who are displaced by an event such as a plant closing. Japanese managers would simply try to move the displaced workers to active plants. However, this concept of permanent or lifetime employment can be awkward to manage when economic times become difficult and prudent financial management suggests that activities, including employment, be scaled back to cut costs. One Japanese company found an interesting solution: Nissan Motor Co., in a sign that its severe slump may be worsening, took the unusual step of loaning some of its idle factory workers to a rival automaker. Nissan assigned 250 of its production employees to work for six months at factories run by Isuzu Motors Ltd., a 37% owned affiliate of General Motors Corp. Nissan’s spokesman, Koji Okuda, called the move an attempt to deal with the company’s sharp drop in auto output in Japan. Nissan’s Japanese auto production had fallen 26% from a year earlier. “Demand is low,” Mr. Okuda said. “We have to adjust our operations.”

a. What specific types of costs might Nissan have considered relevant in its decision to loan employees to Isuzu?

b. Why would Isuzu be interested in hiring, on a temporary basis, workers of Nissan?

c. What are the likely impacts of this arrangement on quality of the output at Isuzu? The quality of output at Nissan?

what do you think mr carter should do and why 564564

Carter’s Computers manufactures computers and all components. The purchasing agent informed the company owner, Abraham Carter, that another company has offered to supply keyboards for Carter’s computers at prices below the variable costs at which Carter can make them. Incredulous, Mr. Carter hired an industrial consultant to explain how the supplier could offer the keyboards at less than Carter’s variable costs. It seems that the competitor supplier is suspected by the consultant of using many illegal aliens to work in that plant. These people are poverty stricken and will take such work at substandard wages. The purchasing agent and the plant manager feel that Carter should buy the keyboards from the competitor supplier as “no one can blame us for his hiring practices and will not even be able to show that we knew of those practices.”

a. What are the ethical issues involved in this case?

b. What are the advantages and disadvantages of buying from this competitor supplier?

c. What do you think Mr. Carter should do and why?

how can quota systems have an effect on the quality of american products 564565

In 1987 EEOC’s [Equal Opportunity Employment Commission] local field office wrote me a letter saying they had reason to believe I didn’t have enough women “food servers” and “busers.” No woman had complained against me. So the EEOC advertised in the local paper to tell women whose job applications we had rejected—or even women who had just thought of applying—that they could be entitled to damages. Twenty seven women became plaintiffs in a lawsuit against me. The EEOC interviewed me for hours to find out what kind of person I was. I told them in Sicily where I came from I learned to respect women. I supplied them with hundreds of pounds of paper. I had to hire someone full time for a year just to respond to EEOC demands. I finally settled. I agreed to pay $150,000 damages and as jobs open up, to hire the women on the EEOC’s list. Even if they don’t know what spaghetti looks like! I have to advertise twice a year even if I have no openings, just to add possible female employees to my files. I also had to hire an EEOC approved person to teach my staff how not to discriminate. I employ 12 food servers in these two restaurants. Gross sales, around $2 million. How much did it all cost me? Cash outlay, about $400,000. What the government’s done to me—devastating. I wouldn’t wish it on my worst enemy.

a. Do you think Mr. Maggiore’s cash outlay of $400,000 includes all of the costs he incurred because of the EEOC regulation? Try breaking down the various costs that he may have incurred into three categories: direct costs, indirect costs, and opportunity costs.

b. Are hiring policies based on quotas ethical? How do quota systems affect the economic viability of American firms?

c. If EEOC regulations are intended to right past wrongs, should EEOC guidelines apply differently to immigrant Americans than to second , third , and fourth generation Americans. (Consider, for example, that any immigrant that falls into a protected class qualifies for all U.S. quota programs just like an American whose great great great grandfather was a slave.)

d. How can quota systems have an effect on the quality of American products?

match the qualitative characteristics below with the following statements 564568

BE 2 match the qualitative characteristics below with the following statements.

1. Timeliness 5. Faithful representation

2. Completeness 6. Relevance

3. Free from error 7. Neutrality

4. Understandability 8. Confirmatory value

(a) Quality of information that assures users that information represents the economic phenomena that it purports to represent.

(b) Information about an economic phenomenon that corrects past or present expectations based on previous evaluations.

(c) The extent to which information is accurate in representing the economic substance of a transaction.

(d) Includes all the information that is necessary for a faithful representation of the economic phenomena that it purports to represent.

(e) Quality of information that allows users to comprehend its meaning.

presented below is three different transactions related to materiality explain wheth 564571

BE 5 Presented below is three different transactions related to materiality. Explain whether you would classify these transactions as material.

(a) Blair Co. has reported a positive trend in earnings over the last 3 years. In the current year, it reduces its bad debt allowance to ensure another positive earnings year. The impact of this adjustment is equal to 3% of net income.

(b) Hindi Co. has an extraordinary gain of $3.1 million on the sale of plant assets and a $3.3 million loss on the sale of investments. It decides to net the gain and loss because the net effect is considered immaterial. Hindi Co.’s income for the current year was $10 million.

(c) Damon Co. expenses all capital equipment under $25,000 on the basis that it is immaterial. The company has followed this practice for a number of years.

indicate whet her the following statements about the conceptual framework are true o 564578

E 1 Indicate whet her the following statements about the conceptual framework are true or false. If false, provide a brief explanation supporting your position.

(a) Accounting rule making that relies on a body of concepts will result in useful and consistent pronouncements.

(b) General purpose financial reports are most useful to company insiders in making strategic business decisions.

(c) Accounting standards based on individual conceptual frameworks generally will result in consistent and comparable accounting reports.

(d) Capital providers are the only users who benefit from general purpose financial reporting.

(e) Accounting reports should be developed so that users without knowledge of economics and business can become informed about the financial results of a company.

(f) The objective of financial reporting is the foundation from which the other aspects of the framework logically result.

indicate whether the following statements about the conceptual framework are true or 564579

E 2 Indicate whether the following statements about the conceptual framework are true or false. If false, provide a brief explanation supporting your position.

(a) The fundamental qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful are relevance and verifiability.

(b) Relevant information only has predictive value, confirmatory value, or both.

(c) Information that is a faithful representation is characterized as having predictive or confirmatory value.

(d) Comparability pertains only to the reporting of information in a similar manner for different companies.

(e) Verifiability is solely on enhancing characteristic for faithful representation.

(f) In preparing financial reports, it is assumed that users of the reports have reasonable knowledge of business and economic activities.

identifies the qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful p 564580

E 3 SFAC No. 8 identifies the qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful. Presented below are a number of questions related to these qualitative characteristics and underlying constraints.

(a) What is the quality of information that enables users to confirm or correct prior expectations?

(b) Identify the pervasive constraint(s) developed in the conceptual framework.

(c) The chairman of the SEC at one time noted, “If it becomes accepted or expected that accounting principles are determined or modified in order to secure purposes other than economic measurement, we assume a grave risk that confidence in the credibility of our financial information system 13will be undermined.” Which qualitative characteristic of accounting information should ensure that such a situation will not occur?

(d) Murayama Corp. switches from FIFO to average cost to FIFO over a 2 year period. Which qualitative characteristic of accounting information is not followed?

(e) Assume that the profession permits the savings and loan industry to defer losses on investments it sells, because immediate recognition of the loss may have adverse economic consequences on the industry. Which qualitative characteristic of accounting information is not followed?

(f) What are the two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision making?

(g) Watteau Inc. does not issue its first quarter report until after the second quarter’s results are reported. Which qualitative characteristic of accounting is not followed?

(h) Predictive value is an ingredient of which of the two primary qualities that makes accounting information useful for decision making purposes?

(i) Duggan, Inc. is the only company in its industry to depreciate its plant assets on a straight line basis. Which qualitative characteristic of accounting information may not be followed?

(j) Roddick Company has attempted to determine the replacement cost of its inventory. Three different appraisers arrive at substantially different amounts for this value. The president, nevertheless, decides to report the middle value for external reporting purposes. Which qualitative characteristic of information is lacking in these data?

the qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful for decision 564581

E 4 The qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful for decision making purposes are as follows. Relevance Neutrality Verifiability Faithful representation Completeness Understandability Predictive value Timeliness Comparability Confirmatory value Materiality Instructions Identify the appropriate qualitative characteristic(s) to be used given the information provided below.

(a) Qualitative characteristic being employed when companies in the same industry are using the same accounting principles.

(b) Quality of information that confirms users’ earlier expectations.

(c) Imperative for providing comparisons of a company from period to period.

(d) Ignores the economic consequences of a standard or rule.

(e) Requires a high degree of consensus among individuals on a given measurement.

(f) Predictive value is an ingredient of this primary quality of information.

(g) Four qualitative characteristics that are related to both relevance and faithful representation.

(h) An item is not recorded because its effect on income would not change a decision.

(i) Neutrality is an ingredient of this primary quality of accounting information.

(j) Two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision making purposes.

(k) Issuance of interim reports is an example of what primary ingredient of relevance?

ten interrelated elements that are most directly related to measuring the performanc 564582

E 5 Ten interrelated elements that are most directly related to measuring the performance and financial status of an enterprise are provided below.

Assets Distributions to owners Expenses

Liabilities Comprehensive income Gains

Equity Revenues Losses

Investments by owners

Instructions

Identify the element or elements associated with the 12 items below.

(a) Arises from peripheral or incidental transactions.

(b) Obligation to transfer resources arising from a past transaction.

(c) Increases ownership interest.

(d) Declares and pays cash dividends to owners.

(e) Increases in net assets in a period from no owner sources.

(f) Items characterized by service potential or future economic benefit.

(g) Equals increase in assets less liabilities during the year, after adding distributions to owners and subtracting investments by owners.

(h) Arises from income statement activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations.

(i) Residual interest in the assets of the enterprise after deducting its liabilities.

(j) Increases assets during a period through sale of product.

(k) Decreases assets during the period by purchasing the company’s own stock.

(l) Includes all changes in equity during the period, except those resulting from investments by owners and distributions to owners.

presented below are the assumptions principles and constraints used in this chapter 564583

E 6 Presented below are the assumptions, principles, and constraints used in this chapter.

1. Economic entity assumption 5. Historical cost principle 9. Cost constraint

2. Going concern assumption 6. Fair value principle 10. Industry practices

3. Monetary unit assumption 7. Expense recognition principle

4. Periodicity assumption 8. Full disclosure principle Instructions Identify by number the accounting assumption, principle, or constraint that describes each situation on the next page. Do not use a number more than once.

(a) Allocates expenses to revenues in the proper period.

(b) Indicates that fair value changes subsequent to purchase are not recorded in the accounts. (Do not use revenue recognition principle.)

(c) Ensures that all relevant financial information is reported.

(d) Rationale why plant assets are not reported at liquidation value. (Do not use historical cost principle.)

(e) Indicates that personal and business record keeping should be separately maintained.

(f) Separates financial information into time periods for reporting purposes.

(g) Permits the use of fair value valuation in certain industries. (Do not use fair value principle.)

(h) Assumes that the dollar is the “measuring stick” used to report on financial performance.

presented below are a number of operational guidelines and practices that have devel 564584

E 7 Presented below are a number of operational guidelines and practices that have developed over time.

Instructions

Select the assumption, principle, or constraint that most appropriately justifies these procedures and practices. (Do not use qualitative characteristics.)

(a) Fair value changes are not recognized in the accounting records.

(b) Financial information is presented so that investors will not be misled.

(c) Intangible assets are capitalized and amortized over periods benefited.

(d) Repair tools are expensed when purchased.

(e) Agricultural companies use fair value for purposes of valuing crops.

(f) Each enterprise is kept as a unit distinct from its owner or owners.

(g) All significant post balance sheet events are reported.

(h) Revenue is recorded at point of sale.

(i) All important aspects of bond indentures are presented in financial statements.

(j) Rationale for accrual accounting.

(k) The use of consolidated statements is justified.

(l) Reporting must be done at defined time intervals.

(m) An allowance for doubtful accounts is established.

(n) Goodwill is recorded only at time of purchase.

(o) A company charges its sales commission costs to expense.

presented below are a number of facts related to weller inc assume that no mention o 564585

E 8 Presented below are a number of facts related to Weller, Inc. Assume that no mention of these facts was made in the financial statements and the related notes. Instructions Assume that you are the auditor of Weller, Inc. and that you have been asked to explain the appropriate accounting and related disclosure necessary for each of these items.

(a) The company decided that, for the sake of conciseness, only net income should be reported on the income statement. Details as to revenues, cost of goods sold, and expenses were omitted.

(b) Equipment purchases of $170,000 were partly financed during the year through the issuance of a $110,000 notes payable. The company offset the equipment against the notes payable and reported plant assets at $60,000.

(c) Weller has reported its ending inventory at $2,100,000 in the financial statements. No other information related to inventories is presented in the financial statements and related notes.

(d) The company changed its method of valuing inventories from weighted average to FIFO. No mention of this change was made in the financial statements.

how much of the fixed overhead must be avoidable for the company to be indifferent b 564534

(Outsourcing) Mountain Technologies manufactures fiberglass housings for portable generators. One of the parts required to manufacture a housing is a metal latch. Currently the company produces all of the metal latches that it requires (120,000 units annually). The company’s management is considering purchasing the part from an external vendor, Austin Mechanical. The following data are available for making the decision:

COST PER UNIT TO MANUFACTURE

Direct material

$0.40

Direct labor

0.34

Variable overhead

0.18

Fixed overhead—applied

0.28

Total cost

$1.20

COST PER UNIT TO BUY

Purchase price

$0.98

Freight charges

0.02

Total cost

$1.00

a. Assuming all of Mountain Technologies’ internal production costs are avoidable if it purchases rather than makes the latch, what would be the net annual cost advantage to Mountain Technologies of purchasing?

b. Assume that some of Mountain Technologies’ fixed overhead costs could not be avoided if it purchases rather than makes the latches. How much of the fixed overhead must be avoidable for the company to be indifferent between making and buying the component?

what alternative is more desirable and by what amount assume the company is currentl 564535

(Outsourcing) Greenburg Automotive produces pickup truck bumpers that are sold on a wholesale basis to new car retailers. The average sales price of a bumper is $150. Normal annual sales volume is 100,000 units, which is maximum production capacity. At this capacity, the company’s costs per unit are as follows:

Direct material

$ 56 (including mounting hardware @ $12 per unit)

Direct labor

16

Overhead (2/3 is fixed)

36

Total

$108

A key component in the production of bumpers is the mounting hardware that is used to attach the bumpers to the vehicles. Pittsburgh Metal Stamping has offered to sell Greenburg as many mounting units as the company needs for its bumper production. The offering price is $16 per unit. If Greenburg accepts the offer, the released facilities (that are currently used to produce mounting hardware) could be used to produce an additional 4,800 bumpers. What alternative is more desirable and by what amount? (Assume the company is currently operating at its capacity of 100,000 units.)

what level of production would the company be indifferent between making and buying 564536

(Outsourcing) The Air Ride Shoe Company manufactures various types of shoes for sports and recreational use. Several types of shoes require a built in air pump. Presently, the company makes all of the air pumps it requires for production. However, management is presently evaluating an offer from Aire Supply Co. to provide air pumps at a cost of $3 each. Air Ride management has estimated that the variable production costs of the air pump are $2.50 per unit The firm also estimates that it could avoid $20,000 per year in fixed costs if it purchased rather than produced the air pumps.

a. If Air Ride requires 20,000 pumps per year, should it make them or buy them from Aire Supply Co.?

b. If Air Ride requires 60,000 pumps per year, should it make them or buy them?

c. Assuming all other factors are equal, at what level of production would the company be indifferent between making and buying the pumps?

how many of each product should the company make explain your answer 564537

(Allocation of scarce resources) Because the employees of one of its plants are out on strike, Allentown Electronics has found itself operating at peak capacity. The firm makes two electronic products, beepers and cell phones. Presently, the company can sell as many of each product as it can make, but it takes twice as long in production labor time to make a cell phone as it does to make a beeper. The firm’s production capacity is only 120,000 labor hours per month. Data on each product follow:

Beepers

Cell Phones

Sales

$30

$56

Variable costs

(24)

(46)

Contribution margin

$ 6

$10

Labor hours required

2

4

Fixed costs are $140,000 per month.

a. How many of each product should the company make? Explain your answer.

b. What qualitative factors would you consider in making this product mix decision?

what other factors should ms rose consider in allocating her time 564538

(Allocation of scarce resources) Jill Rose received her accounting degree in 1972. Since receiving her degree, Ms. Rose has obtained significant experience in a variety of job settings. Her skills include auditing, income and estate taxation, and business consulting. Ms. Rose currently has her own practice and her skills are in such demand that she limits her practice to taxation issues. Most of her engagements are one of three types: individual income taxation, estate taxation, or corporate taxation. Following are data pertaining to the revenues and costs of each tax area (per tax return):

Individual

Estate

Corporate

Revenue

$350

$1,200

$750

Variable costs

$50

$200

$150

Hours per return required of Ms. Rose

2

8

5

Fixed costs of operating Ms. Rose’s office are $40,000 per year. Ms. Rose has such significant demand for her work that she must ration her time. She desires to work no more than 2,500 hours in the coming year. She can allocate her time such that she works only on one type of tax return or on any combination of the three types.

a. How should Ms. Rose allocate her time in the coming year to maximize her income?

b. Based on the optimal allocation, what is Ms. Rose’s projected pretax income for the coming year?

c. What other factors should Ms. Rose consider in allocating her time?

what would be the dollar effect on pretax income if this order were accepted 564539

(Special order) Quality Fencing produces 18 gauge barbed wire that is retailed through farm supply companies. Presently, the company has the capacity to produce 42,000 tons of wire per year. The firm is operating at 85 percent of annual capacity, and at this level of operations the cost per ton of wire is as follows:

Direct material

$320

Direct labor

80

Variable overhead

50

Fixed overhead

160

Total

$610

The average sales price for the output produced by the firm is $800 per ton. The firm has been approached by an Australian company about supplying 400 tons of wire for a new game preserve. The company has offered Quality Fencing $480 per ton for the order (FOB Quality Fencing’s plant). No production modifications would be necessary to fulfill the order from the Australian company.

a. What costs are relevant to the decision to accept this special order?

b. What would be the dollar effect on pretax income if this order were accepted?

how would touch o class rsquo pretax income be affected by the acceptance of this of 564540

(Special order) Touch O Class produces high quality wooden commemorative plaques. Each plaque is hand made and hand finished using the finest materials available. The firm has been operating at capacity for the past three years (1,000 plaques per year). Based on the capacity level operations, the firm’s costs per plaque are as follows:

Material

$125

Direct labor

135

Variable overhead

35

Fixed overhead

60

Total cost

$355

All selling and administrative expenses incurred by the firm are fixed. The firm has generated an average selling price of $550 for its plaques. Recently, a large corporation approached Connie Kwiken, the president of Touch O Class, about supplying the corporation with three special plaques commemorating the retirement of three high level executives. These plaques would be approximately two times as large as the typical plaque the company now makes. Ms. Kwiken has estimated that the following per unit costs would be incurred to make the three plaques:

Material

$425

Direct labor

465

Variable overhead

80

Total direct costs

$970

To accept the special order, the firm would have to sacrifice production of 25 regular units.

a. Identify all of the relevant costs that Ms. Kwiken should consider in deciding whether she will accept the special order.

b. Assume the large corporation offers a total of $3,400 for the three plaques. How would Touch O Class’ pretax income be affected by the acceptance of this offer?

how is the circumstance with the indian air carriers similar to a special pricing de 564541

(Sales mix) India’s domestic airlines have battled antiquated airports, high fuel prices and government rules that force them to fly unprofitable routes. In 1999, they were wounding one another with a price war. Hints of the looming dogfight emerged even before the start of India’s traditionally slack June to September travel season. Sahara Airlines, the smallest of three major domestic carriers, slashed rupee fares between 10% and 20% on some major routes in March. At first, larger competitors Jet Airways and Indian Airlines were unruffled. But they followed suit in June, cutting fares and unveiling incentives to attract travelers, including hotel discounts and the chance to win trips abroad. Air India, the state owned international carrier, joined the fray, with bargain fares on some domestic routes that made flying cheaper than taking the train.

a. Change in pricing is only one tool companies may wield to change the volume of their sales. Discuss why airlines tend to use this tool more so than other tools.

b. Why, in the airline industry as well as other industries, is it necessary to carefully consider the response of competitors before using price changes to stimulate demand for services?

c. How is the circumstance with the Indian air carriers similar to a special pricing decision?

what is wild hound rsquo s projected pretax profit or loss for 2001 564542

(Sales mix) Wild Hound provides two types of services to dog owners: grooming and training. All company personnel can perform either service equally well. To expand sales and market share, the Wild Hound’s manager, Jim Dachshund, relies heavily on radio and billboard advertising. For 2001, advertising funding is expected to be very limited. Information on projected operations for 2001 follows:

Grooming

Training

Revenue per billable hour

$30

$50

Variable cost of labor

$10

$20

Material costs per billable hour

$2

$4

Allocated fixed costs per year

$200,000

$180,000

Projected billable hours for 2001

20,000

16,000

a. What is Wild Hound’s projected pretax profit or (loss) for 2001?

b. If $1 spent on advertising could increase either grooming revenue by $2 or training revenue by $20, on which service should the advertising dollar be spent?

c. If $1 spent on advertising could increase grooming billable time by one hour or training billable time by one hour, on which service should the advertising dollar be spent?

compute the projected pretax profit to be earned on the cooler during 2002 564543

(Sales mix) One of the products produced and sold by Industrial Supply Co. is a 90 quart cold drink cooler. The company’s projections for this product for 2002 follow:

Sales price per unit

$36

Variable production costs

$21

Variable selling costs

$4

Fixed production costs

$225,000

Fixed selling & administration costs

$75,000

Projected volume

90,000 units

a. Compute the projected pretax profit to be earned on the cooler during 2002.

b. Corporate management estimates that unit volume could be increased by 20 percent if the sales price were decreased by 10 percent. How would such a change affect the profit level projected in part (a)?

c. Rather than cutting the sales price, management is considering holding the sales price at the projected level and increasing advertising by $200,000. Such a change would increase volume by 25 percent. How would the level of profit under this alternative compare to the profit projected in part (a)?

why would total corporate operating results go from a 108 000 loss to the results de 564544

(Product line) Online Toy Co.’s operations are separated into two geographical divisions: United States and Mexico. The operating results of each division for 2001 are shown below:

United States

Mexico

Total

Sales

$ 7,200,000

$ 3,600,000

$10,800,000

Variable costs

(4,740,000)

(2,088,000)

(6,828,000)

Contribution margin

$ 2,460,000

$ 1,512,000

$ 3,972,000

Fixed costs:

Direct

(900,000)

(480,000)

(1,380,000)

Segment margin

$ 1,560,000

$ 1,032,000

$ 2,592,000

Fixed costs:

Corporate

(1,800,000)

(900,000)

(2,700,000)

Operating income (loss)

$ (240,000)

$ 132,000

$ (108,000)

Corporate fixed costs are allocated to the divisions based on relative sales. Assume that all direct fixed costs of a division could be avoided if the division were eliminated. Because the U.S. Division is operating at a loss, the president is considering eliminating it.

a. If the U.S. Division had been eliminated at the beginning of the year, what would pretax income have been for Online Toy Co.?

b. Recast the income statements into a more meaningful format than the one given. Why would total corporate operating results go from a $108,000 loss to the results determined in part (a)?

how would the pretax profit of the company be affected by the decision 564545

(Product line) Johnson Metal Products produces three products: wire, tubing, and sheet metal. The company is currently contemplating the elimination of the tubing product line because it is showing a pretax loss. An annual income statement follows:

Sheet

Wire

Tubing

Metal

Total

Sales

$ 2,200

$ 1,600

$ 1,800

$ 5,600

Cost of sales

(1,400)

(1,000)

(1,080)

(3,480)

Gross margin

$ 800

$ 600

$ 720

$ 2,120

Avoidable fixed and variable costs

$ 630

$ 725

$ 520

$ 1,875

Allocated fixed costs

90

80

105

275

Total fixed costs

$ 720

$ 805

$ 625

$ 2,150

Operating profit

$ 80

$ (205)

$ 95

$ (30)

a. Should corporate management drop the tubing product line? Support your answer with appropriate schedules.

b. How would the pretax profit of the company be affected by the decision?

write the objective function and constraints for the clothes manufacturer 564548

Carolina Textiles makes three items: pants, shorts and shirts. The contribution margins are $3.25, $2.05, and $2.60 per unit, respectively. The manager must decide what mix of clothes to make. He has 800 labor hours and 4,000 yards of material available. Additional information for labor and material requirements is given here:

Sewing Time

Fabric Needed

Pants

2.0 hours

3.0 yards

Shorts

1.5 hours

1.0 yards

Shirts

2.5 hours

1.5 yards

Write the objective function and constraints for the clothes manufacturer.

write the objective function and constraints to minimize the cost and yet meet the r 564549

Janet Terwilliger is a college student and has set a budget of $120 per month for food. She wants to get a certain level of nutritional benefits from the food she has selected to buy. The following table lists the types of food she may buy, along with the nutritional information per serving of that food.

Carbohydrates

Protein

Potassium

Calories

Cost

Pizza

38 g.

10 g.

0

500

$3.99

Tuna

1 g.

13 g.

0

60

1.29

Cereal

35 g.

7 g.

120 mg.

190

0.93

Macaroni & cheese

23 g.

3 g.

110 mg.

110

2.12

Spaghetti

42 g.

8 g.

100 mg.

210

3.42

Recommended daily allowance

50 g.

10 g.

100 mg.

2,000

Write the objective function and constraints to minimize the cost and yet meet the recommended daily nutritional allowances.

what qualitative factors should ms johnson consider before making a decision about p 564550

(Asset replacement) The manager of the Plastics Fabrication Division of Gulf Chemical Corp., Kathy Johnson, has heard about a new extruding machine that could replace one of her existing machines. The manufacturer has suggested to Ms. Johnson that the new machine would save $90,000 per year in the costs of operations. Ms. Johnson’s controller compiled additional information as follows:

OLD MACHINE

Original cost

$375,000

Present book value

$250,000

Annual cash operating costs

$250,000

Market value now

$50,000

Market value in 5 years

$0

Remaining useful life

5 years

NEW MACHINE

Cost

$450,000

Annual cash operating costs

$150,000

Market value in 5 years

$0

Useful life

5 years

a. Based on financial considerations alone, should Ms. Johnson purchase the new machine? Show computations to support your answer.. What qualitative factors should Ms. Johnson consider before making a decision about purchasing the new machine?

determine which alternative is better from a financial perspective provide your own 564551

(Asset replacement) Sandhills Energy Company provides electrical services to several rural Nebraska counties. The company’s efficiency has been greatly affected by changes in technology. Most recently, the company is considering replacement of its main steam turbine. The existing turbine was put in place in the 1970s but has become obsolete. While the system’s operation is very reliable, it is much less efficient than newer turbines that are computer controlled. The company has gathered financial information pertaining to the new and old technologies. The following information was presented by the controller to corporate management:

Old

New

Original cost

Turbine

Turbine

Market value now

$3,000,000

$2,000,000

Remaining life

$400,000

$2,000,000

Quarterly operating costs

8 years

8 years

Salvage value in 8 years

$120,000

$45,000

Accumulated depreciation

$0

$0

$1,000,000

a. Identify the costs that are relevant to the company’s equipment replacement decision.

b. Determine which alternative is better from a financial perspective. Provide your own computations based on relevant costs only.

c. For this part only, assume that the cost of the new technology is unknown. What is the maximum amount that Sandhills could pay for the new technologyand be no worse off financially?

what qualitative factors should be taken into account in this decision 564552

(Outsourcing) Clothes Solutions Inc. manufactures vinyl clad wire storage systems. Each system requires two to six standard fasteners to attach it to structural members of closets. Historically, the company has produced the fasteners. The costs to produce a fastener (based on capacity operation of 4,000,000 units per year) are:

Direct material

$0.06

Direct labor

0.03

Variable factory overhead

0.03

Fixed factory overhead

0.06

Total

$0.18

The fixed factory overhead includes $160,000 of depreciation on equipment for which there is no alternative use and no market value. The balance of the fixed factory overhead pertains to the salary of the production supervisor. While the supervisor of fastener production has a lifetime employment contract, she has skills that could be used to displace another manager (the supervisor of floor maintenance) who draws a salary of $30,000 per year but is due to retire from the company. Modern Fastener Systems has recently approached Clothes Solutions Inc.

with an offer to supply all required fasteners at a price of $0.13 per unit. Anticipated sales demand for the coming year will require 4,000,000 fasteners.

a. Identify the costs that are relevant in this outsourcing decision.

b. What is the total annual advantage or disadvantage (in dollars) of outsourcing

the fasteners rather than making them?

c. What qualitative factors should be taken into account in this decision?

how would your answer differ if 75 000 subassemblies were needed 564553

(Outsourcing) Omaha Building Systems manufactures steel buildings for agricultural and commercial applications. Currently, the company is trying to decide between two alternatives regarding a major overhead door assembly for the company’s buildings. The alternatives are as follows:

#1: Purchase new equipment at a cost of $5,000,000. The equipment would have a five year life and no salvage value. Omaha Building Systems uses straight line depreciation and allocates that amount on a per unit of production basis.

#2: Purchase the door assemblies from an outside vendor who will sell them for $240 each under a five year contract. Following is Omaha’s present cost of producing the door assemblies. The costs are based on current and normal activity of 50,000 units per year.

Direct material

$139

Direct labor

66

Variable overhead

43

Fixed overhead*

36

Total

$284

The new equipment would be more efficient than the old and would reduce direct labor costs and variable overhead costs by 25 percent. Supervisory costs of $350,000 would be unaffected. The new equipment would have a capacity of 75,000 units per year. Omaha could lease the space occupied by subassembly production to another firm for $114,000 per year if the company decides to buy from the outside vendor.

a. Show an analysis, including relevant unit and total costs, for each alternative. Assume 50,000 subassemblies are needed each year.

b. How would your answer differ if 60,000 subassemblies were needed?

c. How would your answer differ if 75,000 subassemblies were needed?

d. In addition to quantitative factors, what qualitative factors should be considered?

how does the company rsquo s tax rate enter into the calculation of the optimal labo 564554

(Sales mix with scarce resources) Hartford Furniture makes three unique wood

products: desks, chairs, and footstools. These products are made wholly by hand; no electric or hydraulic machinery is used in production. All products are made by skilled craftspeople who have been trained to make all three products. Because it takes about a year to train each craftsperson, labor is a fixed production constraint over the short term. For 2002, the company expects to have available 34,000 labor hours. The average hourly labor rate is $25. Data regarding the current product line follow:

Desks

Chairs

Footstools

Selling price

$900

$680

$240

Variable costs:

Direct material

$220

$160

$ 60

Direct labor

300

275

75

Variable factory overhead

180

120

41

Variable selling

20

15

10

Fixed costs:

Factory

$150,000

Selling & administrative

75,000

The company is in the 50 percent tax bracket.

a. If the company can sell an unlimited amount of any of the products, how many of each product should it make? What pretax income will the company earn given your answer?

b. How many of each product must the company make if it has a policy of

devoting no more than 50 percent of its available skilled labor capacity to any one product and at least 20 percent to every product? What pretax in come will the company earn given your answer?

c. Given the nature of the three products, is it reasonable to believe that there are market constraints on the mix of products that can be sold? Explain.

d. How does the company’s tax rate enter into the calculation of the optimal labor all

what is your recommendation to the management of phoenix fashions 564555

(Sales mix) Phoenix Fashions produces silk scarves and handkerchiefs, which sell for $40 and $10, respectively. The company currently sells 100,000 units of each type with the following operating results:

SCARVES

Sales (100,000 $40)

$ 4,000,000

Variable costs:

Production (100,000 $22)

$2,200,000

Selling (100,000 $6)

600,000

(2,800,000)

Contribution margin

$ 1,200,000

Fixed costs:

Production

$ 400,000

Selling & administrative

180,000

(580,000)

Income from Scarves

$ 620,000

HANDKERCHIEFS

Sales (100,000 $10)

$1,000,000

Variable costs:

$ 500,000

Production (100,000 $5)

100,000

(600,000)

Selling (100,000 $1)

$ 400,000

Contribution margin

Fixed costs:

Production

$ 100,000

Selling & administrative

80,000

(180,000)

Income from Handkerchiefs

$ 220,000

Corporate management has expressed its disappointment with the income being generated from the sales of these two products. Managers have asked for your help to analyze alternative plans that have been formulated to improve operating results.

1. Change the sales commission to 11 percent of sales price less variable production costs for each product rather than the current 5 percent of selling price. The marketing manager believes that the sales of the scarves will decline by 5,000 units, but the sales of handkerchiefs will increase by15,000 units.

2. Increase the advertising budget for scarves by $25,000. The marketing manager believes this will increase the sales of the scarves by 19,000 units but will decrease the sales of the handkerchiefs by 9,000 units.

3. Raise the price of the handkerchiefs by $3 per unit and the scarves by $5 per unit. The marketing manager believes this will cause a decrease in the sales of the scarves by 6,000 units and a decrease in the handkerchiefs by10,000 units.

a. Determine the effects on income of each product line and the company in total if each of the alternative plans given is put into effect.

b. What is your recommendation to the management of Phoenix Fashions?

explain the difference if any in the income figures assuming no work in process inve 564491

(Comprehensive) Brookfield Fashions produces and sells cotton blouses. The firm uses variable costing for internal management purposes and absorption costing for external purposes. At the end of each year, financial information must be converted from variable costing to absorption costing to satisfy external requirements. At the end of 1999, it was anticipated that sales would rise 20 percent from 1999 levels for 2000. Therefore, production was increased from 20,000 to 24,000 units to meet this expected demand. However, economic conditions kept the sales level at 20,000 for both years. The following data pertain to 1999 and 2000:

Selling price per unit

1999

2000

Sales (units)

$40

$40

Beginning inventory (units)

20,000

20,000

Production (units)

2,000

2,000

Ending inventory (units)

20,000

24,000

Unfavorable labor, material, and variable

2,000

?

overhead variances (total)

$5,000

$4,000

Standard variable costs per unit for 1999 and 2000 were

Material

$ 4.50

Labor

7.50

Overhead

3.00

Total

$15.00

Annual fixed costs for 1999 and 2000 (budgeted and actual) were

Production

$117,000

Selling and administrative

125,000

Total

$242,000

The overhead rate under absorption costing is based on practical capacity of 30,000 units per year. All variances and under or overapplied overhead are taken to Cost of Goods Sold. All taxes are to be ignored.

a. Present the income statement based on variable costing for 2000.

b. Present the income statement based on absorption costing for 2000.

c. Explain the difference, if any, in the income figures. Assuming no Work in Process Inventory, give the entry necessary to adjust the book income amount to the financial statement income amount, if one is necessary.

d. The company finds it worthwhile to develop its internal financial data on a variable costing basis. What advantages and disadvantages are attributed to variable costing for internal purposes?

e. Many accountants believe that variable costing is appropriate for external reporting and many oppose its use for external reporting. What arguments for and against the use of variable costing can you think of in external reporting? (CMA adapted)

prepare income statements under absorption and variable costing for the years ended 564492

(Income statements for 2 years, both methods) Edison Digital manufactures palmtop computers. The following data from the company are available for 2000 and 2001:

2000

2001

Selling price per unit

$170

$170

Number of units sold

20,000

24,000

Number of units produced

25,000

22,000

Beginning inventory (units)

15,000

20,000

Ending inventory (units)

20,000

?

Standard costs per unit for 2000 and 2001 were

Direct material

$20.00

Direct labor

60.00

Variable overhead

20.00

Fixed overhead

30.00 (

(based on budget of $750,000 and normal

capacity of 25,000 units)

Variable sales commission

20.00

In addition, selling and administrative fixed costs were $190,000 for both years. All variances are charged or credited to Cost of Goods Sold. Prepare income statements under absorption and variable costing for the years ended 2000 and 2001. Reconcile the differences in income between the methods. (Ignore taxes.)

what is norman rsquo s normal monthly income 564493

(CVP decision alternatives) Norman Horn owns a small travel agency. His revenues are based on commissions earned as follows:

Airline bookings

8% commission

Rental car bookings

10% commission

Hotel bookings

20% commission

Monthly fixed costs include advertising ($1,100), rent ($900), utilities ($250), and other costs ($2,200). There are no variable costs. During a normal month, Norman records the following items, which are subject to the above commission structure:

Airlines

$30,000

Cars

4,500

Hotels

7,000

Total

$41,500

Norman is concerned because he is experiencing a monthly loss.

a. What is Norman’s normal monthly income?

b. Norman can increase his airline bookings by 40 percent with an increase in advertising of $600. Should he increase advertising?

c. Norman’s friend Jeff has asked him for a job in the travel agency. Jeff has

proposed that he be paid 50 percent of whatever additional commissions

he can bring to the agency plus a salary of $300 per month. Norman has

estimated Jeff can generate the following additional bookings per month:

Airlines

$10,000

Cars

1,500

Hotels

4,000

Total

$15,500

Hiring Jeff would also increase other fixed costs by $400 per month. ShouldNorman accept Jeff’s offer?

d. Norman hired Jeff and in the first month Jeff generated an additional $8,000 of bookings for the agency. The bookings, however, were all airline tickets. Was the decision to hire Jeff a good one? Why or why not?

what amount of revenue would be necessary to yield an after tax profit equal to 20 p 564494

(Retail merchant CVP) Franklin Optical Shop has been in operation for several

years. Analysis of the firm’s recent financial statements and records reveals the following

Average selling price per pair of glasses

$70

Variable expenses per pair:

Lenses and frames

$28

Sales commission

12

Variable overhead

8

Annual fixed costs:

Selling expenses

$18,000

Administrative expenses

48,000

The company’s effective tax rate is 40 percent. Samantha Franklin, company president, has asked you to help her answer the following questions about the business.

a. What is the break even point in pairs of glasses? In dollars?

b. How much revenue must be generated to produce $80,000 of pretax earnings? How many pairs of glasses would this level of revenue represent?

c. How much revenue must be generated to produce $80,000 of after tax earnings? How many pairs of glasses would this represent?

d. What amount of revenue would be necessary to yield an after tax profit equal to 20 percent of revenue?

e. Franklin is considering adding a lens grinding lab, which will save $6 per pair of glasses in lens cost, but will raise annual fixed costs by $8,000. She expects to sell 5,000 pairs of glasses. Should she make this investment?

f. A marketing consultant told Franklin that she could increase the number of glasses sold by 30 percent if she would lower the selling price by 10 percent and spend $20,000 on advertising. She has been selling 3,000 pairs of glasses. Should she make these two related changes?

how many mice must the company sell if it desires to earn 996 450 in before tax prof 564495

(CVP single product—comprehensive) Speedy Mouse Inc. makes a special mouse for computers. Each mouse sells for $25 and annual production and sales are 120,000 units. Costs for each mouse are as follows:

Direct material

$ 6.00

Direct labor

3.00

Variable overhead

0.80

Variable selling expenses

2.20

Total variable cost

$12.00

Total fixed overhead

589,550

a. Calculate the unit contribution margin in dollars and the contribution margin ratio for the product.

b. Determine the break even point in number of mice.

c. Calculate the dollar break even point using the contribution margin ratio.

d. Determine Speedy Mouse Inc.’s margin of safety in units, in sales dollars, and as a percentage.

e. Compute Speedy Mouse Inc.’s degree of operating leverage. If sales increase by 25 percent, by what percentage would before tax income increase?

f. How many mice must the company sell if it desires to earn $996,450 in before tax profits?

g. If Speedy Mouse Inc. wants to earn $657,800 after tax and is subject to a 20 percent tax rate, how many units must be sold? h. How many units would the company need to sell to break even if its fixed costs increased by $7,865? (Use original data.) i. Speedy Mouse Inc. has received an offer to provide a one time sale of 4,000 mice to a network of computer superstores. This sale would not affect other sales or their costs, but the variable cost of the additional units will increase by $0.60 for shipping and fixed costs will increase by $18,000. The selling price for each unit in this order would be $20. Based on quantitative measurement, should the company accept this offer? Show your calculations.

prepare an absorption costing income statement for each quarter 564496

(CVP, DOL, MS—two quarters, comprehensive) Presented below is information

pertaining to the first and second quarters of 2001 operations of the Oak Company:

QUARTER

Units:

First

Second

Production

35,000

30,000

Sales

30,000

35,000

Expected activity level

32,500

32,500

Unit selling price

$75.00

$75.00

Unit variable costs:

$34.50

Second

Direct material

16.50

$34.50

Direct labor

7.80

16.50

Factory overhead

5.70

7.80

Operating expenses

5.70

Quarterly fixed costs:

Factory overhead

97,500.00

97,500.00

Operating expenses

21,400.00

21,400.00

Additional information:

• There were no finished goods at January 1, 2001.

• Oak writes off any quarterly underapplied or overapplied overhead as an adjustment of Cost of Goods Sold.

• Oak’s income tax rate is 35 percent.

a. Prepare an absorption costing income statement for each quarter.

b. Prepare a variable costing income statement for each quarter.

c. Calculate each of the following for 2001, if 130,000 units were produced and sold:

1. Unit contribution margin

2. Contribution margin ratio

3. Total contribution margin

4. Net income

5. Degree of operating leverage

6. Annual break even unit sales volume

7. Annual break even dollar sales volume

8. Annual margin of safety as a percentage

elegant books produces and sells two book products an encyclopedia set and a diction 564497

(Multiproduct firm) Elegant Books produces and sells two book products: an encyclopedia set and a dictionary set. The company sells these book sets in a ratio of three encyclopedia sets to five dictionary sets. Selling prices for the encyclopedia and dictionary sets are, respectively, $1,200 and $240; respective variable costs are $480 and $160. The company’s fixed costs are $1,800,000 per year. Compute the volume of sales of each type of book set needed to

a. break even.

b. earn $800,000 of income before tax.

c. earn $800,000 of income after tax, assuming a 30 percent tax rate.

d. earn 12 percent on sales revenue in before tax income.

e. earn 12 percent on sales revenue in after tax income, assuming a 30 percent tax rate.

how many square yards of each product are expected to be sold at the break even poin 564498

(Comprehensive; multiproduct) European Flooring makes three types of flooring products: tile, carpet, and parquet. Cost analysis reveals the following costs (expressed on a per square yard basis) are expected for 2000:

Tile

Carpet

Parquet

Direct material

$5.20

$3.25

$8.80

Direct labor

1.80

0.40

6.40

Variable overhead

1.00

0.15

1.75

Variable selling expenses

0.50

0.25

2.00

Variable administrative expenses

0.20

0.10

0.30

Fixed overhead

$760,000

Fixed selling expenses

240,000

Fixed administrative expenses

200,000

Tile

Carpet

Parquet

Square yards

18,000

144,000

12,000

Review of recent tax returns reveals an expected tax rate of 40 percent.

a. Calculate the break even point for 2000.

b. How many square yards of each product are expected to be sold at the break even point?

c. Assume that the company desires a pretax profit of $800,000. How many square yards of each type of product would need to be sold to generate this profit level? How much revenue would be required?

d. Assume that the company desires an after tax profit of $680,000. Use the

contribution margin percentage approach to determine the revenue needed. If the company actually achieves the revenue determined in part (d), what is European Flooring margin of safety in (1) dollars and (2) percentage?

analyze and explain why the profit has declined in spite of increased sales and effe 564501

Virginia Company, a wholly owned subsidiary of Bluebeard, Inc., produces and sells three main product lines. The company employs a standard cost accounting system for recordkeeping purposes. At the beginning of 1999, the president of Virginia Company presented the budget to the parent company and accepted a commitment to contribute $15,800 to Bluebeard’s consolidated profit in 1999. The president has been confident that the year’s profit would exceed the budget target, because the monthly sales reports that he has been receiving have shown that sales for the year will exceed budget by 10 percent. The president is both disturbed and confused when the controller presents an adjusted forecast as of November 30, 1999, indicating that profits will be 11 percent under budget. The two forecasts follow:

1/1/99

11/30/99

Sales

$268,000

$294,800

Cost of sales at standard*

(212,000)

(233,200)

Gross margin at standard

$ 56,000

$ 61,600

(Under ) overapplied fixed overhead

0

(6,000)

Actual gross margin

$ 56,000

$ 55,600

Selling expenses

$ 13,400

$ 14,740

Administrative expenses

26,800

26,800

Total operating expenses

$ (40,200)

$ (41,540)

Earnings before tax

$ 15,800

$ 14,060

There have been no sales price changes or product mix shifts since the 1/1/99 forecast. The only cost variance on the income statement is the under applied manufacturing overhead. This amount arose because the company=produced only 16,000 standard m chine hours (budgeted machine hours were 20,000) during 1999 as a result of a shortage of raw material while the company’s principal supplier was closed because of a strike. Fortunately, Virgini Company’s finished goods inventory was large enough t fill all sales orders received.

a. Analyze and explain why the profit has declined in spite of increased sales and effective control over costs.

b. What plan, if any, could Virginia Company adopt during December to improve its reported profit at year end? Explain your answer.

c. Illustrate and explain how Virginia Company could adopt an alternative internal cost reporting procedure that would avoid the confusing effect o the present procedure.

d. Would the alternative procedure described in part (c) be acceptable to Bluebeard, Inc., for financial reporting purposes? Explain.

assume that the price susan charges cat owners is 10 per day and the price charged t 564502

Susan Katz owns the Holiday Litter Box, a luxury hotel for dogs and cats. The capacity is 40 pets: 20 dogs and 20 cats. Each pet has an air conditioned room with a window overlooking a garden. Soft music is played continuously. Pets are awakened at 7 a.m., served breakfast at 8 a.m., fed snacks at 3:30 p.m., and receive dinner at 5 p.m. Hotel services also include airport pickup, daily bathing and grooming, night lighting in each suite, carpet edfloors, and daily play visits by pet “babysitters.” Pet owners are interviewed about their pets’ health care requirements, likes and dislikes, diet, and other needs. Reservations are essential and each pet’s veterinarian must document health. The costs of operating the pet hotel are substantial. The hotel’s original cost was $96,000. Depreciation is $8,000 per year. Other costs of operating the hotel include:

Labor costs

$16,000 per year plus $0.25 per animal per day

Utilities

$ 7,900 per year plus $0.05 per animal per day

Miscellaneous costs

$ 5,000 per year plus $0.30 per animal per day

n addition to these costs, costs are incurred for food and water for each pet. These costs are strictly variable and (on average) run $2.00 per day for dogs and $0.75 per day for cats.

a. Assuming that the hotel is able to maintain an average annual occupancy of 75 percent in both the cat and the dog units (based on a 360 day year), determine the minimum daily charge that must be assessed per animal day to generate $12,000 of income before taxes. (continued)

b. Assume that the price Susan charges cat owners is $10 per day and the price charged to dog owners is $12 per day. If the sales mix is 1 to 1 (one cat day of occupancy for each dog day of occupancy) compute the following:

1. The break even point in total occupancy days.

2. Total occupancy days required to generate $20,000 of income before tax.

3. Total occupancy days to generate $20,000 of after tax income; Susan’s personal tax rate is 35 percent.

c. Susan is considering adding an animal training service for guests to complement her other hotel services. Susan has estimated the costs of providing such a service would largely be fixed. Because all of the facilities already exist, Susan would merely need to hire a dog trainer. She estimates a dog trainer could be hired at a cost of $25,000 per year. If Susan decides to add this service, how much would her daily charges have to increase (assume equal dollar increases to cat and dog fees) to maintain the break even level you computed in part (b)?

what rationalizations can you detect that have been devised by plant employees 564507

Missouri Chemical Company’s new president has learned that, for the past four years, the company has been dumping its industrial waste into the local river and falsifying reports to authorities about the levels of suspected cancer causing materials in that waste. The plant manager says that there is no proof that the waste causes cancer and there are only a few fishing villages within a hundred miles downriver. If the company has to treat the substance to neutralize its potentially injurious effects and then transport it to a legal dump site, the company’s variable and fixed costs would rise to a level that might make the firm uncompetitive. If the company loses its competitive advantage, 10,000 local employees could become unemployed and the town’s economy could collapse.

a. What kinds of variable and fixed costs can you think of that would increase (or decrease) if the waste were treated rather than dumped? How would these costs affect product contribution margin?

b. What are the ethical conflicts the president faces?

c. What rationalizations can you detect that have been devised by plant employees?

d. What options and suggestions can you offer the president?

an article about the financial troubles of air india indicates that the airline plan 564509

An article about the financial troubles of Air India indicates that the airline plans to break even in 2000–2001: Air India has arrived at a difficult point in its history. Held back from modernization by government policy, it has no global alliance partners, an aging fleet and an enormous workforce. With no fuel for privatization, and an unwillingness to look at the carrier’s synergies with Indian Airlines, will the management be able to steer it out of trouble? Air India’s financial position is precarious. Its net loss of $43 million in 1997 to 1998 is ample evidence of the fact. The airline is taking remedial action to reduce losses and aims to reach breakeven by 2000 to 2001. Losses in 1997 to 1998 were less than those for the previous year, when the carrier reported a loss of Rs2.97 billion, but the goal of breakeven in 2 years’ time will be an uphill struggle. At the root of Air India’s difficulties are persistently low yields, on the one hand, and steadily rising costs on the other. In light of the discussion in the chapter that breakeven is a reference point rather than a goal of business, reconcile the comment in the article that Air India has a goal of breaking even in two years.

businesses in chattanooga tenn will be asked to give up a bit of their independence 564526

;Businesses in Chattanooga, Tenn., will be asked to give up a bit of their independence to cut costs and help clean up the environment .The Chattanooga Institute, a nonprofit advocate of environmentally friendly development, announced the next phase in the creation of a $70 million “ecoindustrial park”: a six month feasibility study that would lay out the blueprint for a community in which businesses swap one another’s waste and other byproducts, from hot water to used paper. First envisioned in meetings two years ago with President Clinton’s Council on Sustainable Development, planners said the park will be fully operational as early as 2001. If successful, the city’s blighted Southside community could become a magnet for companies willing to use one another’s waste products as both raw materials and sources of energy. “Everything [would be] reused or recycled to create something that is needed by someone else,” says Woodley Murphy, Chattanooga Institute executive director. The preceding article discusses a way in which a company can take a more expansive view of its operations to define relevant costs. Discuss why firms of the future will increasingly find it necessary to look across the supply chain, rather than just internally, to identify relevant costs.

Businesses in Chattanooga, Tenn., will be asked to give up a bit of their independence to cut costs and help clean up the environment .The Chattanooga Institute, a nonprofit advocate of environmentally friendly development, announced the next phase in the creation of a $70 million “ecoindustrial park”: a six month feasibility study that would lay out the blueprint for a community in which businesses swap one another’s waste and other byproducts, from hot water to used paper. First envisioned in meetings two years ago with President Clinton’s Council on Sustainable Development, planners said the park will be fully operational as early as 2001. If successful, the city’s blighted Southside community could become a magnet for companies willing to use one another’s waste products as both raw materials and sources of energy. “Everything [would be] reused or recycled to create something that is needed by someone else,” says Woodley Murphy, Chattanooga Institute executive director. The preceding article discusses a way in which a company can take a more expansive view of its operations to define relevant costs. Discuss why firms of the future will increasingly find it necessary to look across the supply chain, rather than just internally, to identify relevant costs.

prepare a written presentation showing how time affects relevant costs for a product 564527

(Time and relevant costs) The following are costs associated with a product line of Johnson Safety Systems. The costs reflect capacity level production of 45,000 units per year.

Variable production costs

$45

Fixed production costs

27

Variable selling costs

12

Fixed selling and administrative costs

16

Prepare a written presentation showing how time affects relevant costs for a product line. Determine which costs would be relevant at each of the following points in time:

a. The point in time at which the product and production facilities are in the planning stage.

b. The point in time just after acquisition of the production facilities but before actual production commences.

c. The point in time after production of products is complete but before the units are sold.

what other factors should you consider before making a decision 564528

(Relevant costs) Assume that you are about to graduate from your university. You are trying to decide whether to apply for graduate school or enter the job market. To help make the decision you have gathered the following data:

Costs incurred for the bachelor’s degree

$83,000

Out of pocket costs for the master’s degree

$51,000

Estimated starting salary with B.A.

$38,300

Estimated starting salary with M.A.

$44,400

Estimated time to complete master’s degree

2 years

Estimated time from the present to retirement

40 years

a. Which of these factors are relevant to your decision?

b. What is the opportunity cost associated with earning the master’s degree? What is the out of pocket cost to obtain the master’s degree?

c. What other factors should you consider before making a decision?

what are the relevant costs of each decision alternative and what should the company 564529

(Relevant costs) Because of a monumental error committed by its purchasing department, John’s Super Grocery received 50,000 heads of lettuce rather than the 500 that were actually ordered. The company paid $0.50 per head for the lettuce. Although the management is confident that 1,000 units can be sold through its regular sales, the market is not large enough to absorb the other 49,000 heads. Management has identified two ways to dispose of the excess heads. First, a wholesaler has offered to purchase them for $0.25 each. Second, a restaurant chain has offered to purchase the heads if John’s will agree to convert the heads into packaged lettuce salads. This option would require John’s to incur additional costs of $11,000 for conversion and the heads could then be sold for $0.48 each.

a. Which costs are sunk in this decision?

b. There are actually three alternatives John’s can consider. Describe the alternative that is not mentioned in the story.

c. What are the relevant costs of each decision alternative and what should the company do?

using concepts learned from this chapter prepare a brief presentation which outlines 564530

(Relevant vs. sunk costs) Your friend, Bill Hawkins, purchased a new, combination phone and answering machine just prior to the start of this school term. He paid $95 for the equipment. Shortly after the start of the semester, during a party at his apartment, Bill’s answering machine was crushed by an errant “flying plant.” Returning the equipment to his retailer, Bill was informed that the estimated cost of repairs was $45. Bill, pondering the figures, was ready to conclude that repairs should be made; after all, he had recently paid $95 for the equipment. However, before making a decision, Bill decided to ask for your advice, knowing that you were enrolled in a cost accounting course this term.

a. Using concepts learned from this chapter, prepare a brief presentation which outlines factors Bill should consider in making his decision.

b. Continue the presentation in part (a) by discussing the options Bill should consider in making his decision. Start by defining a base case against which alternatives may be compared

write a report offering specific suggestions as to actions gm could take to control 564531

(Relevant costs) An analysis of GM”s labor costs at its parts plant in Dayton, Ohio, provided evidence of one source of the firm”s competitive problems. Its UAW employees are provided fringe benefits that cost, on average, about $16 per labor hour. Fringe benefits provided include full health care coverage (no deductibles or copayments), vision care, dental care, full pension after 30 years, life insurance, disability benefits, legal services, and supplemental unemployment benefits. Add to the $16 cost per hour of fringe benefits about $18 per hour in base pay, plus an additional increment for profit sharing, and the total cost of the average laborer was about $43 an hour. Assume you have been hired as a cost analyst by GM management. Write a report offering specific suggestions as to actions GM could take to control its parts and components costs.

what qualitative considerations should be taken into account before making any decis 564532

(Asset replacement) Certain production equipment used in Flatburg’s Canadian plant has become obsolete relative to current technology. The company is considering whether it should keep its existing equipment or purchase new equipment. To aid in this decision, the company’s controller gathered the following data:

Old

New

Equipment

Equipment

Original cost

$72,000

$99,000

Remaining life

5 years

5 years

Accumulated depreciation

$39,500

$0

Annual cash operating costs

$17,000

$4,000

Current salvage value

$22,000

NA

Salvage value in 5 years

$0

$0

a. Identify any sunk costs listed in the data.

b. Identify any irrelevant (non differential) future costs.

c. Identify all relevant costs to the equipment replacement decision.

d. What are the opportunity costs associated with the alternative of keeping the old equipment?

e. What is the incremental cost to purchase the new equipment?

f. What qualitative considerations should be taken into account before making any decision?

the company can sell its existing software for 60 000 if it chooses to purchase the 564533

(Asset replacement) Modern Products Co. purchased new computer scheduling software on April 1, 2001, for $120,000 to manage its production. On May 15, 2001, a representative of a computerized manufacturing technology company] demonstrated new software that was clearly superior to that purchased by the firm earlier in the year. The price of this software is $210,000. Corporate managers estimate that the new software would save the company $18,000 annually in schedule related costs compared to the recently installed software. Both software systems should last 10 years (the expected life of the computer hardware) and have no salvage value at that time. The company can sell its existing software for $60,000 if it chooses to purchase the new system. Should the company keep and use the software purchased earlier in the year or buy the new software?

the standard variable overhead rate is 4 per direct labor hour the standard fixed ov 564448

(Four variance approach; journal entries) Laramie Lumber produces picnic tables, swings, and benches and uses direct labor hours to apply overhead .Standard hours allowed for each product are as follows:

Picnic table:

10 standard direct labor hours

Swing:

3 standard direct labor hours

Bench:

12 standard direct labor hours

The standard variable overhead rate is $4 per direct labor hour; the standard fixed overhead application rate at expected annual capacity is $2 per direct labor hour. Expected capacity on a monthly basis is 3,000 direct labor hours. Production for June 2001 was 100 picnic tables, 400 swings, and 60 benches. Actual direct labor hours incurred were 3,020. Actual variable overhead was $11,900, and actual fixed overhead was $6,100 for the month.

a. Prepare a variance analysis using the four variance approach. (Hint: Convert the production of each type of product into standard hours allowed for all work accomplished for the month.)

b. Calculate overhead variances using the four variance method.).

c. Evaluate the effectiveness of managers in controlling costs.

calculate the answers for the following unknowns 564449

(Variance analysis with unknowns) ATTENTION Products manufactures a neon lamp sign with the following standard conversion costs:

Direct labor (4 hours @ $12 per hour)

$ 48

Factory overhead (10,000 DLH expected capacity)

Variable (4 hours @ $16 per hour)

64

Fixed (4 hours @ $8 per hour)

32

Total unit conversion cost

$144

The following data are given for December, when 8,000 standard labor hours were used:

Labor rate variance

$ 4,500 U

Labor efficiency variance

12,000 U

Actual variable overhead

153,000

Actual fixed overhead

78,000

Calculate the answers for the following unknowns:

a. Total applied factory overhead

b. Volume variance

c. Variable overhead spending variance

d. Variable overhead efficiency variance

e. Total actual overhead

f. Number of units manufactured

using a combined overhead rate calculate variances according to the three variance a 564450

(Combined overhead rates) Rocky Mountain Industries manufactures a downfilled sleeping bag with the following standard cost information for 2001:

• Each sleeping bag requires 1 hour of machine time to produce.

• Variable overhead: $9 per machine hour

• Fixed overhead: $12 per machine hour; calculated as total budgeted overhead divided by expected annual capacity of 30,000 machine hours

Production Statistics for 2001:

Number of sleeping bags produced

31,000 units

Actual machine hours

33,300 hours

Variable overhead cost incurred

$266,400

Fixed overhead cost incurred

$353,500

a. Using a combined overhead rate, calculate variances according to the two variance approach.

b. Using a combined overhead rate, calculate variances according to the three variance approach.

overhead rates were based on normal monthly capacity of 6 000 machine 564451

(Comprehensive) Aluma Corporation manufactures metal screen doors for commercial buildings. The standard costs per screen door follow:

Direct Materials:

Aluminum

4 sheets at $2

$ 8

Copper

3 sheets at $4

12

Direct labor

7 hours at $8

56

Variable overhead

5 machine hours at $3

15

Fixed overhead

5 machine hours at $2

10

Overhead rates were based on normal monthly capacity of 6,000 machine

hours. During November, 850 doors were produced. This was below normal levels due to the effects of a labor strike that occurred during union contract negotiations. Once the dispute was settled, the company scheduled overtime to try to catch up to regular production levels. The following costs were incurred in November:

Material:

Aluminum:

4,000 sheets purchased at $2; used 3,500 sheets

Copper:

3,000 sheets purchased at $4.20; used 2,600 sheets

Direct Labor:

Regular time:

5,200 hours at $8.00 (precontract settlement)

Regular time:

900 hours at $8.50 (postcontract settlement)

Variable Overhead:

$11,700 (based on 4,175 machine hours)

Fixed Overhead: $9,300 (based on 4,175 machine hours) Determine the following:

a. Total material price variance

b. Total material usage (quantity) variance

c. Labor rate variance

d. Labor efficiency variance

e. Variable overhead spending variance

f. Variable overhead efficiency variance

g. Fixed overhead spending variance

h. Volume variance

i. Budget variance

discuss other cost drivers that could be used as a basis for measuring activity and 564452

(Comprehensive; all variances; all methods) Rainbow Painting Services Inc. paints interiors of residences and commercial structures. The firm’s management has established cost standards based on the amount of area to be painted. Direct material ($18 per gallon of paint): $1.50 per 100 square feet Direct labor: $2 per 100 square feet Variable overhead: $0.60 per 100 square feet Fixed overhead (based on 600,000 square feet per month): $1.25 per 100 square feet Management has determined that 400 square feet can be painted by the average worker each hour. During May 2001, the company painted 600,000 square feet of wall and ceiling space. The following costs were incurred:

Direct material (450 gallons purchased and used)

$ 8,550.00

Direct labor (1,475 hours)

12,242.50

Variable overhead

3,420.00

Fixed overhead

7,740.00

a. Compute the direct material variances.

b. Compute the direct labor variances.

c. Use a four variance approach to compute overhead variances.

d. Use a three variance approach to compute overhead variances.

e. Use a two variance approach to compute overhead variances.

f. Reconcile your answers for parts (c) through (e).

g. Discuss other cost drivers that could be used as a basis for measuring activity and computing variances for this company.

prepare the journal entries to record the above mix and yield variances 564455

(Appendix) Pablo’s three topping 18 inch frozen pizzas are produced by Quintella Food Industries in Los Angeles. The company uses a standard cost system. The three toppings (in addition to cheese) for each pizza are onions, olives, and mushrooms. To some extent, discretion may be used to determine the actual mix of these toppings. The company has two classes of labor, and discretion may be used to determine the mix of the labor inputs. The standard cost card for a pizza follows: Onions: 3 ounces at $0.10 per ounce Olives: 3 ounces at $0.35 per ounce Mushrooms: 3 ounces at $0.50 per ounce Labor category 1: 5 minutes at $12 per hour Labor category 2: 6 minutes at $8 per hour During May 2001, Quintella produced 12,000 pizzas and used the following inputs:

Onions:

2,000 pounds

Olives:

3,000 pounds

Mushrooms:

2,000 pounds

Labor category 1:

1,300 hours

Labor category 2:

1,000 hours

During the month there were no deviations from standards on material prices or labor rates.

a. Determine the material quantity, mix, and yield variances.

b. Determine the labor efficiency, mix, and yield variances.

c. Prepare the journal entries to record the above mix and yield variances.

prepare an analysis that reflects the impact of the new direct material and new labo 564457

Standards revision) Westlake Company produces a component for aircraft manufacturers. A standard cost system has been used for years with good results. Unfortunately, Westlake’s original direct material source went out of business. The new source produces a similar but higher quality material. The price per pound from the original source averaged $7; the price from the new source is $7.77. The new material reduces scrap and, thus, reduces the use of direct material from 1.25 to 1.00 pounds per unit. In addition, direct labor is reduced from 24 to 22 minutes per unit because there is less scrap labor and machine setup time. The direct material problem was occurring at the same time that labor negotiations resulted in an increase of over 14 percent in hourly direct labor costs. The average rate rose from $12.60 per hour to $14.40 per hour. Production of the main product requires a high level of labor skill. Because of a continuing shortage in that skill area, an interim wage agreement had to be signed. Westlake started using the new direct material on April 1, the same date that the new labor agreement went into effect. However, the company is still using standards that were set at the beginning of the calendar year. The direct material and direct labor standards for the component are as follows:

Direct material

1.2 pounds at $6.80 per pound

$ 8.16

Direct labor

20 minutes at $12.30 per DLH

4.10

Standard cost per unit

$12.26

Howard Foster, cost accounting supervisor, had been examining the following April 30 performance report. Jane Keene, assistant controller, came into Foster’s office and Foster said, “Jane, look at this performance report! Direct material price increased 11 percent and the labor rate increased over 14 percent during April. I expected greater variances, yet prime costs decreased over 5 percent from the $13.79 we experienced during the first quarter of this year. The proper message just isn’t coming through.” “This has been an unusual period,” said Keene. “With all the unforeseen changes, perhaps we should revise our standards based on current conditions and start over.” Foster replied, “I think we can retain the current standards but expand the variance analysis. We could calculate variances for the specific changes that have occurred to direct material and direct labor before we calculate the normal price and quantity variances. What I really think would be useful to management right now is to determine the impact the changes in direct material and direct labor had in reducing our prime costs per unit from $13.79 in the first quarter to $13.05 in April—a reduction of $0.74.”

a. Discuss the advantages of (1) immediately revising the standards and (2) retaining the current standards and expanding the analysis of variances.

b. Prepare an analysis that reflects the impact of the new direct material and new labor contract on reducing Westlake’s prime costs per unit from $13.79 to $13.05. The analysis should show the changes in direct material and direct labor costs per unit that are caused by (1) the use of new direct materials and (2) the new labor contract. This analysis should be in sufficient detail to identify the changes due to direct material price, direct labor rate, the effect of direct material quality on direct material usage, and the effect of direct material quality on direct labor usage.

prepare a report detailing the overhead budget variance the report which will be giv 564458

(Variances and variance responsibility) Hobby Horse, Inc., began operations in 2000. In 2001, the company manufactured only one product, a hand painted toy horse. The 2001 standard cost per unit is as follows:

$ 2.00

Material: one pound plastic at $2.00

6.40

Direct labor: 1.6 hours at $4.00

3.00

Variable overhead cost

1.45

Fixed overhead cost

$12.85

The overhead cost per unit was calculated from the following annual overhead

cost budget for 60,000 units.

Variable Overhead Cost:

Indirect labor—30,000 hours at $4.00

$120,000

Supplies (oil)—60,000 gallons at $0.50

30,000

Allocated variable service department costs

30,000

Total variable overhead cost

$180,000

Fixed Overhead Cost:

Supervision

$ 27,000

Depreciation

45,000

Other fixed costs

15,000

Total fixed overhead cost

87,000

Total budgeted overhead cost at 60,000 units

$267,000

following are the charges to the manufacturing department for November, when 5,000 units were produced:

Material (5,300 pounds at $2.00)

$10,600

Direct labor (8,200 hours at $4.10)

33,620

Indirect labor (2,400 hours at $4.10)

9,840

Supplies (oil) (6,000 gallons at $0.55)

3,300

Allocated variable service department costs

3,200

Supervision

2,475

Depreciation

3,750

Other fixed costs

1,250

Total

$68,035

The Purchasing Department normally buys about the same quantity as is used in production during a month. In November, 5,200 pounds of material were purchased at a price of $2.10 per pound.

a. Calculate the following variances from standard costs for the data given:

1. Material purchase price

2. Material quantity

3. Direct labor rate

4. Direct labor efficiency

5. Overhead budget

b. The company has divided its responsibilities so that the Purchasing Department is responsible for the price at which materials and supplies are purchased. The Manufacturing Department is responsible for the quantities of materials used. Does this division of responsibilities solve the conflict between price and quantity variances? Explain your answer.

c. Prepare a report detailing the overhead budget variance. The report, which will be given to the Manufacturing Department manager, should show only that part of the variance that is her responsibility and should highlight the information in ways that would be useful to her in evaluating departmental performance and when considering corrective action.

d. Assume that the departmental manager performs the timekeeping function for this manufacturing department. From time to time, analyses of overhead and direct labor variances have shown that the manager has deliberately misclassified labor hours (i.e., listed direct labor hours as indirect labor hours and vice versa) so that only one of the two labor variances is unfavorable. It is not feasible economically to hire a separate timekeeper. What should the company do, if anything, to resolve this problem?

how does honest communication between managers and workers help avoid the problems d 564459

In the mid 1940s, a young man named Donald Roy was working on a Ph.D. at the University of Chicago. As part of his dissertation project, Mr. Roy posed (anonymously) for eleven months as a radial drill operator at a steel processing plant. Workers in this plant were paid on a piece rate basis (with a minimum hourly base pay of 85 cents) for all of the jobs (parts) they worked on. Some of the most interesting behaviors that Mr. Roy observed involved games the employees played based on their perceptions of the fairness of piece rates. If the employees perceived that the piece rates were set too low (required too much output per hour to exceed the base rate) they would engage in work slowdowns. Thus, they would receive the base rate pay of 85 cents per hour rather than the piece rate pay. The company’s cost of components produced when employees engaged in slowdowns was consequently higher than the piece rate cost. The slowdown was essentially a way to express discontentment with the piece rate and implied to management a need to revise the piece rate pay. Communication among employees ensured that, with respect to a certain part, all employees participated in the slowdown. Other jobs were recognized by employees as “gravy jobs.” On these jobs, the piece rates were sufficiently high to allow employees to easily exceed the base rate pay without exerting significant effort. On these jobs, employees carefully monitored each other so that no employee generated income substantially above the base rate of 85 cents per hour. The fear was that managers would revise the piece rate if employees generated too much hourly income from the piece rate pay.

a. Why would it be difficult in the environment described by Donald Roy to develop credible standards of performance?

b. Was the behavior of the employees ethical?

c. Is it ethical for managers to revise piece rate pay when it becomes obvious that standards can be easily met or beat?

d. How does honest communication between managers and workers help avoid the problems described by Donald Roy?

what effects might overtime have on job efficiency on job effectiveness such as qual 564461

In 1993, when nearly 9 million people couldn’t find jobs, other Americans were putting in the most overtime since the government started keeping records in the 1950s. With factory workers averaging 4.2 hours of overtime per week, the Bureau of Labor Statistics said more than a tenth of all work done in the nation’s factories was performed on overtime. “If we could go back to the amount of overtime worked in 1982, we would create 3 million new jobs without increasing the federal deficit,” said John Zalu sky, an economist at the AFL CIO. He said many workers are putting in extra hours against their wishes. One reason employers were going the overtime route, economists said, was that overtime pay didn’t cost much extra. Fringe benefits, representing as much as 40 percent of labor costs, were mostly covered by the first 40 hours worked. And the overtime hours generally were worked by employers’ most skilled and productive people. Beyond that, using overtime avoided the cost of hiring and training new workers, finding space for them and dealing with the added paperwork. Because of all those factors, Zalu sky calculated that paying a skilled worker time and a half actually cost employers only about 3 percent extra.

a. How does overtime pay affect direct labor cost? Variable overhead?

b. Obviously, paying overtime to already employed workers makes better financial business sense than does hiring additional workers. If, however, workers would prefer not to work overtime but do so to maintain their jobs, how does overtime affect the ethical contract between employers and employees?

c. What effects might overtime have on job efficiency? On job effectiveness (such as quality of production)?

d. Would you be in favor of limiting allowable hours of overtime to have more individuals employed? Discuss this question from the standpoint of the government, the employer, a currently employed worker, and an unemployed individual.

who has had minor surgery and from the point of view of a patient who has had major 564462

As of 1983, Medicare began reimbursing hospitals according to diagnostic related groups (DRGs). Each DRG has a specified standard length of stay. If a patient leaves the hospital early, the hospital is favorably financially impacted but a patient staying longer than the specified time costs the hospital money.

a. From the hospital administrator’s point of view, would you want favorable “length of stay” variances? How might you go about trying to obtain such variances?

b. From a patient’s point of view, would you want favorable “length of stay” variances? Answer this question from the point of view of a patient who has had minor surgery and from the point of view of a patient who has had major surgery.

c. Would favorable “length of stay” variances necessarily equate to high quality care?

why do standards regardless of the purpose for which they are set need to be tied to 564463

National standards for U.S. schools covering 13 subjects have been devised by educators in the arts, mathematics, history, English and the sciences. . . . Academic professional groups, meanwhile, have been so wary of offending minorities, and so protective of teachers’ academic freedoms, that they have often come up with guidelines that are awash in generalities and impossibl to codify into a curriculum.= An analysis in 1995 by the American Federation of Teachers found that only 13 states had developed standards clear enough to be translated into actual classroom curriculum. The others had standards that “were too vague for teachers to use them, for parents to understand them,” said AFT president Albert Shanker. The report also found that only seven states planned to require students to meet the standards to graduate. “In most states, students wouldn’t in any way be affected by whether or not they can meet the standards,” the report said. The AFT found that most states developed their standards without reviewing what high achieving countries such as Japan, Germany and France require of students. According to the AFT, at least a quarter of all secondary school students in Germany, France, England and Japan passed at least one advanced exam in mathematics, science or other subjects. In the U.S., only 5% of students passed one of the advanced placement exams that could have given them college credit; but the exams weren’t required, and there was no penalty for failure.

a. Research the education standards in your home state or country and prepare a report on them. Do you think these standards are measurable? Why or why not?

b. Why do standards, regardless of the purpose for which they are set, need to be tied to consequences?

c. Assume you have been elected state governor on an education reform platform. The state has in place some objective and measurable education standards. How would you tie these standards to consequences? What costs to the state’s taxpayers would be associated with such consequences?

d. Consider the following: Scott Paper spent $400,000 screening 14,176 job applicants to hire 174. Of the 10,000 people who passed the initial screening, 4,000 failed a standardized English and high school algebra test. SOURCE: Raju Narisetti, “Manufacturers Decry a Shortage of Workers While Rejecting Many,” The Wall Street Journal (September 8, 1995), p. A4. Scott was looking for employees to perform numerous tasks previously handled by managers, and the jobs had a starting salary of $29,000. Do you think that educational standards would help a company like Scott Paper find qualified employees? Explain.

what was cost of goods sold for 1999 under absorption costing 564477

(Production cost; absorption vs. variable costing) Bright Smile Mouthwash began business in 1999. Production for the year was 100,000 bottles of mouthwash, and sales were 98,000 bottles. Costs incurred during the year were as follows:

Ingredients used

$28,000

Direct labor

13,000

Variable overhead

24,000

Fixed overhead

12,000

Variable selling expenses

5,000

Fixed selling and administrative expenses

14,000

Total actual costs

$96,000

a. What was the actual production cost per bottle under variable costing? Under absorption costing?

b. What was variable Cost of Goods Sold for 1999 under variable costing?

c. What was Cost of Goods Sold for 1999 under absorption costing?

d. What was the value of ending inventory under variable costing? Under absorption costing?

e. How much fixed overhead was charged to expense in 1999 under variable costing? Under absorption costing?

explain the features associated with variable cost income measurement that should be 564479

(Convert variable to absorption) James Walton, vice president of marketing for Charming Curios, has just received the April 2000 income statement, shown below, which was prepared on a variable costing basis. The firm uses a variable costing system for internal reporting purposes.

Sales

$4,800

Variable standard cost of goods sold

(2,400)

Product contribution margin

$2,400

Fixed expenses

Manufacturing (at budget)

$1,000

Manufacturing spending variance

0

Selling and administrative

800

(1,800)

Income before taxes

$ 600

The controller attached the following notes to the statements:

The unit sales price for April averaged $48.

The standard unit manufacturing costs for the month were:

Variable cost

$24

Fixed cost

10

Total cost

$34

The unit rate for fixed manufacturing costs is a predetermined rate based on a normal monthly production of 100,000 units. Production for April was

5,000 units in excess of sales, and the April ending inventory consisted of 8,000 units.

a. The vice president of marketing is not comfortable with the variable cost

basis and wonders what income before tax would have been under absorption costing.

1. Present the April income statement on an absorption costing basis.

2. Reconcile and explain the difference between the variable costing and the absorption costing income figures

b. Explain the features associated with variable cost income measurement that should be attractive to the vice president of marketing. (CMA adapted)

how much expense will be charged against revenues in 1999 under absorption costing u 564480

(Standard costing; variable and absorption costing) Gramps’ Remedy manufactures athletes’ foot powder. The company uses a standard costing system. Following are data pertaining to the company’s operations for 1999:

Production for the year

180,000 units

Sales for the year (sales price per unit, $1.25)

195,000 units

Beginning 1999 inventory

35,000 units

STANDARD COSTS TO PRODUCE 1 UNIT

Direct material

$0.15

Direct labor

0.10

Variable overhead

0.05

Fixed overhead

0.15

SELLING AND ADMINISTRATIVE COSTS

Variable (per unit sold)

$0.14

Fixed (per year)

$120,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead is assigned to units of production based on a predetermined rate using a normal production capacity of 200,000 units per year.

a. What is the estimated annual fixed manufacturing overhead?

b. If estimated fixed overhead is equal to actual fixed overhead, what is the

amount of under or overapplied overhead in 1999 under absorption costing? Under variable costing? c. What is the product cost per unit under absorption costing? Under variable costing?

d. How much expense will be charged against revenues in 1999 under absorption costing? Under variable costing?

e. Will pretax income be higher under absorption or variable costing? By what amount?

what level of revenue is needed to yield an after tax income equal to 20 percent of 564484

(CVP, taxes) Joan Michaels has a small plant that makes playhouses. She sells them to local customers at $3,000 each. Her costs are as follows:

Costs

Per Unit

Total

Direct material

$1,200

Direct labor

400

Variable overhead

150

Variable selling

50

Fixed production overhead

$200,000

Fixed selling and administrative

80,420

Joan is in a 35 percent tax bracket.

a. How many playhouses must she sell to earn $247,507 after taxes?

b. What level of revenue is needed to yield an after tax income equal to 20 percent of sales?

compute the answers to each of the following independentsituations 564486

(Miscellaneous) Compute the answers to each of the following independentsituations.

a. SmallCo sells two products, M and N. The sales mix of these products is 2:4, respectively. M has a contribution margin of $10 per unit, and N has a contribution margin of $5 per unit. Fixed costs for the company are $90,000. What would be the total units of N sold at the break even point?

b. Brooke Company has a break even point of 2,000 units. At breakeven, variable costs are $3,200 and fixed costs are $800. If the company sells one unit over breakeven, what will be the pretax income of the company?

c. Cool Cologne sells its product for $5 per bottle. The fixed costs of the company are $108,000. Variable costs amount to 40 percent of selling price What amount of sales (in units) would be necessary for Cool Cologne to earn a 25 percent pretax profiton sales?

d. Johnston Company has a break even point of 1,400 units. The company is currently selling 1,600 units for $65 each. What is the margin of safety for the company in units, sales dollars, and percentage?

prepare a profit volume graph d prepare a short explanation for company management a 564488

(Appendix) Tom & Jerry Inc. had the following income statement for 2000.

Sales (15,000 gallons @ $8)

$120,000

Variable Costs

Production (20,000 gallons @ $3)

$60,000

Selling (20,000 gallons @ $0.50)

10,000

(70,000)

Contribution Margin

$ 50,000

Fixed Costs

Production

$22,000

Selling and administrative

4,000

(26,000)

Income before Taxes

$ 24,000

Income Taxes (40%)

(9,600)

Net Income

$ 14,400

a. Prepare a CVP graph, in the traditional manner, to reflect the relations among costs, revenues, profit, and volume.

b. Prepare a CVP graph, in the contemporary manner, to reflect the relations among costs, revenues, profit, and volume.

c. Prepare a profit volume graph. d. Prepare a short explanation for company management about each of the graphs.

explain the difference between the incomes for the second year under the two systems 564489

(Convert variable to absorption) George Massat started a new business in 1999 to produce portable, climate controlled shelters. The shelters have many applications in special events and sporting activities. George’s accountant prepared the variable costing income statement shown after part (d3) after the first year to help him in making decisions. During the year, the following variable production costs per unit were recorded: direct material, $800; direct labor, $300; and overhead, $200. Mr. Massat was upset about the net loss because he had wanted to borrow funds to expand capacity. His friend who teaches accounting at a local university suggested that the use of absorption costing could change the picture.

a. Prepare an absorption costing pretax income statement.

b. Explain the source of the difference between the net income and the net loss figures under the two costing systems.

c. Would it be appropriate to present an absorption costing income statement to the local banker in light of Mr. Massat’s knowledge of the net loss determined under variable costing? Explain. (continued)

d. Assume that during the second year of operations, Mr. Massat’s company

produced 1,750 shelters, sold 1,850, and experienced the same total fixed

costs. For the second year:

1. Prepare a variable costing pretax income statement.

2. Prepare an absorption costing pretax income statement.

3. Explain the difference between the incomes for the second year under the two systems.

Sales (1,500 shelters @ $2,500)

$3,750,000

Variable cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

Cost of goods manufactured (1,750 @ $1,300)

$ 0

Cost of goods available for sale

2,275,000

Less ending inventory (250 @ $1,300)

$2,275,000

Product contribution margin

(325,000)

(1,950,000)

Less variable selling and administrative

$1,800,000

expenses (1,500 @ $180)

Total contribution margin

(270,000)

Less fixed expenses:

$1,530,000

Fixed factory overhead

$1,500,000

Fixed selling and administrative expenses

190,000

(1,690,000)

Net loss

$ (160,000)

calculate the per unit inventory cost for absorption costing 564490

(Income statements, variance) Johnson Tools makes a unique workman’s tool. The company produces and sells approximately 500,000 units per year. The projected unit cost data for 2001 follows; the company uses standard full absorption costing and writes off all variances to Cost of Goods Sold.

Direct material

$1.50

0

Direct labor

1.20

0

Variable overhead

0.40

0

Fixed overhead

$ 82,000

Selling and administrative

4.00

145,000

The fixed overhead application rate is $0.16 per unit.

a. Calculate the per unit inventory cost for variable costing.

b. Calculate the per unit inventory cost for absorption costing.

c. The projected income before tax from variable costing is $223,000 at production and sales of 500,000 units and 490,000 units, respectively. Projected beginning and ending finished goods inventories are 30,000 and 40,000 units, respectively. Calculate the projected income before tax using absorption costing.

explain the main reasons for the introduction of frs 4 capital instruments 564396

(a) Explain the main reasons for the introduction of FRS 4, Capital instruments.

(b) Explain how FRS 4, Capital instruments, deals with the accounting treatment of:

(i) convertible debt; and

(ii) redeemable preference shares,

making reference to any differences with International Accounting Standards. You should relate your comments to the underlying principles in the Statement of Principles, where appropriate.

(c) Errol plc borrowed £20 million on 1 January 2000 under an agreement with its bank to pay interest of 7% on 31 December 2000, 10% on 31 December 2001 and a final payment of interest and capital totalling £22057000 on 31 December 2002. The company prepares accounts to 31 December. Assume an overall effective annual rate of interest of 9%.

Requirement

Calculate and disclose the amounts that will appear on the face of the profit and loss accounts and balance sheets for each year affected by the loan.

what is the total net realizable value of hair that is applied to reduce the joint c 564397

(Process costing; joint cost allocation; by product) Romano’s Hair Salon provides hair styling services and sells a variety of cosmetic and hair care products. The firm also generates some revenue from the sale of hair, which is periodically swept from the floor of the styling salon. The net realizable value of hair is accounted for as a reduction in the joint cost assigned to the Styling Services and Cosmetic Products. Hair sells for $6 per pound. The cost of packaging the hair is $0.50 per pound, and selling costs of the hair are $0.30 per pound. The following information is available for 2001 on the inventory of Cosmetic Products (the firm does not produce these products; they are purchased):

Beginning inventory

$ 35,000

Ending inventory

21,500

Purchases

181,350

Joint cost is to be allocated to Styling Services and Cosmetic Products based on approximated net realizable values (revenues less separate costs). For 2001, total revenues were $753,000 from Styling Services and $289,000 from Cosmetic Products. The following joint costs were incurred:

Rent

$36,000

Insurance

23,800

Utilities

3,000

Separate costs were as follows:

Styling Services

Cosmetic Products

Labor

$431,000

$24,000

Supplies

98,000

700

Equipment depreciation

65,000

1,200

Administration

113,000

3,700

For the year, 2,510 pounds of hair were collected and sold.

a. What is the total net realizable value of hair that is applied to reduce the joint cost assigned to Styling Services and to Cosmetic Products?

b. What is the joint cost to be allocated to Styling Services and Cosmetic Products?

c. What is the approximated pretax realizable value of each main product or service for 2001?

d. How much joint cost is allocated to each main product or service?

e. Determine the net income produced by each main product or service.

without further processing the straw sells for 30 per ton a ton equals 2 000 pounds 564399

(By product/joint product journal entries) Missouri Grain Agriculture is a 5,000 acre wheat farm. The growing process yields two principal products: wheat and straw. Wheat is sold for $3.50 per bushel (assumes a bushel of wheat weighs 60 pounds). Without further processing, the straw sells for $30 per ton (a ton equals 2,000 pounds). If the straw is processed further, it is baled and then sells for $45 per ton. In 2001, total joint cost to the split off point (harvest) was $175 per acre. The farm produced 70 bushels of wheat per acre and 1 ton of straw per acre. If all of the straw were processed further, processing costs (baling) for the straw would amount to $50,000. Prepare the 2001 journal entries for straw, if straw is:

a. transferred to storage at sales value as a by product without further processing, with a corresponding reduction of wheat’s production costs.

b. further processed as a by product and transferred to storage at net realizable value, with a corresponding reduction of the manufacturing costs of wheat.

c. further processed and transferred to finished goods, with joint cost being allocated between wheat and straw based on relative sales value at the split off point. (CPA adapted)

alternatively some companies have historically found ldquo cheap rdquo ways to dispo 564402

Some waste, scrap, or by product materials have little value. In fact, many such materials represent liabilities for companies because the materials require companies to incur significant disposal costs. Alternatively, some companies have historically found “cheap” ways to dispose of such materials. For example, between 1991 and 1994, Borden Chemicals and Plastics shipped mercury laden waste to Thor Chemicals’ plant at Cato Ridge, South Africa. Borden maintains that the material—spent mercuric chloride catalysts—was not hazardous waste and that it expected Thor to recycle it. According to the EPA, little or none of the material was recycled. Greenpeace says Borden’s barrels are leaking at the Thor site. Thor has settled a civil suit brought by families of employees whose exposure to the waste allegedly killed them. Greenpeace says the settlement exceeded $9 million. More litigation has ensued.

a. Comment on whether this method of disposing of industrial waste is a “cheap” alternative.

b. Discuss the ethical and legal implications of disposing of industrial waste in this manner.

c. What actions can people take to reduce these kinds of incidents?

d. Ethically, what obligation does the vendor/manufacturer of these industrial materials have to the industrial consumer of the materials?

in august 2001 east publishing company rsquo s costs and quantities of paper consume 564424

(Direct material variances) In August 2001, East Publishing Company’s costs and quantities of paper consumed in manufacturing its 2002 Executive Plannerand Calendar were as follow:

Actual unit purchase price

$0.16 per page

Standard quantity allowed for good production

195,800 pages

Actual quantity purchased during August

230,000 pages

Actual quantity used in August

200,000 pages

Standard unit price

$0.15 per page

a. Calculate the total cost of purchases for August.

b. Compute the material price variance (based on quantity purchased).

c. Calculate the material quantity variance.

in december 2001 ms scamponi president of the company received the following informa 564427

(Direct material and direct labor variances) Lisa Scamponi Ltd. Produces evening bags. In December 2001, Ms. Scamponi, president of the company, received the following information from Antonio Buffa, the new controller, in regard to November production:

Production during month

1,200 handbags

Actual cost of material purchased and used

$4,767.18

Standard material allowed

1/3 square yard per bag

Material quantity variance

$594 U

Actual hours worked

2,520

Standard labor time per handbag

2 hours

Labor rate variance

$630 F

Standard labor rate per hour

$7

Standard price per yard of material

$8

Ms. Scamponi asked Mr. Buffa to provide her with the following specific information:

a. The standard quantity of material allowed for November production

b. The standard direct labor hours allowed for November production

c. The material price variance

d. The labor efficiency variance

e. The standard prime (direct material and direct labor) cost to produce one bag

f. The actual cost to produce one bag in November

g. An explanation for the difference between standard and actual cost. Be sure the explanation is consistent with the pattern of the variances.

missing information for materials and labor for each of the independent cases fill 564428

(Missing information for materials and labor) For each of the independent cases, fill in the missing figures.

Case A

Case B

Case C

Case D

Units produced

800

?

240

1,500

Standard hours per unit

3

0.8

?

?

Standard hours allowed

?

600

480

?

Standard rate per hour

$7

?

$9.50

$6

Actual hours worked

2,330

675

?

4,875

Actual labor cost

?

?

$4,560

26,812.50

Labor rate variance

$466F

$1,080F

$228U

?

Labor efficiency variance

?

$780U

?

$2,250U

four variance approach journal entries for 2001 blankly manufacturing has set 60 00 564429

(Four variance approach; journal entries) For 2001, Blankly Manufacturing has set 60,000 direct labor hours as the annual capacity measure for computing its predetermined variable overhead rate. At that level, budgeted variable overhead costs are $270,000. The company has decided to apply fixed overhead on the basis of machine hours. Total budgeted annual machine hours are 3,300 and annual budgeted fixed overhead is $118,800. Both machine hours and fixed overhead costs are expected to be incurred evenly each month. During March 2001, Blankly incurred 4,900 direct labor hours and 250machine hours. Variable and fixed overhead were, respectively, $21,175 and$10,500. The standard times allowed for March production were 4,955 direct labor hours and 240 machine hours.

a. Using the four variance approach, determine the overhead variances for March 2001.

b. Prepare all journal entries for Blankly Manufacturing for March 2001.

computation of all overhead variances the manager of the automobile registration di 564430

(Computation of all overhead variances) The manager of the Automobile Registration Division of the state of Nebraska has determined that it typically takes 30 minutes for the department’s employees to register a new car. The following predetermined overhead costs are applicable to Lancaster County. Fixed overhead, computed on an estimated 4,000 direct labor hours, is $8 per DLH. Variable overhead is estimated at $3 per DLH. During July 2001, 7,600 cars were registered in Lancaster County, taking 3,700 direct labor hours. For the month, variable overhead was $10,730 and fixed overhead was $29,950.

a. Compute overhead variances using a four variance approach.

b. Compute overhead variances using a three variance approach.

c. Compute overhead variances using a two variance approach.

assume that the variances taken together are believed to be significant prepare the 564433

(Journal entries) Miami Chemical had the following balances in its trial balance at year end 2001:

Debit

Direct Material Inventory

$36,600

Work in Process Inventory

43,920

Finished Goods Inventory

65,880

Cost of Goods Sold

585,600

Material Price Variance

7,250

$10,925

Material Quantity Variance

1,200

Labor Rate Variance

Labor Efficiency Variance

4,390

VOH Spending Variance

3,600

VOH Efficiency Variance

200

FOH Spending Variance

650

Volume Variance

1,375

Assume that the variances, taken together, are believed to be significant. Prepare the journal entries to dispose of the variances.

variances and conversion cost category baltimore brake makes brake rotors until rec 564434

(Variances and conversion cost category) Baltimore Brake makes brake rotors. Until recently, the company used a standard cost system and applied overhead to production based on direct labor hours. The company automated its facilities in March 2001 and revamped its accounting system so that there are only two cost categories: direct material and conversion. Estimated variable conversion costs for April 2001 were $170,000, and estimated fixed conversion costs were $76,000; machine hours were estimated at 10,000 for April. Expected output for April was 5,000 rotors. In April, the firm actually used 9,000 machine hours to make 4,800 rotors. The firm incurred conversion costs totaling $230,000; $150,000 of this amount was variable cost.

a. Using the four variance approach, compute the variances for conversion costs in April.

b. Evaluate the effectiveness of the firm in controlling costs in April.

how a standard cost system should be implemented to positively motivate employees 564438

(Behavioral implications of standard costing) Contact a local company that uses a standard cost system. Make an appointment with a manager at that company to interview him or her on the following issues:

• The characteristics that should be present in a standard cost system to encourage positive employee motivation

• How a standard cost system should be implemented to positively motivate employees

• What “management by exception” is and how variance analysis often results in the use of management by exception

• How employee behavior could be adversely affected when “actual to standard” comparisons are used as the basis for performance evaluation Prepare a paper and an oral presentation based on your interview.

39. (Flexible budget, variances, and cost control) Overland Corp. planned to produce at the 8,000 unit level for its single type of product. Because of unexpected demand, the firm actually operated at the 8,800 unit level. The company’s flexible budget appears as follows:

6,000 units

8,000 units

10,000 units

Overhead costs:

Variable

$24,000

$32,000

$40,000

Fixed

16,000

16,000

16,000

Total

$40,000

$48,000

$56,000

Actual costs incurred in producing the 8,800 units:

Variable

$34,320

Fixed

16,400

Total

$50,720

The production manager was upset because the company planned to incur $48,000 of costs and actual costs were $50,720. Prepare a memo to the production manager regarding the following questions.

a. Was it correct to compare the $50,720 to the $48,000 for cost control purposes?

b. Analyze the costs and explain where the company did well or poorly in controlling its costs.

how would you as the plant cost accountant react if wessly insisted on his compariso 564440

(Cost control evaluation) The Arizona Concrete Company makes precast concrete steps for use with manufactured housing. The plant had the following 2001 budget based on expected production of 3,200 units:

Standard Cost

Amount Budgeted

Direct material

$22.00

$ 70,400

Direct labor

12.00

38,400

Variable overhead:

Indirect material

4.20

13,440

Indirect labor

1.75

5,600

Utilities

1.00

3,200

Fixed overhead:

Supervisory salaries

40,000

Depreciation

15,000

Insurance

9,640

Total

$195,680

Cost per unit _ $195,680 _ 3,200 _ $61.15 Actual production for 2001 was 3,500 units, and actual costs for the year were as follows:

Direct material used

$ 80,500

Direct labor

42,300

Variable overhead:

Indirect material

14,000

Indirect labor

6,650

Utilities

3,850

Fixed overhead:

Supervisory salaries

41,000

Depreciation

15,000

Insurance

8,800

Total

$212,100

Cost per unit _ $212,100 _ 3,500 _ $60.60 The plant manager, John Wessly, whose annual bonus includes (among other factors) 20 percent of the net favorable cost variances, states that he saved the company $1,925 [($61.15 _ $60.60) _ 3,500]. He has instructed the plant cost accountant to prepare a detailed report to be sent to corporate headquarters comparing each component’s actual per unit cost with the per unit amounts set forth above in the annual budget to prove the $1,925 cost savings.

a. Is the actual to budget comparison proposed by Wessly an appropriate one? If Wessly’s comparison is not appropriate, prepare a more appropriate comparison.

b. How would you, as the plant cost accountant, react if Wessly insisted on his comparison? Suggest what alternatives are available to you.

calculate the amount of the direct labor efficiency variance for the month and decom 564441

(Appendix) Buffin Legal Services has three labor classes: secretaries, paralegals, and attorneys. The standard wage rates are shown in the standard cost system as follows: secretaries, $25 per hour; paralegals, $40 per hour; and attorneys, $85 per hour. The firm has established a standard of 0.5 hours of secretarial time and 2 hours of paralegal time for each hour of attorney time in probate cases. The actual direct labor hours worked on probate cases and the standard hours allowed for the work accomplished for one month in 2001 were as follows:

Standard Hours

Actual DLHS

for Output Achieved

Secretarial

500

500

Paralegal

1,800

2,000

Attorney

1,100

1,000

a. Calculate the amount of the direct labor efficiency variance for the month and decompose the total into the following components:

1. Direct labor mix variance

2. Direct labor yield variance

b. Prepare a memo addressing whether management used an efficient mix of labor. (CMA adapted)

calculate the material and labor variances for mississippi marine for july 2001 base 564442

(Material and labor variances) Mississippi Marine uses a standard cost system for materials and labor in producing fishing boats. Production requires three materials: fiberglass, paint, and a prepurchased trim package. The standard costs and quantities for materials and labor are as follows:

Standards for 1 Fishing Boat

2,500 pounds of fiberglass @ $0.80 per pound

$2,000

6 quarts gel coat paint @ $60.00 per gallon

90

1 trim package

400

40 hours of labor @ $25.00 per hour

1,000

Prime standard cost

$3,490

During July 2001, the company recorded the following actual data related to the production of 300 boats: Material Purchased: Fiberglass—820,000 pounds @ $0.83 per pound Paint—500 gallons @ $55.50 per gallon Trim packages—320 @ $405 per package Material Used: Fiberglass—790,000 pounds Paint—462 gallons Trim packages—304 Direct Labor Used: 12,100 hours @ $23.50 per hour

Calculate the material and labor variances for Mississippi Marine for July 2001. Base the material price variance on the quantity of material purchased.

compute material and labor variances basing the material price variance on the quant 564443

(Variance calculation and journal entries) Montreal Toy Co. makes small plastic toys. Standard quantities and standard costs follow for material and labor.

Standard Quantity

Standard Cost

Material

1/2 pound

$4 per pound ($2.00 per unit of output)

Labor

12 minutes

$16 per hour ($3.20 per unit of output)

During October 2001, 50,000 toys were produced. The purchasing agent bought 29,000 pounds of material during the month at $4.13 per pound. October payroll for the factory revealed direct labor cost of $160,680 on 10,300 direct labor hours. During the month, 26,300 pounds of raw material were used in production.

a. Compute material and labor variances, basing the material price variance on the quantity of material purchased.

b. Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare general journal entries for the month.

incomplete data surgical supply manufactures latex surgical gloves it takes 0 85 sq 564444

(Incomplete data) Surgical Supply manufactures latex surgical gloves. It takes 0.85 square feet of latex to manufacture a pair of gloves. The standard price for material is $0.80 per square foot. Most processing is done by machine; the only labor required is for operators, who are paid $25 per hour. The machines can produce 400 pairs of gloves per hour. During one week in May, Surgical produced 30,000 pairs of gloves and experienced a $1,500 unfavorable material quantity variance. The company had purchased 1,500 more square feet of material than it used in production that week, producing an unfavorable price variance of $570. Based on 77 total actual labor hours to produce the gloves, a $104 favorable total labor variance was generated. Determine the following amounts:

a. Standard quantity of material

b. Actual quantity of material used (continued)

c. Actual quantity of material purchased

d. Actual price of material purchased

e. Standard hours allowed for production

f. Labor efficiency variance

g. Labor rate variance

h. Actual labor rate

incomplete data learning products inc makes wooden lap desks a small fire on octobe 564445

(Incomplete data) Learning Products, Inc., makes wooden lap desks. A small fire on October 1 partially destroyed the books and records relating to September’s production. The charred remains of the standard cost card appear below.

Standard Quantity Standard Price

Direct material……………………………5.0 board feet

Direct labor…………………………… ………….$12.50 per hour

From other fragments of records and several discussions with employees, you learn the following:

1. The standard quantity of material used in September was 4,000 board feet.

2. The September payroll for direct labor was $19,220 based on 1,550 actual hours worked.

3. The production supervisor distinctly remembered being held accountable for 50 more hours of direct labor than should have been worked. She was upset because top management failed to consider that she saved several hundred board feet of material by creative efforts that required extra time.

4. The purchasing agent’s files showed that 4,300 board feet had been purchased and used in September at $2.05 per board foot. She was proud of the fact that this price was $0.05 below standard cost per foot.

a. How many units were produced during September?

b. Calculate all variances for direct material and direct labor for September.

c. What is the standard number of hours allowed for the production of each unit?

d. Prepare general journal entries reflecting direct material and direct labor activity and variances for September, assuming a standard cost, perpetual inventory system.

determine the new standards against which sally should measure the may 2001 results 564446

(Adjusting standards) Maui Muumuus manufactures traditional Hawaiian dresses. The company was started early in 1995, and the following standards for materials and labor were developed at that time:

Material

3 yards at $6 per yard

Labor

1.5 hours at $10 per hour

In May 2001, Maui Muumuus hired a new cost accountant, Sally Rogers. At the end of May, Sally was reviewing the variances calculated for the month and was amazed to find that standards had never been revised since the company started. Actual data for May 2001 for material and labor are as follows:

Material

Purchased, 50,000 yards at $7.00 Used in production of 17,200 muumuus, 50,000 yards

Labor

17,800 hours at $13.50 per hour

Since 1995, material prices have risen 4 percent each year. However, the company can now buy at 94 percent of regular price due to the increased volume of purchases. Labor contracts have specified a 5 percent cost of living adjustment for each year, beginning in 1996. Because of revising the plant layout and purchasing more efficient machinery, the labor time per muumuu has decreased by one third; also, direct material waste has been reduced from 1/4yard to 1/8 yard per muumuu.

a. Determine the material and labor variances based on the standards originally designed for the company.

b. Determine the new standards against which Sally should measure the May 2001 results. (Round adjustments annually to the nearest penny.)

c. Compute the variances for material and labor using the revised standards.

the fixed overhead charge is based on an expected monthly capacity of 3 000 units bu 564447

(Calculation of four variances) Candy’s Ceramics utilizes a standard cost system. Data for October are presented below:

Standard Cost per Unit 1 Unit Takes 1 Labor Hour)

Direct material

$ 9.00

Direct labor

15.00

Variable overhead

8.00

Fixed overhead

16.00

Total

$48.00

The fixed overhead charge is based on an expected monthly capacity of 3,000 units, but due to a fire on the production floor, the company only produced 1,900 units. Actual variable overhead was $16,000 and actual fixed overhead was $44,000. The company recorded 2,000 direct labor hours for the month.

a. Compute and compare the actual overhead cost per unit with the expected overhead cost per unit.

b. Calculate overhead variances using the four variance method.

explain why frs 15 requires those companies who revalue fixed assets to revalue all 564374

L plc has never revalued its land and buildings. The directors are unsure whether they should adopt a policy of doing so. They are concerned that FRS 15 – Tangible Fixed Assets has an “all or nothing” approach which would impose a duty on them to maintain up to date valuations in the balance sheet for all land and buildings into the indefinite future. They are also concerned that the introduction of current values will make the accounting ratios based on their balance sheet appear less attractive to shareholders and other users of the financial statements.

Required

Authors’ note: Students should ignore part (c) of this question as the relevant data has not been provided.

(a) Explain why FRS 15 requires those companies who revalue fixed assets to revalue all of the assets in the relevant classes and why these valuations must be kept up to date.

(b) Explain whether it is logical for FRS 15 to offer companies a choice between showing all assets in a class at either cost less depreciation or at valuation.

(c) Calculate the figures that would appear in L plc’s financial statements in respect of land and buildings if the company opts to show the factories at their valuation. You should indicate where these figures would appear, but do NOT prepare any detailed notes in a form suitable for disclosure.

(d) Explain how the revaluation of fixed assets is likely to affect key accounting ratios and explain whether these changes are likely to make the company appear stronger or weaker. Do NOT calculate any ratios in respect of L plc.

you are the management accountant of historic ltd historic ltd makes up its financia 564375

You are the management accountant of Historic Ltd. Historic Ltd makes up its financial statements to 30 September each year. The financial statements for the year ended 30 September 2000 are currently being prepared. The Directors have always included fixed assets under the historical cost convention. However, for the current year, they are considering revaluing some of the fixed assets. They obtained professional valuations as at 1 October 1999 for the two properties owned by the company. Details of the valuations were as follows:

Historical cost NBV

Current use value

Market value

£000

£000

£000

Property One

15 000

16 800

17 500

Property Two

14 000

12 000

12 500

No acquisitions or disposals of properties have taken place since 1 October 1999 and none are expected in the near future. The buildings element of the two properties comprises 50% of both historical cost and the revalued amounts. Each property is reckoned to have a useful economic life to the company of 40 years from 1 October 1999.

Given the results of the valuations, the Directors propose to include Property One at its market value in the financial statements for the year to 30 September 2000. They wish to leave Property Two at its historical cost. They have no plans to revalue the other fixed assets of the company, which are plant and fixtures.

Requirements

(a) State briefly the key arguments for and against including fixed assets at revalued amounts.

(b) Evaluate the Directors’ proposal to revalue Property One as at 1 October 1999 but to leave all other fixed assets at historical cost. Your answer should include reference to appropriate Accounting Standards.

(c) The Directors have decided to revalue the fixed assets of the company in accordance with their original wishes, amended where necessary to comply with appropriate Accounting Standards. Compute the net book value of each property as at 30 September 2000. You should clearly explain where any differences on revaluation will be shown in the financial statements.

k is a cima member who has recently established a limited company which specialises 564376

K is a CIMA member who has recently established a limited company which specialises in biotechnology applications. The company has just reached the end of its first year of trading. K is working through the accounting records prior to drafting the company’s first annual report. The fixed assets section of the balance sheet is causing him some difficulty. The company has invested heavily in sophisticated equipment and K is checking whether the associated costs have been accounted for in accordance with the requirements of FRS 15 – Tangible Fixed Assets.

K is reviewing the file relating to a sophisticated oven that is used to heat cell cultures to a precisely controlled temperature:

£

(i)

List price paid to supplier

50000

(ii)

Wages and materials costs associated with testing and

calibrating oven, up to start of operations

800

(iii)

Ongoing wages and materials costs associated with

calibrating oven since start of operations

2000

(iv)

Expected costs of disposing of oven at the end of its useful life

16000

The oven is used to heat cell cultures to a temperature range that must be closely controlled. The oven’s controls will have to be regularly checked and calibrated throughout its working life.

The oven will have to be dismantled and sterilised by an expert contractor at the end of its life and then disposed of at a special facility. K has already provided £16 000 against these costs, in accordance with the requirements of FRS 12 – Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.

The machine’s expected useful life is five years. K is planning to adopt the straight line basis of depreciation. The market value/value in use of the machine at the year end is £28 000. This decrease in value from new is partly because the oven has been used to culture dangerous organisms and so it is much less valuable. K is unsure whether to value equipment at cost less depreciation or at valuation. This decision will be based on an analysis of the resulting figures in terms of two of the ‘pervasive concepts’ (those of relevance and reliability) contained in FRS 18 – Accounting Policies.

Required

(a) Calculate the cost of the oven, applying the requirements of FRS 15. Explain your treatment of items (ii), (iii) and (iv).

(b) (i) Calculate the figures that will appear in respect of the oven in the profit and loss account for the company’s first year and the balance sheet at the year end under both the historical cost and valuation bases.

(ii) Discuss the relevance and reliability of both sets of figures you have calculated in answer to requirement (b) (i) above.

accounting practices for fixed assets and depreciation can be said to have developed 564377

(a) Accounting practices for fixed assets and depreciation can be said to have developed in a piecemeal manner. The introduction of FRS 11 ‘Impairment of Fixed Assets’ has meant that a standard on the measurement of fixed assets was required to provide further guidance in this area. FRS 15 ‘Tangible Fixed Assets’ deals with the measurement and valuation issue.

Required

Describe why it was important for a new accounting standard to be issued on the measurement of fixed assets.

(b) Aztech, a public limited company manufactures and operates a fleet of small aircraft. It draws up its financial statements to 31 March each year,

Aztech also owns a small chain of hotels (carrying value of £16 million), which are used in the sale of holidays to the public. It is the policy of the company not to provide depreciation on the hotels as they are maintained to a high standard and the economic lives of the hotels are long (20 years remaining life). The hotels are periodically revalued and on 31 March 2000, their existing use value was determined to be £20 million, the replacement cost of the hotels was £16 million and the open market value was £19 million. One of the hotels included above is surplus to the company’s requirements as at 31 March 2000. This hotel had an existing use value of £3 million, a replacement cost of £2 million and an open market value of £2.5 million, before expected estate agents and solicitors fees of £200 000. Aztech wishes to revalue the hotels as at 31 March 2000. There is no indication of any impairment in value of the hotels.

The company has recently finished manufacturing a fleet of five aircraft to a new design. These aircraft are intended for use in its own fleet for domestic carriage purposes. The company commenced construction of the assets on 1 April 1998 and wishes to recognise them as fixed assets as at 31 March 2000 when they were first utilised. The aircraft were completed on 1 January 2000 but their exterior painting was delayed until 31 March 2000.

The costs (excluding finance costs) of manufacturing the aircraft were £28 million and the company has adopted a policy of capitalising the finance costs of manufacturing the aircraft. Aztech had taken out a three year loan of £20 million to finance the aircraft on 1 April 1998. Interest is payable at 10% per annum but is to be rolled over and paid at the end of the three year period together with the capital outstanding. Corporation tax is 30%.

During the construction of the aircraft, certain computerised components used in the manufacture fell dramatically in price. The company estimated that at 31 March 2000 the net realisable value of the aircraft was £30 million and their value in use was £29 million.

The engines used in the aircraft have a three year life and the body parts have an eight year life; Aztech has decided to depreciate the engines and the body parts over their different useful lives on the straight line basis from 1 April 2000. The cost of replacing the engines on 31 March 2003 is estimated to be £15 million. The engine costs represent thirty per cent of the total cost of manufacture.

The company has decided to revalue the aircraft annually on the basis of their market value. On 31 March 2001, the aircraft have a value in use of £28 million, a market value of £27 million and a net realisable value of £26 million. On 31 March 2002, the aircraft have a value in use of £17 million, a market value of £18 million and a net realisable value of £18.5 million. There is no consumption of economic benefits in 2002 other than the depreciation charge. Revaluation surpluses or deficits are apportioned between the engines and the body parts on the basis of their year end carrying values before the revaluation.

Required:

(i) Describe how the hotels should be valued in the financial statements of Aztech on 31 March 2000 and explain whether the current depreciation policy relating to the hotels is acceptable under FRS 15 ‘Tangible Fixed Assets’.

(ii) Show the accounting treatment of the aircraft fleet in the financial statements on the basis of the above scenario for the financial years ending on:

(a) 31 March 2000.

(b) 31 March 2001, 2002.

(c) 31 March 2003 before revaluation.

Candidates should use FRS 15 ‘Tangible Fixed Assets’ in answering all parts of the above question.

illustrates the point that the related cost is normally a balancing figure derived f 564378

Illustrates the point that the related cost is normally a balancing figure derived from the relationship between reported turnover and attributable profit. The statement does not deal with the situation where related costs exceed actual costs. Suppose that we have the following for the first year of a contract:

£

Turnover

200 000

Related cost

160 000

Attributable profit

£40 000

Actual cost to date

£130 000

In practice it is likely that the turnover figure would be reduced to £170 000 to make the equation balance.

assume that the position on three contracts at a year end is as follows 564379

Assume that the position on three contracts at a year end is as follows:

(1)

(2)

(3)

£

£

£

Cumulative turnover

520

520

520

Cumulative actual cost

510

510

510

Cumulative related cost

450

450

450

Cumulative payments on account

440

555

630

The cumulative attributable profit for each of the contracts is £70, i.e. £520 – £450.

The relevant balance sheet items are shown below. Note that each contract will be considered on an individual basis, balances arising on one contract are not set off against balances on other contracts and hence the figures that will appear in the balance sheet are shown in the total column.

Contract

Total

(1)

(2)

(3)

£

£

£

£

Stock – long term contract balances

60 (a)

25 (b)

NIL

85

Debtors – amount recoverable on contracts

80 (a)

NIL

NIL

80

Creditors – payments on account

NIL

NIL

50 (c)

50

Notes

(a) Actual costs less related costs; £510 – £450 = £60.

Cumulative turnover less cumulative payments on account; £520 – £440 = £80.

(b) Long term contract balance as (a),

£60

less Excess of payments on account

over turnover, £555 – £520

£35

£25

(c) Long term contract balance, as (a)

£60

less Excess of payments on account

over turnover, £630 – £520

£110

(£50)

consider the following two contracts 564380

Consider the following two contracts:

(1)

(2)

£

£

Cumulative turnover

200

110

Cumulative actual costs

250

200

Cumulative related costs

250

110

Cumulative payments on account

180

160

Losses to date (£250 – £200)

50

Expected future losses

40

70

If we assume that this is the first year of each contract, the profit and loss account will include the following:

(1)

(2)

Total

£

£

£

Turnover

200

110

310

Related costs (cost of sales)

290

180

470

Gross loss

90

70

160

If the projects were in other than their first year, the amounts included would depend on what had been charged or credited in the previous years.

The various balance sheet figures are:

(1)

(2)

Total

£

£

£

Stock – long term contract balances

NIL

NIL

NIL

Debtors – amounts recoverable on

contracts

20(a)

NIL

20

Creditors – payments on account

NIL

30(b)

30

Provision/accrual for foreseeable losses

40

NIL

40

Notes

(a) Cumulative turnover less cumulative payments on account, £200 – £180 = £20.

(b) For contract 2, actual costs exceed related costs so we start with a long term contract balance of £90, i.e. £200 – £110.

Expected future losses of £70 are set off against that balance, reducing it to £20. But, there are excess payments on account, £50 since payments on account, £160, exceed turnover, £110. This credit balance, £50, is set off against the debit, £20, representing the long term contract balance.

The net credit of £30 will appear in the balance sheet as a provision or accrual as appropriate.

n ltd is an independent company which manufactures clothing for many years n ltd has 564381

N Ltd is an independent company which manufactures clothing. For many years, N Ltd has worked exclusively for Store plc, a national group of department stores, manufacturing gloves. Store plc supplies the patterns for the gloves and specifies the fabric and colours that N Ltd must use. Store plc actively discourages its suppliers from manufacturing for other retailers and expressly forbids them from using its patterns or fabric colours for anything sold to another customer.

N Ltd manufactures gloves steadily throughout the year, building up stocks in advance of the major order that Store plc places every year in order to meet demand in the autumn and winter months.

Store plc used to order 500 000 pairs of gloves from N Ltd every year. Store plc has suffered declining sales and has closed several of its stores. In April 2001, it warned N Ltd that it will reduce its annual purchases to 400 000 pairs of gloves. N Ltd took immediate steps to reduce its production capacity in response to this reduced order.

N Ltd has a year end of 30 September 2001. At that date, the company had 40 000 pairs of gloves in stock. It also had work in progress of 5000 pairs of gloves that were 100% complete in terms of fabric and were 50% complete in terms of labour and overhead. Raw materials stocks comprised £10 000 of fabric in Store plc’s colours. N Ltd actually completed a total of 430 000 pairs of gloves during the year ended 30 September 2001.

The fabric content of a pair of gloves costs N Ltd £1.00 per pair.

N Ltd has summarised expenses incurred during the year as follows:

Fixed overheads

Variable overheads

Labour

£

£

£

Manufacturing

20000

40000

400000

Administrative

15000

10000

50000

Distribution

8000

6000

12000

43000

56000

462000

Required

(a) SSAP 9 – Stocks and long term contracts requires that stocks be valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value.

Describe the problems associated with determining net realisable value for closing stocks. You should describe the particular problems associated with determining the net realisable value of N Ltd’s closing stocks.

(b) SSAP 9 defines the cost of stock as ‘the expenditure which has been incurred in the normal course of business in bringing the product to its present location and condition’.

(i) Calculate the cost of N Ltd’s closing stocks.

(ii) Identify the accounting issues associated with calculating the cost of closing stocks for N Ltd and explain how you have dealt with them.

(c) Explain why the valuation of closing stock is particularly important in the preparation of financial statements.

purchases and direct labour costs 564382

>

Freehold property – at valuation

3500

Freehold property – accumulated depreciation

100

Plant and machinery – at cost

1000

Plant and machinery – accumulated depreciation

400

Plant held for rental income

400

Fixtures and fittings – at cost

500

Fixtures and fittings – accumulated depreciation

300

Stock as at 1 September 2001

200

Debtors

650

Provision for doubtful debts

50

Cash at bank

130

Trade creditors

700

Bank loan

800

Deferred taxation

310

VAT payable

120

Ordinary share capital – shares of £1 each

2000

Share premium

500

Revaluation reserve

150

Profit and loss account as at 1 September 2001

300

Sales

3250

Purchases and direct labour costs

1600

Distribution costs

400

Administration costs

500

Interim dividend paid

100

Total

8980

8980

Additional information

(1) As a new venture, the company started work on a long term contract in October 2001 and the above trial balance includes transactions relating to this contract which was in progress as at 31 August 2002. The agreed total contract price is £600 000 and there was work certified of £250 000, included in Sales, as at 31 August 2002. Costs to 31 August 2002 amounted to £400 000, included in Purchases, with estimated costs to completion of £300 000. Progress payments received by 31 August 2002 amounted to £340 000; these have been debited to Cash at bank and credited to Debtors.

(2) Stock at 31 August 2002 was valued at £300 000 and comprised finished goods of £50 000 and goods awaiting completion of £250 000. These amounts exclude the long term contract.

(3) Depreciation has yet to be provided for as follows:

  • Freehold property – 2.5% p.a. on valuation. The land element is £1.5 million.
  • Plant and machinery – 10% p.a. on cost.
  • Plant held for rental is for short term hire and was acquired in the year ended 31 August 2002 – 20% p.a. on cost.
  • Fixtures and fittings – 20% p.a. on cost.

It is company policy to provide a full year’s depreciation charge in the year of acquisition.

(4) The bank loan was taken out on 1 September 2000 and is repayable in five equal annual instalments starting from 1 September 2001. Interest is charged at 7% p.a. on the balance owing on 1 September each year and has not yet been paid for the current year.

(5) The company is proposing a final dividend of 10p per share.

(6) Corporation tax of 30% of pre tax profit is to be provided for, including an increase in the deferred taxation provision of £100 000.

Requirements

(a) Prepare the profit and loss account for the year ended 31 August 2002 and a balance sheet as at that date for Wick plc in a form suitable for publication, providing the disclosure note for Stock.

NOTE: You are not required to prepare any other disclosure notes.

(b) Identify and explain two areas in accounting for long term contracts where judgement has to be exercised.

explain the principles which are used to establish the timing of recognition of prof 564383

G Ltd is a company specialising in the construction of sophisticated items of plant and machinery for clients in the engineering industry. Details of two contracts outstanding at 30 September 1995 (the balance sheet date) are as follows:

Contract with H Ltd

This contract was started on 1 January 1995 and is expected to be complete by 31 March 1996. The total contract price was fixed at £20 million and the total costs to be incurred originally estimated at £15 million, occurring evenly over the contract. The contract has been certified by experts as being 60% complete by 30 September 1995. Due to inefficiencies caused by industrial relations difficulties in the summer of 1995, the actual costs incurred on the contract in the period 1 January 1995 to 30 September 1995 were £10 million. However, the management is confident that these problems will not recur and that the remaining costs will be in line with the original estimate. In accordance with the payment terms laid down in the contract, G Ltd invoiced H Ltd for an interim payment of £10 million on 31 August 1995. The interim payment was received from H Ltd on 31 October 1995.

Contract with I Ltd

This contract was started on 1 April 1995 and was expected to be complete by 31 December 1995. The total contract price was fixed at £10 million and the total contract costs were originally estimated at £8 million. However, information received on 15 October 1995 suggested that the total contract costs would in fact be £11 million. The contract was certified by experts as being two thirds complete by the year end and the costs actually incurred by G Ltd in respect of this contract in the period to 30 September 1995 were £7.5 million. No progress payments are yet due under the payment terms specified in the contract with I Ltd.

Requirements

(a) Explain the principles which are used to establish the timing of recognition of profits/losses on long term contracts.

You should assume that recognition of profits/losses takes place in accordance with the provisions of SSAP 9 Stocks and long term contracts, and should refer to fundamental accounting concepts, where relevant.

(b) Compute, separately for each of the contracts with H Ltd and I Ltd:

(i) The amount of turnover and cost of sales that will be recognised in the profit and

loss account of G Ltd for the year ended 30 September 1995.

(ii) The contract balances (including nil balances, if appropriate) that will be shown at 30 September 1995 on the following accounts:

  • long term contract work in progress
  • amounts recoverable on contracts
  • provision for losses
  • trade debtors.

s plc is a shipbuilder which is currently working on two contracts 564385

S plc is a shipbuilder which is currently working on two contracts:

Deep sea

Small passenger

fishing boat

ferry

£000

£000

Contract price (fixed)

3000

5000

Date work commenced

1 October 2000

1 October 2001

Proportion of work completed during year ended

30%

Nil

30 September 2001

£000

£000

Invoiced to customer during year ended

900

Nil

30 September 2001

Cash received from customer during year ended

800

Nil

30 September 2001

Costs incurred during year ended 30 September 2001

650

Nil

Estimated cost to complete at 30 September 2001

1300

Proportion of work completed during year ended

25%

30%

30 September 2002

£000

£000

Invoiced to customer during year ended

750

2250

30 September 2002

Cash received from customer during year ended

700

2250

30 September 2002

Costs incurred during year ended 30 September 2002

580

1900

Estimated cost to complete at 30 September 2002

790

3400

S plc recognises turnover and profit on long term contracts in relation to the proportion of work completed.

Required

(a) Calculate the figures that will appear in S plc’s profit and loss account for the year ended 30 September 2002 and its balance sheet at that date in respect of each of these contracts.

The Accounting Standards Board’s Statement of Principles for Financial Reporting (SoP) effectively defines losses on individual transactions in such a way that they are associated with increases in liabilities or decreases in assets. Liabilities are defined as ‘obligations of an entity to transfer economic benefits as a result of past transactions or events’.

Required

(b) Explain how the definition of losses contained in the SoP could be used to justify the requirement of SSAP 9 – Stocks and Long term Contracts to recognise losses in full on long term contracts as soon as they can be foreseen.

explain why ssap 13 imposes a rigid set of rules which prevent the capitalisation of 564386

H plc is a major electronics company. It spends a substantial amount of money on research and development. The company has a policy of capitalising development expenditure, but writes off pure and applied research expenditure immediately in accordance with the requirements of SSAP 13 – Research and Development.

The company’s latest annual report included a page of voluntary disclosures about the effectiveness of the company’s research programme. This indicated that the company’s prosperity depended on the development of new products and that this could be a very long process. In order to maintain its technical lead, the company often funded academic research studies into theoretical areas, some of which led to breakthroughs which H plc as able to patent and develop into new product ideas. The company claimed that the money spent in this way was a good investment because for every twenty unsuccessful projects there was usually at least one valuable discovery which generated enough profit to cover the whole cost of the research activities. Unfortunately, it was impossible to tell in advance which projects would succeed in this way.

A shareholder expressed dismay at H plc’s policy of writing off research costs in this manner. He felt that this was unduly pessimistic given that the company earned a good return from its research activities. He felt that the company should invoke the Accounting Standards Board’s true and fair override and capitalise all research costs.

Required

(a) Explain why it might be justifiable for H plc to capitalise its research costs.

(b) Explain why SSAP 13 imposes a rigid set of rules which prevent the capitalisation of all research expenditure and make it difficult to capitalise development expenditure.

(c) Explain whether the requirements of SSAP 13 are likely to discourage companies such as H plc from investing in research activities.

(d) Describe the advantages and disadvantages of offering companies the option of a true and fair override in preparing financial statements.

explain with appropriate figures how each of the above projects should be treated in 564387

MWT plc is a company involved in the design and manufacture of aircraft. During the year ended 31 March 1995, the company had commenced the following projects.

A. Project Alpha involves research into the development of a lightweight material for use in the construction of aircraft. To date, costs of £175 000 have been incurred, but so far the material developed has proved too weak.

B. Project Beta involves the construction of three aircraft for a major airline at a total contract price of £75 million. Costs incurred to 31 March 1995 amounted to £21 million, and payments on account received, relating to £20 million of those costs, amounted to £24 million. It is estimated that the contract will cost another £40 million to complete.

C. Project Gamma involves the development of a new engine for an overseas customer for a total contract price of £7 million. The total cost of the project is estimated to be £5 million. Only £1.4 million had been incurred to 31 March 1995. Payments on account, relating to those costs, of £2.4 million have been received.

D. Project Delta involves the refurbishment of a fleet of ten aircraft for another major airline. The total contract price is £30 million. To 31 March 1995, costs of £24 million have been incurred, and, because of materials shortage, it is estimated that it will cost another £12 million to complete. Although £20 million had been invoiced to 31 March 1995, relating to cost incurred to that date, only £19 million had been received at that date.

E. Project Epsilon commenced in February 1995 involving the production of light aircraft for a flying school for a total contract price of £18.2 million. Costs incurred to 31 March 1995 amounted to £1 million of a total estimated contract cost of £17 million. Invoices raised to 31 March 1995 amounted to £3 million of which £2.6 million had been received by that date.

Requirement

(a) Explain, with appropriate figures, how each of the above projects should be treated in the financial statements of MWT plc.

(b) Show the relevant extracts from MWT plc’s profit and loss account and balance sheet for the year ended 31 March 1995.

calculate and disclose the appropriate amounts for the financial statements of forfa 564388

Forfar plc is an innovative engineering company with a substantial research and development budget. It is company policy to capitalise all expenditure relevant to development work wherever possible and the following projects were in progress at the year end, 30 November 1998:

Project A100

The company incurred costs of £200 000 in the year ended 30 November 1998 to exploit research into the production of engineering equipment with reduced energy requirements. The company has produced a prototype model but commercial production is not expected for several years.

No other feasibility studies have been carried out. The company also incurred expenditure of £100 000 on computer equipment to assist in testing and analysis and this is expected to have a useful economic life of five years.

Project A401

The company incurred technical research costs of £50 000 in November 1998 on behalf of a customer who commissioned Forfar plc to investigate the feasibility of high energy batterycells. Forfar plc expects to recover the costs incurred plus a mark up of 20% from their customer for this work. Market research costs of £20 000 have also been incurred by Forfar plc in November 1998 but these will be reimbursed at cost by the customer and an invoice was raised for this in December 1998. None of the technical research work has yet been invoiced though the project is successful and the work will be completed by January 1999.

Project C900

The company had capitalised development expenditure of £500 000 by 30 November 1997 on this project and incurred a further £70 000 during the year ended 30 November 1998. Commercial production of the new product started on 1 June 1998 and the company anticipates sales as follows:

Year ended

£

30 November 1998

250000 actual

30 November 1999

300000 budget

30 November 2000

500000 budget

each year thereafter

600000 budget

The company expects competitors will move into this market by 30 November 2002 and the product will no longer be profitable after that date. In addition to the above costs, the company spent £150 000 on plant in December 1995 to assist with this project and has been depreciating this over five years to date. The plant has no further use once the product is developed.

Project G150

The company’s technical director considers that there is the possibility of producing new generation computer controlled engineering equipment. £400 000 was spent in the year ended 30 November 1998 to investigate the likelihood of a viable research project. In addition, technical staff costs on this project amounted to £55 000 in the year.

Project B105

This project was started in December 1994 to develop a new generation solar power panel. Costs capitalised to 30 November 1997 amounted to £550 000. Market research carried out in July 1998 at a cost of £25 000 indicated demand would reach 5000 panels per annum; the company’s finance director has calculated 7500 panels per annum would need to be sold in order to break even.

Requirements

(a) Briefly identify and explain the appropriate accounting treatment required for the year ended 30 November 1998 for each of the above projects.

(b) Calculate and disclose the appropriate amounts for the financial statements of Forfar plc for the year ended 30 November 1998.

Note: You are not required to produce any information for the directors’ report, accounting policies or cash flow statement.

after 31 october 1996 the company rsquo s market share and profitability from the pr 564389

Amesbury plc produces and distributes computer controlled machinery. As accountant for the company, you have been provided with the following information regarding the company’s activities in researching and developing products in the year ended 31 October 1993:

(1) Expenditure on developing a new computerised tool for a long established customer has amounted to £150 000. The work is now well advanced and the customer is likely to authorise the start of commercial production within the next 12 months. The customer is reimbursing Amesbury plc’s costs plus a 10% mark up. To date the company has received £70 000 having invoiced £100 000 for agreed work done.

(2) A review of the company’s quality control procedures has been carried out at a cost of £100 000. It is considered that the new procedures will save a considerable amount of money in the testing and analysis of existing and new products.

(3) The development of Product M479 has reached an advanced stage. Costs in the year ended 31 October 1993 amounted to £400 000. In addition there has been expenditure on fixed assets required for the development of this product amounting to £120 000 of hich £60 000 was incurred in the year ended 31 October 1992. The fixed assets have a five year life with no residual value and are depreciated on the straight line basis with a full year’s depreciation in the year of acquisition.

Market research, costing £20 000, has been carried out and this indicates the product will be commercially viable although commercial production is unlikely to start until April 1994. The company expects that Product M479 will make a significant contribution to profit.

(4) Commercial production started on 1 June 1993 for Product A174. The costs of developing this product had been capitalised as follows:

£

Development expenditure capitalised as on 31 October 1992

200 000

Expenditure incurred in the year ended 31 October 1993

50 000

250 000

The company has taken out a patent which will last for ten years. The associated legal and administrative expenses amounted to £10 000.

Actual and estimated sales for Product A174:

Year ended 31 October

£

1993

250000

1994

750000

1995

1000000

1996

500000

1997

250000

After 31 October 1996 the company’s market share and profitability from the product are expected to diminish significantly due to the introduction of rival products by competitors.

(5) It is company policy to capitalise development expenditure wherever possible. Requirement

Prepare all relevant extracts of the published financial statements for the year ended 31 October 1993 in accordance with current accounting standards and legislation, explaining your treatment of items (1) to (4).

Note: You are not required to prepare extracts of the cash flow statement or the directors’ report.

a foreign government has granted pound 4m to cover the establishment of a new factor 564390

Global plc, which prepares accounts to 31 January each year, operates in several different countries and has recently obtained government financial assistance both in the UK and abroad:

(1) A foreign government has granted £4m to cover the establishment of a new factory. The factory and associated plant installation were completed in November 1992 at a cost of £10m for the land and buildings (land element – £2m) and £5m for the plant. Asset lives were estimated at 50 years for the premises and 10 years for the plant; a full year’s depreciation is charged in the year of acquisition.

The grant was dependent on an inspection by government officials and the company retaining ownership of the factory for the next five years. The grant was released by the foreign government on 27 March 1993 following their inspection in January 1993.

The country in which the factory is situated has had a turbulent history with frequent changes of government but has enjoyed a period of relative stability over the past three years. No previous governments have granted assistance to foreign companies.

(2) A local authority in the UK has provided a grant of £130 000 which covers the total initial establishment costs of a new training programme for company staff. The grant is dependent on the company expanding its existing training unit and increasing the number of trainees in direct production areas within the local factory by 20 per cent. The increased number of trainees would have to be sustained for at least three years.

The grant was received in January 1993. Expected costs of the complete programme are £300 000 of which £100 000, relating to initial establishment costs, has been incurred to date.

Actual and projected trainee numbers provided by the production director are:

Years ending 31 January

1993

1994

1995

1996

Welding shop

9

10

9

10

Lathe area

7

9

11

11

Computer controlled machinery

11

14

13

14

Trainee general managers

3

2

2

2

30

35

35

37

Requirement

Calculate the amounts which should be included in the financial statements for the year ended 31 January 1993, preparing all relevant notes in accordance with SSAP 4, Government grants.

provisions are particular kinds of liabilities it therefore follows that provisions 564391

Provisions are particular kinds of liabilities. It therefore follows that provisions should be recognised when the definition of a liability has been met. The key requirement of a liability is a present obligation and thus this requirement is critical also in the context of the recognition of a provision. However, although accounting for provisions is an important topic for standard setters, it is only recently that guidance has been issued on provisioning in financial statements. In the UK, the Accounting Standards Board has recently issued FRS 12 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.

Required:

(a) (i) Explain why there was a need for more detailed guidance on accounting for provisions in the UK.

(ii) Explain the circumstances under which a provision should be recognised in the financial statements according to FRS 12: Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets.

(b) Discuss whether the following provisions have been accounted for correctly under FRS 12: ‘Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets’.

World Wide Nuclear Fuels plc disclosed the following information in its financial statements for the year ending 30 November 1999:

Provisions and long term commitments

(i) Provision for decommissioning the Group’s radioactive facilities is made over their useful life and covers complete demolition of the facility within fifty years of it being taken out of service together with any associated waste disposal. The provision is based on future prices and is discounted using a current market rate of interest.

Provision for decommissioning costs

£m

Balance at 1.12.98

675

Adjustment arising from change in price levels charged to reserves

33

Charged in the year to proft and loss account

125

Adjustment due to change in knowledge (charged to reserves)

27

Balance at 30.11.99

860

There are still decommissioning costs of £1231m (undiscounted) to be provided for in respect of the group’s radioactive facilities as the company’s policy is to build up the required provision over the life of the facility

Assume that adjustments to the provision due to change in knowledge about the accuracy of the provision do not give rise to future economic benefits.

(ii) The company purchased an oil company during the year. As part of the sale agreement, oil has to be supplied for a five year period to the company’s former holding company at an uneconomic rate. As a result a provision for future operating losses has been set up of £135m which relates solely to the uneconomic supply of oil. Additionally the oil company is exposed to environmental liabilities arising out of its past obligations, principally in respect of remedial work to soil and ground water systems, although currently there is no legal obligation to carry out the work. Liabilities for environmental costs are provided for when the Group determines a formal plan of action on the closure of an inactive site and when expenditure on remedial work is probable and the cost can be measured with reasonable certainty. However in this case, it has been decided to provide for £120m in respect of the environmental liability on the acquisition of the oil company. World Wide Nuclear Fuels has a reputation for ensuring that the environment is preserved and protected from the effects of its business activities.

frs 12 ndash provisions contingent liabilities and contingent assets was issued in s 564392

FRS 12 – Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets was issued in September 1998. Prior to its publication, there was no UK Accounting Standard that dealt with the general subject of accounting for provisions.

Extract plc prepares its financial statements to 31 December each year. During the years ended 31 December 2000 and 31 December 2001, the following event occurred:

Extract plc is involved in extracting minerals in a number of different countries. The process typically involves some contamination of the site from which the minerals are extracted. Extract plc makes good this contamination only where legally required to do so by legislation passed in the relevant country.

The company has been extracting minerals in Copperland since January 1998 and expects its site to produce output until 31 December 2005. On 23 December 2000, it came to the attention of the directors of Extract plc that the government of Copperland was virtually certain to pass legislation requiring the making good of mineral extraction sites. The legislation was duly passed on 15 March 2001. The directors of Extract plc estimate that the cost of making good the site in Copperland will be £2 million. This estimate is of the actual cash expenditure that will be incurred on 31 December 2005.

Required

(a) Explain why there was a need for an Accounting Standard dealing with provisions, and summarise the criteria that need to be satisfied before a provision is recognised.

(b) Compute the effect of the estimated cost of making good the site on the financial statements of Extract plc for BOTH of the years ended 31 December 2000 and 2001. Give full explanations of the figures you compute.

The annual discount rate to be used in any relevant calculations is 10%.

frs 12 ndash provisions contingent liabilities and contingent assets requires contin 564393

FRS 12 – Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets requires contingencies to be classified as remote, possible, probable and virtually certain. Each of these categories should then be treated differently, depending on whether it is an asset or a liability.

Required

(a) Explain why FRS 12 classifies contingencies in this manner.

The Chief Accountant of Z plc, a construction company, is finalising the work on the financial statements for the year ended 31 October 2002. She has prepared a list of all of the matters that might require some adjustment or disclosure under the requirements of FRS 12.

(i) A customer has lodged a claim against Z plc for repairs to an office block built by the company. The roof leaks and it appears that this is due to negligence in construction. Z plc is negotiating with the customer and will probably have to pay for repairs that will cost approximately £100 000.

(ii) The roof in (i) above was installed by a subcontractor employed by Z plc. Z plc’s lawyers are confident that the company would have a strong claim to recover the whole of any costs from the subcontractor. The Chief Accountant has obtained the subcontractor’s latest financial statements. The subcontractor appears to be almost insolvent with few assets.

(iii) Whenever Z plc finishes a project, it gives customers a period of three months to notify any construction defects. These are repaired immediately. The balance sheet at 31 October 2001 carried a provision of £80 000 for future repairs. The estimated cost of repairs to completed contracts as at 31 October 2002 is £120 000.

(iv) During the year ended 31 October 2002, Z plc lodged a claim against a large firm of electrical engineers which had delayed the completion of a contract. The engineering company’s Directors have agreed in principle to pay Z plc £30 000 compensation. Z plc’s Chief Accountant is confident that this amount will be received before the end of December 2002.

(v) An architect has lodged a claim against Z plc for the loss of a laptop computer during a site visit. He alleges that the company did not take sufficient care to secure the site office and that this led to the computer being stolen while he inspected the project. He is claiming for consequential losses of £90 000 for the value of the vital files that were on the computer. Z plc’s lawyers have indicated that the company might have to pay a trivial sum in compensation for the computer hardware. There is almost no likelihood that the courts would award damages for the lost files because the architect should have copied them.

Required

(b) Explain how each of the contingencies (i) to (v) above should be accounted for. Assume that all amounts stated are material.

explain how frs 12 prevents companies from treating as contingent liabilities those 564394

L plc sells gaming cards to retailers, who then resell them to the general public. Customers who buy these cards scratch off a panel to reveal whether they have won a cash prize. There are several different ranges of cards, each of which offers a different range of prizes.

Prize winners send their winning cards to L plc and are paid by cheque. If the prize is major, then the prize winner is required to telephone L plc to register the claim and then send the winning card to a special address for separate handling.

All cards are printed and packaged under conditions of high security. Special printing techniques make it easy for L plc to identify forged claims and it is unusual for customers to make false claims. Large claims are, however, checked using a special chemical process that takes several days to take effect.

The directors are currently finalising their financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2002. They are unsure about how to deal with the following items:

(i) A packaging error on a batch of ‘Chance’ cards meant that there were too many major prize cards in several boxes. L plc recalled the batch from retailers, but was too late to prevent many of the defective cards being sold. The company is being flooded with claims. L plc’s lawyers have advised that the claims are valid and must be paid. It has roved impossible to determine the likely level of claims that will be made in respect of this error because it will take several weeks to establish the success of the recall and the number of defective cards.

(ii) A prize winner has registered a claim for a £200 000 prize from a ‘Lotto’ card. The financial statements will be finalised before the card can be processed and checked.

(iii) A claim has been received for £100 000 from a ‘Winner’ card. The maximum prize offered for this game is £90 000 and so the most likely explanation is that the card has been forged. The police are investigating the claim, but this will not be resolved before the financial statements are finalised. Once the police investigation has concluded, L plc will make a final check to ensure that the card is not the result of a printing error.

(iv) The company received claims totalling £300 000 during the year from a batch of bogus ‘Happy’ cards that had been forged by a retailer in Newtown. The police have prosecuted the retailer and he has recently been sent to prison. The directors of L plc have decided to pay customers who bought these cards 50% of the amount claimed as a goodwill gesture. They have not, however, informed the lucky prize winners of this yet.

Required

(a) Identify the appropriate accounting treatment of each of the claims against L plc in respect of (i) to (iv) above. Your answer should have due regard to the requirements of FRS 12, Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets.

(b) It has been suggested that readers of financial statements do not always pay sufficient attention to contingent liabilities even though they may have serious implications for the future of the company.

(i) Explain why insufficient attention might be paid to contingent liabilities.

(ii) Explain how FRS 12 prevents companies from treating as contingent liabilities those liabilities that should be recognised in the balance sheet.

the following data relate to chennai branch for the year 2009 564337

The following data relate to Chennai branch for the year 2009:

Jan 1, 2009 Rs

Dec 31, 2009 Rs

Stock

1,50,000

2,25,000

Debtors

2,10,000

2,85,000

Petty Cash

750

360

Goods costing Rs 16,50,000 were sold by the branch @ 25% on cost, cash sales amounted to Rs 4,50,000; and the rest credit sales. Branch spent Rs 90,000 for salaries Rs 36,000 for rent and Rs 24,000 for petty expenses. All expenses were remitted by H.O. Branch received all goods from H.O. You are required to show Chennai Branch Account in the books of H.O. for the year 2009 and prove your answer by preparing a Branch Trading and Branch Profit and Loss Account.